0iD Conn Function 02vol2

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)

B-64303EN-1/02

FANUC Series 0+-MODEL DFANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

(Volume 2 of 2)

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the government of Japan. Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice. The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to a failure of the product, install a safety device. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as ”impossible”.

B-64303EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Volume 1 of 2 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1 PREFACE....................................................................................................p-1 1 AXIS CONTROL......................................................................................1

1.1 CONTROLLED AXIS ..................................................................................... 1 1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS ................................................................................... 2

1.2.1 Name of Axes...........................................................................................................2 1.2.2 Increment System .....................................................................................................4 1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis ...................................................................................7 1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach .........................................................................................10 1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis ............................................................13 1.2.6 Mirror Image ..........................................................................................................14 1.2.7 Follow-up ...............................................................................................................16 1.2.8 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed ........................................................................17 1.2.9 Position Switch.......................................................................................................19

1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION.......................................................................... 22 1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation...........................................................................22 1.3.2 Backlash Compensation .........................................................................................28 1.3.3 Smooth Backlash....................................................................................................30 1.3.4 Simple Straightness Compensation (M Series) ......................................................33 1.3.5 Gradient Compensation ..........................................................................................37 1.3.6 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation ...............................................................40 1.3.7 Differences between Pitch Error Compensation, Simple Straightness

Compensation, and Gradient Compensation (Reference) ......................................47 1.4 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED AXES.......................... 48

1.4.1 Parameters Related to Servo...................................................................................48 1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection ...................................................................................54 1.4.3 FSSB Setting ..........................................................................................................60

1.4.3.1 Series 0i-D-dedicated setting ............................................................................. 60 1.4.3.2 Series 0i-C-compatible setting........................................................................... 76

1.4.4 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting................................................................89 1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS ............................ 92

1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System...................................................................................92 1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair ..94

1.5.2.1 Workpiece coordinate system............................................................................ 94 1.5.2.2 Workpiece coordinate system preset ................................................................. 97 1.5.2.3 Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54) (M series) ................... 98 1.5.2.4 Automatic coordinate system setting ................................................................. 99 1.5.2.5 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series).................................................. 100 1.5.2.6 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals.................................... 104

1.5.3 Local Coordinate System .....................................................................................109 1.5.4 Rotary Axis Roll Over..........................................................................................111

1.6 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 113 1.6.1 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control..............................................113 1.6.2 Synchronization Establishment ............................................................................116 1.6.3 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching ....................................................118 1.6.4 Synchronization Error Check ...............................................................................118

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64303EN-1/02

c-2

1.6.5 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronization Error Check ...........................119 1.6.6 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..........................................120 1.6.7 Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .............................................................121

1.7 TANDEM CONTROL ................................................................................. 136 1.8 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ................................................ 144 1.9 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ................................................... 156

1.9.1 Electronic Gear Box (M Series) ...........................................................................156

2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION .................................................177 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 177 2.2 CNC READY SIGNALS ............................................................................. 179 2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK ............................................................................. 180

2.3.1 Overtravel Signals ................................................................................................180 2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1..........................................................................................182 2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3......................................................................................187 2.3.4 Checking the Stored Stroke Limit during the Time from Power–on to

the Reference Position Establishment ..................................................................194 2.3.5 Stroke Limit External Setting (M Series) .............................................................196 2.3.6 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ..............................................................197 2.3.7 Stroke Limit Check Before Move ........................................................................206

2.4 ALARM SIGNALS...................................................................................... 209 2.5 START LOCK / INTERLOCK..................................................................... 210 2.6 MODE SELECTION................................................................................... 216 2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL....................................................................... 222 2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL ...................................................... 223 2.9 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION ...... 225 2.10 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION ................................ 235 2.11 MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M Series) ....................... 241 2.12 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS ................................................. 243 2.13 OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS......................................... 246

3 MANUAL OPERATION.......................................................................256 3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED............................................................ 256 3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 262 3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT............................................................... 271 3.4 I/O Link β MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE............................................... 276 3.5 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE .................................................................. 279

4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT .....................................299 4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 299 4.2 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG ............................... 320 4.3 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND RETURN FROM

THE REFERENCE POSITION .................................................................. 327 4.4 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE

POSITION RETURN.................................................................................. 332 4.5 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER ..... 334 4.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE................................... 339 4.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS

(SERIAL) ................................................................................................... 351


c-3

4.8 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE .............................................................................................. 361 4.8.1 Reference Position Established by the G00 Command ........................................361 4.8.2 Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed....................................................365

4.9 CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE WITHOUT ROTARY DATA. 368 4.9.1 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable Range .................................368 4.9.2 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is under

One Rotation ........................................................................................................369 4.9.3 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is over

One Rotation ........................................................................................................375 4.9.4 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...................................................................377 4.9.5 Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223, 723 and 220.....................378

5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION.................................................................381 5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD..................................................................... 381 5.2 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................... 384 5.3 TESTING A PROGRAM ............................................................................ 388

5.3.1 Machine Lock.......................................................................................................388 5.3.2 Dry Run ................................................................................................................389 5.3.3 Single Block .........................................................................................................391

5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ................................................................. 393 5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ......... 395 5.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP ................................. 397 5.7 PROGRAM RESTART .............................................................................. 397 5.8 RETRACE (M SERIES) ............................................................................. 403 5.9 EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING MODE / CUTTING

MODE........................................................................................................ 413 5.10 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ....................................................... 414 5.11 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 419 5.12 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN................................................ 422 5.13 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ............................ 425

6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION............................................................426 6.1 POSITIONING ........................................................................................... 426 6.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) .................................... 427 6.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION........................................................................ 430 6.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 432 6.5 THREADING.............................................................................................. 435

6.5.1 Threading .............................................................................................................435 6.5.2 Threading Cycle Retract (Canned Cycle) (T Series)............................................440 6.5.3 Threading Cycle Retract (Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle) (T Series)............443 6.5.4 Variable Lead Threading (T Series) .....................................................................447 6.5.5 Continuous Threading (T Series) .........................................................................447

6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION...................................................................... 448 6.7 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES) ............................ 449 6.8 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ............................................................. 452

6.8.1 Cylindrical Interpolation ......................................................................................452 6.9 POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES) ............................................................ 454

6.9.1 Polygon Turning...................................................................................................455 6.9.2 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles....................................................................462


c-4

6.10 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES)........................................ 480 6.11 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53) ............................................ 483 6.12 NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES)............................................................. 484 6.13 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT ............................................................. 491

7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL...........................................................................................496 7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL ............................................................................. 496

7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate .............................................................................................497 7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp........................................................................................499 7.1.3 Feed Per Minute ...................................................................................................499 7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution ..............................................501 7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) .......................................................................502 7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ..............................................................................505 7.1.7 Override................................................................................................................505

7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override.................................................................................... 505 7.1.7.2 Feedrate override ............................................................................................. 509 7.1.7.3 Override cancel................................................................................................ 511

7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override (M Series) ................................................................511 7.1.8.1 Inner corner automatic override (G62) ............................................................ 512 7.1.8.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change ......................................................... 514

7.1.9 External Deceleration ...........................................................................................516 7.1.10 Acceleration-Based Speed Control in Circular Interpolation...............................521 7.1.11 High Precision and High Speed Functions (Advanced Preview Control

(T Series) / AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control II (M Series)) ...................................................522

7.1.12 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increment C......................................552 7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL........................................ 555

7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..................................................................555 7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration................................................................ 555 7.2.1.2 Rapid traverse block overlap ........................................................................... 559

7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration.......................................560 7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation .....................562 7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation

(M Series) .............................................................................................................565 7.2.5 Corner Control......................................................................................................567

7.2.5.1 In-position check signal................................................................................... 567 7.2.5.2 In-position check ............................................................................................. 568 7.2.5.3 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse................................... 570

7.2.6 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ..........................................................................572 7.3 JERK CONTROL (M Series) ..................................................................... 572

7.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis..................................572 7.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before

Interpolation .........................................................................................................576

8 2-PATH CONTROL .............................................................................578 8.1 2-PATH CONTROL ................................................................................... 578

8.1.1 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output .......................................................583 8.1.2 2-path Functions ...................................................................................................583 8.1.3 Cautions on 2-path Control ..................................................................................585

8.2 WAITING M CODES.................................................................................. 591 8.3 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK............................................................... 593 8.4 BALANCE CUTTING ................................................................................. 602


c-5

8.5 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL................... 605 8.5.1 Synchronous Control............................................................................................607 8.5.2 Composite Control ...............................................................................................613 8.5.3 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ..............................................................................646

8.6 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ................................................................... 650 8.7 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY

PROGRAM COMMAND ............................................................................ 663 8.8 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL ...................................................................... 665 8.9 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS.............................................................. 675 8.10 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION............................................. 678 8.11 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES................... 679

9 AUXILIARY FUNCTION......................................................................682 9.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ............................. 682 9.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK.................................................................. 694 9.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.................................... 695 9.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ......................................................... 697

10 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION.............................................................700 10.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) .................................. 700 10.2 DESIGNATION OF SPINDLE AXES ......................................................... 701 10.3 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT...................................................................... 705 10.4 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT.................................................................... 715 10.5 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................... 719 10.6 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.................................................................... 722 10.7 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC .......................................... 749 10.8 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ............................................. 755 10.9 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES).................................... 763 10.10 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ....................................................... 764 10.11 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL......................................................................... 797

10.11.1 Cs Contour Control ..............................................................................................797 10.11.2 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip................................................................815 10.11.3 Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment............................................818

10.12 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL..................................................................... 826 10.13 RIGID TAPPING........................................................................................ 843

10.13.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder........................844 10.13.2 Rigid Tapping Specification.................................................................................848 10.13.3 Commands for Feed Per Minute and Feed Per Revolution ..................................849 10.13.4 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ......................................................849 10.13.5 Override................................................................................................................851 10.13.6 Reference Position Return....................................................................................853 10.13.7 FS10/11 Format Command ..................................................................................854 10.13.8 Multi Spindle Control...........................................................................................856 10.13.9 Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path (T Series (2-ptah Control)) ...........856 10.13.10 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping ......................................860 10.13.11 Notes.....................................................................................................................866 10.13.12 Diagnosis Display.................................................................................................867 10.13.13 Command Format.................................................................................................870 10.13.14 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching ...............................................874 10.13.15 Signal....................................................................................................................875

10.13.15.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function ........................................................... 875


c-6

10.13.15.2 Signals related to S code output.................................................................... 875 10.13.15.3 Signals related to gear switching .................................................................. 876 10.13.15.4 Signals related to the addition of multi spindle control ................................ 877 10.13.15.5 Notes on interface with the PMC.................................................................. 880

10.13.16 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification ...................................................882 10.13.16.1 When M29 is specified before G84/G74 ...................................................... 883 10.13.16.2 M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block ...................................... 887 10.13.16.3 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters................................... 891 10.13.16.4 When M29 is specified before G84/G88 ...................................................... 895 10.13.16.5 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block ...................................... 897 10.13.16.6 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters................................... 899 10.13.16.7 Timing of the M code for unclamping (T series).......................................... 901 10.13.16.8 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode ............................................................ 901

10.13.17 Parameter..............................................................................................................902 10.13.18 Notes.....................................................................................................................923

10.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.................................................... 927 10.15 SPINDLE ORIENTATION.......................................................................... 945 10.16 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING .............................................................. 948 10.17 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (M SERIES) ................. 949 10.18 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) ................... 960 10.19 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR........................................... 970

10.19.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor .......................................................................972 10.19.2 Spindle Indexing Function ...................................................................................996 10.19.3 Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor .......................................................................1002 10.19.4 Feed per Revolution ...........................................................................................1007 10.19.5 Spindle Output Control with PMC.....................................................................1008

Volume 2 of 2 11 TOOL FUNCTIONS...........................................................................1009

11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES.......................................................... 1009 11.1.1 Tool Offset .........................................................................................................1010 11.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.....................................................1010 11.1.3 Offset ..................................................................................................................1011 11.1.4 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function)..................1017

11.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES......................................................... 1021 11.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory..............................................................................1022

11.3 TOOL COMPENSATION......................................................................... 1027 11.3.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation

(T Series) ............................................................................................................1027 11.3.2 Tool Length Compensation ................................................................................1035 11.3.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types.............................................................1038

11.4 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.................................................................... 1042

12 PROGRAM COMMAND....................................................................1059 12.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE

DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING........................................................ 1059 12.2 G CODE SYSTEM................................................................................... 1061

12.2.1 G Code List in the Lathe System........................................................................1061 12.2.2 G Code List in the Machining Center System....................................................1063

12.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 1067


c-7

12.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS............................................................................................ 1069

12.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ................................................................ 1070 12.6 CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1075

12.6.1 Custom Macro ....................................................................................................1075 12.6.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro.......................................................................1093

12.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1096 12.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED

CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1111 12.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES) ............ 1120 12.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)................... 1121 12.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES) .......................... 1126 12.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)................................................... 1128 12.13 SCALING (M SERIES) ............................................................................ 1138 12.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION...................................................... 1145 12.15 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER............................................. 1146 12.16 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING

(M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1147 12.17 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)........................ 1148 12.18 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 1150 12.19 PATTERN DATA INPUT.......................................................................... 1152

13 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT ..........................................................................1166 13.1 DISPLAY/SET.......................................................................................... 1166

13.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ....................................................................1166 13.1.2 Software Operator's Panel ..................................................................................1170 13.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function ......................................................................1178 13.1.4 Touch Panel Control...........................................................................................1183 13.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface ..........................................................................1188 13.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function .........................................................................1191 13.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal .................................................................................1201 13.1.8 CNC Screen Dual Display..................................................................................1203 13.1.9 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor............................1205 13.1.10 Screen Switching by Mode.................................................................................1208 13.1.11 Screen Switching at Path Switching...................................................................1211 13.1.12 Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure function.........................1212 13.1.13 Screen Hard Copy Function ...............................................................................1214

13.2 EDIT ........................................................................................................ 1217 13.2.1 Memory Protection Keys....................................................................................1217 13.2.2 Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter.................................................1218 13.2.3 MDI Key Setting ................................................................................................1219 13.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...........................................................1220

13.3 TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ............................................................ 1222 13.3.1 Two Path Display ...............................................................................................1222 13.3.2 Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing ..........................................................1224

13.4 MACHINE OPERATION MENU............................................................... 1228 13.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................1228 13.4.2 Explanation.........................................................................................................1228 13.4.3 Parameter............................................................................................................1233 13.4.4 Signal..................................................................................................................1234 13.4.5 Limitation ...........................................................................................................1234


c-8

13.5 MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL.................................................... 1235 13.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................1235 13.5.2 Explanation.........................................................................................................1235

14 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA ...............................................................1243 14.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE.......................................................... 1243 14.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL ....................................................... 1254

15 MEASUREMENT...............................................................................1259 15.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) ...................................... 1259 15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) /

AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 1260 15.3 SKIP FUNCTION..................................................................................... 1267

15.3.1 Skip Function .....................................................................................................1267 15.3.2 High-speed Skip Signal ......................................................................................1274 15.3.3 Multi-step Skip ...................................................................................................1279 15.3.4 Torque Limit Skip Function ...............................................................................1286

15.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ........................................................... 1292 15.4.1 Input of tool offset value measured (T Series) ...................................................1292 15.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series) ............................................1293 15.4.3 Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input...............................1306

16 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION.............................................................1309 16.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 1309

16.1.1 PMC Axis Control..............................................................................................1309 16.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 1377 16.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT...................... 1390 16.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH....................................... 1393 16.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT.......................................................................... 1395 16.6 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL................................................................... 1400

17 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ..............................................1407 17.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD....... 1407 17.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................... 1408

17.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.........................................................1408 17.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....................................... 1408 17.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function....................................... 1411

17.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..........................................................1411 17.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......................................... 1412 17.2.2.2 Related NC parameters .................................................................................. 1414 17.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function.......................................... 1416

17.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function .................................................................1416 17.2.3.1 Setting up DNS.............................................................................................. 1416 17.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP ........................................................................................... 1417 17.2.3.3 Related NC parameters .................................................................................. 1420

17.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES ....... 1421 17.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ........................................ 1421 17.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . 1422 17.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............. 1426

18 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ...................................................................1429 18.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................................................. 1429


c-9

18.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE.......................................................... 1431 18.3 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS........................................................................... 1433

18.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................1433 18.3.2 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen.....................................................................1435 18.3.3 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ......................................................................1437 18.3.4 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen ...................................................................1441 18.3.5 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen .......................................................................1443 18.3.6 Trouble forecast level setting screen (only for servo axis).................................1444 18.3.7 Parameter............................................................................................................1446 18.3.8 Signal..................................................................................................................1447 18.3.9 Restrictions.........................................................................................................1447

18.4 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS.............................................................. 1448 18.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................1448 18.4.2 Kind of additional alarm and operator message .................................................1448 18.4.3 Available diagnosis number ...............................................................................1448 18.4.4 Environment for making trouble diagnosis message..........................................1449 18.4.5 Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis......................................................1450

18.4.5.1 Install ............................................................................................................. 1450 18.4.5.2 Uninstall......................................................................................................... 1450 18.4.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages ........................................ 1451 18.4.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages .............................. 1452

18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages ...................................................................1453 18.4.6.1 Inputting guidance data.................................................................................. 1454 18.4.6.2 Checking input data ....................................................................................... 1456 18.4.6.3 Making a memory card format file ................................................................ 1457 18.4.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table............................ 1458

18.4.7 Making messages for multi-languages ...............................................................1459 18.4.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages................................................................ 1459 18.4.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages.............................................. 1461

18.4.8 Notice .................................................................................................................1461 18.4.9 Translating data used with the former series(Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C,

Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ........................................................................................1461

APPENDIX

A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC.........................................1465 A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES ............................................................................ 1465 A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS................................................................................... 1502

A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ..............................................................1502 A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ................................................................1523 A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)..............................................................1541

B DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C ..................................................1560 B.1 SETTING UNIT........................................................................................ 1561

B.1.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1561 B.1.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1561 B.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1561

B.2 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION .......................................... 1562 B.2.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1562 B.2.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1562 B.2.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1562

B.3 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .................................................. 1563 B.3.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1563 B.3.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1563


c-10

B.3.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1563 B.4 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ............................................................ 1564


B.5 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL......................................................... 1565 B.5.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1565 B.5.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1570 B.5.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1570

B.6 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL .............................................. 1571 B.6.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1571 B.6.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1571 B.6.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1571

B.7 STORED STROKE CHECK..................................................................... 1572 B.7.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1572 B.7.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1573 B.7.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1573

B.8 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES).......................................... 1574 B.8.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1574 B.8.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1574 B.8.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1574

B.9 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION .............................. 1574 B.9.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1574 B.9.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1575 B.9.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1575

B.10 MANUAL HANDLE FEED........................................................................ 1576 B.10.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1576 B.10.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1577 B.10.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1577

B.11 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN......................................... 1577 B.11.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1577 B.11.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1579 B.11.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1579

B.12 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................. 1580 B.12.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1580 B.12.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1580 B.12.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1580

B.13 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) .................................. 1581 B.13.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1581 B.13.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1581 B.13.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1581

B.14 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF....................................................... 1581 B.14.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1581 B.14.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1582 B.14.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1582

B.15 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................. 1583 B.15.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1583 B.15.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1583 B.15.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1583

B.16 THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING CYCLE/ MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CUTTING CYCLE) (T SERIES)....... 1583 B.16.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1583


c-11

B.16.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1584 B.16.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1584

B.17 HELICAL INTERPOLATION.................................................................... 1584 B.17.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1584 B.17.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1585 B.17.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1585

B.18 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES) .......................... 1585 B.18.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1585 B.18.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1586 B.18.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1586

B.19 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES)/AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES) / AI CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1587 B.19.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1587 B.19.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1589 B.19.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1589

B.20 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ......................... 1590 B.20.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1590 B.20.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1590 B.20.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1590

B.21 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))....... 1591 B.21.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1591 B.21.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1591 B.21.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1591

B.22 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ........................................................... 1592 B.22.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1592 B.22.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1596 B.22.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1596

B.23 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ........... 1596 B.23.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1596 B.23.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1598 B.23.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1598

B.24 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................... 1598 B.24.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1598 B.24.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1598 B.24.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1598

B.25 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................. 1599 B.25.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1599 B.25.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1599 B.25.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1599

B.26 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ........................................... 1600 B.26.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1600 B.26.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1600 B.26.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1600

B.27 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ..................................................... 1601 B.27.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1601 B.27.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1601 B.27.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1602

B.28 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL....................................................................... 1602 B.28.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1602 B.28.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1602


c-12

B.28.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1602 B.29 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL................................................................... 1603


B.30 TOOL FUNCTIONS................................................................................. 1604 B.30.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1604 B.30.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1605 B.30.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1605

B.31 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY........................................................ 1606 B.31.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1606 B.31.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1607 B.31.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1607

B.32 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES) .................................................................. 1607 B.32.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1607 B.32.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1607 B.32.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1607

B.33 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION.. 1608 B.33.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1608 B.33.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1613 B.33.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1613

B.34 CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1614 B.34.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1614 B.34.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1616 B.34.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1616 B.34.4 Miscellaneous.....................................................................................................1616

B.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO............................................. 1616 B.35.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1616 B.35.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1616 B.35.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1616

B.36 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1617 B.36.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1617 B.36.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1619 B.36.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1619

B.37 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1619 B.37.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1619 B.37.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1620 B.37.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1620

B.38 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.................................................................. 1620 B.38.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1620 B.38.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1621 B.38.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1621

B.39 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING (T SERIES).............................................................................................. 1621 B.39.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1621 B.39.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1625 B.39.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1625

B.40 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1625 B.40.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1625 B.40.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1626


c-13

B.40.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1626 B.41 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)........................ 1626


B.42 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 1627 B.42.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1627 B.42.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1627 B.42.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1627

B.43 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY .......................................... 1627 B.43.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1627 B.43.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1628 B.43.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1628

B.44 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION............................................................................ 1628 B.44.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1628 B.44.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1629 B.44.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1629

B.45 MEMORY PROTECTION SIGNAL FOR CNC PARAMETER.................. 1629 B.45.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1629 B.45.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1629 B.45.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1629

B.46 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/ AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 1630 B.46.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series)..............................................1630

B.46.1.1 Differences in Specifications ......................................................................... 1630 B.46.1.2 Differences in Signals.................................................................................... 1631 B.46.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .................................................................. 1631

B.46.2 Automatic Tool Offset (T Series).......................................................................1631 B.46.2.1 Differences in Specifications ......................................................................... 1631 B.46.2.2 Differences in Signals.................................................................................... 1632 B.46.2.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .................................................................. 1632

B.47 SKIP FUNCTION..................................................................................... 1633 B.47.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1633 B.47.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1634 B.47.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1635

B.48 INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T SERIES) ............. 1635 B.48.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1635 B.48.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1635 B.48.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1636

B.49 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 1636 B.49.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1636 B.49.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1641 B.49.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1641

B.50 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 1642 B.50.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1642 B.50.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1644 B.50.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1644

B.51 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ............................................................ 1645 B.51.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1645 B.51.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1645 B.51.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1645

B.52 IN-POSITION CHECK ............................................................................. 1645


c-14


B.53 DATA SERVER FUNCTION.................................................................... 1646 B.53.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1646 B.53.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1646 B.53.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1646

B.54 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ............................................................ 1647 B.54.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1647 B.54.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1647 B.54.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1647

B.55 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ..................................... 1647 B.55.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1647 B.55.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1647 B.55.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1647

B.56 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................. 1648 B.56.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1648 B.56.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1648 B.56.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1648

B-64303EN-1/02 11.TOOL FUNCTIONS

- 1009 -

11 TOOL FUNCTIONS Chapter 11, "TOOL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM..................................................................................1009 11.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM .......................................................1021 11.3 TOOL COMPENSATION..............................................................................................................1027 11.4 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.......................................................................................................1042

11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES

T

Overview When address T followed by a numeric value is specified, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine and are used to select a tool on the machine side. Just one T code can be specified in a block. When a move command and T code are specified within the same block, these commands are executed in one of the following two ways: (1) The move command and tool function command are started at the same time. (2) After the move command ends, the tool function command is started.

Explanation A numeric value following the T code specifies selection of a tool. Part of the numeric value is also used as a tool offset number for specifying an offset value such as a tool offset value. Tools are selected according to the specification method and parameter setting as follows:

Meaning of T code(*1) LGN(No.5002#1)=0 LGN(No.5002#1)=1

Parameter setting and offset No. specification method(*2)

Tool wear offset No. is specified by lowest 1 digit of T code.

T X X X X X X X X ↑ ↑ Tool selection Tool geometry/ tool wear offset

T X X X X X X X X ↑ ↑ Tool selection Tool wear offset Tool geometry offset When parameter No. 5028 is set to 1

Tool wear offset No. is specified by lowest 2 digits of T code.



Tool wear offset No. is specified by lowest 3 digits of T code



*1 The maximum number of digits of the T code can be specified in parameter No. 3032. (1 to 8 digits) *2 If 0 is set in parameter No. 5028, the length of the offset number specified in the T code depends on the number of

tool offsets. Example: When the number of tool offsets ranges from 1 to 9: Lowest 1 digit When the number of tool offsets ranges from 10 to 99: Lowest 2 digits When the number of tool offsets ranges from 100 to 200: Lowest 3 digits

11.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-64303EN-1/02

- 1010 -

11.1.1 Tool Offset

T

Overview Tool offset is used to compensate for the difference when the tool actually used differs from the imagined tool used in programming (usually, standard tool).

Offset amount on X axis

Standard tool

Actual tool

Offset amount on Z axis

Tool offset

11.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset

T

Overview Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are possible to divide the tool offset to the tool geometry offset for compensating the tool shape or tool mounting position and the tool wear offset for compensating the tool nose wear. Total value of tool geometry offset value and tool wear offset value is set as the tool wear offset value without option.

Point on the program

X axisgeometryoffsetvalue

X axiswearoffsetvalue

Z axisgeometryoffsetvalue

Z axiswearoffsetvalue

Offsetamounton X axis

Offsetamounton Z axis

Point on the program

Imaginary tool

Actualtool

If tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation are distinguished

from each other (left) and if they are not (right)


- 1011 -

11.1.3 Offset

T

Explanation - Compensation methods

Two methods are available to geometry compensation and wear compensation, compensation with tool movement and compensation with coordinate shift. Which compensation method to select can be specified with parameters LWT (No. 5002#2) and LGT (No. 5002#4). When the tool geometry/wear compensation is not enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 1), however, compensation with tool movement is selected unconditionally.

Parameter Parameter NGW"(No.8136#6)

Compensation element LWT="0"

LGT="0" LWT="1" LGT="0"

LWT="0" LGT="1"

LWT="1" LGT="1"

"1" Wear and geometry not distinguished Tool movement

Wear compensation

Tool movement Coordinate shift

Tool movement Coordinate shift

"0" Geometry compensation

Coordinate shift

Coordinate shift

Tool movement Tool movement

- Compensation with tool movement

The tool path is offset by the X, Y, and Z tool offset values for the programmed path. The tool offset distance corresponding to the number specified by the T code is added to or subtracted from the end position of each programmed block. The vector with tool offset X, Y, and Z is called the offset vector. Compensation is the same as the offset vector.

This move command block contains the offset command with T code

Tool path after offset

Programmed path

Compensation by tool offset X, Z (offset vector)

Offset operation with tool movement

NOTE 1 When G50 X_Z_T_ ; is specified, the tool is not moved. The coordinate system in which the coordinate value of the tool position is (X,Z) is

set. The tool position is obtained by subtracting the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number specified in the T code.

2 The G codes in the 00 group other than G50 must not be specified in the same block as that containing a T code. Otherwise, alarm PS0245 is issued.

- Compensation with coordinate shift

The work coordinate system is shifted by the X, Y, and Z tool offset amounts. Namely, the offset amount corresponding to the number designated with the T code is added to or subtracted from the absolute coordinates.


- 1012 -

Programmed path after workpiece coordinate system shift

The movement to this point is by an absolute command.

Tool path after offset

Programmed path before work coordinate system shift

Offset amount by offset in X, Z axis (offset vector)

Offset operation with coordinate shift

- Starting and canceling offset by specifying a T code

Specifying an tool offset number with a T code means to select the tool offset value corresponding to it and to start offset. Specifying 0 as a tool offset number means to cancel offset. For offset with tool movement, whether to start or cancel the offset can be specified with parameter LWN (No. 5002#6). For compensation with coordinate shift, the offset is started and canceled when a T code is specified. For the cancellation of geometry compensation, its operation can be selected with LGC (No. 5002#5).

Compensation method LWM (No.5002#6)=0 LWM (No.5002#6)=1 Tool movement When a T code is specified When an axial movement is specified

Coordinate shift When a T code is specified

(Note that geometry compensation can be canceled only if LGC (No. 5002#5) = 1.)

- Canceling offset with reset Tool offset is canceled under one of the following conditions: <1> The power to the CNC is turned off and turned back on <2> The reset button on the MDI unit is pressed <3> A reset signal is input from the machine to the CNC In cases <2> and <3> above, it is possible to select a cancel operation using parameters LVC (No. 5006#3) and TGC (No. 5003#7).

Parameter Compensation method LVC=0

TGC=0LVC=1 TGC=0

LVC=0 TGC=1

LVC=1 TGC=1

Wear compensation Tool movement Geometry compensation

x Canceled. (When axial movement is

specified)

x o (When axial movement

is specified) Wear compensation x Canceled. x o Coordinate

shift Geometry compensation x x o o o: Canceled. x: Not canceled.

Notes and restrictions • Helical interpolation (G02, G03) Tool position offset cannot be specified in a block in which helical interpolation is used. • Workpiece coordinate system preset (G50.3) Performing workpiece coordinate system preset causes tool position offset with tool movement to be

canceled; this does not cause tool position offset with coordinate shift to be canceled.


- 1013 -

• Machine coordinate system setting (G53), reference position return (G28), second, third, and fourth

reference position return (G30), and manual reference position return Basically, before performing these commands or operations, cancel tool position offset. These operations do not cause tool position offset to be canceled. The following actions take place:

When the command or operation is specified

When the next axial movement command is specified

Tool movement The tool offset value is temporarily canceled. The tool offset value is reflected. Coordinate shift Coordinates with the tool offset value

reflected are assumed. Coordinates with the tool offset value reflected are assumed.

Do not specify the G code and T code in the same block. Otherwise, alarm PS0245 is issued.

Parameter 3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 8

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code. When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DAP DRP

3129

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

#0 DRP For relative coordinate display:

0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.

#1 DAP For absolute coordinate display: 0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 WNP LWM LGC LGT LWT LGN

5002


#1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset

0: Is the same as wear offset number 1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number

NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is

enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).


- 1014 -

#2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by: 0: Moving the tool. 1: Shifting the coordinate system.



#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation 0: Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system 1: Compensated by the tool movement



#5 LGC When tool geometry compensation is based on coordinate shifting, the tool geometry offset is: 0: Not canceled by a command with offset number 0. 1: Canceled by a command with offset number 0.



#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed: 0: In a block where a T code is specified. 1: Together with a command for movement along an axis.

#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the geometry/wear compensation function is equipped, is the number specified by: 0: Geometry offset number 1: Wear offset number

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TGC

5003


#7 TGC A tool geometry offset based on a coordinate shift is:

0: Not canceled by reset. 1: Canceled by reset.




- 1015 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ORC

5004


#1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corrected as:

0: Diameter value 1: Radius value

NOTE This parameter is valid only for an axis based on diameter

specification. For an axis based on radius specification, specify a radius value, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

LVC 5006

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit

#3 LVC A tool offset (geometry/wear) based on a tool movement and wear offset based on a

coordinate shift are: 0: Not canceled by reset. 1: Canceled by reset.

5024 Number of tool compensation values

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before

operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values

Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path. Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system. If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by the number of paths. Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued. For example, 200 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1 and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.


- 1016 -

Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command 5028


Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number (wear offset number when the tool geometry/wear compensation function is used). When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of tool compensation values. When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower 1 digit When the number of tool compensation values is 10 to 99: Lower 2 digits When the number of tool compensation values is 100 to 200: Lower 3 digits Example : When an offset number is specified using the lower 2 digits of a T code, set 2 in

parameter No. 5028. Txxxxxx yy xxxxxx : Tool selection yy : Tool offset number

NOTE A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable

number of digits of a T code) cannot be set.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 OWD

5040


#0 OWD In radius programming (bit 1 (ORC) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1),

0: Tool offset values of both geometry compensation and wear compensation are specified by radius.

1: Tool offset value of geometry compensation is specified by radius and tool offset value of wear compensation is specified by diameter, for an axis of diameter programming.



#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8136 NGW NDO

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be

turned off before operation is continued.



- 1017 -

#5 NDO Tool offset pairs 64-pairs (T series 1-path system) / 128-pairs (T series 2-path system) is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

NOTE When the option of tool compensation count 99 (T series 1-path

system) / 200 (T series 2-path system) is added, this parameter becomes invalid in T series. (Tool compensation count is fixed to 99 (T series 1-path system) / 200 (T series 2-path system).)

#6 NGW Tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is:

0: Used. 1: Not Used.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS

BLOCK The specified G code (G10, G04, G28, G29, G30, G50, or G53) cannot be used in the same block as a T code . Modify the program.

11.1.4 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function)

T

Overview After cutting tools are changed manually, entering the tool number of a new tool enables the previous tool position compensation values (tool geometry and wear compensation) to be changed to those for the new tool.

NOTE Automatic alteration of tool position compensation (T function) is optional

function.

Details After changing cutting tools manually, place the CNC in the JOG or HNDL (INC), or REF mode, enter the tool number of a new tool as a manual tool compensation tool number signal (MTLN<Gn068, Gn069> or MT8N<Gn525-Gn528>) from the PMC, and set the compensation command signal MTLC<Gn067.0> to "1". The CNC will read the tool number and change the previous tool position compensation values to those for the specified tool. Upon completion of the compensation value change, the compensation completion signal MTLA<Fn061.5> is output.


- 1018 -

Four BCD digits are used to specify the manual tool compensation tool number MTLN<Gn068, Gn069>. If it is necessary to specify the manual tool compensation tool number with a number exceeding 4 digits, use MT8N<Gn525-Gn528> to specify it with 8 BCD digits. Which size to use can be selected using bit 7 (MTL8D) of parameter No. 11400. The same rules as for the T code command in automatic operation are applied in specifying how many digits, 4 or 8, to use as the geometry or wear compensation numbers (parameter No.5028). This function is available only if the CNC is in the JOG, HNDL, or REF mode. In any other operation mode, during automatic operation (running, pause, or stop), or in the tool-nose radius compensation mode, (G41/G42 mode), setting the compensation command signal MTLC to 1 does not enable compensation. If compensation is unavailable, the compensation completion signal MTLA does not become 1. Instead the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG becomes 1. The reason for MTLANG = 1 can be known from diagnosis display No. 560.

Signal Manual tool compensation tool number signal (4 digits) MTLN00 to

MTLN15<Gn068, Gn069> [Classification] Input signal

Manual toolchange

Compensation commandsignal MTLC(PMC→CNC) <Gn067.0>

Compensation completion signal MTLA(CNC®PMC) <Fn061.5>

Manual tool compensation tool number signal MTLN(PMC→CNC) <Gn068,Gn069> <Gn525-Gn528>

Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)

Changing compensation values (CNC)

Compensation commandsignal MTLC(PMC→CNC) <Gn067.0>

Compensation uncompletedsignal MTLANG(CNC→PMC) <Fn061.5>

Manual tool compensation tool number signal MTLN(PMC→CNC) <Gn068,Gn069>

C<Gn525-Gn528>

Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)

Manual toolchange

Compensation change is impossible (CNC)

Compensation completion signal MTLA(CNC®PMC) <Fn061.4>


- 1019 -

[Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 4 BCD digits.

Manual tool compensation tool number signal (8 digits) MT8N00 to MT8N31<Gn525-Gn528>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 8 BCD digits.

Manual tool compensation command number MTLC<Gn067.0>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Requests to perform manual tool compensation. Setting this signal from 0 to 1 causes

manual tool compensation to be performed. Re-set it to 0 when the compensation completion signal becomes = 1.

Manual tool compensation completion signal MTLA<Fn061.5>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is completed. This signal becomes 1 when a

compensation value is changed in manual tool compensation. It becomes 0 when the compensation command signal MTLC becomes 0.

Manual tool compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG<Fn061.4>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is uncompleted. This signal becomes 1 if an

attempt to perform manual tool compensation fails in changing a compensation value for any reason. It becomes 0 when the compensation command signal MTLC becomes 0.

The reason for the failure of the attempt can be known from diagnosis display No. 560.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn068 MTL07 MTL06 MTL05 MTL04 MTL03 MTL02 MTL01 MTL00

Gn069 MTL15 MTL14 MTL13 MTL12 MTL11 MTL10 MTL09 MTL08

Gn525 MT8N07 MT8N06 MT8N05 MT8N04 MT8N03 MT8N02 MT8N01 MT8N00




Gn067 MTLC

Fn061 MTLA MTLANG

Diagnosis display

0560 Manual tool compensation status number

[Data type] Byte [Unit of data] None [Valid data range] 0 to 255

The following numbers are used to indicate whether compensation is completed or the reason for uncompleted compensation (if occur). 0: Manual tool compensation is completed normally.


- 1020 -

1: The T code-specified data has exceeded the permissible range. 2: The offset value is out of range. 3: The offset number is out of range. 4: The CNC is undergoing automatic operation or axis movement. 5: The CNC is in the tool-nose radius compensation mode. 6: The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode. 7: A CNC parameter has specified an invalid number.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

MTL8D 11400


#0 MTL8D The number of digits in the T code used for automatic change of tool position

compensation is specified as follows: 0: 4 digits (Existing DI signals Gn068 and Gn069 are used.) 1: 8 digits (The DI signals Gn525 - Gn528 are used.)

Notes If the CNC is in the following conditions, setting the compensation command signal MTLC to 1 cannot change compensation values, and therefore, the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG becomes 1. 1) The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode. 2) The CNC is at an emergency stop. 3) The reset button on the MDI unit is held pressed. 4) A reset signal is input on the machine side. 5) The CNC is in an alarm condition. 6) The CNC is undergoing automatic operation (start, pause, or stop). 7) The CNC is in the tool-noose radius compensation mode (G41/G42 mode). With this function, shifted coordinate systems are returned to the previous state by the first T code in the next session of automatic operation, and axis movement occurs by the amount of canceled shifting, thus resuming the position and coordinate systems of the inherent movement type. Example: If the amounts of wear compensation are: T1 = 0.1, T2 = 0.2, and T3 = 0.4

1) The state that T1 compensation is applied during automatic operation (compensation of 0.1 axis movement type):

2) The coordinate system is shifted by -0.1 (= T2 - T1) from the state mentioned in step 1 when tool T2 is selected in manual tool compensation.

3) When compensation T3 is applied again during automatic operation, the coordinate system is shifted by 0.2 (= T3 - T2), that is, totally by 0.3. The coordinate system, which has been shifted by -0.1 in step 2, is shifted back to the previous state.

Once the T3 compensation command has been executed, the same position and coordinate system as would be when the T3 compensation command is issued in the T1 compensation state are resumed. When manual tool compensation ends properly, the T code modal changes to one where manual tool compensation was carried out (the tool function code signals <Fn026 to Fn029> also change).


- 1021 -

11.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES

M

Overview Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address T.

Signal Refer to “AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION”

Parameter 3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code


Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code. When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0155 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND In a machining program, the T code specified in the same block as

M06 does not correspond to the group in current use. Modify the program.

PS0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS BLOCK

The specified G code (G10, G04, G28, G29, G30, G50, or G53) cannot be used in the same block as a T code . Modify the program.

NOTE

NOTE When a move command and a tool function are specified in the same block, the

commands are executed in one of the following two ways: (i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool function

commands. (ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of move command

execution. The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence program of PMC.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Tool selection command CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual)

Auxiliary function


- 1022 -

11.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory

M

Overview Tool compensation values include geometry compensation values and wear compensation values. (Fig. 11.2.1(a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation) Tool compensation values can also be used without discriminating between geometry and wear compensation values.

Geometry compensation value

Wear Compensation value

Reference position

(a) Geometry and wear compensation are discriminated

Tool compensation value

Reference position

(b) Geometry and were compensation are not discriminated

Fig. 11.2 (a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation

Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the MDI or from a program. A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the corresponding code is specified after address H or D in a program. The value is used for tool length compensation, cutter compensation, or the tool offset.

- Unit of range of tool compensation value A tool offset unit and valid data range can be chosen from the following by setting the parameters:

Unit of range of tool compensation value (metric input) OFC OFA Unit Range

0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm

Unit of range of tool compensation value (inch input)

OFC OFA Unit Range 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch

- Tool compensation memory

One of the tool compensation memory A/C can be selected according to the configuration of offset amount. (parameter NGW(No.8136#6)) (1) Tool compensation memory A

(parameter NGW(No.8136#6)="1") There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and wear compensation memory in

tool compensation memory A. Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset together is set as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).


- 1023 -

(2) Tool compensation memory C (parameter NGW(No.8136#6)="0")

Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is separate in tool compensation memory C. Geometry compensation and wear compensation can thus be set separately. Separate memories are prepared for cutter compensation (for D code) and for tool length compensation (for H code).

The above description is summarized as follows:

Tool compensation memory Compensation amount

A Tool compensation amount (Geometry compensation value + Wear compensation value) Geometry compensation value for H code Geometry compensation value for D code Wear compensation value for H code

C

Wear compensation value for D code

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3109 DWT


#1 DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount

0: The characters are displayed at the left of each number. 1: The characters are not displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3205 OSC


#4 OSC On the offset screen, offset value erasure by a soft key is:

0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3290 GOF WOF


#0 WOF Setting the tool offset value (tool wear offset) by MDI key input is:

0: Not disabled 1: Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in

which updating the setting is to be disabled.)

NOTE When tool offset memory A is selected with the M series, the tool

offset set in the parameter WOF is followed even if geometric compensation and wear compensation are not specified with the T series.


- 1024 -

#1 GOF Setting the tool geometry offset value by MDI key input is: 0: Not disabled 1: Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in

which updating the setting is to be disabled.)

3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled

3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of tool compensation values - 1

When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be disabled using bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290, parameter Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to set the range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No.3294, set the offset number of the start of tool offset values whose modification is disabled. In parameter No.3295, set the number of such values. In the following cases, however, none of the tool offset values may be modified: • When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No. 3294 • When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No. 3295 • When a value greater than the maximum tool offset number is set in parameter No.

3294 In the following case, a modification to the values ranging from the value set in parameter No. 3294 to the maximum tool offset number is disabled: When the value of parameter No. 3294 added to the value of parameter No. 3295 exceeds the maximum tool offset number When the offset value of a prohibited number is input through the MDI panel, the warning "WRITE PROTECT" is issued. [Example] When the following parameter settings are made, modifications to both of the tool geometry offset values and tool wear offset values corresponding to offset numbers 51 to 60 are disabled: • Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool geometry offset value

modification) • Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool wear offset value

modification) • Parameter No. 3294 = 51 • Parameter No. 3295 = 10 If the setting of bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0 without modifying the other parameter settings above, tool geometry offset value modification only is disabled, and tool wear offset value modification is enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5001 TPH OFH



- 1025 -

#2 OFH In cutter compensation (G40, G41, or G42), the address used to specify a compensation number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

NOTE When this parameter is 1, if tool length compensation and cutter

compensation are specified in the same block, cutter compensation is prioritized.

#5 TPH In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a compensation

number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is

0.

5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit) [Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed. [Valid data range] The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.

For metric input

OFC OFA Valid data range 0 1 0 to 9999.99mm 0 0 0 to 9999.999mm 1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm

For inch input OFC OFA Valid data range

0 1 0 to 999.999inch 0 0 0 to 999.9999inch 1 0 0 to 999.99999inch

This parameter sets the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value. If an attempt is made to set a tool wear compensation value, the absolute value of which exceeds the value set in this parameter, the following alarm or warning is output:

Input from MDI Warning: Too many digits Input by G10 Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.

When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied. [Example] When 30.000 is set As a tool offset value, a value from -30.000 to +30.000 can be input.

5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path


- 1026 -

[Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit) [Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed. [Valid data range] The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.

For metric input

OFC OFA Valid data range 0 1 0 to 9999.99mm 0 0 0 to 9999.999mm 1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm

For inch input OFC OFA Valid data range

0 1 0 to 999.999inch 0 0 0 to 999.9999inch 1 0 0 to 999.99999inch

Set the maximum allowable value for the tool wear compensation value, input as an incremental value. If the incremental input value (absolute value) exceeds the set value, the following alarm or warning message is output:

Input from MDI Warning: Too many digits Input by G10 Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.

When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5042 OFC OFA




#0 OFA #1 OFC These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset

value.

For metric input OFC OFA Unit Valid data range

0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm

For inch input

OFC OFA Unit Valid data range 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch


- 1027 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8136 NGW NDO




#5 NDO Tool offset pairs 400-pairs (M series) is:


#6 NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset

amount by system variables, the offset amount was excessive.

Warning message Description

DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The value searched exceeds the permitted range. TOO MANY DIGITS The input value exceeds the permitted number of digits.

11.3 TOOL COMPENSATION

11.3.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series)

Overview M - Cutter compensation (M series)

Use of cutter compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool radius set in the CNC when machining is performed. When the radius of the tool to be used for machining is measured and set as the offset value in the CNC, the tool moves along the offset path to cut a programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool diameter changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.

Programmed path Tool center path


- 1028 -

To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to program a machining profile, therefore, programming can be done very easily.

T - Tool nose radius compensation

Use of tool-nose radius compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool nose radius set in the CNC when machining is performed. When a machining profile is programmed using this function, and the radius of the tool nose to be used for actual machining is measured and set as the offset value in the CNC, the tool moves along the offset path to cut the programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool nose radius changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.

Workpiece

Machining profile

Tool center pathTool nose

To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to program a machining profile, therefore the programming can be done very easily.

NOTE To enable cutter compensation (M series)/ tool-nose radius compensation (T

series), set bit 7 (NTL, NCR) of parameter No. 8136 to 0.

Signal Tool offset direction signals G2RVX,G2RVZ,G2RVY<Gn090.0,.1,.2>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals change the compensation direction when using the tool offset.

The direction of the tool offset compensated by tool movement is: 0 : Identical to the sign. 1 : Opposite to the sign.

NOTE 1 G2RVY needs to enable the Y-axis offset function (bit 1 (YOF) of

parameter No. 8132 is 1). 2 This signal is invalid for compensation that shifts coordinates.


- 1029 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5000 SBK

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path

#0 SBK With a block created internally for cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation:

0: A single block stop is not performed. 1: A single block stop is performed. This parameter is used to check a program including cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5001 TPH EVR OFH


#2 OFH In cutter compensation (G40, G41, or G42), the address used to specify a compensation

number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

NOTE When this parameter is 1, if tool length compensation and cutter

compensation are specified in the same block, cutter compensation is prioritized.

#4 EVR When a tool compensation value is changed in cutter compensation mode:

0: Enables the change, starting from that block where the next D or H code is specified. 1: Enables the change, starting from that block where buffering is next performed.

#5 TPH In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a compensation number is: 0: Address D. 1: Address H.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is

0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 WNP LGN

5002


#1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset

0: Is the same as wear offset number 1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number


- 1030 -



#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the geometry/wear compensation function is equipped (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0), is the number specified by: 0: Geometry offset number 1: Wear offset number

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 SUV SUP


#0 SUP #1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of cutter compensation or

tool nose radius compensation. CSC CSU Type Operation

0 0 Type A

A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or the block preceding the cancellation block is output.

0 1 Type

B A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block and an intersection vector are output.

Tool center path

Programmed path

N1

N2

G41

Tool center path

N1

N2

Intersection point

G41 Programmed path


- 1031 -

CSC CSU Type Operation 1 0

1Type

C When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement operation, the tool is shifted by the cutter compensation amount in a direction perpendicular to the block next to the startup or the block before cancellation block.

When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the SUP setting; if SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.

NOTE When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation equivalent to that of

FS0i-TC is performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5004 ODI


#2 ODI The setting of a cutter compensation value is corrected as:

0: Radius value 1: Diameter value

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5008 MCR CNV CNC


#1 CNC #3 CNV These bits are used to select an interference check method in the cutter compensation or

tool nose radius compensation mode. CNV CNC Operation

0 0 Interference check is enabled. The direction and the angle of an arc are checked.0 1 Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc is checked. 1 - Interference check is disabled.

For the operation taken when the interference check shows the occurrence of an reference (overcutting), see the description of bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No. 19607.

NOTE Checking of only the direction cannot be set.

#4 MCR If G41/G42 (cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation) is specified in the

MDI mode, an alarm is: 0: Not raised. 1: Raised. (alarm PS5257)

N2 N3

Intersection point

Shift G41 Programmed path

Tool center path


- 1032 -

NOTE Cutter compensation/tool-nose radius compensation is not

performed in the MDI mode, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

5010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter or tool nose radius compensation

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation mode, the limit for ignoring the small travel amount resulting from compensation is set. This limit eliminates the interruption of buffering caused by the small travel amount generated at the corner and any change in feedrate due to the interruption.

Even if ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit andΔVY ≤ ΔVlimit, vector tosingle-block stop pointremains.Tool center path

Programmed path

If ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit and ΔVY≤ ΔVlimit,this vector is ignored.

SΔVY

ΔVx

r

r

N1

N2

ΔVlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 5010.

5024 Number of tool compensation values




Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path. Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system.


- 1033 -

If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by the number of paths. Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued. For example, 200 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1 and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5042 OFC OFA




#0 OFA #1 OFC These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset

value.

For metric input OFC OFA Unit Valid data range

0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm

For inch input

OFC OFA Unit Valid data range 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

19607 NAG NAA CAV CCC


#2 CCC In the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the outer corner

connection method is based on: 0: Linear connection type. 1: Circular connection type.

#5 CAV When an interference check finds that interference (overcutting) occurred: 0: Machining stops with the alarm (PS0041).

(Interference check alarm function) 1: Machining is continued by changing the tool path to prevent interference

(overcutting) from occurring. (Interference check avoidance function)


- 1034 -

For the interference check method, see the descriptions of bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No. 5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008.

#6 NAA When the interference check avoidance function considers that an avoidance operation is dangerous or that a further interference to the interference avoidance vector occurs: 0: An alarm is issued.

When an avoidance operation is considered to be dangerous, the alarm (PS5447) is issued. When a further interference to the interference avoidance vector is considered to occur, the alarm (PS5448) is issued.

1: No alarm is issued, and the avoidance operation is continued.

CAUTION When this parameter is set to 1, the path may be shifted largely.

Therefore, set this parameter to 0 unless special reasons are present.

#7 NAG If the gap vector length is 0 when the interference check avoidance function for cutter

compensation/tool nose radius compensation is used: 0: Avoidance operation is performed. 1: Avoidance operation is not performed.

19625 Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 3 to 8

This parameter sets the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode. When a value less than 3 is set, the specification of 3 is assumed. When a value greater than 8 is set, the specification of 8 is assumed. As a greater number of blocks are read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made with a command farther ahead. However, the number of blocks read and analyzed increases, so that a longer block processing time becomes necessary. Even if the setting of this parameter is modified in the MDI mode by stopping in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the setting does not become valid immediately. Before the new setting of this parameter can become valid, the cutter compensation/tool noise radius compensation mode must be canceled, then the mode must be entered again.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0033 NO INTERSECTION AT CUTTER

COMPENSATION The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection calculation in cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program.

PS0034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP/EXT BLK

In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, a startup or cancellation is performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the program.


- 1035 -

Number Message Description PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a

G code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled.

- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override by address Q.

PS0037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN G41/G42

The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program.

PS0041 INTERFERENCE IN CUTTER COMPENSATION

In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, excessive cutting may occur. Modify the program.

PS0042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in tool compensation. Modify the program.

PS5445 CAN NOT COMMAND MOTION IN G39

Corner circular interpolation (G39) of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation is not specified alone but is specified with a move command.

PS5446 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 Because there is no interference evade vector, the interference check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation cannot evade interference.

PS5447 DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42

The interference check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation determines that an evade operation will lead to danger.

PS5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT G41/G42

In the interference check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation, a further interference occurs for an already created interference evade vector.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For lathe system) (B-64304EN-1)

Overview of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40-G42) Details of Tool Nose Radius Compensation

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For machining center system) (B-64304EN-2)

Overview of Cutter Compensation (G40-G42) Details of Cutter Compensation

11.3.2 Tool Length Compensation

M

Overview When the difference between the tool length assumed at the time of programming and the tool length of the tool actually used for machining is set in offset memory, the difference in tool length can be corrected without modifying the program. G43 and G44 specify the offset direction, and a number following the tool length compensation specification address (H code) specifies the tool length compensation amount set in the offset memory.


- 1036 -

Tool assumed atprogramming

Actual tool

Set this difference astool lengthcompensation amount

One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool length compensation: • Tool length compensation A

Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis. • Tool length compensation B Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis. • Tool length compensation C

Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3104

DAL DRL


#4 DRL Relative position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.

#6 DAL Absolute position 0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5001 EVO TAL TLB TLC


#0 TLC #1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.

Type TLB TLC Tool length compensation A 0 0 Tool length compensation B 1 0 Tool length compensation C - 1

The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described below. Tool length compensation A :

Z-axis at all times


- 1037 -

Tool length compensation B : Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19)

Tool length compensation C : Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44

#3 TAL Tool length compensation C

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset 1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset

#6 EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length compensation A or tool length compensation B in the offset mode (G43 or G44): 0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is specified

next. 1: The new value becomes valid in a block where buffering is performed next.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5003 LVK


#6 LVK Tool length compensation vector

0: Cleared by reset 1: Not cleared, but held by reset The tool length compensation vector in the tool axis direction is handled in the same way by this bit.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0027 NO AXES COMMANDED

IN G43/G44 No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type C. Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset type C. Multiple axes were specified for the same block when the tool length compensation type is C.

PS0336 TOOL COMPENSATION COMMANDED MORE TWO AXES

For a tool length compensation C, an attempt was made to command the offset to other axes without canceling the offset. Or, for a tool length compensation C, multiple axes are specified in G43 or G44 block.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For machining center system) (B-64304EN-2)

Tool length compensation


- 1038 -

11.3.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types

M

Overview A tool length offset operation can be performed by shifting the program coordinate system: The coordinate system containing the axis subject to tool length compensation is shifted by the tool length compensation value. A tool length compensation shift type can be selected with parameter TOS (parameter No. 5006#6). If no move command is specified together with the G43, G44, or G49 command, the tool will not move along the axis. If a move command is specified together with the G43, G44, or G49 command, the coordinate system will be shifted first, then the tool will move along the axis. One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool length compensation: • Tool length compensation A

Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis. • Tool length compensation B Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis. • Tool length compensation C

Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.

Explanation - Offset direction

If the tool length compensation value specified with an H code (and stored in offset memory) is G43, the coordinate system is shifted to the + side; if G44, to the - side. If the sign of the tool length compensation value is -, the coordinate system is shifted to the - side if G43 and to the + side if G44. G43 and G44 are modal G codes; they remain valid until another G code in the same group is used.

- Specifying a tool length compensation value The tool length compensation value corresponding to the number (offset number) specified with an H code (and stored in offset memory) is used. The tool length compensation corresponding to the offset number 0 always means 0. It is not possible to set a tool length compensation value corresponding to H0.

- Compensation axis Specify one of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, using parameters TLC and TLB (No. 5001#0, #1).

- Specifying offset on two or more axes Tool length compensation B enables offset on two or more axes by specifying offset axes in multiple blocks. To perform offset on X and Y axes G19 G43 H_; Performs offset on the X axis. G18 G43 H_; Performs offset on the Y axis. Tool length compensation C suppresses the generation of an alarm even if offset is performed on two or more axes at the same time, by setting TAL (No. 5001#3) to 1.

- Tool length compensation cancel To cancel offset, specify either G49 or H0. Canceling offset causes the shifting of the coordinate system to be undone. If no move command is specified at this time, the tool will not move along the axis.


- 1039 -

- Staring and canceling tool length compensation Once a command for starting or canceling tool length compensation (*2) is issued in a mode such as cutter compensation (*1), no look-ahead block interpretation is carried out until the tool length compensation start or cancel request block is finished. So, the following operations occur. • The spindle decelerates to a stop in the start or cancel block. • The compensation vector for tool compensation becomes perpendicular to the block just before the

start or cancel block, resulting in an overcut or insufficient cut, because no look-ahead interpretation is carried out.

• No command specified after the start or cancel block is executed until the block is finished. *1 No look-ahead block interpretation is carried out for the following commands:

- G codes, except G40, in group 07 (for such modes as cutter compensation (G41/G42)) - Smooth interpolation (G05.1Q2) mode

*2 The following commands are included. - Tool length compensation (G43/G44)

- Operation when a tool compensation value is changed in the tool length

compensation mode Bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 can be used to specify what operation to perform when a tool length compensation value is changed (*3) in the cutter compensation mode (*1) and tool length compensation mode (*2). • If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 0: The axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation value. • If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 1: Until an absolute command is issued to the compensated axis since the change of the tool length

compensation value, the axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation value.

*1 The following commands are included.

- G codes, except G40, in group 07 Cutter compensation (G41/G42)

*2 The following commands are included.

- Tool length compensation (G43/G44) *3 “Changing a tool length compensation value” pertains to:

- Issuing the H code in a program - Changing a compensation value on the offset screen, by the G10 command, system variables,

or the window function if bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 = 1.

Caution CAUTION

1 Specifying tool length compensation (a shift type) first and then executing an incremental command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected in the coordinates only, not in the travel distance of the machine; executing an absolute command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected in both the movement of the machine and the coordinates.

2 If a programmable mirror image is effective, the tool length offset is applied in the specified direction.

3 No scaling magnification is applied to the tool length offset value. 4 No coordinate system rotation is applied to the tool length offset value. Tool

length offset is effective in the direction in which the offset is applied.


- 1040 -

CAUTION 5 The tool length offset operation is independent of the cutter compensation offset

operation. 6 With the WINDOW command, changing parameter TOS during automatic

operation does not cause the tool length offset type to be changed. 7 If offset has been performed on two or more axes with tool length compensation B,

a G49 command causes the offset to be canceled on all axes; H0 causes the offset to be canceled only on the axis vertical to the specified plane.

8 If the tool length compensation value is changed by changing the offset number, this simply means that the value is replaced by a new tool length compensation value; it does not mean that a new tool length compensation value is added to the old tool length compensation.

9 If using cutter compensation, set OFH (parameter No. 5001#2) to 0, specify tool length compensation with an H code, and specify cutter compensation with a D code.

10 If reference position return (G28 or G30) has been specified, tool length offset is canceled for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the reference point; however, tool length offset is not canceled for an un-specified axis. If reference position return has been specified in the same block as that containing tool length offset cancel (G49), tool length offset is canceled for both the specified and un-specified axes at the time of positioning on the mid-point.

11 With a machine coordinate system command (G53), tool length offset is canceled for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the specified point.

12 The tool length compensation vector canceled by specifying G53, G28, or G30 during tool length compensation is restored as described below:

For tool length compensation types A and B, if parameter EVO (No. 5001#6) is 1, the vector is restored in the block buffered next; for all of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, it is restored in a block containing an H, G43, or G44 command if parameter is 0.

13 When a tool compensation shift type is used, no look-ahead interpretation is made if a command for starting or canceling compensation such as tool length compensation is issued in the cutter compensation mode. As a result, it is likely that an overcut or insufficient cut may occur. To avoid this problem, issue the command before the cutter compensation mode is entered or in a place where machining is not affected.

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5000 MOF


#1 MOF When the tool length compensation shift type (bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006 is set to

1) is used, if the tool length compensation amount is changed(NOTE 3) in the tool length compensation mode (NOTE 1) when look-ahead blocks are present(NOTE 2): 0: Compensation is performed for the change in compensation amount as the

movement type. 1: Compensation is not performed for the change until a tool length compensation

command (offset number) and an absolute command for the compensation axis are specified.


- 1041 -

NOTE 1 The tool length compensation mode refers to the following state:

• Tool length offset (G43/G44) 2 "When look-ahead blocks are present" means as follows:

• The modal G code of the G codes (such as tool radius/tool nose radius compensation) of group 07 is other than G40.

One look-ahead block during automatic operation and multiple look-ahead blocks in the AI/ advanced preview control/AI contour control mode are not included in the state "when look-ahead blocks are present".

3 Changes in tool length compensation amount are as follows: • When the tool length compensation number is changed by H

code • When G43 or G44 is specified to change the direction of tool

length compensation • When the tool length compensation amount is changed using

the offset screen, G10 command, system variable, PMC window, and so forth during automatic operation if bit 1 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 is set to 1.

• When the tool length compensation vector that was canceled temporarily by G53, G28, or G30 during tool length compensation is recovered.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5001

TAL TLB TLC


#0 TLC #1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.

Type TLB TLC Tool length compensation A 0 0 Tool length compensation B 1 0 Tool length compensation C - 1

The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described below. Tool length compensation A :

Z-axis at all times Tool length compensation B :

Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19) Tool length compensation C :

Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44

#3 TAL Tool length compensation C 0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset 1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset


- 1042 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5006 TOS


#6 TOS Set a tool length compensation operation.

0: Tool length compensation is performed by an axis movement. 1: Tool length compensation is performed by shifting the coordinate system.

Reference item Manual name Item name

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For machining center system) (B-64304EN-2)

Tool length compensation shift types

11.4 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Tools are classified into several groups, and a tool life (use count or use duration) is specified for each group in advance. Each time a tool is used, its life is counted, and when the tool life expires, a new tool that is sequenced next within the same group is selected automatically. With this function, the tool life can be managed while machining is being performed continuously. Data for tool life management consists of tool group numbers, tool life values, tool numbers, and codes for specifying a tool offset value. These data items are registered in the CNC.

NOTE To use tool life management, set bit 0 (TLF) of parameter No. 8132 to 1.

Tool group number m Tool life value l

1 Tool number (T) Code for specifying tool offset value (H/D)

1st-tool management data

2 : : 2nd-tool management data : :

: :

: :

: :

n : : nth-tool management data

Machine and CNC operations Machine CNC

Places a selected tool in the wait state.

Automatically selects, from tool group m, a tool whose life has not expired.

Attaches the tool in the wait state to the spindle (tool change).

Starts counting the life of the tool attached to the spindle.

Tool life management data

Tool group number 1 : : Tool group number m : : Tool group number p

Machining program : : Command for selecting tool group m : : Tool change command (M06) : :

Select tool.

Fig. 11.4 (a) Tool selection from machining program

M A group is selected by a T code, and tool life counting is started by the M06 command.


- 1043 -

T For the T series, depending on the tool replacement system (turret type or ATC type), a group is selected only by a T code, a tool compensation amount is specified, and tool life counting is started (turret type).

CAUTION This function cannot be used if bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. 5002 is set to 1 to

use the same number as the tool selection number to specify a geometric offset number.

- Maximum number of tool life management groups

A maximum of 128 tool life management groups can be used for each path. For each path, set a maximum number of groups to be used in parameter No. 6813. The maximum number of groups must be a multiple of the minimum number of groups (eight groups). If the setting is 0, 128 is assumed.

Fig. 11.4 (b) Group allocation in entire system

M - Remaining tool count check function

This function outputs the remaining tool count notification signal (TLAL<Fn154.0>) when the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846.

Signal Tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that the life of the last tool in a group has expired. [Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" when:

- The life of the last tool in a group has expired, after tool change was performed each time the life of each tool in the group expired.

The signal becomes "0" when: - There is no group whose life has expired. When the signal is "1", it is reset to “0” by informing the CNC that tool change has

been finished for all groups in which the life of all tools had expired, by inputting the tool change reset signal TLRST from the PMC or operating on the MDI.

When tool life management is performed in a 2-path system (T series (2-path control)) Suppose that, of the total groups in the system (256 groups), 128 groups are allocated to path 1 and 128 groups to path 3. Then, set parameter No. 6813 as follows: Tool life management data file

(256 groups in total in system) Path 1

Up to 128 groups Path 2

Up to 128 groups

Parameter No. 6813 Path 1

Set 128 in parameter Path 2

Set 128 in parameter


- 1044 -

CAUTION If the tool life is specified by use count, the tool change signal

TLCH becomes "1" when the CNC is reset by a command such as M02 or M30 after the tool life has expired or when the tool life count restart M code is issued. If the tool life is specified by duration, the TLCH becomes "1" when the tool life expires, even if machining is in progress. Machining, however, continues until the end of the program.

Tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Clears all execution data, such as tool life count values and marks "*" and "@", for a

group. After replacing all tools in the groups in which the life of all the tools has expired (as shown on the screen) with new ones, input this signal by specifying a group number, using the tool group number select signals (TL1 to TL512). Setting bit 4 (GRS) of parameter No. 6800 to 1 can clear execution data for all registered groups without inputting the tool group number select signal. Execution data can be cleared also by operating on the MDI.

[Operation] When the signal changes from "0" to "1", the control unit behaves as explained below. - If the lives of all tools in the group specified by the tool group number selection

signals (TL1 to TL512) have expired, the related information is cleared. Therefore, when a subsequent program command specifies the group number, tools are selected from the beginning. If the group specified by the tool group number selection signals (TL1 to TL512) contains at least one tool whose life has not expired, no special operation takes place.

NOTE Set the tool change reset signal TLRST from "0" to "1" only when

the control unit is not in the reset state (the RST signal is "1") and the following conditions are satisfied: 1) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 0 Reset state (the OP signal is "0") 2) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 1

<1> Reset state (the OP signal is "0") <2> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the

SPL signal are "0" and the OP signal is "1") <3> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the

SPL signal are "0") (In the automatic operation stop state, automatic operation

pause state, and automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1") during execution of a data setting command (G10 L3), however, the tool change reset signal TLRST is invalid.)

Individual tool change signal TLCHI <Fn064.2>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] When the tool life count is specified by duration, this signal informs that the life of the

currently used tool has expired. The signal can be used to cause an interrupt to program execution, to run a tool change program, and, after tool exchange, to resume the interrupted program execution.


- 1045 -

[Operation] The signal becomes "1" when: - The life of the currently used tool has expired. The signal becomes "0" when: - An individual tool change reset is executed.

Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI <Gn048.6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Resets the individual tool change signal TLCHI to "0".

[Operation] When this signal becomes "1", the control unit behaves as explained below. - The individual tool change signal is reset to”0”.

NOTE 1 These signals are valid only for tool life management in which the

tool life count type is specification by duration. 2 The individual tool change signal TLCHI is not cleared by a reset.

Tool skip signal TLSKP <Gn048.5>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Skips a tool whose life has not expired and selects the next tool forcibly. One of the

following two methods can be selected according to the setting of bit 3 (SIG) of parameter No. 6800: (i) Specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG = 1) Specify the group number of the tool to be skipped by using the tool group number

selection signals (TL1 to TL512), then set the tool skip signal to "1". The next T code command will then select the next tool in the group which is specified to be skipped.

(ii) Not specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG = 0)

Set the tool skip signal TLSKP to "1" without specifying any group number. The group to which the currently selected tool belongs is then assumed to be specified.

The next T code command will select the next tool in the group for which the skip is specified.

When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to "1" for the last tool, the tool change signal TLCH is set to "1".

[Operation] When this signal is set from "0" to "1", the control unit behaves as explained below: - Among the tools whose lives have not expired in the group for which a skip

operation is specified, the smallest tool number in the tool life management table is marked with "#". When the group is specified again by a T code command, the marked tool is skipped, and the next new tool is selected. When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to "1" for the last tool, the tool change signal TLCH is set to "1". CAUTION

The tool skip signal TLSKP can be used even in the automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1"), but a tool selection from a group by a T command is made when the command is buffered. This means that after the command is buffered, inputting the tool skip signal TLSKP does not select the next tool. Therefore, when supplying the tool skip signal TLSKP in the automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1"), disable tool selection, for example, by suppressing buffering before setting the signal from "0" to "1".


- 1046 -

New tool select signal TLNW <Fn064.1> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that a new tool has been selected from a group. This signal can be

used, for example, if the tool length offset value of a newly selected tool is to be measured automatically when the tool is selected.

[Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" if: A new tool in a tool group specified with a tool group number by a T code command

is selected because the life of the tool used so far in the group has expired. After the code signal for the new tool is sent out, the TLNW becomes "1" at the

same time when the tool function strobe signal TF is sent out. The signal becomes "0" if: The completion signal FIN for the strobe signal TF becomes to "1" when the TLNW

is "1".

Tool group number selection signals TL01 to TL128 <Gn047.0 to Gn047.7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals specify a tool group number. Before the tool change reset signal TLRST

or the tool skip signal TLSKP is input, the target group for the tool change reset operation or tool skip operation is specified with these signals.

[Operation] The table given below shows the correspondence between tool group numbers and the tool group signals by providing several examples. A binary number plus 1 indicates a tool group number. A group with a specified number is then selected.

TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL8 TL4 TL2 TL1 Tool group number

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 20 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 30 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 40 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 50 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 100 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 127 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 256

T command

Code signals T0 to T31

Strobe signal TF

New tool select signalTLNW

Completion signal FIN


- 1047 -

Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <Gn049.0 to Gn050.1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] If the life count is specified by duration, the life count can be overridden by setting bit 2

(LFV) of parameter No. 6800 = 1. Ten binary code signals are available, and they correspond to override values as follows: Override value = times Keep the override values within the range stated above. Where, if *TLVi is "1", Vi = 0 if *TLVi is "0", Vi = 1 Therefore, each signal has the following weight:

Signal Magnification *TLV0 0.1 *TLV1 0.2 *TLV2 0.4 *TLV3 0.8 *TLV4 1.6 *TLV5 3.2 *TLV6 6.4 *TLV7 12.8 *TLV8 25.6 *TLV9 51.2

[Example] If *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are "0", the override value is calculated as follows: 12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0 So, the life count is multiplied by 20. If all signals are "1", the override value is 0. So, set an override value within the range from 0 to 99.9 in steps of 0.1. If 99.9 times is exceeded, the actual override value is clamped by 99.9 times.

[Operation] The actual cutting time obtained by life counting specified by duration is multiplied by the override value specified by these signals, and the multiplication result is assumed to be the count time for tool life management. For example, let the override value be 0.1, and the actual cutting time be 1000 seconds. Then, the tool life count time is assumed to be 100 seconds.

Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Specifying a remaining life value to be used till selection of a new tool enables the tool

life arrival notice signal to be issued when life counting shows that the remaining life value of a group (life value minus life counter value) becomes lower than or equal to the remaining life setting, in order to inform in advance that the tool life will expire soon. Bit 4 (ARL) of parameter No. 6802 can be used to specify when (that is, when the life of a specific tool has expired or when the life of the last tool in a specific tool group has expired) to output the tool life arrival notice signal. Parameters Nos. 6844 and 6845 are used for the remaining life setting.

[Output cond.] The signal is set to "1" if: - Remaining life (life value - life counter value) ≤ remaining life setting

provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 0 - Remaining life (life value - life counter value) = remaining life setting

provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 1 The signal is reset to "0" if: - Remaining life (life value - life counter value) > remaining life setting

provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 0

Σ {2i × Vi}9 i=0


- 1048 -

- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) ≠ remaining life setting provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 1

NOTE 1 The signal changes when life counting is performed. 2 When using a life count override, reset bit 7 (RMT) of parameter

No. 6802 to 0. 3 When the life count is specified by duration, the unit of the

remaining life and remaining life setting to be compared varies depending on the life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805). If the tool life is counted every second, the unit of the values to be compared is one minute; if the tool life is counted every 0.1 seconds, the unit of the values to be compared is 0.1 minutes.

Tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Disables tool life counting for selected tools. [Operation] If the signal "1", the control unit behaves as explained below.

- No life counting is performed for selected tools.

NOTE The tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2> is valid if bit 6 (LFI) of parameter No. 6804 is "1".

Tool life counting disabled signal LFCIF<Fn093.2>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs that tool life counting is disabled for selected tools. [Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" when:

- Tool life counting is disabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is "1".

The signal becomes "0" when: - Tool life counting is enabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is

"0".

Remaining tool count notification signal TLAL<Fn154.0> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies that the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code

command is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846. [Output cond.] This signal becomes 1 when:

- The number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846.

This signal becomes 0: - When parameter No. 6846 is set to a value - When registration of life management data and removal of all groups by the G10

command is performed - When a group containing more groups than the setting of parameter No. 6846 is

selected by the T code command - When one of the following operations is performed for the group that generates the

tool remaining count notification signal <1> Execution data is cleared on the list screen of tool life management.


- 1049 -

<2> Tool groups are deleted in a batch, tool data is added, or tool data is cleared on the group editing screen of tool life management.

<3> Execution data is cleared by tool replacement reset signal (TLRST<Gn048.7>). <4> Life management data is changed or deleted by the G10 command. <5> One of the following FOCAS2 functions is executed. (cnc_clrcntinfo,

cnc_deltlifegrp, cnc_deltlifedt, cnc_instlifedt, cnc_wr1tlifedata, cnc_wr1tlifedat2, cnc_wr2tlifedata)

[Example] When three tools are registered in a group, if the number of remaining tools is set to 1 (parameter No. 6846 is 1), then a timing chart of tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is shown below. Tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is output at the same time with the T code of the third tool.

Timing chart of the tool remaining count notification signal

NOTE When parameter No. 6846 is 0, tool remaining count notification

signal TLAL is not output.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G0046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1

Gn047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01

Gn048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP LFCIV

Gn049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0

Gn050 *TLV9 *TLV8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn064 TLCHB TLCHI TLNW TLCH

Fn093 LFCIF

Fn154 TLAL

TF

First tool Second tool Third tool

T-code

TLAL


- 1050 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6800 M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1


#0 GS1 #1 GS2 For the maximum number of groups set in parameter No. 6813, up to four tools can be

registered per group. The combination of the number of registrable groups and the number of tools per group can be changed by setting GS1 and GS2.

GS2 GS1 Number of groups Number of tools0 0 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/8 1 to 16 0 1 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/4 1 to 8 1 0 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/2 1 to 4 1 1 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813) 1 to 2

NOTE After changing these parameters, set data again by using G10

L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).

#2 LTM The tool life count is specified by: 0: Count. 1: Duration.

NOTE After changing this parameter, set data again by using G10

L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).

#3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signal, the group number is: 0: Not input by the tool group number selection signals. 1: Input by the tool group number selection signals.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 0, a tool of the currently used group is

skipped.

#4 GRS When the tool change reset signal (TLRST) is input: 0: If the life of the group specified by the tool group number selection signals has

expired, the execution data of the group is cleared. 1: The execution data of all registered groups is cleared. If this parameter is set to 1, the execution data of all registered groups is cleared also when the clear operation to clear execution data is performed on the tool life management list screen.

#5 SNG When the tool skip signal (TLSKP) is input while a tool not controlled by the tool life management function is being used: 0: A tool of the most recently used group or a specified group (bit 3 (SIG) of parameter

No. 6800) is skipped. 1: The tool skip signal is ignored.


- 1051 -

#6 IGI Tool back numbers are: 0: Not ignored. 1: Ignored.

#7 M6T A T code specified in the same block as M06 is: 0: Assumed to be a back number. 1: Assumed to be a command specifying the next tool group.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 M6E EMD LVF TSM

6801 M6E EMD LVF

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 TSM In the tool life management function, life counting is performed as follows when more

than one offset is specified: 0: Counting is performed for each tool number. 1: Counting is performed for each tool.

#2 LVF When the life value is counted by duration in the tool life management function, tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <G049.0 to G050.1> are: 0: Not used. 1: Used.

#3 EMD In the tool life management function, the mark "*" indicating that the life has expired is displayed when: 0: The next tool is used. 1: The life has just expired.

NOTE If this parameter is set to 0, the "@" mark (indicating that the tool is in use) is kept displayed unless the next tool whose life has not expired is used. If this parameter is set to 1, marks are displayed in different ways depending on the life count type.

If the life count type is the duration specification type, the "*" mark (indicating that the life has expired) appears when the life has expired. If the life count type is the count specification type, one count is not assumed until the end of the program (M02, M30, and so on). Therefore, even when the life value and the tool life counter value match, the "*" mark (life has expired) does not appear. The "*" mark (life has expired) appears when the tool is used again by a tool group command (T code) or tool change command (M06) issued after the CNC is reset.

#7 M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06:

0: The T code is treated as a back number or the group number to be selected next. Which number is assumed depends on the setting of bit 7 (M6T) of parameter No.

6800. 1: Life counting for the tool group starts immediately.


- 1052 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6802 RMT TSK E17 TCO T99


#0 T99 When M99 of the main program is executed, and there is a the life was expired tool

group: 0: The tool change signal is not output. 1: The tool change signal is output, and the automatic operation becomes a stopped

state. If the life count is specified by use count and this parameter 1, the tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is output and the automatic operation becomes a stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is specified. If the life count type is the duration specification type, the automatic operation becomes a stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is specified.

M If the life count is specified by use count, after the M99 command is specified, a tool group command (T code) selects, from a specified group, a tool whose life has not expired, and the next tool change command (M06) increments the tool life counter by one.

T If the life count is specified by use count, when a tool group command (T code) is specified after the M99 command is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is selected from a specified group, and the tool life counter is incremented by one.

#1 TCO #2 E17

Specifies whether to allow the FOCAS2 or PMC window function to write tool information of a group being used or a group to be used next during automatic operation (the OP signal is set to "1").

6802#1(TCO) 1

6802#2(E17) Condition

0 1 0

Tool being used × � ○ Group being used or to be used next Tool not being used × ○ ○

During automatic operation Group neither being used nor to be used next ○ ○ ○

Not during automatic operation ○ ○ ○ ○: Tool information can be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window. ×: Tool information cannot be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window. When an attempt is made to write tool information from PMC window, completion

code 13 (REJECT ALARM) is returned. �: Tool information cannot be cleared.


- 1053 -

NOTE When tool information of a tool being used (marked with "@") in the group being used or to be used next or tool information of the most recently used tool (marked with "@") in a group that is neither the group being used nor the group to be used next is cleared, the life counter is reset to 0. It is possible to modify tool information of a tool in the group to be used next. However, because tool selection is already completed, the selected tool does not change even when the tool information is modified.

This parameter has no influence on modifications to tool information by edit operations from the tool life management screen.

#6 TSK If the count type in tool life management is the duration type, then when the last tool of a

group is skipped by a signal: 0: The count value for the last tool equals the life value. 1: The count value for the last tool remains unchanged.

#7 RMT The tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB is switched under the following conditions: 0: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life

counter value) is smaller than or equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is turned 0 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is greater than the remaining life setting.

1: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is turned 0 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is not equal to the remaining life setting.

NOTE When using the life count override feature, set bit 7 (RMT) of

parameter No. 6802 to 0. When the life count is specified by duration, the unit used for determining the result of comparison between the remaining life and the remaining life setting varies depending on the life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805). If the life is counted every second, the comparison is made in units of 1 minute; if the life is counted every 0.1 second, the comparison is made in units of 0.1 minute.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6804 LFI ETE TCI

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 TCI During automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"), editing of tool life data is:

0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.


- 1054 -

NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, tool life data can be edited even

during automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"). If the target group for editing is the group being used or the group to be used next, however, only presetting of the life counter is permitted, and other data cannot be modified.

#2 ETE In the tool life management screen, the mark of the tool at the life was expired of the final

tool in the group : 0: depends on setting parameter EMD (No.6801#3). 1: is "*" mark. If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 is set to 1, when the life counter of the final tool in the group becomes equal to the life value, display mark "*" in the final tool of the tool life management screen. When tool change signal TLCH<Fn064.0> is "1", the state of the life was expired of the tool can be read by reading tool information on the final tool in FOCAS2 or the PMC window.

#6 LFI In tool life management, counting of the life of a selected tool is: 0: Enabled. 1: Enabled or disabled according to the status of tool life counting disable signal

LFCIV<G048.2>.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6805 TAD TRU TRS FGL FCO

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows:

0: Every second. 1: Every 0.1 second. According to the setting of this parameter, the increment system of life values and tool life counter values displayed on the tool life management screen is set as follows:

Parameter FCO 0 1 Increment system for display and setting of life values and life counter values

1-minute increments

0.1-minute increments

NOTE After changing the setting of this parameter, set data again by using

G10L3;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).

#1 FGL If the life count type is the duration specification type, life data registered by G10 is: 0: In one-minute increments. 1: In 0.1-second increments.


- 1055 -

#5 TRS Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid when reset signal RST is not "1" and: 0: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0") is observed. 1: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0"), automatic operation stop state

(The STL and SPL signals are "0" and the OP signal is "1"), or the automatic operation pause state (the STL signal is "0" and the SPL signal is "1") is observed. The TLRST signal, however, is invalid when the automatic operation stop state, automatic operation pause state, and automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1") is observed during execution of a data setting command (G10L3).

#6 TRU When the life count type is the duration specification type, and the life is counted every

second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 0): 0: Cutting time less than one second is discarded and is not counted. 1: Cutting time less than one second is rounded up and is counted as one second.

NOTE If the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No.

6805 is set to 1), cutting time less than 0.1 second is always rounded up and is counted as 0.1 second.

#7 TAD With tool change type D (bit 7 (M6E) of parameter No. 6801 is set to 1), when a block

specifying M06 contains no T command: 0: An alarm PS0153 is issued. 1: No alarm is issued.

6810 Tool life management ignore number

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

This parameter sets the tool life management ignore number. When the value specified in a T code exceeds the value set in this parameter, the value obtained by subtracting the parameter-set value from the T code value is assumed to be the tool group number for tool life management.

6811 Tool life count restart M code

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 127 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)

When 0 is specified, it is ignored. When the life is specified by count, the tool change signal (TLCH) is output if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the tool life count restart M code is issued. The T code (tool life management group command) specified after the tool life count restart M code selects a tool whose life has not expired from a specified group, and the next M06 command increments the tool life counter by one. When the life is specified by duration, specifying the tool life count restart M code causes nothing. When 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life count restart M code is invalid. When the data of M code exceeds 127 values, set 0 in parameter No.6811, and set the value of M code in parameter No.13221. The data range of parameter No.13221 is from 0 to 255.


- 1056 -

6813 Maximum number of groups in tool life management

NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then

back on for the setting to become effective.

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] Group [Valid data range] 0, 8, 16 to 128

This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight. When this parameter is 0, 128 groups are set. Up to 128 groups can be set for each path.

NOTE If the power is turned on after this parameter is changed, all data in

the tool life management file is initialized. Therefore, the life management data of all paths that use the tool life management function must be set.

6844 Remaining tool life (use count)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] This range is the same as the tool life range.

This parameter sets a remaining tool life (use count) used to output the tool life arrival notice signal when the tool life is specified by use count. If a value greater than the tool life value or 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life arrival notice signal is not output.

6845 Remaining tool life (use duration)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] Not greater than the tool life value

This parameter sets the remaining tool life (use duration) used to output the tool life arrival notice signal when the tool life is specified by use duration. If a value greater than the tool life value or 0 is specified in this parameter, the tool life arrival notice signal is not output.

NOTE When the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter

No. 6805 = 1), the parameter value is in 0.1-minute increments.

6846

Number of remaining group tools


This parameter sets the number of remaining group tools.


- 1057 -

If the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the setting of this parameter, tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is output. When this parameter is set to 0, tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is not output.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8132 TLF




#0 TLF Tool life management is:

0: Not Used. 1: Used.

13221 M code for tool life count restart

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 255 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)

This parameter is ignored if it is 0. See descriptions of parameter No. 6811 for explanations about the operation of the tool life count restart M code. This parameter is used if the restart M code exceeds 127. Reset parameter No. 6811 to 0, and set this parameter with an M code value.

13265 H code for enabling tool length compensation in tool life management


Usually, issuing H99 makes the H code for a tool in current use usable for tool length compensation. Specifying an arbitrary H code with this parameter causes the specified H code to be used in place of H99. If 0 is specified with this parameter, H99 is assumed. The valid data range is 0 to 9999.

13266 D code for enabling cutter compensation in tool life management


Usually, issuing D99 makes the D code for a tool in current use usable for cutter compensation. Specifying an arbitrary D code with this parameter causes the specified D code to be used in place of D99. If 0 is specified with this parameter, D99 is assumed. The valid data range is 0 to 9999.


- 1058 -

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 In registration (G10L3 to G11) of tool life management data,

an address other than Q1, Q2, P1, and P2 or an unusable address was specified.

PS0150 ILLEGAL LIFE GROUP NUMBER The tool group number exceeded the maximum allowable value. The tool group number (P after specification of G10 L3;) or the group number given by the tool life management T code in a machining program.

PS0151 GROUP NOT FOUND AT LIFE DATA The tool group specified in a machining program is not set in tool life management data.

PS0152 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL NUMBER The number of tools registered in one group exceeded the maximum allowable registration tool number.

PS0153 T-CODE NOT FOUND In registration of tool life data, a block in which the T code needs to be specified does not include the T code. Alternatively, in tool exchange method D, M06 is specified solely. Modify the program.

PS0154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP The H99 command, D99 command, or the H/D code set by parameters No. 13265 and No. 13266 was specified when no tool belonging to a group is used.

PS0155 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND The T code specified in the same block as M06 in the machining program does not correspond to the block currently being used. Modify the program.

PS0156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND The P and L commands are not specified in the beginning of a program for setting a tool group. Modify the program.

PS0157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS In registration of tool life management data, the group setting command block counts of P (group number) and L (tool life) exceeded the maximum group count.

PS0158 TOOL LIFE VALUE OUT OF RANGE The life value that is being set is too large. Change the setting.

PS0159 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA Tool life management data is corrupted for some reason. Register the tool data in the tool group or the tool data in the group again by G10L3; or MDI input.

PS0431 ILLEGAL T/R DATA OF TOOL LIFE The arbitrary group number (T) or remaining amount setting (R) is invalid.

IO1104 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE PAIRS The maximum number of tool life management pairs is exceeded. Modify the setting of the maximum number of tool life management pairs in parameter No. 6813.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Tool life management

B-64303EN-1/02 12.PROGRAM COMMAND

- 1059 -

12 PROGRAM COMMAND Chapter 12, "PROGRAM COMMAND", consists of the following sections: 12.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL

POINT PROGRAMMING.........................................................................................................1059 12.2 G CODE SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................1061 12.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................1067 12.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS.........1069 12.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ...............................................................................................1070 12.6 CUSTOM MACRO....................................................................................................................1075 12.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING.........................................................................................1096 12.8 CANNED CYCLE (T Series) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T Series)......1111 12.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M Series) ...........................................1120 12.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) .............................................1121 12.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T Series) ...........................................................1126 12.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M Series) ...................................................................................1128 12.13 SCALING (M Series).................................................................................................................1138 12.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (M Series) ..................................................................1145 12.15 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER...........................................................................1146 12.16 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M Series) ...................1147 12.17 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T Series) ........................................................1148 12.18 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T Series)........................................1150 12.19 PATTERN DATA INPUT .........................................................................................................1152

12.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

Overview Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses: X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,I,J,K,Q,R,F .......M series (for a type common to all axes) X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,I,J,K,R,F ...........Lathe system There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator-type notation and standard notation. When calculator-type decimal point notation is used, a value without decimal point is considered to be specified in millimeters, inches or degree. When standard decimal point notation is used, such a value is considered to be specified in least input increments. Select either calculator-type or standard decimal point notation by using the parameter DPI (No. 3401#0). Setting the parameter AXDx (No. 3455#0) to 1 enables the calculator-type decimal input to be set up for individual axes separately. Values can be specified both with and without decimal point in a single program.

Program command Pocket calculator type decimal point programming

Standard type decimal point programming

X1000 Command value without decimal point

1000mm Unit : mm

1mm Unit : Least input increment (0.001mm)

X1000.0 Command value with decimal point

1000mm Unit : mm

1000mm Unit : mm

12.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64303EN-1/02

- 1060 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3401 DPI


#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point

0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input) 1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type

decimal point input)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3455 AXDx

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis

#0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used,

the value is determined: 0: In accordance with the least input increment. (Normal decimal point input) 1: In millimeters, inches, or seconds. (calculator-type decimal point input)

NOTE This parameter specifies the calculator-type decimal point input

function for each axis.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no

decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were specified.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Decimal point programming


- 1061 -

12.2 G CODE SYSTEM

12.2.1 G Code List in the Lathe System

T

Overview There are three G code systems : A,B, and C. Select a G code system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No. 3401#6).

Table 12.2.1 (a) G code list G code system

A B C Group Function

G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse) G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed) G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW G03 G03 G03

01

Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW G04 G04 G04 Dwell

G05.4 G05.4 G05.4 HRV3 on/off G07.1 (G107)

G07.1 (G107)

G07.1 (G107)

Cylindrical interpolation

G08 G08 G08 Advanced preview control G09 G09 G09 Exact stop G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input G11 G11 G11

00

Programmable data input mode cancel G12.1 (G112)

G12.1 (G112)

G12.1 (G112)

Polar coordinate interpolation mode

G13.1 (G113)

G13.1 (G113)

G13.1 (G113)

21 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode

G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection G18 G18 G18 ZpXp plane selection G19 G19 G19

16 YpZp plane selection

G20 G20 G70 Input in inch G21 G21 G71

06 Input in mm

G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on G23 G23 G23

09 Stored stroke check function off

G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off

G26 G26 G26 08

Spindle speed fluctuation detection on G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return G31 G31 G31

00

Skip function G32 G33 G33 Threading G34 G34 G34 Variable lead threading G36 G36 G36 Automatic tool offset (X axis) G37 G37 G37 Automatic tool offset (Z axis) G39 G39 G39

01

Tool nose radius compensation: corner rounding interpolationG40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation : cancel G41 G41 G41 Tool nose radius compensation : left G42 G42 G42

07 Tool nose radius compensation : right

G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max spindle speed clamp G50.3 G92.1 G92.1

00 Workpiece coordinate system preset


- 1062 -



G50.2 (G250)

G50.2 (G250)

G50.2 (G250)

Polygon turning cancel

G51.2 (G251)

G51.2 (G251)

G51.2 (G251)

20 Polygon turning

G50.4 G50.4 G50.4 Cancel synchronous control G50.5 G50.5 G50.5 Cancel composite control G50.6 G50.6 G50.6 Cancel superimposed control G51.4 G51.4 G51.4 Start synchronous control G51.5 G51.5 G51.5 Start composite control G51.6 G51.6 G51.6 Start superimposed control G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting G53 G53 G53

00

Machine coordinate system setting G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection G55 G55 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection G56 G56 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection G57 G57 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection G58 G58 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection G59 G59 G59

14

Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode G63 G63 G63 Tapping mode G64 G64 G64

15 Cutting mode

G65 G65 G65 00 Macro call G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call G67 G67 G67

12 Macro modal call cancel

G68 G68 G68 Mirror image on for double turret or balance cutting mode

G69 G69 G69 04 Mirror image off for double turret or balance cutting mode

cancel G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeating cycle G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling cycle G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle G76 G76 G78

00

Multiple-thread cutting cycle G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machine) G72 G72 G73 Traverse direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine) G73 G73 G74 Oscillation grinding cycle (for grinding machine) G74 G74 G75

01

Oscillation direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine) G80

G80 G80 Canned cycle cancel for drilling Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation

G81 G81 G81 Spot drilling (FS10/11-T format) Electronic gear box : synchronization start

G82 G82 G82 Counter boring (FS10/11-T format) G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling

G83.1 G83.1 G83.1 High-speed peck drilling cycle (FS10/11-T format) G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping

G84.2 G84.2 G84.2

10

Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11-T format) G85 G85 G85 Cycle for face boring G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping G89 G89 G89

10

Cycle for side boring


- 1063 -



G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle G92 G78 G21 Threading cycle G94 G79 G24

01 End face turning cycle

G91.1 G91.1 G91.1 00 Maximum specified incremental amount check G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control G97 G97 G97

02 Constant surface speed control cancel

G96.1 G96.1 G96.1 Spindle indexing execution (waiting for completion) G96.2 G96.2 G96.2 Spindle indexing execution (not waiting for completion) G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 Spindle indexing completion check G96.4 G96.4 G96.4

00

SV speed control mode ON G98 G94 G94 Feed per minute G99 G95 G95

05 Feed per revolution

- G90 G90 Absolute programming - G91 G91

03 Incremental programming

- G98 G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level - G99 G99

11 Canned cycle : return to R point level

12.2.2 G Code List in the Machining Center System

M Table 12.2.2 (a) G code list

G code Group Function G00 Positioning (rapid traverse) G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed) G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW G03

01

Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW G04 Dwell, Exact stop G05.1 AI advanced preview control / AI contour control G05.4 HRV3 on/off G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation G09 Exact stop G10 Programmable data input G11

00

Programmable data input mode cancel G15 Polar coordinates command cancel G16

17 Polar coordinates command

G17 XpYp plane selection G18 ZpXp plane selection G19

02 YpZp plane selection

Xp: X axis or its parallel axis Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis

G20 Input in inch G21

06 Input in mm

G22 Stored stroke check function on G23

04 Stored stroke check function off

G27 Reference position return check G28 Automatic return to reference position G29 Movement from reference position G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return G31

00

Skip function G33 01 Threading G37 Automatic tool length measurement G39

00 Cutter compensation : corner circular interpolation


- 1064 -

Table 12.2.2 (a) G code list G code Group Function

G40 Cutter compensation : cancel G41 Cutter compensation : left G42

07 Cutter compensation : right

G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode G41.1 Normal direction control on : left G42.1

19 Normal direction control on : right

G43 Tool length compensation + G44

08 Tool length compensation -

G45 Tool offset : increase G46 Tool offset : decrease G47 Tool offset : double increase G48

00

Tool offset : double decrease G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel G50 Scaling cancel G51

11 Scaling

G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel G51.1

22 Programmable mirror image

G52 Local coordinate system setting G53

00 Machine coordinate system setting

G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection G59

14

Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection G60 00 Single direction positioning G61 Exact stop mode G62 Automatic corner override G63 Tapping mode G64

15

Cutting mode G65 00 Macro call G66 Macro modal call G67

12 Macro modal call cancel

G68 Coordinate system rotation mode on G69

16 Coordinate system rotation mode off

G73 Peck drilling cycle G74

09 Left-handed tapping cycle

G75 01 Plunge grinding cycle (for grinding machine) G76 09 Fine boring cycle G77 Plunge direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine) G78 Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine) G79

01 Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine)


- 1065 -

Table 12.2.2 (a) G code list G code Group Function

G80 Canned cycle cancel Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation

G81 Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle Electronic gear box : synchronization start

G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle G83 Peck drilling cycle G84 Tapping cycle G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format) G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format) G85 Boring cycle G86 Boring cycle G87 Back boring cycle G88 Boring cycle G89

09

Boring cycle G90 Absolute programming G91

03 Incremental programming

G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed G92.1

00 Workpiece coordinate system preset

G93 Inverse time feed G94 Feed per minute G95

05 Feed per revolution

G96 Constant surface speed control G97

13 Constant surface speed control cancel

G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level G99

10 Canned cycle : return to R point level

G160 In-feed control cancel (for grinding machine) G161

20 In-feed control (for grinding machine)

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 GSC GSB

3401


#6 GSB The G code system is set. #7 GSC

GSC GSB G code 0 0 G code system A 0 1 G code system B 1 0 G code system C

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G23 CLR FPM G91 G01 3402

G23 CLR G70 G91 G19 G18 G01



- 1066 -

#0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G00 mode (positioning) 1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)

#1 G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G17 mode (plane XY) 1: G18 mode (plane ZX)

#2 G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 is followed. 1: G19 mode (plane YZ) When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 to 0.

G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode 0 0 G17 mode (X-Y plane) 0 1 G18 mode (Z-X plane) 1 0 G19 mode (Y-Z plane)

#3 G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute command) 1: G91 mode (incremental command)

#4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state: 0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set. 1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set.

#5 G70 The commands for inch input and metric input are: 0: G20 (inch input) and G21 (metric input). 1: G70 (inch input) and G71 (metric input).

#6 CLR Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and emergency stop signal 0: Cause reset state. 1: Cause clear state. For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the Operator’s Manual.

#7 G23 When the power is turned on 0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on) 1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code is specified.


- 1067 -

Note NOTE 1 When the power is turned on or the cleared state is set by a reset (bit 6 (CLR) of

parameter No. 3402 is set to 1), modal G codes are placed in the following states: (1) G codes marked with in Table 12.2 are enabled. (2) When the system is cleared due to power-on or reset, whichever specified,

either G20 or G21, remains effective. (3) Parameter G23 (No. 3402#7) is used to specify whether G22 or G23 is to be

selected upon power-on. The selection of G22 or G23 is not, however, changed when the CNC is cleared upon a reset. When the system is cleared due to reset, whichever specified, either G22 or G23, remains effective.

2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single-shot G codes. 3 Alarm PS0010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G code list is

specified or a G code without a corresponding option is specified. 4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same block. If G codes of the same group are specified in the same block, the G code

specified last is valid. 5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the canned cycle is

canceled in the same way as when a G80 command is specified. G codes of group 01 are not affected by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.

6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the initial level is provided at the return point.

7 G codes are displayed for each group number.


Preparatory function (G function) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Status when turning power on, when clear and when reset

12.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

Overview A program consists of the following components:

Table 12.3 (a) Program components Components Descriptions

Program code start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc. Program start Symbol indicating the start of a program Program section Commands for machining Comment section Comments or directions for the operator Program code end Symbol indicating the end of a program file


- 1068 -

Program code start % TITLE

O0001 ;

M30 ;

%

(COMMENT) Program section

Leader section

Program start

Comment section

Program code end

;

Fig. 12.3 (a) Program configuration

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 CTV

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit

#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.

0: Performed 1: Not performed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE N99


#5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is

assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed

#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3404 SBP


#2 SBP In an external device subprogram call (M198), the address P format is based on:

0: File number specification 1: Program number specification

NOTE In memory card operation, the program number specification

format is used, regardless of the setting of this parameter.


- 1069 -

6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used to execute external device subprogram calls.

Alarm and message Number Message Description SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.

The read code that caused the TH error and how many statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics screen.

SR0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error. The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No. 0000#0 to “0”.

PS5010 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a block. This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end of the NC program is read.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program configuration

12.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS

The following table lists the combinations of program storage sizes and the total number of registrable programs. ・Series 0i-TD

Series 0i-TD ModelItem Package 1 Package 2

320Kbyte － ○ 512Kbyte ○ － Part program storage size

1Mbyte (2-path control) ○ － 400 ○ ○ Number of registerable programs

800 (2-path control) ○ －・Series 0i-MD

Series 0i-MD ModelItem Package 1 Package 2 Option

320Kbyte － ○ － 512Kbyte ○ －－ Part program storage size 2Mbyte －－ ○

Number of registerable programs 400 ○ ○ －


- 1070 -

・Series 0i Mate Model

Item Series 0i Mate

Part program storage size 512Kbyte ○ Number of registerable programs 400 ○

NOTE 1 The program storage size means the

maximum size of a program if the program is the one and only program registered.

2 If more than one program is registered, the total size of registerable programs reduces for the following reason. The Series 0i-D manage programs in page units. The unit of program storage is managed also in page units. When a program is created, as many pages as necessary to store the program are secured, and the program is stored on these pages. Generally, the last program storage page has an unused area (Fig. 1). This unused area cannot be used to store any other program. For the sake of program management, it is regarded as an area in use. The Series FS0i-C uses a similar way of management, but the unit of pages in it differs from that in the FS0i-D. So, if more than one program is registered in the Series 0i-D, the total program size of registerable programs in the Series 0i-D differs from that in the FS0i-C.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program management

12.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION

Overview Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code. Conventionally, inch/metric switching must be performed at the reference position (machine coordinate system origin). However, setting bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 to 1 enables inch/metric switching to be performed in the reference position (parameter No. 1240). However, it is necessary to enable (set bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 to 0) the workpiece coordinate system.

Example of creating program O0001

O0001 ; N1 G01 ;

M30 ;

First page

Second page

Last page

Program O0001

Unusable for any other program

(Area in use)

N100 … ;

(Area in use)

(Area in use)

(Unused area)


- 1071 -

Setting bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 enables inch/metric switching to be performed even in positions other than the reference position. However, it is necessary to enable (set bit 0 (NWZ) and bit 1 (NWC) of parameter No. 8136 to 0 and 1, respectively) the workpiece coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system presetting.

Signal Inch input signal INCH<Fn002.0>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is active. [Output cond.] "1"indicates that the inch input mode (G20) is in progress, and "0" indicates that metric

input mode (G21) is in progress. This signal changes to the corresponding state when modes are switched using the setting data display on the MDI panel.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn002 INCH

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 INI


#2 INI Unit of input

0: In metrics 1: In inches

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1001 INM




#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0: In mm (metric system machine) 1: In inches (inch system machine)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx





- 1072 -

#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis. #1 ROSx

ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis

(1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°) (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624)

0 1 Rotation axis (A type) (1) Inch/metric conversion is not done. (2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate values

are rounded or not rounded by parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and #2(RRLx). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No.3624)(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position

return direction and the move amount does not exceed one rotation. 1 1 Rotation axis (B type)

(1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are not done.

(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).

(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624) (4) Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index table indexing

function (M series)

Except for the above.

Setting is invalid (unused)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3104 MCN


#0 MCN Machine position

0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines.

1: When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3405 AUX


#0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input

format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code signal) relative to a specified value is such that: 0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input. 1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for

metric input. When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value multiplied by a value indicated below.

Increment system Parameter AUX=0 Parameter AUX=1 IS-A for reference axis 100 times 100 timesIS-B for reference axis 1000 times 1000 timesMetric input

system IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 10000 timesIS-A for reference axis 100 times 1000 timesIS-B for reference axis 1000 times 10000 timesInch input

system IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 100000 times


- 1073 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8136 NWC NWZ




#0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is:


#1 NWC Workpiece coordinate system preset is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11222 CIM NIM

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 NIM Automatic conversion of a coordinate system by an inch/metric conversion command

(G20 or G21) is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed.

#1 CIM When an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is specified, if the workpiece coordinate system is shifted by the shift amount as described below: 0: An alarm (PS1298) is issued. 1: Clearing is performed. If bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is set to 1, or if bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 is set to 1, this parameter clears the following: • Manual intervention made when the manual absolute signal is off • Issuance of a move command with the machine locked • Movement by handle interrupt • Operation with a mirror image • Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or

workpiece coordinate system is set up

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 14000 IMAx IRFx





- 1074 -

#2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. When this function is enabled for an axis, if an attempt to switch between the inch and metric unit is made although the tool is not at the reference position on that axis, an alarm (PS5362) is issued, and switching between the inch and metric unit is canceled. Be sure to move the tool to the reference position by, for example, specifying G28 before switching between the inch and metric unit.

NOTE 1 This function enables the inch/metric switching commands (G20

and G21) at the reference position. It does not enable the switching of the setting input unit (bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000).

2 Swithching between inch and metric by setting the setting input unit (bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000) is enabled only when the machine coordinate of the first reference position is 0 (parameter No. 1240 is 0) and presence on the first reference position is assumed. For a system in which the machine coordinate of the first reference position is not 0, set this parameter to 1 and specify G20/G21 in the first reference position to switch between inch and metric.

#7 IMAx When switching between inch and millimeter was performed in a position other than the

reference position: 0: An alarm occurs. 1: No alarm occurs.

NOTE Set this parameter to 1 for the rotation axis or other axes not

related to inch/millimeter switching.

Warning WARNING

When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and vice versa, tool compensation values are automatically converted and need not be re-set.

Note

NOTE 1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are

different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error is not accumulated.

2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000.

3 If a function selected using bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 or bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is not used, be sure to perform inch/metric switching at the reference position (machine coordinate system origin).


- 1075 -

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS1298 ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC

CONVERSION An error occurred during inch/metric switching.

PS5362 CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS An inch/metric conversion was performed at a position other than the reference position. Perform an inch/metric conversion after returning to the reference position.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Inch metric conversion (G20, G21)

12.6 CUSTOM MACRO

12.6.1 Custom Macro

Overview A subprogram is useful for repeatedly executing the same operation. With the custom macro function, however, variables, operation commands, conditional branches, and so forth can be used to create general-purpose programs more simply for pocketing, user-specific canned cycles, and so forth. From a machining program, a custom macro can be called with a simple instruction as in the case of a subprogram.

O0001 ;:::

G65P9010 R50.0 L2 ;::

M30 ;

Machining program Custom macro

O9010 ;#1=#18/2 ;G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;

G02 X#1 Y-#1 R#1 ;:::

M99 ;

Thus, when a function is programmed as a custom macro body, the function can be made more universal. This means that a program can be created using variables for values that can change or are not defined yet. This feature also leads to application of group technology. For example, classify similar workpieces into a group and create a general-purpose custom macro by using variables for such a group. Thus, the need for programming for an individual workpiece in the group can be eliminated by assigning desired values to the variables.

r β

α

As an example, the bolt hole circle shown above can be created simply. By creating and once registering a custom macro for the bolt hole circle, the CNC can operate as if it had a bolt hole circle function.


- 1076 -

The programmer can use the bolt hole circle function by remembering the following command: G65 Pp Rr Aα Bβ Kk ; P : Macro number of bolt hole circle r : Radius α: Start angle β: Angle between circles k : Number of circles

Signal Custom Macro Input Signals

UI000 to UI015<Gn054,Gn055>, UI016 to UI031<Gn056,Gn057>, UI100 to UI131<Gn276 to Gn279>, UI200 to UI231<Gn280 to Gn283> UI300 to UI331<Gn284 to Gn287>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by a custom macro

as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros and the PMC. These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below. - When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 0 :

Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values UI000 UI001 UI002 UI003

: UI014 UI015

1 1 1 1 : 1 1

#1000 #1001 #1002 #1003

: #1014 #1015

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

UI000 to UI015 16 #1032 Unsigned 16-bit binary code *1 *1 Variable value #1032 = { }∑

=

×+15

02]1000[#

i

ii

These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement. - When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 1 :

Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values UI000 UI001 UI002 UI003

: UI030 UI031

1 1 1 1 : 1 1

#1000 #1001 #1002 #1003

: #1030 #1031

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

UI000 to UI031 32 #1032 Signed 32-bit binary code *1 UI100 to UI131 32 #1033 Signed 32-bit binary code *1 UI200 to UI231 32 #1034 Signed 32-bit binary code *1 UI300 to UI331 32 #1035 Signed 32-bit binary code *1

*1 Variable value #(1032+n) = { }∑=

×−×30

031

31i 22

i

i VV

Where Vi=0 when UIni is “0” and Vi=1 when UIni is “1” n : 0 to 3

These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement.


- 1077 -

Custom Macro Output Signals UO000 to UO015<Fn054,Fn055>, UO100 to UO131<Fn056 to Fn059>

UO016 to UO031<Fn276,Fn277>, UO200 to UO231<Fn280 to Fn283> UO300 to UO331<Fn284 to Fn287>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a

custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros and the PMC. These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below. - When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 0 :

Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values UO000 UO001 UO002 UO003

: UO014 UO015

1 1 1 1 : 1 1

#1100 #1101 #1102 #1103

: #1114 #1115

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

UO000 to UO015 16 #1132 Unsigned 16-bit binary code *1 UO100 to UO131 32 #1133 Signed 32-bit binary code *2

*1 Variable value #1132 = { }∑=

×+15

0

2]1100[#i

ii

*2 Variable value #1133 = { }∑=

×−×30

031

31i 22

i

i VV

Where Vi=0 when UO1i is “0”and Vi=1 when UO1i is “1” These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as on the right side. The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side. - When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 1 :

Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values UO000 UO001 UO002 UO003

: UO030 UO031

1 1 1 1 : 1 1

#1100 #1101 #1102 #1103

: #1130 #1131

"0" at 0 and "1" at 1

UO000 to UO031 32 #1132 Signed 32-bit binary code *1 UO100 to UO131 32 #1133 Signed 32-bit binary code *1 UO200 to UO231 32 #1134 Signed 32-bit binary code *1 UO300 to UO331 32 #1135 Signed 32-bit binary code *1

*1 Variable value #(1132+n) = { }∑=

×−×30

031

31i 22

i

i VV

Where Vi=0 when UOni is “0”and Vi=1 when UOni is “1” n : 0 to 3

These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as on the right side. The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side.


- 1078 -

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000

















- 1079 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000

Fn055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008















Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBV SBM HGO MGO G67

6000 SBV SBM HGO V10 MGO G67


#0 G67 If the macro continuous-state call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro

continuous-state call mode (G66) is not set: 0: Alarm PS0122 is issued. 1: The specification of G67 is ignored.

#1 MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high-speed branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is: 0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the

executed program. 1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program.

#3 V10 As system variable numbers for tool offset: 0 : The standard system variable numbers for the Series 0 are used. 1 : The same system variable numbers as those used for the Series 10/11 are used.


- 1080 -

The tables below indicate the system variables for tool offset numbers 1 to 400. The values for tool offset numbers 1 to 200 can be read from or assigned to the system variables in parentheses. (1) Tool offset memory A

System variable number V10 = 0 V10 = 1

Wear offset value #10001 to #10400 (#2001 to #2200)

#10001 to #10400 (#2001 to #2200)

(2) Tool offset memory C System variable number

V10 = 0 V10 = 1

Wear offset value #11001 to #11400 (#2201 to #2400)

#10001 to #10400 (#2001 to #2200) Tool length

offset Geometry offset value #10001 to #10400

(#2001 to #2200) #11001 to #11400 (#2201 to #2400)

Wear offset value #13001 to #13400 #12001 to #12400 Tool radius offset Geometry offset value #12001 to #12400 #13001 to #13400

#4 HGO When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is executed, a high-speed

branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before the executed statement is: 0: Not made. 1: Made.

#5 SBM Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the single block 1: Stops the single block If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use bit 7 (SBV) of parameter No. 6000.

#7 SBV Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the single block 1: Enable/disable single block stop with system variable #3003

Parameter SBM (No.6000#5) 0 1

0 Disables single block stop. Parameter SBV

(No.6000#7) 1 Enables single block stop. (With variable #3003, single block stop can be enabled/disabled.)

Enables single block stop. (With variable #3003, single block stop cannot be enabled/disabled. Single block stop is enabled at all times.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6001 CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT MIF


#0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on:

0: Standard specification. (The signals UI000 to UI015, UO000 to UO015, and UO100 to UO131 are used.) 1: Extended specification. (The signals UI000 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,

UO000 to UO031, UO100 to UO131, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are used.)


- 1081 -

#1 PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command 0: Outputs a space 1: Outputs no data

#3 PV5 Custom macro common variables: 0: #500 to #599 are output. (Note) 1: #100 to #199 and #500 to 599 are output. (Note)

NOTE The settings of parameter No. 8135 are described below.

When the parameter PV5=0

Bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No.8135 Addition of custom macro common variables

1 (Disabled) 0 (Enabled) #500 to #549 #500 to #999

When the parameter PV5=1


1 (Disabled) 0 (Enabled) #100 to #149 and #500 to #549 #100 to #199 and #500 to #999

#4 CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT command

0: Outputs only “LF” after data is output 1: Outputs “LF” and “CR” after data is output

#5 TCS Custom macro (subprogram) 0: Not called using a T code 1: Called using a T code

#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are: 0: Cleared to <null> by reset 1: Not cleared by reset

NOTE The range of common variables cleared during power-off varies as

shown below depending on the bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No. 8135.


1 (Disabled) 0 (Enabled) #100 to #149 #100 to #199

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

VHD NAT 6004

D10 NAT



- 1082 -

#0 NAT The results of the custom macro functions ATAN (with 2 arguments) and ASIN are specified as follows: 0: The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0. The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0. 1: The result of ATAN is -180.0 to 0 to 180.0. The result of ASIN is -90.0 to 0 to 90.0.

#2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5125: 0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is

read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation memories are available (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0)).

1: An interrupt travel distance based on manual handle interrupt is read.

#5 D10 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401 through #2800, as Series 10/11 are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. When bit 3 (V10) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1

D code Geometry Wear Compensation

number Variable number Variable name Variable

number Variable name

1 #2401 [#_OFSDG[1]] #2601 [#_OFSDW[1]] 2 #2402 [#_OFSDG[2]] #2602 [#_OFSDW[2]] 3 #2403 [#_OFSDG[3]] #2603 [#_OFSDW[3]] : : : : :

199 #2599 [#_OFSDG[199]] #2799 [#_OFSDW[199]] 200 #2600 [#_OFSDG[200]] #2800 [#_OFSDW[200]]

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6007 CVA


#4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:

0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications. 1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed. Example) When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local variable #24 in the calling

program is set as follows: Command CVA=0 CVA=1

#24 0.01 0.01 ADP[#24] 10.0 0.01

NOTE External operations are the same unless the ADP function is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6008 IJK GMP ADD ISO KOP DSM MCA F0C



- 1083 -

#0 F0C The precision of operation is based on:

0: New specification. 1: FS0i-C compatible specification.

NOTE For details, refer to the custom macro chapter in the Operator’s

Manual (B-64304EN).

#1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows: 0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to variable #3000 and

the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 200 can be assigned to variable #3000.)

1: A value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to variable #3000.)

(Example) Execution of #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE); When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0: The alarm screen displays "MC3001 ALARM MESSAGE". When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1: The alarm screen displays "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE".

#2 DSM On the custom macro screen, the rewriting of a system variable that can be specified (written) on the left side from the MDI panel is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

#3 KOP When the NC is reset in the state where the line is made open by POPEN: 0: Communication continues, and the line is left open. 1: Communication stops, and the line is closed.

#4 ISO 0: When the EIA code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *, =, ?,

@, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018. 1: When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #,

*, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.

#5 ADD When the number of digits in the integer part, a, in the format specification [a,b] of the DPRNT statement is less than the number of digits in the integer part of an output variable value: 0: The specified number of digits only are output, with the unspecified digits discarded. 1: An alarm for excessive digits is issued.

#6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or a particular code during the calling of a G code, and the calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or particular code are: 0: Not allowed. (They are executed as an ordinary G, M, S, T, second auxiliary

function code, and NC address.) 1: Allowed.

#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments: 0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined. 1: Argument specification I is always used.


- 1084 -

Example When K_J_I_ is specified: - When this parameter is set to 0:

Argument specification II is used and K=#6, J=#8, and I=#10 are specified.

- When this parameter is set to1: Argument specification I is used and I=#4, J=#5, and K=#6 are specified regardless of the specification order. (Argument specification II cannot be used.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6018 _7 _6 _5 _4 _3 _2 _1 _0


*0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set. =0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set. #0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set. [0 to [7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set. ]0 to ]7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set. ?0 to ?7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set. @0 to @7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set. &0 to &7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set. _0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.

0: A corresponding bit is 0. 1: A corresponding bit is 1.

6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls


Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used to execute external device subprogram calls.


- 1085 -

6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 500 to 999

Among the common variables (#500 to #999), the range of common variables specified by this parameter can be protected (by setting their attributes to read-only). If a write attempt (on the left side) is made, an alarm is issued.

NOTE Set 0 in both parameter No. 6031 and No. 6032 not to protect

common variables.

6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 )

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 100

When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths). Common variables #100 to #199 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common variables is not exceeded.

Example When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036 #100 to #119: Shared by all paths #120 to #199: Used by each path independently

NOTE When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is

not used.

Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999) 6037


When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths). Common variables #500 to #999 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common variables is not exceeded.

Example When 50 is set in parameter No. 6037 #500 to #549: Shared by all paths

#550 to #999: Used by each path independently


- 1086 -

NOTE When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is

not used.

6038 Start G code used to call a custom macro

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] -9999 to 9999

6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code


6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros


Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6039 can be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6040 to disable this mode of calling. If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6038, the modal call mode is entered. Example) When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 1000, and parameter No.

6040 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:

G900 → O1000 G901 → O1001 G902 → O1002 : G999 → O1099 When the setting of parameter No. 6038 is changed to -900, the same set of custom

macro calls (modal calls) is defined.

NOTE 1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these

parameters are disabled: 1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each

parameter 2) ((Value of parameter No.6039) + (value of parameter No.6040) -

1) > 9999 2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not

allowed. 3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes

specified in parameter No.6050 to No.6059, the calls specified by parameter No.6050 to 6059 are made preferentially.


- 1087 -

6041 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro


6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram


6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code


6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes)


Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the program number set in 6045 can be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6046 to disable this mode of calling. Example) When parameter No. 6044 = 80000000, parameter No. 6045 = 3000, and parameter

No. 6046 = 100 are set, a set of 100 subprogram calls is defined as follows: M80000000 → O3000 M80000001 → O3001 M80000002 → O3002 : M80000099 → O3099



parameter 2) ((Value of parameter No. 6045) + (value of parameter No. 6046)

- 1) > 9999 2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes

specified in parameter No. 6071 to No. 6079, the calls specified by parameter No. 6071 to 6079 are made preferentially.

6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path


- 1088 -

[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999

6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code


6049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros called by M codes)


Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M codes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 6047, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6048 can be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6049 to disable this mode of calling. Example) When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter

No. 6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:

M90000000 → O4000 M90000001 → O4001 M90000002 → O4002 : M90000099 → O4099



parameter 2) ((Value of parameter No. 6048) + (value of parameter No. 6049)

- 1) > 9999 2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes

specified in parameter No. 6080 through No. 6089, the calls specified by parameter No. 6080 through 6089 are made preferentially.

6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010

to 6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)

Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 to 9019. However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.


- 1089 -

NOTE A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by G00.

6060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040

to 6069 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9049


Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9040 to 9049. However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G1.1. Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No. 6007. Set G codes in the format Gm.n. The value expressed by (m×10+n) is set in the parameter. The values m and n must satisfy the following relationships: 0 ≤m ≤99, 0 ≤n ≤9.

NOTE Parameter Nos. 6060 to 6069 are valid when bit 0 (DPG) of

parameter No. 6007 is set to 1.

6071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001 to

6079 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9009

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)

These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 to 9009.

NOTE 1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number

is called preferentially. For example, if 100 is set in parameter No. 6071 and 6072, and programs O9001 and O9002 both exist, O9001 is called when M100 is specified.

2 A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by M00.

6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020 to

6089 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9029


Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 to 9029. The simple call mode is set.


- 1090 -

NOTE 1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number

is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameter No. 6081 and No. 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist, O9021 is called when M200 is specified.

2 If the same M code is set in a parameter (No. 6071 to No. 6079) used to call subprograms and in a parameter (No. 6080 to No. 6089) used to call custom macros, a custom macro is called preferentially. For example, if 300 is set in parameter No. 6071 and No. 6081, and programs O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is called when M300 is specified.

3 A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by M00.

6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004

6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH)

These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal. The settable addresses are indicated below.

Address Parameter setting value T series M series A 65 O O B 66 O O D 68 X O F 70 O O H 72 O O I 73 O O J 74 O O K 75 O O L 76 O O M 77 O O P 80 O O Q 81 O O R 82 O O S 83 O O T 84 O O V 86 X O X 88 X O Y 89 X O Z 90 X O

NOTE 1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified. 2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8135 NCV NMC




- 1091 -


#5 NMC Custom macro is:


#6 NCV Addition of custom macro common variables is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8136 NGW




#6 NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) or tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is:


Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the

permissible range. Another subprogram call was executed during an external memory subprogram call.

PS0110 OVERFLOW :INTEGER An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations. PS0111 OVERFLOW :FLOATING A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out

of range during arithmetic calculations. PS0112 ZERO DIVIDE An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro. PS0114 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The format used in an expression in a custom macro

statement is in error. The parameter tape format is in error. PS0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE An illegal No. was specified in a local variable, common

variable or a system variable in a custom macro. PS0116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left

side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the right side of an expression.

PS0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro. The nesting level including function brackets is 5.

PS0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE

The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of range.

PS0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro. PS0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was

missing in a custom macro. PS0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT

ERROR The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in error.

PS0126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed the permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3).

PS0127 DUPLICATE NC,MACRO STATEMENT

An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the same block.


- 1092 -

Number Message Description PS0129 USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT G is used as an argument in a custom macro call. PS1091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in

the same block. PS1092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD More than one macro call instruction was specified in the

same block. PS1093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same

block as M99 during the macro modal call state. PS1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in

the type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom macros.

PS1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be specified as a variable name was specified. The [#_OFSxx] command does not match the type (A/C) of tool compensation memory currently being used.

PS1097 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name is too long. PS1098 NO VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not

registered. PS1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a

suffix enclosed by [ ]. A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a suffix enclosed by [ ]. The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range.

PS1100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro continuous–state call mode (G66) was not in effect.

PS1101 ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro interrupt containing a move instruction could not be executed.

PS1115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the left side of an expression.

PS1124 MISSING DO STATEMENT The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was missing in a custom macro.

PS1128 SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF RANGE

The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1 to 99999).

PS1131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right brackets ()) in a custom macro statement.

PS1132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left brackets ([] in a custom macro statement.

PS1133 MISSING '=' An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation instruction in a custom macro statement.

PS1134 MISSING ',' A delimiter (,) is missing in a custom macro statement. PS1137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in

error. PS1138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT

ERROR The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is in error.

PS1139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR

The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro is in error.

PS1141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. NAME

The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a character that cannot be used in a variable name.

PS1142 TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom macro exceeds 8 characters.

PS1143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR

The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT statement is in error.


- 1093 -

12.6.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro

Overview When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function.

Explanation Program an interrupt command in the following format:

M96 Pxxxx; Enables custom macro interrupt M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt

Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call a program during execution of an arbitrary block of another program. This allows programs to be operated to match situations which vary from time to time. (1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the abnormality is started by an external

signal. (2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another machining operation without the

cancellation of the current operation. (3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read. : Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the interruption type custom macro function.

Interrupt signal(UINT)*

Interrupt signal(UINT)

Interrupt signal(UINT)*

M96 Pxxxx;

Nyyyy;

M97 ;

M99 (Pyyyy);

O xxxx;

Fig. 12.6.2 (a) Interruption type custom macro function

When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 12.5.3) issued after M97 is ignored. Do not enter an interrupt signal during execution of an interrupt macro.

Signal Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT<Gn053.3>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory.

During execution, a program in automatic operation is suspended.


- 1094 -

To enable this signal to be accepted, a particular miscellaneous function must be specified in a command program for automatic operation. In addition, automatic operation must already be started to accept this signal. The particular miscellaneous function code is set by parameter Nos. 6003, 6033 and 6034.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn053 UINT

Parameter

- Various Setting for Custom Macro #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6003 MUS MSB MPR TSE MIN MSK




#1 MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt 0: Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later) 1: Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)

#2 MIN Custom macro interrupt 0: Performed by interrupting an in-execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I) 1: Performed after an in-execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II)

#3 TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT 0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge) 1: Status trigger method

#4 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code 0: M96/M97 1: M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)

#5 MSB Interrupt program 0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt) 1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt)

#7 MUS Interrupt-type custom macro 0: Not used 1: Used

- Setting M code that makes interruption effective and ineffective 6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt

6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt



- 1095 -

This parameter sets an M code that enables or disables a custom macro interrupt.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No. 6003 is

1. When MPR is 0, a custom macro interrupt is enabled by M96 and disabled by M97, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

Note

NOTE 1 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during multiple repetitive canned

cycle execution. 2 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during return operation in dry run

after search operation when the program is restarted. 3 The alarm (PS1101) is issued in the following cases:

<1> Case where an interrupt is made in the programmable mirror image (G51.1) mode and G51.1 is further specified in the interrupted program

<2> Case where an interrupt is made in the coordinate system rotation (G68) mode and G68 is further specified in the interrupted program

<3> Case where an interrupt is made in the scaling (G51) mode and G51 is further specified in the interrupted program

4 During program execution in cycle operation, interrupt type II is used, regardless of the setting of bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003. Cycle operation has the following functions: <1> Automatic reference position return <2> Cutter or tool nose radius compensation (when multiple blocks are

generated from one specified block as in a case where an acute turn is made on the outside)

<3> Canned cycle <4> Automatic tool length measurement (M series) <5> Optional chamfering corner R (M series) <6> Normal direction control (M series)

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Interrupt-type custom macro


- 1096 -

12.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING

Overview Canned cycles for drilling make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle for drilling, a frequently-used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G code; without canned cycles for drilling, normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned cycles for drilling can shorten the program to save memory.

Explanation A canned cycle for drilling consists of a sequence of six operations. Operation 1 Positioning a hole position Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Operation 5 Retraction to point R level Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point

Operation 1

Operation 2

Point R level

Initial level

Operation 6

Operation 5

Operation 3

Operation 4Rapid traverse Cutting feed

Fig. 12.7 (a) Canned cycle for drilling operation sequence

- Spindle control

In some canned cycles for drilling, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be output. The following canned cycles for drilling require spindle control:

<M series> <T series> Counter tapping cycle G74 Face tapping cycle G84 Fine boring cycle G76 Side tapping cycle G88 Tapping cycle G84 Boring cycle G86 Back boring cycle G87 Boring cycle G88 For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are used: See the description of the miscellaneous functions. M03 CW spindle rotation M04 CCW spindle rotation M05 Spindle stop M19 Spindle orientation (M series)


- 1097 -

When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one direction to the other (for example, when M04 is output during M03 operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time switching. Timing charts are described in the following page:

G74 (Counter tapping cycle)

G76 (Fine boring cycle)

G84 (Tapping cycle)

Fig. 12.7 (b) Canned cycle for M series (1/2)

(Note) It is possible to not output M05code by using parameter M5T(No. 5105#3).

Next block(G99 mode) FIN FIN

Dwell

FIN FIN

MF MF

M05

MF MF

M05 M04

Dwell

(Note)

X,Y

Z Z

M03(Note)

Z

Next block(G98 mode)

Note) It is possible to not output M05code by using parameter M5B (No.5101#7).

FIN FIN

MF MF

M03 M03 Return to initial level in G98 mode

Next block (G99 mode)FIN FIN

MF MF

M05

Dwell

(Note)

X,Y

Z Z

M19

Z

Next block (G98 mode)

X or Y

Note) It is possible to not output M05code by using parameter M5T (No.5105#3).

Next block(G99 mode) FIN FIN

Dwell

FIN FIN

MF MF

M05

MF MF

M05 M03

Dwell

(Note)

X,Y

Z Z

M04(Note)

Z

Next block(G98 mode)


- 1098 -

G86 (Boring cycle)

G87 (Back boring cycle)

G88 (Boring cycle)

Fig. 12.7 (c) Canned cycle for M series (2/2)

FIN

MF

M03

X,Y

Z Z

FIN

MF

M05

FIN

MF

M03



Return to initial level in G98 mode

Manual feed

Return to initial level in G98 mode or R point level in G99 mode.

Dwell

X,Y

Z Z

FIN

MF

M05

Z

Cycle start

Z

FIN

MF

M03

MF

FIN FIN

MF

M05 M19

(Note) It is possible to not output M05 code using parameter M5B (No. 5101#7).

Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in G98 mode.

X,Y

Z

ZZ

X or Y

X or Y

FIN

MF

M03

Dwell

(Note)

MF

FIN FIN

MF

M05 M19

X or Y

X or Y

FIN

MF

M03

(Note)


- 1099 -

G84 (Face tapping cycle)

G88 (Side tapping cycle)

Fig. 12.7 (d) Canned cycle for T series

- M code used for C-axis clamp/unclamp (T series) T

When an M code specified in parameter No.5110 for C-axis clamp/unclamp is programmed, the CNC issues the M code for C-axis clamp after the tool is positioned and before the tool is fed in rapid traverse to the point-R level. The CNC also issues the M code (M code C-axis clamp +1) for C-axis unclamp after the tool retracts to the point-R level. The tool dwells for the time specified in parameter No. 5111.

- Tapping signal During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal is also output while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid.

- Override During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%.

- Feed hold When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not stopped immediately but the movement is stopped when the tool is returned to level R.

- Dry run The parameter TDR (No. 1401#5) specifies whether dry run is valid during tapping.

- Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal (M series) M

In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode, the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal is output when positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis is started after positioning at a specified hole position is performed with G83 specified. This signal is not output if another canned cycle is specified or this mode is canceled by G80, a reset, or an emergency stop.

(Note 1) When parameter M5T (No. 5105#3)=0, M05 is not output.

(Note 2) Another M code can be used by parameter No. 5112 and 5113. Next block

(G99 mode)FIN FIN

Dwell

FIN FIN

MF MF

M05

MF MF

M05 M03

Dwell

(Note 1)

X,C (Z,C)

Z (X) Z(X)

M04 Next block(G98 mode)

(Note 2)

Z(X)

Z (X)

(Note 1) (Note 2)


- 1100 -

- Overload torque detection signal (M series) M

For the overload torque detection signal in the small-hole peck drilling cycle, a skip signal is used. The skip signal is valid (a retract operation is performed) only when the tool on the drilling direction axis is located between point R and point Z and the tool is moving forward or performing a cutting operation.

Signal Tapping signal TAP<Fn001.5>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode. [Output cond.] The signal is set to 1 when:

- The system is in tapping cycle mode. (G74,G84 : for machining center system) (G84,G88 : for lathe system - The system is in tapping mode. (G63 : for machining center system) The signal is set to 0 when: - The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode. - A reset or emergency stop is specified.

Overload torque detection signal SKIP#1<X004.7>, SKIP#2<X013.7> M

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Refracts the tool on which an overload torque is imposed. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit performs the following operation:

- When an overload torque is imposed, the tool is retracted to point R then machining is repeated after changing the spindle speed and cutting feedrate.

- This signal is valid (a retract operation is performed) only when the tool on the drilling axis is located between point R and point Z and the tool is moving forward or performing a cutting operation.

NOTE This signal is used also as a skip signal.

Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal PECK2<Fn066.5>

M [Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts whether the small-hole peck drilling cycle is being executed. [Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 for the following period:

- Period from the start time of positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis after positioning at a hole position is performed with G83 specified in this cycle mode until another canned cycle, which may be G80, or a G code of group 01 is specified or until this mode is canceled by a reset or emergency stop.

- This signal is not set to 1 in a state other than the above.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

X004 SKIP#1

X013 SKIP#2


- 1101 -

Fn001 TAP

Fn066 PECK2

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0001 FCV


#1 FCV Program format

0: Series 0 standard format (This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.)

1: Series 10/11 format

NOTE 1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used

for operation on the following functions: 1 Subprogram call M98,M198 2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series) 3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series) 4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series) 5 Drilling canned cycle

G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series) G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series)

2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1401 TDR


#5 TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping)

0: Enabled 1: Disabled

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3708 TSO


#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is:

0: Disabled (tied to 100%). 1: Enabled.

NOTE During rigid tapping, the override is tied to 100%, irrespective of the

setting of this parameter.


- 1102 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RTR EXC FXY

5101 M5B EXC FXY


#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:

0: Always the Z-axis 1: The axis selected by the program

NOTE 1 In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the

drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format. 2 When this parameter is 1, the drilling axis determined by plane

selection (G17/G18/G19) in the drilling canned cycle in the T series 10/11 format. Therefore, the Y-axis is required to specify G17/G19.

#1 EXC G81

0: Specifies a drilling canned cycle 1: Specifies an external operation command

#2 RTR G83 and G87 0: Specify a high-speed peck drilling cycle 1: Specify a peck drilling cycle

#7 M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87: 0: Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops 1: Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RDI RAB F0C

5102


#3 F0C When the Series 10/11 format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001 set to 1), a

canned drilling cycle is specified using : 0: Series 10/11 format 1: Series 0 format. However, the number of repetitions is specified using address L.

#6 RAB When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R specifies: 0: Increment command. 1: Absolute command with G code system A. With G code system B or C, G90 and

G91 are followed.


- 1103 -

#7 RDI When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R is based on: 0: Radius specification. 1: Diameter/radius specification of the drilling axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TCZ PNA DCY

5103 TCZ DCY SIJ


#0 SIJ When the Series 10/11 program format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001

set to 1), a tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by: 0: Address Q. Set a tool retraction direction in parameter No. 5148. 1: Address I, J, or K.

#2 DCY When an axis (to be used as a drilling axis) perpendicular to the positioning plane is specified in a drilling canned cycle: 0: The specified axis is used as a drilling axis. 1: The axis specified in the block where the G code for the drilling canned cycle is

specified is used as a drilling axis. The specified axis is used as a positioning axis.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 is

set to 1.

#3 PNA In a drilling canned cycle using the Series 10/11 format (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), when a plane where no axis is present is specified in the drilling canned cycle mode: 0: An alarm is issued. 1: No alarm is issued.

#6 TCZ In a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping), an accumulated zero check in the tapping step (forward, backward) is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. Execute a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping) with the servo feed forward (bit 1 (FEED) of parameter No. 2005). If an impact is detected, set this parameter to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K0D M5T SBC

5105 M5T SBC


#0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle:

0: A single block stop is not performed. 1: A single block stop is performed.


- 1104 -

#3 M5T When the rotation direction of the spindle is changed from forward rotation to reverse rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G88 with the T series, or G84/G74 with the M series): 0: M05 is output before output of M04 or M03. 1: M05 is not output before output of M04 or M03.

#4 K0D When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to G89): 0: Drilling operation is not performed, but drilling data only is stored. 1: One drilling operation is performed.

M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle 5110


This parameter sets an M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle.

Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle 5111

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 [Unit of data]

Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit 10 1 0.1 msec

(The increment system does not depend on whether inch input or metric input is used.) This parameter sets the dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in a drilling canned cycle.

Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle 5112


This parameter sets the spindle forward-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.

NOTE M03 is output when "0" is set.

Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle

5113


This parameter sets the spindle reverse-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.

NOTE M04 is output when "0" is set.


- 1105 -

5114 Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle ( M series : G73, T series : G83).

G73 (M series) G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 0)

5115 Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a clearance value in a peck drilling cycle.

G83 (M series) G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 1)

5148 Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] -10 to 10

q

q

q

d

d

q : Depth of cutd : Return value

R point

Z point

q

q

q

d

d

q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value

R point

Z point


- 1106 -

This parameter sets an axis and direction for tool retraction after spindle orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle. For each boring axis, an axis and direction for tool retraction after orientation can be set. Set a signed axis number. Example) Suppose that: When the boring axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -Y. When the boring axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is +Z. When the boring axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -X. Then, set the following (assuming that the first, second, and third axes are the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, respectively): Set -2 in the parameter for the first axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.) Set 3 in the parameter for the second axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.) Set -1 in the parameter for the third axis. (The tool retraction direction is -X.) Set 0 for other axes.

5149 Override for retraction in a boring cycle (G85/G89)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 2000

This parameter sets an override value for the feedrate of retraction in a boring cycle. The cutting feedrate override signal and the second feedrate override signal are valid, regardless of the setting of this parameter. The setting of this parameter is valid even when the override cancel signal is set to 1. When 0 is set in this parameter, the following operation is performed: For the T series Operation performed when 200 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is two times greater than the cutting feedrate.) For the M series Operation performed when 100 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is the cutting feedrate.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CYM

5160 TSG CYM NOL OLS


#1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small

diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are: 0: Not changed. 1: Changed.

#2 NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are: 0: Not changed. 1: Changed.


- 1107 -

#3 CYM When a subprogram call is specified in a block specifying other commands in the canned cycle mode: 0: No alarm is issued. (When a command of address P is specified, the command is

handled as both a command specifying a dwell time and a command specifying a subprogram number in a canned cycle.)

1: An alarm is issued.

#4 TSG A dependence of the overload torque detection signal in a peck drilling cycle (M series) on the parameter setting of the skip function: 0: Exists. 1: Does not exist.

NOTE When this parameter is 1, even if the setting of the skip signal is

disabled, the X address can be used as the overload torque detection signal. At this time, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1 (SK0) of parameter No. 6200 is valid.

5163 M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter


This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter.

5164

Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after an overload torque detection signal is received


This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after the tool is retracted because the overload torque detection signal is received. S2 = S1 × d1 ÷ 100 S1: Spindle speed to be changed S2: Spindle speed changed Set d1 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.

5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing when no overload

torque detection signal is received



- 1108 -

This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after the tool is retracted without the overload torque detection signal received. S2 = S1 × d2 ÷ 100 S1: Spindle speed to be changed S2: Spindle speed changed Set d2 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.

5166 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting after an overload torque

detection signal is received


This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of cutting after the tool is retracted and advances because the overload torque detection signal is received. F2 = F1 × b1 ÷ 100 F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed F2: Cutting feedrate changed Set b1 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.

5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting when no ovarload

torque detection signal is received


This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of cutting after the tool is retracted and advances without the overload torque detection signal received. F2 = F1 × b2 ÷ 100 F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed F2: Cutting feedrate changed Set b2 as a percentage.

NOTE When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.

5168 Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path


- 1109 -

[Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255

This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate changed repeatedly to the specified cutting feedrate. FL = F × b3 ÷ 100 F: Specified cutting feedrate FL: Changed cutting feedrate Set b3 as a percentage.

5170

Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions during cutting


This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output the total number of times the tool is retracted during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common variables #500 to #599.

5171

Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions because of the reception of an overload torque detection signal


This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output the total number of times the tool is retracted after the overload torque detection signal is received during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common variables #500 to #599.

5172

Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)

(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified.

5173

Feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no address I is specified


(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a previously machined hole when no address I is specified.


- 1110 -

5174

Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0044 G27-G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED

CYC One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode for drilling. Modify the program.

PS0045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83)

In a high-speed peck drilling cycle or peck drilling cycle, the amount of each-time cutting is not specified. Modify the program.

PS0329 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A MONOTONOUS CHANGE(SECOND AXES)

In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command of the second plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease. Modify the program.

Diagnosis display

520 Total number of retract operations during cutting after G83 is specified

521 Total number of retract operations based on reception of the overload torque detection signal during cutting after G83 is specified

NOTE The total number of retract operations output to No. 520 and No.

521 is cleared to zero by the G83 command after the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode is set.

522 Coordinate on the drilling axis where a retract operation was started (least input increment)

523 Difference between the coordinate on the drilling axis where the previous retract operation was started

and the coordinate on the drilling axis where the current retract operation was started (least input increment: previous value - current value)

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Canned cycle for drilling


- 1111 -

12.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)

T

Overview The option canned cycles makes CNC programming easy. For instance, the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available. The following example shows stock removals in turning type I. If a finished shape of A to A' to B is given by a program as in the figure below, the specified area is removed by Δd (depth of cut), with finishing allowance Δu/2 and Δw left.

B

(F) (R) e

A

C

A'

45°

(R)

(F)

Δd : Depth of cut (radius designation) Designate without sign. The cutting directiondepends on the direction AA'. Thisdesignation is modal and is not changeduntil the other value is designated. Also thisvalue can be specified by the parameter (No.5132), and the parameter is changed by theprogram command.

e : Escaping amount This designation is modal and is notchanged until the other value is designated.Also this value can be specified by theparameter (No. 5133), and the parameter ischanged by the program command.

ns : Sequence number of the first block for theprogram of finishing shape.

nf : Sequence number of the last block for theprogram of finishing shape.

Δu : Distance and direction of finishing allowancein X direction (diameter / radius designation).

Δw : Distance and direction of finishing allowancein Z direction.

f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocksns to nf in the cycle is ignored, and the F, S,or T function in this G71 block is effective.

Finishing shape

Δd

Δu/2 (F) : Cutting feed

(R) : Rapid traverse

G71 U(Δd) R(e); G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) F(f) S(s) T(t); N(ns). . . . . . . . . . . . F_ The move command of a finished shape S_ of A to A' to B is specified in the blocks T_ from sequence number ns to nf. N(nf) . . . . ;

Δw

Signal Chamfering signal *CDZ<Gn053.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering distance in parameter

No. 5130. [Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading cycle.

When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.

Approx.45°

r

Approx.45°

r

Fig. 12.8 (e) Straight threading and taper threading


- 1112 -

Set the chamfering distance r to the parameter No. 5130. G76 can also be used to specify chamfering distance r. The chamfering angle is made smaller than 45° by the remaining pulses in the automatic acceleration/ deceleration circuit and servo system. In addition, the angle can be changed to other than 45° by setting an angle for parameter No. 5131.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn053 *CDZ

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0001 FCV


#1 FCV Program format

0: Series 0 standard format (This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.)

1: Series 10/11 format

NOTE 1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used

for operation on the following functions: 1 Subprogram call M98,M198 2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series) 3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series) 4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series) 5 Drilling canned cycle

G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series) G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series)

2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.

Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76

5130

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] 0.1 [Valid data range] 0 to 127

This parameter sets a cutting value (chamfering value) in the thread cutting cycle (G76) of a multiple repetitive canned cycle and in the thread cutting cycle (G92) of a canned cycle. Let L be a lead. Then, a cutting value range from 0.1L to 12.7L is allowed. To specify a cutting value of 10.0L, for example, specify 100 in this parameter.

Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76 5131



- 1113 -

[Unit of data] Degree [Valid data range] 1 to 89

This parameter sets a thread cutting angle in a thread cutting cycle (G92/G76). When 0 is set, an angle of 45 degrees is specified.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RTV ROC

1403


#4 ROC In the threading cycles G92 and G76, rapid traverse override for retraction after threading

is finished is: 0: Effective 1: Not effective (Override of 100%)

#7 RTV Rapid traverse override while the tool is retracting in threading 0: Rapid traverse override is effective. 1: Rapid traverse override is not effective.

Feedrate for retraction in threading cycle G92 or G76 1466


(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) When threading cycle G92 or G76 is specified, retraction is performed after threading. Set a feedrate for this retraction.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 0 or bit 1 (CFR) of parameter No.

1611 is set to 1, the rapid traverse rate set in parameter No. 1420 is used.

1626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 4000

Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles G92 and G76 for each axis.

1627 FL rate for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis


- 1114 -

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Set an FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles G92 and G76 for each axis. Set 0 at all times except in a special case.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CFR

1611


#0 CFR For retraction after threading in the threading cycles G92 and G76:

0: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for threading is used together with the threading time constant (parameter No. 1626) and FL feedrate (parameter No. 1627).

1: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for rapid traverse is used together with the rapid traverse time constant.

NOTE If this parameter is set to 1, a check is made before a retraction to

see that the specified feedrate has become 0 (the delay in acceleration/deceleration has become 0). For retraction, the rapid traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) is used, regardless of the setting of parameter No. 1466. When this parameter is set to 0, parameter No. 1466 is used as the feedrate for retraction. As acceleration/deceleration used for retraction, only acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used. Rapid traverse before look-ahead interpolation is disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

QSR 5102


#2 QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check to see if the

program contains a block that has the sequence number specified in address Q is: 0: Not made. 1: Made. When 1 is set in this parameter and the sequence number specified in address Q is not found, the alarm (PS0063) is issued and the canned cycle is not executed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FCK

5104


#2 FCK In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72), the machining profile is:

0: Not checked. 1: Checked.


- 1115 -

The target figure specified by G71 or G72 is checked for the following before machining operation: • If the start point of the canned cycle is less than the maximum value of the

machining profile even when the plus sign is specified for a finishing allowance, the alarm (PS0322) is issued.

• If the start point of the canned cycle is greater than the minimum value of the machining profile even when the minus sign is specified for a finishing allowance, the alarm (PS0322) is issued.

• If an unmonotonous command of type I is specified for the axis in the cutting direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued.

• If an unmonotonous command is specified for the axis in the roughing direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued.

• If the program does not include a block that has a sequence number specified by address Q, the alarm (PS0063) is issued. This check is made, regardless of bit 2 (QSR) of parameter No. 5102.

• If a command (G41/G42) on the blank side in tool nose radius compensation is inadequate, the alarm (PS0328) is issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

RF2 RF1 5105


#1 RF1 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) of type I, roughing is:

0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

NOTE When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series

10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#2 RF2 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) of type II, roughing is:

0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

NOTE When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series

10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5132

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis


- 1116 -

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

NOTE Specify a radius value at all times.

Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5133

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table

(B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.


Clearance value in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5134


(B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a clearance value up to the cutting feed start point in multiple repetitive canned cycles (G71/G72).


Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (second axis on the plane)

5135

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a retraction distance along the second axis on the plane in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.


- 1117 -


Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (first axis on the plane)

5136

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a retraction distance along the first axis on the plane in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 or G73.7. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.


Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73

5137

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] Cycle [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999

This parameter sets the number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

Return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75 5139


(B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75.


Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5140



- 1118 -

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets a minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 so that the depth of cut does not become too small when the depth of cut is constant.


Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5141


(B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76.


Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5142

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] Cycle [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999

This parameter sets the number of final finishing cycle repeats in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. When 0 is set, only one final finishing cycle is executed.

Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 5143

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] Degree [Valid data range] 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80

This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

Allowable value 1 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72 5145



- 1119 -

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) If a monotonous command of type I or II is not specified for the axis in the roughing direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created automatically, a very small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned allowable value for such an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can be executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure. Example) Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is

minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case, when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the plus direction along the Z-axis is specified in a target figure program, roughing can be performed according to the programmed figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.

NOTE A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71

and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a check is made before G71or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path is checked.

Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set. Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.

Allowable value 2 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5146

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 to cut of depth

If a monotonous command of type I is not specified for the axis in the cutting direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created automatically, a very small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned allowable value for such an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can be executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure. The allowable value is clamped to the depth of cut specified by a multiple repetitive canned cycle. Example) Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is

minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case, when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the minus direction along the X-axis is specified in a target figure program for moving from the bottom of cutting to the end point, roughing can be performed according to the programmed figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.


- 1120 -

NOTE A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71

and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a check is made before G71 or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path is checked.

Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set. Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.

Alarm and message

Number Message Description PS0330 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IS IN

THE TURNING CANNED CYCLE An axis other than the plane is specified n a canned cycle(G90, G92, or G94).

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Cutting feed

Constant lead threading OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1) Multiple threading

12.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES)

M

Overview Each time an external signal is input at the table swing end point, a workpiece is cut by a constant depth of cut along a programmed figure on the specified Y-Z plane. This makes it possible to perform grinding and cutting in a timely manner and facilitating the grinding of a workpiece with a profile.

For example, it is possible to machine a workpiece with a profile programmed with linear interpolation, circular interpolation, and linear interpolation on the YZ plane, such as that shown in the figure above.

Y

Z

X

α

(2)

(3)

(1) (4) •

A

B

C•

D •

E•

•

External signal input

X=0 Sensor placement

X=a


- 1121 -

A sensor is placed at a X = 0 position so that the external signal is input when the sensor detects the grinding wheel. When the program is started at point A, the machine is first placed in the state in which it waits for the input of the external signal. Then, when the sensor detects the grinding wheel, the external signal is input, and the machine makes a cut by the constant amount α along the programmed profile on the specified YZ plane and moves to point B (operation (1)). The machine is then placed in the state in which it waits for the input of the external signal again, and performs a grinding operation along the X-axis. It grinds from point B to point C (operation (2)) and grinds back from point C to point B (operation (3)). When the machine returns to point B, the sensor detects the grinding wheel again, and the external signal is input, so that the machine makes a cut by the amount of α and moves to point D (operation (4)). At point D, the machine performs a grinding operation along the X-axis. Afterwards, each time the external signal is input, the machine makes a cut by the amount of α along the profile program, so that the workpiece is machined to a profile such as that shown in the figure above.

NOTE In-feed control (for grinding machine) function is optional function.

Signal

In-feed control cut start signal INFD<Gn063.6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Exercises in-feed control. [Operation] When this signal is set from 0 to 1, the control unit operates as follows:

- A movement is made by a specified depth of cut along a program figure.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn063 INFD

Alarm and message

Number Message Description PS0230 R CODE NOT FOUND

Cut depth R is not specified in the block including G161. Alternatively, the value specified for R is negative. Modify the program.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) (B-64304EN-2)

In-feed control (for grinding machine)

12.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)

Overview With the canned grinding cycle, repetitive machining operations that are specific to grinding and are usually specified using several blocks can be specified using one block including a G function. So, a program can be created simply. At the same time, the size of a program can be reduced, and the memory can be used more efficiently. Four types of canned grinding cycles are available:

Mote Canned grinding cycle function (for grinding machine) is optional function.


- 1122 -

T • Traverse grinding cycle • Traverse direct constant-size grinding cycle • Oscillation grinding cycle • Oscillation direct constant-size grinding cycle

M • Plunge grinding cycle • Direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle • Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle • Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5101 FXY


#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle

is: 0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle:

X-axis at all times. In case of the Grinding canned cycle: • For the Lathe system

Z-axis at all times. • For the Machining Center system

G75,G77 command :Y-axis G78,G79 command :Z-axis

1: Axis selected by the program

NOTE 1 In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the

drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format. 2 When this parameter is 1, the drilling axis determined by plane

selection (G17/G18/G19) in the drilling canned cycle in the T series 10/11 format. Therefore, the Y-axis is required to specify G17/G19.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

GFX 5106





- 1123 -

#0 GFX When the options of grinding canned cycle are both specified, G71/G72/G73/G74 commands are: 0: Multiple respective canned cycle. 1: Grinding canned cycle.

Grinding axis number in Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71) 5176

Grinding axis number in Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes

For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When

the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.

Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72)

5177 Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle(G77)


For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle

(G77).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When

the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.

Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73)

5178 Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)


For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).


- 1124 -

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.

Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding Cycle(G74)

5179 Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)


For the Lathe system: Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding

Cycle(G74). For the Machining Center system: Set the Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also issued.

5180 Axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75)


Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75).

NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or grinding axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the PS0456 alarm is also issued.

5181 Axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding cycle(G75)


Set the axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding cycle(G75).


- 1125 -


5182 Axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)


Set the axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).


5183 Axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)


Set the axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).


Alarm and message

Number Message Description PS0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR 1) The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The

address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. 2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The

address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. 3) P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a

multistage skip function option. 4) <T series > The specified value of address P of G72 or G74

falls outside the range. Address P ranges from 1 to 4 in the multistage skip function. P1-4 was specified in G72 or G74 even though the multistage skip function option is not present.


- 1126 -

Number Message Description PS0455 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN

GRINDING In grinding canned cycles: 1) <M series> The signs of the I, J, and K commands do not

match. 2) <M series/T series > The amount of travel of the grinding axis

is not specified. PS0456 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN

GRINDING Parameters related to grinding canned cycles are incorrectly set. Probable causes are given below. 1) <M series/T series> The axis number of the grinding axis is

incorrectly set (parameters No. 5176 to No. 5179). 2) <M series> The axis number of the dressing axis is incorrectly

set (parameters No. 5180 to No. 5183). 3) <M series/T series> The axis numbers of the cut axis, grinding

axis, and dressing axis (only for the M series) overlap.


OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1)

Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) (B-64304EN-2)

Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine)

12.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES)

T

Overview In a machine having double turrets comprising two facing turrets placed on the same control axis, a machining program for facing turrets can be created using G codes as if it existed on the same coordinate system for symmetric cutting by creating a mirror image relative to the X-axis. G68 : Start double turret mirror image G69 : Mirror image cancel

NOTE This function and the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) cannot be

used at the same time. When the option of the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) is specified, if bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137 is set to 1, this function can be used.

Explanation

A mirror image can be created using G codes relative to the X-axis of basic three axes set by parameter No. 1022. When G68 is active, the coordinate system is shifted to the other turret, and the X-axis sign is reversed from the programmed command. To use this function, set the distance between the two turrets in a parameter (No. 1290).


- 1127 -

Example) Program for double turrets

Offset value of turret B

Turret B

120

120

60

180

Z

120φ

80φ 40φ

X

<1>

<2>

Offset value of turret A

Turret A <3>

X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <1> G68 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B (120mm), and turn mirror

image on. X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position turret B at,<2> G69 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A, and cancel mirror image. X120.0 Z60.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <3> * X axis is programmed diameter command.

Parameter Distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image

1290


(B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) Set the distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NVC

8137




- 1128 -


#0 NVC Balance cutting is:


NOTE When balance cutting is used (this parameter is 0), the mirror

image of facing tool posts cannot be used. To use the mirror image of facing tool posts, set this parameter to 1.

Note

NOTE 1 When the G68 command based on this function is enabled, the X-coordinate

value that can be read with the custom macro system variables #5041 and up or #100101 and up (current specified position (in the workpiece coordinate system)) is a position with mirror image applied.

2 This function and the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) cannot be used at the same time. When the option of the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) is specified, if bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137 is set to 1, this function can be used.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1)

Mirror image for double turret

12.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)

M

Overview By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the M series can be indexed. Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped or clamped.

NOTE To enable the index table indexing function, set bit 3 (IXC) of parameter No.

8132 to 1 and bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0. The index table indexing function is enabled only when both IXC and ITI are enabled.

Explanation

- Basic Procedure The control axis used for index table indexing is usually referred to as axis A, B, or C. In the explanation below, the control axis used for index table indexing is axis B. If the axis name in the actual machine is not B, the user should read axis B as referring to that axis name. The positioning angle for the index table is commanded by the numeric following "B" in the program command, which is an independent block. Both absolute and incremental commands are possible, but the value after "B" is the integer times the numeric set by the parameter:


- 1129 -

(Example) G00G90B100000; Absolute command (Positioning angle 10 degrees) G00G91B20.0; Incremental command (Move distance 20 degrees) There are two variations of the procedure (type A and type B) to set the index table position; the difference is in the ON/OFF timing of the position control servo. The sequence of events and the difference between the variations are described below, followed by time charts showing them graphically. (1) Assume Bbbbb is ordered by the command program. (2) The CNC turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to "1". (Type B -- When BUCLP is turned to " 1 ",

the position control servo for the B axis is turned ON.) (3) On the PMC side, the clamp of the B axis is released; when completed, the B axis unclamp

completion signal *BEUCL turns to "0". (4) The CNC then turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to "0", to indicate it received the *BEUCL

signal. (5) When the PMC is notified that BUCLP has been turned to "0", the PMC should turn *BEUCL to "1".

In type A, B-axis unclamp signal BUCLP is turned to "0", B-axis position control is made in servo-on state, B-axis is rotated, and the B axis is stopped at the specified position. B axis always moves at rapid traverse.

(6) When the B axis stops at the specified position, CNC turns B-axis clamp signal BCLP to 1. In type A, signal BCLP is set to "1" and B-axis position control is made in servo-off state.

(7) When BCLP is turned to "1" on the PMC side, the B axis is clamped mechanically (with a clutch or shot pin, for example). When the clamp is completed, the B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP is turned to "0".

(8) When *BECLP is turned to "0", the CNC then turns BCLP to "0", informing it received the *BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP turns to "0", the B axis position control servo is turned off.)

(9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to "0", *BECLP is turned to "1". This completes the sequence. The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.

B command (independent)

B axis servo on for position control

B axis unclamp signal BUCLP

B axis unclamp completion signal*BEUCLB axis rotation

B axis clamp signal BCLP

B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP

(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

Fig. 12.12 (a) Time chart for positioning index table (type A)


- 1130 -

B command (independent)

B axis servo on for position control


B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL

B axis rotation



(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

Fig. 12.12 (b) Time chart for positioning index table (type B)

The figure below shows the timing chart for type-A manual reference position return of the B axis.

B axis manual feed selection signal +Jα

B axis position control servo ON


B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL

B axis rotation

B axis deceleration signal *DECα

B axis return completion signal ZPα



Fig. 12.12 (c) Manual reference position return of B axis time chart (type A)

- Type A and Type B As described in the basic procedure, type A differs from type B in that the servo used for B-axis position control is turned on or off at the different timing. Type A is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with shot pins. Type B is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with a clutch.

- Minimum indexing angle The minimum index table indexing angle set in parameter No.5512 is used. An integral multiple of a set value can be specified as an indexing angle. If a value other than an integral multiple is specified, an alarm (PS1561) is issued.

- Indexing axis setting Be sure to set a rotation axis as an index table indexing axis. (Set bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 to 1.)


- 1131 -

- Absolute/incremental programming Setting bit 4 (G90) of parameter No .5500, specifies absolute programming, and override the G90/G91 G-codes.

- Indexing direction If a value other than 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No.5511), movement in the negative direction is made only when a move command is specified together with the M code. In this case, movement is performed in the negative direction, regardless of whether absolute/incremental programming is used. If 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No.5511), the rotation direction in G90 mode is determined by bit 3 (INC) of parameter No.5500, as described below.

The rotation direction in G90 mode is 0: Not shortcut direction 1: Shortcut direction (The amount of movement is always less than 180 degrees.)

- Feedrate

The table is always rotated around the indexing axis in rapid traverse mode. Dry run cannot be executed for the indexing axis.

- Reset If a reset is performed in the clamp or unclamp completion wait state, the clamp or unclamp signal is cleared, and the CNC exits from the completion wait state.

- Disabling the index table indexing function The index table indexing function can be disabled temporarily. Setting bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 disables the function without turning off and on the power. This enables the manual operation of the index table indexing axis, such as a jog feed, incremental feed, and manual handle feed, even when the index table indexing function is enabled.

- Index table indexing function and other functions Item Explanation

Relative position display This value can be rounded by setting bit 1 (REL) of parameter No.5500. Absolute position display This value can be rounded by setting bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500. Machine coordinate system selection (G53)

No movement is allowed.

Single direction positioning (G60) Not specifiable Second auxiliary function Ensure that a second auxiliary function axis name does not duplicate an

indexing axis name. Operation during index table indexing axis movement

Unless otherwise processed by the machine, feed hold, interlock, and emergency stop can be executed during index table indexing axis movement. Machine lock can be executed after indexing has been completed.

Servo-off signal Disable the servo-off signal for the index table indexing axis. That is, set bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 to 1. Usually, the index table indexing axis is in the servo-off state.

Incremental command for the index table indexing axis

When incremental programming is used for index table indexing (when bit 4 (G90) of parameter No.5500 is set to 0), the workpiece origin offset of the index table axis must always be 0. That is, there must always be a match between the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system of an index table indexing axis.

Operation for an index table indexing axis

Operation in JOG/INC/HANDLE mode for an index table indexing axis is disabled. However, manual reference position return is possible. If the axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return, the movement stops immediately, and the clamp command is not executed.


- 1132 -

Limitation

- Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block: • When the command is to be executed with all axes: Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 1. • When axes for which the command is executed are to be selected: Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 0. Next, set bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No. 5502 to 1 for

other controlled axes to be selected in the same block. If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block in a case other than the above, alarm PS1564 is issued. Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes (when G00, G28, or G30 (or G00 mode) is set)

SIM = 0 SIM = 1 Axis with IXS = 0 Alarm PS1564 Axis with IXS = 1 The command is executed.

The command is executed for all axes.

If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block when a command other than G00, G28, and G30 (or G00 mode) is specified, alarm PS1564 is issued.

NOTE If an index table indexing axis is specified together with a slave axis, alarm

PS1564 is not issued.

- Command specifying zero move amount When the amount of movement is 0, a clamp/unclamp operation is not performed. In automatic reference position return based on G28, clamp/unclamp is performed even if the amount of movement is 0.

- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation In a block specifying an index table axis, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled.

- Functions that cannot be used at the same time An axis used with any of the following functions is uncontrollable as an index table indexing axis: • Axis control by PMC • Pole position detection function

Caution CAUTION

1 While the index table is being positioned, input signals that reset the CNC, such as *ESP (emergency stop), ERS (external reset), and RRW (reset & rewind), are functional.

When reset is applied to the CNC, indexing stops. Further, if *SP (automatic operation stop signal) turns to “0”, axis movement is stopped and the equipment enters the automatic operation stop state.

If a stop at an any position is not suitable for the machine, appropriate processing is required on the machine.


- 1133 -

CAUTION 2 If the axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return,

movement is stopped immediately, and the clamp command is not executed. If this proves inconvenient, measures must be taken on the machine side so that, after the axis selection signal is set to 1, it is not set to 0 until reference position return is completed.

3 When an incremental command is used for indexing the index table, the workpiece origin offset for the index table axis must always be 0. This means that the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system of the index table axis must always match.

4 If a reset is made during indexing of the index table, a reference position return must be made before the index table is indexed subsequently.

5 The secondary auxiliary function can be used, but its address must be different from that of the indexing axis.

6 For a path on which the index table indexing function is not to be used, disable the index table indexing function (set bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0).

Note

NOTE For positioning on an index table indexing axis, the dry run signal DRN has no

effect.

Signal B axis clamp signal BCLP<Fn061.1>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or shot pin. [Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic

procedure for positioning the index table.

B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP<Gn038.7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the B axis clamp operation. [Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic


B axis unclamp signal BUCLP<Fn061.0> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Instructs the PMC side to release the B axis from the mechanical clamp. [Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic


B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL<Gn038.6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the release of the B axis from the mechanical clamp. [Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic



- 1134 -

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn038 *BECLP *BEUCL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn061 BCLP BUCLP

Parameter

- Setting linear or rotation axis #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1006 ROSx ROTx




#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis. #1 ROSx

ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis

(1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°) (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter

No.3624) 0 1 Rotation axis (A type)

(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done. (2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate

values are rounded or not rounded by parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and #2(RRLx).

(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No.3624)

(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one rotation.

1 1 Rotation axis (B type) (1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate

values are not done. (2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative

coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter

No.3624) (4) Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index table

indexing function (M series) Except for the

above. Setting is invalid (unused)

- Setting for positioning the index table

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5500 IDX SIM G90 INC ABS REL DDP



- 1135 -

#0 DDP As the method for inputting a decimal point in a command for the index table indexing

axis: 0: The conventional method is used. 1: The pocket calculator method is used.

#1 REL The position display of the index table indexing axis in the relative coordinate system is: 0: Not rounded by one rotation. 1: Rounded by one rotation.

#2 ABS The position display of the index table indexing axis in the absolute coordinate system is: 0: Not rounded by one rotation. 1: Rounded by one rotation.

#3 INC When the M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction (parameter No.5511) is not set, rotation in the G90 mode is: 0: Not set to the shorter way around the circumference. 1: Set to the shorter way around the circumference. (In this case, be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No. 5500 to 1.)

#4 G90 A command for the index table indexing axis is: 0 : Assumed to be an absolute or incremental command depending on the G90/G91

mode. 1 : Always assumed to be an absolute command.

#6 SIM When the same block includes a command for the index table indexing axis and a command for another controlled axis: 0: The setting of bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No.5502 is followed. 1: The commands are executed.

NOTE Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) is issued

if the block is neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).

#7 IDX Operation sequence of the index table indexing axis: 0: Type A 1: Type B

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5501 ISP ITI


#0 ITI The index table indexing function is:

0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.

#1 ISP Servo-off for an index axis at the completion of clamping is: 0: Processed by the CNC. 1: Not processed by the CNC. (The CNC follows the status of the servo-off signal

<Gn0126> input from the PMC.)


- 1136 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5502 IXS


#0 IXSx When a command is specified in a block that contains a command for the index table

indexing axis: 0 : An alarm (PS1564) is issued. 1 : The command is executed. If bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No.5500 is set to 1, a simultaneous operation with all axes except the index table indexing axis can be performed regardless of the setting of this parameter. To set an axis that allows simultaneous operation for each axis, set SIM to 0, and set this parameter.

NOTE Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) is issued

if the block is neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).

- Setting of an index table indexing axis

5510 Controlled axis number of the index table indexing axis




This parameter sets the number of a controlled axis to be used as the index table indexing axis. When the setting value is 0, it is assumed that the fourth axis is the index table indexing axis if the number of control axes is four or more, and is assumed that the final axis is the index table indexing axis if the number of control axes is three or less.

- Negative direction rotation command M code

5511 M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for index table indexing


0: The rotation direction for the index table indexing axis is determined according to the setting of bit 3 (INC) of parameter No.5500 and a command.

1 to 99999999: The rotation for the index table indexing axis is always performed in the positive

direction. It is performed in the negative direction only when a move command is specified together with the M code set in this parameter.


- 1137 -

NOTE Be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500 to 1.

- Setting of a minimum positioning angle for index table indexing

5512

Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] deg [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) This parameter sets the minimum positioning angle (travel distance) for the index table indexing axis. The travel distance specified in the positioning command must always be an integer multiple of this setting. When 0 is set, the travel distance is not checked. The minimum positioning angle is checked not only for the command, but also for the coordinate system setting and workpiece origin offset.

Alarm and message Number Message Contents PS1508 DUPLICATE M-CODE (INDEX TABLE

REVERSING) The same code as this M code is set in a function. (Index table indexing)

PS1561 ILLEGAL INDEXING ANGLE The specified angle of rotation is not an integer multiple of the minimum indexing angle.

PS1564 INDEX TABLE AXIS – OTHER AXIS SAME TIME

The index table indexing axis and another axis have been specified in the same block.

PS1567 INDEX TABLE AXIS DUPLICATE AXIS COMMAND

Index table indexing was specified during axis movement or on an axis for which the index table indexing sequence was not completed.

Note

NOTE If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the

block, G00 performs nonlinear positioning. So, if rapid traverse based on acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is set, the setting is switched automatically to acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining center system) (B-64304EN-2)

Index table indexing


- 1138 -

12.13 SCALING (M SERIES)

M

Overview A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). One scaling method multiples the same magnification rate and the other scaling method (axis-by-axis scaling) multiples the different magnification rate for each axis. The magnification rate can be specified in the program or by a parameter.

Y

X

P4

P4’

P1

P1’

P3’

P2’

P2

P3

P0

P0 : Scaling centerP1 to P4 : Programmed figureP1’ to P4’ : Scaled figure

O

Fig. 12.13 (a) Scaling

NOTE To enable the scaling function, set bit 5 (SCL) of parameter No. 8132 to 1.

Format

Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification (When the parameter XSC (No.5400#6 is set to 0)

Format Meaning of command G51 IP_P_ ; Scaling start : Scaling is effective. : (Scaling mode) G50 ; Scaling cancel

IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling P_ : Scaling magnification

Scaling along each axes at a different rate of magnification (mirror image) (When the parameter XSC

(No.5400#6 is set to 1) Format Meaning of command

G51 IP_ I_J_K_ ; Scaling start : Scaling is effective. : (Scaling mode) G50 ; Scaling cancel

IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y, and Z axes) respectively

Explanation

- Axis for which scaling is to be enabled For the axis for which scaling is to be enabled, set parameter SCL (No. 5401#0) to 1.


- 1139 -

- Minimum unit of scaling magnification Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001. It is 0.00001 (one hundred thousandth) if parameter SCR (No. 5400#7) is 0 and 0.001 if it is 1.

- Scaling center Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block are assumed those of an absolute position. If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center.

CAUTION With the move command subsequent to the G51 block, execute an absolute

(G90 mode) position command. If no absolute position command is executed after the G51 block, the position

when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center; once an absolute position command is executed, the scaling center assumes the coordinates specified in the G51 block, after that block.

- Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification

Set parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) to 0. If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in parameter (No. 5411) is used. Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnification P. If decimal point input is made, alarm (PS0007) will occur. A negative value cannot be specified as the magnification P. If a negative value is specified, alarm (PS0006) will occur. The allowable magnification range is from 0.00001 to 9999.99999.

- Scaling of each axis, programmable mirror image (negative magnification) Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. The axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains the scaling center. Set a parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) to 1 to validate each axis scaling (mirror image). Using I, J, and K, specify the scaling magnifications for the basic 3 axes (X to Z axes). Use parameter No. 1022 to specify which axes to use as the basic 3 axes. For those of the X to Z axes for which I, J, and K are not specified and for axes other than the basic 3 axes, the magnification set with parameter (No. 5421) is used. A value other than 0 must be set to parameter (No. 5421). Decimal point programming can not be used to specify the rate of magnification (I, J, K). Magnification can be set within the range ±0.00001 ±9999.99999.

CAUTION Specifying the following commands at the same time causes them to be

executed in the order indicated below: <1> Programmable mirror image (G51.1) <2> Scaling (G51) (including a mirror image with a negative magnification) <3> Mirror image due to the external switch of the CNC or the settings of the

CNC In this case, the programmable mirror image is effective to the scaling center

and magnification as well. To specify G51.1 and G51 at the same time, specify them in this order; to cancel

them, specify them in the reverse order.


- 1140 -

Y axis

X axis

ba

d

a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis 0 : Scaling center

Programmed figure

Scaled figure

0 c

Fig. 12.13 (b) Scaling of each axis

- Scaling of circular interpolation

Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular interpolation, the tool will not trace an ellipse. G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0; G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000; (A magnification of 2 is applied to the X-component and a magnification of 1 is applied to the Y-component.) G02 X100.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500; Above commands are equivalent to the following command: G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0; G02 X200.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500; (Because the end point is not on an arc, spiral interpolation is assumed.)

(0,0) (100,0) (200,0)

Y

X

Scaled shape

Fig. 12.13 (c) Scaling for circular interpolation1

Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted into a vector in the center direction of each axis. If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, the operation will be same as that in which I and J are specified. G02 X100.0 Y0.0 R100.0 F500 ;


- 1141 -

- Scaling and coordinate system rotation If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the same time, scaling is performed first, followed by coordinate system rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotation center as well. To specify both of them, specify scaling first and then coordinate system rotation. To cancel them, specify them in the reverse order. Example Main program

O1 G90 G00 X20.0 Y10.0 ; M98 P1000 ; G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I3000 J2000 ; (x 3 in the X direction and x 2 in the Y direction) M98 P1000 ; G17 G68 X35.0 Y20.0 R30.0 ; M98 P1000 ; G69 ; G50 ; M30 ;

Subprogram O1000 ; G01 X20.0 Y10.0 F500 ; G01 X50.0 ; G01 Y30.0 ; G01 X20.0 ; G01 Y10.0 ; M99 ;

Y

X

Scaling center

Original program

Shape aftercoordinate systemrotation Scaled shape

Rotation centerafter scaling

Rotation centerbefore scaling

Fig. 12.13 (d) Scaling and coordinate system rotation


- 1142 -

- Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding Chamfering

Scalingx 2 in the X directionx 1 in the Y direction

Corner rounding

If different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner roundingresults in a spiral, not an arc, because scaling is applied to the end point andradius of the arc.

Scalingx 2 in the X directionx 1 in the Y direction

Fig. 12.13 (e) Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding

Limitation

- Tool compensation This scaling is not applicable to cutter compensation values, tool length offset values, and tool offset values (Fig. 12.13 (f) ).

Cutter compensation values are not scaled.

Programmed figure

Scaled figure

Fig. 12.13 (f) Scaling during cutter compensation

- Invalid scaling

Scaling is not applicable to the Z-axis movement in case of the following canned cycle. • Cut-in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle (G83, G73). • Fine boring cycle (G76) • Shift value Q of X and Y axes in back boring cycle (G87).


- 1143 -

CAUTION 1 If a parameter setting value is employed as a scaling magnification without

specifying P, the setting value at G51 command time is employed as the scaling magnification, and a change of this value, if any, is not effective.

2 Before specifying the G code for reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30) or coordinate system setting (G52 to G59, G92), cancel the scaling mode. Otherwise, alarm PS0412 is issued.

3 If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In this case, the block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the tool movement by cutter compensation. See the description of cutter compensation.

4 Refrain from scaling on a rotation axis for which the rollover function is enabled. Otherwise, the tool may rotate in a short-cut manner, possibly resulting in unexpected movement.

NOTE 1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. 2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the

following results: (1) Circular command ....................Direction of rotation is reversed. (2) Cutter compensation ................Offset direction is reversed. (3) Coordinate system rotation ......Rotation angle is reversed.

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5400 SCR XSC


#6 XSC The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is:


#7 SCR Scaling (G51) magnification unit 0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000) 1: 0.001 times

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5401 SCLx


#0 SCLx Scaling on this axis

0: Invalidated 1: Validated


- 1144 -

5411

Scaling (G51) magnification

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400) [Valid data range] 1 to 999999999

This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling is disabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no scaling magnification (P) is specified in the program, the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.

NOTE When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data

range is 1 to 9999999.

5421

Scaling magnification for each axis

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400) [Valid data range] -999999999 to –1, 1 to 999999999

This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first axis to the third axis (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification if scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.

NOTE When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data

ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to 9999999.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8132 SCL




#5 SCL Scaling is:


Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or

system variable where no minus signal may be specified. PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no

decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were specified.


- 1145 -

Number Message Description PS0142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more.

Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ . . . or G51I_J_K_ . . . or parameter (No. 5411 or 5421))

PS0412 ILLEGAL G CODE A G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference position return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a coordinate system was specified during scaling. Before specifying such a G code, cancel scaling.

PS5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation, interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that exceeds the maximum permissible distance was specified. Check the programmed coordinates or compensation amounts.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center) (B-64304EN-2)

Scaling

12.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION

M

Overview A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function, it becomes possible, for example, to correct the position of a mounted workpiece using a rotation command when the workpiece is placed with some angle rotated from the machine coordinates. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the positions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after rotation.

Y

X0

Center ofrotation

Angle of rotation

Caution CAUTION

Before specifying a G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference position return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a coordinate system, be sure to cancel the coordinate rotation mode. Otherwise, alarm PS0412 occurs.


- 1146 -

Parameter - Angle specification method of coordinate system rotation

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5400 RIN


#0 RIN The angle (R) of coordinate rotation (G68) is:

0: Always specified by an absolute command. 1: Specified by an absolute command or incremental command depending on the

G90/G91 mode.

- Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation

5410

Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] 0.001° [Valid data range] -360000 to 360000

This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation. When the angular displacement is not specified with address R in the G68 block, this parameter value is used as the angular displacement.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or tool radius⋅tool nose radius

compensation plane must be the same. Modify the program. PS0412 ILLEGAL G CODE A G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference position

return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a coordinate system was specified during scaling. Before specifying such a G code, cancel scaling.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center) (B-64304EN-2)

Coordinate system rotation

12.15 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER

Overview The macro executor function converts custom macros created by machine tool builders to executable programs, registers them in the FLASH ROM module, and executes them to solve problems as described below. NC programs are divided into two types: Programs that are hardly modified after created (programs created using custom macros) and programs that differ depending on the workpiece (machining programs). Since different types of programs are processed in the same way, a custom macro may be destroyed due to a battery failure or operator error.


- 1147 -

Features • Since the program is stored in executable form program, the execution speed is high. Machine time

is then reduced, and precision is improved. • Since the program is stored in FLASH ROM, there is no lost of data of battery failure or corruption.

Reliability is improved. • Stored programs are not displayed on the program screen, so know-how of the machine tool builders

is kept protected. • Since custom macros are stored in FLASH ROM, the program editing memory can be used

effectively. • The user can call the macro without knowing the stored program. A custom macro can be created

and executed in the program edit memory. • An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or by selecting screens by the soft key.

The machine tool builder can extend the control function by using such functions as machine program creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC data read/write functions.

Note

NOTE 1 When the macro executor is active, the order-made macro cannot be specified. 2 To perform graphic display using the macro executor, enable graphic display (set

bit 3 (NGR) of parameter No. 8134 to 0).

Reference item Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64303EN-2)

12.16 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES)

M

Overview Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automatically between the following: • Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks • Between linear interpolation and circular interpolation blocks • Between circular interpolation and linear interpolation blocks • Between circular interpolation and circular interpolation blocks

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5105 SBC





- 1148 -

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD

BLK Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block. Modify the program.

PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program.

PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR

In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.

12.17 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)

T

Overview A chamfering or corner rounding block can automatically be inserted between linear interpolation (G01) along a single axis and that along a single axis normal to that single axis. Chamfering or corner rounding is inserted for a command to move the tool along two axes on the plane determined by the plane selection (G17, G18, or G19) command.

NOTE To enable the chamfering/corner rounding function, set bit 2 (CCR) of parameter

No. 8134 to 1.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

CCR 3405


#4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering

0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”. In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A".

1: Address is “C”. Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A" without comma.

NOTE

If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used.

If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis name, the chamfer function cannot be used.


- 1149 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CRD

3453


#0 CRD When chamfering/corner rounding is enabled (bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No. 8134 is 1):

0: Chamfering/corner rounding is enabled. 1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5105 SBC




#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CCR

8134




#2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is:


Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD

BLK Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block. Modify the program.

PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program.

PS0052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR

The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01 (or vertical line). Modify the program.

PS0053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, J, K and R are specified.

PS0054 NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER CHF/CNR

A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program.

PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR

In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.

PS0069 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM IS AN ILLEGAL COMMAND

In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or corner R in the last block is terminated in the middle.


- 1150 -

Number Message Description PS0306 MISMATCH AXIS WITH CNR/CHF The correspondence between the moving axis and the I, J, or

K command is incorrect in a block in which chamfering is specified.

12.18 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES)

T

Overview Angles of straight lines, chamfering value, corner rounding values, and other dimensional values on machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamfering and corner rounding can be inserted between straight lines having an optional angle. This programming is only valid in memory operation mode.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

DDP CCR 3405


#4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering

0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”. In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A".

1: Address is “C”. Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A" without comma.

NOTE

If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used.

If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis name, the chamfer function cannot be used.

#5 DDP Angle commands by direct drawing dimension programming

0: Normal specification 1: A supplementary angle is given.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CRD

3453



- 1151 -

#0 CRD If the functions of chamfering or corner R and direct drawing dimension programming are both enabled (bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No. 8134 is 1), 0: Chamfering or corner R is enabled. 1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CCR

8134




#2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is:


Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0056 NO END POINT & ANGLE IN

CHF/CNR In direct dimension drawing programming, both an end point and an angle were specified in the block next to the block in which only an angle was specified (Aa). Modify the program.

PS0057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension drawing programming. Modify the program.

PS0058 END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing programming. Modify the program.

PS0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING

Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an invalid format. An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during direct input of drawing dimensions. Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions. Although non-use of commas (,) (parameter No. 3405#4 = 1) was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a comma was specified.

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1)

Direct drawing dimensions programming


- 1152 -

12.19 PATTERN DATA INPUT

Overview In the program of the fixed form processing with the custom macro, the operator select the processing pattern on the menu screen and specified the size, number and so on to the variable on the custom macro screen. As above mentioned, this function enables users to perform programming simply without programming using an existing NC language. With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can prepare the program of a hole machining cycle (such as a boring cycle or tapping cycle) using the custom macro function, and can store it into the program memory. This cycle is assigned pattern names, such as BOR1, TAP3, and DRL2. An operator can select a pattern from the menu of pattern names displayed on the screen. Data (pattern data) which is to be specified by the operator should be created in advance with variables in a drilling cycle. The operator can identify these variables using names such as DEPTH, RETURN RELIEF, FEED, MATERIAL or other pattern data names. The operator assigns values (pattern data) to these names. The operator selects the pattern on the menu screen, and the selected pattern number is assigned to the system variable. The custom macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a program then referring to the system variable in the program.

Explanation This function is consist of Pattern menu screen and Custom macro screen. The process pattern is selected on the pattern screen. Then the process pattern is selected, the custom macro screen is displayed. On this custom macro screen, the variable with the name and comment is displayed according to the selected process pattern. The process data can be input by referring to the variable name with the numerical value on the drawing. The following is the example for the pattern menu and the custom macro. (1) Pattern menu screen

Fig. 12.19 (a) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch)


- 1153 -

(2) Custom macro screen The name of variable and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen. The titles displayed on the pattern menu or the macro variable names displayed on the custom macro

screen can be defined arbitrarily.

Fig. 12.19 (b) Custom macro screen (10.4-inch)

Explanation of operation

The following steps 1-3 explain how to display the pattern menu screen.

1 Press function key .

2 Press continuous menu key . 3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU]. (Press [MENU] for the 8.4-inch display unit.)

- Pattern menu screen The following pattern menu is displayed.

Fig. 12.19 (c) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch)


- 1154 -

Select the pattern on this screen The following two methods are effective. • Selection by cursor Move the cursor to the pattern name with the cursor move keys , and press the soft key

[SELECT] or key.

• Selection by setting of pattern number

Enter the number on the left of the pattern name, and press the soft key [SELECT] or key.

The selected pattern number is registered to system variable #5900. The custom macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a fixed program (external program No. search) with an external signal. This program refers to the system variable #5900 in the program. This system variable #5900 is kept after power-off.

- Custom macro variable screen The following custom macro screen is displayed.

Fig. 12.19 (d) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (10.4-inch)

When the screen is changed to the custom macro screen, the macro variable number that is selected first is specified with the parameters Nos.6101 to 6110. The macro variables that variable name is not defined can be input, too.

NOTE 1 The variable name that is displayed cannot be used as the common variable

name of the NC program. 2 When the common variable name is defined by SETVN command, the variable

name defined by pattern data input function is given priority.


- 1155 -

Parameter 6101 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 1 is selected

6102 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 2 is selected









[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0,100 to 199,500 to 999

Set the macro variable number to be selected first when a pattern menu is selected on the custom macro screen. If 0 is specified, 500 is assumed. If a value beyond the above range is entered, 100 is assumed.

Definition of the screen The definition of the screen is performed by NC program.

- Program configuration This function is consist of one program for the definition of pattern menu screen and maximum ten programs for the definition of custom macro screen. The program number is as follows

Table 12.19 (a) Numbers of subprograms employed in the pattern data input function Sub program No. Screen

O9500 Specifies character strings displayed on the pattern data menu. O9501 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.1 O9502 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.2 O9503 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.3 O9504 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.4 O9505 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.5 O9506 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.6 O9507 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.7 O9508 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.8 O9509 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.9 O9510 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.10

Table 12.19 (b) Macro commands used in the pattern data input function

G code H code Function G65 H90 Specifies the menu title.


- 1156 -

G code H code Function G65 H91 Specifies the pattern name. G65 H92 Specifies the pattern data title. G65 H93 Specifies the variable name. G65 H94 Specifies the comment.

Table 12.19 (c) System variables employed in the pattern data input function

System variable Function #5900 Pattern No. selected by user.

Definition of the pattern menu screen

Menu title and pattern name are defined as follows.

Fig. 12.19 (e) Pattern menu screen

Definition of menu title The character string displayed in the menu title of the pattern menu screen is defined. The menu title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter such as kanji character.

- Format G65 H90 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;

H90 : Specifies the menu title P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of title Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of title R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of title I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of title J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of title K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of title As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Definition of pattern name

The character string displayed in the pattern name which becomes a menu item is defined. The pattern name is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size letter.

Menu title

Pattern name


- 1157 -

- Format G65 H91 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;

H91 : Specifies the pattern name P_ : Specifies the menu number of the pattern name The menu number = 1 to 10 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of pattern name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of pattern name I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of pattern name J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of pattern name K_ : The code of 9thd and 10th characters of pattern name As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Example

The following is example for pattern menu screen.

Fig. 12.19 (f) Pattern menu screen

O9500 N1 G65 H90 P072079 Q076069 R032080 I065084 J084069 K082078;... "HOLE PATTERN" N2 G65 H91 P1 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032; ............ "BOLT HOLE" N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071082 R073068; ........................................................ "GRID" N4 G65 H91 P3 Q076073 R078069 I032065 J078071 K076069; ............ "LINE ANGLE" N5 G65 H91 P4 Q084065 R080080 I073078 J071032; .......................... "TAPPING" N6 G65 H91 P5 Q068082 R073076 I076073 J078071;............................ "DORILLING" N7 G65 H91 P6 Q066079 R082073 I078071; .......................................... "BORING" N8 G65 H91 P7 Q080079 R067075 I069084; .......................................... "POCKET" N9 G65 H91 P8 Q080069 R067075; ........................................................ "PECK" N10 G65 H91 P9 Q084069 R083084; ...................................................... "TEST" N11 G65 H91 P10 Q066065 R067075; .................................................... "BACK" N12 M99;


- 1158 -

Definition of the custom macro screen The title, variable name and comment are defined as follows.

Fig. 12.19 (g) Custom macro screen

Definition of title The character string displayed in the title of the custom macro screen is defined. The title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter.

- Format G65 H92 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;

H92 : Specifies the menu title P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the menu title Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the menu title R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the menu title I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the menu title J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the menu title K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of the menu title As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Definition of macro variable

The character string displayed in the macro variable name is defined. The macro variable is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size letter. The variable which can be used is as follows #100 to 199 (100 variables) #500 to 999 (500 variables), 600 variables in total

Macro variable name Title

Comment


- 1159 -

- Format G65 H93 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;

H93 : Specifies the variable name P_ : Specifies the variable number Specifies 100 to 199 or 500 to 999 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the variable name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the variable name I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the variable name J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the variable name K_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the variable name As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Definition of a comment

The character string of the comment displayed on the custom macro screen is defined. The comment is specified by up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter per one block. Up to eight lines can be defined for the 8.4-inch display unit and up to 12 lines can be defined for the 10.4-inch unit with one block assumed to be one line. Blocks are displayed in the order in which they appear in a program, beginning with the first comment line.

- Format G65 H94 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;

H94 : Specifies the comment P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of comment Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of comment R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of comment I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of comment J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of comment K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of comment As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the Character-codes".

Example

The following is example of the custom macro screen.

Fig. 12.19 (h) Custom macro screen


- 1160 -

O9501; N1 G65 H92 P066079 Q076084 R032072 I079076 J069032;...................."BOLT HOLE" N2 G65 H93 P500 Q084079 R079076; ......................................................"TOOL" N3 G65 H93 P501 Q079082 R071032 I08832; .........................................."ORG X" N4 G65 H93 P502 Q079082 R071032 I08932; .........................................."ORG Y" N5 G65 H93 P503 Q082065 R068073 I085803; ........................................"RADIUS" N6 G65 H93 P504 Q083046 R032065 I078071 J076032..........................."S. ANGL" N7 G65 H93 P505 Q072079 R076079 I083032 J078079 K046032............"HOLES NO." N8 G65 H94 P032042 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032;....." *BOLT HOLE" N9 G65 H94 P067073 Q082067 R076069 I042032; .................................."CIRCLE*" N10 G65 H94 P083069 Q084032 R080065 I084084 J069082 K078032;..."SET PATTERN" N11 G65 H94 P068065 Q084065 R032084 I079032 J086065 K082046;..."DATA NO VAR." N12 G65 H94 P078079 Q046053 R048048 I045053 J048053 K046032;..."NO500-505" N13 M99;

Setting the character-codes

The character cannot be used to specify the NC program. Therefore, the code corresponding to the character is specified. One character is consist of three figures in a half size letter and six figures in a full size letter. The character code is specified for each address of the G65 instruction by six digits. Refer to the table for the character code for the character code. Example) When "ABCDEFGH" is specified, the description of the code is as follows. Encoded character string : 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 P065066 Q067068 R069070 I071072; AB CD EF GH

NOTE 1 Space (032) is added ahead of the character-code, when the character-code of

three digits or less is specified. Example) P065066 Q067; → " AB C " 032(space) is put at the end, when "ABC" is displayed. P065066 Q067032; → " ABC " 2 It is assumed in that the space of two characters was defined in the address

when there is an address not defined. Example) P065066 I067068; → "AB CD"

Characters and codes to be used for the pattern data input function

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056 D 068 9 057 E 069 032 Space F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark G 071 ” 034 Quotation mark H 072 # 035 Hash sign I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign J 074 % 037 Percent K 075 & 038 Ampersand


- 1161 -

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment L 076 ‘ 039 Apostrophe M 077 * 042 Asterisk N 078 + 043 Plus sign O 079 , 044 Comma P 080 - 045 Minus sign Q 081 . 046 Period R 082 / 047 Slash S 083 : 058 Colon T 084 ; 059 Semicolon U 085 < 060 Left angle bracket V 086 = 061 Equal sign W 087 > 062 Right angle bracket X 088 ? 063 Question mark Y 089 @ 064 At mark Z 090 [ 091 Left square bracket 0 048 ¥ 092 Yen sign 1 049 ] 093 Right square bracket 2 050 ^ 094 3 051 _ 095 Underscore 4 052 5 053

The characters and the codes of the katakana is as follows.

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment ア 177 ム 209 イ 178 メ 210 ウ 179 モ 211 エ 180 ヤ 212 オ 181 ユ 213 カ 182 ヨ 214 キ 183 ラ 215 ク 184 リ 216 ケ 185 ル 217 コ 186 レ 218 サ 187 ロ 219 シ 188 ワ 220 ス 189 ヲ 166 セ 190 ン 221 ソ 191 ァ 167 タ 192 ィ 168 チ 193 ゥ 169 ツ 194 ェ 170 テ 195 ォ 171 ト 196 ャ 172 ナ 197 ュ 173 ニ 198 ョ 174 ヌ 199 ッ 175 ネ 200 ″ 222 Diacritical mark ノ 201 ° 223 Diacritical mark ハ 202 。 161 Punctuation ヒ 203 「 162 Left quotation mark フ 204 」 163 Right quotation mark ヘ 205 、 164 Comma ホ 206 ・ 165 Point


- 1162 -

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment マ 207 000 Space ミ 208

NOTE

Diacritical mark is one character. The characters and the codes of the hiragana and the kanji are as follows. The following hiraganas and kanjis use two characters of the alphanumeric character.

ぁあぃいううぇえぉお

002 000 002 002 002 004 002 006 002 008 002 010 002 012 002 014 002 016 002 018かがきぎくぐけげこご

002 020 002 022 002 024 002 026 002 028 002 030 002 032 002 034 002 036 002 038さざしじすずせぜそぞ

002 040 002 042 002 044 002 046 002 048 002 050 002 052 002 054 002 056 002 058ただちぢっつづてでと

002 060 002 062 002 064 002 066 002 068 002 070 002 072 002 074 002 076 002 078どなにぬねのはばぱひ

002 080 002 082 002 084 002 086 002 088 002 090 002 092 002 094 002 096 002 098びぴふぶぷへべぺほぼ

002 100 002 102 002 104 002 106 002 108 002 110 002 112 002 114 002 116 002 118ぽまみむめもゃやゅゆ

002 120 002 122 002 124 002 126 002 128 002 130 002 132 002 134 002 136 002 138ょよらりるれろわわ素

002 140 002 142 002 144 002 146 002 148 002 150 002 152 002 154 002 156 002 158材をん種類棒穴成形質

002 160 002 162 002 164 002 166 002 168 002 170 002 172 002 174 002 176 002 178寸法外径長端面小内

002 180 002 182 002 184 002 186 002 188 002 190 002 192 002 194 002 196 002 198大加工切削倣正途中荒

002 200 002 202 002 204 002 206 002 208 002 210 002 212 002 214 002 216 002 218具番号仕上込点方向速

002 220 002 222 002 224 002 226 002 228 002 230 002 232 002 234 002 236 002 238度送量開始深主軸

002 240 002 242 002 244 002 246 002 248 002 250 002 252 002 254 回転数位置決直線時円

003 000 003 002 003 004 003 006 003 008 003 010 003 012 003 014 003 016 003 018反現在指令値領域診断

003 020 003 022 003 024 003 026 003 028 003 030 003 032 003 034 003 036 003 038操作手引機械残移動次

003 040 003 042 003 044 003 046 003 048 003 050 003 052 003 054 003 056 003 058早電源投入間分秒自運

003 060 003 062 003 064 003 066 003 068 003 070 003 072 003 074 003 076 003 078負荷実使用寿命新規除

003 080 003 082 003 084 003 086 003 088 003 090 003 092 003 094 003 096 003 098隅取単補能独終了記角

003 100 003 102 003 104 003 106 003 108 003 110 003 112 003 114 003 116 003 118溝刃幅広設定一覧表部

003 120 003 122 003 124 003 126 003 128 003 130 003 132 003 134 003 136 003 138炭合金鋼超硬先付摩耗

003 140 003 142 003 144 003 146 003 148 003 150 003 152 003 154 003 156 003 158


- 1163 -

仮想副行挿消去山高準 003 160 003 162 003 164 003 166 003 168 003 170 003 172 003 174 003 176 003 178

備完後弧助択無視器原 003 180 003 182 003 184 003 186 003 188 003 190 003 192 003 194 003 196 003 198

登録再処理描画過容編 003 200 003 202 003 204 003 206 003 208 003 210 003 212 003 214 003 216 003 218

集未対相座標示名歯変 003 220 003 222 003 224 003 226 003 228 003 230 003 232 003 234 003 236 003 238

呼推馬力系選達閉 003 240 003 242 003 244 003 246 003 248 003 250 003 252 003 254

禁復帰書個桁稼由両半 004 000 004 002 004 004 004 006 004 008 004 010 004 012 004 014 004 016 004 018

逃底逆下空四触平代辺 004 020 004 022 004 024 004 026 004 028 004 030 004 032 004 034 004 036 004 038

格子周心本群停止巾微 004 040 004 042 004 044 004 046 004 048 004 050 004 052 004 054 004 056 004 058

状路範囲倍率注側特殊 004 060 004 062 004 064 004 066 004 068 004 070 004 072 004 074 004 076 004 078

距離連続増隔件初期条 004 080 004 082 004 084 004 086 004 088 004 090 004 092 004 094 004 096 004 098

経握圧扱陰隠右押横黄 004 100 004 102 004 104 004 106 004 108 004 110 004 112 004 114 004 116 004 118

億屋化何絵階概該巻換 004 120 004 122 004 124 004 126 004 128 004 130 004 132 004 134 004 136 004 138

気起軌技疑供共境強教 004 140 004 142 004 144 004 146 004 148 004 150 004 152 004 154 004 156 004 158

掘繰係傾型検権研肩見 004 160 004 162 004 164 004 166 004 168 004 170 004 172 004 174 004 176 004 178

験元弦減孔巧控更校構 004 180 004 182 004 184 004 186 004 188 004 190 004 192 004 194 004 196 004 198

根左差雑参散産算治耳 004 200 004 202 004 204 004 206 004 208 004 210 004 212 004 214 004 216 004 218

式失修十従勝商少尚昇 004 220 004 222 004 224 004 226 004 228 004 230 004 232 004 234 004 236 004 238

植色食伸信侵振浸 004 240 004 242 004 244 004 246 004 248 004 250 004 252 004 254

真暗以意異影鋭越価可 005 000 005 002 005 004 005 006 005 008 005 010 005 012 005 014 005 016 005 018

科果箇課各拡核学掛漢 005 020 005 022 005 024 005 026 005 028 005 030 005 032 005 034 005 036 005 038

簡観関含却客休急業曲 005 040 005 042 005 044 005 046 005 048 005 050 005 052 005 054 005 056 005 058

均筋継計軽言限互降採 005 060 005 062 005 064 005 066 005 068 005 070 005 072 005 074 005 076 005 078

済細姿思写射斜者車借 005 080 005 082 005 084 005 086 005 088 005 090 005 092 005 094 005 096 005 098

縦重出述術渉照省章証 005 100 005 102 005 104 005 106 005 108 005 110 005 112 005 114 005 116 005 118

象身進人図違印沿遠央 005 120 005 122 005 124 005 126 005 128 005 130 005 132 005 134 005 136 005 138

奥往応会解改割活願基 005 140 005 142 005 144 005 146 005 148 005 150 005 152 005 154 005 156 005 158


- 1164 -

奇寄岐既近区矩駆偶旧 005 160 005 162 005 164 005 166 005 168 005 170 005 172 005 174 005 176 005 178

求球究級欠結口語誤交 005 180 005 182 005 184 005 186 005 188 005 190 005 192 005 194 005 196 005 198

厚項刻告黒財策糸試資 005 200 005 202 005 204 005 206 005 208 005 210 005 212 005 214 005 216 005 218

事持似釈弱受収純順所 005 220 005 222 005 224 005 226 005 228 005 230 005 232 005 234 005 236 005 238

序剰場常飾水錐据 005 240 005 242 005 244 005 246 005 248 005 250 005 252 005 254

制整製前全然則属即他 006 000 006 002 006 004 006 006 006 008 006 010 006 012 006 014 006 016 006 018

多存谷探短徴鎮調頂鉄 006 020 006 022 006 024 006 026 006 028 006 030 006 032 006 034 006 036 006 038

添頭同導道熱年濃箱発 006 040 006 042 006 044 006 046 006 048 006 050 006 052 006 054 006 056 006 058

抜伴必百複物文聞併忘 006 060 006 062 006 064 006 066 006 068 006 070 006 072 006 074 006 076 006 078

末密有余与裏立略青席 006 080 006 082 006 084 006 086 006 088 006 090 006 092 006 094 006 096 006 098

石積赤接折粗創双捜太 006 100 006 102 006 104 006 106 006 108 006 110 006 112 006 114 006 116 006 118

打体待態替段知地致遅 006 120 006 122 006 124 006 126 006 128 006 130 006 132 006 134 006 136 006 138

追通伝得読凸凹突鈍敗 006 140 006 142 006 144 006 146 006 148 006 150 006 152 006 154 006 156 006 158

杯背配品不布並頁別片 006 160 006 162 006 164 006 166 006 168 006 170 006 172 006 174 006 176 006 178

返勉弁保明滅木目歪揺 006 180 006 182 006 184 006 186 006 188 006 190 006 192 006 194 006 196 006 198

様溶要抑良輪和話枠節 006 200 006 202 006 204 006 206 006 208 006 210 006 212 006 214 006 216 006 218

説絶千専浅旋総走退台 006 220 006 222 006 224 006 226 006 228 006 230 006 232 006 234 006 236 006 238

第題卓室着柱鋳丁 006 240 006 242 006 244 006 246 006 248 006 250 006 252 006 254

低訂肉日白薄比皮被非 007 000 007 002 007 004 007 006 007 008 007 010 007 012 007 014 007 016 007 018

美普伏歩包門問絡列万 007 020 007 022 007 024 007 026 007 028 007 030 007 032 007 034 007 036 007 038

利訳礼乱放枚約練油劣 007 040 007 042 007 044 007 046 007 048 007 050 007 052 007 054 007 056 007 058

例郭戻冷垂緑紫許測精 007 060 007 062 007 064 007 066 007 068 007 070 007 072 007 074 007 076 007 078

効 → ↑ ← ↓ 007 080 007 082 007 084 007 086 007 088 007 090 007 092 007 094 007 096 007 098

板予〃家装管 007 100 007 102 007 104 007 106 007 108 007 110 007 112 007 114 007 116 007 118

粉等貫安 α β 007 120 007 122 007 124 007 126 007 128 007 130 007 132 007 134 007 136 007 138

程抗張任破損御足守般 007 140 007 142 007 144 007 146 007 148 007 150 007 152 007 154 007 156 007 158


- 1165 -

納義丸汎固毎当的詳鳥 007 160 007 162 007 164 007 166 007 168 007 170 007 172 007 174 007 176 007 178

適論額縁温給界混監締 007 180 007 182 007 184 007 186 007 188 007 190 007 192 007 194 007 196 007 198

護己称樹脂料落確認報 007 200 007 202 007 204 007 206 007 208 007 210 007 212 007 214 007 216 007 218

排性生績判搬砥 θ 島壁 007 220 007 222 007 224 007 226 007 228 007 230 007 232 007 234 007 236 007 238

] [ ■ 007 240 007 242 007 244 007 246 007 248 007 250 007 252 007 254

13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64303EN-1/02

- 1166 -

13 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Chapter 13, "DISPLAY/SET/EDIT", consists of the following sections: 13.1 DISPLAY/SET................................................................................................................................1166 13.2 EDIT................................................................................................................................................1217 13.3 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ...........................................................................................1222 13.4 MACHINE OPERATION MENU..................................................................................................1228 13.5 MACHINE OPERATION MENU MAKING TOOL.....................................................................1235

13.1 DISPLAY/SET

13.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display

Overview This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer (started by an input signal from PMC) on the screen. The integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer can be altered and preset, by the operator. In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number of completed parts on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter set M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined and the number of parts completed is incremented by 1. If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts machined can be counted automatically. If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts required, a signal is output to the PMC side. It is possible for the operator to change and preset the number of parts required and the number of parts completed. This is an option function. Items such as parts machined are displayed on the Setting (timer) screen even when the option is not provided, but operation such as counting up is not performed.

B-64303EN-1/02 13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

- 1167 -

Signal General-purpose integrating meter start signal TMRON<Gn053.0>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] The CNC has an meter which is started by an input signal from the PMC. Additionally,

there are meters for counting the automatic operation time and counting cutting time. The count for these meter can be displayed on the screen. The count can be preset by the operator.

[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the meter starts counting.

Target part count reached signal PRTSF<Fn062.7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been machined. [Output cond.] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when:

- The number of parts machined counts up and reaches the required number of parts when M02, M30, or the M code set in parameter No. 6710 is executed.

When the required number of parts is zero, this signal is not set. The PRTSF signal is set to 0 when: - Machining of the specified number of parts has not yet been completed. - The system is reset.

When PRT (bit 1 of No. 6700) = 1, however, the PRTSF signal is not set to 0 even if the system is reset.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn053 TMRON

Fn062 PRTSF

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6700 PRT PCM


#0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts

0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710 1: Only M code specified by parameter No.6710

#1 PRT Upon reset, the required parts count arrival signal (PRTSF) is: 0: Set to "0". 1: Not set to "0".

6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts


The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.


- 1168 -

NOTE The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with

M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Even when such an M code is set, count-up operation is not performed, ignoring the M code.)

6711 Number of machined parts


The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No.6710 is executed.

NOTE The number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit 0

(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.

6712 Total number of machined parts


This parameter sets the total number of machined parts. The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710 is executed.

NOTE The number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit 0

(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.

6713 Number of required parts


This parameter sets the number of required machined parts. Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the number of machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.

6750 Integrated value of power-on period

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999

This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.


- 1169 -

6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 1

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 59999

6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999

This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither stop nor hold time included). The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of this parameter No. 6751 and parameter No. 6752.

6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1


6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2


This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03). The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this parameter No. 6753 and parameter No. 6754.

6755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 1


6756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 2


This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signal TMRON <G0053.0> from PMC is on. The actual integrated time is the sum of this parameter No. 6755 and parameter No. 6756.


- 1170 -

6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 1


6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 2


This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither stop nor hold state included). The actual time accumulated during operating is the sum of this parameter No. 6757 and parameter No. 6758. The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during the power-on sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8134 NCT




#7 NCT Run hour and parts count display is:



OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Displaying and setting run time, parts count, and time

13.1.2 Software Operator's Panel

Overview The MDI panel can replace the switches on the machine operator's panel. That is, the MDI panel can select a mode or jog feed override, omitting the corresponding switches on the machine operator's panel. The operation switches of the function of groups 1 to 7 below can be replaced with soft switches (software operator's panel). It is possible to select either the operation switches on the machine operator's panel or the soft switches of the controller as the operation switches of groups 1 to 7, for each group by the parameters. In addition, it is possible to add 8 to 16 general-purpose soft switches used freely by the machine tool builder (software operator's panel general purpose switches). These 16 general-purpose soft switches can be freely named by the machine tool builder. Group1 : Mode selection Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification Group4 : Jog feedrate override, feedrate override, rapid traverse override


- 1171 -

Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run Group6 : Protect key Group7 : Feed hold Group8 : General purpose The states of all soft switches are input to the PMC by output signals. Based on these output signals, the PMC should turn "1" or "0" input signals related to the soft switch functions. When the soft switch provided for single block operation is turned on, for instance, the control unit does not select the single block operation internally. The single block operation is selected just when the PMC sets the input signal for single block operation to 1. Bit 3 (NOP) and bit 4 (NOW) of parameter No. 8136 can be used to specify whether to use the software operator's panel and the software operator's panel general purpose switches, respectively.

Signal Group Function Output signal Related input signal

1 Mode selection MD1O MD2O MD4O ZRNO

<Fn073.0> <Fn073.1> <Fn073.2> <Fn073.4>

MD1 MD2 MD4 ZRN

Jog feed axis select +J1O to +J4O -J1O to -J4O <Fn081>

+J1 to +J4 -J1 to -J4

2

Manual rapid traverse RTO <Fn077.6> RT Manual pulse generator feed axis select

HS1AO<Fn077.0> HS1BO<Fn077.1> HS1CO<Fn077.2> HS1DO<Fn077.3>

HS1A HS1B HS1C HS1D

3

Manual pulse generator magnification rate select

MP1O<Fn076.0> MP2O<Fn076.1>

MP1 MP2

Jog feed rate override *JV0O to *JV15O <Fn079, Fn080> *JV0 to *JV15 Feedrate override *FV0O to *FV7O <Fn078> *FV0 to *FV7

4

Rapid traverse override ROV1O ROV2O

<Fn076.4> <Fn076.5>

ROV1 ROV2

Optional block skip BDTO <Fn075.2> BDT Single block SBKO <Fn075.3> SBK Machine lock MLKO <Fn075.4> MLK

5

Dry run DRNO <Fn075.5> DRN 6 Protect key KEYO*1 <F075.6> KEY1 to KEY4 7 Feed hold SPO <Fn075.7> *SP

General purpose switch 1 to 8 OUT0 to OUT7 <Fn072> 8 General purpose switch 9 to 16 OUT8 to OUT15 <Fn074>

*1 : For a 2-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is common

to all paths.


- 1172 -

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

Fn073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

Fn074 OUT15 OUT14 OUT13 OUT12 OUT11 OUT10 OUT9 OUT8

Fn075 SPO KEYO*1 DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO

Fn076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O

Fn077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO

Fn078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

Fn079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

Fn080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O

Fn081 -J4O +J4O -J3O +J3O -J2O +J2O -J1O +J1O *1 : For a 2-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is common

to all paths.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1




#0 OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed

#1 OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed

#2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed

#3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed


- 1173 -

#4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed

#5 OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed

#6 OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7201 GPS


#1 GPS The maximum number of switches of the general-purpose switch function on the software

operator's panel is: 0: 8. 1: 16.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3002 IOV


#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:

0: Used without modification (A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a positive logic signal.)

1: Inverted (A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a negative logic signal.)

The signals indicated below are affected. Signal of negative logic: Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G0012> Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<G0013> Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)

*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187> Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<F0078> Signals of positive logic: Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<G0014.0, 1> Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<F0076.4, 5> Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)

EROV1g,EROV2g <G0150.0, 1, G0162.0, 1, G0174.0, 1, G0186.0, 1>

7210 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑”

7211 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓”


- 1174 -

7212 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→”

7213 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “←”

7214 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”





On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI panel when jog feed is performed.

Setting value Feed axis and direction 0 Not moved 1 First axis, positive direction 2 First axis, negative direction 3 Second axis, positive direction 4 Second axis, negative direction 5 Third axis, positive direction 6 Third axis, negative direction 7 Fourth axis, positive direction 8 Fourth axis, negative direction

Example) Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the

direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. [8↑] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2↓] to the negative direction of the Z axis, [6→] to the positive direction of the X axis [4←] to the negative direction of the X axis, [1 ] to the positive direction of the Y axis, [9 ] to the negative direction of the Y axis

Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7216 = 0 (Not used) Parameter No.7217 = 0 (Not used)

7220 Name of general-purpose switch 1 on software operator's panel (first character) to to

7283 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's panel (eighth character)



Allow keys on the MDI panel

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3


- 1175 -



[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] -128 to 127

Each of these parameters sets the name of a general-purpose switch on the software operator's panel with character codes indicated in the character-code correspondence table. A switch name consists of up to eight characters. Parameter Nos. 7220 to 7227 : Name of general-purpose switch 1 Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235 : Name of general-purpose switch 2 Parameter Nos. 7236 to 7243 : Name of general-purpose switch 3 Parameter Nos. 7244 to 7251 : Name of general-purpose switch 4 Parameter Nos. 7252 to 7259 : Name of general-purpose switch 5 Parameter Nos. 7260 to 7267 : Name of general-purpose switch 6 Parameter Nos. 7268 to 7275 : Name of general-purpose switch 7 Parameter Nos. 7276 to 7283 : Name of general-purpose switch 8 Parameter Nos. 7284 to 7291 : Name of general-purpose switch 9 Parameter Nos. 7292 to 7299 : Name of general-purpose switch 10 Parameter Nos. 7352 to 7359 : Name of general-purpose switch 11 Parameter Nos. 7360 to 7367 : Name of general-purpose switch 12 Parameter Nos. 7368 to 7375 : Name of general-purpose switch 13 Parameter Nos. 7376 to 7383 : Name of general-purpose switch 14 Parameter Nos. 7384 to 7391 : Name of general-purpose switch 15 Parameter Nos. 7392 to 7399 : Name of general-purpose switch 16

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8136 NOW NOP




#3 NOP Software operator's panel is:


#4 NOW Software operator's panel general purpose switch is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used.


- 1176 -

- Character code list Character Code Character Code Character Code

A 65 Q 81 6 54 B 66 R 82 7 55 C 67 S 83 8 56 D 68 T 84 9 57 E 69 U 85 32 F 70 V 86 ! 33 G 71 W 87 “ 34 H 72 X 88 # 35 I 73 Y 89 $ 36 J 74 Z 90 % 37 K 75 0 48 & 38 L 76 1 49 ‘ 39 M 77 2 50 ( 40 N 78 3 51 ) 41 O 79 4 52 * 42 P 80 5 53 + 43

Note

NOTE 1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode

for DNC operation is to be required, then, all control switches for mode selection should be on the machine operator's panel or a general-purpose soft switch should be used to select the mode for DNC operation.

Soft switches available for mode selection - Manual data input - Automatic operation - Memory edit - Manual handle feed / incremental feed - Jog feed - Manual reference position return 2 Only one soft switch is available for the protection key. But, four input signals are

available for protection key (KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 and KEY4). Generally, four input signals are simultaneously turned to "1" or "0" according to

the state of the protection soft switch. For a 2-path system, the signals are as follows. These signals are common to all

paths. - KEYO<F0075.6> - KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to 6>

3 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal SPO is turned to "1", and the PMC turns feed hold signal *SP to "0".

In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold is turned off, output signal SPO is turned "0" and the PMC turns signal *SP to "1". For soft switches other than feed hold and general soft switches, when an output signal corresponding to a soft switch is turned to "1", the corresponding input signal is turned to "1".


- 1177 -

The following table lists the jog feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches. *JV0O to *JV15O Override values (%) 15 8 7 0

0 1111 1111 1111 11110.1 1111 1111 1111 01010.14 1111 1111 1111 00010.2 1111 1111 1110 10110.27 1111 1111 1110 01000.37 1111 1111 1101 10100.52 1111 1111 1100 10110.72 1111 1111 1011 01111.0 1111 1111 1001 10111.4 1111 1111 0111 00112.0 1111 1111 0011 01112.7 1111 1110 1111 00013.7 1111 1110 1000 11015.2 1111 1101 1111 01117.2 1111 1101 0010 1111

10.0 1111 1100 0001 011114.0 1111 1010 1000 011120.0 1111 1000 0010 111127.0 1111 0101 0111 001137.0 1111 0001 1000 101152.0 1110 1011 1010 111172.0 1110 0011 1101 1111

100.0 1101 1000 1110 1111140.0 1100 1001 0100 1111200.0 1011 0001 1101 1111

The following table lists the feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches.

*FV0O to *FV7O Override values (%) 7 0

0 1111 1111 10 1111 0101 20 1110 1011 30 1110 0001 40 1101 0111 50 1100 1101 60 1100 0011 70 1011 1001 80 1010 1111 90 1010 0101

100 1001 1011 110 1001 0001 120 1000 0111 130 0111 1101 140 0111 0011 150 0110 1001 160 0101 1111 170 0101 0101 180 0100 1011 190 0100 0001 200 0011 0111

Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Display and setting of the software operator’s panel


- 1178 -

13.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function

Overview Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation and eight protection levels can be set for various types of CNC and PMC data. When various types of CNC and PMC data are changed or output externally, the system compares the operation level with the protection level to determine whether change or external output is allowed.

NOTE 8-level data protection function is optional function.

Explanation

- Operation level Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation. Operation levels 0 to 3 are selected by the memory protection key signal. Operation levels 4 to 7 are selected by a password.

Operation level Setting method Sample classification 7 (High) Password -

6 Password MTB 5 Password Dealer, Integrator 4 Password End user 3 Memory protection key signal User level (Level 1) 2 Memory protection key signal User level (Level 2) 1 Memory protection key signal User level (Level 3)

0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (Level 4)

NOTE 1 Once any of operation levels 4 to 7 is set, it is retained (even when the power is

turned off) until clear operation is performed by the corresponding password. 2 The initial values of the passwords for operation levels 4 to 6 are shown below.

- Operation level 4: "HC3V9ZEP" - Operation level 5: "J72WB8YA" - Operation level 6: "VLR6T92M"

3 Operation level 7 is reserved for the maintenance of the CNC and PMC.

CAUTION When this function is provided, the conventional memory protection function is

disabled. When this function is added, the programmer protection function of the PMC is

disabled. However, the sequence program password function can be used in combination with this function.

- Data protection level

A data protection level can be set for each of the following types of data. There are two data protection levels as shown below. - Change protection level Protection level used for changing data - Output protection level Protection level used for externally outputting data (punching out). Protection levels 0 (low) to 7 (high) can be set.


- 1179 -

CNC data protection level setting items

Initial value of protection level Data type Change Output

Custom macro conversion data (including variable data specific to the macro executor)

0 0

Periodical maintenance information data 0 0 Tool offset data (for each type when classification is performed by figure and figure/wear)

0 0

Clock data 0 0 Workpiece origin shift data 0 0 Workpiece origin offset data 0 0 Ethernet setting data 0 0 Parameter data 0 0 Setting data 0 0 Pitch error compensation data 0 0 Power Mate CNC Manager function parameter data 0 0 Each part program 0 0 Part program editing 0 0 Presetting an absolute coordinate 0 0

PMC data protection level setting items Initial value of protection level Data type

Change Output Configuration parameter 0 0 Setting (online) 0 0 Sequence parameter 0 0 PMC parameter 0 0 Timer 0 0 Counter 0 0 Keep relay 0 0 Keep relay (system) 0 0 Data table 0 0 Data table control 0 0 PMC memory 0 0

- Changing or externally outputting of data

When various types of CNC and PMC data is changed or output externally, the change protection level or output protection level set for the target data is compared with its current operation level. If the operation level is equal to or higher than the protection level set for the target data (operation level ≥ protection level), it is assumed that the target data can be changed or output externally and the data is allowed to be changed or output externally. The operation level must be changed according to the purpose as needed. The protection level must be set according to the confidentiality and severity of data. [Example of application] <1> Set the change protection level as follows.

- Parameter (Change protection level 4) - Tool offset data (Change protection level 0)

<2> The changeable data can be restricted by changing the operation level during CNC and PMC operation. - Operation level 4

Parameters and tool offset data can be changed.


- 1180 -

- Operation level 0 Tool offset data can be changed. Parameters cannot be changed.

DataOperation level Parameter Tool offset data

4 Changeable Changeable 0 Not changeable Changeable

Notes - Tool offset data

NOTE 1 Valid types of tool offset data vary depending on the tool offset memory used.

See the tables below when setting a data protection level. 2 When a type of data that is not permitted to be changed or externally output is

found during tool offset data input/output, the following operation takes place. • Input : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed

is changed. • Output : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed

is output.

M Data type/tool offset memory Tool offset memory A Tool offset memory C

Tool offset data Applicable Not applicable Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Not applicable Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Not applicable Tool offset data (tool radius, geometry) Not applicable Applicable Tool offset data (tool radius, wear) Not applicable Applicable Tool offset data (tool length, geometry) Not applicable Applicable Tool offset data (tool length, wear) Not applicable Applicable

T

Data type/tool offset memory Without tool geometry and wear compensation

With tool geometry and wear compensation

Tool offset data Applicable Not applicable Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Applicable Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Applicable

Data type/tool offset memory

Tool radius compensation Y-axis offset

(without tool geometry and wear compensation)

Tool radius compensation Y-axis offset

(with tool geometry and wear compensation)

Tool offset data Applicable Not applicable Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Applicable Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Applicable

Data type/tool offset memory Virtual tool tip direction

Tool offset data Applicable


- 1181 -

- Part programs and part program editing NOTE 1 When changing the protection level of a part program, use the program list

screen instead of the protection level setting screen. See the description of "Operation/setting screen".

2 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode.

- Absolute coordinate preset operation NOTE When absolute coordinates are preset, workpiece coordinate system presetting is

protected.

- Other notes NOTE 1 For some data, the output function is not provided. 2 When a higher protection level than the current operation level is set for data,

that protection level cannot be changed. 3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a protection level higher than

the current operation level. 4 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode. 5 For details of the protection level of PMC data, refer to "PMC Programming

Manual (B-64393EN)". 6 In principle, the data change protection check is performed for changes made by

MDI. Changes made by machine operations and so on are not checked. For example, a programmable parameter input by specifying G10L50 may be

changed regardless of the operation level and parameter change protection level.

To protect data from illegal programmed commands, take appropriate measures; for example, set an appropriate change protection level for program edit operations not to create illegal programs.

Signal Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G046.3 to 6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals select the operation level for the 8-level data protection function.

The correspondence between signals and operation levels is shown below.

Operation level KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 3 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

NOTE When a combination other than the above is set, operation level 0

is assumed.

[Caution] When the 8-level data protection function is not used, these signals are used as memory protection keys.


- 1182 -

Note that what these signals indicate changes depending on whether the 8-level data protection function is used.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


NOTE For a 2-path system, the signal address is common to all paths.

Operation/setting screen

Various settings or display about operation levels or protection levels can be performed on the following screens. • Password change screen • Operation level setting screen • Protection level setting screen • Program list screen

- Password change screen On the password change screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Changing the passwords of operation levels 4 to 7

NOTE 1 A password consists of 3 to 8 characters including the following.

- Uppercase letter - Numeric

2 When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each of input characters. 3 The following shows whether passwords can be changed at the current

operation level. - Password having a higher operation level than the current operation level

Cannot be changed. - Password having the same operation level as the current operation level

Can be changed. - Password having a lower operation level than the current operation level

Can be changed (reverting to the initial password can only be performed).

CAUTION The set password is not displayed. Be careful not to forget the password.

- Operation level setting screen

On the operation level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Entering the password and then selecting one of operation levels 4 to 7 3) Canceling the entered password and then selecting the operation level other than operation levels 4

to 7

NOTE When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each character.


- 1183 -

- Protection level setting screen On the protection level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each data 3) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each data

NOTE 1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection

level cannot be changed. 2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than

the current operation level.

- Program list screen On the program list screen, the following display and operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each part program 2) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each part program

NOTE 1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection

level cannot be changed. 2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than

the current operation level.

13.1.4 Touch Panel Control

Overview A display unit with a touch panel enables you to operate soft keys by touching the screen. Moreover, an application using a touch panel can be created with the C language executor.

NOTE 1 RS-232C serial port 2 (JD36B) is occupied. 2 Touch panel pressing information is read at intervals of 32 msec. 3 A positional precision of ±2.5 mm is provided.

Explanation

- C language executor With the C language executor, touch panel functions can be used. For the specifications of the functions, refer to "C Language Executor Programming Manual".

- Calibration When replacing the touch panel or clearing all memory (SRAM) data, set data for calibrating the positional relation between the touch panel and LCD according to the procedure below. Calibration procedure 1 Enable the touch panel calibration screen.(Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 1.) 2 Press function key .

3 Press the continuous menu key several times. The [TOUCH PANEL] soft key is displayed. 4 Press the [TOUCH PANEL] soft key then the [(OPRT)] soft key. The [TP CAL] soft key is

displayed.


- 1184 -

5 Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key displays the touch panel calibration screen for all screens.

6 Press the calibration points (9 points) with a dedicated pen. When a point is pressed correctly, the

"+" mark changes to the "Ο" mark. If a "+" mark is not pressed accurately, the message "CALIBRATION POINT DOES NOT MATCH. PLEASE PUSH AGAIN." is displayed.

7 After entering the calibration points (9 points), press the <INPUT> key to complete calibration. To cancel calibration or retry, press the <CAN> key. The screen display returns to the previous screen. If the <INPUT> key is pressed before entering the calibration points (9 points), calibration operation is cancelled.

8 When calibration is terminated normally, the message "CALIBRATION WAS ENDED." is displayed.

9 Upon completion of calibration, disable the touch panel calibration screen to protect against operation errors. (Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 0.)


- 1185 -

NOTE 1 If the screen display is switched from the touch panel calibration screen to

another screen such as the alarm screen by the automatic screen switching function, calibration is automatically cancelled.

2 Calibration operation can be performed in any mode. 3 After system startup, perform calibration operation swiftly before starting

operation.

- Operation when two points are pressed at the same time When the touch panel is pressed at two or more points at the same time, the position of the gravity center is obtained by considering how each of these points is pressed, and the touch panel is assumed to be pressed at this gravity center position. At this time the coordinates that can be obtained can be set by setting bit 1 (T2P) of parameter No. 3192. 1) Suppose that in Fig. 13.1 (a), as soon as point A is pressed, point B is pressed.

Fig. 13.1 (a) Pressed points on the touch panel 2) The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 13.1 (b).

Fig. 13.1 (b) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0 3) If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be held pressed even after the pressed point changes from point

A to point C (Fig. 13.1 (c)).

Fig. 13.1 (c) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1

- Operation when dragging is performed When dragging (continuously pressing the touch panel while making a movement) is performed on the touch panel, the system response varies depending on the setting of bit 1 (T2P) of parameter No. 3192. When the drag function is used in C Language Executor applications, set T2P to 0. 1) Suppose that in Fig. 13.1 (d), point A is pressed first and then dragging is performed from point A to

B to C.

Fig. 13.1 (d) Dragging on the touch panel

A

BC

On A

Cont'd

A . . . Cont'd

A Cont'd

C Cont'd

C . . . Off

On A

Cont'd A

. . . Cont'd

A Cont'd

A Cont'd

A . . . Off

A CB


- 1186 -

2) The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 13.1 (e).

Fig. 13.1 (e) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0 3) If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be kept pressed even after the pressed point moves from point

A to point C (Fig. 13.1 (f)).

Fig. 13.1 (f) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3113 DCL

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 DCL The touch panel calibration screen is:

0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. Usually, set this parameter to 0. Touch panel calibration becomes necessary only when the touch panel is replaced or all memory data is cleared. Set this parameter to 1 only when performing touch panel calibration. Upon completion of touch panel calibration, reset this parameter to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3119 DDS

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 DDS The touch panel is:

0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. Set this parameter to 1 when disabling the touch panel temporarily as in the case of startup.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3192 TRA T2P


#1 T2P When more than one point is pressed on the touch panel:

0: The position at the center of gravity is obtained. 1: The point pressed first is obtained.

On A

Cont'd

B Cont'd

C

On A

Cont'd

A Cont'd

A


- 1187 -

NOTE 1 Even when bit parameter T2P is set to 1, the position at the center

of gravity is assumed to be pressed if two or more points are pressed within a scan period (32 ms) of the touch panel.

2 If a C executer application or the like has a touch panel drag (move in pressed state) function, set parameter T2P to 0.

#2 TRA If a point on the touch panel is kept pressed for a time specified in parameter No. 3197 or

longer, 0: An alarm is not raised. 1: An alarm (SR5303) is raised.

NOTE 1 If an C executer application or the like has a touch panel repeat

(continue pressing) function, set parameter TRA to 0. 2 In open CNC, the parameter is valid just for the CNC screen

display function.

3197 Detection time of continuous pressing on touch panel

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Unit of data] sec [Valid data range] 0 to 255

Set a period of continuous pressing on the touch panel which causes alarm to be raised. When 0 is set, it is equivalent to 20.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is

set to 1.

Alarm and message Number Message Description SR5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch

panel cannot be initialized when the power is turned on. If bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is set to 1, this message is issued also when the touch panel is being kept pressed. Correct the cause then turn on the power again.

Caution

CAUTION When all memory (SRAM) data is cleared, the soft keys on the touch panel are

not made usable yet. In this case, the MDI keys (such as the cursor keys and page keys) need to be used for setting.


- 1188 -

13.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface

Outline External Touch Panel (called "ETP" below) of SNP-X protocol can be connected with Series 0i-D. ETP has functions that can read out/ write in from/to PMC such control signals as input signal(X), output signal(Y), internal relay(R), keep relay(K), data table(D), extra relay(E), timer(T), counter(C), and the function is almost the same as operating panel of machine. The remarkable function of ETP is drawing function. Assignment between drawing and address(signal) can be specified freely. For example, the data in data table can be set with the switch on the screen which is designed to assign the setting of data table.

DATA

Push the switch

on the screen. Data in data

table is set.

CNCETP


- 1189 -

Explanation - Connection

RS-232C serial port 2(JD36B) on main CPU board is used in CNC. Cable-A must be based on RS-232C standard, and are prepared by customer. (1) Cable-A (connection diagram between JD36B on CNC and SIO on ETP.)

SIOCable-A

CNCETP

JD36B

ETP CNC

SIO(25pin) JD36B(20pin)

Shield

03 11

RD SD

02 01

SD RD

04 15

RS RS

05 05

CS CS

07 08

SG SG

03

DR

07

CD

13

ER Cables must be shielded by cable clamp made of metal.

- Power On sequence

Please turn on the power supply on ETP side first.


- 1190 -

- Data of CNC, read / write from ETP The following CNC data can be read and written on the ETP side:

Signal type 0i-D/0i Mate-D PMC X0 to X127 X200 to X327 X400 to X527

Input signal to the PMC from the machine Note 1

X600 to X727 X1000 to X1127

Y0 to Y127 Y200 to Y327 Y400 to Y527

Output signal from the PMC to the machine

Y600 to Y727 Y1000 to Y1127 Internal relay - User area R0 to R7999 Keep relay - User area K0 to K99 Data table D0 to D8190

Note 2 Extra relay E0 to E9999 Timer - Variable timer T0 to T499 Timer - Variable timer C0 to C399 Counter C5000 to C5199

NOTE 1 These addresses are for read only. 2 Although the actual PMC addresses range from 0000 to 9999, only addresses

up to 8190 can be used with ETP.

- Protocol Only direct command on SNP-X protocol is available in CNC. ETP also must use the same protocol and the same command only. The process required for writing data more than 3 bytes is the same as that lass than 2bytes. Please refer the documents of SNP-X protocol for the detail of SNP-X protocol.

Limitation 1) ETP cannot be used together with the touch panel on the LCD of the CNC (FS0i-D). 2) ETP is Touch Panel made by DIGITAL Co. Ltd. ETPs which can be connected with CNC are as

follows. - GP-450E - GP-550T - GP-550S - GP-2000 SERIES

Parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3119 TPA

[Input type] Parameter input


- 1191 -

[Data type] Bit

#3 TPA When the option for the external touch panel interface is selected, the external touch panel interface connection is: 0: Valid. 1: Invalid. For an external touch panel (called ETP hereinafter), the RS-232C serial port 2 ((JD36B) on the main board of the CNC is used. When using ETP, set bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119 to 0. By this setting, JD36B is used for ETP, regardless of the setting of I/O CHANNEL (I/O device selection) of the existing parameters Nos. 0020 through 0023. For other I/O devices, use JD36A and so forth. By the setting above, the settings of the existing parameters Nos. 0100 and 0121 through 0123 become invalid for channel 2 (JD36B), and the following settings are applied at all times: - Baud rate : 19200 bps - Stop bit : 1 bit - Parity check : Even parity

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13101 TPB




#1 TPB Baud rate used with the external touch panel 0: 19200 bps is always used. 1: The baud rate with the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 is

used. As mentioned in the description of bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119, when TPA is set to 0, the baud rate is always set to 19200 bps. To allow the baud rate to be changed, set bit 1 (TPB) of parameter No. 13101 to 1. This allows the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 to be used.

NOTE Baud rates that can be set may vary depending on the ETP used.

13.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function

Overview Standard check sum of CNC parameter can be calculated previously and be saved in CNC. In the other hand, a parameter check sum is calculated at CNC power-on. This value is compared with the standard check sum to check whether there is difference between two values. If there are changed parameters, an alarm will occur at next power-on. So the CNC can be averted from miss operation such as miss setting of parameter and forgetting to correct the parameters changed temporarily.


- 1192 -

Explanation When parameter CKS(No.13730#0) is changed from “0” to “1”, the standard check sum is calculated. In the other hand at CNC power-on, a parameter check sum is calculated and it’s value is compared with standard check sum. If two values are different, alarm (DS5340) occurs. This alarm is canceled by the operation pressing and , but if parameters are not corrected to

original value, alarm (DS5340) will occur again at next check sum comparison at CNC power-on. By parameter setting, some parameters can be excluded from check sum. Moreover, there are many parameters that CNC system excludes from check sum.

NOTE If parameter CSR(No.13730#7) is “1”, alarm(DS5340) can be canceled only by

key.

Parameter check sum information screen The parameter check sum information screen shows the value of the standard check sum, the time and date when the standard check sum was calculated, and the value of a check sum calculated at power-on.

Fig. 13.1.6 (g) Parameter check sum information screen

Parameter check sum setting screen

- Setting parameters to be excluded Setting the number of parameter excluded from check sum on this screen. A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.


- 1193 -

Fig. 13.1.6 (h) Parameter check sum setting (No.) screen

- Range of excluded parameters

The range of parameter numbers to be excluded from check sum can be specified. A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.

Fig. 13.1.6 (i) Parameter check sum setting (range) screen

Operation procedure

The following explains how to display the parameter check sum information screen and how to make settings on the parameter check sum setting screen.

- Displaying parameter check sum information For the 10.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. 1 Press function key .

2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] appears.


- 1194 -

3 Press horizontal soft key [PARAM CHKSUM]. 4 Press horizontal soft key [CHKSUM INFO]. The following screen is then displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (j) Parameter check sum information screen (10.4 inches)

For the 8.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. 1 Press function key .

2 Press vertical continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [CHKSUM] is displayed.

3 Press soft key [CHKSUM]. 4 Press soft key [CHKINF]. The following screen is displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (k) Parameter check sum information screen (8.4 inches)


- 1195 -

- Setting parameters to be excluded For the 10.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. 1 Press function key .

2 Press continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] is displayed.

3 Press soft key [PARAM CHKSUM]. 4 Press soft key [CHKSUM SETING]. The following screen is displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (l) Parameter check sum setting screen (10.4 inches)

5 By using page keys and , the parameter check sum setting screen changes as follows:

First page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET (NO.) 1/2

Second page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(NO.) 2/2 Third page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(RANGE) 1/2


- 1196 -

Fourth page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(RANGE) 2/2 6 Move the cursor to a target item. 7 Enter the number of a parameter to be excluded from the check sum, and press the key or soft

key [INPUT]. 8 When completing the setting of all parameters to be excluded, set bit 0 (CKS) of parameter No.

13730 to 1. For the 8.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below. 1 Press function key .

2 Press vertical continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [CHKSUM] is displayed. 3 Press soft key [CHKSUM]. 4 Press soft key [CHKSET]. The following screen is displayed:

Fig. 13.1.6 (m) Parameter check sum setting screen (8.4 inches)

5 The following steps are the same as those for the 10.4-inch display described above.


- 1197 -

NOTE 1 Items set on this screen correspond to parameter Nos. 13731 to 13770 as

shown below. These items can be set also on the parameter screen. Exclusion Nos. 01 to 20 → Parameter Nos. 13731 to 13750 Exclusion ranges 01 to 10 → Parameter Nos. 13751 to 13770 2 When 0 is set as an exclusion number, it is ignored. 3 Numbers set as the start NO. and end NO. of each exclusion range are also

excluded. 4 In a combination of the start No. and end No., if the start No. is greater than the

end No. (start No. > end No.), the setting of check sum exclusion numbers becomes invalid.

5 If the start No. equals the end No. (start No. = end No.), only the set number is excluded.

Excluded parameters

A check sum is not the sum of all parameters but is calculated with particular parameters excluded. The parameters to be excluded satisfy one of the following conditions: <1> Parameters that can be input by setting input <2> Parameters of which values may be changed by the system <3> Parameters set on the parameter check sum setting screen For the parameters shown in <2> above, see the following table.

Table 13.1.6 (a) Parameters excluded from the check sum Parameter number Description

1320 to 1327 Coordinates at the boundary of stored stroke check 1 1330 to 1348 Chuck and tail stock barrier

3226 Keyword of the key lock for parameters related to dual check safety 4911 to 4914 Spindle speed fluctuation detection

5130 Amount of chamfering in thread cutting cycles G96 and G92 5132 to 5133 Depth of cut and escaping amount of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72

5134 Clearance value of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72

5135 Escaping amount along the X-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73 5136 Escaping amount along the Z-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73 5137 Divide number of multiple repetitive cycle G73 5139 Return amount in multiple repetitive cycles G74 and G75 5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive cycle G76 5141 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive cycle G76 5142 Number of repetitions of final finishing in multiple repetitive cycle G76 5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive cycle G76

6581 to 6595 VGA character color number 6750 Integrated value of power-on period

7220 to 7283 Name of general-purpose switch on software operator’s panel 7310 Program restart 8210 Slant angle 8900 PWE 11309 Menu number selected on the pattern menu screen 14717 Axis number of the C-axis in simulation (for MGi only)


- 1198 -

When the machining condition selecting function is used, the parameters in the following table are also excluded from the check sum:

Table 13.1.6 (b) Parameters excluded from the check sum

(when the machining condition selecting function is used) Parameter number Description

1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control mode

1769 Time constant for each axis for linear and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed

1772 Acceleration change time in bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation 1783 Allowable speed differences in speed determination by corner speed differences

13634 Currently selected level in advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control

Table 13.1.6 (c) Parameters for setting the parameter numbers of parameters to be excluded from the check

sum (when the machining condition selecting function is used) Parameter No.

Parameter number set in parameter No.13628 (parameter number corresponding to item 1 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control is used) Parameter number set in parameter No.13629 (parameter number corresponding to item 2 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control is used)

NOTE 1 When the machining condition selecting function is not used, these parameters

are included in the check sum. 2 The parameters of which numbers are set in parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629

are excluded, but parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629 are not excluded.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

13730 CSR CKS

[Data type] Bit

#0 CKS When the power is turned on, the parameter check sum is:

0: Not checked. 1: Checked.

#7 CSR Alarm No. 5340 (parameter check sum error) is cleared with: 0: The and keys.

1: The key.

13731 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 01






- 1199 -
















[Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number

Set the parameter numbers of parameters to be excluded from check sum calculation performed by the parameter check sum function.

13751 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 01

13752 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 01









- 1200 -












[Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number

Specify a range of parameter numbers of which parameters are to be excluded from check sum calculation performed by the parameter check sum function. The parameters within the range from the starting number to the ending number are excluded from the check sum.

NOTE 1 The parameter numbers set as the starting number and ending

number are also excluded. 2 In a combination of a starting number and an ending number, if the

starting number is greater than the ending number (starting number > ending number), the setting of check sum exclusion numbers is ignored.

3 If the starting number equals the ending number (starting number = ending number), only that number is excluded.

Alarm and message

Number Message Description DS 5340 PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR Because parameters have been modified, the parameter

check sum and the standard check sum do not match. Restore the original parameter state, or set a standard check sum again.


- 1201 -

13.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal

Overview This function outputs a signal to notify the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed. The machine tool builder can use this function for applications in which, for example, a buzzer is sounded after a press of a virtual MDI key is detected.

Explanation When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the signal TPPRS<F006.0> is output. (Fig. 13.1.7 (a) and (b) show the range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output.) In related functions, this function operates as follows: • CNC screen display function When the virtual MDI key function is used in the CNC screen display function, the signal is output. • Macro executor When the macro executor is used on the virtual MDI screen, the signal is output. • C language executor While the C language executor screen is being displayed, the signal is not output.

NOTE 1 This function is enabled when the virtual MDI function is used. 2 When a virtual MDI key is pressed for a short time or when a virtual MDI key is

pressed several times successively, the CNC does not sometimes accept the key input even if the signal is output.

Range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output

Fig. 13.1.7 (a) When the NC screen is displayed


- 1202 -

Fig. 13.1.7 (b) When the PMC high-precision screen is displayed

When a virtual MDI key within the range indicated by in Fig. 13.1.7 (a) and Fig. 13.1.7 (b) is pressed, the signal is output.

Signal - Touch panel check signal TPPRS<F006.0>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed. [Operation] The signal is set to 1 when:

- A virtual MDI key is pressed. The signal is set to 0 when:

- A virtual MDI key is released.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

F006 TPPRS

- Timing chart

The following shows a timing chart of a press of a virtual MDI key and the touch panel check signal.

Virtual MDI key pressed

32 msec or more

Touch panel check signal

• When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the signal is output for 32 msec or longer. Read the signal with a ladder program of which cycle period is shorter than 32 msec. • When a virtual MDI key is held pressed continuously, the signal is kept output. • There may be a delay from a press of a virtual MDI key until the touch panel check signal is output.

A delay may be generated also when the virtual MDI key is released.


- 1203 -

• If the time from when a virtual MDI key is pressed until it is released is within 50 msec, the touch panel check signal is not sometimes output.

13.1.8 CNC Screen Dual Display

Overview The CNC screen display function can be used to display the CNC screen on both the PC connected via the Ethernet and the CNC. If the CNC screen display function is started on the PC side when the screen is displayed on the display unit of the CNC, the dual display mode is entered. When the CNC screen display function is ended on the PC, the CNC screen is displayed only on the display unit of the CNC. In case the PC hangs up for a cause in the dual display mode, it is also possible to forcibly turn off the CNC screen display function on the PC by using a DI signal to end the dual display mode. Key input operation can be performed on one of the PC and CNC sides, which can be selected.

NOTE When the dual display function is being used, the same screen is displayed on

the PC and the CNC. The PC performance may have influence on the display speed on the CNC side and slow down the display on the CNC.

Explanation

- Operation When bit 7 (NS2) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, the CNC screen dual display function is enabled. Then, when the CNC screen display function on the PC side is started, the CNC screen is displayed on both the PC and the CNC .

- Selection of key control Either the keyboard of the PC or the MDI keys of the CNC become usable for key control. The DI signal CNCKY<G0295.7> is used to select key control. If CNCKY<G0295.7> is set to 1, the MDI keys of the CNC become usable; if the signal is set to 0, the keyboard of the PC becomes usable. The reset key, however, is always usable on both the PC and the CNC. When the CNC is equipped with a touch panel, if bit 5 (S2K) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, it becomes possible to select key control by pressing the upper left corner of the screen. In this case, the signal cannot be used to select key control. When the upper left part of the display screen on the CNC is pressed, the MDI keys become usable; when the upper left part of the CNC screen display on the PC is clicked, the keyboard of the PC becomes usable. With a DO signal CNCKYO<F0295.7>, key control selection status can be checked to see which key control, key control on the PC or key control on the CNC, is currently selected. Selection of key control is disabled when the dual display function is not used.

- Data I/O When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 0300 is set to 1, the data input/output destination is determined by the selection of key control. When the keyboard of the PC is selected, input and output operations on the PC side are enabled; when the MDI keys of the CNC are selected, input and output operations on the CNC side are enabled.


- 1204 -

NOTE If key control selection is changed and so the data input/output destination is

changed when the All I/O screen is displayed, the file list displayed on the All I/O screen is not updated automatically. In this case, press soft key [REFRESH] to update the display.

- Forcible end by a DI signal

If the PC hangs up for a cause when the CNC screen dual display function is being performed, the CNC can issue a DI signal to forcibly end the CNC screen display function on the PC. When C2SEND<G0295.6> is set to 1, the CNC screen display function on the PC is forcibly ended. The status of the forcible end processing is indicated by a DO signal C2SENO<F0295.6>. Forcible end by the DI signal is invalid when the dual display function is not used.

Signal Key control selection signal CNCKY <G295.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is to be enabled. [Operation] If the signal is set to 0, key control on the PC is enabled. If the signal is set to 1, key control from the MDI keys on the CNC is enabled.

Dual display forcible end request signal C2SEND <G295.6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Requests forcible end of the CNC screen display function on the PC side. [Operation] If the signal is set to 0, no end request is issued. If the signal is set to 1, an end request is issued.

Key control selection status signal CNCKYO <F295.7>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is currently selected. [Operation] If this signal is set to 0, key control on the PC side is selected. If this signal is set to 1, MDI input on the CNC is selected.

Dual display forcible end status signal C2SENO <F295.6>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the status of end processing performed in response to the end request issued

with the dual display forcible end request signal. [Operation] If this signal is set to 0, the end processing is not yet completed.

If this signal is set to 1, the end processing is completed.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G295 CNCKY C2SEND

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F295 CNCKYO C2SENO

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0300 PCM



- 1205 -

#0 PCM If the 0i-D/0i Mate-D is connected to a PC via Ethernet, when the CNC screen display

function is started: 0: The memory card interface in the CNC is used. 1: The memory card interface or the hard disk on the PC side is used. When the CNC screen dual display function is being used, the data input/output

destination conforms to the selection of key control. This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function is active.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3206 NS2 S2K


#5 S2K In CNC screen dual display function,

0: Key control is selected by DI signal <G295.7>. 1: Key control is selected by pushing at left upper corner on the screen. (Touch panel

only)

#7 NS2 CNC screen dual display function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

13.1.9 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor

Overview Any servo motor axis can be selected to display its speed considering gear ratio.

Explanation The screen display can be switched between the speed of the milling axis and the spindle speed by using an input signal.

- Switching to the display of the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor With the speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5>, the speed of a milling axis or the spindle speed can be selected and indicated in the part marked by (*1)(*2) in the below figure.

- Displaying the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor As the speed of a milling axis, the value obtained by multiplying the servo motor speed by the gear ratio is indicated.

　　

　　　　　

1899) No. (parameter side axis milling on the gear teeth ofNumber

1898) No. (parameter side axismotor servo on the gear teeth ofNumber ratioGear =

To select the target servo motor axis, set a controlled axis number as the number of a servo motor axis used as the axis of a milling tool (parameter No. 1895).

NOTE 1 If parameter Nos. 1898 and 1899 are not set, the gear ratio is assumed to be

1:13. 2 If an axis that uses a linear motor is selected, the speed cannot be displayed. 3 Even when the speed of a milling axis is displayed, the actual speed of feed per

revolution follows the speed of the spindle.


- 1206 -

- Milling tool rotation speed display by a servo motor

Figs. 13.1.9 (a) to (d) indicate examples of positions in which the rotation speed is displayed. The positions are indicated by (*1) and (*2) below. The mark (*2) indicates that bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No. 3105 needs to be set.

Fig. 13.1.9 (a) Example of the current position screen (10.4-inch display unit)

Fig. 13.1.9 (b) Example of the program screen (10.4-inch display unit)

(*1)→

←(*1)

(*2)→

(*2)→


- 1207 -

Fig. 13.1.9 (c) Example of the program check screen (8.4-inch display unit)

Fig. 13.1.9 (d) Example of the graphic screen (tool path diagram) (8.4-inch display unit)

Signal

Speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the speed to be displayed: the speed of the milling axis or the spindle speed. [Operation] If this signal is set to 1, the speed of the milling axis is displayed.

If this signal is set to 0, the spindle speed is displayed.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn038 SDPC

← (*1)

(*2)→

← (*1)

(*2)→


- 1208 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3105 DPS


#2 DPS The actual spindle speed is:

0: Not displayed 1: Displayed

1895 Servo motor axis number used for a milling tool

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes

This parameter sets the servo motor axis number used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

1898 Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 1 to 9999

This parameter sets the number of servo motor axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

NOTE This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter

No. 1895.

1899 Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 1 to 9999

This parameter sets the number of milling axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

NOTE This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter

No. 1895.

13.1.10 Screen Switching by Mode

Overview One of the screens displayed using function key such as the program edit screen and the program

check screen can be selected according to the mode. When a mode switches to other mode, the screen selected last in that mode is displayed. There are five modes, and immediately after the power is turned on in each mode, a screen is selected as follows:


- 1209 -

MEM : Program check screen (for MEM) EDIT : Program edit screen (for EDIT) MDI : Program edit screen (for MDI) TJOG/THND : Program edit screen Other modes : Program edit screen

Mode switching and screen examples

- Mode switching after power-on When the MEM mode is selected and function key is pressed at power-on, the program check

screen is displayed. When the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program edit screen is displayed.

- Mode switching after screen operation When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed. When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed. Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.

MEM mode

EDIT mode


- 1210 -

- Mode switching after screen operation When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed. When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed. Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.

EDIT mode

MEM mode

EDIT mode


- 1211 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

11302 CPG


#7 CPG PROG function screen selection is:

0: Not changed according to the CNC mode. 1: Changed according to the CNC mode.

13.1.11 Screen Switching at Path Switching

Overview When switching from one path to another has been made, the same screen and soft keys as displayed for the previous path can be displayed. Since the same screen is displayed even after path switching, the user no longer has to change the screen display. It is also possible to change the screen display to the screen that was selected most recently for each path.

Explanation Even after switching between paths is made, the currently selected screen is displayed, and only information displayed on the screen is updated.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3208 PSC


#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal:

0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path. 1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed. If this parameter is set to 0, the screen selected for each path is stored. Therefore, when path switching to a path is made, the screen selected last for that path is displayed.


- 1212 -

13.1.12 Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure function

Overview Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the life of the LCD. To prevent this, the CNC screen can be erased. The screen erasure function allows the user to perform a key operation to erase the screen. The automatic screen erasure function erases the screen automatically when there has been no key operation for a parameter-set period of time.

Screen erasure function When 0 is set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen can be erased by pressing the key and any

function key (such as or ) at the same time. The CNC screen can be displayed again by

pressing any function key.

Automatic screen erasure function When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key.

- Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen is erased. Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC screen • Parameter No. 3123 ≠ 0 • None of the following key operations is performed. MDI keys Soft keys External key input • No alarm is issued.

- Redisplay of the screen by the automatic screen erasure function If one of the following conditions is satisfied when the CNC screen is off, the CNC screen is displayed again: Conditions for redisplaying the CNC screen • One of the following key operations is performed. MDI keys Soft keys External key input • An alarm is issued.

- Screen erasure by using the key + function key

When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the key and a

function key.

- Set time Only the time set in parameter No. 3123 for path 1 is valid.

- Alarm in another path When an alarm is issued in any of the paths, the screen is not erased.


- 1213 -

Signal

Screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF<G0062.1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal enables or disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure

function. [Operation] 0: Enables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function.

1: Disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function.

NOTE Be sure to set this signal "1" to display an external message in

screen erasure.

Automatic screen erasure status in-progress signal ERTVA<Fn006.2> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the CNC screen is being erased by the automatic screen erasure

function. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 when:

- The CNC screen is erased by the automatic screen erasure function. This signal is set to 0 when: - One of the following key operations is performed: MDI key Soft key External key input - An alarm is issued. - The operation mode is changed. - The automatic screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF <G0062.1> is set to 1.

NOTE This signal is not output when the screen is erased by pressing the

key and any function key.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0062 *CRTOF

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn006 ERTVA

Parameter

3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 127

Set a time in minutes until the automatic screen erasure function starts operating. When 0 is set, automatic screen erasure is disabled. In this parameter, only the value set for path 1 is valid.

NOTE 1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.


- 1214 -

NOTE 2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure.

If 1 or a larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen erasure is disabled.

13.1.13 Screen Hard Copy Function

Overview This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to a memory card. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a personal computer.

Explanation When using this function, the following settings are necessary. - Set bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 to 1. - Set parameter No.20 to 4. For a 2-path system, set bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 of path 1.

- Start/cancellation methods The screen hard copy function is started by pressing and holding down key for five seconds or by

changing the hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1". The function can be canceled by pressing key or by changing the hard copy cancellation request signal

HCABT<G067.6> to "1". While the screen hard copy function is in progress, the hard copy execution status signal HCEXE<F061.3> is "1", and upon completion, it is set to "0". When a screen hard copy cancellation request is received, the hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2<F061.2> is set to "1" and remains in the "1" state until the hard copy function is started again or a reset is made.

- Acquisition and output of screen data When started, the screen hard copy function starts acquiring screen data. As soon as it has acquired it, the function outputs bit map format data to the memory card inserted into the LCD unit. While screen data is being acquired, the screen remains stationary for a few seconds. Acquired screen data can be output from the memory card screen. Also, while screen data is being output, "OUTPUT" blinks in the status display.

- Screen data file names Bit map format screen data files created by this function are assigned the names below, starting with the one created after the power is turned on. "HDCPY000.BMP" (name of the first file output to the memory card after the power is turned on) "HDCPY001.BMP" (name of the second file output to the memory card after the power is turned on) : : "HDCPY999.BMP" (name of the 1000th file output to the memory card after the power is turned on) If, after a file with "HDCPY999.BMP" is output, the screen hard copy function is executed, the file name returns to "HDCPY000.BMP". If, however, a file with the same file name as the one to be output when the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, alarm SR1973 is issued. If the capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued. In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory card needs to be replaced with a new one.

Limitation - Screens whose hard copies cannot be made

Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made.


- 1215 -

- Foreground I/O devices

During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while a foreground I/O device is in use.

- Canceling the hard copy function If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data that has been output is created.

Signal Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT<G067.6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal requests the cancellation of the screen hard copy function. [Operation] When the signal is set to "1", the control unit operates as follows:

- Cancels the screen hard copy function if it is being executed. - Does nothing if the screen hard copy function is not being executed. Note that

changing HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1" when HCABT<G067.6> is "1" does not cause the screen hard copy function to be executed.

NOTE If changing this signal from "0" to "1", set it to "0" on the PMC after

the signal is maintained in the "1" state for at least 64 msec.

Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G067.7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal requests the execution of the screen hard copy function. [Operation] When the signal is changed from "0" to "1", the control unit operates as follows:

- Starts creating a hard copy.

NOTE If changing this signal from "0" to "1", set it to "0" on the PMC after

the signal is maintained in the "1" state for at least 64 msec. If making another hard copy execution request, wait until the signal is maintained in the "0" state for at least 64 msec.

Hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2<F061.2>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies that a screen hard copy cancellation request is made. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:

- HCABT<G067.6> is set to "1" or key is pressed, so that the CNC receives

this as a screen hard copy cancellation request. This signal is set to "0" in the following cases: - A reset is made. - The screen hard copy is started again.

Hard copy execution status signal HCEXE<F061.3> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies that the screen hard copy function is being executed. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:

- The screen hard copy function is started by changing HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1" or by pressing and holding down key for five seconds.


- 1216 -

This signal is set to "0" in the following cases: - The screen hard copy function is completed. - The screen hard copy function is canceled.

Timing charts for input/output signals are shown below Fig. 13.1.13 (a) shows a timing chart of the screen hard copy function when it terminates normally, and Fig. 13.1.13 (b) shows a timing chart of the screen hard copy function when it is canceled and restarted.

Hard copy execution request signal (HCREQ)

Hard copy execution status signal (HCEXE)

Least 64 msec

Fig. 13.1.13 (a) When the screen hard copy function terminates normally

Hard copy execution request signal (HCREQ)

Hard copy execution status signal (HCEXE)

Hard copy cancellation request signal (HCABT)

Hard copy cancellation request reception signal (HCAB2)

Least 64msec Least 64msec

Least 64msec

Least 64msec

Fig. 13.1.13 (b) When the screen hard copy function is canceled and restarted

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G067 HCREQ HCABT

F061 HCEXE HCAB2

Parameter

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 35

Set the interface number for a foreground I/O device. If enabling the screen hard copy function (by setting bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 to 1), set this parameter to 4 (memory card).


- 1217 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3301 HDC H16


#0 H16 Bit map data of screen hard copies uses:

0: 256 colors. 1: 16 colors.

#7 HDC A screen hard copy function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

NOTE For a 2-path system, the settings of bit 7 (HDC) and bit 0 (H16) of

parameter No. 3301 of path 1 are used.

13.2 EDIT

13.2.1 Memory Protection Keys

Overview Memory protection keys can be provided so as not to inadvertently store, change, or delete programs, offset values, parameters, settings, and so forth. For a 2-path system, protection keys are common to all paths.

Signal Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to 6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals allow MDI panel operations that change the memory contents. There are

the following four signals. The target memory contents depend on the setting of KEY (bit 7 of parameter No. 3290). When the KEY is 0 :

KEY1 : Allows the input of tool offset values, workpiece origin offsets, and workpiece coordinate system shift values.

KEY2 : Allows the setting of data input, macro variable input, and tool life management data input.

KEY3 : Allows program input and editing. KEY4 : Allows PMC data (counter data table).

When the KEY is 1 : KEY1 : Allows program input, program editing, PMC data input. KEY2 to KEY4 : Not used.

[Operation] If a memory protection signal is set to 0, the corresponding operation is disabled. If a memory protection signal is 1, the corresponding operation is enabled.


- 1218 -

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


NOTE For a 2-path system, signal addresses are common to all paths.

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3290 KEY


#7 KEY For memory protection keys:

0: The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used. 1: Only the KEY1 signal is used.

NOTE 1 The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or KEY=1. When KEY = 0:

- KEY1: Enables a tool offset value, workpiece zero point offset value, and workpiece shift value to be input.

- KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and tool life management value to be input.

- KEY3: Enables program registration and editing. - KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be input.

When KEY = 1: - KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and enables

PMC parameter input. - KEY2 to KEY4: Not used

2 When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.

13.2.2 Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter

Overview Writing to a parameter can be prohibited or allowed by a signal. To enable or disable this function, set bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299. To prohibit or allow input to a parameter, set KEYP<G046.0>. Writing to a parameter was set on the setting screen conventionally, but this function allows writing to a parameter to be set by external switches.

Signal Memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables or disables operation on CNC parameters from the MDI panel. [Operation] When this signal is 0, input to CNC parameters is prohibited.

When this signal is 1, input to CNC parameters is allowed. This signal is valid only when bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1.


- 1219 -

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G046 KEYP

NOTE For a 2-path system, the signal address is common to all paths.

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3299 PKY


#0 PKY "PARAMETER WRITE" is:

0: Set on the setting screen (bit 0 (PWE) of setting parameter No.8900). 1: Set by the memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>.

NOTE Before setting this parameter, confirm that memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0> can be operated.

(Remark) If this parameter is set even through memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>

cannot be changed from 0, parameters cannot be changed.

Notes • When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1, “PARAMETER WRITE” on the setting

screen cannot be set. • When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 has been set to 1 and bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8900

has been set to 0 at power-on, setting the signal KEYP<G046.0> to 1 in the operation mode causes alarm SW0100 and stops operation.

13.2.3 MDI Key Setting

Overview Because the type of the MDI keys of the CNC is determined automatically, no additional setting is required for the MDI keys. When the machine tool builder's own MDI keys are connected, valid key input is made possible by parameter setting.

Parameter 3160 Setting of MDI unit type

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 4

Set the type of an MDI unit when the type of an MDI unit is not automatically identified.


- 1220 -

Setting value Type 0 Depends on the system type and indicator type. 1 Standard MDI unit for the lathe system 2 Standard MDI unit for the machining center system 3 Small MDI unit for the lathe system 4 Small MDI unit for the machining center system

When 0 is set in this parameter, the type of a MDI unit is determined as follows:

Type of path control Type of indicator Type Type of 12 horizontal soft keys

Standard MDI unit for the lathe system Lathe system

Type of 7 horizontal soft keys

Small MDI unit for the lathe system

Type of 12 horizontal soft keys

Standard MDI unit for the machining center system Machining center system Type of 7 horizontal soft

keys Small MDI unit for the machining center system

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3204 PAR


#0 PAR When a small MDI unit is used, characters "[" and "]" are:

0: Used as "[" and "]". 1: Used as "(" and ")".

NOTE When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.

13.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function Use of this function allows the user to enter characters such as "@", "(", and ")" by using soft keys when the compact-type MDI unit is used.

Operation procedure 1. Select the EDIT mode.

2. Press function key .

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press continuous menu key several times to display soft key [CHA-EXT].

4. Press soft key [CHA-EXT]. 5. As shown in Fig. 13.2.4 (a), characters such as "@" and "(" appear as soft keys.


- 1221 -

Fig. 13.2.4 (a) Compact-type MDI key input

6. When a soft key indicating the character to be input is pressed, the character is input to the key-in

buffer.

Usable characters The following characters can be entered using soft keys:

Table 13.2.4 (a) Characters that can be entered using soft keys ( ) ? * &

@ _ < > ¥ % $ ! ~ : " ‘ AB/ab(*)

* This soft key causes the input mode of alphabetical characters to alternate between the uppercase input mode and the lowercase input mode.

The character before the key-in buffer changes to "A" or "a" depending on the input mode.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

13115 SI2 SI1


#4 SI1 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and

lowercase input modes by a soft key are: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. < > ¥ % $ ! ~ : " '


- 1222 -


lowercase input modes by a soft key are: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. ( ) ? * & @ _

13.3 TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT

13.3.1 Two Path Display

Overview In a multi path system, operations such as program creation and data input are performed with a display/operation target path selected by switching. For path selection, the path select signals are used. For a selected path, MDI key operation is performed. By parameter setting, a selection can be made to display only one path on the screen at a time or display both paths on the screen simultaneously. When both paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of path display can be specified according to the machine configuration and layout. Moreover, a selection can be made by a parameter to display the same screen at path switching or to store the last displayed screen of each path and display the last displayed screen of a selected path.

Explanation - Two path simultaneous display

Information about two paths can be displayed on one screen simultaneously. Two path information can be displayed simultaneously on the following screens: 10.4-inch LCD • Absolute position screen • Relative position screen • Overall position display • Handle display screen • Program screen • Program check screen • Alarm display screen • Tool path drawing screen 8.4-inch LCD • Program screen • Program check screen • Alarm display screen • Tool path drawing screen MDI key operation is performed for a screen selected with the path select signals.

- Setting two path simultaneous display When bit 2 (DOP) of parameter No. 3193 is 0 in a 2-path system, information of two paths can be displayed simultaneously on one screen. At this time, MDI key operation is valid for the path selected by the path selection signal.


- 1223 -

Fig. 13.3.1 Two path simultaneous display (10.4-inch LCD, Program screen)

- Display order number

On the screen on which multiple paths are displayed simultaneously in 2-path control, parameter No. 13130 is used to set the order in which the paths are displayed.

System Setting Order 0 First path, second path 2-path 1 Second path, first path

- Path selection signal

The path selection signal selects the path to be operated or displayed with LCD/MDI. The first path is selected when HEAD<G063.0> is 0 or the second path is selected when HEAD<G063.0> is 1.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

DOP 3193


#2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle

interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two paths' information is: 0: Displayed at the same time. 1: Not displayed at the same time.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PSC

3208



- 1224 -

#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal: 0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path. 1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.

The order of displaying path at the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously 13130


At the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of displaying path is set. The relation between the setting and the display order is as follows.

System Setting Display order 0 1st path, 2nd path 2 paths 1 2nd path, 1st path

Signal

Path select signal HEAD<G063.0> [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals select the target path for which MDI operation and display are to be

performed.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G063 HEAD

13.3.2 Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing

Overview Simultaneous two path program editing allows the user to edit programs for more than one path on a single screen according to the settings of the simultaneous two path display parameters (parameter No.13130). For details of parameter No. 13130, see Subsection 13.3.1, "Two Path Display". This function becomes effective when the following conditions are full. • Two paths system • Bit 2 (DOP) of parameter No.3193 is set to 0 • Bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No.3106 is set to 1

Screen display Fig. 13.3.2 (a) show sample screens on which simultaneous two path program editing is being performed. The status line located at the top of each program displays the program number and <FG-EDIT>, which indicates that foreground editing is in progress. The status line of the currently edited program is highlighted.


- 1225 -

Fig. 13.3.2 (a) Simultaneous two path program edit screen (10.4-inch display unit)

Explanation - Mode

The programs of two paths are simultaneously displayed only when both paths are in the EDIT mode or MEM mode.

- Changing the path to be edited The path selected by the path selection signals is to be edited.

- Conditions under which simultaneous display and editing are enabled 2-path program simultaneous display/editing is enabled: • When the program screen is selected as the entire screen • When the mode in both paths is EDIT or MEM in foreground editing. • When the virtual MDI key function is disabled.

- Simultaneous editing with a 8.4-inch display unit When simultaneous editing is performed with a 8.4-inch display unit, displayed characters become smaller. The number of characters displayed per path in the edit area is as follows: • When simultaneous display is not performed, characters are displayed in 38 columns by 10 lines. • For simultaneous display for two paths, characters are displayed in 35 columns by 14 lines.

Program being edited


- 1226 -

Fig. 13.3.2 (b) 2-path program simultaneous editing screen (8.4-inch display unit)

- Concurrent editing the programs of two paths being edited at the background

If background editing is started when the concurrent editing of the programs of two paths is set to be enabled, background editing of the unselected path as well as the selected path is started and the programs of the two paths being edited in the background are displayed concurrently. (However, background editing of the unselected path is started with no program specified.) The editing mode specified at the start of background editing is valid for all paths being edited concurrently, so the editing mode and reference mode cannot be specified at the same time on the simultaneous editing screen. In addition, if background editing is terminated, background editing of the unselected path as well as the selected path is terminated.

Fig. 13.3.2 (c) Concurrent editing of the programs of two paths being edited in the background

Program being edited


- 1227 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

DHD 3106


#0 DHD On the program screen:

0: Only a selected path can be edited and displayed. 1: 2-path can be edited and displayed at the same time.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DOP

3193


#2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle

interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two paths' information is: 0: Displayed at the same time. 1: Not displayed at the same time.

The order of displaying path at the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously 13130


At the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of displaying path is set. The relation between the setting and the display order is as follows.

System Setting Display order 0 1st path, 2nd path 2 paths 1 2nd path, 1st path


- 1228 -

13.4 MACHINE OPERATION MENU

13.4.1 Overview The soft keys displayed on the standard CNC screen can be used as menu keys for machine operation. The machine tool builder can customize the soft keys easily. A menu can have a hierarchy, and the indication of each soft key can be specified. Customization data is created as a machine operation menu definition file and is stored in the CNC.

13.4.2 Explanation

SOFT KEY CONTROL SWITCHING For the 10.4-inch display unit When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 1, the soft key portion on the CNC screen is switched to a machine operation menu. While a machine operation menu is displayed, the CNC screen cannot be operated using the soft keys. When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 0, the display is switched from the machine operation menu to the CNC soft key menu. CNC screen operation using the soft keys is enabled.

The machine operation menu display signal is used to select a menu.

Screen/operation select menu

Machine operation menu


- 1229 -

For the 8.4-inch display unit When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 1, the soft key portion on the CNC screen is switched to a machine operation menu. While a machine operation menu is displayed, the CNC screen cannot be operated using the soft keys. When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 0, the display is switched from the machine operation menu to the CNC soft key menu. CNC screen operation using the soft keys is enabled. In any case of the 10.4-inch display unit and the 8.4-inch display unit, when setting the machine operation menu screen select signal EXSFT<G0295.0> for 1, the main-menu (the layer which is the top of the machine operation menu) is displayed. After displaying the soft key menu of CNC from the condition to be displaying a sub menu (The layer which is not the top of the machine operation menu), once again, when displaying a machine operation menu, a main-menu is displayed.

The machine operation menu display signal is used to select a menu.

Machine operation menu

Screen/operation select menu


- 1230 -

CUSTOMIZATION ITEMS A machine operation menu definition file can be created using a special tool (Machine Operation Menu Tool). See 13.5 "Machine Operation Menu Tool" for details of the Machine Operation Menu Tool. The following items can be specified:

Menu configuration Number of blocks : A number from 0 to 98 can be selected. Number of main menus

10.4-inch display unit ： 1 line (The menu-number is fixed on 10.) / Soft key 10 items 8.4-inch display unit ： 1 line (The menu-number is fixed on 10.) / Soft key 5 items

Number of submenus that belong to each main menu 10.4-inch display unit ： 20 lines / Soft key 200 items 8.4-inch display unit ： 20 lines / Soft key 100 items

Each menu key Menu number to be posted to the PMC side Menu key message

(10.4-inch display unit ：6 half-size characters * 2 line 8.4-inch display unit ：7 half-size characters * 1 line These are specified using ASCII code or SJIS code.)

R signal address for choosing whether to display or hide messages R signal address for choosing whether to display the key state (OFF/ON) Message and Background color (Two colors can be specified: one for keys set to ON and the other for keys set to OFF.)

Machine operation menu definition data can be stored as multiple blocks, which can be selected using a parameter. By using multiple blocks, machine operation menus in different languages and configurations can be prepared for choice using a parameter.

Definition file

Block 1

Main menu

Sub menu

Block n

Main menu

Sub menu

・・・・・

The definition data of the machine operation


- 1231 -

MACHINE OPERATION MENU SOFT KEY TRANSITION For the 10.4-inch display unit

Menu number Key number (Main menu)10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Menu number Key number (Sub menu)11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1012 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1013 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Menu number Key number (Sub menu)14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1015 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

As shown above, a main menu and submenus are created. Up to one main menu lines (for 10 soft keys) and up to 20 submenu lines (for 200 soft keys) can be created. For each main menu key, a submenu group consisting of multiple lines of soft keys is created. In this example, menu numbers 11, 12, and 13 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 1, and menu numbers 14 and 15 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 2. By pressing a main menu key, a transition is made to the corresponding submenu. If there is no corresponding submenu, the key can be used as an input key. When a submenu consists of multiple lines, a transition is made between the submenu lines by using the continuous menu key at the rightmost end of the soft keys. From a submenu, a transition to the main menu is made by pressing the return menu key at the leftmost end of the soft keys.

For the 8.4-inch display unit

Menu number Key number (Main menu) 10 1 2 3 4 5

Menu number Key number (Sub menu) 11 1 2 3 4 5 12 1 2 3 4 5 13 1 2 3 4 5

Menu number Key number (Sub menu) 14 1 2 3 4 5 15 1 2 3 4 5


- 1232 -

As shown above, a main menu and submenus are created. Up to one main menu lines (for 5 soft keys) and up to 20 submenu lines (for 100 soft keys) can be created. For each main menu key, a submenu group consisting of multiple lines of soft keys is created. In this example, menu numbers 11, 12, and 13 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 1, and menu numbers 14 and 15 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 2. By pressing a main menu key, a transition is made to the corresponding submenu. If there is no corresponding submenu, the key can be used as an input key. When a submenu consists of multiple lines, a transition is made between the submenu lines by using the continuous menu key at the rightmost end of the soft keys. From a submenu, a transition to the main menu is made by pressing the return menu key at the leftmost end of the soft keys.

MENU KEY SELECTION INTERFACE

MACHINE OPERATION MENU SELECT NUMBER NOTIFICATION SIGNAL ESFM1 to ESFM8 <F0317.0 to 7>

The menu number (0 to 255) of the menu currently selected is posted as a binary code. If no menu operation menu is displayed, 0 is output.

SOFT KEY NUMBER SELECT STATE NOTIFICATION SIGNAL ESF01 to ESF10 <F0318.0 to F0319.1>

The ordinal number of a menu key pressed on the menu of each menu number is posted to the PMC. The bit corresponding to a pressed key is turned on (as indicated below). If a main menu key is pressed to display the submenu, all bits are turned off and no bit is turned on until the key is released.

Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Output signal F318.0 F318.1 F318.2 F318.3 F318.4 F318.5 F318.6 F318.7 F319.0 F319.1

In case of the 8.4-inch display unit, the bit of key 1 to 5 becomes on.

KEY DISPLAY/HIDE SELECT SIGNAL (Input signal : 42byte) The signal enables you to choose whether to display or hide the menu corresponding to a main menu key or sub-key. Switching between displaying and hiding is performed by turning on/off the bit corresponding to a key in the 42-byte area ranging from the start address of the PMC/R area set in the machine operation menu data. The menu corresponding to a key whose bit is turned on is displayed.

KEY REVERSE/NON-REVERSE VIDEO SELECT SIGNAL (Input signal : 42byte) The signal enables you to choose whether to display each menu key in reverse video. Whether to display each menu key in reverse video can be set by turning on/off the corresponding bit in the 42-byte area ranging from the start address of the PMC/R area set in the machine operation menu data. A key whose bit is turned on is displayed in reverse video. Set these signal based on SOFT KEY NUMBER SELECT STATE NOTIFICATION SIGNAL ESF01 to ESF10<F0318.0-F0319.1>.

MACHINE OPERATION MENU DATA Machine operation menu data is created on the personal computer by using a menu creation tool. See 13.5 "Machine Operation Menu Tool" for the environment required for Machine Operation Menu Tool.


- 1233 -

MACHINE OPERATION MENU DATA INPUT/OUTPUT [Input method]

Create a machine operation menu definition file with the menu creation tool, then store the file on the memory card. Turn off the power. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot, and then turn on the power while holding down the 1st and 2nd soft key from the right at the same time.

[For the 10.4-inch display unit]

The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU is displayed. Select “2.USER DATA LOADING”. Select a file. The selected file is then stored in the FROM. Next, select END to end the processing. (Note that if the power is turned off during storing operation, the FROM can be destructed.) Select END on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.

[Output method] Turn off the power. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot, and then turn on the power while holding down the 1st and 2nd soft key from the right at the same time. The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU is displayed. Select “6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE“. Select the machine operation menu definition file (named “EXSFTKEY”). It is written to the memory card. Next, select END to end the processing. Select END on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.

13.4.3 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3207 EXS


#0 EXS The machine menu function is:


3227 Selection of a block number of machine operation menu data


This parameter select a block number to use from the inside of the machine operation menu definition file which was stored in the FROM in the machine operation menu function. If "0", "the value except the data range" or either of "the block number not to be defining" is set, the machine operation menu function is disabled.


- 1234 -

13.4.4 Signal

Machine operation menu screen select signal EXSFT<G0295.0> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal is used to switch the display to the machine operation menu screen. [Operation] When setting this signal in "1", it displays the machine operation menu of the block

number which was set to parameter (No.3227) from the inside of the machine operation menu definition file which was stored in FROM in the soft key part of the CNC screen. While displaying a machine operation menu, the CNC screen can not be operated by the soft key. When setting this signal "0", the soft key part of the CNC screen returns to the soft key menu of CNC from the machine operation menu. The operation of the CNC screen by the soft key becomes possible.

Machine operation menu select number notification signal ESFM1~ESFM8 <F0317.0~F0317.7>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is used to post the selected machine operation menu number. [Operation] When the input signal EXSFT<G0295.0> is set to 1, the selected machine operation

menu number is posted in binary. When no machine operation menu is displayed, the value 0 is posted.

Soft key number select state notification signal ESF01~ESF10<F0318.0~F0319.1>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal posts the ordinal number of a pressed menu key on the menu of each menu

number. [Operation] The bit to correspond to the key, which is pushed when a machine operation menu is

displayed, is turned on. (See following table) When a main menu key is pushed and the sub menu is displayed, the all bits are turned off once. Unless stopping the push of the pushed main-menu key, neither bits are turned on. When a machine operation menu isn't displayed, these signals are "0".

Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Output signal F318.0 F318.1 F318.2 F318.3 F318.4 F318.5 F318.6 F318.7 F319.0 F319.1In case of the 8.4-inch display unit, the bit of key 1 to 5 becomes on.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn295 EXSFT

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn317 ESFM8 ESFM7 ESFM6 ESFM5 ESFM4 ESFM3 ESFM2 ESFM1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn318 ESF08 ESF07 ESF06 ESF05 ESF04 ESF03 ESF02 ESF01 Fn319 ESF10 ESF09

13.4.5 Limitation The data of the machine operation menu is a common data among the path. Therefore, even if switching the display path, the machine operation menu doesn't change. This function is disabled on the PMC screen, macro executor screen, and C language executor screen.


- 1235 -

Two soft keys must not be pressed simultaneously. Even if two soft keys are pressed simultaneously, only one of the two soft keys is recognized. When allocating the key display/hide select signal and key reverse/non-reverse video select signal to the R area, do not make settings that exceed the size of the R area.

13.5 MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL

13.5.1 Overview By using this tool (Machine Operation Menu Tool/A08B-9010-J701#ZZ11), it defines the machine operation menu and output the defined contents as MEM file. Load the MEM file to CNC and set up by following the function specifications to use the machine operation menu.

13.5.2 Explanation

ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED This tool is created using the macro of Microsoft ® Excel. This tool is available on the following applications. Microsoft ® Excel 2000 Microsoft ® Excel XP Microsoft ® Excel 2003 Microsoft is registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.

MACHINE OPERATION MENU In this page describing a definition and structure of machine operation menu.

STRUCTURE OF MACHINE OPERATION MENU As the Fig 13.5.2(a)), soft key menu is consisted by main menu and sub-menu group. More than one sub-menu is belonging to sub-menu group. Signal operation or sub-menu calls can be defined by main menu button. Only signal operation can be defined by sub-menu. Switch sub-menu in the same sub-menu group by pressing continuing button located far right of soft keys. Press the return button listed far left of soft keys to return to main menu.

Creating MEM file

Loading MEM file


- 1236 -

SubMenuGroup02MainMenu SubMenuGroup01

MenuButton

MenuButton

SubMenu12

Operation1

Operation2

Operation3

SubMenu13

Operation4

Operation5

Operation6

SubMenu14

Operation7

Operation8

Operation9

SubMenu15

Operation10

Operation11

Operation12

return button return button return button return button

continuingbutton

continuingbutton

continuingbutton

Fig.13.5.2 (a) Menu structure of horizontal soft key

BLOCK

Block is a collection of one main menu and sub-menus called out from the main menu. Maximum of 30 blocks are possible to save to one MEM file. Different languages and machine operation menus of machine structure can be saved or managed on one MEM file. On CNC, only one block in these blocks is used. This block number is specified by parameter No.3227.

MEM File

Block 01

MainMenu

SubMenu

SubMenu

Block 02

MainMenu

SubMenu

SubMenu

Block xx：

Operation Menu

BlockNumber

Fig.13.5.2 (b) Image of block


- 1237 -

The definition contents of the machine operation menu Depending on the CNC display unit size, the contents which can be defined differ like the following table.

Table 13.5.2 (a) Table of corresponding machine operation menu Display unit size 10.4-inch 8.4-inch

Number of main menus 1 line (Soft key 10 items)

1 line (Soft key 5 items)

Number of submenus 20 line * (Soft key 200 items)

20 line * (Soft key 100 items)

Number of soft key 10 5 Number of characters which can

be displayed on the soft key 6 half-size characters * 2 line 7 half-size characters * 1 line

The menu number of the main menu is fixed on 10.

RESTRICTIONS • Only one combination of soft key type and machine display size is possible for one MEM file.

Blocks with different soft key type (vertical/horizontal) or display size cannot be included in one MEM file.

• Maximum size of MEM file is 128KB. • Maximum size of 1 block is 32 KB. Without exceeding the maximum size of the MEM file, register

a block.

OPERATION Operation of this tool is explained below.

START UP METHOD Because this tool is distributed as Excel file, start up Excel and open a file of this tool. By opening this tool, the following screen is displayed.

Fig.13.5.2 (c) Start up screen of machine operation menu tool


- 1238 -

DEFINING METHOD OF MACHINE OPERATION MENU With this tool, definition input is available by 2 methods as [Definition Input of Each Menu] and [List Definition Input]. These methods of input are describing as followings.

Characteristic of definition input of each menu Definition is possible to be input by menu number unit. Definition is possible to be input by position corresponding to the menu type.

Characteristic of list definition input

All block data is possible to be input by one sheet. Menus and blocks are possible to be copied all together.

DEFINITION INPUT OF EACH MENU

In case of Definition input of each menu, 3 sheets which are shown in the Fig.13.5.2 (d) are used for the input. However, FS0i-D doesn't use the "Vertical Soft Key (10.4, 15 inch)" sheet. In case of 10.4-inch display unit, select "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)" sheet. In case of 8.4-inch display unit, select "Horizontal Soft key (8.2inch)" sheet.

Fig.13.5.2 (e) Definition input sheet of each menu


- 1239 -

Vertical SoftKey(10.4,15inch)

Horizontal SoftKey(10.4,15inch)

Horizontal SoftKey(8.2inch)

Fig.13.5.2 (f) Definition sheet of each menu

Followings explain the definition items to be input.

Block Number Select the block number of the machine operation menu to set. Block numbers should be consecutive. Blocks subsequent to the undefined block will not be output to the MEM file.

Menu Number Select the menu number of the machine operation menu.

Sub-menu Group Set the sub-menu group to which the current sub-menu belongs. If you want to set the sub-menus to the same menu group, it is necessary that the numbers of definition are consecutive. For example, if defined as the following list, 13 to 15 belong to the same menu group while 30 belongs to the different menu group.

Table 13.5.2 (b) Example of setting of sub-menu group Menu Number 13 14 15 20 21 30

Sub-menu Group 01 01 01 02 02 01 Actual Menu Group A B C


- 1240 -

Menu Text Input the characters to be displayed on the each menu soft key. In case of "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)", 2 lines, with maximum 6 single byte characters each, can be input. In case of "Horizontal Soft key (8.2inch)", 1 line, with maximum 7 single byte characters each, can be input. To input to the second line, using ALT+ENTER as line feed. (Spec of Microsoft ® Excel )

Visible Signal Input the signal address and bit position to specify the visible/invisible of the button (Message display/be hidden). Only single byte alphanumeric character can be input.

Ex.) R1250.0

State Signal Input the signal address and bit position to specify the ON/OFF state of the each button (soft key). Only single byte alphanumeric character can be input.

Ex.) R1251.0

Char Color / Back Color Input the text color and the background color of each menu button (soft key). Input the number between 0 and 15. 0 means black. Number 1 to 15 has the same meaning as the number on the CNC color screen. For details of the number on the CNC color screen, refer to the following documents.

- Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D Operator’s Manual (B-64304EN) “Color Setting Screen” - Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D Maintenance Manual (B-64305EN) “Color Setting Screen”

Jump Menu No.

Input to the menu button, which jump to sub menu in the main-menu. Input the menu number to be jumped when the button is pressed. If the each menu button of sub menu and the button, which is to be defined as, machine operation (signal operation) button, leave it as blank. This item is invalid at the sub menu. Therefore, at the sub menu of "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)" sheet, and "Horizontal Soft key (8.4inch)" sheet, the background with this item is gray. (It is possible to input to the item in the gray background but these aren't reflected in the MEM file to create.)


- 1241 -

Fig.13.5.2 (g) Input the definition on the horizontal soft key sub-menu

LIST DEFINITION INPUT

Select the [Data] sheet to input the list definition.

Fig.13.5.2 (h) List definition sheet

Menus are listed horizontally and button definition items are listed vertically. Data of definition input of each menu is reflected on this sheet. Also, data edited on this sheet is used by the definition input of each menu.

Fig.13.5.2 (i) List definition input sheet


- 1242 -

Cursor can be jumped to the block selected by the [Group Jump] combo box.

CREATING MEM FILE Click MEM File Save button to create the MEM file.

MEMFilename Input Box

Fig.13.5.2 (j) Menu definition sheet (Creating MEM file)

Input the file name of the MEM file to be created in the MEM file name input box. If the input name includes folder path, MEM file is output to the specified folder. If only file name is input, MEM file is output to the folder where this tool (Excel file) is located. If the specified folder does not exist, it is created automatically. If the file name is not specified, [EXSFTKEY.MEM] will be created at the folder where this tool is located. Please to be noted that the specified file, if already exists, will be overwritten. File with long name, which can be used in Windows system, cannot be used by CNC. Before loading the MEM file to CNC, please confirm that the file name is DOS format (file name no longer than 8 characters and extension no longer than 3 characters).

B-64303EN-1/02 14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

- 1243 -

14 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Chapter 14, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA", consists of the following sections: 14.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ..............................................................................................1243 14.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL..........................................................................................1254

14.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

Overview The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher interface. 1. Program 2. Offset data 3. Parameter 4. Pitch error compensation data 5. Custom macro common variables. 6. Workpiece coordinate system setting data 7. Operation history data (output only) The above data can be output to a memory card via a memory card interface. In this case, when NC data such as programs or parameters is written to a memory card, if the name of the NC data is already used, it is possible to overwrite the existing file or cancel this operation. To enable this function, set bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308. The channel for data I/O is determined by setting parameter No. 0020. In this case, foreground or background data I/O is restricted to one channel. In addition, data I/O can be controlled separately by setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110. Concretely, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground input, foreground output, background input, and background output.

Explanation The parameters described below must be set up to use an I/O unit interface (RS-232-C serial port) or memory card interface for inputting and outputting data (such as programs and parameters) between external input/output units and memory cards. The channel to which an I/O unit is connected needs be specified by setting I/O CHANNEL (parameter No. 0020). In addition, the specification number, baud rate, and number of stop bits of each I/O unit must be set in the parameter corresponding to each channel in advance. For setting of channel 1, two types of parameters for setting I/O units are provided. Channel setting can be made for each of foreground I/O and background I/O by setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110. At this time, channel setting is made with No.0020, No.0021, No.0022, and No.0023. The following shows correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels.

14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64303EN-1/02

- 1244 -

Specify a channel for an data input/output device. I/O CHANNEL (0 to 9) =0 : Channel 1 =1 : Channel 1 =2 : Channel 2

In addition, input/output of memory card interface is enabled.

I/O CHANNEL = 0(Channel 1)

0101

0102

0103

Stop bit and other data

Number specified for the input/output device

Baud rate


0121

0122

0123



Baud rate


0111

0112

0113



Baud rate

I/O CHANNEL or foreground input 0020

Foreground output 0021

Background input

0022

Background output

0023

Channel settings are the same as with parameter No. 0020.

When set by IO4

:

:

I/O CHANNEL = 4(Memory card interface)

I/O CHANNEL = 5(Data Server)

Fig. 14.1 (a) Correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels

Diagnosis

- Foreground 030 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA

When the TH alarm occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the number of characters counted from the beginning of the block.

031 TH DATA

Readout code of the number of characters in which a TH alarm occurred

- Background 032 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA

When the TH alarm occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the number of characters counted from the beginning of the block.

033 TH DATA

Readout code of the number of characters in which a TH alarm occurred

Parameter 0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

0021 Foreground output device setting

0022 Background input device setting

0023 Background output device setting


- 1245 -

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 9

The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external input/output device and the host computer: • Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2) • Memory card interface • Data server interface • Embedded Ethernet interface By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground input, foreground output, background input, and background output. In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.

Correspondence between settings and input/output devices

Setting Description 0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1 2 RS-232-C serial port 2 4 Memory card interface 5 Data server interface 9 Embedded Ethernet interface

NOTE 1 Input device selection (parameter No. 0020) can also be set on the

setting screen. 2 It is necessary to set the specifications (baud rate, stop bit, etc.) of

input/output devices to be connected in the corresponding parameters for each interface, in advance. Both I/O CHANNEL = 0 and I/O CHANNEL = 1 indicate an input/output device connected to RS-232-C serial port 1, but the parameters for setting the baud rate, stop bit, and other specifications are provided separately.

- Parameters Common to all Channels

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 ISO TVC


#0 TVC TV check

0: Not performed 1: Performed

#1 ISO Code used for data output 0: EIA code 1: ISO code

NOTE 1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of

parameter No. 0139.


- 1246 -

NOTE 2 The I/O setting of data server is made by bit 0 (ISO) of parameter

No. 0908.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0010 PEC PRM PZS


#0 PZS When a part program is punched out, the O number is:

0: Not zero-suppressed. 1: Zero-suppressed.

#1 PRM Whether the parameter whose setting is 0 is output or not: 0: It is selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0]. 1: It is not selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0]. The parameter whose setting is 0

is not output.

#2 PEC When pitch error compensation data is output, data having a compensation value of 0 is: 0: Output 1: Not output.

0024 Setting of communication with the ladder development tool (FANUC LADDER-III, ladder editing package)

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 255

This parameter is used to enable or disable the PMC online connection function. By specifying this parameter, the PMC online connection function can be enabled or disabled without displaying the PMC online setting screen.

Setting RS-232-C High-speed interface 0 The setting on the PMC online setting screen is not altered. 1 To be used (channel 1) Not to be used 2 To be used (channel 2) Not to be used

10 Not to be used To be used 11 To be used (channel 1) To be used 12 To be used (channel 2) To be used 255 Communication is terminated forcibly (as with the [FORCED STOP] soft key).

NOTE 1 The setting of this parameter becomes valid when the power is

turned on or this parameter is modified. After this parameter is set, the power need not be turned off then back on.

2 A setting modification made on the PMC online setting screen is not reflected in this parameter.

3 The communication settings of a baud rate and so forth for using RS-232-C made on the PMC online setting screen are valid. When no modification is ever made to the settings on the PMC online setting screen, the baud rate is 9600, parity is not used, and the number of stops bits is 2.


- 1247 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 ENS IOP NCR CRF CTV


#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.

0: Performed 1: Not performed

#2 CRF Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code 0: Depends on the setting of bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 100. 1: CR, LF are output.

#3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code 0: LF, CR, CR are output. 1: Only LF is output.

#6 IOP Stopping a program output or input operation by a reset is: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (Stopping a program input/output operation with the [STOP] soft key is enabled at all times.)

#7 ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code 0: An alarm is generated. 1: The NULL code is ignored.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0110 IO4




#0 IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. If the I/O channels are not separately controlled, set the input/output device in parameter No. 20. If the I/O channels are separately controlled, set the input device and output device in the foreground and the input device and output device in the background in parameters No. 20 to No. 23 respectively. Separate control of I/O channels makes it possible to perform background editing, program input/output, and the like during the DNC operation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MDP

0138



- 1248 -

[Data type] Bit

#0 MDP To the extensions of input/output files, a path number is: 0: Not added. 1: Added.

NOTE If a file name is specified by setting F, this parameter is ignored, and

a path number is not added to the extension.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0139 ISO


#0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using

0: ASCII codes 1: ISO codes

WARNING 1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to

input or output data using ISO codes. 2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity

information is not included and a data error during the data input/output is not detected.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0300 PCM


#0 PCM If the CNC screen display function is enabled, when a memory card interface is provided

on the NC side, 0: The memory card interface on the NC side is used. 1: The memory card interface on the PC side is used. This parameter is valid when parameter No. 0020 is 4 (memory card interface). This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function is activated.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0908 ISO


#0 ISO When the data server is selected as the input/output device, data input/output is:

0: Carried out with ASCII codes. 1: Carried out with ISO codes.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11308 COW



- 1249 -

[Data type] Bit

#1 COW When the file of specified name already exists on memory card, 0: It is not overwritten Alarm (SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST) is generated. 1: It is overwritten. Because the confirmation message is displayed before overwriting even if COW is 1,

overwriting can be canceled.

NOTE When the overwritten file is read only attribute, it is not possible to

overwrite even if bit 1 (COW) of parameter No.11308 = 1.

- Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0101 NFD ASI SB2


#0 SB2 The number of stop bits

0: 1 1: 2

#3 ASI The codes used during data input/output is: 0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of

parameter No. 0000) 1: ASCII codes during input and output

NOTE To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set

bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.

#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output 0: Output 1: Not output When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.

0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)


Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0. The following table shows the correspondence between the specification numbers and the input/output device specifications.


- 1250 -

Table Correspondence between the specification numbers and the input/output device specifications

Specification number Input/output device specification 0 RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.) 1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1(FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2) 2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3(FANUC CASSETTE F1)

3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adapter, FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

4 RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are not used.) 5 Portable tape reader

6 FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

0103 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 0)


Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0. See the following table when setting the baud rate.

Baud rate setting Setting Baud rate (bps) Setting Baud rate (bps)

1 50 8 1200 3 110 9 2400 4 150 10 4800 6 300 11 9600 7 600 12 19200

- Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0111 NFD ASI SB2



0: 1 1: 2







- 1251 -



Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=1.



Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=1.

- Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0121 NFD ASI SB2



0: 1 1: 2








Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=2.



Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=2.


- 1252 -

- Parameters of DNC operation from the memory card

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0138 MNC SCH


#5 SCH Schedule operation function is:


#7 MNC DNC operation from the memory card and external device subprogram call from the memory card are: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0139 ISO


#0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using

0: ASCII codes 1: ISO codes

WARNING 1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to

input or output data using ISO codes. 2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity

information is not included and a data error during the data input/output is not detected.

Alarm and message

Number Message Description SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.

The read code that caused the TH error and how many statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics screen.

SR0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error. The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No. 0000#0 to “0”.

SR1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O processing on an I/O device.

SR1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently selected in the setting was specified. This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed even though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.

SR1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was specified. The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol selection settings are erroneous.

SR1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.


- 1253 -

Number Message Description SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory card.

- Channel 1

Number Message Description SR0085 OVERRUN ERROR During a read by reader/punch interface 1, an overrun, parity, or

framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data was not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device specification number was incorrect.

SR0086 DR OFF During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a defective printed circuit board.

SR0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW During a read by reader/punch interface 1, although a read stop command was issued, more than 10 characters were input. The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.

- Channel 2

Number Message Description SR1830 DR OFF(2) During I/O process by reader/punch interface 2, the data set

ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a defective printed circuit board.

SR1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) During a read by reader/punch interface 2, an overrun, parity, or framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data was not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device specification number was incorrect.

SR1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) During a read by reader/punch interface 2, although a read stop command was issued, more than 10 characters were input. The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.

- DNC operation

Number Message Description PS0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR

GOTO/WHILE/DO A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the main program in the MDI or DNC mode.

PS1081 EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL MODE ERROR

1. M198 was executed during DNC operation. Modify the program.

2. An interruption macro was specified and M99 was executed during pocketing of multiple repetitive canned cycles.


- 1254 -

14.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL

Overview The registration or punch of a program can be specified externally. • Registration

External read start signal EXRD can be used to register a program in the part program memory from an external input device with the background edit function.

• Punch External punch start signal EXWT can be used to output all programs registered in part program memory to an external output device with the background edit function.

Signal

External read start signal EXRD<Gn058.1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Programs are registered in the part program memory through the reader/puncher interface. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows:

- The background edit function reads programs from an external input device and register them in the part program memory.

- Bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to specify either a single program or all programs in the file are registered at a time. Bit 0 (RDL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to delete all programs before being registered. However, it is impossible to delete programs protected by bit 0 (NE8) and bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202 or by their attributes.

- During registration, read/punch signal RPBSY is 1. - When external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1 during registration, the

registration stops. - If the reader/puncher interface is already used in the foreground processing (for

example, reading or punching of a program in the edit mode), external read start signal EXRD waits until the foreground processing is completed.

- There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can be registered. For example, a program with the same program number or file name as the program to be registered is not allowed to be executed in the foreground.

NOTE In the 2-path system, do not input these signals for two or more

paths at the same time.

External punch start signal EXWT<Gn058.3> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Programs stored in the part program memory are output to an external unit via the

reader/puncher interface. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows:

- The background edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program memory to an external output device.

- When programs are being output, read/punch busy signal RPBSY is set to 1. - When external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1 during output, the output

stops. - If the reader/puncher interface is already used in the foreground processing (for

example, reading or punching of a program in the edit mode), external punch start signal EXWT waits until the foreground processing is completed.


- 1255 -

- There are some other conditions to determine whether all programs can be output. For example, the program protected by bit 0 and bit 4 of parameter No. 3202 cannot be output.

NOTE In the 2-path system, do not input these signals for two or more

paths at the same time.

External read/punch stop signal EXSTP<Gn058.2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Program registration or output via the reader/puncher interface is forcibly stopped. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows:

- Program registration or output by the external read start signal or external punch start signal is stopped immediately.

Read/punch busy signal RPBSY<Fn053.2>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that program registration or output triggered by the external read

start signal or external punch start signal is under way. [Output cond.] This signal becomes 1, when:

- The external read start signal or external punch start signal triggers program registration or output.

This signal becomes 0, when: - Program registration or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal

ends. This signal also becomes 1 when the program registration or output ends normally or is forcibly ended by external read/ punch stop signal EXSTP.

Read/punch alarm signal RPALM<Fn053.3>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program registration or

output triggered by the external read start signal or external punch start signal. [Output cond.] This signal becomes 1, when:

- An alarm occurs during program registration or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal.

This signal becomes 0, when: - A reset or external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is input.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn053 RPALM RPBSY


- 1256 -

Parameter

Specify a channel for an data input/output device. I/O CHANNEL (0 to 2) =0 : Channel 1 =1 : Channel 1 =2 : Channel 2


0101

0102

0103



Baud rate


0121

0122

0123



Baud rate


0111

0112

0113



Baud rate

I/O CHANNEL or foreground input 0020

Foreground output 0021

Background input

0022

Background output

0023

Channel settings are the same as with parameter No. 0020.

When IO4(No.0110#0) is set

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE N99 REP RAL RDL


#0 RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control

0: The new program is registered following the programs already registered. 1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that

programs which are protected from being edited are not deleted.

NOTE Registered programs are placed in the background default folder

set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set the default folder in the background correctly.

#1 RAL When programs are registered by external I/O device control:

0: All programs are registered. 1: Only one program is registered.

NOTE Registered programs are placed in the background default folder

set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set the default folder in the background correctly.

#2 REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is the same as that

of an existing program 0: An alarm is generated. 1: The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that if the

existing program is protected from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is generated.


- 1257 -

#5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is

assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed

#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 NE9 NE8


#0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999

0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with

program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.) (2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with

program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.) (3) Program number search (4) Program editing of registered programs (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Displaying programs

NOTE This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:

(1) Programs on the Data Server (2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a

memory card

#4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999 0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with

program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.) (2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with

program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.) (3) Program number search (4) Program editing of registered programs (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Displaying programs


- 1258 -

NOTE This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:

(1) Programs on the Data Server (2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a

memory card

Alarm and message Number Message Description BG0070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.

Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry. BG0072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 400. Delete

unnecessary programs and execute program registration again.

BG0073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE

The commanded program number has already been used. Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and execute program registration again.

BG0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was protected. In program matching, the password for the encoded program was not correct.

BG0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW The NC received more than 10 characters even though the NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 1 during data reception.

BG0140 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE

In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete the program being selected in the foreground. Perform the correct operation for the background edition.

BG0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were using it.

BG0434 WRITE PROTECT The registration of the program is prohibited. BG0435 ILLEGAL FORMAT The format is illegal.

- Confirm the format of the program number or file name set for the program.

BG1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.

BG0085 OVERRUN ERROR The next character was received from the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 1 before it could read a previously received character.

BG1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) The next character was received from the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 2 before it could read a previously received character.

BG0086 DR OFF During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF.

BG1830 DR OFF(2) During I/O process by reader/punch interface 2, the data set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF.

BG1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) The NC received more than 10 characters of data even though the NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device connected to reader/punch interface 2 during data reception.

Reference item

Manual name Item name Program management OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Inputting/Outputting a Program

B-64303EN-1/02 15.MEASUREMENT

- 1259 -

15 MEASUREMENT Chapter 15, "MEASUREMENT", consists of the following sections: 15.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT..............................................................................................1259 15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) /

AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .................................................................................1260 15.3 SKIP FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................1267 15.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ..............................................................................................1292

15.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)

M

Overview The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key. Switch to the offset value display screen on the screen. Relative positions are also displayed on this screen. Then select the reference tool and set it at the fixed point on the machine by manual operation. Reset the displayed relative position to zero. Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by manual operation. The relative position display at this point shows difference between the reference tool and the tool measured and the relative position display value is then set as offset amounts.

This difference is set as offset amount

Fixed point

Reference tool


OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center) (B-64304EN-2)

Tool length compensation

15.MEASUREMENT B-64303EN-1/02

- 1260 -

15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)

Overview When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the difference between the current coordinate value and the coordinate value of the command measurement position and uses it as the offset value for the tool. When the tool has been already offset, it is moved to the measurement position with that offset value. The difference between the coordinate value of a measuring position and a specified coordinate value is added to current compensation.

Compensation = (Current compensation) + [(Coordinate at tool stop) - (Coordinate at specification of measuring position)]

Measurement speed

Z

X0

A (start position)G37 for specifying measuring position

B (deceleration position)

C (measuring position)） Tool stops when measuring position reached signal goes on.

Rapid traverse

NOTE When using automatic tool length measurement (M series)/automatic tool offset (T series), set bit 7 (IGA) of parameter No. 6240 to 0.

Signal

Measuring position reached signals XAE1#1<X004.0>, XAE2#1<X004.1> (M series/T series), XAE3#1<X004.2> (M series only) XAE1#2<X013.0>, XAE2#2<X013.1> (T series (2-path control)) GAE1#P<Gn517.0>, GAE2#P<Gn517.1> (M series / T series), GAE3#P<Gn517.2> (M series only)

[Classification] Input signal [Function] If the measuring position specified by a program command differs from the measuring

position which a tool has reached in practice, that is, the position at the moment the measuring position reached signal has just been turned "1", the difference in the coordinate value is added to the current tool compensation value to update the compensation value. The tool is first fed to the specified measuring position by rapid traverse in a block where one of the following commands has been specified: G37 (Mseries) G36,G37 (Tseries) The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance γ before the measuring position.


- 1261 -

The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a parameters (No.6241 to No.6243). If the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned "1" after the tool has approached within distance ε of the measuring position and before the tool overshoots the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit updates the compensation value and terminates the move command for the block. If the measuring position reached signal is not turned "1" even after the tool has overshot the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit enters an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block without updating the compensation value.

Start point

Presumed measuring position

ε ε

γ

TS (xs, zs)

X, Z

FR FPU V

A B C D

|xa-xs|. |za-zs|U (xa, za)

FR : Rapid traverseFP : Parameters No.6241 to No.6243（feedrate） γ : Parameters No.6251 to No.6253 ε : Parameters No.6254 to No.6256

Measuring position reached signal

Axis specification Signal input Valid parameters Command code T series M series T series M series T series M series

G36 Basic 1st

axis

XAE1 (GAE1)

6241, 6251, 6254

G37 Basic 3rd

axis

Basic1st to 3rd axes

XAE2 (GAE2)

XAE1 to XAE3

(GAE1 to GAE3)

6242, 6252, 6255

6241 to 6243, 6251 to 6253, 6254 to 6256

NOTE In an M-series machine, if parameters No.6242 and No.6243 are

set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6241 becomes valid. If parameters No.6252 and No.6253 are set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6251 becomes valid. If parameters No.6255 and No.6256 are set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6254 becomes valid.

[Operation] When the signal is turned "1", the control unit works as follows:

• Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and updates the current compensation value based on the difference between the specified measuring position and the read measuring position in the following case: When the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where G36 (T series) or G37 is specified after the tool is within distance ε of the measuring position specified by a program and before the tool overshoots the measuring position by distance ε. The control unit then stops the tool, and terminates the move command for the block.


- 1262 -

• Enters an alarm (PS0080) state and terminates the move command for the block without updating the compensation value in the following case: When the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the command is turned "1" in a block where G36 (T series), G37 is specified after the tool is within distance γ of the measuring position but before the tool is within distance ε of the measuring position.

• The measuring position reached signal is not monitored on the rising edge, but the state of the signal is simply monitored. So, if the measuring position reached signal remains to be set to 1, and automatic tool length measurement (M series) (automatic tool offset (T series) (G36, G37) is then specified, the CNC issues the PS0080 alarm when a movement has been made to distance γ before the measurement position.

NOTE 1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10 msec. 2 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached

signal is 0 to 2 ms just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side. Accordingly, the measurement error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay or variation in transferring a measuring position reached signal on the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation), multiplied by the feedrate specified in parameter No.6241.

3 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position reached signal until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is calculated, an acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC delay must also be considered.

4 Measuring position reached signals XAE1 to XAE3 need not be processed on the PMC side because the CNC reads the signals directly from the machine.

5 If the tool length measurement function is not used, the PMC can use the pins corresponding to the measuring position reached signals for general-purpose input signals.

6 When the parameter XSG (bit 2 of parameter No.3008) is set to 1, address X004 including measuring position reached signals can be assigned to an X address specified in parameter No.3019.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 XAE2#1 XAE1#1 (T series)

X004 XAE3#1 XAE2#1 XAE1#1 (M series)

X013 XAE2#2 XAE1#2 (T series)

GAE2#P GAE1#P (T series)

Gn517 GAE3#P GAE2#P GAE1#P (M series)

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG



- 1263 -



#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is: 0: Fixed at the address. 1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3013, No. 3014,

No. 3012, and No. 3019. If parameter No. 3013 and No. 3014 are not set, the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to bit 0 of X0000. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement position arrival signal, the interlock signal for each axis direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are assigned to X0000.

3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signals, and tool

offset value write signals are assigned




Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, the measurement position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T series)), and tool offset value write signals (±MIT1, ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SEB


#1 SEB When a skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on while the skip function,

or the automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are: 0: Ignored. 1: Considered and compensated. The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6210 MDC



- 1264 -

#6 MDC The measurement result of automatic tool length is:

0: Added to the current offset. 1: Subtracted from the current offset.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6240 IGA AE0




#0 AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the automatic tool compensation signals

XAE1 and XAE2 <X004.0,1> (T series) or the automatic tool length measurement signals XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 <X004.0,1,2> (M series) are: 0: 1. 1: 0.

#7 IGA Automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is: 0: Used. 1: Not used.

Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE1 signal) 6241

Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal)

Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE2 signal) 6242


6243


[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)

(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) These parameters set the relevant feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE When the setting of parameter No. 6242 or 6243 is 0, the setting of

parameter No. 6241 is used.

γ value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6251

γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal)

γ value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6252



- 1265 -

6253


[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) These parameters set the relevant γ value during automatic tool compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE 1 For the M series, when the setting of parameter No. 6252 or 6253

is 0, the setting of parameter No. 6251 is used. 2 Set a radius value regardless of whether diameter or radius

programming is specified.

ε value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6254

ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal)

ε value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6255


6256


[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) These parameters set the relevant ε value during automatic tool compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE 1 For the M series, when the setting of parameter No. 6255 or 6256

is 0, the setting of parameter No. 6254 is used. 2 Set a radius value regardless of whether diameter or radius

programming is specified.

Alarm and message Number Message Description

G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT PROPERLY INPUT (M series)

When the tool length measurement function (G37) is performed, a measuring position reached signal goes 1 in front of the area determined by the ε value specified in parameter No.6254. Alternatively, the signal does not go 1.

PS0080

G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT PROPERLY INPUT (T series)

When the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is used, a measuring position reached signals (XAE1, XAE2) does not go 1 within the range determined by the ε value specified in parameters No.6254 and No.6255.


- 1266 -

Number Message Description G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (M series)

The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified without specifying an H code. Correct the program.

PS0081

G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (T series)

The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is specified without specifying an T code. Correct the program.

G37 SPECIFIED WITH H CODE (M series)

The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified together with an H code in the same block. Correct the program.

PS0082

G37 SPECIFIED WITH T CODE (T series)

The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is specified together with an T code in the same block. Correct the program.

G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND (M series)

An error has been found in axis specification of the tool length measurement function (G37). Alternatively, a move command is specified as an incremental command. Correct the program.

PS0083

G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND (T series)

An error has been found in axis specification of the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37). Alternatively, a command is specified as an incremental command. Correct the program.

NOTE

NOTE 1 If an H code and G37 are specified in the same block, an alarm will be raised.

Specify an H code before a block including G37. 2 A measurement speed (FP), γ, and ε are specified as parameters (FP: No.6241,

γ: No.6251, ε: No.6254) by the machine tool builder. As ε, specify a positive value satisfying the condition of γ > ε.

3 The compensation value is updated by the following formula: New compensation value =(Current compensation value)+[(Current position of the tool along the specified axis when the measuring position reached signal is "1") - (specified measuring position)]

The following compensation values are updated: (1) In a M series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool

compensation number selected by an H code. When offset memory A is used, the offset value is changed. When offset memory C is used, the tool wear compensation value for the H

code is changed. (2) In a T series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool

compensation number selected by a T code and to the specified axis (X, Z) in G36, G37.

4 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached signal is 0 to 2 ms just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side. Accordingly, the measurement error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay or variation in transferring a measuring position reached signal on the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation), multiplied by the feedrate specified in parameter No.6241.

5 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position reached signal until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is calculated, an acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC delay must also be considered.


- 1267 -

NOTE 6 A measuring position reached signal is monitored just as a state not by the rising

edge. Accordingly, if a measuring position reached signal is held to 1 and if the corresponding tool length measurement function (G37) is specified, the CNC will raise alarm PS0080 when a movement is made to a position at a distance of γ, in front of the measuring position.

7 When using this function, set the parameter EVO (bit 6 of parameter No.5001) to zero. (If the tool compensation value of tool length compensation A or B is changed in the offset mode (G43 or G44), the new value becomes effective from a subsequent block including G43, G44, or an H code.)

Reference item

Manual name Item name DESCRIPTIONS (B-64302EN) Automatic tool length measurement

Automatic tool offset OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Lathe system) (B-64304EN-1)

Automatic tool offset (G36,G37)

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Machining center system) (B-64304EN-2)

Automatic tool length measurement (G37)

15.3 SKIP FUNCTION

15.3.1 Skip Function

Overview Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupted and the next block is executed. The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from the machine, for example, in grinding. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece. The coordinates when the skip signal turned on are stored in the system variables (#5061 to #5065) for custom macros, so they can be used by custom macros. #5061 : First axis coordinate value #5062 : Second axis coordinate value : #5065 : Fifth axis coordinate value

- Acc./Dec. after interpolation of the skip function To enable the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function, set bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No. 6200 to 1. When SKF is 0, the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function is disabled. If the Acc./Dec. type is set by bit 3 (ASL) of parameter No. 6210 and the time constant is set by bit 4 (ASB) of parameter No. 6210 when SKF is 1, it is possible to set a separate Acc./Dec. type and time constant that are different from those of the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation. When ASB is 0 and ASL is 0, the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation is assumed. In this case, the Acc./Dec. type set by bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610 and bit 1 (CTBx) of parameter No. 1610 and the time constant set by parameter No. 1622 are enabled.


- 1268 -

- Compensation of acceleration/deceleration and servo delay The skip function records the current position inside the NC using the skip signal. However, the current position inside the NC includes servo delay, so the recorded position deviates from the position in which the skip signal was actually input by the servo delay. The deviation amount can be calculated from the positional deviation owned on the servo side and the accumulated amount by feedrate acceleration/deceleration performed inside the NC. If the deviation amount is considered, the servo delay does not need to be included in measurement error. If bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No. 6201 is set, compensation can be carried out by obtaining the deviation amount the positional deviation and the accumulated amount by acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal is turned on.

Coordinate origin

Position at which the skip signal was input

Actual tool stop position

Tool movement direction

High-speed skip signal

Pnc

Q P

Pnc : Position at which the tool is actually stopped after the skip signal was input [mm/inch] P : Distance to be measured [mm/inch] Q : Servo delay [mm/inch] As shown above, the following expression is calculated inside the NC by setting bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No. 6201. P = Pnc - Q

Signal SKIP<X004.7> SKIPP<Gn006.6> (T series/M series) SKIP#2<X013.7> (T series (2-path control)) Skip Signals SKIP<X004.7> SKIPP<Gn006.6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to "1" in

a block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same time.

[Operation] When a skip signal turns to "1", the control unit works as described below. - When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit reads and

stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be moved.

NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.


- 1269 -

NOTE 2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in

detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation (including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate.

3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the PMC side.

4 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X004.7> from the machine tool; the PMC is no longer requires to process the signal.

5 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the signal terminal SKIP<X004.7> corresponding to the skip signal as a general purpose input signal.

6 When the skip signal is monitored, the state rather than the rising edge is sampled. Therefore, when the level remains "1", the skip condition is assumed to be met immediately after skip cutting is specified next.

7 Address X004 including skip signal SKIP<X004.7> can be assigned to the X addresses that were set for parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 when XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X004 SKIP

X013 SKIP#2

Gn006 SKIPP

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG





NOTE When this parameter was set to 1, parameters No. 3012 and No.

3019 must be set. If parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip to X0 signal, PMC axis control skip signal, and measurement position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.


- 1270 -

3012 Skip signal assignment address




Set an X address to which the skip signal (SKIPn) is to be assigned.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is

set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually

usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327

3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are

assigned




Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and the measurement position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T series)) are to be assigned.

Example 1. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 6 When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is allocated to X0005.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (M series)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

X006 ESKIP XAE2 XAE1 (T series)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series)


- 1271 -

Example 2. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 5 When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X005 ESKIP XAE2 XAE1

SKIP

SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1

SKIP SKIP6

SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

(M series)




#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5160

TSG


#4 TSG A dependence of the overload torque detection signal in a peck drilling cycle (M series)

on the parameter setting of the skip function: 0: Exists. 1: Does not exist.

NOTE When this parameter is 1, even if the setting of the skip signal is

disabled, the X address can be used as the overload torque detection signal. At this time, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1 (SK0) of parameter No. 6200 is valid.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6200 SKF HSS SK0 GSK


#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is:

0: Invalid. 1: Valid.

#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8. 0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1. 1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0.

#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

(The conventional skip signal is used.) 1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.


- 1272 -

#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SPE IGX SEB




#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are: 0: Enabled as skip signals. 1: Disabled as skip signals.

#7 SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.

Enabling and disabling the skip signals

ParameterIGX

(No.6201#4)

GSK (No.6200

#0)

SPE (No.6201

#7)

Skip signal SKIPP

Skip signal SKIP

Multi-step skip signal

SKIP2-SKIP8 0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled 0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled 0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled 1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 0 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled

Setting

1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201) is valid for the skip function (when HSS (bit 4 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal or the multiphase skip function (when SLS (bit 5 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal. To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 SFN SFP



- 1273 -

#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.

NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the

description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.

#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

NOTE For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no

high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6210 ASB ASL


#3 ASL #4 ASB

The ASB and ASL bits set the type and time constant of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the skip function as follows:

ASB ASL Type of acceleration/ deceleration Parameter No. for time constant0 1 Linear type 1 － Bell-shaped

Parameter No. 6280

0 0 This function is disabled(NOTE). When bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is specified, T1=T/2 and T2=T/2 are obtained as with normal acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, where T is the time constant. Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration type includes no linear part.

NOTE In this case, the acceleration/deceleration type is set in bits 0 and 1

of parameter No. 1610, and the time constant is set in parameter No. 1622.

6280 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the skip function for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 512

This parameter sets a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the skip function for each axis. This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ASB) of parameter No. 6210 or bit 4 (ASL) of parameter No. 6210 is set to 1.


- 1274 -

6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)

(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.


description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G

code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled.


Note

NOTE This function is enabled for axes not related to composite control.

15.3.2 High-speed Skip Signal

Overview The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 to HDI3 : connected directly to the CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input. (Either can be enabled/disabled, using parameters HSS and IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201 and bit 4 of parameter No. 6200).) If a high-speed skip signal is used, up to four signals can be input. Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 to 2 msec at the CNC side (not considering those at the PMC side). This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec or less, thus allowing high precision measurement.

Signal High-Speed Skip Status Signals HDO0 to HDO3 <Fn122.0 to Fn122.3>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal. The

signal-to-bit correspondence is as follows: High-speed skip signal ..... Bit name

HDI0......................... HDO0 HDI1......................... HDO1 HDI2......................... HDO2 HDI3......................... HDO3


- 1275 -

[Output cond.] Each bit is set to 1 when:

- The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 1. Each bit is set to 0 when: - The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 0.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn122 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 RHB SFN


#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1

(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

NOTE For not the multi-stage skip function but the skip function not using

high-speed skip signals, see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.

#5 RHB The high-Speed skip status signals HDO is:

0: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed. 1: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open.

NOTE The high-speed skip signal HDI does not change by setting RHB

(bit 5 of parameter No.6207). When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open, the signal HDI is set to "0" and the signal is not assumed to be input regardless of the setting of parameter RHB. To assume that the high-speed skip signal is input when the contact of the signal is open, set SRE (bit 6 of parameter No.6200) to 1.

6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1)

6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2)



[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis


- 1276 -

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SRE HSS


#4 HSS

0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.)

1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used: 0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close). 1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SPE IGX TSE SEB




#2 TSE In a skip by the torque limit skip command (G31P98/P99): 0: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is considered (system variables #5061

to #5065 store positions corrected in consideration of the servo system delay amount).

1: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is not considered (system variables #5061 to #5065 store positions corrected without consideration of the servo system delay amount).


- 1277 -

Position during skip operation

Current position of CNC

Machine position Error amount

Position in consideration of delay

Position without consideration of delay

Origin of the coordinate system Stop point


#7 SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.

Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled

Parameter

IGX (No.6201

#4)

GSK (No.6200

#0)

SPE (No.6201

#7)

Skip signal SKIPP

Skip signal SKIP

Multistage skip signals


Setting

1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1). To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1


1S1 to 1S4 Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled when the G31 skip command is issued.

The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and commands. The setting of the bits have the following meaning : 0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid. 1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.


- 1278 -

Parameter High-speed skip signals 1S1 HDI0 1S2 HDI1 1S3 HDI2 1S4 HDI3



Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP

SIGNAL SELECTED In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed signal is selected in different paths.

Note


Notes on using high speed skip

- Overview Note that the contact state during a skip is different from that of Series 0i in the high speed skip signal of Series 0i-D. Series 0i-D : The skip signal is assumed to be input when an open contact is closed. Series 0i-C : The skip signal is assumed to be input when an closed contact is opened.

- Detail The difference in the specification of the high speed skip signal between Series 0i-D and Series 0i-C is as follows. • For Series 0i-D The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be “1” when the input voltage is at a low level and

assumed to be “0” at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be “1” when a contact is closed.

Therefore the skip signal is input when an open contact is closed. • For Series 0i-C The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be “0” when the input voltage is at a low level and

assumed to be “1” at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be “1” when a contact is opened.

Therefore the skip signal is input when a closed contact is opened. When the wiring designed for 0i-C is applied to 0i-D, the modification of wiring is not necessary by

setting the following parameter. Depending on the detector to be used, the settings on the detector are used instead of parameter

settings to switch between contact A and contact B of for output signals. For details, see the manual of the detector.


- 1279 -

- Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6200 SRE


#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal or high-speed measurement position arrival signal is used:

0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close). 1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).

- Signal High-speed skip status signal HDO0 to HDO3 <Fn122.0 to Fn122.3>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn122 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal. [Output cond.] 1: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed. (The input voltage is at a

low level.) 0: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open. (The input voltage is at a

high level.)

15.3.3 Multi-step Skip

Overview The multi-step skip function stores the coordinate values when skip signals (four signals) are input in the block where G31P1 to G31P4 are specified, and skips the remaining movement. In the block where Q1 to Q4 are specified after G04, dwell can be skipped when skip signals (four signals) are input. A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring instrument can be used to skip programs being executed. In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough machining to spark-out can be performed automatically by applying a skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining, fine- machining, or spark-out operation is completed.

NOTE Multi-step skip function is optional function.

Signal

Skip signals SKIPP<Gn006.6> SKIP<X004.7> SKIP2<X004.2> SKIP3<X004.3> SKIP4<X004.4> SKIP5<X004.5> SKIP6<X004.6> SKIP7<X004.0> SKIP8<X004.1>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to "1"

in a command program block containing G31P1 (or G31), G31P2, or G31P3, G31P4 is stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same time. Furthermore, in a block containing G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 or G04Q4, the dwell command of the block is terminated. In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions) of the block are completed, machining never proceeds to the next block. Parameters Nos. 6202 to 6205 can be used to select which skip signals are enabled. Since a one-to-one relationship is not required, one skip signal can be enabled for multiple commands or multiple skip signals can be enabled for one command.


- 1280 -

[Operation] When a skip signal turns to "1", the control unit functions as described below. - When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31P1 to P4) for skip cutting, and the

skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the axis was supposed to be moved in that block.

- When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit stops dwell operation, and cancels any remaining dwell time.

NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec. 2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in

detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation (including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate.

3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the PMC side.

4 The G codes for skip cutting (G31P1, G31P2, G31P3, and G31P4) are the same except for their correspondence with skip signals. G31 and G31P1 are equivalent.

5 The skip signal is not monitored for a rising edge, but for its state. So, if a skip signal continues to be "1", a skip condition is assumed

to be satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation is specified.

6 Address X004 can be allocated optionally to the X addresses set in parameter No.3012 and parameter No.3019 when XSG (bit 2 of parameter No.3008) is 1.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn006 SKIPP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

X004 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1

SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1

SKIP SKIP6

SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

X013 ESKIP#2 XAE2#2 XAE1#2

SKIP#2

SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2 SKIP8 SKIP7

(T series)

(M series)

(T series)


- 1281 -

WARNING 1 SKIP2 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as axis-direction-specific manual

feed interlock signals +MIT1, -MIT1, +MIT2, and -MIT2 (tool compensation measurement value direct input B), skip signal ESKIP (PMC axis control), and measurement position arrival signals XAE1 and XAE2 (automatic tool compensation). Be careful when using both. (T series)

2 SKIP2 and SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as skip signal ESKIP (axis control by PMC) and measurement position arrival signal XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (tool length automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (M series)

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG





NOTE When this parameter was set to 1, parameters No. 3012 and No.

3019 must be set. If parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip to X0 signal, PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, axis-direction-specific manual feed interlock signal, and tool compensation write signal are assigned to X0000.







- 1282 -





assigned








#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6200 SKF SLS SK0 GSK





#5 SLS 0: The multi-step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals

are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.) 1: The multi-step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are

input.


- 1283 -

NOTE Skip signals (SKIP, SKIP to SKIP4) are enabled regardless of this

parameter. These signals can be disabled by setting the parameter IGX (No. 6201#4).

#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SPE IGX SEB


#1 SEB If the skip function is used, the positional deviation and the number of accumulated

pulses due to acceleration/deceleration at the time when the skip signal is turned on are: 0: Not considered. 1: Considered for compensation. The position where the skip signal is input is found by considering the positional deviation and the number of accumulated pulses due to actual acceleration/deceleration at the time when the skip signal is turned on.


#7 SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.


Parameter IGX

(No.6201#4)

GSK (No.6200

#0)

SPE (No.6201

#7)

Skip signal SKIPP

Skip signal SKIP



Setting



- 1284 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1

[Input type]Parameter input [Data type] Bit path

1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8

Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip function. The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and commands. The setting of the bits have the following meaning : 0: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid. 1: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.

Multi-step skip function Command

Input signal

G31 G31P1 G04Q1

G31P2 G04Q2

G31P3 G04Q3

G31P4 G04Q4

G04

SKIP/HDI0 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1 SKIP2/HDI1 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2 SKIP3/HDI2 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 DS3 SKIP4/HDI3 1S4 2S4 3S4 4S4 DS4

SKIP5 1S5 2S5 3S5 4S5 DS5 SKIP6 1S6 2S6 3S6 4S6 DS6 SKIP7 1S7 2S7 3S7 4S7 DS7 SKIP8 1S8 2S8 3S8 4S8 DS8

NOTE HDI0 to HDI3 are high-speed skip signals. The same signal must not be specified in different paths at the

same time. When bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 is 1, the command to be skipped by the SKIPP signal can be selected by setting the following parameters.

Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006#6> Parameter Command skipped

When bit 0 (1S1) of parameter No. 6202 is set to 1 G31P1, G04Q1 When bit 0 (2S1) of parameter No. 6203 is set to 1 G31P2, G04Q2 When bit 0 (3S1) of parameter No. 6204 is set to 1 G31P3, G04Q3 When bit 0 (4S1) of parameter No. 6205 is set to 1 G31P4, G04Q4 When bit 6 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3, G04Q4


- 1285 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 SFN


#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1

(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.








(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G

code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled.


PS0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. Or, P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a multistage skip function option.

PS0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL SELECTED

In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed signal is selected in different paths.


- 1286 -

Note NOTE This function is enabled for axes not related to composite control.

15.3.4 Torque Limit Skip Function

Overview When the movement command following G31 P99 (or G31 P98) is executed with the servo motor torque limit*1 overridden, cutting feed similar to linear interpolation (G01) can be performed. When the servo motor torque reaches the torque limit (overridden servo motor torque limit) by pushing or the skip signal (including the high-speed skip signal) is input during the movement, the remaining movement commands are canceled and then the next block is executed. (The operation that executes the next block by canceling the remaining movement command is called skip operation later.) The servo motor torque limit can be overridden by: (1) Executing the torque limit override command for the PMC window. *1: The servo motor torque limit is automatically set according to the settings of the motor model.

Signal Torque limit reached signals TRQL1 to TRQL5 <Fn114.0 to Fn114.4>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Indicates that the torque limit has been reached. [Output cond.] Set to "1" when:

- The torque limit has been reached. Set to "0" when: - The torque limit has not been reached. Indicates the signal for each axis. The value at the end of a signal name indicates the number of each control axis.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn114 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1803 TQA TQI


#0 TQI Within a torque limit, an in-position check is:

0: Made. 1: Not made.

#1 TQA Within a torque limit, an excessive stop-time/move-time error is: 0: Checked. 1: Not checked.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG



- 1287 -




NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters No. 3012 and No.

3019. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, and the measurement position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.










assigned






- 1288 -




#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6200 SKF HSS SK0 GSK





#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

(The conventional skip signal is used.) 1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SPE IGX TSE


#2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) is used, the skip position held in a

system variable (#5061 to #5068) is: 0: Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the

servo system. 1: Position that does not reflect the delay incurred by the servo system.


- 1289 -

Position during skip operation

Current position of CNC

Machine position Error amount

Position in consideration of delay

Position without consideration of delay

Origin of the coordinate system Stop point


#7 SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.


Parameter IGX

(No.6201#4)

GSK (No.6200

#0)

SPE (No.6201

#7)

Skip signal SKIPP

Skip signal SKIP



Setting


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 SFN SFP


#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is:

0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.




- 1290 -

#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.



6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)


(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.


description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.






(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 65535

The torque limit skip arrival signal is ignored for a set period of time. If G31P98 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1. If G31P99 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.


- 1291 -

However, if a skip signal is input, skip operation is performed, regardless of the period of time set in this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6286 TQO


#0 TQO The torque limit override function is:

0: Disabled. (Override of 100%) 1: Enabled.

NOTE Before the torque limit skip function can be used, this parameter

must be set to 1.

6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 327670

This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque limit skip is specified. When the actual positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation limit, the alarm (SV0004) is issued and an immediate stop takes place.

Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code

(such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled.

- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip command (G31P98 or P99). Specify a torque limit override in the PMC window.

PS0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in the torque limit switch instruction (G31P98/P99).

SV0004 EXCESS ERROR (G31) The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip command operation exceeded the limit value of the parameter No.6287.

Note


Reference item

Manual name Item name OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Torque limit skip


- 1292 -

15.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT

T

15.4.1 Input of tool offset value measured (T Series)

Overview This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard. First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or cross direction manually. When the position record signal is turned “1” (prepare a button on the machine operator’s panel) on completion of the cutting, the workpiece coordinate value of X axis(X axis of the basic three axes) and Z axis(Z axis of the basic three axes) at that time is recorded in the CNC. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diameter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or measure the distance from the standard face if the cutting was on the facing. (The reference face is made as Z = 0.) When the measured value is entered on the offset value display screen, NC inputs the difference between the input measured value and the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the offset number. If you release the tool without moving the tool in the axis along which an offset value is entered but moves the tool along the other axis, an offset value can be set without using the position record signal. The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of directly inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used when the coordinate system planned in the program does not match with the coordinate system actually set. The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a difference of using the standard tool on the work shift screen.

Signal Position record signal PRC <G040.6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal is prepared for the function of input of offset value measured.

It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the tool for tentative cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece, input the measured value by the specified manual operation. The difference is then stored as the specified tool compensation value.

[Operation] The control unit stores the current position along X and Z axes when the signal turns to “1”.

CAUTION

To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn040 PRC

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRC

5005



- 1293 -

#2 PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift value. 0: Not use a PRC signal 1: Uses a PRC signal


OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Setting and displaying data

15.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series)

Overview When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value can be automatically settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. The workpiece coordinate system shift amount can also be automatically set.

Explanation - Touch sensor

Either of the following two cases may be selected depending on parameter setting. 1) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 0 The touch sensor has two direction–specific contact faces for each axis, thus outputting four signals

(+MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT1, and –MIT2) when contact is detected. 2) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 1 A touch sensor based on one contact input outputs one signal (+MIT1) when the one–contact input

detects contact. So, which of directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined, and feeding in the corresponding axis direction is disabled.

+Z

Z axis＋contact face (+MIT2)

Z axis －contact face (-MIT2)

X axis －contact face(-MIT1)

X axis ＋contact face(+MIT1)

+X

Touch Sensor

- Setting tool offset value

Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference position. In advance, set the distance from this point to the measuring position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value, using parameter No. 5015 to 5018. Select the tool whose offset value is to be measured, and bring it to touch the sensor, receiving a contact detection signal (tool compensation value write signal). The mechanical coordinate value is the distance from the tool nose position of the measuring tool at the mechanical reference (home) position to the measuring position; set the difference between this value and the reference value (parameter setting) into the tool offset value memory as the tool geometry offset value. The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0. (Tool offset value to be set) = (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write signal has become “1”) –

(Reference value (parameter value) corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal) The tool offset value to be set differs according to the method of determining the measuring reference position.


- 1294 -

- If touch sensor contact detection is based on a one-contact input If touch sensor contact detection is based on a one–contact input (the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 1), when a contact detected signal (tool compensation amount write signal +MIT1) is received from the touch sensor, which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined according to several pulses stored as a result of the axis movement that was made before the signal reception. So the number of interpolation cycles related to the stored pulses must previously be set in parameter No. 5021.Once which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined, the corresponding axis direction is subjected to axis interlock to stop feeding, and the obtained tool compensation amount is stored in tool compensation memory. If the directions of stored pulses are not unified, or no pulse has been stored, for example, because the servo power has been shut off (servo off) or no axis movement occurred, an alarm (PS5195) is issued. A PS alarm is issued also if the tool moves along two axes (X–axis and Z–axis) simultaneously; move the tool along one axis at a time. If a PS alarm is issued, no tool compensation amount will be set up, resulting in the four directions (two axes) being subjected to interlock.

NOTE 1 Pulse storage for automatic decision is carried out in the manual mode while the

GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal is 1. Stored pulses are lost if: a. The manual mode is exited, b. The GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal

becomes 0, c. A contact detected signal is received from the touch sensor, resulting in a tool

compensation amount being set or an alarm (PS5195) being issued, d. The servo power becomes off (resulting in the stored pulses for the related

axis being lost), or e. Axis movement occurs (resulting in the stored pulses for the other axis being

lost). 2 Axis interlock that has occurred for the axis direction identified by

parameter–based automatic decision and two–axis, four–direction interlock that has occurred because of a PS alarm being issued are canceled when the manual mode is exited or the GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation mount write mode select) signal becomes 0.

A reset does not cancel interlock.

- Determination of the axis movement direction in four-contact input Set bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 to 0 and bit 4 (TSD) of parameter No. 5009 to 1 to enable the input signals from the touch sensor and the movement direction of an axis to be monitored during measurement in the tool compensation write mode. When the measurement is determined to be invalid, the moving axis is interlocked and an alarm (PS5195) occurs.

• Conditions under which measurement is determined to be invalid The movement direction of an axis and the tool compensation write signals (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1,

-MIT2) are monitored in the tool compensation write mode (GOQSM<G039.7>=1). In the following case, the operation is determined to be invalid, the axis is interlocked, and an alarm (PS5195) occurs.

(1) A tool compensation write signal whose direction did not match the axis was input during

measurement. (2) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input while the X- and Z-axes moved together.


- 1295 -

(3) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input without the axis being moved. (4) The movement direction of the axis was not constant when the movement direction of the axis was

determined (*1). (*1) When the axis moves in one direction of one axis by the compensation cycle count set in parameter

No. 5021, the axis is assumed to move in the direction.

Examples of operations determined to be invalid

• Interlock applied when measurement is invalid When measurement is determined to be invalid, movement only in the direction opposite to the

previous movement direction is allowed. That is, the directions other than the direction opposite to the previous movement direction are interlocked.

Examples of interlock

(1) When a tool compensation write signal other than Z-axis/contact surface (-MIT2) is input during movement in the minus direction of the Z-axis, the minus direction of the Z-axis and the plus and minus directions of the X-axis are interlocked.

(2) When any of tool compensation write signals is input during movement in the plus direction of the X-axis and the minus direction of the Z-axis, the plus directions of the X-axis and the minus direction of the Z-axis are interlocked.

(3) When any of tool compensation write signals is input without axis movement, the four directions of the two axes are interlocked.

Interlock direction in example (1)

+z

+x

Z axis + contact face

( +MIT2 )

X axis - contact face( -MIT1 )

Z axis - contact face( -MIT2 )

X axis + contact face( +MIT1 )

Valid operation

Invalid operation (1) Invalid operation (2)

+z

+x -X

+Z -Z

+X

: Movable

: Interlock (Unmovable)

Z axis - contact face ( -MIT2 )


- 1296 -

The release interlock applied because measurement is determined to be invalid, keep the tool away from the touch sensor (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1, -MIT2 = 0) and reset the CNC. If the tool is not kept away from the touch sensor, resetting the CNC does not release interlock. In conditions (3) and (4) in which measurement is determined to be invalid, no axis can be moved because the four directions of the two axes are interlocked. In such a case, cancel the tool compensation write mode and reset the CNC to release the interlock. To cancel the tool compensation write mode, set the tool compensation write mode signal is to 0 or select the MDI mode, MEM mode, or EDIT mode. A reset releases interlock and an alarm. Even if another tool compensation write signal (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1, or -MIT2) is input before the interlock or alarm is released, the signal is ignored.

Example 1 The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the measuring tool nose tip position can be set as the tool offset value. Define the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero position) as the measuring reference position, then set the distances Xp, Zp, Xm, Zm, from the measuring reference position to the contact faces of the sensor in parameters.

Xp: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5015) Xm: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (–) contact face (parameter No.5016) Zp: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5017) Zm: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (–) contact face (parameter No.5018) Xt: X-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor

(X-axis machine coordinate value) Zt: Z-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor

(Z-axis machine coordinate value) (when Xt and Zt touch the X-axis (–) contact face and Z-axis (–) contact face in the above figure) OFSx: Tool offset value to be set (X-axis): OFSx = Xt - Xm OFSz: Tool offset value to be set (Z-axis): OFSz = Zt - Zm

+X

+Z

(0,0)

(0,0)X axis –contact face

Z axis –contact face

Zm

Zp

Zt

OFSx

OFSz

Xm

Xp

Xt

Measuring reference position (reference tool nose position at the mechanical reference position)

Measuring tool nose position at the mechanical reference position

When the reference tool nose tip position is set as the measuring reference position

Example 2

The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary zero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between the imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference point can be set as the tool offset value of the measuring tool, by setting the distances from the imaginary zero point to the respective contact faces in parameters.


- 1297 -

+X Measuring tool nose position at the mechanical reference position

(0,0)

Zt

Zm

ZpXp

Xm OFSx

OFSZ

Xt

+Z

Machine zero point

Measuring reference position (Imaginary zero point)

When the imaginary zero position is set as the measuring reference position

- Setting the workpiece coordinate system shift amount

The workpiece coordinate system shift amount for the Z-axis can be set as follows: Bring the tool to touch the workpiece end face. Subtract the tool geometry offset value of the tool (the value shifted in the coordinate system by the tool geometry offset) from the machine coordinate value (the distance from the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero point) to the workpiece end face).The result is set as the workpiece coordinate system shift value. (Z axis workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set(EXOFSz) )= (Z axis tool geometry offset value of the corresponding tool (OFSz)) –

(Z axis machine coordinate value(Zt)) Using the above methods, the workpiece coordinate system is set with the workpiece end face (the contact point of the sensor) specified as the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of the Z-axis.

(0,0) Measuring tool nose position at the mechanical machineposition

Machine zero point

Workpiece coordinate System zero point (programmed zero point)

+Z -EXOFSz

OFSx

OFSz

Zt+X

EXOFSz : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set

OFSz : Tool geometry offset value

Zt : Mechanical coordinate value (Distance to the workpiece end face)

Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount To deviate the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system from the workpiece end face, such as by adding a cutting allowance, use the incremental input of the workpiece coordinate system shift amount in MDI operation. By setting the distance from the programmed zero point to the workpiece end face with a sign, the numeric value input is added to the preset amount.


- 1298 -

Cutting allowance

Imaginary zero point

Workpiece coordinate system

(programmed zero point)

EXOFSz(NEW)

+X

W

+Z

EXOFSz(OLD) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount being set by the function of input of tool offset value measured B W : Cutting allowance (incremental input value) EXOFSz(NEW) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount after adding the cutting allowance

EXOFSz(OLD)

zero point

Setting of cutting allowance

- Basic procedure to set tool offset value

(1) Execute manual reference position return. By executing manual reference position return, a machine coordinate system is established. The tool offset value is computed on the machine coordinate system. (2) Select manual handle mode or manual continuous feed mode and set the tool compensation value

write mode select signal GOQSM to “1”. The display is automatically changed to the tool offset screen (geometry), and the “OFST” indicator starts blinking in the status indication area at the bottom of the screen, which indicates that the tool compensation value writing mode is ready.

NOTE After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection)

signal until the GOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0. (3) Select a tool to be measured. (4) When the cursor does not coincide with the tool offset number desired to be set, move the cursor to

the desired offset number using the page key and cursor key. The cursor can also be coincided with the tool offset number desired to be set automatically by the

tool offset number input signals (when parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1). In this case, the position of the cursor cannot be changed on the tool compensation screen using page

keys or cursor keys. (5) Near the tool to the sensor by manual operation. (6) Place the tool edge to a contacting surface of the sensor by manual handle feed. Bring the tool edge in contact with the sensor. This causes the tool compensation value writing

signals to input to be CNC. The following tool compensation amount write signals are set up according to the setting of the TS1

parameter (bit 3 of No. 5004). When the parameter is 0: +MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT2 When the parameter is 1: +MIT1 only The tool compensation value writing signal is set to “1”, and the :

i) The axis is interlocked in this direction and its feed is stopped. ii) The tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memory (tool geometry offset value) which

corresponds to the offset number shown by the cursor is set up. (7) For both X-axis and Z-axis, their offset values are set by operations (5) and (6). (8) Repeat operations (3) to (7) for all necessary tools. (9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to “0”. The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “OFST” indicator light goes off.


- 1299 -

- Basic procedure to set workpiece coordinate shift value (1) Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance. (2) Execute manual reference position return. By executing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate system is established. The workpiece coordinate system shift amount is computed based on the machine coordinate system

of the tool. (3) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount writing mode select signal WOQSM to “1”. The display automatically switches to the workpiece shifting screen, the “WFST” indicator starts

blinking at the status indicator area in the bottom of the screen, which indicates that the workpiece coordinate system shift amount writing mode is ready.

NOTE After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection)

signal until the WOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0. (4) Select a tool to be measured. (5) Check tool offset numbers. The tool offset number corresponding to the tool required for measurement, shall be set in the

parameter (No.5020) in advance. The tool offset number can also be set automatically by setting the tool offset number input signal

(with parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1). (6) Manually approach the tool to an end face of the workpiece. (7) Place the tool edge to the end face (sensor) of the workpiece using manual handle feed. When the tool edge contacts the end face of the workpiece, input the workpiece coordinate system

shift amount signal WOSET. The workpiece coordinate system shift amount on the Z–axis is automatically set. (8) Release the tool. (9) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode select signal WOQSM to “0”. The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “WSFT” indicator light goes off.

Limitation This function cannot be used with the following functions. • Composite control (T series (2-path control)) • Mirror image for double turret (T series)

Signal Tool offset write mode select signal GOQSM<Gn039.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the mode for writing tool compensation [Operation] When this signal is turned “1” in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing tool

compensation is selected. The control unit then automatically switches the screen on the display to the tool geometry compensation screen and blinks the “OFST” status display at the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing tool compensation.

Tool offset write signal

(Path 1) +MIT1#1, +MIT2#1<X004.2, 4> -MIT1#1, -MIT2#1<X004.3, 5> (Path 2) +MIT1#2, +MIT2#2<X013.2, 4>-MIT1#2, -MIT2#2<X013.3, 5>

[Classification] Input signal


- 1300 -

[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is set to “1”, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool compensation memory.

[Operation] When these signals are turned “1” during tool offset write mode, the control unit operates as follows: - Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.5004 is set to 0

+MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the X-axis.

–MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the X-axis.

+MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the Z-axis.

–MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the Z-axis.

If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.5004 is set to 1 +MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be

subjected to interlock. –MIT1 : Not used +MIT2 : Not used –MIT2 : Not used

- When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned “1”, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the result in tool compensation memory.

NOTE 1 This signal is used as the manual feed interlock signal in each axis

direction. 2 This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No.

5009 is 0. 3 In case of bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No.3008=1, the address

assigned by parameter No.3019 is used

Tool offset write signal +MIT1 to +MIT2 <Gn132.0 to 1>, -MIT1 to -MIT2 <Gn134.0 to 1>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during

manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is set to “1”, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool compensation memory.

[Operation] When these signals are turned “1”, the control unit operates as follows: - Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. When bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is 0 and the X-axis is assumed to be the

first axis and the Z-axis to be the second axis +MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along

the X-axis. –MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along

the X-axis. +MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along

the Z-axis.


- 1301 -

–MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the Z-axis.

If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.5004 is set to 1 +MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be

subjected to interlock. –MIT1 : Not used +MIT2 : Not used –MIT2 : Not used

- When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned “1”, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the result in tool compensation memory.

NOTE This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No.

5009 is 1.

Tool offset number select signals OFN0 to OFN5 <Gn039.0 to 5> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the tool offset number. [Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is automatically

positioned on the tool geometry compensation number selected by these signals. A tool offset number is specified by a 6–bit binary number. Numbers 0 to 63 correspond to the compensation number 1 to 64.

NOTE This signal is available only when parameter QNI (No.5005#5) =1.

Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal

WOQSM<Gn039.6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. [Operation] When this signal is turned to “1” in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing the

shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system is selected. The control unit then automatically switches the screen displayed to the WORK SHIFT screen and blinks the “OFST” status display at the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. However, this is not performed when the mode for writing tool compensation values is selected.

Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal WOSET<Gn040.7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Automatically calculates and sets the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. [Operation] When this signal turns to “1” in the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece

coordinate system, it triggers the automatic calculation and setting of the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.


- 1302 -

Signal address (Path 1)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X004 -MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 -MIT1#1 +MIT1#1

SKIP5#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 SKIP2#1

(Path 2) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

X013 -MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 -MIT1#2 +MIT1#2 SKIP5#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2

WARNING

Since the same addresses are used for both +MIT1, MIT1,+MIT2, –MIT2 and skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP5 (multi–step skip), be careful when using these two signal types.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn040 WOSET

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn132 +MIT2 +MIT1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn134 -MIT2 -MIT1

Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3003 DIT


#3 DIT Interlock for each axis direction

0: Enabled 1: Disabled

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG




#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is 0: Fixed at the address 1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address


- 1303 -

NOTE If this parameter is set to 1, parameters No.3012 and No.3019 must

be set. if No.3012,No.3019 is set to 0,skip signal, skip signal for PMC axis control, and measurement position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.


assigned





Example 1. In case of No.3012=5, No.3019=6 If parameter XSG(No.3008#2) is set to 1, skip signal for PMC axis control , measurement position arrival signal, tool offset write signal are assigned to X0006. skip signal is assigned to X0005.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X006 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1 (T series)

Example 2. In case of No.3012=5, No.3019=5

If parameter XSG(No.3008#2) is set to 1, skip signal for PMC axis control , measurement position arrival signal, tool offset write signal, skip signal is assigned to X0005.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X005 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1

SKIP

SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1

SKIP SKIP6

SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

(M series)


set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5004 TS1



- 1304 -

#3 TS1 For touch sensor contact detection with the function for direct input of offset value measured B: 0: Four-contact input is used. 1: One-contact input is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 QNI


#5 QNI With the tool length measurement function, a tool compensation number is selected by:

0: Operation through the MDI panel by the operator (selection based on cursor operation).

1: Signal input from the PMG.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5009 TSD GSC




#0 GSC When the function for direct input of offset value measured B is used, an offset write input signal is input from: 0: Machine side 1: PMC side When the interlock function for each axis direction is enabled (when bit 3 (DIT) of parameter No. 3003 is set to 0), switching can also be made between input from the machine side and input from PMC side for the interlock function for each axis direction.

#4 TSD In the function for direct input of offset value measured B, the movement direction determination specifications: 0: Do not apply. 1: Apply. This parameter is valid when four-contact input is used (bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 0).

5015 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1P)

5016 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1M)

5017 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1P)

5018 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1M)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))


- 1305 -

This parameter is related to the function for direct input of offset value measured B. Set the distance (signed) from a measurement reference position to each contact surface of a sensor. For a diameter specification axis, set a diameter value. When arbitrary angular axis control is performed, set the distance in the Cartesian coordinate system.

←Z-axis - contact surface

↑ X-axis + contact surface

X1m X-axis - contact surface ↓

○Measurement reference position

X1p

+X Z1m

Z1p+Z

Z-axis + contact surface→

5020 Tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B


Set a tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B (when a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is set). (Set the tool offset number corresponding to a tool under measurement beforehand.) This parameter is valid when automatic tool offset number selection is not performed (when bit 5 (QNI) of parameter No. 5005 is set to 0).

5021 Number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the tool is about to touch the touch sensor

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] None [Valid data range] 0 to 8

When a touch sensor of one-point input or the axis movement direction in four-contact input is used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B, set the number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the manually operated tool is about to touch the touch sensor. When 0 is set, the specification of the maximum value 8 is assumed.

NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 or

bit4(TSD) of parameter No.5009 is set to 1.


- 1306 -

Alarm and message

Number Message Description PS5195 DIRECTION CAN NOT BE

JUDGED Measurement is invalid in the tool compensation measurement value direct input B function. [For 1-contact input]

1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant. - The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode. - The servo power is off. - Pulse directions are diverse.

2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis). [For the movement direction discrimination specification]

1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant. - The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode. - The servo power is off. - Pulse directions are diverse.

2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis). 3. The direction indicated by the tool compensation write signal does not

match the movement direction of the axis.


OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Setting and displaying data

15.4.3 Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input

Overview Enter the offset value by which the actual measurement value is assumed to be the specified value as the workpiece origin offset value where the cursor is located by directly inputting the measured deviation, considered during programming, between the workpiece coordinate system and the actual coordinate system.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1015 WIC


#6 WIC Workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is:

0: (M series) Performed without considering the external workpiece origin offset value. (T series) Valid only in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system. 1: (M series) Performed considering the external workpiece origin offset value. (T series) Valid in all coordinate systems.

NOTE In the T series, if this parameter bit is set to 0, workpiece origin

offset measurement value direct input is enabled only in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system or an external workpiece coordinate system. If an attempt is made to perform workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input in a workpiece coordinate system other than these workpiece coordinate systems, warning "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed.


- 1307 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1207 WOL


#0 WOL The calculation method for workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is as

follows: 0: In a machine that requires that the difference from the reference tool be set as the

tool length compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set with the reference tool mounted on the machine. (The tool length of the reference tool is assumed to be 0.)

1: In a machine that requires that the tool length itself be set as the tool length compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set considering the tool length when the tool length compensation for the mounted tool is enabled.

NOTE The setting of this parameter is valid only when the system used is

the M series and bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104 is set to 1. If this parameter is set to 1 in other than the above conditions, the system operates as if this parameter bit were set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3104

DAL


#6 DAL Absolute position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.

NOTE In T series, whether to exclude a tool offset when displaying the

absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of parameter No. 3129.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

DAP 3129


#1 DAP For absolute position display:

0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.


- 1308 -

NOTE In M series, whether to exclude the tool length offset when

displaying the absolute position is determined according to the setting of bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

11278 WMC




#0 WMC In the "direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured", the workpiece origin

offset value is 0: calculated based on the absolute coordinate value. Workpiece origin offset value = Absolute coordinate value before measurement - Measured value + Selected workpiece origin offset value + External workpiece origin offset value 1: calculated based on the machine coordinate value. (FS0i-C compatible specification) Workpiece origin offset value = Machine coordinate value - Measured value


OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input

B-64303EN-1/02 16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

- 1309 -

16 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Chapter 16, "PMC CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 16.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................1309 16.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT...........................................................................................................1377 16.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT......................................................1390 16.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH.........................................................................1393 16.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT..............................................................................................................1395 16.6 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL.......................................................................................................1400

16.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL

16.1.1 PMC Axis Control

Overview The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC. An axis can be controlled by signals alone without using an NC program. For example, by specifying an amount of travel, feedrate, and so forth from the PMC, a movement can be made along an axis independently of other axes operated under CNC control. This enables the control of turrets, pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of the CNC. Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input signal provided for that particular axis.

Table 16.1.1 (a) Commands that can be executed by PMC axis control Rapid traverse Cutting feed - feed per minute Cutting feed - feed per revolution Skip -- feed per minute Dwell Reference position return Continuous feed 1st to 4th reference position return External pulse synchronization - Position code External pulse synchronization - 1st to 3rd manual handle Feedrate control Torque control Auxiliary function, Auxiliary function 2, Auxiliary function 3 Selection of the machine coordinate system Cutting feed - sec/block

Explanation

Under PMC axis control, various types of control are exercised using signals. To specify operation with the commands (see Table 16.1.1 (a)) that can be executed by PMC axis control, on the PMC side, four groups of input/output signals are provided for each path: group A, group B, group C, and group D. Each of these groups of input/output signals used with PMC axis control serves as the unit of PMC axis control. Which axis is to be controlled by each group must be set in parameter No. 8010 beforehand. One group may be able to be assigned to multiple axes so that the same operation can be performed on the multiple axes. (Supplement 2)

16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64303EN-1/02

- 1310 -

By specifying multiple groups at the same time, multiple axes can be controlled independently. (Supplement 3)

PMC CNC

Group B command

Group A command

Group C command

Group D command

Group B

Group A

Group C

DI / DO

Group D

α axis control

β axis control

γ axis control

δ axis control

ε axis control

(Supplement 1) The relationships between groups and axes are set in parameter No. 8010. (Supplement 2) Multiple axes can be specified as with group C. (Supplement 3) Group A and group B can be specified independently.

Fig.16.1.1 (a) Concept of PMC axis control

The addresses of the signals are shown in Table 16.1.1 (b) "Allocation of group-by-group signals" below.

Table 16.1.1 (b) Allocation of group-by-group signals Group-by-group signal Input signal address Output signal address

Group A G142 to G149, G150.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F130 to F132, F142, F129.5.7 Group B G154 to G161, G162.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F133 to F135, F145, F129.5.7 Group C G166 to G173, G174.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F136 to F138, F148, F129.5.7 Group D G178 to G185, G186.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F139 to F141, F151, F129.5.7

The names of input/output signals related to PMC axis control include lowercase letter "g". An example is "g" of axis control read signal EBUFg (described later). Signal EBUFg is not present, but signals EBUFA, EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD, in which "g" is replaced with A, B, C, and D, are present actually. These signals belong to group A, group B, group C, and group D. That is, EBUFg is the collective name of EBUFA, EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD.

Basic procedure (1) Set parameter No. 8010 for each axis to specify which group (A, B, C, or D) to select.

To synchronize multiple axes through axis movement in one group, set the same conditions for the parameter settings (such as the rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time constant, diameter/radius, straight line axis/rotation axis) related to the feedrate.

(2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection signal (EAX1 to EAX5), that corresponds to an axis to be controlled, to 1.

(3) Determine the operation. The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type of operation. The axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g) specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data.

These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg (described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamount to one block executed during CNC-controlled automatic operation. These signals may be collectively called the axis control block data signals. (Refer to Table 16.1.1 (c), “List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control”.)


- 1311 -

Table 16.1.1 (c) List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control Generic name Signal name Symbol Data type

Block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg Bit Axis control command signal EC0g to EC6g Byte Axis control feedrate signal EIF0g to EIF15g Word

Axis control block data signals

Axis control data signal EID0g to EID31g 2-word (4) When the data governing a complete operation (one block) is determined, reverse the logical state of

the axis control command read signal EBUFg (i.e., from "0" to "1" or vice versa). Note that, for this to occur, axis control command read completion signal EBSYg must be in the same logical state as EBUFg.

(5) The CNC is capable of storing axis control functions from the PMC in its buffer so that multiple operations can be performed in series, under the control of the PMC. This allows the CNC to accept a new command block from the PMC during the execution of another block if the buffer has free space.

The Fig. 16.1.1 (b), "Buffering under PMC axis control" illustrates an example in which command [1] is being executed, commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers, and command [4] has been issued (the axis control block data signal is set).

Block 1

Block 2

Block 3

Block 4

Block 5

Block n

:

PMC Commands Setting of the axis control block data signal CNC's buffers

[1]

[2]

[3]

Executing buffer

:

Waiting buffer

Input buffer [4] Command [1]

Command [2]

Command [3]

Command [4]

Command [5]

Fig. 16.1.1 (b) Buffering under PMC axis control

When the execution of command [1] is completed: Command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer; Command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer; and Command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block (axis control block data

signal). After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue command [5] to the CNC (the axis control block data signal is set). The timing chart for the command operation is shown below. (Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation")


- 1312 -

Command block [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] (Input) EBUFg (Input) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)Not specifiable EBSYg

(Output)

Input buffer

[3] [4]

Waiting buffer [2] [3]

Executing buffer [1] [2]

Beginning of execution

End of execution

Beginning of execution

Table 16.1.1 (d) Timing chart of command operation

(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are in different logical states). In interval (4), the buffer is in the "full" state. The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR of the axis control command read signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output from the CNC. (Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control")

Table 16.1.1 (e) Buffering status in PMC axis control

EBUFg EBSYg Exclusive OR (XOR) CNC buffer status

0 0 1 1

0 The previous block has already been read into the CNC buffer. The PMC can issue the next block.

0 1

1 0 1

The previous block has not yet been read completely. It is just being read or waiting for the CNC buffer to become available. Do not issue the next block, nor reverse the logical state of EBUFg. Reversing the EBUFg state invalidates any block that has been already issued.

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued. When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 to "0".

Before setting these signals to "0", however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC's input, waiting, and executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to "0" while a block is being executed, or while a block remains in any of these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This alarm PS0139 suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks stored in the input and waiting buffers.

To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks remaining in the input or waiting buffer, check that control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to "0".

For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those controlling turrets, pallets, and ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to EAX5 signals are always set to "1". There is no need to set these signals to "0" after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC. When all command blocks have been executed (there are no blocks remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops execution.


- 1313 -

(6) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 are set from "1" to "0", control is returned to the CNC.

Command

Overview of commands As described in step (3) in the basic procedure, one PMC axis control command block is represented by the axis control block data signals. PMC axis control enables the commands indicated in Table 16.1.1 (f), “Command list” to be specified. In Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list": "Command" represents the axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g). "Data 1" represents the axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g). "Data 2" represents the axis control data signals (EID0g to EID31g).

Table 16.1.1 (f) Command list No. Command Operation Data 1 Data 2 Description

(1) 00h Rapid traverse Rapid

traverse rate (NOTE)

Total moving distance

The same operation as “G00” of the CNC is performed.

(2) 01h Cutting feed - feed per

minute Cutting feedrate


The same operation as “G94 G01” of the CNC is performed.

(3) 02h Cutting feed - feed per

revolution Feedrate per

revolution Total moving

distance The same operation as “G95 G01” of the CNC is performed.

(4) 03h Skip - feed per minute Cutting feedrate


The same operation as “G31 G01” of the CNC is performed.

(5) 04h Dwell --- Dwell time The same operation as “G04” of the CNC is performed.

(6) 05h Reference position

return --- ---

After a rapid traverse movement is made in the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006, the same operation as manual reference position return of the CNC is performed.

(7) 06h Continuous feed Continuous

feedrate Feed direction(EID31g only)

A continuous feed operation is performed along a controlled axis in a certain direction. The same operation as continuous feed in the JOG mode of the CNC is performed.

(8) 07h First reference position

return

Rapid traverse rate

(NOTE) ---

The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with “G28” of the CNC is performed.

(9) 08h Second reference

position return

Rapid traverse rate

(NOTE) ---

The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with “G30 P2” of the CNC is performed.

(10) 09h Third reference position return

Rapid traverse rate

(NOTE) ---

The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with ”G30 P3” of the CNC is performed.

(11) 0Ah Fourth reference position return

Rapid traverse rate

(NOTE) ---

The same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with G30 P4” the CNC is performed.

(12) 0Bh External pulse

synchronization - position coder

Pulse weight --- Synchronous operation with the position coder is performed.


- 1314 -

No. Command Operation Data 1 Data 2 Description

(13) 0Dh External pulse

synchronization - first manual handle

Pulse weight --- Synchronous operation with the first manual handle is performed.

(14) 0Eh External pulse

synchronization - second manual handle

Pulse weight --- Synchronous operation with the second manual handle is performed.

(15) 0Fh External pulse

synchronization - third manual handle

Pulse weight --- Synchronous operation with the third manual handle is performed.

(16) 10h Speed command

Speed specified by

speed command

--- Continuous feed operation based on a speed command is performed.

(17) 11h Torque control Maximum feedrate

Torque data Continuous feed operation based on torque control is performed.

(18) 12h Auxiliary function 1 --- Auxiliary

function codeThe same operation as an auxiliary function of the CNC is performed.





(21) 20h Machine coordinate

system selection

Rapid traverse rate

(NOTE)

Machine coordinate

The same operation as “G53” of the CNC is performed.

(22) 21h Cutting feed -

sec/block specification Cutting feed

time Total moving

distance Cutting feed is performed according to a specified period of time.

NOTE The rapid traverse rate is valid only when bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is

set to 1.

Details of commands A detailed description of each command is provided below. The parenthesized number following each command title represents the value of the axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g.

(1) Rapid traverse ( 00h ) This command performs the same operation as "G00" of the CNC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Rapid traverse command (00h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance

Rapid traverse rate With bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002, whether the same rapid traverse rate as set in the parameter (No. 1420) of the CNC is used or the feedrate of the PMC axis interface set by EIF0g to EIF15g is used independently of the CNC can be chosen. When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1, set a rapid traverse rate with a binary code.


- 1315 -

[Unit of data] Unit of data IS-A to IS-C

Unit

Metric machine 1 mm/min Linear axis Inch machine 0.1 inch/min

Rotation axis 1 deg/min

NOTE When bit 0 (CMI) of parameter No. 11850 is 0, the rapid traverse rate set by

EIF0g to EIF15g is always represented in millimeters.

[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 Total moving distance Set an incremental travel amount in the input system unit of the axis with a binary code.

[Unit of data] Least input increment of the applied axis (Refer to the standard parameter setting table (A))

[Valid data range]

IS-A IS-B to IS-C -99999999 to 99999999 (8-digit) -999999999 to 999999999 (9-digit)

For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 (to use the PMC axis interface for rapid traverse rate selection), the rapid traverse rate unit is 1 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 0; the rapid traverse rate unit is 10 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 1. With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.

Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Dry run signal Manual rapid traverse selection signal

0 DRN<G046.7> RT<G019.7> 1 EDRN<G150.7> ERT<G150.6>

When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to 1, the feedrate is as indicated below.

When rapid traverse is specified Manual rapid traverse selection signal (RTorERT) RDE(No.8001#3)=0 RDE(No.8001#3)=1

0 Rapid traverse Dry run feedrate ×*JV (NOTE) 1 Rapid traverse Rapid traverse

NOTE When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate

override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied. Related parameters Parameter DIAx (No.1006#3) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3)


- 1316 -

Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Parameter CDI (No.8005#1) Parameter R10 (No.8005#2) Related signals Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7> Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6> Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>

(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute ( 01h ) This command performs the same operation as “G94 G01” of the CNC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - feed minute (01h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feedrate EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance

Cutting feed rate Set a feedrate along the axis with a binary code. A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002. When bit 4 (EFD) of parameter No. 8006 is set to 1, the unit of feedrate data increases by a factor of 100. Moreover, the feedrate unit can be changed using a combination of bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 and bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002.

[Unit of data] When the parameter F10 (No.8002#3) is set to 0. Unit of data IS-A IS-B IS-C

Unit

Metric input 10 1 0.1 mm/min Linear axis Inch input 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch/min

Rotation axis 10 1 0.1 deg/min When the parameter F10 (No.8002#3) is set to 1.

Unit of data IS-A IS-B IS-C

Unit

Metric input 100 10 1 mm/min Linear axis Inch input 1 0.1 0.01 inch/min

Rotation axis 100 10 1 deg/min


CAUTION 1 When 0 is specified, the buffering state remains unchanged and no axis

movement takes place. In such a case, perform a reset operation with the reset signal ECLRg.

2 Clamping to the cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1430) is disabled. Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.


- 1317 -

With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.

Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Dry run signal Manual rapid traverse selection signal 0 DRN<G046.7> RT<G019.7> 1 EDRN<G150.7> ERT<G150.6>

When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to 1, the feedrate is as indicated below. Unlike rapid traverse, the feedrate does not depend on the value of bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001.

Manual rapid traverse selection signal (RT / ERT) When cutting feed is specified 0 Dry run speed × *JV (Note) 1 Cutting feed

NOTE When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate

override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied. Related parameters Parameter DIAx (No.1006#3) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter F10 (No.8002#3) Parameter PF1 (No.8002#4) Parameter PF2 (No.8002#5) Parameter CDI (No.8005#1) Parameter EFD (No.8006#4) Related signals Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7> Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6> Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>

(3) Cutting feed - feed per revolution ( 02h ) This command performs the same operation as "G95 G01" of the CNC. Set the amount of feed along the axis per spindle revolution. The feedrate per spindle revolution depends on whether the M series or T series is used. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - feed per revolution command (02h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Feedrate per revolution EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance

Feedrate per revolution <For the T series>

[Unit of data] The table indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.


- 1318 -

Parameter FR2 FR1

Metric input (mm/rev)

Inch input (inch/rev)

Rotation axis (deg/rev)

1 1 0 0

0.0001 0.000001 0.0001

0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001 1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01


(However, data within the ranges indicated below must be specified.) Valid data range

IS-A to IS-C Unit

Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev Linear axis Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev

Rotation axis 0.0001 to 500.0000 deg/rev <For M series>

[Unit of data] The table indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.

Parameter FR2 FR1

Metric input (mm/rev)

Inch input (inch/rev)

Rotation axis (deg/rev)

1 1 0 0

0.01 0.0001 0.01

0 1 0.1 0.001 0.1 1 0 1 0.01 1


(However, data within the ranges indicated below must be specified.) Valid data range

IS-A to IS-C Unit

Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev Linear axis Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev

Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev

CAUTION 1 A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 or 100 by setting bit 6 (FR1)

and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002. 2 The feedrate is clamped to a value not exceeding the setting of parameter No.

8022. 3 Override is enabled. Dry run depends on the value of bit 3 (DRR) of parameter

No. 8005. 4 In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC

program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC axis once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.

Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute. Related parameters Parameter DRR(No.8005#3) Parameter (No.8022) Others follow the specifications of the cutting feed - feed per minute.


- 1319 -

Related signals Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute

(4) Skip - feed per minute ( 03h )

Skip This command performs the same operation as "G31 G01" of the CNC. High-speed skip is disabled. This skip signal is valid for an axis assigned to a path from path 1 to path 2. For an axis assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid. For an axis assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2(X013.6) is valid. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Skip command (03h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feedrate EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance

Cutting feedrate The specifications of the cutting feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) are applicable.

CAUTION Feedrate override and dry run are disabled.

Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.

(5) Dwell ( 04h ) This command performs the same operation as "G04" of the CNC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Dwell command (04h)

EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Dwell time Dwell time Set a dwell time with a binary code.

Valid data range Unit 1 to 9999999 ms

When diameter specification is selected with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value or diameter value for dwell operation can be specified using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. When the increment system is IS-C, the dwell time can be set to a least input increment of 0.1 msec with bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002. Related parameters Parameter DIAx (No.1006#3) Parameter DWE (No.8002#1) Parameter CDI (No.8005#1)


- 1320 -

(6) Reference position return ( 05h )

This command performs the same operation as manual reference position return of the CNC after rapid traverse in the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.

Reference position setting without DOG If bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005 for the function for setting the reference position without dogs is set for each axis, and reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on, a reference position return operation (positioning at a grid closest to the current position) can be performed without using the reference position return deceleration signal when a movement (positioning at a location near the reference position) is made in the direction set for each axis with the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) is specified. At the time of positioning at a location near the reference position, the machine needs to be moved in the reference position return direction at such a feedrate that the servo position deviation exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1836. The direction from a neighborhood point to a grid is set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006. If the reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) is issued after reference position establishment, a high-speed reference position return operation is performed, regardless of the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006. Specify this command after canceling tool radius compensation and tool length compensation. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Reference position return command (05h)

Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter ZMIx (No.1006#5) Parameter (No.1836)

(7) Continuous feed ( 06h ) This command performs a continuous feed operation along a controlled axis in a certain direction. This command performs the same operation as continuous feed in the JOG mode of the CNC. Continuous feed is performed until a reset. At this time, the remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is also set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0. Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Continuous feed command (06h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Continuous feedrate EID31g G149.7 Feed direction (specified with EID31g only)

Continuous feedrate A feedrate along an axis is set in the same way as for cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h). A feedrate change can be made during continuous feed.


- 1321 -

If a feedrate (EIF0g to EIF15g) is set, and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed, a new continuous feedrate is set. This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be checked when this command is specified usually. A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002. Moreover, a set feedrate can be increased by a factor of up to 200 with bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004.

CAUTION A maximum feedrate applicable when override is applied differs from a maximum

feedrate applicable when override is canceled. Maximum feedrate data in the two cases is indicated below.

Maximum feedrate (when an override of 254% is applied)

IS-B IS-C Metric input

(mm/min) Inch input (inch/min)

Metric input (mm/min)

Inch input (inch/min)

1 times 166458 1664.58 16645 166.45 10 times 1664589 16645.89 166458 1664.58

200 times (NOTE 1) 19660500 196605.00 1966050 19660.50 Maximum feedrate (when override is canceled)

IS-B IS-C Metric input

(mm/min) Inch input (inch/min)

Metric input (mm/min)


1 times 65535 655.35 6553 65.53 10 times 655350 6553.5 65535 655.35

200 times (NOTE 1) 13107000 131070 1310700 13107

NOTE 1 A feedrate increased by a factor of 200 is valid only when the continuous feed

command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is used. 2 The actual feedrate may not be displayed correctly, depending on the feedrate.

Feed direction Specify the direction of continuous feed with the signal EID31g. 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction The signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined. If the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed during axis movement, the feedrate (EIF0g to EIF15g) is changed to a newly set value. Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute. Related parameters Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter F10 (No.8002#3) Parameter JFM (No.8004#2) Related signals Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute


- 1322 -

(8) First reference position return ( 07h ) This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28" of the CNC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 First reference position return command (07h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. When the first reference position return command is specified, the manual rapid traverse rate set by parameter No. 1424 is used if manual reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on.

NOTE If bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1005 is set to enable the function for setting the reference position without dogs for each axis, and reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on, the alarm (PS0090) is issued when the first reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 07h) is specified.

Dry run operation follows the specifications of rapid traverse. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1240) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter (No.1424) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

(9) Second reference position return ( 08h ) This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P2" of the CNC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Second reference position return command (08h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1241) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1)


- 1323 -

Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

(10) Third reference position return ( 09h ) This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P3" of the CNC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Third reference position return command (09h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1242) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0) Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

(11) Fourth reference position return ( 0Ah ) This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P4" of the CNC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Fourth reference position return command (0Ah)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Related parameters Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1) Parameter (No.1243) Parameter JOV (No.1402#1) Parameter (No.1420) Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Parameter RDE (No.8001#3) Parameter RPD (No.8002#0)


- 1324 -

Related signals Same as for rapid traverse

(12) External pulse synchronization – position coder ( 0Bh ) This command performs a synchronous operation with the position coder. Using position coder of the serial spindle is also available. When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction. The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times. If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is also set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0. Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 External pulse synchronization - position coder command

(0Bh) EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Pulse weight

EID0g to EID7g G146 Spindle number of the serial spindle to be synchronized

(common to the system) (*1) *1: This data is set only during synchronization with the position coder of the serial spindle. The position coder to be synchronized depends on the parameter setting, as shown below.

ESY (No.8007#3)

EOS (No.8019#0) Command of G146 Valid position coder

0 0/1 Not required Position coder (not a serial spindle) 1 0 Not required Position coder of the first spindle belonging to path 1 (*2) 1 1 Required Position coder of an arbitrary spindle (specified by G146)

*2: This can be specified for the servo axis belonging to path 1. Pulse weight Set an external pulse weight. When setting a weight value, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the fractional part. The valid range is ±1/256 to ±127. With EIF0g to EIF7g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/256. Example) For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF7g = 80h (=80h/100h=128 / 256 = 0.5) For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF7g=33h (=33h/100h= 51 / 256 0.2) By setting the manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP<G088.3> to 1, the valid range can be set the range form ±1/32 to ±1023. When the manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP is set to "1", use the higher bits (EIF5g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to specify the fractional part. With EIF0g to EIF4g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/32. Example)


- 1325 -

For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF4g = 10h (=10h/20h=16 / 32 = 0.5) For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF4g=06h (=06h/20h= 6 / 32 0.2) When a negative weight value is set, a movement is made along the axis in the opposite direction. If a new pulse weight is set and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed during axis movement based on external pulse synchronization, a movement is made along the axis according to the new pulse weight. This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be checked when this command is specified usually. Spindle number of a serial spindle to be synchronized (for synchronization with the position coder of a serial spindle) The serial spindle to be synchronized is set with a spindle number common to the system. The valid range extends from 1 to the maximum number of control axes. If the spindle number

falls outside the range, external pulse synchronization is disabled.

Example) When the spindle (serial spindle) of each path is assigned as shown below

Spindle number common to the system Path number + Spindle number in the path

First spindle (S1) First spindle in path 1 (S11) Second spindle (S2) Second spindle in path 1 (S12) Third spindle (S3) Third spindle in path 1 (S13)

Path 1 Path 2

NOTE 1 The spindle number to be set does not depend on the path and is common to

the system. 2 If the set serial spindle is not present, external pulse synchronization is disabled. 3 Be sure to set EID8g to EID31g (G147 to G149 for group A) to 0.

Related parameters Parameter DIAx(No.1006#3) Parameter (No.1424) Parameter CDI(No.8005#1) Parameter ESY(No.8007#3) Parameter EOS(No.8019#0)

CAUTION 1 The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

(parameter No. 1424). 2 In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC

program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC axis once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.

Spindle S3(S21) Spindle S2

(S12) Spindle S1

(S11)


- 1326 -

NOTE For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether

to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group.

(13) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle ( 0Dh ) (14) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle ( 0Eh ) (15) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle ( 0Fh )

Each of these commands performs a synchronous operation with a manual handle. When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction. The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times. If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results. A parameter-set magnification is invalid. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, each of these commands can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is also set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0. Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 External pulse synchronization - manual handle command

(0Dh for the first manual handle) (0Eh for the second manual handle)

(0Fh for the third manual handle) EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Pulse weight

Pulse weight The specifications of the external pulse synchronization - position coder command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh) are applicable. Related parameters Same as for external pulse synchronization - position coder

CAUTION The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

(parameter No. 1424).

NOTE For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether

to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group.


- 1327 -

(16) Speed command ( 10h ) This command performs a continuous feed operation based on a speed command. By using bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006, set a rotation axis as a controlled axis for which this command is executed. The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) exercises position control. However, the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can exercise speed control on the servo motor to dynamically change the speed during continuous feed. So, this command is suited, for example, to an application where a servo motor drives a rotary tool. With parameter No. 8028, a time constant for linear acceleration/ deceleration can be set for each axis. When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 0, the coordinates are updated during a feed by the speed command. (The speed command of PMC axis control conforms to the FS10/11 specification.) When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1, the speed command of PMC axis control conforms to the FS0i-C specification. In this case, the speed command is determined by bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005. When the FS0i-C specification is selected (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and speed control is selected (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 0), the coordinates are not updated. When the FS0i-C specification is selected (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and position control is selected (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), the coordinates are updated. By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, this command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0. Before specifying the next command, check that the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0. Until the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to 1. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Speed command (10h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Continuous feedrate Continuous feedrate Set the speed of the servo motor with a binary code. Set a positive value when the servo motor rotates in the forward direction. Set a negative value (two's complement) when the servo motor rotates in the reverse direction. If a new servo motor speed is set as a feedrate, and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed, the servo motor is accelerated or decelerated to the new speed.

Valid data range Unit -32768 to +32767 min-1

Related parameters Parameter (No.8028)


- 1328 -

NOTE 1 The following feedrate error can occur:

(a) With the speed command based on PMC axis control, a servo motor speed is specified as a feedrate. So, in order to specify a feedrate for an axis when a gear is used between the axis and servo motor, the desired feedrate for the axis needs to be converted to a servo motor speed. A feedrate must be specified using an integer, so that when it is converted to a servo motor speed, a rounding error can occur.

(b) The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expression below. An integer must be specified. No finer value may be specified. Fmin = P ÷ 1000 (mm/min) A calculation is made according to IS-B. Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback A speed is specified according to the expression below. F = N × P ÷ 1000 (mm/min) A calculation is made according to IS-B. F : Speed command (integer) N : Servo motor speed (min-1) P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback

2 In the speed command mode, a speed after acceleration/deceleration is specified for the servo control section. At this time, a position control loop gain is invalid.

3 Machine lock is disabled for the speed command.

Speed command and position control The PMC axis can be moved at a constant speed by performing the speed specification of PMC axis control through position loop control, that is, outputting the command pulses corresponding to a rotation speed to servo position control instead of outputting rotation speed data to the amplifier. Set the FS0i-C specification (set bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 to 1) and specify either speed loop control or position loop control is used for speed specification of PMC axis control using bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005. In speed specification, even for position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), only the speed specification parameter (No. 8028) and the linear acceleration/deceleration expanded parameters for PMC axis control speed command continuous feed (bit 0 (PTC) of parameter 12730 set to 1 and parameters No. 12731 to 12738) are used for acceleration/deceleration and normal acceleration/ deceleration is not performed. For position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), override is enabled. Set parameter No. 8040 for each axis to the amount of travel per revolution of the motor in terms of the minimum travel unit and convert speed commands to position commands using this value. As shown in the following block diagram, rotation speed data is not output to the amplifier and the command pulses corresponding to a rotation speed are output to servo position control.

Gear

Motor

Axis(b)

Speed commandAmplifier

Detector(a)


- 1329 -

Related parameters Parameter EVP(No.8005#4) Parameter VCP(No.8007#2) Parameter (No.8040) Parameter PTC(No.12730) Parameter (No.12731) Parameter (No.12732) Parameter (No.12733) Parameter (No.12734) Parameter (No.12735) Parameter (No.12736) Parameter (No.12737) Parameter (No.12738)

NOTE 1 The control axis to be controlled needs to be set as a rotation axis in bit 0

(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006. 2 When the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and

speed control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 0) are specified, coordinates are not updated. After execution, the following signal is set to 0 and the position is lost. - Reference position establishment signal ZRFx<F120> After execution, establish the reference position.

3 When the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, coordinates are updated.

4 Only when the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, feedrate override is enabled.

(17) Torque control ( 11h )

This command performs a continuous feed operation based on torque control. With this command, position control on a PMC control axis can be switched to torque-based control. The servo motor outputs torque exactly as specified by the NC. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Torque control command (11h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Maximum feedrate EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Torque data

Block diagram

Command pulse

CMR Position control

Servo amplifier

Motor

Detector

＋


- 1330 -

Maximum feedrate Specify a maximum feedrate during torque control by using the unit min-1. When there is no torque generation target or the feedrate exceeds the specified value during torque control, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. When updating the maximum feedrate during torque control set in the torque control mode, set new data on the signals and reverse the logical state of the axis control command completion signal EBUFg.

Valid data range Unit

1 to +32767 min-1

NOTE When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is cm/min.

Torque data Specify torque data. Specify a positive value when the torque direction is positive. Specify a negative value when the torque direction is negative. When updating the torque data set in the torque control mode, set new data on the signals and reverse the logical state of the axis control command completion signal EBUFg.

Valid data range Unit

-999999999 to +999999999 (9-digit) 0.00001 Nm

NOTE When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is 0.001N.

(1) Switching from position control to torque control

a. Torque control axis setting Using bit 7 (TRQMx) of parameter No. 2007, set whether an axis is to be placed under torque control. Moreover, for an axis to be placed under torque control, set the torque constant parameter (No. 2105). The standard value of the motor is automatically set in this parameter when the power is turned on after setting bit 1 (DGPR) of parameter No. 2000 to 0.

b. Position management in the torque control mode Whether to perform follow-up operation in the torque control mode can be chosen using bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803. If follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), position control is exercised, regardless of whether the torque control mode is set. If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 0), the operation depends on whether to update the error counter (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805). If the error counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the alarm (SV0423) is issued when the value of the error counter exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1885. At the time of switching back to position control, follow-up operation is performed. If the error counter is not updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 1), no errors are accumulated, so that no servo alarm is issued. However, when the maximum allowable speed is exceeded, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. When this setting is selected, a reference position return operation is required to switch back to position control. Except when bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0, and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 is se to 1, the CNC always exercises position control even in the torque control mode. So, no reference position return operation needs to be performed even at the time of switching from torque control to position control.


- 1331 -

c. Movement direction and speed in the torque control mode In the torque control mode, the output of torque specified by the axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g is attempted. However, when there is no torque generation target or the output has not reached the specified torque data yet, a movement is made in the same direction as in the case of position control according to the +/- sign of torque data. When the move speed exceeds the specified value, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.

d. Timing of switching to torque control Switching to the torque control mode from another mode occurs when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width.

e. In the torque control mode, the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 1. (For details of this signal, see "Signal detail".)

(2) Switching from torque control to position control

(Torque control mode cancellation) When any of the following conditions occurs, the torque control mode ends:

1) When the reset signal ECLRg is set to 1 2) When a servo alarm is issued 3) When an OT alarm is issued with an axis placed under torque control 4) At the time of emergency stop 5) When servo-off occurs due to the servo-off signal ESOFg

a. Timing of torque control cancellation The cancellation of torque control based on PMC axis control depends on whether to perform follow-up operation as determined by bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803. If follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 to return to position control immediately when a cancellation condition occurs. The execution then stops when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 when a cancellation condition occurs. If the error counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the control mode is switched back to position control when the position deviation is decreased to below the value of the cancellation limit parameter (No. 1886) after the start of follow-up operation. The execution then ends when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. If the error counter is not updated (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 is set to 1), a reference position return operation must be once performed to return to position control.

b. Command after cancellation After the torque control mode is canceled, the control mode is switched to normal position control. In the torque control mode, position is controlled, so that machine coordinates are not shifted. However, a shift occurs between the workpiece coordinates and machine coordinates, so that the shift amount needs to be canceled, for example, by setting a workpiece coordinate system.

The table below indicates the operations dependent on the settings of bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805.

TQF (No.1803#4)

TRE (No.1805#1)

Position control Operation in TRQ mode Reference position

return(*) 1 0/1 O Position control is exercised. Not required 0 0 O The alarm (SV0423) is issued when the

error counter exceeds the value of parameter No. 1885.

Not required

0 1 - No SV alarm is issued. When the maximum allowable speed is exceeded, however, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.

Required

(*) Whether reference position return operation is required or not when the control mode has been switched from torque control back to position control


- 1332 -

CAUTION

1 If a movement is made along a torque control axis in the torque control mode, set bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 for follow-up operation to 1.

2 If a movement has been made along a torque control axis when torque control is canceled, a mechanical shock occurs at the time of return to position control. As a greater speed is used, a larger shock occurs. So, decelerate to a maximum allowable extent or stop before canceling torque control.

3 When specifying torque control after completion of manual reference position return, set the feed direction selection signal to 0 or switch to a mode other than the manual reference position return mode beforehand.

4 When the control axis selection signal EAXx is switched in the torque control mode, the alarm (SV0139) is issued. Before switching the control axis selection signal EAXx, cancel the torque control mode.

5 In the torque control mode, do not detach a controlled axis with the control axis detach signal DTCHx or a setting parameter.

6 When servo-off occurs, the torque control mode is canceled. However, the torque control state remains to be set. So, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg to 1.

7 Machine lock is disabled for the torque control command. Related parameters Parameter TQF (No.1803#4) Parameter TRE (No.1805#1) Parameter (No.1885) Parameter (No.1886) Related signals Control axis detach signal DTCHx <G124>

(18) Auxiliary function 1 ( 12h ) (19) Auxiliary function 2 ( 14h ) (20) Auxiliary function 3 ( 15h )

Each of these commands performs the same operation as an auxiliary function (M code Function) of the CNC. Each auxiliary function of the PMC axis control cannot be commanded at the same time by two or more groups. For instance, it is not possible to command auxiliary function 1 from other groups while auxiliary function 1 is performed with group A. (It is possible to command auxiliary function 2 and 3 from other groups at that time.) Axis control block data Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Auxiliary function command (12h for the auxiliary function 1 command) (14h for the auxiliary function 2 command) (15h for the auxiliary function 3 command)

EID0g to EID15g G146 to 147 Auxiliary function code


- 1333 -

Auxiliary function code Specify an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC with a binary code. With bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001, specify a 1-byte or 2-byte code on the signals EID0g to EID15g. Related parameters Parameter AUX(No.8001#6) Related signals Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0> Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0> (for auxiliary function 1) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2> (for auxiliary function 2) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3> (for auxiliary function 3) Auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g <F132, F142>

(21) Machine coordinate system selection ( 20h ) This command performs the same operation as “G53” of the CNC. This command performs rapid traverse in the absolute mode to a specified position in the machine coordinate system. So, this command can be used to move the tool to a specified machine-specific position such as a tool change position.

NOTE 1 When using this command with the T series, cancel tool offset and tool-nose

radius compensation beforehand. 2 When using this command with the M series, cancel tool radius compensation,

tool length compensation, and tool offset beforehand. 3 Before this command can be specified, a machine coordinate system must be

set. So, a manual reference position return operation or reference position return operation based on G28 needs to be performed at least once after the power is turned on. When an absolute-position detector is attached, machine position data is stored, so that a reference position return operation is unnecessary after the power is turned on.

4 This command can be specified regardless of the setting (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136) of the workpiece coordinate system.

5 This command can be specified even if the workpiece coordinate system is not set (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1).

When the machine coordinate system selection (20h) is commanded with the PMC axis control for the rotary axis to which the roll-over function is valid (bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008 is set to 1), the direction of the rotation for an absolute command is as follows.

Bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013 0 1

0 Direction of the shortest path Direction of the shortest path Bit 1 (RABx) of

parameter No.1008 1

Direction of sign of the amount of the movement to be made

Direction of sign of the command value

NOTE When "1" is set to R20x, the direction of the rotation is the same as

FS0i-C.


- 1334 -

Axis control block data Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Machine coordinate system selection (20h) EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Machine coordinate

Rapid traverse rate The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable. Machine coordinate For a linear axis, specify a machine coordinate in the input unit for the axis as an absolute value with a binary code. Example: For absolute "10000"

Input unit inch 1.0000 mm 10.000 Output unit mm 25.400 inch 0.3937

For a rotation axis, a move direction can be selected with a parameter. Set bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1 to enable the rollover function. Then, select the sign of a specified value or the shortcut direction with bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008. Additionally, the amount of travel per revolution needs to be set in parameter No. 1260. Related parameters Parameter ROTx (No.1006#0) Parameter ROAx (No.1008#0) Parameter RABx (No.1008#1) Parameter (No.1260)

(22) Cutting feed-sec/block ( 21h ) This command performs cutting feed according to a specified period of time. Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - sec/block command (21h)

EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feed time EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance

Cutting feed time Specify a period of time required for ending a block.

[Unit of data] 0.1sec [Valid data range] 1 to 32767

Total moving distance The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.

NOTE Dry run and override are disabled, but the tool stops with an override of 0%.

Related parameters and related signals Basically same as for cutting feed -feed per minute


- 1335 -

Notes on the commands - Display of the remaining amount of travel

When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are specified, the remaining amount of travel indicates 0 at all times.

- Command buffering The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be checked at usual command specification time. When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is specified, the feedrate is changed to a specified value by specifying a value with EIFg and reversing EBUFg. (However, the direction remains unchanged.)

- Acceleration/deceleration The valid acceleration/deceleration type varies from one command to another. See Table 16.1.1 (g), "Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command)".

Table 16.1.1 (g) Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command)

Command Operation Acceleration/ deceleration type

00h 05h 07h 08h 09h 0Ah 20h

Rapid traverse Reference position return 1st reference position return 2nd reference position return 3rd reference position return 4th reference position return Machine coordinate system selection

The settings of rapid traverse parameters of exponential type, linear type after interpolation, and bell-shaped type after interpolation used with the NC are valid.

01h 02h 03h 06h 0Bh 0Dh 0Eh 0Fh 21h

Cutting feed - feed per minute Cutting feed - feed per revolution Skip Continuous feed External pulse -Position coder -1st manual handle -2nd manual handle -3rd manual handle Cutting feed - sec / block

The settings of cutting parameters of exponential type, linear type after interpolation, and bell-shaped type after interpolation used with the NC are valid. However, when a value is set in parameter No. 8030 and No. 8031, these settings are valid instead of parameter No. No. 1622 and No.1623.

10h Speed command Set linear-type parameters (No.8028 and No.8032).

- Immediate commands

The commands listed below are not buffered. The commands are referred to as immediate commands. (1) Continuous feed(EC0g to EC6g : 06h) (2) External pulse synchronization - Position coder (EC0g to EC6g : 0Bh) (3) External pulse synchronization - 1st manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh) (4) External pulse synchronization - 2nd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh) (5) External pulse synchronization - 3rd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh) (6) Speed command(EC0g to EC6g : 10h) (7) Torque control (EC0g to EC6g : 11h) When an immediate command is prepared and the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed during execution of the same type of command, the command being executed is terminated, and the next command is executed immediately.


- 1336 -

Suppose, for example, that when continuous feed is being executed at 100 mm/min, another continuous feed command with only the feedrate changed to 300 mm/min is specified and the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed. The feedrate changes to 300 mm/min. To end an immediate command, input the reset signal ECLRg. When specifying a command other than the immediate commands, set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 and check that the command is terminated, then reverse EBUFg. (If both of the block being executed and a block being prepared are immediate commands, but the types of commands differ from each other, set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 once.)

Signal Signal list (PMC axis control)

Number Symbol Signal name (1) EAX1 to EAX5 Controlled axis selection signals (2) EC0g to EC6g Axis control command signals (3) EIF0g to EIF15g Axis control feedrate signals (4) EID0g to EID31g Axis control data signals (5) EBUFg Axis control command read signal (6) EBSYg Axis control command read completion signal (7) ECLRg Reset signal (8) ESTPg Axis control temporary stop signal (9) ESBKg Block stop signal

(10) EMSBKg Block stop disable signal (11) EM11g to EM48g Auxiliary function code signals (12) EMFg Auxiliary function strobe signal (13) EMF2g Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal (14) EMF3g Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal (15) EFINg Auxiliary function completion signal (16) ESOFg Servo-off signal (17) EMBUFg Buffering disable signal (18) *EAXSL Control axis selection status signal (19) EINPg In-position signal (20) ECKZg Following zero checking signal (21) EIALg Alarm signal (22) EGENg Axis moving signal (23) EDENg Auxiliary function executing signal (24) EOTNg Negative-direction overtravel signal (25) EOTPg Positive-direction overtravel signal (26) *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 Feedrate override signals (27) EOVC Override cancellation signal (28) EROV1, EROV2 Rapid traverse override signals (29) EDRN Dry run signal (30) ERT Manual rapid traverse selection signal (31) EOV0 Override 0% signal (32) ESKIP Skip signal (33) EADEN1 to EADEN5 Distribution completion signals (34) EABUFg Buffer full signal (35) EACNT1 to EACNT5 Controlling signals (36) ELCKZg Accumulated zero check signal (37) TRQM1 to TRQM5 Torque control mode signal (38) HNDMP Manual pulse magnification select signal


- 1337 -

Signal list (Related signals) Number Symbol Signal name

(1) *+ED1 to *+ED5 *- ED1 to *- ED5

External deceleration signal 1

(2) *+ED21 to *+ED25 *- ED21 to *- ED25


(3) *+ED31 to *+ED35 *- ED31 to *- ED35


(4) *HROV 1% rapid traverse override select signal (5) HROV0 to 6 1% rapid traverse override signals (6) *FHROV 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal (7) FHRO0 to 9 0.1% rapid traverse override signals (8) ROV1, 2 Rapid traverse override signals (9) ZP1 First reference position return completion signal

(10) ZP2 Second reference position return completion signal (11) ZP3 Third reference position return completion signal (12) ZP4 Fourth reference position return completion signal (13) NDCAL1 to NDCAL5 A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal

Signal Detail

Each signal is detailed below. "<>" in the title of each signal indicates a signal address.

Signal Detail (PMC axis control)

(1) Controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 <G0136.0 to G136.4> [Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal [Function] Exercises PMC axis control. [Function] When the signal is set to "1", PMC axis control becomes valid.

When the signal is set to "0", PMC axis control becomes invalid. Changing the setting of the control axis selection signal is possible only when control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to "0". Changing the setting when *EAXSL is set to "1" results in the issue of an alarm PS0139. Alarm signal EIALg is set to "1". When the parameter NCC (No. 8001#5), is set to "0", a command issued from the CNC is executed while the control axis selection signal is set to "1" and signal *EAXSL is set to "0". When the parameter is set to "1", the same attempt results in the issue of an alarm PS0139. If the control axis selection signal is set to "1" while the CNC is currently executing a command, an alarm is generated. While *EAXSL is set to "0", the status of alarm signal EIALg does not change to 1 when the control axis selection signal is set to 1 and an alarm PS0139 is generated. In this case, the axis can be controlled from the PMC, even when the CNC is in the alarm status.

NOTE After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 to 1, it takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue commands to the CNC.

(2) Axis control command signals

EC0g to EC6g<G143.0 to 6, G155.0 to 6, G167.0 to 6, G179.0 to 6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] One of the axis control block data signals [Operation] Specifies a type of command with 7 bits.

For the meaning of each command, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".


- 1338 -

(3) Axis control feedrate signals

EIF0g to EIF15g <G144 to 145, G156 to 157, G168 to 169, G180 to 181> [Classification] Input signal, Group-by-group signal [Function] One of the axis control block data signals [Operation] Two-byte command interface area

Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".

(4) Axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g <G146 to 149, G158 to 161, G170 to 173, G182 to 185>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] One of the axis control block data signals [Operation] Four-byte command interface area

Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".

(5) Axis control command read signal EBUFg <G142.7, G154.7, G166.7, G178.7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control. [Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from

0 to 1 or from 1 to 0, see Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation" and Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".

(6) Axis control command read completion signal EBSYg <F130.7, F133.7, F136.7, F139.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for PMC axis control

and has stored the block in the input buffer. [Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from

0 to 1 or from 1 to 0, see Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation" and Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".

(7) Reset signal ECLRg <G142.6, G154.6, G166.6, G178.6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Resets a PMC axis control command. [Operation] Resets the corresponding PMC-controlled axis.

When this signal is set to "1", the following is performed: (1) When the tool is moving along the axis: decelerates and stops the tool. (2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation. (3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation. Simultaneously, all buffered commands are canceled. Any control command is ignored while this signal is set to "1". The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and external pulse synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) can be terminated by setting reset signal ECLRg to "1". When these commands are terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to "0", and the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to "0". Confirm that the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to "0" before issuing the next command. Do not set reset signal ECLRg to "0" until the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to "0".


- 1339 -

The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by setting the reset signal ECLRg to "1". When this command is terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to "0". Confirm that the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to "0" before issuing the next command. Do not attempt to set the reset signal ECLRg to "0" until the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to "0".

(8) Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg <G142.5, G154.5, G166.5, G178.5> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Temporarily stops a movement before the execution of a block is completed. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the following is performed:

(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the tool. (2) When the tool is in dwell: Stops the operation. (3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation when auxiliary

function completion signal EFINg is input. The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to "0".

(9) Block stop signal ESBKg <G142.3, G154.3, G166.3, G178.3> (10)Block stop disable signal EMSBKg <G143.7,G155.7, G167.7, G179.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables a stop for each command block, or disables a stop for each block. [Operation] When block stop signal ESBKg is set to "1" during the execution of a command issued

from the PMC, axis control is stopped after the block being executed is completed. When this signal is set to "0", the buffered command is executed. Block stop signal ESBKg is disabled when block stop disable signal EMSBKg is set to "1" for the block. Table 16.1.1 (h), "Timing chart of block stop related signals" shows the timing chart of command operation.

ESBKg

(input)

Command block [1] [2] [3]

(input)

EBUFg

(input)

EBSYg

(output)

Input buffer [2]

Waiting buffer [1] [2]

Executing buffer [1]

More than 8 msec

Table 16.1.1 (h) Timing chart of block stop related signals

(11) Auxiliary function code signals

EM11g to EM48g <F132 to F142, F135 to F145, F138 to F148, F141 to F151> [Classification] Output signal


- 1340 -

(12) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0, F134.0, F137.0, F140.0> [Classification] Output signal

(13) Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2, F134.2, F137.2, F140.2>

[Classification] Output signal

(14) Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3, F134.3, F137.3, F140.3> [Classification] Output signal

(15) Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0, G154.0, G166.0, G178.0>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Completes an auxiliary function [Operation] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is issued by the PMC, the

auxiliary function code is specified in a byte (using signals EID0g to EID7g) or two bytes (using signals EID0g to EID15g), depending on the setting of bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001. The CNC sends the auxiliary function code specified in signals EID0g to EID7g and EID8g to EID15g to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM28g and EM31g to EM48g and awaits the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg. When the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is returned, the CNC starts executing the next block. The timings for sending the auxiliary function code signals and auxiliary function strobe signal, as well as for receiving the auxiliary function completion signal, are the same as those for the auxiliary functions (M functions) under the control of the CNC. See "Auxiliary function executing signal" for details.

(16) Servo-off signal ESOFg <G142.4, G154.4, G166.4, G178.4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Changes the servo-off state. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the servo motor for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis

is turned off (servo-off state). When this signal is set to "0", the servo motor is turned on. When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified, entering the servo-off state cancels torque control mode, but the torque control state remains set. In such a case, set reset signal ECLRg to "1".

(17) Buffering disable signal EMBUFg <G142.2, G154.2, G166.2, G178.2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Changes the buffering disabled state. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", commands from the PMC are not read while the executing,

waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is set to "1" when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executed but subsequent commands are read only when the buffers are all empty. To discriminate the buffering disabled condition, the CNC outputs the axis control command read completion signal (EBSYg) only when a command is read when all buffers are empty. Table 16.1.1 (i), "Timing chart of buffering related signals" shows the timing chart of command operation.


- 1341 -

EMBUFg (input) Command block [1] [2] (input) EBUFg (input)

Command disabled EBSYg (output) Input buffer Waiting buffer Executing buffer [1] [2] Beginning of execution End Beginning of execution

Table 16.1.1 (i) Timing chart of buffering related signals Buffering is disabled, regardless of the buffering disable signal EMBUFg, for the following commands: (1) Skip-feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 03h) (2) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h) (3) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h) (4) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h) (5) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h) (6) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah) (7) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h)

(18) Controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL <F129.7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates whether PMC axis control is being exercised. [Operation] When this signal is set to "0", controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 can be

changed. This signal is set to "1" in the following cases: (1) When the tool is moving along a PMC-controlled axis (2) When a block is being read into a buffer (3) When the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to "1" When this signal is set to "1", controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 cannot be changed. Any attempt to change these signals results in the output of an alarm PS0139. If an attempt to change signals EAX1 to EAX5 is made when servo-off signal ESOFg is "1", an alarm PS0139 occurs and cannot be released simply by setting reset signal ECLRg to "1". In such a case, restore signals EAX1 to EAX5 or set servo-off signal ESOFg to "0" before setting reset signal ECLRg to "1". When a command is issued for any of the groups A to D with PMC axis control, signal *EAXSL is set to "1" to disable axis selection. Thus, changing signals EAX1 to EAX5 results in the output of an alarm PS0139. For groups for which commands are not issued, however, axis selection is enabled if parameter DSL (No. 8004#5) is set accordingly.

(19) In-position signal EINPg <F130.0, F133.0, F136.0, F139.0> [Classification] Output signal


- 1342 -

[Function] Indicates the in-position state. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the corresponding PMC-controlled axis is in the in-position

state. When the tool is decelerated, in-position check is performed to disable the next command until the tool enters the in-position area. The in-position check, however, can be skipped using bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 to reduce the cycle time.

NOTE When the axis is fed at a very low speed, the in -position signal

might turn to "1".

(20) Following zero checking signal ECKZg <F130.1, F133.1, F136.1, F139.1> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the following zero state. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when following zero check or in-position check is being

performed for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis. The following zero state means that the acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero.

(21) Alarm signal EIALg <F130.2, F133.2, F136.2, F139.2> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the alarm state related to PMC axis control. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when a servo alarm, overtravel alarm, or alarm PS0130 or PS0139

occurs for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis. This signal is set to "0" when the reset signal ECLRg is set to "1" after the alarm is released, as described below. Servo alarm Eliminate the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC. Overtravel alarm Move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit, then reset the CNC. The following commands can be used to move the tool into the area within the

stored stroke limit during an overtravel alarm: (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h) (2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h) (3) Cutting feed - feed per rotation(EC0g to EC6g : 02h) (4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h) (5) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh) (6) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh) (7) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh)

Alarm (PS0130, PS0139) Reset the CNC.

See "Alarms and messages" for details. Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases. Use the reset button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or emergency stop signal *ESP. Even if an alarm occurs on an axis not related to the group, alarm signal EIALx does not generally change from 0 to 1.

(22) Axis moving signal EGENg <F130.4, F133.4, F136.4, F139.4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the state of movement on an axis. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the tool is moving along the corresponding PMC-controlled

axis according to commands such as rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed (EC0g to EC6g: 01h).


- 1343 -

When the dwell command (EC0g to EC6g: 04h) is specified, this signal remains to be set to 0.

NOTE This signal is set to "0" when distribution for the axis is completed

(the signal is set to "0" during deceleration).

(23) Auxiliary function executing signal EDENg <F130.3, F133.3, F136.3, F139.3> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the state of auxiliary function execution. [Operation] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by the PMC, this signal is

set to "1" during the period from when auxiliary function codes EID0g to EID15g are sent to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g until the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is returned. Table 16.1.1 (j), "Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals" shows the timing chart of command operation. TMF and TFIN in the table are set in parameter No. 3010 and No.3011.

Command block

(input)

EM11g to EM48g

(output)

EMFg, EMF2g, EMF3g

(output)

EFINg

(input)

EDENg

(output)

Auxiliary function command

TMF

TFIN

Next command

Table 16.1.1 (j) Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals

(24) Negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg <F130.6, F133.6, F136.6, F139.6> (25) Positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg <F130.5, F133.5, F136.5, F139.5>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the overtravel state. [Operation] These signals are set to "1" when an overtravel alarm is detected. When the stroke limit in

the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set to "1". When the stroke limit in the positive direction is exceeded, signal EOTPg is set to "1". Simultaneously, alarm signal EIALg is set to "1".

These signals are set to "0" when the overtravel alarm is released and reset signal ECLRg is set to "1". See "Alarm signal EIALg" for details of how to release an overtravel alarm.


- 1344 -

(26) Feedrate override signals *EFOV0g to *EFOV7g <G151 (, G163, G175, G187)> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Applies cutting override. [Operation] Like the CNC's feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV4, these signals can be used to

select the override for the cutting feedrate, in steps of 1% from 0 to 254%, independently of the CNC using the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2). These signals form an eight-bit binary code and correspond to the override value as follows:

∑=

×=7

0i

i %2 valueOverride Vi

Vi = 0 when signal *EFOVi is 1 Vi = 1 when signal *EFOVi is 0 That is, each signal has the following significance: *EFOV7 = 128%, *EFOV3 = 8% , *EFOV6 = 64%, *EFOV2 = 4% , *EFOV5 = 32%, *EFOV1 = 2% , *EFOV4 = 16%, *EFOV0 = 1% When all signals are set to "0", the override is regarded as being 0%, as well as when all signals are "1".

(27) Override cancellation signal EOVCg <G150.5 (G162.5, G174.5, G186.5)> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Disables override. [Operation] When override is enabled, independently of the CNC, by setting the parameter OVE (No.

8001#2), setting this signal to "1" fixes the cutting feed override to 100%. This signal does not affect the rapid traverse override. Bit 5 (IFV) of parameter No. 8005 is used to determine whether these signals are path-by-path signals or group-by-group signals. When the IFV parameter is set to 0, these signals are path-by-path signals. When the IFV parameter is set to 1, these signals are group-by-group signals.

(28) Rapid traverse override signals EROV1, EROV2 <Gn150.0,1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Applies rapid traverse override. [Operation] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate, independently

of the CNC, by setting of the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2). Rapid traverse override signals Override value

EROV2 EROV1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1

100% 50% 25% F0

F0 is the minimum feedrate specified with parameter No. 1421.

(29) Dry run signal EDRN <G150.7> (30) Manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT <G150.6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Applies dry run, or chooses whether to apply dry run.


- 1345 -

[Operation] These signals can be used to perform dry run or manual rapid traverse, independently of the CNC, by setting the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2). When the dry run signal EDRN is set to "1", the specified rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate are ignored and the tool moves at the dry run speed (set in parameter No. 1410) multiplied by the specified override. Parameter RDE (No. 8001#3) can be used to specify whether to enable or disable dry run for rapid traverse. When the manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT is set to "1" during dry run, the tool moves at the rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse and at the maximum jog feedrate for cutting feed. When the signal is set to "0", the tool moves at the jog feedrate. When the dry run signal EDRN is set to "0", the specified rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate is restored.

Command from PMC Manual rapid traverse select signal At rapid traverse At Cutting feed

1 Rapid traverse rate Cutting feedrate 0 Dry run feed JV * Dry run feed rate JV

* Can also be set to the rapid traverse rate with the parameter RDE (No. 8001#3).

(31) Override 0% signal EOV0 <F129.5> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates whether the override value is 0%. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the feedrate override is 0%.

(32) Skip signal ESKIP<X004.6>, ESKIP#2<X013.6>

[Classification] Direct input signal [Function] Applies skip. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1" during execution of the skip cutting command, the block

being executed is immediately stopped and the next block is executed. This signal is unique during PMC axis control. Parameter SKE (No. 8001#7) can be used to select whether to use signal SKIP, which is the common skip signal for the PMC and CNC, or PMC-specific skip signal ESKIP. This skip signal is valid for those axes that are assigned to path 1 to path 2. For those axes that are assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid. For those axes that are assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2 (X013.6) is valid.

(33) Distribution completion signals EADEN1 to EADEN5<F112.0 to 4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the state of distribution based on PMC axis control. [Operation] These signals are set to "0" when the tool is moving with a command from the PMC. The

signals are set to "1" when the tool is not moving, except when it is stopped by an axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg during the execution of a move command.

(34) Buffer full signal EABUFg <F131.1, F134.1, F137.1, F140.1>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates the PMC axis control command buffering state. [Operation] When the group input buffer holds a command block, this signal is set to 1. When no

command is buffered, this signal is set to 0.

(35) Controlling signals EACNT1 to EACNT5<F182.0 to 4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that PMC axis control is being exercised. [Operation] When the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 1, the bit signal

corresponding to an axis being controlled is set to 1.


- 1346 -

A bit signal is set to 1 also when the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to 1.

(36) Accumulated zero check signal ELCKZg <G142.1, G154.1, G166.1, G178.1>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Makes an accumulated zero check. [Operation] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks to be made at a

subsequent cutting feed command. The accumulated zero state means that the acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero. (1) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) (2) Cutting feed -feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h) (3) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h) This signal can be used, for example, with the chopping function.

(37) Torque control mode signal TRQM1 to TRQM5 <F190>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates an axis in the torque control mode.

(38) Manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP<G088.3>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] In external pulse synchronization of PMC axis control, the valid range of an external

pulse set to the axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF15g is changed. [Operation] When this signal is set to 0, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the integer

part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the fractional part. The valid range of an external pulse is ±1/256 to ±127.

When this signal is set to 1, use the higher bits (EIF5g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to specify the fractional part. The valid range of an external pulse is ±1/32 to ±1023.

Signal detail (Related signals)

The signals related to PMC axis control are detailed below. The [Function] field and [Operation] field provide descriptions related to PMC axis control. For the general functions of the signals, see the description of each signal.

(1) External deceleration signals 1 *+ED1 to *+ED5<G118.0 to 4>, *-ED1 to *-ED5<G120.0 to 4> (2) External deceleration signals 2 *+ED21 to *+ED25<G101.0 to 4>, *-ED21 to *-ED25<G103.0 to 4> (3) External deceleration signals 3 *+ED31 to *+ED35<G107.0 to 4>, *-ED31 to *-ED35<G109.0 to 4>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Decelerates the movement along a specified axis to a parameter-set feedrate. [Operation] While a signal is set to 0 for an axis, the feedrate along the axis in the specified direction

can be forcibly decelerated to a certain feedrate (external deceleration feedrate) set by a parameter (dependent on the type of command). If the feedrate is lower than the external deceleration feedrate, however, the specified feedrate continues to be used. The feedrate for other axes with these signals not set to 0 is not affected. For details, refer to the Subsection 7.1.9, “External Deceleration.” A signal is available for each controlled axis and for each direction. Each signal name includes the sign + or - for direction indication, and the number at the end of each signal name indicates a controlled axis number. These signals are shared by the CNC.


- 1347 -

* x ED y z z 1 : Feed along the first axis is decelerated. 2 : Feed along the second axis is decelerated. : 5 : Feed along the fifth axis is decelerated. y None: Follows external deceleration setting 1. 2 : Follows external deceleration setting 2. 3 : Follows external deceleration setting 3. x + : Feed in the positive direction is decelerated. - : Feed in the negative direction is decelerated. When any of the following axis control command is specified while the parameter EDC (No. 8005#0) is held at 1, the external deceleration function becomes effective: (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h) (2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h) (3) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h) (4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h) (5) First reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h) (6) Second reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h) (7) Third reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h) (8) Fourth reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah) (9) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h) (10) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h) For each command above, the external deceleration feedrate settings for axis-by-axis rapid traverse (parameter No. 1427, No. 1441, and No. 1444) are valid. To cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) and cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g: 21h) as well, the settings for rapid traverse are applied instead of the external deceleration feedrate settings for cutting feed (parameter No. 1426, No. 1440, and No. 1443).

(4) 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7> [Classification] Input signal

(5) 1% rapid traverse override signal HROV0 to 6 <G96.0 to 6>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables override to be applied in steps of 1%. Shared by the CNC. [Operation] If the 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7> is set to 1 when bit 2

(OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 0, rapid traverse override can be specified in steps of 1% by using the 1% rapid traverse override signals HROV0 to HROV6 <G96.0 to 6>.

(6) 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal *FHROV <G353.7>


(7) 0.1% rapid traverse override signal FHRO0 to 9 <G352.0 to 7, G353.0 to 1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] An override can be applied in steps of 0.1%. This signal is used with the CNC as well.


- 1348 -

[Operation] If bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 0, the 0.1% rapid traverse override signals FHRO0 to FHRO9 <G352.0 to 7, G353.0 to 1> enable a rapid traverse override to be specified in steps of 0.1% when the 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7> and the 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal *FHROV <G353.7> are set to 1.

(8) Rapid traverse override signal ROV1 <G14.0>, ROV2 <G14.1>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Overrides the rapid traverse rate. Shared by the CNC. [Operation] This signal is a two-bit code signal, and sets an override value as indicated below.

Rapid traverse override signal

ROV2 ROV1 Override value

0 0 100% 0 1 50% 1 0 25% 1 1 F0 (parameter (No.1421))

(9) First reference position return completion signals ZP1 to ZP5 <F94.0 - 4> (10) Second reference position return completion signals ZP21 to ZP25 <F96.0 - 4> (11) Third reference position return completion signals ZP31 to ZP35 <F98.0 - 4> (12) Fourth reference position return completion signals ZP41 to ZP45 <F100.0 - 4>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts that the tool is at the reference position on a controlled axis. Shared by the CNC. [Operation] The number at the end of a signal name indicates the number of a controlled axis.

Each of these signals is set to 1 when reference position return is completed, and the tool enters the in-position area. Each of these signals is set to 0 when a movement is made from the reference position, an emergence stop occurs, or a servo alarm is issued.

(13) A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal NDCAL1 to NDCAL5 <G202.0 to 4>>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] Does not output the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm. [Operation] While this signal is set to 1, the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm is not

output during speed specification based on PMC axis control. Table 16.1.1 (k), "Timing chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal" shows a timing chart.

A/B phase detectordisconnection alarmignore parameterHNG (No.2017#4)

NDCALx

(input)

Hard disconnection

Even if hard disconnectionalarm is issued, servo softdoes not notify NC.

Occurs at high speed Reset by ALR

Table 16.1.1 (k) Timing chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal


- 1349 -

NOTE 1 Change the level of this signal from 1 to 0 before switching from a

speed command to a position command. 2 After switching from a speed command to a position command, be

sure to perform a manual reference position return operation before making a movement on the axis.

3 This function cannot be used when an absolute-position detector is attached.

4 To enable this signal, set bit 4 of parameter No. 2017 to 1.

Signal address - Signals for PMC axis control DI → CNC

The signals below are direct signals for PMC axis control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X004 ESKIP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X013 ESKIP#2

PMC → CNC

The signals are listed below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G088 HNDMP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G136 EAX5#1 EAX4#1 EAX3#1 EAX2#1 EAX1#1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1136 EAX5#2 EAX4#2 EAX3#2 EAX2#2 EAX1#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G202 NDCAL5 NDCAL4 NDCAL3 NDCAL2 NDCAL1


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G150 EDRN#1 ERT#1 EOVC#1 EROV2#1 EROV1#1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G151 *EFOV7#1 *EFOV6#1 *EFOV5#1 *EFOV4#1 *EFOV3#1 *EFOV2#1 *EFOV1#1 *EFOV0#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1150 EDRN#2 ERT#2 EOVC#2 EROV2#2 EROV1#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1151 *EFOV7#2 *EFOV6#2 *EFOV5#2 *EFOV4#2 *EFOV3#2 *EFOV2#2 *EFOV1#2 *EFOV0#2


- 1350 -

The signals in groups A to D of the first path are shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G142 EBUFA#1 ECLRA#1 ESTPA#1 ESOFA#1 ESBKA#1 EMBUFA#1 ELCKZA#1 EFINA#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G143 EMSBKA#1 EC6A#1 EC5A#1 EC4A#1 EC3A#1 EC2A#1 EC1A#1 EC0A#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G144 EIF7A#1 EIF6A#1 EIF5A#1 EIF4A#1 EIF3A#1 EIF2A#1 EIF1A#1 EIF0A#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G146 EID7A#1 EID6A#1 EID5A#1 EID4A#1 EID3A#1 EID2A#1 EID1A#1 EID7A#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G150 EOVCA#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G151 *EFOV7A#1 *EFOV6A#1 *EFOV5A#1 *EFOV4A#1 *EFOV3A#1 *EFOV2A#1 *EFOV1A#1 *EFOV0A#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G154 EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1 ESOFB#1 ESBKB#1 EMBUFB#1 ELCKZB#1 EFINB#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G155 EMSBKB#1 EC6B#1 EC5B#1 EC4B#1 EC3B#1 EC2B#1 EC1B#1 EC0B#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G156 EIF7B#1 EIF6B#1 EIF5B#1 EIF4B#1 EIF3B#1 EIF2B#1 EIF1B#1 EIF0B#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G158 EID7B#1 EID6B#1 EID5B#1 EID4B#1 EID3B#1 EID2B#1 EID1B#1 EID7B#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G162 EOVCB#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G163 *EFOV7B#1 *EFOV6B#1 *EFOV5B#1 *EFOV4B#1 *EFOV3B#1 *EFOV2B#1 *EFOV1B#1 *EFOV0B#1

For group AFor group B


- 1351 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G166 EBUFC#1 ECLRC#1 ESTPC#1 ESOFC#1 ESBKC#1 EMBUFC#1 ELCKZC#1 EFINC#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G167 EMSBKC#1 EC6C#1 EC5C#1 EC4C#1 EC3C#1 EC2C#1 EC1C#1 EC0C#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G168 EIF7C#1 EIF6C#1 EIF5C#1 EIF4C#1 EIF3C#1 EIF2C#1 EIF1C#1 EIF0C#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G170 EID7C#1 EID6C#1 EID5C#1 EID4C#1 EID3C#1 EID2C#1 EID1C#1 EID7C#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G174 EOVCC#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G175 *EFOV7C#1 *EFOV6C#1 *EFOV5C#1 *EFOV4C#1 *EFOV3C#1 *EFOV2C#1 *EFOV1C#1 *EFOV0C#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G178 EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 ELCKZD#1 EFIND#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G179 EMSBKD#1 EC6D#1 EC5D#1 EC4D#1 EC3D#1 EC2D#1 EC1D#1 EC0D#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G182 EID7D#1 EID6D#1 EID5D#1 EID4D#1 EID3D#1 EID2D#1 EID1D#1 EID7D#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G186 EOVCD#1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G187 *EFOV7D#1 *EFOV6D#1 *EFOV5D#1 *EFOV4D#1 *EFOV3D#1 *EFOV2D#1 *EFOV1D#1 *EFOV0D#1

For group CFor group D


- 1352 -

The signals in groups A to D of the second path (T series (2-path control)) are shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1142 EBUFA#2 ECLRA#2 ESTPA#2 ESOFA#2 ESBKA#2 EMBUFA#2 ELCKZA#2 EFINA#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1143 EMSBKA#2 EC6A#2 EC5A#2 EC4A#2 EC3A#2 EC2A#2 EC1A#2 EC0A#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1145 EIF15A#2 EIF14A#2 EIF13A#2 EIF12A#2 EIF11A#2 EIF10A#2 EIF9A#2 EIF8A#2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1150 EOVCA#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1151 *EFOV7A#2 *EFOV6A#2 *EFOV5A#2 *EFOV4A#2 *EFOV3A#2 *EFOV2A#2 *EFOV1A#2 *EFOV0A#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1154 EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ESTPB#2 ESOFB#2 ESBKB#2 EMBUFB#2 ELCKZB#2 EFINB#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1155 EMSBKB#2 EC6B#2 EC5B#2 EC4B#2 EC3B#2 EC2B#2 EC1B#2 EC0B#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1162 EOVCB#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1163 *EFOV7B#2 *EFOV6B#2 *EFOV5B#2 *EFOV4B#2 *EFOV3B#2 *EFOV2B#2 *EFOV1B#2 *EFOV0B#2

For group AFor group B


- 1353 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1166 EBUFC#2 ECLRC#2 ESTPC#2 ESOFC#2 ESBKC#2 EMBUFC#2 ELCKZC#2 EFINC#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1167 EMSBKC#2 EC6C#2 EC5C#2 EC4C#2 EC3C#2 EC2C#2 EC1C#2 EC0C#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1174 EOVCC#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1175 *EFOV7C#2 *EFOV6C#2 *EFOV5C#2 *EFOV4C#2 *EFOV3C#2 *EFOV2C#2 *EFOV1C#2 *EFOV0C#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1178 EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD#2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2 EMBUFD#2 ELCKZD#2 EFIND#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1179 EMSBKD#2 EC6D#2 EC5D#2 EC4D#2 EC3D#2 EC2D#2 EC1D#2 EC0D#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1186 EOVCD#2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1187 *EFOV7D#2 *EFOV6D#2 *EFOV5D#2 *EFOV4D#2 *EFOV3D#2 *EFOV2D#2 *EFOV1D#2 *EFOV0D#2

For group CFor group D


- 1354 -

Related signals

DI → CNC The signals below are direct signals related to PMC axis control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X004 SKIP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X011 SKIP#3

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X013 SKIP#2

PMC→CNC

The signals below are Input signals related to PMC axis control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G014 ROV2 ROV1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G096 *HROV HROV6 HROV5 HROV4 HROV3 HROV2 HROV1 HROV0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G101 *+ED25 *+ED24 *+ED23 *+ED22 *+ED21

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G103 *-ED25 *-ED24 *-ED23 *-ED22 *-ED21

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G106 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G107 *+ED35 *+ED34 *+ED33 *+ED32 *+ED31

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G109 *-ED35 *-ED34 *-ED33 *-ED32 *-ED31

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G118 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G120 *-ED5 *-ED4 *-ED3 *-ED2 *-ED1


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G352 FHROV FHRO6 FHRO5 FHRO4 FHRO3 FHRO2 FHRO1 FHRO0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G353 *FHROV FHRO9 FHRO8

CNC→PMC

The signals below are output signals related to PMC axis control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1





- 1355 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0000 INI


#2 INI Unit of input

0: In metrics 1: In inches

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0012 MIRx

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit axis

#0 MIRx Mirror image for each axis

0: Mirror image is off. (Normal) 1: Mirror image is on. (Mirror)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1001 INM




#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0: In mm (metric system machine) 1: In inches (inch system machine)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 DLZx


#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx DIAx





- 1356 -

#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on:

0: Radius specification 1: Diameter specification

NOTE For the FS0i-C, one of the following changes is required besides

setting bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 so that the axis based on diameter specification achieves the specified amount of movement. • Halve the command multiplication (the detection unit is not

changed). • Halve the detection unit and double the flexible feed gear

(DMR). For the FS0i-D, only if bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 is set,

the CNC halves the specified pulse. Accordingly, the above changes are not required (when the detection unit is not changed). To halve the detection unit, double both CMR and DMR.

#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:

0: + direction 1: - direction

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 RABx ROAx




#0 ROAx The roll-over function of a rotation axis is 0: Invalid 1: Valid

NOTE ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which ROTx,

#0 of parameter No.1006, is set to 1)

#1 RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction 0: In which the distance to the target is shorter. 1: Specified by the sign of command value.

NOTE RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1201 ZPR



- 1357 -

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed 0: Not set automatically 1: Set automatically

NOTE ZPR is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is not used

(when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1). When the workpiece coordinate system is used, the workpiece coordinate system is established based on the workpiece origin offset (parameters No. 1220 to 1226) during a manual reference position return, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system

1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system

1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate system

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) Set the coordinate values of the second to fourth reference positions in the machine coordinate system.

1250 Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )

(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a coordinate system automatically.

1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis



[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] Degree [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis


- 1358 -

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis. For the rotation axis used for cylindrical interpolation, set the standard value.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1402 JOV


#1 JOV Jog override is:

0: Enabled 1: Disabled (tied to 100%)

1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)

(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1803 TQF


#4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC axis control, follow-up operation is:

0: Not performed. 1: Performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1805 TRE


#1 TRE When bit 4 of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0 (not to perform follow-up operation with a

torque control command in PMC axis control), the servo error counter is: 0: Updated.

When the error count exceeds the maximum allowable cumulative travel value (parameter No. 1885), the alarm (SV0423) is issued.

1: Not updated. No errors are accumulated, so that the alarm (SV0423) is not issued. When the maximum allowable feedrate is exceeded, however, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.

To return to position control when this parameter bit is set to 1, a reference position return operation needs to be performed.


- 1359 -

1826 In-position width for each axis


The in-position width is set for each axis. When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position (the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the in-position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified position. (The machine is in the in-position state.)

1827 In-position width in cutting feed for each axis


Set an in-position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is used when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No.1801=1.

1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return. In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the default.) If, during reference position return, such a feedrate as exceeding a set value is not reached even once before the limit switch for deceleration is released (the deceleration signal (*DEC) is set to 1 again), the alarm (PS0090) "REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FAILURE" is issued. If, during reference position return, such a feedrate as exceeding a set servo error amount is not reached even once before the limit switch for deceleration is released (the deceleration signal is set to 1 again), the alarm (PS0090) "REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FAILURE" is issued.

1885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during torque control

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

Set a maximum allowable cumulative travel value (error counter value) during torque control. If the cumulative travel value exceeds the set value, the servo alarm (SV0423) is issued.

NOTE This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of

No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).

1886 Positional deviation when torque control is canceled



- 1360 -

[Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767

Set a positional deviation value when torque control is canceled to return to positional deviation. After the positional deviation has fallen to the parameter-set value, switching to position control is performed.

NOTE This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of

No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2000 DGP




#1 DGP Upon power-up, the digital servo parameter specific to a motor is:

0: Set. 1: Not set. When this parameter is set to 0 after the motor type is set, the digital servo parameter is automatically set to the standard value appropriate for the motor type and this parameter is set to 1 at the same time.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2007 TRQ


#7 TRQ Torque control is:


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2017 HTN


#4 HTN In the speed command mode, the hardware broken wire alarm for the separate detector is:

0: Detected. 1: Ignored.

2105 Torque constant

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis [Unit of data] 0.00001Nm/ (torque command) [Valid data range] 1 to 32767


- 1361 -

This parameter is set for each torque characteristic.

NOTE When a linear motor is used, the data unit is 0.001 N/(1 torque

command).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3002 IOV


#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:

0: Used without modification (A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a positive logic signal.)

1: Inverted (A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive logic is used as a negative logic signal.)

The signals indicated below are affected. Signal of negative logic: Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G0012> Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<G0013> Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)

*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187> Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<F0078> Signals of positive logic: Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<G0014.0,1> Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<F0076.4,5> Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)

EROV1g,EROV2g<G0150.0, 1, G0162.0, 1, G0174.0, 1, G0186.0, 1>

3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B codes are sent, respectively.

M, S, T, B code

MF, SF, TF, BF,signal

Delay time

NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a

multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. Example When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 0 is set, 8 ms is assumed.


- 1362 -

3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN).

M, S, T, B code

MF, SF, TF, BF signal

FIN sigal

Ignored because shorterthan min. signal width

Valid because longerthan min. signal width

NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a

multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. Example When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 0 is set, 8 ms is assumed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3104 PPD


#3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set

0: Not preset 1: Preset

NOTE If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative

position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position display: (1) Manual reference position return (2) Coordinate system setting based on G92 (G50 for G code

system A on the T series) (3) Workpiece coordinate system presetting based on G92.1

(G50.3 for G code system A on the T series) (4) When a T code for the T series is specified.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3105 PCF



- 1363 -

[Data type] Bit path

#1 PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC-controlled axes to the actual speed display 0: Added 1: Not added

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 NDFx


#3 NDFx In calculation for actual cutting feedrate display, the feedrate of a selected axis is:

0: Considered. 1: Not considered.

NOTE When using the electronic gear box function (EGB) (M series), set

1 for the EGB dummy axis to suppress position display.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE


#0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC-controlled axes

0: Valid 1: Invalid The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx depends on the setting of bit 1 of parameter No. 8006.

#2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control 0: Same signals as those used for the CNC 1: Signals specific to the PMC The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.

Signals No.8001#2=0

(same signals as those used for the CNC)

No.8001#2=1 (signals specific to the PMC)

Feedrate override signals *FV0to*FV7 G012 *EFOV0to*EFOV7 G151 Override cancellation signal OVC G006.4 EOVC G150.5 Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,2 G014.0,1 EROV1,2 G150.0,1Dry run signal DRN G046.7 EDRN G150.7 Rapid traverse selection signal RT G019.7 ERT G150.6

(The signal addresses at PMC selection time are for the first group.)

#3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control 0: Invalid 1: Valid

#5 NCC When the program specifies a move command for a PMC-controlled axis (with the controlled axis selection signal *EAX set to 1) not placed under PMC axis control: 0: CNC command is valid. 1: The alarm (PS0130) is issued.


- 1364 -

#6 AUX In PMC axis control, the auxiliary function command (12H) output size is:

0: 1 byte (0 to 255) 1: 2 bytes (0 to 65535)

#7 SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC 0: Uses the same signal SKIP <X004.7 or X013.7> as CNC. 1: Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP <X004.6 or X013.6> used by the PMC.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 DWE RPD


#0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes

0: Feedrate specified with parameter No.1420 1: Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command by PMC

#1 DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis control when the increment system is IS-C 0: 1ms 1: 0.1ms

#3 F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control The following settings are applied when bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 and bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.

F10 IS-A IS-B IS-C 0 10 1 0.1Millimeter input

(mm/min) 1 100 10 10 0.1 0.01 0.001Inch input

(inch/min) 1 1 0.1 0.01

#4 PF1 #5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the

PMC. Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 Feedrate unit

0 0 1 / 10 1 1 / 101 0 1 / 1001 1 1 / 1000

#6 FR1 #7 FR2 Set the feedrate unit for cutting feedrate (feed per rotation) for an axis controlled by the

PMC. Bit 7 (FR2) of parameter

No. 8002 Bit 6 (FR1) of parameter

No. 8002 Millimeter input

(mm/rev) Inch input (inch/rev)

0 0 1 1

0.0001 0.000001

0 1 0.001 0.000011 0 0.01 0.0001


- 1365 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8003 FEX


NOTE When this parameter bit is set, the power must be turned off before


#3 FEX The maximum feedrate that can be achieved by the machine during cutting feed or continuous feed in PMC axis control is: 0: Not extended. 1: Extended. Restrictions • Parameters for setting the time constants for linear acceleration/deceleration after

interpolation and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation When as the acceleration/deceleration type, linear acceleration/ deceleration after

interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation is used for each of rapid traverse, cutting feed, and manual feed, the maximum allowable time constant is a half of the maximum value that can be set conventionally.

The time constant parameters used are as follows: Parameter No. Meaning

1620 Time constant (T) used for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis, or time constant (T1) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

1621 Time constant (T2) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

1622 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis 1624 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis 1626 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis 1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in

the mode of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation 5271 to 5274 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first to

fourth gears) 5365 to 5368 Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping (first to

fourth gears) • VCMD waveform display function As the feedrate increases, more data is acquired for VCMD waveform display,

which can prevent waveforms from being displayed correctly.

CAUTION 1 When this function is enabled, the feedrate is extended to the

maximum value that can be specified for cutting feed or continuous feed in PMC axis control if CMR is 1. If CMR is greater than 1, the feedrate is limited to a value smaller than the maximum value that can be specified.

2 Note that the maximum motor speed may be exceeded depending on the feedrate specified.


- 1366 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8004 NCI DSL JFM


#2 JFM This parameter sets the units used to specify feedrate data when continuous feed is

specified in axis control by the PMC.

Increment system

Bit 2 (JFM) of No. 8004

Millimeter input (mm/min)


Rotation axis (min-1)

0 1 0.01 0.00023IS-B 1 200 2.00 0.0460 0.1 0.001 0.000023IS-C 1 20 0.200 0.0046

#5 DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when PMC axis selection is disabled:

0: An alarm PS0139 is issued. 1: The change is valid, and no alarm is issued for an unspecified group.

#6 NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8005 EVP DRR R10 CDI EDC


#0 EDC In axis control by the PMC, an external deceleration function is:


#1 CDI In axis control by the PMC, when diameter programming is specified for a PMC-controlled axis: 0: The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius. 1: The amount of travel is specified with a diameter while the feedrate is specified with

a radius. This parameter is valid when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No.1006 is set to 1 (A move command for each axis is based on diameter specification.)

#2 R10 When the parameter RPD (bit 0 of parameter No.8002) is set to 1, the unit for specifying

a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is: 0: 1 mm/min. 1: 10mm/min.

#3 DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis control, the dry run function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

#4 EVP Speed command in PMC axis control is executed by: 0: Velocity control. 1: Position control.


- 1367 -

This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8006 EAL EZR EFD MLS


#1 MLS When bit 0(MLE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 (to disable the all axis machine lock

signal) in PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC axis control, the specification unit of feedrate data is: 0: Unchanged (1 times). 1: 100 times greater.

NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3(F10) of parameter No. 8002

is invalid.

#6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is: 0: Invalid.

With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm (PS0224) is not issued. 1: Valid.

A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an NC axis according to the setting of bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005.

#7 EAL In PMC axis control, resetting the CNC:

0: Does not release an alarm on the PMC controlled axis 1: Releases an alarm on the PMC controlled axis

If an alarm on the PMC controlled axis is released, the PCM controlled axis alarm signal (EIALg) is set to 0.

NOTE The CNC enters the reset state when:

<1> The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0. <2> The external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1. <3> The reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1. <4> The [RESET] MDI key is pressed.

In the case of <1>, all PMC-controlled axes are reset conventionally and the PMC-controlled axis alarm is released. This parameter can be used to reset the PMC-controlled axes on which the PMC-controlled axis alarm is issued and release the PMC-controlled axis alarm in the cases of <2> to <4>.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8007 ESY VCP



- 1368 -

#2 VCP Speed command in PMC axis control is:

0: FS10/11 type. 1: FS0i-C type.

#3 ESY In PMC axis control, external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8008 EMRx


#0 EMRx When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror image state, the mirror image is:

0: Not considered. 1: Considered. This parameter is valid in the mirror image mode set with the mirror image signals MI1 to MI5 <G106.0 to 4> set to 1 or bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No. 12 set to 1. If a movement is made along the same axis by doubly specifying a command with the CNC and PMC axis control when this parameter is set to 0, and the mirror image mode is set, a coordinate shift can occur afterwards. So, do not attempt to make such a movement.

8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] T series: 1 to 4 (for 1-path), 1 to 8 (for 2-path)

M series: 1 to 4 Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.

P8010 Description 1 DI/DO group A (G142 to G153) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) 2 DI/DO group B (G154 to G165) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) 3 DI/DO group C (G166 to G177) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) 4 DI/DO group D (G178 to G189) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO) 5 DI/DO group A (G1142 to G1153) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO) 6 DI/DO group B (G1154 to G1165) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO) 7 DI/DO group C (G1166 to G1177) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO) 8 DI/DO group D (G1178 to G1189) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO)

NOTE 1 When a value other than the above is set, the axis is not controlled

by the PMC. 2 For the axes to be controlled in the 2-path, use the 2-path DI/DO (5

to 8).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8013 ROP



- 1369 -

#3 ROP When rotation axis rollover is enabled for an axis controlled in PMC axis control, the direction in which a movement (rotation) is performed to reach an end point by a reference position return command 07H to 0AH (equivalent to G28, G30P2/P3/P4) is: 0: Determined by the sign of the specified value. 1: The direction in the shortest path.

NOTE ROPx is valid only when bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 is set

to 1 and bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8019 EOS


#0 EOS In external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) in PMC axis control,

the serial spindle to be synchronized is: 0: The first spindle of path 1. 1: Any spindle.

NOTE If EOS is set to 0, only the servo axis of path 1 can be specified.

8020 FL feedrate for reference position return along each axis in PMC axis control


(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) For each axis, this parameter sets a feedrate (FL feedrate) after deceleration for reference position return in PMC axis control.

NOTE If 0 is specified, the value of parameter No. 1425 is used.

8022 Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control


(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control.

8028 Time for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec


- 1370 -

[Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set for parameter No. 8032 or this parameter. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8032, the specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in this parameter, the acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.

8030 Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 4000

For each axis, this parameter sets a time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.

NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.

1622 is used. The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear

acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation.

8031 FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control


(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) For each axis, this parameters sets a lower feedrate limit (FL feedrate) for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.

NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.

1623 is used. However, be sure to set 0 in this parameter and parameter

No.1623 for all axes at all times except for special purposes. If a value other than 0 is specified, incorrect feed is carried out.

8032 Feedrate for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set for this parameter or parameter No. 8028. When 0 is set in this parameter, the specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8028, the acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.


- 1371 -

8040 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment when speed command in PMC axis control is executed by position control

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit) [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999

Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment when speed command in PMC axis control is executed by position control. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and is executed by position control (parameter EVP (No.8005#4) is 1).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11850 CMI


#0 CMI When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 and the rapid traverse rate is specified

by axis control block data signal in PMC axis control, the rapid traverse rate is represented: 0: In millimeters. 1: In the unit set by bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12730 PTC


#0 PTC Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a

speed command in PMC axis control is: 0: Normal. 1: Extended. This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).

12731 2nd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec/1000min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

When this parameter is set 0, 2nd time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 1st feedrate to 2nd

feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).


- 1372 -

12732 3rd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control


When this parameter is set 0, 3rd time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 2nd feedrate to 3rd feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

12733 4th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control


When this parameter is set 0, 4th time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 3rd feedrate to 4th feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

12734 5th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control


When this parameter is set 0, 5th time constant data is not available, and then acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 4th feedrate to 5th feedrate. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

12735 1st feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control


Set feedrate parameters as following. No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738. This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended (parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).


- 1373 -

12736 2nd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in

PMC axis control



12737 3rd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control



12738 4th feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control




- 1374 -

Alarm and message Servo and overtravel alarms for PMC axis control are detected in the same way as for CNC controlled axes. When an alarm is issued, the alarm signal EIALg is set to 1 for notification to the PMC in addition to normal alarm processing. (When an overtravel alarm is issued, the negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg or the positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to 1.) The alarm signal EIALg is reset using the reset signal ECLRg.

CAUTION If an alarm is issued by a PMC axis control command or in connection with PMC axis control, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 in addition to a reset operation on the NC.

- Alarms related to contention with the NC

Alarm (PS0130) In general, if the CNC and PMC attempt to simultaneously control an axis not subject to superimposition, the alarm (PS0130) is issued. This alarm is issued in the following cases: • When cutting feed with an override of 0% is performed along the axis, or the tool is temporarily

stopped along the axis (with the axis control temporary stop signal ESTP set to 1), this alarm is issued. (During feed hold or single block stop, a PMC axis control command is valid, not resulting in an alarm.)

• When a command is issued from the CNC for an axis controlled by the PMC • When a move command is issued from the PMC for an axis on the polar coordinate interpolation

plane in the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1 command) Alarm (PS5131) If a command related to polar coordinate interpolation is specified during PMC axis control, the alarm (PS5131) is issued.

- Alarms due to setting modifications made during PMC axis control Alarm (PS0139) If parameter No. 8010 is modified during PMC axis control, or the level of the control axis selection signal EAXx for an axis under PMC axis control is changed, the alarm (PS0139) is issued.

- Other alarms Alarm (PS0224) If a PMC axis control command is specified without performing a reference position return operation even once after the power is turned off when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0, the alarm (PS0224) is issued. Alarm (PS5065) If a PMC axis control command is executed by assigning axes with different increment systems to the same group, the alarm (PS5065) is issued.

Number Message Description PS0130 NC AND PMC AXIS ARE

CONFLICTED The NC command and the PMC axis control command were conflicted. Modify the program or ladder.

PS0139 CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS

The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC axis is being controlled.


- 1375 -

Number Message Description PS0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED 1) A reference position return has not been performed before

the start of automatic operation. (Only when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is 0) Perform a reference position return.

T 2) The spindle positioning axis is commanded when the mode

is not spindle positioning. Perform the spindle orientation.

PS5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC AXIS)

Axes having different increment systems have been specified in the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the setting of parameter No. 8010.

PS5130 NC AND PMC AXIS CONFLICT The NC command and the PMC axis control command were conflicted. Modify the program or the ladder.

PS5131 NC COMMAND IS NOT COMPATIBLE

The PMC axis control and a polar coordinate interpolation were specified simultaneously.

PS0220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHR-MODE

In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis. Modify the program or check the PMC ladder.

SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect. SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was

exceeded. SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified as

a parameter was exceeded.

Caution CAUTION

1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses have no effect. 2 CNC-controlled feed hold *SP, single block stop SBK, reset signal ERS, and

interlock of all axes or each axis are invalid for PMC axis control, but similar control is enabled by operating the PMC signals (ESTP, ESBK, and ECLR).

3 Emergency stop is enabled. 4 If cutting feed blocks are specified in succession, deceleration is not performed

between blocks (acceleration/deceleration is applied, however, when the specification of a feedrate changes), and cutting proceeds to the next block without waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. At the end of a block other than for cutting feed, the tool is temporarily decelerated. The next block is then executed after waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. When bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 is set to 1, cutting can proceed to the next block without making an in-position check for each block.

5 Under PMC axis control, manual absolute mode is always set. If the PMC starts control of an axis after manual intervention (manual continuous feed, manual handle feed, etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to 1), manual absolute mode is set.

6 Under PMC axis control, all commands are handled as axis commands. Even for the auxiliary functions, the position check is effective.

7 When the CNC executes the command to set the workpiece coordinate system setting (G54 to G59) during an axial movement by PMC axis control command, a valid coordinate system cannot be set.

8 If the alarm (PS0139) is issued due to a modification to parameter No. 8010, the alarm is issued with all paths. After resetting the alarm, input the reset signal ECLR for all groups before a start.


- 1376 -

CAUTION 9 When PMC controls an axis and then NC controls this one by the absolute or

incremental command in a series of NC program(s), this PMC command needs to control in the non-buffering M code block. You can proceed to next NC block only after you confirm the end of the PMC axis command. Until then, it needs to wait in the non-buffering M code block. Following sample program shows that Y axis moves by the NC command (N40) with the move of the axis after it moves by the PMC command. PMC axis command needs to control during the non-buffering M code block (N20). O0001 N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ; N20 M55 ; → Y axis moves by PMC axis command. N30 X70. ; N40 Y50. ; N50 M02 ; Please control under the following setting. - ‘M55’ is non-buffering M code. Please set parameter No.3411 to ‘55’. - During M55 block, start PMC axis command. - Until this PMC command finishes, NC program needs to wait in M55 block.

When the NC program is the incremental command, to perform the feed hold or single block stop of automatic operation after PMC axis operation and then restart automatic operation, reflect the amount of movement by PMC axis control to the program coordinate system.

10 Both feed-forward and advanced preview feed-forward function are unavailable for PMC axis.

Note

NOTE 1 The actual speed excluding the effect of movement along a PMC-controlled axis

can be displayed if the ZDF bit (bit 3 of parameter No. 3115) is set to "1". 2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference position is retained in

memory, even after the power is turned off. 3 For an index table indexing axis, no PMC axis control command can be

specified. 4 The individual output of the auxiliary function is provided by adding a signal for

individual output. The timing diagram of controlling and specifying the auxiliary function is not changed. The normal specifications of the auxiliary functions for PMC axis control function are applied.


- 1377 -

16.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

Overview In the external data input function, the CNC can be operated by the external data which use the signal of PMC. This function is an optional function. There are following functions in the external data input. - External tool offset - External program number search - External work coordinate system shift - External machine zero point shift - External alarm message - External operator message - Substitution of the number of machined parts and number of required parts

Explanation - The basic external data input procedure

The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.

Signal name Input signal Output signal Address signal for external data input EA0 to EA6 Data signal for external data input ED0 to ED31 Read signal for external data input ESTB Read completion signal for external data input EREND Search completion signal for external data input ESEND

The basic external data input procedure is described below: (1) The PMC sets the address signals, EA0 to EA6 that indicate the data type and data signals ED0 to

ED31. (2) The PMC sets the read signal ESTB to “1”. (3) When the ESTB signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address. (4) After reading the address, the control unit sets the read completion signal EREND to “1”. (5) When the EREND signal is set to “1”, the PMC sets the ESTB signal, to 0. (6) When the ESTB signal is set to “0”, the control unit sets the EREND signal to 0. This completes the

data input procedure. New data can now be entered. The timing diagram is shown below:


- 1378 -

No. Item

ESTB

EA6

EA5

EA4

EA3

EA2

EA1

EA0 ED31 to ED16 ED15 to ED0

1 External program number search

1 0 0 0 X X X X-

Program number (BCD 4 digits with unsign)

2 External tool offset 1 0 0 1 X X X X Offset value (BCD 8 digits with sign) *Note 1 3 External workpiece

coordinate system shift 1 0 1 0 axis code Shift value (BCD 8 digits with sign) *Note 1

4 External machine zero point shift

1 0 1 1 axis code -

Machine zero point shift value(binary)

±0 to 9999 *Note 2 Alarm set 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

- Alarm No. (binary)

0 to 999 (0 to 4095) Alarm clear 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

- Alarm No. (binary)

0 to 999 (0 to 4095) Operator message

set 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

- Message No. (binary) 0 to 999 (0 to 4095)

Operator message clear

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1-

Message No. (binary) 0 to 999 (0 to 4095)

5

Message 1 1 0 0 0 X 1 1 - Character (Character code) Substitute No. of parts

required 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

- No. of parts required

(BDC4 digits with unsign) 6

Substitute No. of parts machined

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1-

No. of parts machined (BDC4 digits with unsign)

BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) Method of representing one digit of a decimal number using a 4-digit binary number

NOTE 1 When bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 is set to 0, BCD 4 digits are used. By setting bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 to 1, an offset value/shift value of

±0 to 79999999 can be specified using ED0 to ED31.

EA0-EA6

ED0-ED15

ESTB

EREND

ESEND Only for external program number search

End of search

Fig. 16.2(a) Timing diagram of External data input


- 1379 -

NOTE 2 By setting bit 7 (EEX) of parameter No. 6300 to 1, a shift value of ±0 to

999999999 can be specified using ED0 to ED31.

NOTE For axis code, refer to the following table.

Axis code Axis

EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 1st axis 0 0 0 0 2nd axis 0 0 0 1 3rd axis 0 0 1 0 4th axis 0 0 1 1 5th axis 0 1 0 0 6th axis 0 1 0 1 7th axis 0 1 1 0 8th axis 0 1 1 1

- External Program Number Search

A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from an extended source and is selected in the CNC memory. For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can automatically select the program to be executed corresponding to a specific workpiece. Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of CNC mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state in MEM mode. The ESEND signal switches from “0” to “1” on completion of external program number search. This signal does not turn to “0” unless the cycle start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use ESEND to initiate a cycle start signal after the search. Because a search operation is deferred until a reset occurs in the MEM mode, an external program number search attempted during a CNC operation (OP = 1) results in the program being started immediately after the end of an automatic operation in a sequence in which the automatic operation is started by checking only the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input). For this reason, using the ESC parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 6300) enables an external program number search to be canceled at a CNC reset. Concretely, if a reset signal is input between the time the ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) is input and the time a search would be executed, setting the ESC parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 6300) to 1 keeps the search from being executed. At the same time, the controller uses the ESCAN (search cancel signal for external data input) signal to inform the PMC that the search has been canceled. The ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input) will not become 1, because the search is canceled. The controller checks the state of the RST (NC reset) signal for a reset input between the rising edge of the ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) and the start of the search. Concretely, the controller cancels the external program number search if the RST (NC reset) signal becomes 1 even momentarily in this period. The ESCAN signal (search cancel signal for external data input) becomes high at the beginning of the search. However, it becomes low when the next search is executed (for example, when a cycle start or reset signal is input), similarly to the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input).


- 1380 -

Read signal for external data input (ESTB) Read completion signal for externaldata input (EREND) If RST becomes 1 even momentarily in this period

Reset signal (RST)

ESEND does not become high. Search completion signal for external datainput (ESEND)

ESCAN becomes high at the beginning of a search

Search cancel signal for external data input(ESCAN)

ESTB positive-going edge Beginning of search Fig. 16.2(b) Timing diagram of External data input

NOTE 1 The external program number search is available when parameter

ESR(No.6300#4) is set to “1”. 2 In reset state the automatic operation lamp is off. If the start button is pushed in

the cycle operation stop or hold state, search execution starts from the actual position indicated by the pointer.

3 When there is no program stored in memory corresponding to the set program number, the alarm DS1128 occurs.

4 When the program number search is set to 0, the alarm DS0059 occurs. 5 Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the

mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state. Therefore, in case that the PMC sequence, which the cycle start is executed by checking search completion signal for external data input only, is used, if the external program number search is commanded twice, the program is executed twice. ( When CNC accepts a command of the program number search, the command is not cancelled even if CNC becomes reset state by external reset signal and so on.) (See Fig. 16.2(c)) If the program execution after reset becomes a problem, please make the PMC sequence not to execute the cycle start after reset.


- 1381 -

Read signal for external data input (ESTB)

2nd command

Read completion signal for external data input (EREND)

Search command is kept.

Search completion signal for external data input (ESEND)

2nd program search

2nd program execution NC reset

Cycle start signal (ST)

Cycle start lamp signal (STL)

Automatic operation signal(OP)

External reset signal (ERS)

Reset signal (RST)

Fig. 16.2(c) External program search and program execution after NC reset

- External Tool offset These signals provide for changing the tool compensation value via the PMC. When the offset number is specified by a part program, data input from the PMC is added to the offset value. The offset value can also be used as input data itself by specifying the input signal. When the machine tool is equipped with automatic tools or workpiece measuring functions, the offset value can be corrected using this function, by inputting the error from the correct value into the CNC via PMC. If the tool compensation value is externally input when offset number 0 is specified in a part program (an offset cancel) in the lathe turning machine, the workpiece coordinate system shifts by the entered quantity. The external tool offset range is +/ - 79999999. (* Note 3) However, the unit and set range depend on the settings of the set unit and set range of the tool offset amount.

NOTE 1 When data is out of range, the alarm DS1128 occurs. 2 Writing to a function not enabled by the parameter setting issues the alarm

DS1121. 3 If Parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “1”, the Data area can be specified by

32bit data specification. A value in the range from ±0 to ±79999999 can be specified in this case.


- 1382 -

Data specification for external tool offset (For milling machine)

Address Data *1

E

A

6

E

A

5

E

A

4

E

A

3

E

A

2

E

A

1

E

A

0

E

D

31

E

D

30

. . . E

D

1

E

D

0

0 0 1 a/i

g/w 0 r/l Sign

0: + Specified by BCD 8-digit code 1: - (0 to +/- 79999999) *1

0 Incremental specification (Input value is added to present compensation value)

a/i 1 Absolute specification

(Input value is replaced with present compensation value)

0 Specification of tool wear offset value g/w

1 Specification of tool geometry offset value

0 Specification of tool length compensation value r/l

1 Specification of cutter compensation value

Notice 1: If the parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “0”, the offset value is specified by using signals

ED0 to ED14, the sign is decided by the signal ED15.

The range of data is available to specify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.

Offset value


- 1383 -

Data specification for external tool offset (For the lathe turning machine)

Address Data *1

E

A

6

E

A

5

E

A

4

E

A

3

E

A

2

E

A

1

E

A

0

E

D

31

E

D

30

. . . E

D

1

E

D

0

0 0 1 a/i

g/w Sign

0: + Specified by BCD 8-digit code 1: - (0 to +/- 79999999) *1

0 Incremental specification (Input value is added to present compensation value)

a/i 1 Absolute specification

(Input value is replaced with present compensation value)

0 Specification of tool wear offset value g/w

1 Specification of tool geometry offset value

EA1=0,

EA0=0

Specification of X axis offset

EA1=0,

EA0=1

Specification of Z axis offset X/Z/R

EA1=1,

EA0=0

Specification of tool nose radius

compensation value

Notice 1: If the parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “0”, the offset value is specified by using signals

ED0 to ED14, the sign is decided by the signal ED15.

The range of data is available to specify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.

Offset value X/Z/R


- 1384 -

- External workpiece coordinate system shift In the external workpiece coordinate system shift, the shift value can be externally modified by the signal of PMC. Each axis has this shift value (parameter No. 1220), and this shift value is added to all the workpiece coordinate systems in common. The shift value is not lost by cutting off the power supply. The shift value can not only be added to the current work coordinate system shift but also be substituted for the current value. The value range is 0 to + / - 79999999. The unit and setting range are the same as the Tool offset.

NOTE If Parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “1”, the data area can be specified by

32bit data specification. Under the setting, the external tool compensation range is up to +/ - 79999999.

- External machine zero point shift

The machine coordinate system can be externally shifted by inputting a shift value. When the shift value is input, compensation is immediately applied to the corresponding axis and the axis moves. The position accuracy can be improved by combining this function with sensors. The specification to shift the axis is the same as the external workpiece coordinate system shift. The compensation value is specified in signals ED0 to ED15 using a binary code ranging from 0 to ±9999. This compensation value must be specified in absolute value. The value which the machine actually moves at input is the difference from the previously stored value. After the Reference point is established, this function becomes effective. The shift amount is memorized though the machine is not moved when the shift amount is input before the Reference point is established. When the Reference point is established afterwards, the machine is moved for the memorized shift amount.

NOTE If Parameter EEX (No.6300#7) is set to “1”, the Data area can be specified by

32bit data specification. Under the setting, the external machine zero point shift range is up to +/ - 999999999.

CAUTION

When a large value of compensation is applied at one time, an alarm such as "excessive error on stop" may occur. In this case, input the compensation in several smaller increments.

- External message (a) External alarm message

By sending alarm number from PMC, the CNC is brought to an alarm status; an alarm message is sent to the CNC, and the message is displayed on the screen of the CNC. Reset of alarm status is also done with external data. Up to 4 alarm numbers (16 alarm numbers when bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931 is set to 1) and messages can be sent at a same time. Up to 32 characters can be sent in an alarm message. In case of using a 2-path system, the alarm will be set separately for each path. Also the alarm is set separately for one. It is available to select the range of alarm number and the display form by setting the parameter EXA (No.6301#0).


- 1385 -

EXA (No.6301#0) = 0 - Alarm number 0 to 999 can be sent. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC

displays them by adding 1000 to an alarm number. EXA (No.6301#0) = 1 - Alarm number 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC displays them with prefix characters “EX” to an

alarm number for display.

(b) External operator message Message to the operator is given by the signal of PMC, and the message is displayed. The operator messages can be cleared by external data. Up to 4 message numbers (bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931) can be sent at a same time. Up to 256 characters can be sent in an operator message. In case of using a multi-path system, the operator message is common resource for plural path of machine group. It is set each machine group. It is available to display the operator message by using the primary path signal of machine group. It is available to select the range of message number and the display form by setting the parameter EXM (No.6301#1). EXM (No.6301#1) = 0 The message numbers 0 to 999 can be sent. The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC displays them by adding 2000 to an alarm number. When a message from 100 to 999 is displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its text is displayed. EXM (No.6301#1) = 1 The message numbers 0 to 4095 can be sent. The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message. The CNC displays them with prefix characters "EX" to an alarm for display. When a message number from 100 to 4095 is displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its text is displayed. Data specification method in external message

Item EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 ED15 to ED0(binary) Alarm set 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alarm No. Alarm clear 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Alarm No. Operator message list 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 Message No. Operator message clear 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Message No. Message 1 0 0 0 X 1 1 Character(Note)

NOTE Two characters are sent at a time (See ISO code given in the table below.) ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . . Character code in 1st character ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character When sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code smaller than 20 and it will be ignored.


- 1386 -

- Substitution of the number of required parts and number of machined parts Substitution is possible for the number of parts required and the number of parts machined.

Data specification for No. of parts required and No. of partsmachined.

Address Data E A 6

E A 5

E A 4

E A 3

E A 2

E A 1

EA0

E D 15

...........

E D 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0/1 MSB LSB Value of parts no.

(1) (2) (3) (1) Set to 110000 (2) 0: No. of parts required 1: No. of parts machined (3) BCD 4-digit code (0000 to 9999)

Signals Address signals for external data input EA0 to EA6 <Gn002.6 – Gn002.0>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals indicate the type of the entered data.

Data signals for external data input ED0 to ED31 <Gn211, Gn210,Gn000, Gn001>



- 1387 -

[Function] These signals indicate the entered data. The use of the 32 code signals (16 code signals) varies with the data type.

Read signal for external data input ESTB <Gn002.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] The signal reports that the address and data are set in external data input.

When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address and data for external data input.

Read completion signal for external data input EREND <Fn060.0>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered data.

Search completion signal for external data input ESEND <Fn060.1>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal report that program number search, specified by external data input, has been

completed. [Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” when:

- The program number search specified by external data input is completed. The signal is set to “0” when: - An automatic operation is started. - A reset occurs.

Search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN<Fn060.2>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies PMC of the cancellation of a program number search. [Output cond.] When a reset is input between the time read signal for external data input ESTB is input

and the time a search is executed in the external program number search function, if bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1, the search is not executed. At this time, the control unit sets search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN to 1 instead of setting search completion signal for external data input ESEND to 1.

NOTE This signal is enabled when bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0

Gn001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8

Gn002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0



Fn060 ESCAN ESEND EREND


- 1388 -

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6300 EEX ESR ESC


# 3 ESC When a reset is input between input of the external data input read signal ESTB and

execution of a search, the external program number search function: 0 : Performs a search. 1 : Does not perform a search.

# 4 ESR External program number search 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled

# 7 EEX PMC EXIN function 0 : Conventional specifications 1 : Extended specifications If you want to handle unavailable data with the PMC/EXIN command according to the conventional specifications, such as an shift value is up to +/- 10000 in the external machine zero point shift, set this bit to 1. To use this function for 2-path control, the setting for the first path (main) is used. The EXIN specifications cannot be changed for each path. For details of EXIN and how to change ladder software, refer to the PMC specifications and other manuals.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6301 NNO EXM EXA

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit machine group

#0 EXA This bit selects an external alarm message specification.

0 : A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The CNC adds 1000 to an alarm number for distinction from general alarms.

1 : A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to an alarm number for display.

#1 EXM This bit selects an external operator message specification.

0 : A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The message of a message number from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC adds 2000 to a number for distinction. A message number from 100 to 999 is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.

1 : A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The message of a message number from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to a message number for display. A message number from 100 to 4095 is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.


- 1389 -

#2 MNO When operator messages are set by external data input, a new line operation between one message set with a number and another message set with a different number is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed.

6310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word machine group [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 0 to 4095


operation is continued. This parameter sets the number of messages to which message numbers are to be prefixed in external operator message display. When 0 is set, the same operation as when 100 is set is performed. Example) When 500 is set in this parameter, the messages of message numbers 0 to 499 are

displayed together with their numbers on the screen. A message number of 500 and up is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

11931 M16




#1 M16 The maximum number of external alarm messages or external operator messages that can be displayed in connection with external data input or external messages is: 0: 4 1: 16

Alarm and message Number Message Description DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT

FOUND The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No. search could not be found. There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset (tool data), but either no tool numbers have been input since power ON or there is no data for the entered tool No.

DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator message or external alarm message, but five or more displays were required simultaneously.

DS0132 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT FOUND

An attempt to cancel an external operator message or external alarm message failed because the specified message number was not found.


- 1390 -

Number Message Description DS0133 TOO LARGE NUMBER A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external

operator message or the external alarm message number. DS1120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS

(HIGH) The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O interface address signal are set to an undefined address (high bits).

DS1121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW)

The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O interface address signal are set to an undefined address (low bits).

DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals ED0 to ED31 has exceeded the permissible range.

DS1130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED

No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a sequence No. search as the system is not in the memory mode or the reset state.

DS1131 EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER) [External Data I/O] An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a tool No. during loading by the G10 code.

16.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT

Overview The conventional external machine zero point shift value function cannot make shifts on multiple axes simultaneously. With this extended function, external machine zero point shifts can be performed on all controlled axes. An external machine zero point shift value is to be set in a parameter-set R area. A shift value must be specified using a binary code, and the absolute value of a number from -32767 to 32767 must be specified.

Explanation - Setting

This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (EMS) of parameter No. 1203 to 1. Enter a desired external machine zero point shift value at the location starting at the address (R area of the PMC) set in parameter No. 1280. If 100 is set in parameter No. 1280, enter shift values at the location starting at R100 of the PMC. Set an even number in parameter No. 1280. Example) When 100 is set in parameter No. 1280 R0100 External machine zero point shift value for the 1st axis (Low) R0101 External machine zero point shift value for the 1st axis (High) R0102 External machine zero point shift value for the 2nd axis (Low) R0103 External machine zero point shift value for the 2nd axis (High) : : R(0100+2(n-1)) External machine zero point shift value for the n-th axis (Low) R(0100+2(n-1)+1) External machine zero point shift value for the n-th axis (High)

- Shift value

Specify a shift value by using a two-byte binary code for each axis. A value from -32767 to 32767 can be specified. A shift value is assumed to be specified as an absolute value. The unit is the detection unit.


- 1391 -

Example) Suppose that the incremental system is IS-B, the machine is a millimeter machine (bit 0 of parameter

No. 1001 = 0), the detection unit is 0.0002 mm (CMR (parameter No. 1820) = 10), and parameter No. 1280 is set to 100. When the following values are written to the R area : R102 = 11001100 (CCh) R103 = 11101101 (EDh) the machine position on the second axis is shifted, and the shift value at that time is: EDCCh [pulse] * 0.0002 [mm/pulse] = -0.932 mm

- Relationship with the error compensation functions

This function is superposed on error compensation functions such as the pitch error compensation function and straightness compensation function.

- Coordinate system If the machine is moved by this function, the coordinates are not updated.

- 2-path control In 2-path control, the locations of the R area are used in ascending order of axis numbers in the paths as shown in the example below. Example) When, in parameter No. 1280, 100 is set for path 1 and 200 is set for path 2

Signal Extended external machine zero point shift signal EMZ0 to EMZ15 <Rn to

Rn+2*controlled axis count-1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Sets an external machine zero point shift value. [Operation] When an external machine zero point shift value is set with this signal, the machine

position is shifted by the specified value. A set value is regarded as an absolute value. As a signal address, specify an arbitrary R address with parameter No. 1280.

Axis number Path (No.981) Shift value of path 1 1 1 R100—101

2 2 R101—102 3 2 R103—104

4 1 Shift value of path 2

5 2 R200—201

6 1 R201—202

R203—204


- 1392 -

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Rｎ EMZ7 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0

Rｎ+1 EMZ15 EMZ14 EMZ13 EMZ12 EMZ11 EMZ10 EMZ9 EMZ8 :

Rn+2*controlled axis

count-1 EMZ15 EMZ14 EMZ13 EMZ12 EMZ11 EMZ10 EMZ9 EMZ8

n represents the value set in parameter No. 1280.

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1203 EMS


#0 EMS The extended external machine zero point shift function is:


NOTE 1 To use the extended external machine zero point shift function, the

external machine zero point shift function or the external data input function is required.

2 When the extended external machine zero point shift function is enabled, the conventional external machine zero point shift function is disabled.

1280 Start address of signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift function

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] Even number from 0 to 32767

Set the start address for signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift function. If a nonexistent address is specified, this function is disabled. If 100 is specified, for example, addresses starting at R100 are used with this function. The end R address used depends on the number of controlled axes. For 5-axis control, R100 to R109 are used.

NOTE 1 If a nonexistent R address or an address in the system area is set,

this function is disabled. 2 Set an even number in this parameter.


- 1393 -

Warning and Note WARNING

1 When writing an external machine zero point shift value to the R area, write a shift value for one axis as a word. If data for one axis is written in two operations, one byte in one operation, an incorrect shift operation can result.

2 When writing data with the PMC or FOCAS2 function, provide an interval of about 8 ms after one write operation before starting the next write operation. If this write timing is not observed, an incorrect shift operation can result.

3 Set an even number in parameter No. 1280.

16.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH

Overview A machining program stored in the part program memory can be started by an external signal. When automatic operation is started in the memory operation mode during the reset state, the program is searched for from a specified workpiece number and then executed from the beginning. For a machine with a function for automatically loading several types of workpieces, this function can be used to automatically select and execute the program according to the workpiece.

Signal External workpiece number search signals PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,PN16 <G0009.0 to

G0009.4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals specify a workpiece number to be executed in the memory operation mode.

These are 5-bit code signals and correspond to the workpiece numbers as shown below (binary codes).

Workpiece number search signals PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1

Workpiece number

0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0 0 1 0 02

Omission 1 1 1 1 0 30 1 1 1 1 1 31

Of these numbers, workpiece number 00 has special meaning "making no search". Therefore, a number from 01 to 31 can be specified as a workpiece number.

NOTE The signals are also used to specify a file number for finding the

beginning of the file in inputting an external program.

[Operation] Searches the program number corresponding to the workpiece number specified by these signals when: Automatic operation is started (the automatic operation start signal (ST) changes from 1 to 0) in the memory operation mode if automatic operation is in the reset state (the automatic operation signal (OP) is 0). When the workpiece number is 00, however, no search is carried out. The searched program is used in: • Automatic operation in the memory operation mode • Foreground edit in the memory edit mode


- 1394 -

Extended external workpiece number search signals EPN0 to EPN13 <G0024.0 to

G0025.5> [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals specify a workpiece number to be executed in the memory operation mode.

The correspondence with the workpiece numbers is shown below (binary codes).

Workpiece number search signals E P N 13

EPN12

E P N 11

E P N 10

EPN9

EPN8

EPN7

EPN6

EPN5

EPN4

EPN3

E P N 2

E P N 1

E P N 0

Workpiece number

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0002

Omission 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 9998 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 9999

Of these numbers, workpiece number 0000 has special meaning "making no search". Therefore, a number from 0001 to 9999 can be specified as a workpiece number. These signals are used in place of the external workpiece number search signals (PN1 to PN16) when the signal is selected by bit 1 (EPN) of parameter No. 3006.

[Operation] Operation of these signals is same as operation of external workpiece number search signals.

External workpiece number search start signal EPNS <G0025.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal executes only the search function of the workpiece number search and does

not perform automatic operation. When this signal changes from 1 to 0, the search function is executed. When bit 2 (EPS) of parameter No. 3006 is set to 1, this signal is enabled and the search function by ST is disabled.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G0009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1

G0024 EPN7 EPN6 EPN5 EPN4 EPN3 EPN2 EPN1 EPN0

G0025 EPNS EPN13 EPN12 EPN11 EPN10 EPN9 EPN8

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3006 EPS EPN



- 1395 -

#1 EPN The signals for specifying a workpiece number in an external workpiece number search are: 0: The external workpiece number search signals (PN1 to PN16). (A number from 1

to 31 can be specified.) 1: The extended external workpiece number search signals (EPN0 to EPN13). (A

number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.)

#2 EPS As the signal for starting external workpiece number search: 0: The automatic operation start signal ST is used. When automatic operation (memory

operation) is started, a search is made. 1: The external workpiece number search start signal EPNS is used. ST does not start a

search.

Alarm and message Number Message Description DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND The program corresponding to the specified workpiece No.

could not be found.

16.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT

Overview MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when the operator performs MDI key operation.

Signal - Signal list

Control is realized by exchanging the following interface signals between the PMC and CNC: Signal name Abbreviation

External key input mode selection signal (input) ENBKY Key code signals (input) EKC0 to EKC7 Key code read signal (input) EKSET Key code read completion signal (output) EKENB Key input disable signal (output) INHKY Program screen display mode signal (output) PRGDPL Program screen display mode signal (output) PRGDPL


- 1396 -

- Signal detail The processing flow in the PMC is shown below.

(START)

< EKSET = EKENB >

Set key code

Invert EKSET

< Has key input ended? >

< INHKY = 0 >

< INHKY = 0 >

< EKSET = EKENB >

Set ENBKY = 0

(END)

1) Set the external key input control mode. Set ENBKY = 1

2) Check whether a key code can be set.

3) When a key code can be set: (1) Set the key code to be input. (2) Invert the EKSET signal to instruct the CNC to read the key code.

4) Repeat the operation for the key data to be input

5) After reporting the last data, check that the CNC has readthe key data.

6) Release external key input control mode.

no

yes

no

no

no

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

NOTE Read processing is controlled by exclusive-ORing (XOR) the key code read

signal (EKSET) with the read completion signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once reading has been completed, the CNC inverts the EKENB signal to match its logic with that of the EKSET signal.

In the PMC, on the other hand, a new key code cannot be set while the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic.

External key input mode selection signal ENBKY<Gn066.1>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] While this signal is turned on "1", external key input control is enabled. In external key

input control mode, any MDI key operations are ignored.

NOTE 1 When ENBKY is set to 1 to enable external key input control, key

code input based on the C language executor is also ignored. 2 Key codes input with the external key input function can be read by

the macro executor and C language executor.


- 1397 -

NOTE

3 Even when external key input control is enabled, pressing the key on the MDI keyboard

for 5 seconds can produce a hard copy of the screen.

Pressing the key while a hard copy of the screen is being produced can cancel the production of a hard copy of the screen.

Even if the key code of the key is input with the external key input function, the production of a hard copy of the screen cannot be stopped.

For details, see "Screen hard copy function".

Key code read signal EKSET<G066.7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal instructs the CNC to read the input key code.

If the logical state of this signal is opposite to the logical sate of the key code read completion signal EKENB, a key code read is specified.

Key code signals EKC0 to EKC7<G098>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals set an input key code.

Key input disable signal INHKY<F053.0>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] While this signal is "1", no key code is accepted in external key input control mode. [Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 during program editing or program input/output.

Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL<F053.1>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal posts whether the CNC is displaying the program screen. [Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 when the program screen is displayed.

Key code read completion signal EKENB<F053.7>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that the CNC has read a key code. [Output cond.] When the CNC completes key code read operation, the logical state of this signal is set to

the same state as for the key code read signal EKSET.

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G066 EKSET ENBKY

G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0

F053 EKENB PRGDPL INHKY


- 1398 -

MDI key code Codes in the table are given in hexadecimal. For example, corresponds to 41H in hexadecimal. corresponds to 90H in hexadecimal.

- MDI Key Code Table (00H to 7FH) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Space 0 @ P

1 1 A Q

2 2 B R

3 # 3 C S

4 4 D T

5 5 E U

6 & 6 F V

7 7 G W

8 ( 8 H X

9 ) 9 I Y

A ; (EOB)

* J Z

B + K [

C , L

D - (Minus)

= M ]

E . N

F / ? O _ (Underline)

A


- 1399 -

- MDI Key Code Table (80H to FFH) 8 9 A B C D E F

0 RESET [F0] (Note2)

1 [F1] (Note2)

2 [F2] (Note2)

3 [F3] (Note2)

4 INSERT [F4] (Note2)

5 DELETE [F5] (Note2)

6 CAN ALTER [F6] (Note2)

7 [F7] (Note2)

8 Cursor →

INPUT POS [F8] (Note2)

9 Cursor ←

PROG [F9] (Note2)

A Cursor ↓

HELP OFFSET SETTING

B Cursor ↑

SYSTEM

C MESSAGE

D GRAPH

(CUSTOM)

(Note1)

E PAGE ↓

CUSTOM

(Note1)

[FR] (Note2)

F PAGE ↑

FAPT [FL] (Note2)

NOTE 1 For the small keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to .

For the standard keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to . 0EEH is assigned to

.


- 1400 -

NOTE 2 Handling of the soft keys [F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key codes for the soft

keys. They are associated with the MDI keys as shown below. Key configuration for 7-soft key type LCD, or etc. : 5 keys + 2 keys ([F0] to [F4]

and [FR], [FL]) Key configuration for 12-soft key type LCD, or etc.: 10 keys + 2 keys ([F0] to [F9]

and [FR], [FL])

16.6 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL

Overview This function enables the following three operations in pushing the switch installed in the machine only by the change in a minimum LADDER program. (1) Changes to MEM mode. (2) Execution of macro program registered in memory. (3) Return to the mode before macro program is executed.

And the program which had been selected before macro program is executed is automatically selected.

This function is enabled only in the reset status (not during a reset). That is, this function cannot be used during automatic operation (including stopping and suspending of automatic operation), a reset, or an emergency stop.

Explanation - Sequence between PMC and CNC

The signal must be processed between PMC and CNC according to the following procedures.

Start (1) The macro call start signal (MCSTx) is input from PMC to CNC based on the signal from the macro

call switch installed in the machine.

Mode change (2) CNC outputs the mode notification signal and the mode change request signal (MCRQ) when the

macro call start signal (MCSTx) is detected. At this time, MEM mode is notified as the mode notification signal. The macro call executing signal (MCEXE) and Call program confirmation signal(MCEXx) are output at the same time.

(3) PMC must change the mode based on the signal output in the step of above (2).

[F4] [F3] [F2] [F1] [F0] [FR][FL]

[F9] [F8] [F7] [F1] [F0] [FR] [FL] . . . . . .


- 1401 -

(4) Please set “1” in the mode change completion signal (MCFIN) by PMC when the mode change is completed. If this mode is difference from that specified from the CNC in (2) or the reset mode, an alarm (PS5306) occurs.

Execution of macro program

(5) When MCFIN signal is set to “1”, CNC executes the macro program.

End of macro program (6) Please instruct M02 or M30 at the end of the macro program.

Moreover, please input external reset signal (ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) with M02 or M30 on the PMC side. Upon completion of the reset, the program selected before execution of the macro is automatically selected. The mode change request signal(MCRQ) and mode notification signals are output at the same time. At this time, the mode when macro call start signal (MCSTx) is input is notified as the mode notification signal.

Return of mode

(7) Please change the mode on the PMC side based on the signal output in the step of above (6). (8) Please set “1” in Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) on the PMC side when the mode change

is completed. On the CNC side, the Mode change request signal (MCRQ), the Macro call executing signal (MCEXE) and the Call program confirmation signal(MCEXx) are set to “0” concurrently with asserting of the Mode change completion signal (MCFIN). The PS5306 alarm is not checked at this time.

The following Figure shows the above-mentioned sequence.

Mode MEM before macro

MCEXE (CNC→PMC)

Mode Change process(PMC)

MCFIN (PMC→CNC)

MCRQ (CNC→PMC)

MCEXx (CNC→PMC)

Program Execution (CNC)

ERS or RRW (PMC→CNC)

M30 or M02 (CNC→PMC)

MCSTx (PMC→CNC)

Least 32ms

Mode notification signal(CNC→PMC)

before macro execution MEM

indefinite


- 1402 -

- Interruption of sequence

Interruption by reset or emergency stop

When the started macro is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop before being completed, the abnormal end signal (MCSP) becomes 1 and stops the execution of the program. Then, when the reset is completed or the emergency stop is cleared, if the MEM mode is entered, the mode change request signal (MCRQ) and the mode notification signal are output for mode recovery and the selection program is recovered. (In a non-MEM mode, the system waits until the MEM mode is entered.) On the PMC side, be sure to set the mode change completion signal (MCFIN) to 1 to complete the sequence, regardless of whether mode recovery is made.

Feed hold or single block The abnormal end signal (MCSP) is not output when stopping in feed hold or single block. Under such a condition, when the cycle start signal (ST) is turned on and off, the continuity of the macro program is executed. Under such a condition, even if macro call start signal (MCSTx) is turned on and off, it is not effective. Under such a condition, when reset or emergency stop are input, the operation which is described in “Interruption by reset or emergency stop” is executed.

Stop by alarm When the execution of macro program is stopped by alarm, the abnormal end signal (MCSP) is output. Under such a condition, when reset or the emergency stop are input, the operation which is described in “Interruption by reset or emergency stop” is executed. Following Figure shows the timing chart of each signal when the sequence is interrupted by alarm.


- 1403 -

MCRQ (CNC→PMC)

MCEXE (CNC→PMC)

Mode notification signal(CNC→PMC)

MEM before macro execution

Mode indefinite MEM before macro execution

Mode Change process(PMC)

MCEXx (CNC→PMC)

MCFIN (PMC→CNC)

AL(Alarm) (CNC→PMC)

Reset

Program Execution (CNC)

MCSP (CNC→PMC)

MCSTx (PMC→CNC)

Least 32ms

Note NOTE 1 Even if the macro call is being executed, mode selection signal (MD1,MD2,MD4)

is effective. Therefore, please change the LADDER program to disable the mode change when the macro call executing signal (MCEXE) is “1” when the inconvenience is caused if the mode change is done.

2 The macro call start signal (MCSTx) is effective only the reset state. The macro call cannot be started during automatic operation (automatic operation stop state, automatic operation suspend state, and automatic operation start state), a reset, or an emergency stop. If an attempt is made to start macro program during automatic operation, a reset, or an emergency stop, an alarm (PS5306) occurs.

3 The called macro program must end with M02 or M30. And please input external reset signal (ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) from the PMC side when these M codes are executed. If above two condition is not implemented, neither the return of the mode nor the return of the selection program are done after the program ends.

4 When the specified program is not registered in the memory, the alarm DS0059 is generated. The operation in this case becomes the shown in “Stop by alarm”.


- 1404 -

Signal Macro call start signal MCSTx <Gn512.0 to Gn513.7>

[Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal starts the macro call sequence.

When the standing fall of this signal is detected, CNC starts the corresponding macro program. O number of the program started by the MCST1 signal is specified by parameter No.6096.

[Operation] The sequence is shown in “Sequence between PMC and CNC”.

Mode change completion signal MCFIN <Gn514.0> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal notifies the completion of the mode change to CNC. [Operation] CNC begins the execution of the program or complete the sequence.

Macro call executing signal MCEXE <Fn512.0>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the macro call function is being executed. [Output cond.] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:

- When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal (MCSTx). This signal is set to "0" in the following case: - When the sequence is completed with the mode change completion signal MCFIN

set to 1 after macro execution is terminated or is interrupted by a reset, emergency stop, or alarm.

Mode change request signal MCRQ <Fn512.1>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal requests the change of the mode. [Output cond.] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:

- When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal (MCSTx). - When M30 or M02 is executed in the macro program, and external reset signal

(ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) is input. - When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop. This signal is set to "0" in the following case: - When Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) becomes "1".

Mode notification signal MD1R,MD2R,MD4R,DNCIR,ZRNR

<Fn513.0, Fn513.1, Fn513.2, Fn513.5, Fn513.7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the mode which should be changed. [Output cond.] This signal is output in the following case:

- When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal (MCSTx). - When M30 or M02 is executed in the macro program, and external reset signal

(ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) is input. - When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop.

Abnormal end signal MCSP <Fn512.2>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the sequence of the macro call is terminated abnormally. [Output cond.] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:

- When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop or alarm. This signal is set to "0" in the following case: - When the mode change completion signal (MCFIN) becomes "1", and the sequence

is completed.


- 1405 -

Call program confirmation signal MCEXx <Fn514.0 toFn515.7>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the program number called by the macro call.

The signal which corresponds to macro call start signal (MCSTx) is output. [Output cond.] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:

- While executing the sequence. This signal is set to "0" in the following case: - When the sequence is completed.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Gn512 MCST8 MCST7 MCST6 MCST5 MCST4 MCST3 MCST2 MCST1

Gn513 MCST16 MCST15 MCST14 MCST13 MCST12 MCST11 MCST10 MCST9

Gn514 MCFIN

Fn512 MCSP MCRQ MCEXE

Fn513 ZRNR DNCIR MD4R MD2R MD1R

Fn514 MCEX8 MCEX7 MCEX6 MCEX5 MCEX4 MCEX3 MCEX2 MCEX1

Fn515 MCEX16 MCEX15 MCEX14 MCEX13 MCEX12 MCEX11 MCEX10 MCEX9

Parameter

6095 Number of programs used by the one-touch macro call function


This parameter registers the number of programs used by the one-touch macro call function. For example, when this parameter is set to 3, macro call start signals MCST1, MCST2, and MCST3 are enabled. When this parameter is set to 0, the one-touch macro call function is disabled.

6096 Number of the first program in the program group used by the one-touch macro call function


This parameter registers the number of the first program in the program group used by the one-touch macro call function. For example, when this parameter is set to 9000, macro call start signals MCSTx and the programs started by the signals are given below. MCST1 signal: Starts O9000. (when parameter No.6095 is 1 or more) MCST2 signal: Starts O9001. (when parameter No.6095 is 2 or more) : : : MCST15 signal: Starts O9014. (when parameter No.6095 is 15 or more) MCST16 signal: Starts O9015. (when parameter No.6095 is 16 or more)


- 1406 -

Alarm and message Number Message Description DS0021 START ERROR(ONE TOUCH

MACRO) An One Touch Macro can not be start for the following reasons: (1) Feed hold signal *SP is "0" (2) During alarm status. (3) Program restart signal SRN is "1". etc.

DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND The program of the specified O number is not registered in the memory.

PS5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR The mode is not changed correctly at start of sequence. An one touch macro was started during a state other than the reset state, a reset, or an emergency stop.

B-64303EN-1/02 17.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

- 1407 -

17 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function. Chapter 17, "EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 17.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ......................................1407 17.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .......................................................1408 17.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES .......................................1421 17.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ...........................................................................1421 17.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION.................................1422 17.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION................................................1426

17.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD

The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. A selection can also be made to stop the embedded Ethernet function. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot for temporary communication.

CAUTION 1 When using the embedded Ethernet function for the first time, set an IP address

and other items carefully as instructed by the network administrator, then perform a sufficient communication test.

Note that an incorrect IP address or other setting may cause a communication failure on the entire network or system error in the CNC.

2 A unit such as a PC situated in the same network can increase the communication processing load on the CNC even if the unit is not communicating with the CNC. Avoid connecting the CNC to a factory-wide network. Use a router or the like to separate the network including the CNC from the other networks.

NOTE 1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card designated by FANUC. General Ethernet cards

available on the market cannot be used. 2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used for FANUC LADDER-III or a servo guide. 3 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card just for temporary communication as described

above. Avoid using the card for continuous communication. 4 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is inserted into a memory card slot, with a part of the

card left uninserted. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, take great care not to damage the card by hitting the protruding part of the card.

When the card becomes unnecessary, remove the card immediately, in order to prevent any damage to the card.

17.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64303EN-1/02

- 1408 -

Related NC parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

14880 ETH


#0 ETH The embedded Ethernet function (a embedded port or PCMCIA Ethernet card) is:

0: Used. 1: Not used.

NOTE This parameter is valid with series 656F and edition 06 or later.

17.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This section describes the setting of parameters for the embedded Ethernet function.

17.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

Notes on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the first time

NOTE 1 When running user's original application software created by using the

FOCAS2/Ethernet function, use the embedded Ethernet port. 2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function allows up to five FOCAS2/Ethernet clients to be

connected to one CNC. 3 Concurrent access by multiple applications or personal computers may overload

the CNC, reducing the communication speed.

17.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

Procedure 1 Press the function key .

2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card,

press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], respectively. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.


- 1409 -

NOTE 1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the

PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are

made when a connection to the Servo Guide and FANUC LADDER-III is established.

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.


Setting items

Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.

(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.

Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display items

Item Description MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.

Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.


- 1410 -

FOCAS2 screen Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen is displayed.

FOCAS2 screen

Setting items

Item Description PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid

input range is 5001 to 65535. PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0 when it is used as the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0 when it is used as the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

NOTE 1 When a connection to the FANUC i CELL is established, set the UDP port

number and time interval above as described in the FANUC i CELL Operator's Manual (B-75074EN).

2 The unit of the time interval is 10 ms. The allowable range is between 10 and 65535. A time interval less than 100ms cannot be set.

3 Decreasing the time interval setting increases the communication load and can affect the network performance. Example) If the interval is set to 100 (100 x 10 ms = 1 second), broadcast data

is sent every 1 second.

Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet card The PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following default values, for ease of connection with a servo guide or FANUC LADDER-III.

IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1 SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0 ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193 PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 0 TIME INTERVAL : 0

If a specified IP address is changed to a blank (space), the specified setting is reset to the default value. The embedded Ethernet port does not have a default value.


- 1411 -

17.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function

The following shows a setting example required for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function to operate. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FOCAS2/Ethernet.

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0Router IP address None None TCP port number 8193 8193 UDP port number 0 0 Time interval 0 0

PC 1 IP address 192.168.0.200 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway None

NC IP address 192.168.0.100 CNC 1 NC TCP port number 8193 NC IP address 192.168.0.101 CNC 2 NC TCP port number 8193

17.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function This section describes the settings required for the FTP file transfer function to operate using the embedded Ethernet function.

Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time

NOTE 1 When using the FTP file transfer function, use the embedded Ethernet port. 2 The number of FTP communications to which one CNC can be connected using

the FTP file transfer function is one.

"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.

The arguments of the data window library function cnc_allclibhndl3 are used for setting.

The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.

HUB

CNC 2 PC 1

10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX

CNC 1


- 1412 -

17.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen On the Ethernet setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FTP file transfer function.


2 Soft keys [EMBED] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port is

displayed. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.

NOTE The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the

PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. If the [PCMCIA] soft key is pressed, the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set up.

However, the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is not necessary usually.


Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.


Setting items

Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.

(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.

Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")


- 1413 -

Display items Item Description

MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.

Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.

FTP transfer screen (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3) 1 Press soft key [FTP TRANS]. The FTP transfer screen is displayed. 2 Page keys can be used to make settings for the three host computers for connection

destinations 1 to 3.

FTP transfer screen (1st page)

FTP transfer screen (2nd page)


- 1414 -

Item Description HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200") PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file transfer function. An FTP session

is used, so that "21" is to be specified usually. USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host computer with FTP.

(Up to 31 characters can be specified.) PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above. (Up to 31 characters can be

specified.) Be sure to set a password.

LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the host computer becomes the log-in folder.

Operation

Select a destination. 1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT] to be displayed. Pressing this

soft key causes soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.

2 Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or [CONECT 3]. Destination 1, 2, or 3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the target computer to be connected.

When destination 1 is selected

17.2.2.2 Related NC parameters The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described below.

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 9 : Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

13115 KBC SI2 SI1



lowercase input modes by a soft key are: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. < > ¥ % $ ! ~ : " '


- 1415 -

#5 SI2 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and lowercase input modes by a soft key are: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. ( ) ? * & @ _

For embedded Ethernet port #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

14880 PCH


#1 PCH When communication based on the FTP file transfer function starts, an FTP server

presence check based on PING is: 0: Made 1: Not made

NOTE Generally, set this parameter to 0 so that an FTP server presence

check based on PING is performed. Otherwise, if the server is not present in the network, it takes several tens of seconds to detect an error. Some PCs are set not to response to the PING command mainly for security purposes. To communicate with such a PC, set this parameter to 1.

14890 Selects the host computer 1 OS.




0: Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7. 1: UNIX, VMS. 2: Linux.

NOTE Some FTP server software products do not depend on the OS. So,

even when the above parameters are set, it is sometimes impossible to display a list of files properly.


- 1416 -

17.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function The following shows a setting example required for the FTP file transfer function to operate. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through the FTP file transfer function. • On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server function operates. • On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file transfer function.

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0Router IP address None None

Port number 21 21 IP address 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200User name user user Password user user

Connection host 1

Login DIR None None NC parameter No. 20 9 9

PC 1

IP address 192.168.0.200 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway None User name user Password user Login DIR Default

17.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function The DHCP/DNS function is set up by using the COMMON screen (DETAIL) and NC parameters.

17.2.3.1 Setting up DNS This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DNS.

Procedure 1 Enable the DNS function, with reference to "Related NC Parameters," which will be seen later. 2 Set up the DNS server of the host computer.

The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.

The parameter screen is used for setting.

"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.

"User acount of the personal computer (Windows 2000 /XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.

"Internet service manager" of the personal computer (Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.

HUB

CNC 2 PC 1

10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX

CNC 1


- 1417 -

3 Connect the host computer on which the DNS server is working (hereafter referred to as a DNS server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .

4 Press soft keys [EMBED] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen (DETAIL) appears.

5 Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the corresponding DNS IP address field.

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call a desired COMMON

screen (DETAIL). Specify a DNS IP address.

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Display items

Item Description DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.

The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP addresses 1 and 2 in that order.

17.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP

This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DHCP.

Procedure 1 Enable the DHCP function, with reference to "Related NC Parameters," which will be seen later. 2 Set up the DHCP server of the host computer. 3 Connect the host computer on which the DHCP server is working (hereafter referred to as a DHCP

server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .

4 Press soft keys [EMBED] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen appears. 5 If the DHCP function of the CNC has been enabled and if the DHCP server is connected

successfully, the DHCP server automatically specifies the following items. - IP ADDRESS - SUBNET MASK - ROUTER IP ADDRESS


- 1418 -

- DNS IP ADDRESS - DOMAIN

If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed in each field. 6 If the DNS function has also been enabled and if the DHCP server and the DNS server work

together (if the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a host name.

COMMON screen (BASIC and DETAIL)

After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call desired Ethernet common

setting screens (BASIC and DETAIL). If the DHCP server is connected successfully and if the setting data can be obtained, the screens are displayed as shown below.

When the DHCP server is connected successfully (1st page)

When the DHCP server is connected successfully (2nd page)

If the host name is not specified, the CNC automatically assigns a host name in the "NC-<MAC-address>" format.


- 1419 -

Example of automatically assigned host name

If the DHCP server cannot be connected, the screens are displayed as shown below.

When the DHCP server cannot be connected (1st page)

When the DHCP server cannot be connected (2nd page)

Check items

Item Description IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2 DOMAIN

If the DHCP server is connected successfully, the items obtained from the DHCP server are displayed. If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.


- 1420 -

Setting items Item Description

HOST NAME Enter the host name of the CNC. If a DHCP server and a DNS server work together, the DHCP server notifies the DNS server of this host name. If the host name is left blank, a host name is automatically assigned in the "NC-<MAC-address>" format. Example of automatically assigned host name: NC-00E0E4000001

Display items

Item Description MAC ADDRESS MAC address of embedded Ethernet

17.2.3.3 Related NC parameters

For embedded Ethernet port #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

14880 DHC DNS D1E


#3 D1E When the DHCP function is used:

0: The default parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function are specified. PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193 PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0 TIME INTERVAL 0

1: The default parameters for FANUC i CELL are specified. PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193 PORT NUMBER (UDP) 8192 TIME INTERVAL 50

#5 DNS The DHCP function is:

0: Used. 1: Not used.

#6 DHC The DHCP function is: 0: Used. 1: Not used. A change in these parameters becomes effective after the power is turned off and on or after the embedded Ethernet function is restarted.


- 1421 -

17.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES

There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices.


2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], press soft key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to

display soft key [EMB/PCM]. 4 Pressing soft key [EMB/PCM] switches between enabled devices.

NOTE Information on a switched device is stored in nonvolatile memory. On the next power-on, the device last selected can be used as is.

17.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET Communication using the embedded Ethernet can be restarted.


2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], press soft key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to

display soft key [EMB/PCM]. 4 Pressing soft key [RSTART] resets embedded Ethernet communication and then restarts it.

NOTE 1 Pressing soft key [RSTART] forcibly interrupts communication even when it is in

progress. 2 This function makes a restart by software. An actual restart may be impossible

under some conditions.


- 1422 -

17.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available. The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally.

Displaying and operating the PING screen


2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is

displayed. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can

be set. 4 Press soft key [PING] and then press [(OPRT)]. 5 To send the PING command to connection destination 1 for FTP file transfer, press soft key

[P.FTP1]. Similarly, to send the PING command to connection destination 2 or 3, press [P.FTP2] or [P.FTP3], respectively.

PING connection status screen


- 1423 -

6 To send the PING command to the desired destination, enter the address of the destination on the PING setting screen. (Page keys are used for switching.)

PING connection status screen

7 After entering the address and the repeat count, press the soft key [PING]. The specified number of

PING commands are sent to the specified destination. 8 To cancel the PING command currently being sent, press soft key [P.CAN].

Displaying Communication status screen


2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is

displayed. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can

be set. 4 To display the communication status of the embedded Ethernet, press soft key [COM STS]. Page keys can be used to switch between the sending state and the receiving state.


- 1424 -

Communication status screen (1st page)

Communication status screen (2nd page)

TASK STATE screen


2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card,

press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], respectively. 4 Pressing soft key [TASK STATUS] causes the task status of the embedded Ethernet function to be

displayed.


- 1425 -

TAST STATE screen

The following symbols are used.

Symbol and meaning FOCAS2 #0 C: Waiting for a connection from the host

W: Data processing in progress (1) D: Data processing in progress (2) N: FOCAS2 out of service

FOCAS2 #1,#2 W: Data processing in progress (1) D: Data processing in progress (2) X: Not yet executed

UDP W: Data processing in progress (1) D: Data processing in progress (2) X: Not yet executed

PMC W: Data processing in progress (1) D: Data processing in progress (2) X: Not yet executed

FTP C: Execution wait W: Data processing in progress (1) D: Data processing in progress (2) X: Not yet executed


- 1426 -

17.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This screen displays the log of the embedded Ethernet function.

NOTE If alarm SR2032, “EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA SERVER ERROR” is issued

during data transfer using the embedded Ethernet function, check the error details on the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function.

Displaying the log screen


2 To display the log screen for the embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED LOG] or [PCM LOG], respectively. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)

LOG screen

The newest error log appears at the top of the screen. The date and time when an error occurred are displayed at the right end of the line. The format of date and time data is “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss” where MMM represents a month, dd represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss represents seconds. The date and time of the upper item shown above is January 28, 12:28:17.

To clear the log, press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [CLEAR] in that order.

The log for each function can be displayed by using soft keys on the embedded Ethernet log screen. (1) Soft key [ALL] Displays all log related to the embedded Ethernet. (2) Soft key [COMMON] Displays the log related to the parameter settings of the embedded Ethernet function and the basic

communication function.


- 1427 -

(3) Soft key [FOCAS2] Displays the log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. (4) Soft key [FTP TRANS] Displays the log related to FTP file transfer.

Error and message Error No. Log message Description and necessary action

E-0118 E-0119

Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu

A communication error has occurred because of any of the following: → The network quality has been lowered to such a level

that data cannot be received from a PC at the other end. The communication channel has been logically shut down.

→ Software running on a PC at the other end has logically shut down the communication channel.

→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected. E-011A All communication paths are busy All the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication channels are

busy. E-0200 (Received message from FTP server) A message sent by the FTP server is displayed as it is.

A message containing characters other than ASCII characters may not be displayed correctly.

E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server Software of the FTP server may not be running. Run the FTP server software. Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the PING command to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Set bit 1(PCH) of NC parameter No.14880 to “1” and connect the server again.

E-0207 The router is not found The specified IP address of the router may be wrong. Alternatively, the router may be turned off. Check whether the IP address of the router has been correctly specified and whether the router is turned on.

E-0208 The FTP server is not found The specified IP address of the FTP server may be wrong. Alternatively, the FTP server may be turned off. Check whether the IP address of the FTP server has been correctly specified and whether the FTP server is turned on. Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the PING command to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Set bit 1(PCH) of NC parameter No.14880 to “1” and connect the server again.

E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check whether a correct user name and password are specified when logging into the FTP server.

E-020C The parameters of FTP server are wrong

Check whether a correct user name and password are specified when logging into the FTP server.

E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder logging into the FTP server. E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error has occurred because of any of

the following: → The network quality has been lowered to such a level

that data cannot be received from a PC at the other end. The communication channel has been logically shut down.

→ Software running on a PC at the other end has logically shut down the communication channel.

→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected. → Data cannot be posted to the communication

destination due to a firewall setting.


- 1428 -

Error No. Log message Description and necessary action E-0901 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address is not written in the hardware.

Alternatively, the hardware has been damaged. E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data is flowing over the network.

One possible solution is to divide the network. E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format. E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Specify an IP address. E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Specify a correct subnet mask in the designated format. E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Specify a subnet mask. E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP

address of the local node and the IP address of the router.

E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP address of the local node and the IP address of the DNS server.

E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check whether a correct host name is specified. E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check whether a correct domain name is specified. E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be

specified. E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be

specified. E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is

wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.

E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is wrong

Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.

E-0B0C Port No of a remote FTP server is wrong

A value beyond the permissible setting range may be specified.

E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is wrong

The specified user name may contain a prohibited character.

E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is wrong

The specified password may contain a prohibited character.

E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong The specified log-in folder name may contain a prohibited character.

E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To allow a set-up, disable the DHCP client function. E-0B19 E-0B1A

Embedded Ethernet hardware isn't found

The software or hardware of embedded Ethernet function cannot be recognized. Check whether the software has been incorporated. Check whether the hardware is sound.

E-XXXX (No message) An internal error has occurred. Make a notification of the error number.

B-64303EN-1/02 18.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

- 1429 -

18 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION Chapter 18, "DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 18.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE ................................................................................................1429 18.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE .............................................................................................1431 18.3 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................................................1433 18.4 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS ................................................................................................1448

18.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE

Overview The servo system can report the warning status before one of the following target alarms occurs. When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued. For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracting tools from the time a warning occurs by the time a servo alarm occurs.

Signal Servo warning detail signals SVWRN1 to 4 <Fn093.4 to 7>

[Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports the warning signal corresponding to the state of the servo amplifier. [Output cond.] The following table shows the warning statuses of the servo amplifier and their

corresponding warning signals.

Warning status signals (F93)

Corresponding alarm messages SVWRN4(Fn093.7)

SVWRN3(Fn093.6)

SVWRN2(Fn093.5)

SVWRN1(Fn093.4)

Time from when a warning state signal is issued to until an alarm

occurs SV0444: INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE

1 0 0 0 Until overheat occurs (inconstant)

SV0601: INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE


SV0443 : CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE

1 1 0 0 One minute

SV0606: CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE


SV0431: CNV. OVERLOAD 1 1 1 0 One minute SV0607: CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE

1 1 1 1 PSMR: Five seconds, PSM: One minute

A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below.

18.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64303EN-1/02

- 1430 -

Occurrence and stop of the alarm corresponding to a warning

Occurrence of a warningServo amplifier

SVWRN1-4

(Warning)

PMC Perform deceleration stop or block stopduring this time period with the PMC tostop the machine without damage. Thetime period varies with the warning type.

Activation

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn093 SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1

Warning status alarms for servo amplifiers

If a servo amplifier is placed in the warning status, a DS alarm is output in addition to the servo warning detail signals. If one of the following alarms is issued, automatic operation enters the feed hold state and movements along all controlled axes including PMC axes are decelerated to a stop. Issuing a warning status alarm does not cause to the servo motor to be deactivated.

Alarm No. when the servo amplifier is in the warning

status

Alarm No. when the servo amplifier is in

the alarm status

Alarm message Operation performed when the warning status occurs

DS0608 SV0444 n-axis : INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE

Immediately after the fan stops, DS0608 is displayed and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop state. The servo motor is kept active for 1 minute. After that, the servo motor is deactivated and SV0444 is displayed.

DS0609 SV0601 n-axis : INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE

Immediately after the fan stops, DS0609 is displayed and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop state. When bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 after that, the alarm display can be canceled by a reset and operation can be restarted.

DS0610 SV0443 n-axis : CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE

Immediately after the fan stops, DS0610 is displayed and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop state. The servo motor is kept active for 1 minute. After that, the servo motor is deactivated and SV0443 is displayed.

DS0611 SV0606 n-axis : CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE

Immediately after the fan stops, DS0611 is displayed and movements along axes enter the feed hold stop state. When bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 after that, the alarm display can be canceled by a reset and operation can be restarted.

DS0612 SV0431 n-axis : CNV. OVERLOAD

DS0613 SV0607 n-axis : CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE


- 1431 -

After an alarm in the warning status listed above is issued, when the αi servo amplifier is actually placed in the alarm status, the servo motor is deactivated and the number of an alarm in the alarm status is additionally displayed.

18.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE

Overview The warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the warning state is entered, a report to the PMC is sent. For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducing cutting load from the time a warning occurs by the time an overheat alarm occurs. In addition, diagnostic information also contains warning numbers.

Signal Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <Fn264.0 to 7, Fn265.0>

[Classification] Output [Function] Reports the warning number corresponding to the state of the αi spindle amplifier. [Output cond.] When the αi spindle is in the warning state, a warning number consisting of SPWRN1 to

SPWRN9 is output as nine-bit binary data. If warnings occurred on multiple αi spindle amplifiers, the warning number of the ai spindle having the smallest axis number is output. The warning numbers and their descriptions are shown below.

Warning number Contents Details

01 Motor overheat When the motor temperature increases beyond the overheat warning detection level (set by a parameter), a warning signal is output. At this time, spindle operation is continued. So, perform necessary processingwith the PMC. An alarm is issued when the motor temperature has reached the overheat alarm detection level.

04 Open-phase detected in the converter main power supply

If an open-phase is detected in the main power supply, the warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed. About one minute (for the αiPS) or about five seconds (for the αiPSR) after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.

06 Temperature sensor error Coolant entered the spindle motor, probably reducing insulating resistance. Remove coolant. Take measures to prevent coolant from entering the motor. If insulating resistance is in advanced stages, the motor needs to be replaced.

56 Internal fan stopped If the internal fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed. About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.

58 Converter main circuit overloaded

If the main circuit of the Power Supply (PS) is overloaded, the warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed. About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.

59 Converter cooling fan stopped If the Power Supply (PS) cooling fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed. About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.

88 Radiator cooling fan stopped If the radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed. If the main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.


- 1432 -

Warning number Contents Details

113 Converter radiator cooling fan stopped

If the Power Supply (PS) radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed. If the Power Supply (PS) main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.

Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN4 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1

Fn265 SPWRN9

Diagnosis display

The status of a warning is displayed on the following diagnostic screen.

712 Warning status of spindle

[Data type] Word spindle The number of a warning caused on each spindle is indicated. If there is no warning, 0 is indicated.


- 1433 -

18.3 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

18.3.1 Outline Investigating the cause of Servo/Spindle/CNC alarms becomes easier by diagnosis according to the guidance message. And when the thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds the trouble forecast level, a trouble forecast signal can be output.

Step of diagnosis

Procedure 1 Answer the question of the guidance message in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen by pushing

soft keys [ YES ]/[ NO ].

Fig.18.3.1 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)


- 1434 -

2 See the servo/spindle monitor information in the trouble diagnosis monitor screen and waveform of

servo/spindle in the trouble diagnosis graphic screen according to the guidance message if necessary.

Fig.18.3.1 (b) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch)

図18.3.1 (c) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch)


- 1435 -

3 Finally, the guidance message in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen shows the probable cause of

an alarm and the method to remove the problem.

Fig.18.3.1 (d) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)

18.3.2 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen

Outline The trouble diagnosis guidance screen displays the guidance message to investigate the cause of an alarm.

Explanation Display

・Display procedure


2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [GUIDE] appears. 3 Press soft key [GUIDE]. 4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


- 1436 -

Fig.18.3.2 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)

・Contents of Display

Trouble Code : "NC"-"Alarm type + alarm number" is displayed as code for identifying alarm. Contents of Trouble : Alarm Message. Probable Cause : Probable Cause of alarm. Guidance message : Question to find the cause or answer to remove trouble is displayed. Status display

[RESUMING] : When press soft key [RESUME] , the guidance message which was displayed before CNC power turned off is displayed again. Then [RESUMING] appears.

[LATCHED]/[SAMPLING] : [LATCHED] shows that servo/spindle monitor information is memorized. When alarm no. in the guidance screen and alarm no. when servo/spindle monitor data was memorized is different, the diagnosis may not done correctly. And then [LATCHED] blinks. [SAMPLING] shows that servo/spindle monitor information is not memorized yet. Servo/spindle monitor information can be referred in Trouble Diagnosis Monitor Screen.

Operation ・Change of Guidance

Soft key [YES]/[NO] : Check contents of guidance message, and, answer by pressing soft key [YES] or [NO]. Then the next guidance message is displayed. In some cases, CNC automatically checks and judges contents of guidance. In this case the next guidance message is automatically displayed. Automatic diagnosis is not done in case that CNC power turns off once after servo /spindle monitor information is memorized.

Soft key [BACK] :

Guidance message returns back 1 step. It is possible to trace back the guidance message when soft key [YES]/[NO] is pressed by mistake.

Soft key [RESUME] :

Guidance message which was displayed before CNC power turned off is displayed again. The diagnosis can be continued from the guidance displayed again. It is not possible to go back to the step before the point where soft key [BACK] is pressed.

Guidance message

Probable cause

Contents of trouble

Trouble Code

Status display


- 1437 -

Status display “RESUMING” is displayed during the guidance that starts by pressing soft key [RESUME].

- Change of alarm

When several alarms occur at same time, pressing page key / can select the guidance

message.

18.3.3 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen

Outline Trouble diagnosis monitor screen memorizes and displays servo/spindle monitor information for investigating servo/spindle alarm. Three kinds of data, "Data when the alarm occurs", "Data just before the alarm occurs" or "Current data" can be selected and displayed.

Explanation

Display - Display procedure


2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MONIT] appears. 3 Press soft key [MONIT]. The following screen is sample of displaying data of X axis (servo) when the alarm occurred.

Fig.18.3.3 (a) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch)

・Data displayed in monitor Screen

Displayed data in monitor screen is showed below.


- 1438 -

Table 18.3.3 (a) Data of servo motor Data (Unit) Data type Display range Required parameter Page number

Accumulated command pulse (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Accumulated feedback pulse (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Position error (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Reference counter (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Actual speed (1/min) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 1 Command current (%) 1 Word ±400 1 Thermal simulation data (%) 1 Word 0 ~ +100 1 Torque (%) 1 Word ±400 1 Disturbance level (%) 1 Word 0 ~ +200 1 Optional data (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 1 Optional data 2 (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 2 R-phase current (%) 1 Word ±400 2 Effective current (%) 1 Word ±400 2 Pulse coder AMR data 1 Word 0 ~ 255 2 Internal neglect counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2 External neglect counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2 Internal correction counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2 External correction counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2 V-ready off information 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 2

NOTE 1 Display range is the range that can be displayed on screen and not capacity of system. 2 Optional data 1, Optional data 2 Optional data 1 and Optional data 2 are used for maintenance by FANUC serviceman.

Table 18.3.3 (b) Data of spindle motor

Data (Unit) Data type Display range Required parameter Page numberOperation mode Character ***** 1 Gear select command Character ***** 1 Command pulse (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Command speed (1/min) (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 No.4020(Main) /

No.4196(Sub) 1

Spindle speed (1/min) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Motor speed (1/min) (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 No.4020(Main) /

No.4196(Sub) 1

Load meter (%) 1 Word 0 ~ +300 1 Position error (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Synchronization error (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1 Input signals Character ***** 2 Output signals Character ***** 2

NOTE 1 Display range is the range that can be displayed on screen and not capacity of system. 2 Command speed (1/min), Motor speed (1/min)

Set the following parameters to display Command speed and Motor speed. - No.4020 (Maximum motor speed for Main spindle) - No.4196 (Maximum motor speed for Sub spindle) (When Spindle switch function is used.)


- 1439 -

Table 18.3.3 (c) Data of others Data Data form Page number

The latest latch date Year (Two last digits) / Month (Two digits) / Day (Two digits) The latest latch time Hour (Two digits) / Minute (Two digits) / Second (Two digits) Executed file name at latched Character Executed N number at latched N + number of five digits

3

Operation - Display of servo monitor data

Fig.18.3.3 (b) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Servo monitor data) (10.4-inch)

Servo monitor information is switched by pressing soft key [NEW]/[OLD]/[CURRNT]. Soft key [NEW] and [OLD] is displayed alternately. Soft key [NEW] : Data when the alarm occurs Soft key [OLD] : Data just before the alarm occurs Soft key [CURRNT] : Current data Soft key [MON_SP] : Spindle monitor information is displayed.


- 1440 -

- Display of spindle monitor information

Fig.18.3.3 (c) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Spindle monitor data) (10.4-inch)

Spindle monitor information is switched by pressing soft key [ NEW ]/[ OLD ]/[CURRNT]. Soft key [ NEW ] and [ OLD ] is displayed alternately. Soft key [NEW] : Data when the alarm occurs Soft key [OLD] : Data just before the alarm occurs Soft key [CURRNT] : Current data Soft key [MON_SV] : Servo monitor information is displayed.

- Change of displayed page Displayed page is switched by pressing cursor key / .

- Change of displayed axis

Displayed axis is switched by pressing cursor key / .

- Clear of memorized data

Soft key [CLEAR] appears by pressing soft key [(OPER)]. By pressing soft keys [CLEAR] and [EXEC], "Data when the alarm occurs" and "Data just before the alarm occurs" are cleared. And status display "LATCHED" is altered to "SAMPLING". When servo/spindle alarm occurs in "SAMPLING" status, "Data when the alarm occurs" and "Data just before the alarm occurs" are memorized, and status display "SAMPLING" is altered to "LATCHED". When clear operation is done in either servo monitor screen or spindle monitor screen, both of servo and spindle information are cleared. And display data of trouble diagnosis graphic screen is also cleared.


- 1441 -

18.3.4 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen

Outline Data type, data unit and trouble forecast level in the trouble diagnosis graphic screen are set in trouble diagnosis parameter screen.

Explanation

Display - Display procedure


2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears. 3 Press soft key [W.GRPH]. 4 Press soft key [W.PRM].

Fig.18.3.4 (a) Trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch)

- Contents of display

CHANNEL : Channel for waveform display. Maximum 4 channels can be used. Set data from the first channel sequentially.

AXIS :

Axis for waveform display. Manual setting is available. In some cases Axis data is set automatically for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.

DATA KIND :

Data kind for wave form display. Manual setting is available. In some cases data kind is set automatically for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.

DATA UNIT :

Unit of display data. This data is set automatically according to data kind. Manual setting is invalid.


- 1442 -

FORECAST LV : This data decides boundary value to output trouble forecast signal. Manual setting is available.

Guidance of setting each item :

The guidance to the above setting each item is displayed.

Operation - Data Setting

1 Move cursor by Cursor key. 2 Input number by MDI key and press input key to set data.

The content of the following each items can be input by the above operation. AXIS :

In case of servo axis, input control axis number. (Example) Set "1" for first servo axis. In case of spindle axis, input "10 + spindle number". (Example) Set "11" for first spindle axis.

DATA KIND :

Input data number value according to the following table.

Table 18.3.4 (a) Data of Servo motor Data number Data kind

1 Accumulated command pulse (pulse) 2 Accumulated feedback pulse (pulse) 3 Position error (pulse) 4 Reference counter (pulse) 5 Actual speed (1/min) 6 Command current (%) 7 Thermal simulation data (%) 8 Torque (%) 9 Disturbance level (%)

10 Optional data 11 R-phase current (%) 12 Effective current (%) 13 Pulse coder AMR data 14 Optional data 2

Table 18.3.4 (b) Data of Spindle motor

Data number Data kind 15 Actual speed (1/min) 16 Load meter (%) 17 Position error (pulse) 18 Actual speed (1/min) (80msec) 19 Load meter (%) (80msec)


- 1443 -

NOTE Each data kind is classified as follows as the combination to which the

waveforms can be displayed at the same time. - Data number :1 - 17 - Data number :18 - 19 Therefore, when the data number is input to the data kind, if the values other than the same combination as the data kind of another channel are set, the warning "DATA SETTING ERROR" is displayed.

18.3.5 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen

Outline Servo/spindle data is automatically memorized for several seconds before alarm occurs and display and waveform of data can be displayed in trouble diagnosis graphic screen. Maximum 4 kinds of data are displayed at the same time.

Explanation Display - Display procedure


2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears. 3 Press soft key [W.GRPH]. Press soft key [G-ADJ.].

Fig.18.3.5 (a) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch)


(1) Red vertical line shows the position (time) of alarm. (2) Date and time of alarm

(1)

(2)


- 1444 -

Operation - Change of position and magnification

When Soft key [G-ADJ.] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.

［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB_LV］［］［(OPRT)］［］

［<］［H-DOBL］［H-HALF］［←TIME］［TIME→］［］［＋］

［<］［ CH-1 ］［ CH-2 ］［ CH-3 ］［ CH-4 ］［］［＋］

［<］［WAV.EX］［WAV.RE］［WAV.↑］［WAV.↓］［］［］

Soft key [H-DOBL] : The time base length is expanded. Soft key [H-HALF] : The time base length is reduced. Soft key [TIME←] : The time base is moved to the left side. Soft key [TIME→] : The time base is moved to the right side. Soft key [CH-1] : The operation to the waveform of channel 1 is selected. Soft key [CH-2] : The operation to the waveform of channel 2 is selected. Soft key [CH-3] : The operation to the waveform of channel 3 is selected. Soft key [CH-4] : The operation to the waveform of channel 4 is selected. Soft key [WAV.EX] : The vertical length is expanded to the selected waveform. Soft key [WAV.RE] : The vertical length is reduced to the selected waveform. Soft key [WAV.↑] : The selected waveform is moved for above. Soft key [WAV.↓] : The selected waveform is moved below. The time base length is a common scale for the channel 1,2,3 and 4. The position and magnification of the vertical length can be set for each channel.

18.3.6 Trouble forecast level setting screen (only for servo axis) Trouble forecast level is set in this screen. Two trouble forecast levels, thermal simulation and disturbance level, can be set.

Explanation Display - Display procedure


2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears. 3 Press soft key [W.GRPH]. 4 Press soft key [TRB LV].


- 1445 -

Fig.18.3.6 (a) Trouble forecast level setting screen (10.4-inch)


(1) Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level is displayed with sign. (2) Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level is displayed by bar graphic.

Light Blue part : Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level. Red part : Trouble forecast level.

(3) Trouble forecast level. The negative value is converted into the absolute value and a positive value is displayed.

Operation - Setting trouble forecast level

1 Select thermal simulation or disturbance level by page keys / .

2 Select axis by cursor keys / .

3 Input numerical value by MDI key and press key.

Trouble forecast level is input into parameter No.8860 and 8861.

- Change of trouble forecast level When Soft key [TRB LV] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.

［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB LV］［］［(OPRT)］［］

［<］［－10％］［＋10％］［－1％］［＋1％］［INPUT ］［］

Soft key [ -10% ] : Subtract 10% from trouble forecast level. Soft key [ +10% ] : Add 10% to trouble forecast level. Soft key [ -1% ] : Subtract 1% from trouble forecast level. Soft key [ +1% ] : Add 1% to trouble forecast level. Soft key [INPUT] : Input trouble forecast level by MDI key.

(3)

(2)

(1)


- 1446 -

- Trouble forecast signal When thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds trouble forecast level, trouble forecast signal TDSML1 - 8 (Fn298)/ TDFTR1 - 8 (Fn299) is output. Parameters TRSx (bit 0 of parameter No.8855) / TRFx (bit 1 of parameter No.8855) are set to 1 to perform the trouble forecast.

18.3.7 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8850 MDG

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 0 MDG Trouble diagnosis function is:

0: Available. 1: Not available.



#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8855 TRFx TRSx

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 TRSx Trouble forecast of thermal simulation of servo axis is:

0: Not available. 1: Available. (Please set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8860.)

# 1 TRFx Trouble forecast of disturbance level of servo axis is:

0: Not available. 1: Available. (Please set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8861.)

8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 ~ 100

Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation is set.

8861 Trouble forecast level for disturbance level

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 ~ 100

Trouble forecast level for disturbance level is set.


- 1447 -

18.3.8 Signal

Trouble forecast signal TDSML1 - TDSML8 <Fn298> [Classification] Output signal [Function] The thermal simulation data is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level. [Output condition] When the thermal simulation data of servo is bigger than the trouble forecast level, this

signal is "1".

Trouble forecast signal TDFTR1 - TDFTR8 <Fn299> [Classification] Output signal [Function] The disturbance level is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level. [Output condition] When the disturbance level of servo is bigger than the trouble forecast level, this signal is

"1".

Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Fn298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1

18.3.9 Restrictions

・The use of the I/O Link β amplifier The alarm occurred by the motor with the I/O Link β amplifier cannot be diagnosed.


- 1448 -

18.4 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS

18.4.1 Outline The machine alarms (external alarm messages, external operator messages and macro alarms) can be diagnosed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen in addition to CNC alarms.

Fig.18.4.1 (a) Example of Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)

To add the diagnostic information on the screen, make the diagnostic message data to be displayed and convert it the memory card format file that can be read by CNC by using the PC tool "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis". After the file is loaded into CNC, the additional diagnostic information can be displayed on the screen.

18.4.2 Kind of additional alarm and operator message The alarm and the operator message on the machine side that can be added to the trouble diagnosis message are as follows.

1. External alarm 2. Macro alarm 3. External operator message

18.4.3 Available diagnosis number In the alarm and the operator message on the machine side, the alarm number and message number that can be diagnosed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen are as follows. 1. External alarm Table 18.4.3 (a) Available diagnosis alarm number (External alarm)

Parameter EXA(No.6301#0) =0 =1

Alarm number 1000 to 1999 0 to 4095


- 1449 -

2. Macro alarm Table 18.4.3 (b) Available diagnosis alarm number (Macro alarm)

Parameter MCA(No.6008#1) =0 =1

Alarm number 3000 to 3200 0 to 4095 3. External operator message Table 18.4.3 (c) Available diagnosis message number (External operator message)

Parameter EXM(No.6301#1) =0 =1

Message number 2000 to 2999 0 to 4095

NOTE 1 Available diagnosis message number in the external operator message is a number

corresponding to the number set to parameter No.6310 within the numbers in the above table.

2 The above available diagnosis number is a range of the number displayed on the CNC screen, and it is different from the number actually set by the each function. Please refer to the following manuals for the number actually set by the each function. • External alarm / External operator message

Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64393EN) ”4.11 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS”

• Macro alarm Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System /Machining Center System) (B-64304EN) "II-14 CUSTOM MACRO"

18.4.4 Environment for making trouble diagnosis message The following operating environment and the PC tool "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" are necessary to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen. Prepare the personal computer as follows, and install this tool according to the next chapter.

- Operating environment Operating system Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional, Windows Vista® Business or

Windows ® 7 Professional Memory Windows® XP：More than 512M bytes

Windows Vista® or Windows® 7：More than 1G bytes Free space in hard disk More than 128M bytes Necessary equipment PC card adapter Necessary application Microsoft® Excel® 2007

(*) Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista and Excel are the registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation in USA.

NOTE "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" is not included in the option of the

machine alarm diagnosis function. Purchase "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" CD

(A08B-9010-J523#ZZ11) additionally.


- 1450 -

18.4.5 Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis This tool is used to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen. Install this tool in the personal computer according to the following procedures, and make the trouble diagnosis message.

18.4.5.1 Install The installation procedure of this tool is as follows: 1 Run setup.exe in the install CD (A08B-9010-J523#ZZ11). 2 In the following setup dialog box, set an appropriate installation folder and press the <Next> button.

Fig.18.4.5.1 (a)

NOTE By pressing the <Brows> button, the installation folder can be changed.

3 By pressing the <Next> button in the dialog box for the confirmation of install, the installation will

be started. 4 After the installation is finished normally, a message box to show the finish of the installation

appears and "FANUC Guidance Table" is added in the Windows start menu.

18.4.5.2 Uninstall The uninstall procedure of this tool is as follows: 1 Open the Windows control panel. 2 In the control panel, open the [Add or Remove Programs] and select "FANUC Guidance Table for

Machine Alarm Diagnosis" from the currently installed programs. NOTE Open the [Programs and Features] in Windows Vista.


- 1451 -

3 By pressing the <Remove (or Uninstall)> button, a message box for the confirmation of uninstall appears. By pressing the <Yes> button, this tool will be uninstalled.

18.4.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages

Making a Excel file in which trouble diagnosis messages are input is as follows:

Fig.18.4.5.3 (a)

1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[New File] in the Windows start menu, then the

"New File" dialog box will be displayed.

Fig.18.4.5.3 (b)

2 In the following dialog box, input a destination folder and file name of the Excel file to be made.

NOTE 1 The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel book format). Any other extension is

ignored and it is changed to "xls". 2 When making a new file is failed, the message box "A trouble diagnosis message file

cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following messages about the cause of that failure. • The specified file name is not correct. • The specified file has already existed. • (Destination folder) is not found. • Files in (destination folder) cannot be written. • The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.

3 Click the [OK] button, a Excel file will be made as the specified name in the specified folder. The trouble diagnosis messages can be input by opening the new Excel file.


- 1452 -

18.4.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages Three are 2 sheets in the Excel file to input the trouble diagnosis messages. • [Overall] sheet ・・・The sheet for overall operations and settings • [Guidance] sheet ・・・The sheet for inputting message strings

Fig.18.4.5.4 (a)

- Structure of [Overall] sheet

In the [Overall] sheet, you can make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation buttons from (1) to (3). And, you can switch the display language in sheets and change the settings for multi-languages.

Fig.18.4.5.4 (b)

- Overview for each items

Item Name Description Reference (1) Input Guidance Data Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input the trouble diagnosis

messages. Subsection 18.4.6.1

(2) Check Input Data Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet as to checking for the range of number, the invalid letter and so on.

Subsection 18.4.6.2

(3) Make Memory Card File

Makes a CNC readable memory card format file from input data in the [Guidance] sheet.

Subsection 18.4.6.3

(4) Display Language Switches the display language for sheets by selecting a language and pressing the [Apply] button. Either Japanese or English can be selected.

－

(5) Result of Check Displays the result of check for all input data. Subsection 18.4.6.2(6) Multi-Languages Changes the settings to input messages for multi-languages. Subsection 18.4.7

(2)

(1) (4)

(5)

(3) (6)


- 1453 -

- Structure of [Guidance] sheet In the guidance sheet, you can input numbers and messages for each alarm or operator message.

Fig.18.4.5.4 (c)

・Overview for each items

Item Name Description Reference (1) Guidance Table 1 The table to input numbers and titles for alarm or operator

message. Subsection 18.4.6.1

(2) Guidance Table 2 The table to input questions and instructions to an operator for alarm or operator message.

Subsection 18.4.6.1

(3) Jump to Page Switches the display between the guidance table 1 and 2. － (4) Check Input Data Checks input data for each guidance table. Subsection 18.4.6.2(5) Set Line Number Adds or deletes lines by a number specified in the combo

box at the bottom of the guidance table 1 or 2. Note that all line number in the guidance table is from the minimum 30 to the maximum 2000.

－

18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages Make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation buttons in order from (1) to (3) on the [Overall] sheet. The brief of making procedure is as follows:

Fig.18.4.6 (a)

(1) Input Guidance Data

Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input trouble diagnosis messages.

(4(3 (5) (4)

(1) (2)

(3

(1)

(2)

(3)


- 1454 -

(2) Check Input Data Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet

(3) Make Memory Card File Makes a memory card format file from input data in the [Guidance] sheet.

The details for each operation are as follows:

18.4.6.1 Inputting guidance data By clicking the [Input Guidance Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, the [Guidance] sheet will be displayed. Input data on the guidance table 1 and 2 according to the descriptions of the next section. The data that is input on each guidance table is displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen as the following figure.

Fig.18.4.6.1 (a)

Table 18.4.6.1 (a) Display item of trouble diagnosis guidance screen

Display Item Description Classified code Classified code and number for the current alarm or operator message Title Title for the current alarm or operator message Probable cause Cause of the current alarm or operator message Guidance message Confirmation to determine cause of an alarm, or an instruction about an operator message

NOTE The character that can be displayed on the CNC screen can be used for each display

item. As for details, refer the following manuals. Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System / Machining

Center System) (B-64304EN) “APPENDIX G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE “

・About input data in the guidance table 1

Classified code

Title

Probable cause

Guidance message

Input items on the guidance table 1

Input item on the guidance table 2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)


- 1455 -

Table 18.4.6.1 (b) Description of items in the guidance table 1 Item Description Content of item Num. of letters(1) Kind Input a kind for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator

message. Specify one of the following strings.

EX : External alarm MC : Macro alarm OP : External operator message

NOTE If a kind other than above is input, checking input data is

failed.

2 English capital letters

(2) Number Input a number for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator message.

Within 4 numbers

Input 2 types of code, "Code 1" and "Code 2". "Code 1 – Code 2" is displayed at the first line on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen.

Code 1 Input a classified code for an alarm or an operator message.

Within 2 letters (1 in multi-bytes letters)

Code 2 Input a number for an alarm or an operator messages. Within 16 letters (8 in multi-bytes letters)

(3) Classified Code

NOTE 1 It is not necessary to make each classified code to be the

same as (1)kind and (2)number. 2 A character string "NC" is reserved as the code 1 of CNC

alarm. Do not use "NC" as the code 1.

(4) Title Input a string displayed at the second line on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen.


(5) Probable Cause

Input a string displayed at the "Probable cause" part on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen.

Within 32 letters (16 in multi-bytes letters) per line (maximum 3 lines)

(6) Message ID Input an ID of a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen at first when an alarm occurs. Ex. The first guidance message for the external alarm message

alarm No.1000 ：EX1000A NOTE As for the message ID, see the description of the next

description " About input data in the guidance table 2".

Within 8 letters (English capital and numerical letters)

(7) Additional information (Reserved)

Do not input in the item.

・About input data in the guidance table 2

(1) (2) (3) (4)


- 1456 -

Table 18.4.6.1 (c) Description of items in the guidance table 2 Item Description Content of item Num. of letters(1) Message ID It is a string to identify to one of the guidance messages in (2).

Ex.1. The first message for the external alarm No.1000 : EX1000A

Ex.2. The second message for the external alarm No.1000 : EX1000B

NOTE The character string that starts by "M"+"Number" is not used

as message ID. Because this shows the destination of the jump of the machine side to guidance table 2 from the guidance table for the CNC alarm. Therefore, do not use the character string that starts by "M"+"Number".


(2) Guidance Message

It is a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen. Input a question, an instruction and so on to an operator.

NOTE When the guidance message is shown on the trouble

diagnosis screen, a new line code is inserted to the message per 32 letters (16 in multi-bytes letters) automatically. If you want to insert a new line code at a free position, input "¥n" that is not included as the number of letters.

Moreover, the line number of the message is within 4 including the above automatic new line.


(3) Next Message ID

Input a message ID that is jumped to when pressing the soft key [Yes] or [No] for each question of guidance message. Input "-1" when there is no message ID to be jumped.


(4) Notes Free notes can be written.

18.4.6.2 Checking input data By clinking the [Check Input Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, all input data on the guidance sheet will be checked as to the range of number, the number of letters, the invalid letter and the line number of strings.

After the check is completed, the string of the [Result of Check] on the [Overall] sheet is changed from "Unchecked" to "OK".

NOTE After "OK" is displayed, it might return to "Unchecked" by editing on the

[Guidance] sheet again. If the check is failed, the string of the [Result of Check] is changed to "NG" and a name of sheet and guidance table where an error occurs is shown in a cell under the [Result of Check].

The guidance table where an error occurs is displayed by clicking the name of the guidance table.


- 1457 -

Fig.18.4.6.2 (a)

In the guidance table, the color of an error cell is changed to green and an error message is attached to the error cell as a commnet of the cell like the above figure. The list of the error messages is as follows:

• Input a number. • The value is out of range (n to m). • Input a string within n characters (m in multi-bytes characters). • The line number is over limit n. • The message referenced by the ID is not found. • The kind(s) cannot be specified.

* m and n are numbers, s is a string

NOTE 1 The input data can be checked for an individual guidance table by clicking the [CHECK] button

displayed at the top of the guidance table. In this case, the result of the check is displayed under the [CHECK] button like the following

figure.

2 In case that errors occurs on two or more guidance tables, the [Result of Check] on the [Overall]

sheet shows the name of the guidance table where the first error occurs. As for the result of check for each guidance table, see the display under the [CHECK] button.

Moreover, the color of the cell changes into light blue when the character string that shows the destination of the jump of the machine side to guidance table 2 from the guidance table for the CNC alarm is input to message ID. Example )

18.4.6.3 Making a memory card format file By clicking the [Make Memory Card File] button on the [Overall] sheet, the following dialog box will be displayed.


- 1458 -

Fig.18.4.6.3 (a)

Make a CNC readable memory card format file as follows: 1 Input a folder name where you want to make a file in the [Destination folder]. 2 Input a file name that you want to make in the [File name].

" GUI_USR.MEM " is input by default. When you input a file name without its extension, the extension "MEM" is added to the file name automatically.

3 Click the [OK] button. After making the file is completed, the message box "Making the memory card format file is completed." will be displayed.

NOTE 1 The available file name is a short file name with alphabetic and numerical letters (8.3

MS-DOS format). Other name format cannot be read by CNC.

2 If a file having the same name as the specified one has already existed in the destination folder, the file always will be overwritten.

3 When making the memory card format file is failed, the message box "The memory card format file cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following messages about the cause of that failure. • The input data have not been checked on (sheet name) – guidance table (1

or 2) • There are error(s) of the input data on (sheet name) – guidance table (1 or 2) • The specified file name is not correct. • (Destination folder) is not found. • Files in (destination folder) cannot be written. • The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.

By loading the file to CNC with the CNC BOOT function, the trouble diagnosis message can be displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen when the relevant external alarm, macro alarm or operator message happens.

NOTE As for the CNC BOOT function, see the following manuals. Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64305EN)

”APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM”

18.4.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table As a result of the diagnosis of the CNC alarm, the diagnosis of the machine side might be needed. There is special message ID that jumps from the guidance table of the CNC alarm to the guidance table on the machine side for the diagnosis of such a case.


- 1459 -

It is possible to jump to the diagnosis of MTB's guidance table after the diagnosis of the CNC alarm if the guidance table is made by using Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" in the following tables.

Tabel 18.4.6.4 (a) Reserved message ID No. Message ID Title Probable cause 1 M205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not set to 1 when

the rigid tapping is executed. 2 M409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a

load torque higher than a normal operation value. 3 M410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an

axis from reaching a target position. 4 M411 EXCESS ERROR ( MOVING ) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an

axis from moving. 5 M420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical

synchronism with each other, resulting in a large torque difference.

6 M421 EXCESS ERROR (SEMI-FULL) With a closed-loop machine, a shift occurred between the motion of the motor and the motion of the separate detector by a cause such as a mechanical twist.

7 M436 SOFT THERMAL (OVC) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a large load and the flow of an excessive current.

NOTE Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" other than existing in the above table is not

available.

18.4.7 Making messages for multi-languages To change the language of messages displayed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen complying with the display language of CNC, it is necessary to input messages for each language and make the memory card format file. The messages for each display language are input on dedicated sheets for multi-languages.

NOTE The messages in the [Guidance] sheet are assumed as English.

If you need messages other than English, make messages as follows:

18.4.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages Making sheets for multi-languages is as follows:


- 1460 -

Fig.18.4.7.1 (a)

1 Click the [Multi-Languages] button on the [Overall] sheet. The following dialog box will be

displayed. 2 Turn on a check box for a language that you want to make in the [Make sheet] list. Two or more

check boxes can be turned on. After turning on the check box in the [Make sheet] list, the check box for the corresponding language can be operated in the [Output file] list.

3 In the [Output file] list, turn on a check box for a language that you want to output to your CNC readable memory card format file at the same time. Up to 5 check boxes other than English can be turned on. 6 or more check boxes cannot be turned on.

4 Click the [OK] button. The sheets that are selected in the item 2 will be made like the following figure.

NOTE 1 The language, which was supported by “Guidance table for machine alarm

diagnosis”, are 21 ones shown in the previous dialog box. Also, the language, which isn’t supported by CNC, can’t be displayed on CNC.

2 The number of languages that can be output to the file of the memory card format at the same time is six languages (English + five national languages).

3 Once a sheet for multi-languages is made, the language of the [Guidance] sheet assumed as English. And, in the previous dialog box, the check box for English in the [Make sheet] and [Output file] list is turned on by default and they cannot be operated.

4 If you input other than English messages in the [Guidance] sheet before making the sheet for multi-languages, move the messages in the [Guidance] sheet to a sheet for an appropriate language by cut and paste operation of Excel.

5 To remove the sheet for multi-languages, turn off the check box for the language that you want to remove in the [Make sheet] list in the previous dialog box.

Sheets for multi-languages


- 1461 -

18.4.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages

The way to input data on the sheet for multi-languages is the same as one on the [Guidance] sheet that has already explained in the section "18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages". However, data can be input for the 3 items only – Title, Probable cause and Guidance message. As for data other than the 3 times, data in the [Guidance] sheet is copied to here and displayed.

Fig.18.4.7.2 (a) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 1

Fig.18.4.7.2 (b) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 2

After inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages, check the input data and make the memory card format file according to the procedure described in "18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages".

NOTE The display language of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen is switched

automatically according to the CNC display language. However, when there is no message for the CNC display language in the memory card file, the input messages in the [Guidance] sheet are displayed.

18.4.8 Notice

・Excel’s file of trouble diagnosis message When you use "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis", change the setting of the macro function to "Enable" in the Trust Center of Excel 2007. If the setting is "Disable", the trouble diagnosis message cannot be made. To enable the macro function by setting a path in the "Trusted Locations" of the Trust Center, set the folder where the file to input trouble diagnosis messages should be located and also the install folder of the "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis".

18.4.9 Translating data used with the former series (Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B)

The Excel file and the memory card file used with the former series (Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B) cannot be used with the current target series (Series 0i /0i Mate-D) of this function. Translate the Excel file used with the former series and make the memory card format file again according to the following description.

NOTE As for the way to make the trouble diagnosis message for Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i

/21i-B, see the manual "Trouble Diagnosis Specifications" (A-78500) and "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Specifications" (A-78622)


- 1462 -

1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[Translate Former Series Data] in the Windows start menu.

Fig.18.4.7.2 (a)

2 In the displayed dialog box, input a Excel file name used with the former series in the [Source file

name] and input a translated file name in the [Destination file name].

Fig.18.4.7.2 (b)

3 Click the [OK] button, then the translated Excel file that is specified in the [Destination file name]

will be made. 4 With the translated Excel file, check input data and make the memory card format file according to

the section "18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages".

NOTE 1 Input a full path in the [Source file name] and [Destination file name]. The path

name cannot be omitted. The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel book format). Any other extension is ignored and it is changed to "xls".

2 The "Kind" in the guidance table 1 is input automatically complying with the "Number" during the translation. • No. 1000 to 1999 → EX (External alarm) • No. 2000 to 2999 → OP (External operator message) • No. 3000 to 3200 → MC (Macro alarm)

3 When translating data is failed, the message box "The data cannot be translated." is displayed with one of the following messages about the cause of that failure. • (Source file name) is not found. • (Destination folder name) is not found. • Files in (destination folder) cannot be written. • The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file • (Destination file name) has already existed.

4 If you use separated Excel files for Japanese and English with the former series, translate both files and make a sheet to input Japanese messages in the English file. Then, move the data form the Japanese file to the sheet to input Japanese in the English file by cut and paste operation of Excel so as to combine two files to one.

APPENDIX

B-64303EN-1/02 APPENDIX

- 1465 -

A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Appendix A, “INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC”, consists of the following sections: A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES ..................................................................................................................1465 A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................1502

A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ............................................................................1502 A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ..............................................................................1523 A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)............................................................................1541

A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES Interface addresses among CNC and PMC are as follows: [Example of controlling one path]

G0000~

F0000~

X000~

Y000~CNC PMC Machine tool

[Example of controlling two paths]

G0000~

F0000~

X000~

Y000~

CNC

PMC Machine tool

Path 1

G1000~

F1000~Path 2

- Expression of signals

Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown below. This means either lathe system or machining center system does not have this signal. Upper part is for lathe system and lower part is for machining center system.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 *CDZ T seriesGn053

ROVLP UINT TMRONM series

APPENDIX B-64303EN-1/02

- 1466 -

A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

[Example 1] The figure above indicates *CDZ is provided only for the T series while the other signals for both

the T series and M series.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T seriesGn040

OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 M series

[Example 2] Signals OFN6 to OFN9 are for M series only.

NOTE 1 In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal is *ESP<X008.4>. 2 For 2-path control, one of the following superscripts is attached to the top right of

a symbol depending on the signal type. - Path type (on CNC side) : #P - Controlled axis type (on CNC side) : #SV - Spindle type (on CNC side) : #SP

In G and F addresses in the table, #P, #SV, or #SP attached to a signal indicates the signal is provided for each path on CNC side, each control axis on CNC side, or each spindle on CNC side, respectively. - PMC axis control group type: #PX

#PX attached to a signal indicates the signal is provided for each PMC axis control group.

3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different meaning.

4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used in each path on the CNC side, as shown below. 1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999) 2nd path : n=1 (No. 1000 to 1999)


- 1467 -


MT → CNC

Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X000

X001

X002

X003

ESKIP -MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 -MIT1#1 +MIT1#1 XAE2 XAE1 X004 T series SKIP #1 SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1

ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 X004 M series SKIP #1 SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1

SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1

X005

X006

X007 *DEC5#2 *DEC4#2 *DEC3#2 *DEC2#2 *DEC1#2

X008 *ESP

X009 *DEC5#1 *DEC4#1 *DEC3#1 *DEC2#1 *DEC1#1

X010

X011 T series

X011 M series

X012

ESKIP#2 -MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 -MIT1#2 +MIT1#2 X013 T series SKIP #2 SKIP6 #2 SKIP5 #2 SKIP4 #2 SKIP3 #2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2

ESKIP#2 X013 M series SKIP #2 SKIP6 #2 SKIP5 #2 SKIP4 #2 SKIP3 #2

SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2


- 1468 -


PMC → CNC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Gn000 ED7#P ED6#P ED5#P ED4#P ED3#P ED2#P ED1#P ED0#P


Gn002 ESTB#P EA6#P EA5#P EA4#P EA3#P EA2#P EA1#P EA0#P

Gn003

Gn004 MFIN3#P MFIN2#P FIN#P

Gn005 BFIN#P AFL#P TFIN#P SFIN#P MFIN#P

Gn006 SKIPP#P OVC#P *ABSM#P SRN#P

Gn007 RLSOT#P EXLM#P *FLWU#P RLSOT3#P ST#P STLK#P

RVS#P

Gn008 ERS#P RRW#P *SP#P *ESP#P *BSL#P *CSL#P *IT#P

Gn009 PN16#P PN8#P PN4#P PN2#P PN1#P

Gn010 *JV7#P *JV6#P *JV5#P *JV4#P *JV3#P *JV2#P *JV1#P *JV0#P

Gn011 *JV15#P *JV14#P *JV13#P *JV12#P *JV11#P *JV10#P *JV9#P *JV8#P

Gn012 *FV7#P *FV6#P *FV5#P *FV4#P *FV3#P *FV2#P *FV1#P *FV0#P

Gn013

Gn014 ROV2#P ROV1#P

Gn015

Gn016 F1D#P

Gn017

Gn018 HS2D#P HS2C#P HS2B#P HS2A#P HS1D#P HS1C#P HS1B#P HS1A#P

Gn019 RT#P MP2#P MP1#P HS3D#P HS3C#P HS3B#P HS3A#P

Gn020


- 1469 -



Gn021

Gn022

Gn023 HNDLF#P

Gn024 EPN7#P EPN6#P EPN5#P EPN4#P EPN3#P EPN2#P EPN1#P EPN0#P

Gn025 EPNS#P EPN13#P EPN12#P EPN11#P EPN10#P EPN9#P EPN8#P

Gn026 PC4SLC#P PC3SLC#P

Gn027 CON#P *SSTP3#SP *SSTP2#SP *SSTP1#SP SWS2#P SWS1#P

Gn028 PC2SLC#P SPSTPA#SP *SCPFA#SP *SUCPFA#SP GR2#SP GR1#SP

Gn029 *SSTP#P SOR#P SAR#P GR22#SP GR21#SP

Gn030 SOV7#P SOV6#P SOV5#P SOV4#P SOV3#P SOV2#P SOV1#P SOV0#P

Gn031 PKESS2#P PKESS1#P

Gn032 R08I#SP R07I#SP R06I#SP R05I#SP R04I#SP R03I#SP R02I#SP R01I#SP

Gn033 SIND#SP SSIN#SP SGN#SP R12I#SP R11I#SP R10I#SP R09I#SP

Gn034 R08I2#SP R07I2#SP R06I2#SP R05I2#SP R04I2#SP R03I2#SP R02I2#SP R01I2#SP

Gn035 SIND2#SP SSIN2#SP SGN2#SP R12I2#SP R11I2#SP R10I2#SP R09I2#SP

Gn036

Gn037

Gn038 *BECLP#P *BEUCP#P SDPC#P SPPHS#P SPSYC#P SBRT#P *PLSST#P

Gn039 GOQSM #P WOQSM #P OFN5#P OFN4#P OFN3#P OFN2#P OFN1#P OFN0#P

WOSET#P PRC#P S2TLS#PGn040

OFN9P OFN8P OFN7P OFN6P

Gn041 HS2ID#P HS2IC#P HS2IB#P HS2IA#P HS1ID#P HS1IC#P HS1IB#P HS1IA#P

Gn042 DMMC#P HS3ID#P HS3IC#P HS3IB#P HS3IA#P


- 1470 -



Gn043 ZRN#P DNCI#P MD4#P MD2#P MD1#P

Gn044 MLK#P BDT1#P

Gn045 BDT9#P BDT8#P BDT7#P BDT6#P BDT5#P BDT4#P BDT3#P BDT2#P

Gn046 DRN#P KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK#P KEYP

Gn047 TL128#P TL64#P TL32#P TL16#P TL08#P TL04#P TL02#P TL01#P

Gn048 TLRSTI#P LFCIV#P TL256#P

Gn049 *TLV7#P *TLV6#P *TLV5#P *TLV4#P *TLV3#P *TLV2#P *TLV1#P *TLV0#P

Gn050 *TLV9#P *TLV8#P

Gn051

Gn052

*CDZ#P Gn053 SMZ#P ROVLP#P UINT#P TMRON#P

Gn054 UI007#P UI006#P UI005#P UI004#P UI003#P UI002#P UI001#P UI000#P

Gn055 UI015#P UI014#P UI013#P UI012#P UI011#P UI010#P UI009#P UI008#P

Gn056

Gn057

Gn058 EXWT#P EXSTP#P EXRD#P

Gn059 NSYNCA#P

*TSB#P Gn060

RGTSP2#SP RGTSP1#SP

Gn061 RGTAP#P

Gn062 RTNT#P

NMWT#P SLSPB#P SLSPA#P NOWT HEAD Gn063 INFD#P

NOZAGC#P

SLPCB#P SLPCA#P

Gn064 ESRSYC#P


- 1471 -


Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Gn065

Gn066 EKSET RTRCT#P ENBKY IGNVRY#P

MTLC#P

Gn067 HCREQ HCABT MCHK#P MMOD#P

MTL07#P MTL06#P MTL05#P MTL04#P MTL03#P MTL02#P MTL01#P MTL00#P

Gn068

MTL15#P MTL14#P MTL13#P MTL12#P MTL11#P MTL10#P MTL09#P MTL08#P

Gn069

Gn070 MRDYA#SP ORCMA#SP SFRA#SP SRVA#SP CTH1A#SP CTH2A#SP TLMHA#SP TLMLA#SP

Gn071 RCHA#SP RSLA#SP INTGA#SP SOCNA#SP MCFNA#SP SPSLA#SP *ESPA#SP ARSTA#SP

Gn072 RCHHGA#SP MFNHGA#SP INCMDA#SP OVRA#SP DEFMDA#SP NRROA#SP ROTAA#SP INDXA#SP

Gn073 MPOFA#SP SLVA#SP MORCMA#SP

Gn074 MRDYB#SP ORCMB#SP SFRB#SP SRVB#SP CTH1B#SP CTH2B#SP TLMHB#SP TLMLB#SP

Gn075 RCHB#SP RSLB#SP INTGB#SP SOCNB#SP MCFNB#SP SPSLB#SP *ESPB#SP ARSTB#SP

Gn076 RCHHGB#SP MFNHGB#SP INCMDB#SP OVRB#SP DEFMDB#SP NRROB#SP ROTAB#SP INDXB#SP

Gn077 MPOFB#SP SLVB#SP MORCMB#SP

Gn078 SH07A#SP SH06A#SP SH05A#SP SH04A#SP SH03A#SP SH02A#SP SH01A#SP SH00A#SP

Gn079 SH11A#SP SH10A#SP SH09A#SP SH08A#SP

Gn080 SH07B#SP SH06B#SP SH05B#SP SH04B#SP SH03B#SP SH02B#SP SH01B#SP SH00B#SP

Gn081 SH11B#SP SH10B#SP SH09B#SP SH08B#SP

Gn082 EUI07#P EUI06#P EUI05#P EUI04#P EUI03#P EUI02#P EUI01#P EUI00#P

Gn083 EUI15#P EUI14#P EUI13#P EUI12#P EUI11#P EUI10#P EUI09#P EUI08#P

Gn084

Gn085

Gn086


- 1472 -



Gn087 MP32#P MP31#P MP22#P MP21#P

Gn088

Gn089

G2RVY#P G2RVZ#P G2RVX#PGn090

Gn091

Gn092

Gn093

Gn094

Gn095

Gn096 HROV#P *HROV6#P *HROV5#P *HROV4#P *HROV3#P *HROV2#P *HROV1#P *HROV0#P

Gn097

Gn098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0

Gn099

Gn100 +J5#SV +J4#SV +J3#SV +J2#SV +J1#SV

Gn101 *+ED25#SV *+ED24#SV *+ED23#SV *+ED22#SV *+ED21#SV

Gn102 -J5#SV -J4#SV -J3#SV -J2#SV -J1#SV

Gn103 *-ED25#SV *-ED24#SV *-ED23#SV *-ED22#SV *-ED21#SV

Gn104 +EXL5#SV +EXL4#SV +EXL3#SV +EXL2#SV +EXL1#SV

Gn105 -EXL5#SV -EXL4#SV -EXL3#SV -EXL2#SV -EXL1#SV

Gn106 MI5#SV MI4#SV MI3#SV MI2#SV MI1#SV


Gn108 MLK5#SV MLK4#SV MLK3#SV MLK2#SV MLK1#SV


- 1473 -




Gn110 +LM5#SV +LM4#SV +LM3#SV +LM2#SV +LM1#SV

Gn111

Gn112 -LM5#SV -LM4#SV -LM3#SV -LM2#SV -LM1#SV

Gn113

Gn114 *+L5#SV *+L4#SV *+L3#SV *+L2#SV *+L1#SV

Gn115

Gn116 *-L5#SV *-L4#SV *-L3#SV *-L2#SV *-L1#SV

Gn117


Gn119


Gn121

PK5#SV PK4#SV PK3#SV PK2#SV PK1#SV

Gn122 PKESS2#P PKESS1#P

Gn123

Gn124 DTCH5#SV DTCH4#SV DTCH3#SV DTCH2#SV DTCH1#SV

Gn125 IUDD5#SV IUDD4#SV IUDD3#SV IUDD2#SV IUDD1#SV

Gn126 SVF5#SV SVF4#SV SVF3#SV SVF2#SV SVF1#SV

Gn127

Gn128 MIX5#SV MIX4#SV MIX3#SV MIX2#SV MIX1#SV

Gn129

Gn130 *IT5#SV *IT4#SV *IT3#SV *IT2#SV *IT1#SV


- 1474 -



Gn131

Gn132 +MIT5#P +MIT4#P +MIT3#P +MIT2#P +MIT1#P

Gn133

Gn134 -MIT5#P -MIT4#P -MIT3#P -MIT2#P -MIT1#P

Gn135

Gn136 EAX5#SV EAX4#SV EAX3#SV EAX2#SV EAX1#SV

Gn137

Gn138 SYNC5#SV SYNC4#SV SYNC3#SV SYNC2#SV SYNC1#SV

Gn139

Gn140 SYNCJ5#SV SYNCJ4#SV SYNCJ3#SV SYNCJ2#SV SYNCJ1#SV

Gn141

Gn142 EBUFA#PX ECLRA#PX ESTPA#PX ESOFA#PX ESBKA#PX EMBUFA#PX ELCKZA#PX EFINA#PX

Gn143 EMSBKA#PX EC6A#PX EC5A#PX EC4A#PX EC3A#PX EC2A#PX EC1A#PX EC0A#PX

Gn144 EIF7A#PX EIF6A#PX EIF5A#PX EIF4A#PX EIF3A#PX EIF2A#PX EIF1A#PX EIF0A#PX

Gn145 EIF15A#PX EIF14A#PX EIF13A#PX EIF12A#PX EIF11A#PX EIF10A#PX EIF9A#PX EIF8A#PX

Gn146 EID7A#PX EID6A#PX EID5A#PX EID4A#PX EID3A#PX EID2A#PX EID1A#PX EID0A#PX




Gn150 EDRN#P ERT#P EOVC#P EROV2#P EROV1#P

Gn151 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P

Gn152


- 1475 -



Gn153

Gn154 EBUFB#PX ECLRB#PX ESTPB#PX ESOFB#PX ESBKB#PX EMBUFB#PX ELCKZB#PX EFINB#PX

Gn155 EMSBKB#PX EC6B#PX EC5B#PX EC4B#PX EC3B#PX EC2B#PX EC1B#PX EC0B#PX

Gn156 EIF7B#PX EIF6B#PX EIF5B#PX EIF4B#PX EIF3B#PX EIF2B#PX EIF1B#PX EIF0B#PX

Gn157 EIF15B#PX EIF14B#PX EIF13B#PX EIF12B#PX EIF11B#PX EIF10B#PX EIF9B#PX EIF8B#PX

Gn158 EID7B#PX EID6B#PX EID5B#PX EID4B#PX EID3B#PX EID2B#PX EID1B#PX EID0B#PX




Gn162 EOVCB#PX

Gn163 *EFOV7B#PX *EFOV6B#PX *EFOV5B#PX *EFOV4B#PX *EFOV3B#PX *EFOV2B#PX *EFOV1B#PX *EFOV0B#PX

Gn164

Gn165

Gn166 EBUFC#PX ECLRC#PX ESTPC#PX ESOFC#PX ESBKC#PX EMBUFC#PX ELCKZC#PX EFINC#PX

Gn167 EMSBKC#PX EC6C#PX EC5C#PX EC4C#PX EC3C#PX EC2C#PX EC1C#PX EC0C#PX

Gn168 EIF7C#PX EIF6C#PX EIF5C#PX EIF4C#PX EIF3C#PX EIF2C#PX EIF1C#PX EIF0C#PX

Gn169 EIF15C#PX EIF14C#PX EIF13C#PX EIF12C#PX EIF11C#PX EIF10C#PX EIF9C#PX EIF8C#PX

Gn170 EID7C#PX EID6C#PX EID5C#PX EID4C#PX EID3C#PX EID2C#PX EID1C#PX EID0C#PX




Gn174 EOVCC#PX


- 1476 -



Gn175 *EFOV7C#PX *EFOV6C#PX *EFOV5C#PX *EFOV4C#PX *EFOV3C#PX *EFOV2C#PX *EFOV1C#PX *EFOV0C#PX

Gn176

Gn177

Gn178 EBUFD#PX ECLRD#PX ESTPD#PX ESOFD#PX ESBKD#PX EMBUFD#PX ELCKZD#PX EFIND#PX

Gn179 EMSBKD#PX EC6D#PX EC5D#PX EC4D#PX EC3D#PX EC2D#PX EC1D#PX EC0D#PX

Gn180 EIF7D#PX EIF6D#PX EIF5D#PX EIF4D#PX EIF3D#PX EIF2D#PX EIF1D#PX EIF0D#PX

Gn181 EIF15D#PX EIF14D#PX EIF13D#PX EIF12D#PX EIF11D#PX EIF10D#PX EIF9D#PX EIF8D#PX

Gn182 EID7D#PX EID6D#PX EID5D#PX EID4D#PX EID3D#PX EID2D#PX EID1D#PX EID0D#PX




Gn186 EOVCD#PX

Gn187 *EFOV7D#PX *EFOV6D#PX *EFOV5D#PX *EFOV4D#PX *EFOV3D#PX *EFOV2D#PX *EFOV1D#PX *EFOV0D#PX

Gn188

Gn189

Gn190 OVLS5#SV OVLS4#SV OVLS3#SV OVLS2#SV OVLS1#SV

Gn191

Gn192 IGVRY5#SV IGVRY4#SV IGVRY3#SV IGVRY2#SV IGVRY1#SV

Gn193

Gn194

Gn195

Gn196 *DEC5#SV *DEC4#SV *DEC3#SV *DEC2#SV *DEC1#SV


- 1477 -



Gn197

Gn198 NPOS5#SV NPOS4#SV NPOS3#SV NPOS2#SV NPOS1#SV

Gn199 IOLBH2 IOLBH1

Gn200

Gn201

Gn202 NDCAL8#SV NDCAL7#SV NDCAL6#SV NDCAL5#SV NDCAL4#SV NDCAL3#SV NDCAL2#SV NDCAL1#SV

Gn203

Gn204 MRDYC#SP ORCMC#SP SFRC#SP SRVC#SP CTH1C#SP CTH2C#SP TLMHC#SP TLMLC#SP

Gn205 RCHC#SP RSLC#SP INTGC#SP SOCNC#SP MCFNC#SP SPSLC#SP *ESPC#SP ARSTC#SP

Gn206 RCHHGC#SP MFNHGC#SP INCMDC#SP OVRC#SP DEFMDC#SP NRROC#SP ROTAC#SP INDXC#SP

Gn207 MPOFC#SP SLVC#SP MORCMC#SP

Gn208

Gn209



Gn212

Gn213

Gn214

Gn215

Gn216

Gn217

Gn220

Gn251


- 1478 -



Gn263

Gn264 ESSYC2#SP ESSYC1#SP

Gn265 PKESE2#SP PKESE1#SP

Gn266

Gn267

Gn268

Gn269

Gn270

Gn271

Gn272

Gn273

Gn274 CSFI1#SP

Gn275

Gn276

Gn277

Gn278

Gn279

Gn280

Gn281

Gn282

Gn283

Gn284


- 1479 -



Gn285

Gn286

Gn287

Gn288 SPSYC2#SP SPSYC1#SP

Gn289 SPPHS2#SP SPPHS1#SP

Gn290

Gn291

Gn292

Gn293

Gn294

Gn295 CNCKY C2SEND EXSFT

Gn296

Gn297

Gn298

Gn299

Gn300

Gn301

Gn302

Gn303

Gn304

Gn305

Gn306


- 1480 -



Gn307

Gn308

Gn309

Gn310

Gn311

Gn312

Gn313

Gn314

Gn315

Gn316

Gn317

Gn318

Gn319

Gn320

Gn321

Gn322

Gn323

Gn324

Gn325

Gn326

Gn327

Gn328


- 1481 -



Gn329

Gn330

Gn331

Gn332

Gn333

Gn334

Gn335

Gn336

Gn337

Gn338

Gn339

Gn340

Gn341

Gn342

Gn343

Gn344

Gn345

Gn346

Gn347 HDN#P

Gn348

Gn349

Gn350


- 1482 -


Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Gn351

Gn352 *FHRO7#P *FHRO6#P *FHRO5#P *FHRO4#P *FHRO3#P *FHRO2#P *FHRO1#P *FHRO0#P

Gn353 FHROV#P *FHRO9#P *FHRO8#P

Gn354

Gn355

Gn356

Gn357

Gn358 WPRST5#SV WPRST4#SV WPRST3#SV WPRST2#SV WPRST1#SV

~

Gn375

Gn376 SOV27 SOV26 SOV25 SOV24 SOV23 SOV22 SOV21 SOV20

Gn377

Gn378

Gn379

Gn380

Gn381

Gn382

Gn383

Gn384

Gn385

Gn386

Gn387

Gn388


- 1483 -


Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Gn389

Gn390

Gn391

Gn392

Gn393

Gn394

Gn395

Gn396

Gn397

Gn398

Gn399

Gn400 *SUCPFB#SP

Gn401 *SCPFB#SP

Gn402 SPSTPB#SP

Gn403

Gn404

Gn405

Gn406

Gn407

Gn408 STCHK#P

Gn409

Gn410


- 1484 -


Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Gn411

Gn412

~

Gn512 MCST8#P MCST7#P MCST6#P MCST5#P MCST4#P MCST3#P MCST2#P MCST1#P

Gn513 MCST16#P MCST15#P MCST14#P MCST13#P MCST12#P MCST11#P MCST10#P MCST9#P

Gn514 MCFIN#P

Gn515

Gn516

Gn517 GAE3#P GAE2#P GAE1#P

Gn518

Gn519

Gn520

Gn521 SRVON5 SRVON4 SRVON3 SRVON2 SRVON1

Gn522

Gn523 SVRVS5 SVRVS4 SVRVS3 SVRVS2 SVRVS1

Gn524

MT8N07#P MT8N06#P MT8N05#P MT8N04#P MT8N03#P MT8N02#P MT8N01#P MT8N00#P

Gn525


Gn526


Gn527


Gn528

~

Gn531 MRVM#P FWSTP#P

Gn532


- 1485 -


Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Gn533

Gn534

Gn535

Gn536 SPSP#P

~

Gn544

Gn545

Gn546

Gn547

Gn548

~

Gn767


- 1486 -


CNC → PMC


Fn000 OP#P SA#P STL#P SPL#P RWD#P

Fn001 MA#P TAP#P ENB#SP DEN#P BAL#P RST#P AL#P

Fn002 MDRN#P CUT#P SRNMV#P THRD#P CSS#P RPDO#P INCH#P

Fn003 MEDT#P MMEM#

P MRMT#P MMDI#P MJ#P MH#P MINC#P

Fn004 MREF#P MAFL#P MSBK#P MABSM#P MMLK#P MBDT1#P

Fn005 MBDT9#P MBDT8#P MBDT7#P MBDT6#P MBDT5#P MBDT4#P MBDT3#P MBDT2#P

Fn006 ERTVA#P MDIRST#P TPPRS

Fn007 BF#P TF#P SF#P MF#P

Fn008 MF3#P MF2#P

Fn009 DM00#P DM01#P DM02#P DM30#P

Fn010 M07#P M06#P M05#P M04#P M03#P M02#P M01#P M00#P








Fn018

Fn019

Fn020


- 1487 -



Fn021

Fn022 S07#P S06#P S05#P S04#P S03#P S02#P S01#P S00#P




Fn026 T07#P T06#P T05#P T04#P T03#P T02#P T01#P T00#P




Fn030 B07#P B06#P B05#P B04#P B03#P B02#P B01#P B00#P




Fn034 SRSRDY#P SRSP1R#SP SRSP2R#SP GR3O#P GR2O#P GR1O#P

Fn035 SPAL#P

Fn036 R08O#SP R07O#SP R06O#SP R05O#SP R04O#SP R03O#SP R02O#SP R01O#SP

Fn037 R12O#SP R11O#SP R10O#SP R09O#SP

Fn038 ENB2#SP SUCLPA#SP SCLPA#SP

Fn039 MSPOSA#SP

Fn040 AR07#SP AR06#SP AR05#SP AR04#SP AR03#SP AR02#SP AR01#SP AR00#SP


Fn042


- 1488 -



Fn043 SYCAL2#SP SYCAL1#SP

Fn044 SYCAL#P FSPPH#P FSPSY#P FSCSL#P

Fn045 ORARA#SP TLMA#SP LDT2A#SP LDT1A#SP SARA#SP SDTA#SP SSTA#SP ALMA#SP

Fn046 MORA2A#SP MORA1A#SP PORA2A#SP SLVSA#SP RCFNA#SP RCHPA#SP CFINA#SP CHPA#SP

Fn047 INCSTA#SP PC1DEA#SP

Fn048 CSPENA#SP

Fn049 ORARB#SP TLMB#SP LDT2B#SP LDT1B#SP SARB#SP SDTB#SP SSTB#SP ALMB#SP

Fn050 MORA2B#SP MORA1B#SP PORA2B#SP SLVSB#SP RCFNB#SP RCHPB#SP CFINB#SP CHPB#SP

Fn051 INCSTB#SP PC1DEB#SP

Fn052

Fn053 EKENB RPALM#P RPBSY#P PRGDPL INHKY

Fn054 UO007#P UO006#P UO005#P UO004#P UO003#P UO002#P UO001#P UO000#P






Fn060 ESCAN#P ESEND#P EREND#P

MTLA#PMTLANG

#P Fn061 HCEXE HCAB2 BCLP#P BUCLP#P

Fn062 PRTSF#P AICC#P

WATO#P COSP2#P COSP1#P

Fn063 PSYN#P PSAR#P PSE2#P PSE1#P

TIALM#P TICHK#P COSP#P

Fn064 TLCHI#P TLNW#P


- 1489 -



Fn065 SYNMOD#

P RTRCTF#P RSMAX#P RGSPM#P RGSPP#P

Fn066 PECK2#P

RTPT#P

Fn067

Fn068

Fn069

Fn070 PSW08#P PSW07#P PSW06#P PSW05#P PSW04#P PSW03#P PSW02#P PSW01#P

Fn071 PSW16#P PSW15#P PSW14#P PSW13#P PSW12#P PSW11#P PSW10#P PSW09#P

Fn072 OUT7#P OUT6#P OUT5#P OUT4#P OUT3#P OUT2#P OUT1#P OUT0#P

Fn073 ZRNO#P MD4O#P MD2O#P MD1O#P

Fn074 OUT15#P OUT14#P OUT13#P OUT12#P OUT11#P OUT10#P OUT9#P OUT8#P

Fn075 SPO#P KEYO DRNO#P MLKO#P SBKO#P BDTO#P

Fn076 ROV2O#P ROV1O#P RTAP#P MP2O#P MP1O#P

Fn077 RTO#P HS1DO#P HS1CO#P HS1BO#P HS1AO#P

Fn078 *FV7O#P *FV6O#P *FV5O#P *FV4O#P *FV3O#P *FV2O#P *FV1O#P *FV0O#P

Fn079 *JV7O#P *JV6O#P *JV5O#P *JV4O#P *JV3O#P *JV2O#P *JV1O#P *JV0O#P

Fn080 *JV15O#P *JV14O#P *JV13O#P *JV12O#P *JV11O#P *JV10O#P *JV9O#P *JV8O#P

Fn081 -J4O#P +J4O#P -J3O#P +J3O#P -J2O#P +J2O#P -J1O#P +J1O#P

Fn082 RVSL#P

Fn083

Fn084 EUO07#P EUO06#P EUO05#P EUO04#P EUO03#P EUO02#P EUO01#P EUO00#P

Fn085 EUO15#P EUO14#P EUO13#P EUO12#P EUO11#P EUO10#P EUO09#P EUO08#P

Fn086


- 1490 -



Fn087

Fn088

Fn089

Fn090 ABTSP2＃SP ABTSP1＃SP ABTQSV#P

Fn091 MMMOD#P MRVSP#P MNCHG#P MRVMD#P

Fn092

Fn093 SVWRN4#P SVWRN3#P SVWRN2#P SVWRN1#P LFCIF#P

Fn094 ZP5#SV ZP4#SV ZP3#SV ZP2#SV ZP1#SV

Fn095


Fn097


Fn099


Fn101

Fn102 MV5#SV MV4#SV MV3#SV MV2#SV MV1#SV

Fn103

Fn104 INP5#SV INP4#SV INP3#SV INP2#SV INP1#SV

Fn105

Fn106 MVD5#SV MVD4#SV MVD3#SV MVD2#SV MVD1#SV

Fn107

Fn108 MMI5#SV MMI4#SV MMI3#SV MMI2#SV MMI1#SV


- 1491 -



Fn109

Fn110 MDTCH5#SV MDTCH4#SV MDTCH3#SV MDTCH2#SV MDTCH1#SV

Fn111

Fn112 EADEN5#SV EADEN4#SV EADEN3#SV EADEN2#SV EADEN1#SV

Fn113

Fn114 TRQL5#SV TRQL4#SV TRQL3#SV TRQL2#SV TRQL1#SV

Fn115

Fn116

Fn117

Fn118 SYN50#SV SYN40#SV SYN30#SV SYN20#SV SYN10#SV

Fn119

Fn120 ZRF5#SV ZRF4#SV ZRF3#SV ZRF2#SV ZRF1#SV

Fn121

Fn122 HDO3#P HDO2#P HDO1#P HDO0#P

Fn123

Fn124 +OT5#SV +OT4#SV +OT3#SV +OT2#SV +OT1#SV

Fn125

Fn126 -OT5#SV -OT4#SV -OT3#SV -OT2#SV -OT1#SV

Fn127

Fn128

Fn129 *EAXSL#P EOV0#P

Fn130 EBSYA#PX EOTNA#PX EOTPA#PX EGENA#PX EDENA#PX EIALA#PX ECKZA#PX EINPA#PX


- 1492 -



Fn131 EMF3A#PX EMF2A#PX EABUFA#PX EMFA#PX

Fn132 EM28A#PX EM24A#PX EM22A#PX EM21A#PX EM18A#PX EM14A#PX EM12A#PX EM11A#PX

Fn133 EBSYB#PX EOTNB#PX EOTPB#PX EGENB#PX EDENB#PX EIALB#PX ECKZB#PX EINPB#PX

Fn134 EMF3B#PX EMF2B#PX EABUFB#PX EMFB#PX

Fn135 EM28B#PX EM24B#PX EM22B#PX EM21B#PX EM18B#PX EM14B#PX EM12B#PX EM11B#PX

Fn136 EBSYC#PX EOTNC#PX EOTPC#PX EGENC#PX EDENC#PX EIALC#PX ECKZC#PX EINPC#PX

Fn137 EMF3C#PX EMF2C#PX EABUFC#PX EMFC#PX

Fn138 EM28C#PX EM24C#PX EM22C#PX EM21C#PX EM18C#PX EM14C#PX EM12C#PX EM11C#PX

Fn139 EBSYD#PX EOTND#PX EOTPD#PX EGEND#PX EDEND#PX EIALD#PX ECKZD#PX EINPD#PX

Fn140 EMF3D#PX EMF2D#PX EABUFD#PX EMFD#PX

Fn141 EM28D#PX EM24D#PX EM22D#PX EM21D#PX EM18D#PX EM14D#PX EM12D#PX EM11D#PX

Fn142 EM48A#PX EM44A#PX EM42A#PX EM41A#PX EM38A#PX EM34A#PX EM32A#PX EM31A#PX

Fn143

Fn144

Fn145 EM48B#PX EM44B#PX EM42B#PX EM41B#PX EM38B#PX EM34B#PX EM32B#PX EM31B#PX

Fn146

Fn147

Fn148 EM48C#PX EM44C#PX EM42C#PX EM41C#PX EM38C#PX EM34C#PX EM32C#PX EM31C#PX

Fn149

Fn150

Fn151 EM48D#PX EM44D#PX EM42D#PX EM41D#PX EM38D#PX EM34D#PX EM32D#PX EM31D#PX

Fn152


- 1493 -



Fn153

Fn154 TLAL

Fn155

Fn156

Fn157

Fn158

Fn159

Fn160 MSP07#P MSP06#P MSP05#P MSP04#P MSP03#P MSP02#P MSP01#P MSP00#P

Fn161 MSP15#P MSP14#P MSP13#P MSP12#P MSP11#P MSP10#P MSP09#P MSP08#P

Fn162

Fn163

Fn164

Fn165

Fn166

Fn167

Fn168 ORARC#SP TLMC#SP LDT2C#SP LDT1C#SP SARC#SP SDTC#SP SSTC#SP ALMC#SP

Fn169 MORA2C#SP MORA1C#SP PORA2C#SP SLVSC#SP RCFNC#SP RCHPC#SP CFINC#SP CHPC#SP

Fn170 INCSTC#SP PC1DEC#SP

Fn171

Fn172 PBATL#P PBATZ#P

Fn173

Fn174


- 1494 -



Fn175

Fn176

Fn177

Fn178

Fn179

Fn180 CLRCH5#SV CLRCH4#SV CLRCH3#SV CLRCH2#SV CLRCH1#SV

Fn181

Fn182 EACNT5#SV EACNT4#SV EACNT3#SV EACNT2#SV EACNT1#SV

Fn183

Fn184 ABDT5#SV ABDT4#SV ABDT3#SV ABDT2#SV ABDT1#SV

Fn185

Fn186

Fn187

Fn188 AMRST5#SV AMRST4#SV AMRST3#SV AMRST2#SV AMRST1#SV

Fn189

Fn190 TRQM5#SV TRQM4#SV TRQM3#SV TRQM2#SV TRQM1#SV

Fn191

Fn192

Fn193

Fn194

Fn195

Fn196


- 1495 -



Fn197

Fn198

Fn199

Fn200 R08O2#SP R07O2#SP R06O2#SP R05O2#SP R04O2#SP R03O2#SP R02O2#SP R01O2#SP

Fn201 R12O2#SP R11O2#SP R10O2#SP R09O2#SP





Fn206

Fn207

Fn208

Fn209

Fn210 SYNMT5#P SYNMT4#P SYNMT3#P SYNMT2#P SYNMT1#P

Fn211 SYNOF5#P SYNOF4#P SYNOF3#P SYNOF2#P SYNOF1#P

Fn212

Fn213

Fn214

Fn215

Fn216

Fn217

Fn218


- 1496 -



Fn263

Fn264 SPWRN8#P SPWRN7#P SPWRN6#P SPWRN5#P SPWRN4#P SPWRN3#P SPWRN2#P SPWRN1#P

Fn265 SPWRN9#P

Fn266

Fn267

Fn268

Fn269



Fn272

Fn273

Fn274 CSFO1#SP

Fn275

Fn276

Fn277

Fn278

Fn279

Fn280

Fn281

Fn282

Fn283

Fn284


- 1497 -



Fn285

Fn286

Fn287

Fn288 FSPSY2#SP FSPSY1#SP

Fn289 FSPPH2#SP FSPPH1#SP

Fn290

Fn291

Fn292

Fn293

Fn294

Fn295 CNCKYO C2SENO

Fn296

Fn297

Fn298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1

Fn299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1

Fn300

Fn301

Fn302

Fn303

Fn304

Fn305

Fn306


- 1498 -



Fn307

Fn308

Fn309

Fn310

Fn311

Fn312

Fn313

Fn314

Fn315

Fn316

Fn317 ESFM8 ESFM7 ESFM6 ESFM5 ESFM4 ESFM3 ESFM2 ESFM1

Fn318 ESF08 ESF07 ESF06 ESF05 ESF04 ESF03 ESF02 ESF01

Fn319 ESF10 ESF09

Fn320

Fn321

Fn322

Fn323

Fn324

Fn325

Fn326

Fn327

Fn328


- 1499 -



Fn329

Fn330

Fn331

Fn332

Fn333

Fn334

Fn335

Fn336

Fn337

Fn338

Fn339

Fn340

Fn341 SYCM5#SV SYCM4#SV SYCM3#SV SYCM2#SV SYCM1#SV

Fn342 SYCS5#SV SYCS4#SV SYCS3#SV SYCS2#SV SYCS1#SV

Fn343 MIXO5#SV MIXO4#SV MIXO3#SV MIXO2#SV MIXO1#SV

Fn344 OVMO5#SV OVMO4#SV OVMO3#SV OVMO2#SV OVMO1#SV

Fn345 OVSO5#SV OVSO4#SV OVSO3#SV OVSO2#SV OVSO1#SV

Fn346 SMPK5#SV SMPK4#SV SMPK3#SV SMPK2#SV SMPK1#SV

Fn347

Fn348

Fn349

Fn350


- 1500 -



Fn356

Fn358 WPSF5#SV WPSF4#SV WPSF3#SV WPSF2#SV WPSF1#SV

Fn395

Fn396

Fn397

Fn398

Fn399

Fn400 SUCLPB#SP

Fn401 SCLPB#SP

Fn402 MSPOSB#SP

Fn403 SYNER#P

Fn404

Fn405

Fn406

Fn407

Fn408

Fn409

Fn410

Fn411

Fn412

Fn413

Fn414


- 1501 -



Fn415

Fn416

Fn417

Fn418

~

Fn511

Fn512 MCSP#P MCRQ#P MCEXE#P

Fn513 ZRNR#P DNCIR#P MD4R#P MD2R#P MD1R#P

Fn514 MCEX8#P MCEX7#P MCEX6#P MCEX5#P MCEX4#P MCEX3#P MCEX2#P MCEX1#P

Fn515 MCEX16#P MCEX15#P MCEX14#P MCEX13#P MCEX12#P MCEX11#P MCEX10#P MCEX9#P

Fn516

Fn517

Fn518

Fn519

Fn520 ATBK

Fn521 SVREV5 SVREV4 SVREV3 SVREV2 SVREV1

Fn522 SPP5 SPP4 SPP3 SPP2 SPP1

~

Fn531

Fn532 SYNO5#SV SYNO4#SV SYNO3#SV SYNO2#SV SYNO1#SV

Fn533

~

Fn767


- 1502 -


A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS

A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ○ : Available ● : Available only with 2-path control － : Unavailable

Function Signal name Symbol Address T M Reference item

I/O Link β Manual handle interface (Peripheral equipment control interface)

Manual handle generators selection signal

IOLBH1, IOLBH2 G199.0, G199.1 ○ ○ 3.4

External read start signal EXRD G058.1 ○ ○ External read/punch stop signal

EXSTP G058.2 ○ ○

External punch start signal

EXWT G058.3 ○ ○

Read/punch busy signal RPBSY F053.2 ○ ○

External I/O device control

Read/punch alarm signal RPALM F053.3 ○ ○

14.2

Small-hole peck drilling cycle in progress signal

PECK2 F066.5 － ○ Canned cycle for drilling

Tapping signal TAP F001.5 ○ ○ 12.7

Alarm signal AL F001.0 ○ ○ Alarm signal

Battery alarm signal BAL F001.2 ○ ○ 2.4

Unexpected disturbance torque detection ignore signal

IUDD1~IUDD5 G125.0~G125.4 ○ ○ 2.9

Unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABDT1~ABDT5 F184.0~F184.4 ○ ○

Servo axis unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABTQSV F090.0 ○ ○

1st spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABTSP1 F090.1 ○ ○

Unexpected disturbance torque detection

2nd spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABTSP2 F090.2 ○ ○

2nd M function code signals

M200~M215 F014,F015 ○ ○

3rd M function code signals

M300~M315 F016,F017 ○ ○

2nd M function strobe signal

MF2 F008.4 ○ ○

Multiple M commands in a single block

3rd M function strobe signal

MF3 F008.5 ○ ○

9.3


- 1503 -



Start lock signal STLK G007.1 ○ ○ Interlock signal for all axes

*IT G008.0 ○ ○

Interlock signal for each axis

*IT1~*IT5 G130.0~G130.4 ○ ○

Interlock signal for each axis direction

+MIT1~+MIT5 -MIT1~-MIT5

G132.0~G132.4 G134.0~G134.4

－ ○

Cutting block start interlock signal

*CSL G008.1 ○ ○

Interlock

Block start interlock signal *BSL G008.3 ○ ○

2.5

Inch/metric conversion Inch input signal INCH F002.0 ○ ○ 12.5 B axis clamp signal BCLP F061.1 － ○ B axis clamp completion signal

*BECLP G038.7 － ○

B axis unclamp signal BUCLP F061.0 － ○ Index table indexing function

B axis unclamp completion signal

*BEUCP G038.6 － ○

13.12

In-feed control (for grinding machine)

In-feed control cut start signal

INFD G063.6 － ○ 12.9

In-position signals INP1~INP5 F104.0~F104.4 ○ ○ In-position check

In-position check signal SMZ G053.6 ○ ○ 7.2.5

AI control I/II AI contour control mode signal

AICC F062.0 ○ ○ 7.1.11

One-digit F code feed One-digit F code feed signal

F1D G016.7 － ○ 7.1.5

*+L1~*+L5 G114.0~G114.4 ○ ○ Overtravel Overtravel signals

*-L1~*-L5 G116.0~G116.4 ○ ○ 2.3.1

Override cancel Override cancel signal OVC G006.4 ○ ○ 7.1.7.4 Direct operation by Open CNC

Direct operation select signal

DMMC G042.7 ○ ○ 5.13

Signals for selecting the manual feed axis for axis synchronous control

SYNCJ1~SYNCJ5 G140.0~G140.4 ○ ○

Machine coordinate match state output signals

SYNMT1~SYNMT5

F210.0~F210.4 ○ ○

Axis synchronous control status signals

SYNO1~SYNO5 F532.0~F532.4 ○ ○

Synchronization compensation enable state output signals

SYNOF1~SYNOF5

F211.0~F211.4 ○ ○

Signal for indicating a positional deviation error alarm for axis synchronous control

SYNER F403.0 ○ ○

Synchronous control axis selection signals

SYNC1~SYNC5 G138.0~G138.4 ○ ○

Axis synchronous control

Signal for disabling torque difference alarm detection for axis synchronous control

NSYNCA G059.7 ○ ○

1.6

Feedrate override Feedrate override signals *FV0~*FV7 G012 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2


- 1504 -



BDT1 G044.0 ○ ○ Optional block skip signals BDT2~BDT9 G045 ○ ○

MBDT1 F004.0 ○ ○

Optional block skip/addition of optional block skip Optional block skip check

signals MBDT2~MBDT9 F005 ○ ○

5.5

External key input mode selection signal

ENBKY G066.1 ○ ○

Key code signals EKC0~EKC7 G098 ○ ○ Key code read signal EKSET G066.7 ○ ○ Key code read completion signal

EKENB F053.7 ○ ○

Key input disable signal INHKY F053.0 ○ ○

External key input

Key input disable signal PRGDPL F053.1 ○ ○

16.5

*+ED1~*+ED5 G118.0~G118.4 ○ ○ External deceleration signals 1 *-ED1~*-ED5 G120.0~G120.4 ○ ○

*+ED21~*+ED25 G101.0~G101.4 ○ ○ External deceleration signals 2 *-ED21~*-ED25 G103.0~G103.4 ○ ○

*+ED31~*+ED35 G107.0~G107.4 ○ ○

External deceleration

External deceleration signals 3 *-ED31~*-ED35 G109.0~G109.4 ○ ○

7.1.9

Address signals for external data input

EA6~EA0 G002.6~G002.0 ○ ○

Data signals for external data input

ED31~ED0 G211,G210, G001,G000

○ ○

Read signal for external data input

ESTB G002.7 ○ ○

Read completion signal for external data input

EREND F060.0 ○ ○

Search completion signal for external data input

ESEND F060.1 ○ ○

External data input

Search cancel signal for external data input

ESCAN F060.2 ○ ○

16.2

External workpiece number search signals

PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,PN16

G009.0~G009.4 ○ ○

Extended external workpiece number search signals

EPN0~EPN13 G024.0~G025.5 ○ ○ External workpiece number search

External workpiece number search start signal

EPNS G025.7 ○ ○

16.4

Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals

WPRST1 to WPRST5

G358.0~G358.4 ○ ○ Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals Each axis workpiece

coordinate system preset completion signals

WPSF1 to WPSF5 F358.0~F358.4 ○ ○

1.5.2.6

Extended external machine zero point shift

Extended external machine zero point shift signal

EMZ0~EMZ15 Specifying by parameter No.1280.

○ ○ 16.3

UI000~UI031 G054~G057 ○ ○ UI100~UI131 G276~G279 ○ ○ UI200~UI231 G280~G283 ○ ○ Custom macro

Input signals for custom macro

UI300~UI331 G284~G287 ○ ○

12.6


- 1505 -



UO000~UO031 F054,F055, F276,F277

○ ○

UO100~UO131 F056~F059 ○ ○ UO200~UO231 F280~F283 ○ ○

Custom macro Output signals for custom macro

UO300~UO331 F284~F287 ○ ○

12.6

Target part count reached signal

PRTSF F062.7 ○ ○ Run hour and part count display General-purpose

integrating meter start signal

TMRON G053.0 ○ ○ 13.1.1

Screen erasure Automatic screen erasing signal

ERTVA F006.2 ○ ○ 13.1.12

Hard copy cancellation request signal

HCABT G067.6 ○ ○

Hard copy execution request signal

HCREQ G067.7 ○ ○

Hard copy cancellation request reception signal

HCAB2 F061.2 ○ ○

Screen hard copy function

Hard copy execution status signal

HCEXE F061.3 ○ ○

13.1.14

Path interference check in progress signal

TICHK F064.6 ● － Interference check

Path interference alarm signal

TIALM F064.7 ● － 8.3

Machine operation menu screen select signal

EXSFT G295.0 ○ ○

Machine operation menu select number notification signal

ESFM1~ESFM8 F317.0~G317.7 ○ ○ Machine operation menu

Soft key number select state notification signal

ESF01~ESF10 F318.0~G319.1 ○ ○

13.4

Angular axis control Signal for disabling angular axis control for the perpendicular axis

NOZAGC G063.5 ○ ○ 1.8

Path spindle command selection signals

SLSPA,SLSPB G063.2,G063.3 ● －

Path spindle feedback selection signals

SLPCA,SLPCB G064.2,G064.3 ● －

Path spindle command confirmation signal

COSP F064.5 ● －

COSP1 F063.3 ● －

Path spindle control

Path spindle command confirmation signal COSP2 F063.4 ● －

8.8

Path select Path select signal (Tool post select signal)

HEAD G063.0 ● － 8.11, 13.3

Trouble forecast signal (For the thermal simulation data)

TDSML1~TDSML8 F298.0~F298.7 ○ ○

Trouble diagnosis Trouble forecast signal (For the disturbance level)

TDFTR1~TDFLR8 F299.0~F299.7 ○ ○

18.3

Direct input of tool offset value measured

Position record signal PRC G040.6 ○ － 15.4.1


- 1506 -



Tool offset number selection signals

OFN0~OFN5, OFN6~OFN9

G039.0~G039.5, G040.0~G040.3

○ －

Tool offset write mode select signal

GOQSM G039.7 ○ －

Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal

WOQSM G039.6 ○ －

+MIT1,-MIT1 +MIT2,-MIT2

X004.2,X004.3 X004.4,X004.5

Tool offset write signals +MIT1~+MIT2 -MIT1~-MIT2

G132.0~G132.1 G134.0~G134.1

○ －

Direct input of tool offset value measured B

Spindle measurement select signal

S2TLS G040.5 ○ －

15.4.2

Direct input of tool offset value measured B

Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal

WOSET G040.7 ○ － 15.4.2

Tool change signal TLCH F064.0 ○ ○ Tool change reset signal TLRST G048.7 ○ ○ Individual tool change signal

TLCHI F064.2 ○ ○

Individual tool change reset signal

TLRSTI G048.6 ○ ○

Tool skip signal TLSKP G048.5 ○ ○ New tool select signal TLNW F064.1 ○ ○ Tool group number selection signals

TL01 to TL256 G047.0~G048.0 ○ ○

Tool life count override signals

*TLV0 to *TLV9 G049.0~G050.1 ○ ○

Tool life arrival notice signal

TLCHB F064.3 ○ ○

Tool life counting disable signal

LFCIV G048.2 ○ ○

Tool life counting disable signal

LFCIF F093.2 ○ ○

Tool life management

Remaining tool count notification signal

TLAL F154.0 － ○

11.4

Auxiliary function completion signal

MFIN G005.0 ○ ○

Spindle function completion signal

SFIN G005.2 ○ ○

Tool function completion signal

TFIN G005.3 ○ ○

2nd auxiliary function completion signal

BFIN G005.7 ○ ○

2nd M function completion signal

MFIN2 G004.4 ○ ○

High-speed M/S/T/B interface

3rd M function completion signal

MFIN3 G004.5 ○ ○

9.4

High-speed skip signal

High-speed skip status signals

HDO0~HDO3 F122.0~F122.3 ○ ○ 15.3.2

Wrong operation prevention

Start check signal STCHK G408.0 ○ ○ 2.12

Servo off / mechanical handle feed

Servo off signals SVF1~SVF5 G126.0~G126.4 ○ ○ 1.2.9


- 1507 -



SVWRN1 F093.4 ○ ○ SVWRN2 F093.5 ○ ○ SVWRN3 F093.6 ○ ○

Servo axis control Servo warning detail signals

SVWRN4 F093.7 ○ ○

18.1

SV speed control mode signals

SRVON1~ SRVON6

G521.0~G521.5 ○ ○

SV reverse signals SVRVS1~SVRVS6 G523.0~G523.5 ○ ○ Spindle control with servo motor

SV speed control mode in-progress signals

SVREV1~SVREV6 F521.0~F521.5 ○ ○

10.19

Spindle control with servo motor

Spindle indexing signal for each axis

SPP1~SPP6 F522.0~F522.5 ○ ○ 10.19

Speed display function of a milling tool with servo motor

Speed display change signal

SDPC G38.5 ○ ○ 13.1.10

Cycle start signal ST G007.2 ○ ○ Feed hold signal *SP G008.5 ○ ○ Automatic operation signal

OP F000.7 ○ ○

Cycle start lamp signal STL F000.5 ○ ○

Cycle start / feed hold

Feed hold lamp signal SPL F000.4 ○ ○

5.1

Cs contour control change signal

CON G027.7 ○ ○ Cs contour control

Cs contour control change completion signal

FSCSL F044.1 ○ ○ 10.11

Cs axis coordinate establishment request signals

CSFI1 G274.4 ○ ○

Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm signals

CSFO1 F274.4 ○ ○

Cs contour control axis coordinate establishment

Cs axis origin established state signals

CSPENA F048.4 ○ ○

10.11.3

Key control selection signal

CNCKY G295.7 ○ ○

Dual display forcible end request signal

C2SEND G295.6 ○ ○

Key control selection status signal

CNCNYO F295.7 ○ ○

CNC screen dual display

Dual display forcible end status signal

C2SENO F295.6 ○ ○

13.1.9

Axis moving signals MV1~MV5 F102.0~F102.4 ○ ○ Outputting the movement state of an axis

Axis moving direction signals

MVD1~MVD5 F106.0~F106.4 ○ ○ 1.2.6

Axis non-display Axis non-display signals NPOS1~NPOS5 G198.0~G198.4 ○ ○ AR00~AR15 F040,F041 ○ ○ Actual spindle speed

output Actual spindle speed signals AR002~AR152 F202,F203 ○ ○ 10.9

Automatic data backup

Automatic data backup executing signal

ATBK F520.0 ○ ○

Constant surface speed control

Constant surface speed signal

CSS F002.2 ○ ○ 10.8


- 1508 -



SPSTPA G028.6 ○ ○ Spindle stop completion signal SPSTPB G402.1 ○ ○

SUCLPA F038.1 ○ ○ Spindle unclamp signal

SUCLPB F400.1 ○ ○ *SUCPFA G028.4 ○ ○

Spindle positioning

Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFB G400.1 ○ ○

10.10

*SCPFA G028.5 ○ ○ Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFB G401.1 ○ ○

SCLPA F038.0 ○ ○ Spindle clamp signal

SCLPB F401.1 ○ ○ MSPOSA F039.0 ○ ○

Spindle positioning

Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOSB F402.1 ○ ○

10.10

SH00A~SH11A G078.0~G079.3 ○ ○ Spindle orientation

Spindle orientation external stop position command signals SH00B~SH11B G080.0~G081.3 ○ ○ 10.15

Simple spindle synchronous control signal

ESRSYC G064.6 ○ ○

ESSYC1 G264.0 ○ ○ Simple spindle synchronous control signal (for each spindle) ESSYC2 G264.1 ○ ○

1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 G122.6 (G031.6)

○ ○

2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 G122.7 (G031.7)

○ ○

PKESE1 G265.0 ○ ○ Simple spindle synchronous parking signal (for each spindle) PKESE2 G265.1 ○ ○

Phase error monitor signal

SYCAL F044.4 ○ ○

SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○

Simple spindle synchronous control

Phase error monitor signal (for each spindle) SYCAL2 F043.1 ○ ○

10.17

Polygon spindle stop signal

*PLSST G038.0 ○ ○

Polygon spindle speed arrival signal

PSAR F063.2 ○ ○

Polygon master axis not arrival signal

PSE1 F063.0 ○ ○ Paths polygon turning

Polygon synchronization axis not arrival signal

PSE2 F063.1 ○ ○

6.9.2

TLMLA G070.0 ○ ○ TLMLB G074.0 ○ ○

Torque limit command LOW signals (serial spindle) TLMLC G204.0 ○ －

TLMHA G070.1 ○ ○ TLMHB G074.1 ○ ○

Torque limit command HIGH signals (serial spindle) TLMHC G204.1 ○ －

CTH1A,CTH2A G070.3,G070.2 ○ ○ CTH1B,CTH2B G074.3,G074.2 ○ ○ Clutch/gear signals (serial

spindle) CTH1C,CTH2C G204.3,G204.2 ○ － SRVA G070.4 ○ ○ SRVB G074.4 ○ ○

Spindle serial output

CCW command signals (serial spindle)

SRVC G204.4 ○ －

10.3


- 1509 -



SFRA G070.5 ○ ○ SFRB G074.5 ○ ○

CW command signals (serial spindle)

SFRC G204.5 ○ － 10.3

ORCMA G070.6 ○ ○ ORCMB G074.6 ○ ○ Orientation command

signals (serial spindle) ORCMC G204.6 ○ －

10.3 10.14

MRDYA G070.7 ○ ○ MRDYB G074.7 ○ ○ Machine ready signals

(serial spindle) MRDYC G204.7 ○ － ARSTA G071.0 ○ ○ ARSTB G075.0 ○ ○ Alarm reset signals (serial

spindle) ARSTC G205.0 ○ － *ESPA G071.1 ○ ○ *ESPB G075.1 ○ ○ Emergency stop signals

(serial spindle) *ESPC G205.1 ○ － SPSLA G071.2 ○ ○ SPSLB G075.2 ○ ○ Spindle selection signals

(serial spindle) SPSLC G205.2 ○ － MCFNA G071.3 ○ ○ MCFNB G075.3 ○ ○

Power line switch completion signals (serial spindle) MCFNC G205.3 ○ －

SOCNA G071.4 ○ ○ SOCNB G075.4 ○ ○ Soft start/stop cancel

signals (serial spindle) SOCNC G205.4 ○ － INTGA G071.5 ○ ○ INTGB G075.5 ○ ○ Speed integral signals

(serial spindle) INTGC G205.5 ○ － RSLA G071.6 ○ ○ RSLB G075.6 ○ ○ Output switch request

signals (serial spindle) RSLC G205.6 ○ － RCHA G071.7 ○ ○ RCHB G075.7 ○ ○ Power line status check

signals (serial spindle) RCHC G205.7 ○ － INDXA G072.0 ○ ○ INDXB G076.0 ○ ○

Orientation stop position change command signals (serial spindle) INDXC G206.0 ○ －

ROTAA G072.1 ○ ○ ROTAB G076.1 ○ ○

Rotational direction command signals for orientation stop position change (serial spindle) ROTAC G206.1 ○ －

NRROA G072.2 ○ ○

NRROB G076.2 ○ ○

Shortcut command signals for orientation stop position change (serial spindle) NRROC G206.2 ○ －

DEFMDA G072.3 ○ ○ DEFMDB G076.3 ○ ○

Differential speed mode command signals (serial spindle) DEFMDC G206.3 ○ －

OVRA G072.4 ○ ○ OVRB G076.4 ○ ○ Analog override signals

(serial spindle) OVRC G206.4 ○ － INCMDA G072.5 ○ ○ INCMDB G076.5 ○ ○


Incremental command externally set orientation signals (serial spindle) INCMDC G206.5 ○ －

10.3


- 1510 -



MFNHGA G072.6 ○ ○ MFNHGB G076.6 ○ ○

Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status signals (serial spindle) MFNHGC G206.6 ○ －

RCHHGA G072.7 ○ ○ RCHHGB G076.7 ○ ○

Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact status signals (serial spindle) RCHHGC G206.7 ○ －

MORCMA G073.0 ○ ○ MORCMB G077.0 ○ ○

Magnetic sensor orientation command signals (serial spindle) MORCMC G207.0 ○ －

SLVA G073.1 ○ ○ SLVB G077.1 ○ ○

Subordinate operation mode command signals (serial spindle) SLVC G207.1 ○ －

MPOFA G073.2 ○ ○ MPOFB G077.2 ○ ○

Motor power cutoff command signals (serial spindle) MPOFC G207.2 ○ －

ALMA F045.0 ○ ○ ALMB F049.0 ○ ○ Alarm signals (serial

spindle) ALMC F168.0 ○ － SSTA F045.1 ○ ○ SSTB F049.1 ○ ○ Speed zero signals (serial

spindle) SSTC F168.1 ○ － SDTA F045.2 ○ ○ SDTB F049.2 ○ ○ Speed detection signals

(serial spindle) SDTC F168.2 ○ － SARA F045.3 ○ ○ SARB F049.3 ○ ○ Spindle speed arrival

signal (serial spindle) SARC F168.3 ○ － LDT1A F045.4 ○ ○ LDT1B F049.4 ○ ○ Load detection signals 1

(serial spindle) LDT1C F168.4 ○ － LDT2A F045.5 ○ ○ LDT2B F049.5 ○ ○ Load detection signals 2

(serial spindle) LDT2C F168.5 ○ － TLMA F045.6 ○ ○ TLMB F049.6 ○ ○ Torque limit signals

(serial spindle) TLMC F168.6 ○ － ORARA F045.7 ○ ○ ORARB F049.7 ○ ○ Orientation completion

signals (serial spindle) ORARC F168.7 ○ － CHPA F046.0 ○ ○ CHPB F050.0 ○ ○ Power line switch signals

(serial spindle) CHPC F169.0 ○ － CFINA F046.1 ○ ○ CFINB F050.1 ○ ○ Spindle switch completion

signals (serial spindle) CFINC F169.1 ○ － RCHPA F046.2 ○ ○ RCHPB F050.2 ○ ○ Output switch signals

(serial spindle) RCHPC F169.2 ○ － RCFNA F046.3 ○ ○ RCFNB F050.3 ○ ○ Output switch completion

signals (serial spindle) RCFNC F169.3 ○ － SLVSA F046.4 ○ ○ SLVSB F050.4 ○ ○


Subordinate operation status signals (serial spindle) SLVSC F169.4 ○ －

10.3


- 1511 -



PORA2A F046.5 ○ ○ PORA2B F050.5 ○ ○

Position coder orientation proximity signal (serial spindle) PORA2C F169.5 ○ －

MORA1A F046.6 ○ ○ MORA1B F050.6 ○ ○

Magnetic sensor orientation completion signals (serial spindle) MORA1C F169.6 ○ －

MORA2A F046.7 ○ ○ MORA2B F050.7 ○ ○

Magnetic sensor orientation proximity signals (serial spindle) MORA2C F169.7 ○ －

PC1DEA F047.0 ○ ○ PC1DEB F051.0 ○ ○

Position coder one-rotation signal detection status signals (serial spindle) PC1DEC F170.0 ○ －

INCSTA F047.1 ○ ○ INCSTB F051.1 ○ ○

Incremental orientation mode signals (serial spindle) INCSTC F170.1 ○ － All-spindle operation ready signal

SRSRDY F034.7 ○ ○

1st serial spindle ready signals

SRSP1R F034.6 ○ ○

2nd serial spindle ready signals

SRSP2R F034.5 ○ ○


Spindle warning detail signals 1 to 9

SPWRN1~ SPWRN9

F264.0~F265.0 ○ ○

10.3

Spindle stop signal *SSTP G029.6 ○ ○ Spindle orientation signal SOR G029.5 ○ ○ Spindle speed override signals

SOV0~SOV7 G030 ○ ○

Spindle speed arrival signal

SAR G029.4 ○ ○

Spindle enable signal ENB F001.4 ○ ○ Gear selection signals (output)

GR1O,GR2O, GR3O

F034.0~F034.2 － ○

GR1 G028.1 ○ ○ Gear selection signals (input) GR2 G028.2 ○ ○

Spindle speed control

S 12-bit code signals R01O~R12O F036.0~F037.3 ○ ○

10.6

Spindle speed fluctuation detection

Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal

SPAL F035.0 ○ ○ 10.18

Spindle synchronous control signal

SPSYC G038.2 ○ ○

SPSYC1 G288.0 ○ ○ Spindle synchronous control signal (for each spindle) SPSYC2 G288.1 ○ ○

Spindle phase synchronous control signal

SPPHS G038.3 ○ ○

SPPHS1 G289.0 ○ ○ Spindle phase synchronous control signal (for each spindle)

SPPHS2 G289.1 ○ ○

Spindle synchronous control

Spindle phase synchronous control signal

FSPSY F044.2 ○ ○

10.14


- 1512 -



FSPSY1 F288.0 ○ ○ Spindle phase synchronous control signal (for each spindle) FSPSY2 F288.1 ○ ○

Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal

FSPPH F044.3 ○ ○

FSPPH1 F289.0 ○ ○ Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal (for each spindle) FSPPH2 F289.1 ○ ○

Phase error monitor signal

SYCAL F044.4 ○ ○

SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○ Phase error monitor signal (for each spindle) SYCAL2 F043.1 ○ ○

Spindle synchronous speed ratio control clamp signal

RSMAX F065.2 ○ ○

Spindle synchronous control

Spindle synchronous speed ratio control signal

SBRT G038.1 ○ ○

10.14

Manual tool compensation tool number signal (4 digits)

MTLN00~MTLN15 G068,G069 ○ －

Manual tool compensation tool number signal (8 digits)

MT8N00~MT8N31 G525~G528 ○ －

Manual tool compensation command number

MTLC G067.0 ○ －

Manual tool compensation completion signal

MTLA F061.5 ○ －

Manual tool compensation

Manual tool compensation uncompleted signal

MTLANG F061.4 ○ －

11.1.4

HS1A~HS1D G018.0~G018.3 ○ ○ HS2A~HS2D G018.4~G018.7 ○ ○ Manual handle feed axis

selection signals HS3A~HS3D G019.0~G019.3 － ○

3.2

Manual handle feed amount selection signals (incremental feed signals)

MP1,MP2 G019.4,G019.5 ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5

Manual handle feed amount selection signals

MP21, MP22 MP31, MP32

G087.0,G087.1 G087.3,G087.4

○ ○ 3.2

Maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal

HNDLF G023.3 ○ ○ 3.2

Manual handle feed

Manual handle feed direction inversion signal

HDN G347.1 ○ ○ 3.2

Checking mode signal MMOD G067.2 ○ ○ Handle available signal in checking mode

MCHK G067.3 ○ ○

Forward movement prohibition signal

FWSTP G531.0 ○ ○

Reverse movement prohibition signal

MRVM G531.1 ○ ○

Manual handle retrace

Reverse movement signal MRVMD F091.0 ○ ○

3.5


- 1513 -



Direction change prohibition signal

MNCHG F091.1 ○ ○

Reverse movement prohibition signal

MRVSP F091.2 ○ ○ Manual handle retrace

Check mode confirmation signal

MMMOD F091.3 ○ ○

3.5

HS1IA~HS1ID G041.0~G041.3 ○ ○ HS2IA~HS2ID G041.4~G041.7 ○ ○ Manual handle

interrupt Manual handle interrupt axis selection signals

HS3IA~HS3ID G042.0~G042.3 ○ ○ 3.3

Manual reference position return selection signal

ZRN G043.7 ○ ○

Manual reference position return selection check signal

MREF F004.5 ○ ○

G196.0~G196.4 ○ ○ Reference position return deceleration signals

*DEC1~*DEC5 X009.0~X009.4 ○ ○

Reference position return end signals

ZP1~ZP5 F094.0~F094.4 ○ ○

Manual reference position return

Reference position establishment signals

ZRF1~ZRF5 F120.0~F120.4 ○ ○

4.1

+J1~+J5 G100.0~G100.4 ○ ○ Feed axis and direction selection signals -J1~-J5 G102.0~G102.4 ○ ○ Manual feedrate override signals

*JV0~*JV15 G010,G011 ○ ○ Jog feed/incremental feed

Manual rapid traverse selection signal

RT G019.7 ○ ○

3.1

CNC ready signal MA F001.7 ○ ○ CNC ready signal

Servo ready signal SA F000.6 ○ ○ 2.2

Rapid traversing signal RPDO F002.1 ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1 Status output signal

Cutting feed signal CUT F002.6 ○ ○ 2.7 Single block signal SBK G046.1 ○ ○

Single block Single block check signal MSBK F004.3 ○ ○ 5.3.3

SKIPP G006.6 ○ ○ Skip function Skip signal

SKIP X004.7 ○ ○ 15.3

+EXL1~+EXL5 G104.0~G104.4 ○ ○ Stored stroke limit 1 switching signals in axis direction -EXL1~-EXL5 G105.0~G105.4 ○ ○

Stored stroke limit 1 change signal

EXLM G007.6 ○ ○

Stroke limit 1 release signal

RLSOT G007.7 ○ ○

+OT1~+OT5 F124.0~F124.4 ○ ○

Stored stroke check

Overtravel alarm signals -OT1~-OT5 F126.0~F126.4 ○ ○

2.3.2

Stored stroke check 2, 3

Stroke limit 3 release signal

RLSOT3 G007.4 ○ ○ 2.3.3

+LM1~+LM5 G110.0~G110.4 ○ ○ Stroke limit external setting

Stroke limit external setting signals -LM1~-LM5 G112.0~G112.4 ○ ○

2.3.5

Controlled axis detach signals

DTCH1~DTCH5 G124.0~G124.4 ○ ○ Controlled axis detach

Controlled axis detach status signals

MDTCH1~ DTCH5 F110.0~F110.4 ○ ○ 1.2.5


- 1514 -



Absolute position detector battery voltage zero alarm signal

PBATZ F172.6 ○ ○ Absolute position detection Absolute position detector

battery voltage low alarm signal

PBATL F172.7 ○ ○

1.4.3

Software operator’s panel signal (MD1)

MD1O F073.0 ○ ○


MD2O F073.1 ○ ○


MD4O F073.2 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (ZRN)

ZRNO F073.4 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (+J1~+J4)

+J1O~+J4O F081.0,F081.2, F081.4,F081.6

○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (-J1~-J4)

-J1O~-J4O F081.1,F081.3, F081.5,F081.7

○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (RT)

RTO F077.6 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (HS1A)

HS1AO F077.0 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (HS1B)

HS1BO F077.1 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (HS1C)

HS1CO F077.2 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (HS1D)

HS1DO F077.3 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (MP1)

MP1O F076.0 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (MP2)

MP2O F076.1 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (*JV0~*JV15)

*JV0O~*JV15O F079,F080 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (*FV0~*FV7)

*FV0O~*FV7O F078 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (ROV1)

ROV1O F076.4 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (ROV2)

ROV2O F076.5 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (BDT)

BDTO F075.2 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (SBK)

SBKO F075.3 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (MLK)

MLKO F075.4 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (DRN)

DRNO F075.5 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (KEY1~KEY4)

KEYO F075.6 ○ ○

Software operator’s panel signal (*SP)

SPO F075.7 ○ ○

Software operator's panel

Software operator’s panel general-purpose switch signals

OUT0~OUT15 F072,F074 ○ ○

13.1.2


- 1515 -



2nd reference position return completion signals

ZP21~ZP25 F096.0~F096.4 ○ ○

3rd reference position return completion signals

ZP31~ZP35 F098.0~F098.4 ○ ○

2nd reference position return/3rd, 4th reference position return 4th reference position

return completion signalsZP41~ZP45 F100.0~F100.4 ○ ○

4.4

SKIPP G006.6 ○ ○ SKIP X004.7 ○ ○ Multi-step skip

function Skip signal

SKIP2~SKIP6, SKIP7,SKIP8

X004.2~X004.6 X004.0,X004.1

○ ○ 15.3.3

Touch panel check signal

Touch panel check signal TPPRS F006.0 ○ ○ 13.1.6

Canned cycle / multiple repetitive canned cycle

Chamfering signal *CDZ G053.7 ○ － 12.8

Chuck / tail stock barrier

Tail stock barrier selection signal

*TSB G060.7 ○ － 2.3.6

Superimposed control axis selection signals

OVLS1~OVLS5 G190.0~G190.4 ○ ○

Superimposed control Superimposed control master axis confirmation signals

OVMO1~OVMO5 F344.0~F344.4 ○ ○ 8.6

Superimposed control slave axis confirmation signals

OVSO1~OVSO5 F345.0~F345.4 ○ ○

Superimposed control Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under way signals

SYN1O~SYN5O F118.0~F118.4 ○ ○

8.6

Reference position setting with mechanical stopper

Torque limit reach signals for reference position setting with mechanical stopper

CLRCH1~CLRCH5

F180.0~F180.4 ○ ○ 4.5

DNC operation select signal

DNCI G043.5 ○ ○ 5.11 DNC operation

DNC operation selection confirm signal

MRMT F003.4 ○ ○ 5.11, 5.13

Retract signal RTRCT G066.4 ○ ○ Retract completion signal RTRCTF F065.4 ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13

Electronic gear box EGB mode signal SYNMOD F065.6 ○ ○ 1.9 Composite control axis change selection signals

MIX1~MIX5 G128.0~G128.4 ○ ○

Composite axis confirmation signals

MIXO1~MIXO5 F343.0~F343.4 ○ ○

Synchronous control axis selection signals

SYNC1~SYNC5 G138.0~G138.4 ○ ○

Synchronous master axis confirmation signals

SYCM1~SYCM5 F341.0~F341.4 ○ ○

Synchronous slave axis confirmation signals

SYCS1~SYCS5 F342.0~F342.4 ○ ○

Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under way signals

SYN1O~SYN5O F118.0~F118.4 ○ ○

Parking signals PK1~PK5 G122.0~G122.4 ○ ○

Synchronous and composite control

Parking axis confirmation signals

SMPK1~SMPK5 F346.0~F346.4 ○ ○

8.5


- 1516 -



Dry run signal DRN G046.7 ○ ○ Dry run Dry run check signal MDRN F002.7 ○ ○

5.3.2

Torque limit skip Torque limit reached signals

TRQL1~TRQL5 F114.0~F114.4 ○ ○ 15.3.4

Threading Threading signal THRD F002.3 ○ ○ 6.5 Rapid traverse override signals

ROV1,ROV2 G014.0,G014.1 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1

1% step rapid traverse override selection signals

HROV G096.7 ○ ○

1% rapid traverse override signals

*HROV0~*HROV6 G096.0~G096.6 ○ ○

7.1.7.1 7.1.9

0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signals

FHROV G353.7 ○ ○

Rapid traverse override

0.1% rapid traverse override signals

*FHRO0~*FHRO9G352.0~G352.7 G353.0~G353.1

○ ○ 7.1.7.1

Rapid traverse block overlap

Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal

ROVLP G053.5 ○ ○ 7.2.1.2


- 1517 -



Control axis selection signals (PMC axis control)

EAX1~EAX5 G136.0~G136.4 ○ ○

EC0A~EC6A G143.0~G143.6 ○ ○ EC0B~EC6B G155.0~G155.6 ○ ○ EC0C~EC6C G167.0~G167.6 ○ ○

Axis control command signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EC0D~EC6D G179.0~G179.6 ○ ○ EIF0A~EIF15A G144~G145 ○ ○ EIF0B~EIF15B G156~G157 ○ ○ EIF0C~EIF15C G168~G169 ○ ○

Axis control feedrate signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EIF0D~EIF15D G180~G181 ○ ○ EBUFA G142.7 ○ ○ EBUFB G154.7 ○ ○ EBUFC G166.7 ○ ○

Axis control command read signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EBUFD G178.7 ○ ○ EID0A~EID31A G146~G149 ○ ○ EID0B~EID31B G158~G161 ○ ○ EID0C~EID31C G170~G173 ○ ○

Axis control data signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EID0D~EID31D G182~G185 ○ ○ EBSYA F130.7 ○ ○ EBSYB F133.7 ○ ○ EBSYC F136.7 ○ ○

Axis control command read completion signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EBSYD F139.7 ○ ○

ECLRA G142.6 ○ ○ ECLRB G154.6 ○ ○ ECLRC G166.6 ○ ○

Reset signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

ECLRD G178.6 ○ ○ ESTPA G142.5 ○ ○ ESTPB G154.5 ○ ○ ESTPC G166.5 ○ ○

Axis control temporary stop signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

ESTPD G178.5 ○ ○ ESBKA G142.3 ○ ○ ESBKB G154.3 ○ ○ ESBKC G166.3 ○ ○

Block stop signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

ESBKD G178.3 ○ ○ EMSBKA G143.7 ○ ○ EMSBKB G155.7 ○ ○ EMSBKC G167.7 ○ ○

Block stop disable signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EMSBKD G179.7 ○ ○ EM11A~EM48A F132,F142 ○ ○ EM11B~EM48B F135,F145 ○ ○ EM11C~EM48C F138,F148 ○ ○

Auxiliary function code signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EM11D~EM48D F141,F151 ○ ○ EMFA F131.0 ○ ○ EMFB F134.0 ○ ○ EMFC F137.0 ○ ○

Auxiliary function strobe signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EMFD F140.0 ○ ○ EMF2A F131.2 ○ ○ EMF2B F134.2 ○ ○ EMF2C F137.2 ○ ○

PMC axis control/PMC axis speed control function

Auxiliary function 2nd strobe signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EMF2D F140.2 ○ ○

16.1


- 1518 -



EMF3A F131.3 ○ ○ EMF3B F134.3 ○ ○ EMF3C F137.3 ○ ○

Auxiliary function 3rd strobe signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EMF3D F140.3 ○ ○ EFINA G142.0 ○ ○ EFINB G154.0 ○ ○ EFINC G166.0 ○ ○

Auxiliary function completion signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EFIND G178.0 ○ ○

ESOFA G142.4 ○ ○ ESOFB G154.4 ○ ○ ESOFC G166.4 ○ ○

Servo off signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

ESOFD G178.4 ○ ○ EMBUFA G142.2 ○ ○ EMBUFB G154.2 ○ ○ EMBUFC G166.2 ○ ○

Buffering disable signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EMBUFD G178.2 ○ ○ Controlled axis selection status signals(PMC axis control)

*EAXSL F129.7 ○ ○

EINPA F130.0 ○ ○ EINPB F133.0 ○ ○ EINPC F136.0 ○ ○

In-position signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EINPD F139.0 ○ ○ ECKZA F130.1 ○ ○ ECKZB F133.1 ○ ○ ECKZC F136.1 ○ ○

Following zero checking signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

ECKZD F139.1 ○ ○ EIALA F130.2 ○ ○ EIALB F133.2 ○ ○ EIALC F136.2 ○ ○

Alarm signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EIALD F139.2 ○ ○ EGENA F130.4 ○ ○ EGENB F133.4 ○ ○ EGENC F136.4 ○ ○

Axis moving signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EGEND F139.4 ○ ○ EDENA F130.3 ○ ○ EDENB F133.3 ○ ○ EDENC F136.3 ○ ○

Auxiliary function executing signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EDEND F139.3 ○ ○

EOTNA F130.6 ○ ○ EOTNB F133.6 ○ ○ EOTNC F136.6 ○ ○

Negative-direction overtravel signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EOTND F139.6 ○ ○

EOTPA F130.5 ○ ○ EOTPB F133.5 ○ ○ EOTPC F136.5 ○ ○

Positive-direction overtravel signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EOTPD F139.5 ○ ○

*EFOV0~*EFOV7 G151 ○ ○ *EFOV0B~*EFOV7B G163 ○ ○ *EFOV0C~*EFOV7C G175 ○ ○


Feedrate override signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

*EFOV0D~*EFOV7D G187 ○ ○

16.1


- 1519 -



EOVC G150.5 ○ ○ EOVCB G162.5 ○ ○

EOVCC G174.5 ○ ○

Override cancel signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EOVCD G186.5 ○ ○ Rapid traverse override signals (PMC axis control)

EROV1,EROV2 G150.0,G150.1 ○ ○

Dry run signal (PMC axis control)

EDRN G150.7 ○ ○

Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control)

ERT G150.6 ○ ○

Override 0% signal (PMC axis control)

EOV0 F129.5 ○ ○

Skip signal (PMC axis control)

ESKIP X004.6 ○ ○

Distribution completion signals (PMC axis control)

EADEN1~EADEN5

F112.0~F112.4 ○ ○

EABUFA F131.1 ○ ○ EABUFB F134.1 ○ ○ EABUFC F137.1 ○ ○

Buffer full signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

EABUFD F140.1 ○ ○ Controlling signals (PMC axis control)

EACNT1~EACNT5 F182.0~F182.4 ○ ○

ELCKZA G142.1 ○ ○ ELCKZB G154.1 ○ ○ ELCKZC G166.1 ○ ○

Accumulated zero check signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

ELCKZD G178.1 ○ ○ Torque control mode signal (PMC axis control)

TRQM1~TRQM8 F190 ○ ○


A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal (PMC axis control)

NDCAL1~NDCAL8 G202 ○ ○

16.1

SIND G033.7 ○ ○ Spindle motor speed command selection signals SIND2 G035.7 ○ ○

R01I~R12I G032.0~G033.3 ○ ○ Spindle motor speed command signals R01I2~R12I2 G034.0~G035.3 ○ ○

SSIN G033.6 ○ ○ Spindle motor command polarity selection signals SSIN2 G035.6 ○ ○

SGN G033.5 ○ ○

Spindle output control by the PMC

Spindle motor command polarity command signals SGN2 G035.5 ○ ○

10.7

G008.4 ○ ○ Emergency stop Emergency stop signals *ESP

X008.4 ○ ○ 2.1

All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal

IGNVRY G066.0 ○ ○ VRDY off alarm ignore signal Each-axis VRDY off

alarm ignore signal IGVRY1~IGVRY5 G192.0~G192.4 ○ ○

2.8

Follow-up Follow-up signal *FLWU G007.5 ○ ○ 1.2.8 Program restart signal SRN G006.0 ○ ○

Program restart Program restart under way signal

SRNMV F002.4 ○ ○ 5.7


- 1520 -



Position switch Position switch signals PSW01~PSW16 F070,F071 ○ ○ 1.2.10 Auxiliary function code signals

M00~M31 F010~F013 ○ ○

Auxiliary function strobe signals

MF F007.0 ○ ○

DM00 F009.7 ○ ○ DM01 F009.6 ○ ○ DM02 F009.5 ○ ○ Decode M signals

DM30 F009.4 ○ ○ Spindle function code signals

S00~S31 F022~F025 ○ ○

Spindle function strobe signal

SF F007.2 ○ ○

Tool function code signals T00~T31 F026~F029 ○ ○ Tool function strobe signal

TF F007.3 ○ ○

2nd auxiliary function code signals

B00~B31 F030~F033 ○ ○

2nd auxiliary function strobe signal

BF F007.7 ○ ○

End signal FIN G004.3 ○ ○

Auxiliary function/2nd auxiliary function

Distribution completion signals

DEN F001.3 ○ ○

9.1

Auxiliary function lock signal

AFL G005.6 ○ ○ Auxiliary function lock

Auxiliary function lock check signal

MAFL F004.4 ○ ○ 9.2

Polygon turning Polygon synchronization under way signal

PSYN F063.7 ○ ○ 6.9

Input signals for P-code macro

EUI00~EUI15 G082,G083 ○ ○ Macro executor

Output signals for P-code macro

EUO00~EUO15 F084,F085 ○ ○ 12.15

All-axis machine lock signal

MLK G044.1 ○ ○

Each-axis machine lock signal

MLK1~MLK5 G108.0~G108.4 ○ ○ Machine lock

All-axis machine lock check signal

MMLK F004.1 ○ ○

5.3.1

No-wait signal NOWT G063.1 ● － No-wait signal NMWT G063.7 ● － Waiting M code Waiting signal WATO F063.6 ● －

8.2

Trouble forecast signal (For the disturbance level)

TDFTR1~TDFLR8 F299.0~F299.7 ○ ○

Trouble diagnosis Trouble forecast signal (For the thermal simulation data)

TDSML1~TDSML8 F298.0~F298.7 ○ ○

18.3

Manual absolute signal *ABSM G006.2 ○ ○ Manual absolute on/off Manual absolute check

signal MABSM F004.2 ○ ○ 5.4


- 1521 -



SWS1 G027.0 ○ ○ Spindle selection signalsSWS2 G027.1 ○ ○ *SSTP1 G027.3 ○ ○ Individual spindle stop

signals *SSTP2 G027.4 ○ ○ Gear selection signals (input)

GR21,GR22 G029.0,G029.1 ○ ○

2nd position coder selection signal

PC2SLC G028.7 ○ ○

3rd position coder selection signal

PC3SLC G026.0 ○ ○

4th position coder selection signal

PC4SLC G026.1 ○ ○

2nd spindle speed override signals

SOV20 to SOV27 G376 ○ ○

Spindle command path specification signal

SPSP G536.7 ○ ○

Spindle enable signal ENB2 F038.2 ○ ○ R01O2~R12O2 F200.0~F201.3 ○ ○ R01O3~R12O3 F204.0~F205.3 ○ ○ S 12-bit code signals R01O4~R12O4 F270.0~F271.3 ○ ○

Multi-spindle control

Multi-spindle address P signals

MSP00~MSP15 F160,F161 ○ ○

10.12

Mirror image signals MI1~MI5 G106.0~G106.4 ○ ○ Mirror image Mirror image check

signals MMI1~MMI5 F108.0~F108.4 ○ ○ 1.2.7

KEY1~KEY4 G046.3~G046.6 ○ ○ 13.2.1 Memory protection key

Memory protection signals KEYP G046.0 ○ ○ 13.2.2 Mode selection signals MD1,MD2,MD4 G043.0~G0432 ○ ○ Manual data input selection check signal

MMDI F003.3 ○ ○

Automatic operation selection check signal

MMEM F003.5 ○ ○

Memory edit selection check signal

MEDT F003.6 ○ ○

Manual handle feed selection check signal

MH F003.1 ○ ○

Incremental feed selection check signal

MINC F003.0 ○ ○

Mode selection

Jog feed selection check signal

MJ F003.2 ○ ○

2.6

Reverse execution signal RVS G007.0 － ○ Retrace Reverse execution

in-progress signal RVSL F082.2 － ○ 5.8

Rigid tapping signal RGTAP G061.0 ○ ○ RGSPP F065.0 ○ ○ Spindle rotation direction

signals RGSPM F065.1 ○ ○ Rigid tapping-in-progress signal

RTAP F076.3 ○ ○ Rigid tapping

Rigid tapping spindle selection signals

RGTSP1~RGTSP2

G061.4~G061.5 ○ －

10.13

Rigid tapping retraction start signal

RTNT G062.6 － ○ Retraction for Rigid tapping Rigid tapping retraction

completion signal RTPT F066.1 － ○

5.10


- 1522 -



External reset signal ERS G008.7 ○ ○ MDI reset confirmation signal

MDIRST F006.1 ○ ○

Reset & rewind signal RRW G008.6 ○ ○ Resetting signal RST F001.1 ○ ○

Reset and rewind

Rewinding signal RWD F000.0 ○ ○

5.2

Interrupt type custom macro

Interrupt signal for custom macro

UINT G053.3 ○ ○ 12.6.2

Macro call start signal MCST1~MCST16 G512,G513 ○ ○ Mode change completion signal

MCFIN G514.0 ○ ○

Macro call executing signal

MCEXE F512.0 ○ ○

Mode change request signal

MCRQ F512.1 ○ ○

MD1R F513.0 ○ ○ MD2R F513.1 ○ ○ MD4R F513.2 ○ ○ DNCIR F513.5 ○ ○

Mode notification signal

ZRNR F513.7 ○ ○ Abnormal end signal MCSP F512.2 ○ ○

One touch macro call

Call program confirmation signal

MCEX1~MCEX16 F514,F515 ○ ○

16.6


- 1523 -


A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ○ : Available ● : Available only with 2-path control － : Unavailable

Group Symbol Signal name Address T M Reference item

*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006.2 ○ ○ 5.4 *+ED1~*+ED5 External deceleration signals 1 G118.0~G118.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9 *+ED21~*+ED25 External deceleration signals 2 G101.0~G101.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9 *+ED31~*+ED35 External deceleration signals 3 G107.0~G107.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9 *+L1~*+L5 Overtravel signals G114.0~G114.4 ○ ○ 2.3.1 *-ED1~*-ED5 External deceleration signals 1 G120.0~G120.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9 *-ED21~*-ED25 External deceleration signals 2 G103.0~G103.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9 *-ED31~*-ED35 External deceleration signals 3 G109.0~G109.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9 *-L1~*-L5 Overtravel signals G116.0~G116.4 ○ ○ 2.3.1 *BSL Block start interlock signal G008.3 ○ ○ 2.5 *BECLP B axis clamp completion signal G038.7 － ○ 13.12

*BEUCP B axis unclamp completion signal

G038.6 － ○ 13.12

*CDZ Chamfering signal G053.7 ○ － 12.8

*CSL Cutting block start interlock signal

G008.1 ○ ○ 2.5

X009.0~X009.4 ○ ○ *DEC1~*DEC5

Reference position return deceleration signals G196.0~G196.4 ○ ○ 4.1

*EAXSL Controlled axis selection status signals (PMC axis control)

F129.7 ○ ○ 16.1

X008.4 ○ ○ *ESP Emergency stop signals

G008.4 ○ ○ 2.1

*ESPA G071.1 ○ ○ *ESPB G075.1 ○ ○ *ESPC

Emergency stop signals (serial spindle)

G205.1 ○ － 10.3

*FHRO0~*FHRV9 0.1% rapid traverse override signals

G352.0~G352.7 G353.0~G353.1

○ ○ 7.1.7.1

*FLWU Follow-up signal G007.5 ○ ○ 1.2.8 *FV0~*FV7 Feedrate override signals G012 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2 *EFOV0~*EFOV7 G151 ○ ○ *EFOV0B~*EFOV7B G163 ○ ○ *EFOV0C~*EFOV7C G175 ○ ○ *EFOV0D~*EFOV7D

Feedrate override signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G187 ○ ○

16.1

*FV0O~*FV7O Software operator’s panel signal (*FV0~*FV7)

F078 ○ ○ 13.1.2

*HROV0~*HROV6 1% rapid traverse override signals

G096.0~G096.6 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9

*IT Interlock signal for all axes G008.0 ○ ○ 2.5 *IT1~*It5 Interlock signal for each axis G130.0~G130.4 ○ ○ 2.5

*JV0~*JV15 Manual feedrate override signals

G010,G011 ○ ○ 3.1

*JV0O~*JV15O Software operator’s panel signal (*JV0~*JV15)

F079,F080 ○ ○ 13.1.2

*PLSST Polygon spindle stop signal G038.0 ○ ○ 6.9.2 *SCPFA G028.5 ○ ○ *SCPFB

Spindle clamp completion signal G401.1 ○ ○ 10.10

*SP Feed hold signal G008.5 ○ ○ 5.1

*

*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029.6 ○ ○ 10.6


- 1524 -



*SSTP1 G027.3 ○ ○ *SSTP2

Individual spindle stop signals G027.4 ○ ○

10.12

*SUCPFA G028.4 ○ ○ *SUCPFB

Spindle unclamp completion signal G400.1 ○ ○ 10.10

*TLV0~*TLV9 Tool life count override signals G049.0~G050.1 ○ ○ 11.4 *

*TSB Tail stock barrier selection signal

G060.7 ○ － 2.3.6

+EXL1~+EXL5 Stored stroke limit 1 switching signals in axis direction

G104.0~G104.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2

+J1~+J5 Feed axis and direction selection signals

G100.0~G100.4 ○ ○ 3.1

+J1O~+J4O Software operator’s panel signal (+J1~+J4)

F081.0,F081.2, F081.4,F081.6

○ ○ 13.1.2

+LM1~+LM5 Stroke limit external setting signals

G110.0~G110.4 ○ ○ 2.3.5

+MIT1,+MIT2 Tool offset write signals X004.2,X004.4 G132.0,G132.1

○ － 15.4.2

+MIT1~+MIT5 Interlock signal for each axis direction

G132.0~G132.4 － ○ 2.5

+

+OT1~+OT5 Overtravel alarm signals F124.0~F124.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2

-EXL1~-EXL5 Stored stroke limit 1 switching signals in axis direction

G105.0~G105.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2

-J1~-J5 Feed axis and direction selection signals

G102.0~G102.4 ○ ○ 3.1

-J1O~-J4O Software operator’s panel signal (-J1~-J4)

F081.1,F081.3, F081.5,F081.7

○ ○ 13.1.2

-Jg,-Ja Feed axis and direction selection signals

G086.1,G086.3 ○ ○ 3.4

-LM1~-LM5 Stroke limit external setting signals

G112.0~G112.4 ○ ○ 2.3.5

-MIT1,-MIT2 Tool offset write signals X004.3,X004.5 G134.0,G134.1

○ － 15.4.2

-MIT1~-MIT5 Interlock signal for each axis direction

G134.0~G134.4 － ○ 2.5

-

-OT1~-OT5 Overtravel alarm signals F126.0~F126.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2

ABDT1~ABDT5 Unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

F184.0~F184.4 ○ ○ 2.9

ABTQSV Servo axis unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

F090.0 ○ ○ 2.9

ABTSP1 1st spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

F090.1 ○ ○ 2.9

ABTSP2 2nd spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

F090.2 ○ ○ 2.9

AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005.6 ○ ○ 9.2 AICC AI contour control mode signal F062.0 ○ ○ 7.1.11 AL Alarm signal F001.0 ○ ○ 2.4 ALMA F045.0 ○ ○ ALMB F049.0 ○ ○

A

ALMC Alarm signals (serial spindle)

F168.0 ○ － 10.3


- 1525 -



AR00~AR15 F040,F041 ○ ○ AR002~AR152

Actual spindle speed signals F202,F203 ○ ○

10.9

ARSTA G071.0 ○ ○ ARSTB G075.0 ○ ○ ARSTC

Alarm reset signals (serial spindle)

G205.0 ○ － 10.3 A

ATBK Automatic data backup executing signal

F520.0 ○ ○

B00~B31 2nd auxiliary function code signals

F030~F033 ○ ○ 9.1

BAL Battery alarm signal F001.2 ○ ○ 2.4 BCLP B axis clamp signal F061.1 － ○ 13.12 BDT1 G044.0 ○ ○ BDT2~BDT9

Optional block skip signals G045 ○ ○ 5.5

BDTO Software operator’s panel signal (BDT)

F075.2 ○ ○ 13.1.2

BF 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal

F007.7 ○ ○ 9.1

BFIN 2nd auxiliary function completion signal

G005.7 ○ ○ 9.4

B

BUCLP B axis unclamp signal F061.0 － ○ 13.12

C2SEND Dual display forcible end request signal

G295.6 ○ ○ 13.1.9

C2SENO Dual display forcible end status signal

F295.6 ○ ○ 13.1.9

CFINA F046.1 ○ ○ CFINB F050.1 ○ ○ CFINC

Spindle switch completion signals (serial spindle)

F169.1 ○ － CHPA F046.0 ○ ○ CHPB F050.0 ○ ○ CHPC

Power line switch signals (serial spindle)

F169.0 ○ －

10.3

CLRCH1~CLRCH5

Torque limit reach signals for reference position setting with mechanical stopper

F180.0~F180.4 ○ ○ 4.5

CNCKY Key control selection signal G295.7 ○ ○ 13.1.9

CNCKYO Key control selection status signal

F295.7 ○ ○ 13.1.9

CON Cs contour control change signal

G027.7 ○ ○ 10.11

COSP Path spindle command confirmation signal

F064.5 ● － 8.8

COSP1 F063.3 ● － COSP2

Path spindle command confirmation signal F063.4 ● － 8.8

CSFI1 Cs axis coordinate establishment request signals

G274.4 ○ ○

CSFO1 Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm signals

F274.4 ○ ○

CSPENA Cs axis origin established state signals

F048.4 ○ ○

10.11.3

CSS Constant surface speed signal F002.2 ○ ○ 10.8 CTH1A, CTH2A G070.3, G070.2 ○ ○ CTH1B, CTH2B G074.3, G074.2 ○ ○ CTH1C, CTH2C

Clutch/gear signals (serial spindle)

G204.3, G204.2 ○ － 10.3

C

CUT Cutting feed signal F002.6 ○ ○ 2.7


- 1526 -



DEFMDA G072.3 ○ ○ DEFMDB G076.3 ○ ○ DEFMDC

Differential speed mode command signals (serial spindle) G206.3 ○ －

10.3

DEN Distribution completion signals F001.3 ○ ○ 9.1 DM00 F009.7 ○ ○ DM01 F009.6 ○ ○ DM02 F009.5 ○ ○ DM30

Decode M signals

F009.4 ○ ○

9.1

DMMC Direct operation select signal G042.7 ○ ○ 5.13 DNCI DNC operation select signal G043.5 ○ ○ 5.11 DNCIR Mode notification signal F513.5 ○ ○ 16.6 DRN Dry run signal G046.7 ○ ○ 5.3.2

DRNO Software operator’s panel signal (DRN)

F075.5 ○ ○ 13.1.2

D

DTCH1~DTCH5 Controlled axis detach signals G124.0~G124.4 ○ ○ 1.2.5

EA6 to EA0 Address signals for external data input

G002.6~G002.0 ○ ○ 16.2

EABUFA F131.1 ○ ○ EABUFB F134.1 ○ ○ EABUFC F137.1 ○ ○ EABUFD

Buffer full signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F140.1 ○ ○

16.1

EACNT1~EACNT5

Controlling signals(PMC axis control)

F182.0~F182.4 ○ ○ 16.1

EADEN1~EADEN5

Distribution completion signals(PMC axis control)

F112.0~F112.4 ○ ○ 16.1

EAX1~EAX5 Control axis selection signals(PMC axis control)

G136.0~G136.4 ○ ○ 16.1

EBSYA F130.7 ○ ○ EBSYB F133.7 ○ ○ EBSYC F136.7 ○ ○ EBSYD

Axis control command read completion signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.7 ○ ○

16.1

EBUFA G142.7 ○ ○ EBUFB G154.7 ○ ○ EBUFC G166.7 ○ ○ EBUFD

Axis control command read signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.7 ○ ○

16.1

EC0A~EC6A G143.0~G143.6 ○ ○ EC0B~EC6B G155.0~G155.6 ○ ○ EC0C~EC6C G167.0~G167.6 ○ ○ EC0D~EC6D

Axis control command signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G179.0~G179.6 ○ ○

16.1

ECKZA F130.1 ○ ○ ECKZB F133.1 ○ ○ ECKZC F136.1 ○ ○ ECKZD

Following zero checking signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.1 ○ ○

16.1

ECLRA G142.6 ○ ○

ECLRB G154.6 ○ ○ ECLRC G166.6 ○ ○ ECLRD

Reset signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.6 ○ ○

16.1

ED31 to ED0 Data signals for external data input

G211,G210, G001,G000

○ ○ 16.2

EDENA F130.3 ○ ○ EDENB F133.3 ○ ○ EDENC F136.3 ○ ○

E

EDEND

Auxiliary function executing signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.3 ○ ○

16.1


- 1527 -



EDRN Dry run signal(PMC axis control)

G150.7 ○ ○ 16.1

EFINA G142.0 ○ ○ EFINB G154.0 ○ ○ 16.1

EFINC G166.0 ○ ○ EFIND

Auxiliary function completion signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.0 ○ ○ 16.1

EGENA F130.4 ○ ○ EGENB F133.4 ○ ○ EGENC F136.4 ○ ○ EGEND

Axis moving signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.4 ○ ○

16.1

EIALA F130.2 ○ ○ EIALB F133.2 ○ ○ EIALC F136.2 ○ ○ EIALD

Alarm signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.2 ○ ○

16.1

EID0A~EID31A G146~G149 ○ ○ EID0B~EID31B G158~G161 ○ ○ EID0C~EID31C G170~G173 ○ ○ EID0D~EID31D

Axis control data signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G182~G185 ○ ○

16.1

EIF0A~EIF15A G144,G145 ○ ○ EIF0B~EIF15B G156,G157 ○ ○ EIF0C~EIF15C G168,G169 ○ ○ EIF0D~EIF15D

Axis control feedrate signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G180,G181 ○ ○

16.1

EINPA F130.0 ○ ○ EINPB F133.0 ○ ○ EINPC F136.0 ○ ○ EINPD

In-position signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.0 ○ ○

16.1

EKC0~EKC7 Key code signals G098 ○ ○ 16.5

EKENB Key code read completion signal

F053.7 ○ ○ 16.5

EKSET Key code read signal G066.7 ○ ○ 16.5 ELCKZA G142.1 ○ ○ ELCKZB G154.1 ○ ○ ELCKZC G166.1 ○ ○ ELCKZD

Accumulated zero check signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.1 ○ ○

16.1

EM11A~EM48A F132,F142 ○ ○ EM11B~EM48B F135,F145 ○ ○ EM11C~EM48C F138,F148 ○ ○ EM11D~EM48D

Auxiliary function code signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F141,F151 ○ ○

16.1

EMBUFA G142.2 ○ ○ EMBUFB G154.2 ○ ○ EMBUFC G166.2 ○ ○ EMBUFD

Buffering disable signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.2 ○ ○

16.1

EMFA F131.0 ○ ○ EMFB F134.0 ○ ○ EMFC F137.0 ○ ○ EMFD

Auxiliary function strobe signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F140.0 ○ ○

16.1

EMF2A F131.2 ○ ○ EMF2B F134.2 ○ ○ EMF2C F137.2 ○ ○ EMF2D

Auxiliary function 2nd strobe signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F140.2 ○ ○

16.1

EMF3A F131.3 ○ ○ EMF3B F134.3 ○ ○ EMF3C F137.3 ○ ○

E

EMF3D

Auxiliary function 3rd strobe signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F140.3 ○ ○

16.1


- 1528 -



EMSBKA G143.7 ○ ○ EMSBKB G155.7 ○ ○ EMSBKC G167.7 ○ ○ EMSBKD

Block stop disable signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G179.7 ○ ○

16.1

EMZ0 to EMZ15 Extended external machine zero point shift signal

Specifying by parameter No.1280.

○ ○ 16.3

ENB F001.4 ○ ○ 10.6 ENB2

Spindle enable signal F038.2 ○ ○ 10.12

ENBKY External key input mode selection signal

G066.1 ○ ○ 16.5

EOTNA F130.6 ○ ○ EOTNB F133.6 ○ ○ EOTNC F136.6 ○ ○ EOTND

Negative-direction overtravel signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.6 ○ ○

16.1

EOTPA F130.5 ○ ○ EOTPB F133.5 ○ ○ EOTPC F136.5 ○ ○ EOTPD

Positive-direction overtravel signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

F139.5 ○ ○

16.1

EOV0 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control)

F129.5 ○ ○ 16.1

EOVC G150.5 ○ ○ EOVCB G162.5 ○ ○ EOVCC G174.5 ○ ○ EOVCD

Override cancel signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G186.5 ○ ○

16.1

EPN0~EPN13 Extended external workpiece number search signals

G024.0~G025.5 ○ ○ 16.4

EPNS External workpiece number search start signal

G025.7 ○ ○ 16.4

EREND Read completion signal for external data input

F060.0 ○ ○ 16.2

EROV1,EROV2 Rapid traverse override signals (PMC axis control)

G150.0,G150.1 ○ ○ 16.1

ERS External reset signal G008.7 ○ ○ 5.2

ERT Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control)

G150.6 ○ ○ 16.1

ERTVA Automatic screen erasing signal

F006.2 ○ ○ 13.1.13

ESBKA G142.3 ○ ○ ESBKB G154.3 ○ ○ ESBKC G166.3 ○ ○ ESBKD

Block stop signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.3 ○ ○

16.1

ESCAN Search cancel signal for external data input

F060.2 ○ ○ 16.2

ESEND Search completion signal for external data input

F060.1 ○ ○ 16.2

ESF01~ESF10 Soft key number select state notification signal

F318.0~F319.1 ○ ○ 13.4

ESFM1~ESFM8 Machine operation menu select number notification signal

F317.0~F317.7 ○ ○ 13.4

E

ESKIP Skip signal(PMC axis control) X004.6 ○ ○ 16.1


- 1529 -



ESOFA G142.4 ○ ○ ESOFB G154.4 ○ ○ ESOFC G166.4 ○ ○ ESOFD

Servo off signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.4 ○ ○

16.1

ESRSYC Simple spindle synchronous control signal

G064.6 ○ ○ 10.17

ESSYC1 G264.0 ○ ○ ESSYC2

Simple spindle synchronous control signal (for each spindle) G264.1 ○ ○ 10.17

ESTB Read signal for external data input

G002.7 ○ ○ 16.2

ESTPA G142.5 ○ ○ ESTPB G154.5 ○ ○ ESTPC G166.5 ○ ○ ESTPD

Axis control temporary stop signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control)

G178.5 ○ ○

16.1

EUI00~EUI15 Input signals for P-code macro G082,G083 ○ ○ 12.15

EUO00~EUO15 Output signals for P-code macro

F084,F085 ○ ○ 12.15

EXLM Stored stroke limit 1 change signal

G007.6 ○ ○ 2.3.2

EXRD External read start signal G058.1 ○ ○ 14.2

EXSFT Machine operation menu screen select signal

G295.0 ○ ○ 13.4

EXSTP External read/punch stop signal

G058.2 ○ ○ 14.2

E

EXWT External punch start signal G058.3 ○ ○ 14.2 F1D One-digit F code feed signal G016.7 － ○ 7.1.5

FHROV 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signals

G353.7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1

FIN End signal G004.3 ○ ○ 9.1

FSCSL Cs contour control change completion signal

F044.1 ○ ○ 10.11

FSPPH Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal

F044.3 ○ ○ 10.14

FSPPH1 F289.0 ○ ○

FSPPH2

Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal (for each spindle) F289.1 ○ ○ 10.14

FSPSY Spindle phase synchronous control signal

F044.2 ○ ○ 10.14

FSPSY1 F288.0 ○ ○ FSPSY2

Spindle phase synchronous control signal (for each spindle) F288.1 ○ ○ 10.14

F

FWSTP Forward movement prohibition signal

G531.0 ○ ○ 3.5

GOQSM Tool offset write mode select signal

G039.7 ○ ○ 15.4.2

GR1,GR2 Gear selection signals (input) G028.1,G028.2 ○ ○ 10.6 GR1O,GR2O,GR3O

Gear selection signals (output) F034.0~F034.2 － ○ 10.6 G

GR21,GR22 Gear selection signals (input) G029.0,G029.1 ○ ○ 10.12


- 1530 -



HCAB2 Hard copy cancellation request reception signal

F061.2 ○ ○ 13.1.14

HCABT Hard copy cancellation request signal

G067.6 ○ ○ 13.1.14

HCEXE Hard copy execution status signal

F061.3 ○ ○ 13.1.14

HCREQ Hard copy execution request signal

G067.7 ○ ○ 13.1.14

HDO0~HDO3 High-speed skip status signals F122.0~F122.3 ○ ○ 15.3.2

HEAD Path select signal(Tool post select signal)

G063.0 ● － 8.11, 13.3

HNDLF Maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal

G023.3 ○ ○ 3.2

HDN Manual handle feed direction inversion signal

G347.1 ○ ○ 3.2

HROV 1% step rapid traverse override selection signals

G096.7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1 7.1.9

HS1A~HS1D Manual handle feed axis selection signals

G018.0~G018.3 ○ ○ 3.2

HS1AO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1A)

F077.0 ○ ○ 13.1.2

HS1BO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1B)

F077.1 ○ ○ 13.1.2

HS1CO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1C)

F077.2 ○ ○ 13.1.2

HS1DO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1D)

F077.3 ○ ○ 13.1.2

HS1IA~HS1ID Manual handle interrupt axis selection signals

G041.0~G041.3 ○ ○ 3.3


G018.4~G018.7 ○ ○ 3.2


G041.4~G041.7 ○ ○ 3.3


G019.0~G019.3 ○ ○ 3.2

H


G042.0~G042.3 ○ ○ 3.3

IGNVRY All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal

G066.0 ○ ○ 2.8

IGVRY1~IGVRY5 Each-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal

G192.0~G192.4 ○ ○ 2.8

INCH Inch input signal F002.0 ○ ○ 12.5 INCMDA G072.5 ○ ○ INCMDB G076.5 ○ ○ INCMDC

Incremental command externally set orientation signals (serial spindle) G206.5 ○ －

INCSTA F047.1 ○ ○ INCSTB F051.1 ○ ○ INCSTC

Incremental orientation mode signals (serial spindle)

F170.1 ○ － INDXA G072.0 ○ ○ INDXB G076.0 ○ ○ INDXC

Orientation stop position change command signals (serial spindle) G206.0 ○ －

10.3

INFD In-feed control cut start signal G063.6 － ○ 12.9 INHKY Key input disable signal F053.0 ○ ○ 16.5

I

INP1~INP5 In-position signals F104.0~F104.4 ○ ○ 7.2.5


- 1531 -



INTGA G071.5 ○ ○ INTGB G075.5 ○ ○ INTGC

Speed integral signals (serial spindle)

G205.5 ○ － 10.3

IOLBH1, IOLBH2 Manual handle generators selection signal

G199.0, G199.1 ○ ○ 3.4 I

IUDD1~IUDD5 Unexpected disturbance torque detection ignore signal

G125.0~G125.4 ○ ○ 2.9

KEY1~KEY4 Memory protection signals G046.3~G046.6 ○ ○ 13.2.1

KEYO Software operator’s panel signal (KEY1~KEY4)

F075.6 ○ ○ 13.1.2 K

KEYP Memory protection signals G046.0 ○ ○ 13.2.2 LDT1A F045.4 ○ ○ LDT1B F049.4 ○ ○ LDT1C

Load detection signals 1 (serial spindle)

F168.4 ○ － LDT2A F045.5 ○ ○ LDT2B F049.5 ○ ○ LDT2C

Load detection signals 2 (serial spindle)

F168.5 ○ －

10.3

LFCIF Tool life counting disable signal F093.2 ○ ○ 11.4

L

LFCIV Tool life counting disable signal G048.2 ○ ○ 11.4 M00~M31 Auxiliary function code signals F010~F013 ○ ○ 9.1 M200~M215 2nd M function code signals F014~F015 ○ ○ 9.3 M300~M315 3rd M function code signals F016~F017 ○ ○ 9.3 MA CNC ready signal F001.7 ○ ○ 2.2 MABSM Manual absolute check signal F004.2 ○ ○ 5.4

MAFL Auxiliary function lock check signal

F004.4 ○ ○ 9.2

MBDT1 F004.0 ○ ○ MBDT2~MBDT9

Optional block skip check signals F005 ○ ○ 5.5

MCEX1~MCEX16 Call program confirmation signal

F514,F515 ○ ○ 16.6

MCEXE Macro call executing signal F512.0 ○ ○ 16.6

MCFIN Mode change completion signal

G514.0 ○ ○ 16.6

MCFNA G071.3 ○ ○ MCFNB G075.3 ○ ○ MCFNC

Power line switch completion signals (serial spindle)

G205.3 ○ － 10.3

MCHK Handle available signal in checking mode

G067.3 ○ ○ 3.5

MCRQ Mode change request signal F512.1 ○ ○ 16.6 MCSP Abnormal end signal F512.2 ○ ○ 16.6 MCST1~MCST16 Macro call start signal G512,G513 ○ ○ 16.6 MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signals G043.0~G043.2 ○ ○ 2.6

MD1O Software operator’s panel signal (MD1)

F073.0 ○ ○ 13.1.2

MD1R Mode notification signal F513.0 ○ ○ 16.6


F073.1 ○ ○ 13.1.2



F073.2 ○ ○ 13.1.2


M

MDIRST MDI reset confirmation signal F006.1 ○ ○ 5.2


- 1532 -



MDRN Dry run check signal F002.7 ○ ○ 5.3.2 MDTCH1~ MDTCH5

Controlled axis detach status signals

F110.0~F110.4 ○ ○ 1.2.5

MEDT Memory edit selection check signal

F003.6 ○ ○ 2.6

MF Auxiliary function strobe signals

F007.0 ○ ○ 9.1

MF2 2nd M function strobe signal F008.4 ○ ○ 9.3 MF3 3rd M function strobe signal F008.5 ○ ○ 9.3

MFIN Auxiliary function completion signal

G005.0 ○ ○ 9.4

MFIN2 2nd M function completion signal

G004.4 ○ ○ 9.4

MFIN3 3rd M function completion signal

G004.5 ○ ○ 9.4

MFNHGA G072.6 ○ ○ MFNHGB G076.6 ○ ○ MFNHGC

Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status signals (serial spindle) G206.6 ○ －

10.3

MH Manual handle feed selection check signal

F003.1 ○ ○ 2.6

MI1~MI5 Mirror image signals G106.0~G106.4 ○ ○ 1.2.7

MINC Incremental feed selection check signal

F003.0 ○ ○ 2.6

MIT Tool offset write signals X004.2~X004.5 ○ － 15.4.2

MIX1~MIX5 Composite control axis change selection signals

G128.0~G128.4 ○ ○ 8.5

MIXO1~MIXO5 Composite axis confirmation signals

F343.0~F343.4 ○ ○ 8.5

MJ Jog feed selection check signal F003.2 ○ ○ 2.6 MLK All-axis machine lock signal G044.1 ○ ○ 5.3.1 MLK1~MLK5 Each-axis machine lock signal G108.0~G108.4 ○ ○ 5.3.1

MLKO Software operator’s panel signal (MLK)

F075.4 ○ ○ 13.1.2

MMDI Manual data input selection check signal

F003.3 ○ ○ 2.6

MMEM Automatic operation selection check signal

F003.5 ○ ○ 2.6

MMI1~MMI5 Mirror image check signals F108.0~F108.4 ○ ○ 1.2.7

MMLK All-axis machine lock check signal

F004.1 ○ ○ 5.3.1

MMMOD Check mode confirmation signal

F091.3 ○ ○ 3.5

MMOD Checking mode signal G067.2 ○ ○ 3.5

MNCHG Direction change prohibition signal

F091.1 ○ ○ 3.5

MORA1A F046.6 ○ ○ MORA1B F050.6 ○ ○ MORA1C

Magnetic sensor orientation completion signals (serial spindle) F169.6 ○ －

MORA2A F046.7 ○ ○ MORA2B F050.7 ○ ○

M

MORA2C

Magnetic sensor orientation proximity signals (serial spindle) F169.7 ○ －

10.3


- 1533 -



MORCMA G073.0 ○ ○ MORCMB G077.0 ○ ○ MORCMC

Magnetic sensor orientation command signals (serial spindle) G207.0 ○ －

10.3

MP1,MP2 Manual handle feed amount selection signals (incremental feed signals)

G019.4,G019.5 ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5

MP21,MP22 MP31,MP32

Manual handle feed amount selection signals

G087.0,G087.1 G087.3,G087.4

○ ○ 3.2

MP1O Software operator’s panel signal (MP1)

F076.0 ○ ○ 13.1.2

MP2O Software operator’s panel signal (MP2)

F076.1 ○ ○ 13.1.2

MPOFA G073.2 ○ ○ MPOFB G077.2 ○ ○ MPOFC

Motor power cutoff command signals (serial spindle)

G207.2 ○ － MRDYA G070.7 ○ ○ MRDYB G074.7 ○ ○ MRDYC

Machine ready signals (serial spindle)

G204.7 ○ －

10.3

MREF Manual reference position return selection check signal

F004.5 ○ ○ 4.1

MRMT DNC operation selection confirm signal

F003.4 ○ ○ 5.11, 5.13

MRVM Reverse movement prohibition signal

G531.1 ○ ○ 3.5

MRVMD Reverse movement signal F091.0 ○ ○ 3.5

MRVSP Reverse movement prohibition signal

F091.2 ○ ○ 3.5

MSBK Single block check signal F004.3 ○ ○ 5.3.3 MSP00~MSP15 Multi-spindle address P signals F160,F161 ○ ○ 10.12 MSPOSA F039.0 ○ ○ MSPOSB

Spindle positioning mode signals F402.1 ○ ○ 10.10

MT8N00~MT8N31 Manual tool compensation tool number signal (8 digits)

G525~G528 ○ － 11.1.4

MTLA Manual tool compensation completion signal

F061.5 ○ － 11.1.4

MTLANG Manual tool compensation uncompleted signal

F061.4 ○ － 11.1.4

MTLC Manual tool compensation command number

G067.0 ○ － 11.1.4

MTLN00~MTLN15 Manual tool compensation tool number signal (4 digits)

G068,G069 ○ － 11.1.4

MV1~MV5 Axis moving signals F102.0~F102.4 ○ ○ 1.2.6

M

MVD1~MVD5 Axis moving direction signals F106.0~F106.4 ○ ○ 1.2.6

NDCAL1~NDCAL8

A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal(PMC axis control)

G202 ○ ○ 16.1

NMWT No-wait signal G063.7 ● － 8.2 NOWT No-wait signal G063.1 ● － 8.2

NOZAGC Signal for disabling angular axis control for the perpendicular axis

G063.5 ○ ○ 1.8

N

NPOS1~NPOS5 Axis non-display signals G198.0~G198.4 ○ ○


- 1534 -



NRROA G072.2 ○ ○ NRROB G076.2 ○ ○ NRROC

Shortcut command signals for orientation stop position change (serial spindle) G206.2 ○ －

10.3

N

NSYNCA Signal for disabling torque difference alarm detection for axis synchronous control

G059.7 ○ ○ 1.6

OFN0~OFN5, OFN6~OFN9

Tool offset number selection signals

G039.0~G039.5,G040.0~G040.3

○ ○ 15.4.2

OP Automatic operation signal F000.7 ○ ○ 5.1 ORARA F045.7 ○ ○ ORARB F049.7 ○ ○ ORARC

Orientation completion signals (serial spindle)

F168.7 ○ － 10.3

ORCMA G070.6 ○ ○ ORCMB G074.6 ○ ○ ORCMC

Orientation command signals (serial spindle)

G204.6 ○ －

10.3 10.14

OUT0~OUT15 Software operator’s panel general-purpose switch signals

F072,F074 ○ ○ 13.1.2

OVC Override cancel signal G006.4 ○ ○ 7.1.7.4

OVLS1~OVLS5 Superimposed control axis selection signals

G190.0~G190.4 ○ ○ 8.6

OVMO1~OVMO5 Superimposed control master axis confirmation signals

F344.0~F344.4 ○ ○ 8.6

OVRA G072.4 ○ ○

OVRB G076.4 ○ ○ OVRC

Analog override signals (serial spindle)

G206.4 ○ － 10.3

O

OVSO1~OVSO5 Superimposed control slave axis confirmation signals

F345.0~F345.4 ○ ○ 8.6

PBATL Absolute position detector battery voltage low alarm signal

F172.7 ○ ○ 1.4.3

PBATZ Absolute position detector battery voltage zero alarm signal

F172.6 ○ ○ 1.4.3

PC1DEA F047.0 ○ ○ PC1DEB F051.0 ○ ○ PC1DEC

Position coder one-rotation signal detection status signals (serial spindle) F170.0 ○ －

10.3

PC2SLC 2nd position coder selection signal

G028.7 ○ ○ 10.12

PC3SLC 3rd position coder selection signal

G026.0 ○ ○ 10.12

PC4SLC 4th position coder selection signal

G026.1 ○ ○ 10.12

PECK2 Small-hole peck drilling cycle in progress signal

F066.5 － ○ 12.7

PK1~PK5 Parking signals G122.0~G122.4 ○ ○ 8.5

PKESS1 1st spindle parking signal G122.6 (G031.6)

○ ○ 10.17

PKESS2 2nd spindle parking signal G122.7 (G031.7)

○ ○ 10.17

PKESE1 G265.0 ○ ○

PKESE2

Simple spindle synchronous parking signal (for each spindle) G265.1 ○ ○ 10.17

P

PN1,PN2,PN4, PN16

External workpiece number search signals

G009.0~G009.4 ○ ○ 16.4


- 1535 -



PORA2A F046.5 ○ ○ PORA2B F050.5 ○ ○ PORA2C

Position coder orientation proximity signal (serial spindle)

F169.5 ○ － 10.3

PRC Position record signal G040.6 ○ － 15.4.1 PRGDPL Key input disable signal F053.1 ○ ○ 16.5

PRTSF Target part count reached signal

F062.7 ○ ○ 13.1.1

PSAR Polygon spindle speed arrival signal

F063.2 ○ ○ 6.9.2

PSE1 Polygon master axis not arrival signal

F063.0 ○ ○ 6.9.2

PSE2 Polygon synchronization axis not arrival signal

F063.1 ○ ○ 6.9.2

PSW01~PSW16 Position switch signals F070,F071 ○ ○ 1.2.10

P

PSYN Polygon synchronization under way signal

F063.7 ○ ○ 6.9

R01I~R12I G032.0~G033.3 ○ ○ R01I2~R12I2

Spindle motor speed command signals G034.0~G035.3 ○ ○ 10.7

R01O~R12O F036.0~F037.3 ○ ○ 10.6 R01O2~R12O2 F200.0~F201.3 ○ ○ R01O3~R12O3 F204.0~F205.3 ○ ○ R01O4~R12O4

S 12-bit code signals

F270.0~F271.3 ○ ○ 10.12

RCFNA F046.3 ○ ○ RCFNB F050.3 ○ ○ RCFNC

Output switch completion signals (serial spindle)

F169.3 ○ － RCHA G071.7 ○ ○ RCHB G075.7 ○ ○ RCHC

Power line status check signals (serial spindle)

G205.7 ○ － RCHHGA G072.7 ○ ○ RCHHGB G076.7 ○ ○ RCHHGC

Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact status signals (serial spindle) G206.7 ○ －

RCHPA F046.2 ○ ○ RCHPB F050.2 ○ ○ RCHPC

Output switch signals (serial spindle)

F169.2 ○ －

10.3

RGSPM F065.1 ○ ○ RGSPP

Spindle rotation direction signals F065.0 ○ ○ 10.13

RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061.0 ○ ○ 10.13 RGTSP1~RGTSP2

Rigid tapping spindle selection signals

G061.4~G061.5 ○ － 10.13

RLSOT Stroke limit 1 release signal G007.7 ○ ○ 2.3.2 RLSOT3 Stroke limit 3 release signal G007.4 ○ ○ 2.3.3 ROTAA G072.1 ○ ○ ROTAB G076.1 ○ ○ ROTAC

Rotational direction command signals for orientation stop position change (serial spindle) G206.1 ○ －

10.3

ROV1,ROV2 Rapid traverse override signals G014.0,G014.1 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1

ROV1O Software operator’s panel signal (ROV1)

F076.4 ○ ○ 13.1.2

ROV2O Software operator’s panel signal (ROV2)

F076.5 ○ ○ 13.1.2

ROVLP Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal

G053.5 ○ ○ 7.2.1.2

RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053.3 ○ ○ 14.2 RPBSY Read/punch busy signal F053.2 ○ ○ 14.2

R

RPDO Rapid traversing signal F002.1 ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1


- 1536 -



RRW Reset & rewind signal G008.6 ○ ○ 5.2 RSLA G071.6 ○ ○ RSLB G075.6 ○ ○ RSLC

Output switch request signals (serial spindle)

G205.6 ○ － 10.3

RSMAX Spindle synchronous speed ratio control clamp signal

F065.2 ○ ○ 10.14

RST Resetting signal F001.1 ○ ○ 5.2

RT Manual rapid traverse selection signal

G019.7 ○ ○ 3.1

RTAP Rigid tapping-in-progress signal

F076.3 ○ ○ 10.13

RTNT Rigid tapping retraction start signal

G062.6 － ○ 5.10

RTO Software operator’s panel signal (RT)

F077.6 ○ ○ 13.1.2

RTPT Rigid tapping retraction completion signal

F066.1 － ○ 5.10

RTRCT Retract signal G066.4 ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13 RTRCTF Retract completion signal F065.4 ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13 RVS Reverse execution signal G007.0 － ○

RVSL Reverse execution in-progress signal

F082.2 － ○ 5.8

R

RWD Rewinding signal F000.0 ○ ○ 5.2 S00~S31 Spindle function code signals F022~F025 ○ ○ 9.1

S2TLS Spindle measurement select signal

G040.5 ○ － 15.4.2

SA Servo ready signal F000.6 ○ ○ 2.2 SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029.4 ○ ○ 10.6 SARA F045.3 ○ ○ SARB F049.3 ○ ○ SARC

Spindle speed arrival signal (serial spindle)

F168.3 ○ － 10.3

SBK Single block signal G046.1 ○ ○ 5.3.3

SBKO Software operator’s panel signal (SBK)

F075.3 ○ ○ 13.1.2

SBRT Spindle synchronous speed ratio control signal

G038.1 ○ ○ 10.14

SCLPA F038.0 ○ ○ SCLPB

Spindle clamp signal F401.1 ○ ○ 10.10

SDTA F045.2 ○ ○ SDTB F049.2 ○ ○ SDTC

Speed detection signals (serial spindle)

F168.2 ○ － 10.3

SF Spindle function strobe signal F007.2 ○ ○ 9.1

SFIN Spindle function completion signal

G005.2 ○ ○ 9.4

SFRA G070.5 ○ ○ SFRB G074.5 ○ ○ SFRC

CW command signals (serial spindle)

G204.5 ○ － 10.3

SGN G033.5 ○ ○ SGN2

Spindle motor command polarity command signals G035.5 ○ ○ 10.7

SH00A~SH11A G078.0~G079.3 ○ ○ SH00B~SH11B

Spindle orientation external stop position command signals G080.0~G081.3 ○ ○ 10.15

SIND G033.7 ○ ○ SIND2

Spindle motor speed command selection signals G035.7 ○ ○ 10.7

S

SKIP Skip signal X004.7 ○ ○ 15.3


- 1537 -



SKIP2~SKIP6, SKIP7,SKIP8

Skip signal X004.2~X004.6, X004.0,X004.1

○ ○ 15.3.3

SKIPP Skip signal G006.6 ○ ○ 15.3 SLPCA G064.2 ● － SLPCB

Path spindle feedback selection signals G064.3 ● － 8.8

SLSPA G063.2 ● － SLSPB

Path spindle command selection signals G063.3 ● － 8.8

SLVA G073.1 ○ ○ SLVB G077.1 ○ ○ SLVC

Subordinate operation mode command signals (serial spindle) G207.1 ○ －

SLVSA F046.4 ○ ○ SLVSB F050.4 ○ ○ SLVSC

Subordinate operation status signals (serial spindle)

F169.4 ○ －

10.3

SMPK1~SMPK5 Parking axis confirmation signals

F346.0~F346.4 ○ ○ 8.5

SMZ In-position check signal G053.6 ○ ○ 7.2.5 SOCNA G071.4 ○ ○ SOCNB G075.4 ○ ○ SOCNC

Soft start/stop cancel signals (serial spindle)

G205.4 ○ － 10.3

SOR Spindle orientation signal G029.5 ○ ○ 10.6 SOV0~SOV7 Spindle speed override signals G030 ○ ○ 10.6

SOV20~SOV27 2nd spindle speed override signals

G376 ○ ○ 10.12

SPAL Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal

F035.0 ○ ○ 10.18

SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000.4 ○ ○ 5.1

SPO Software operator’s panel signal (*SP)

F075.7 ○ ○ 13.1.2

SPP1 to SPP5 Spindle indexing signal for each axis

F522.0~F522.4 ○ ○ 10.19

SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous control signal

G038.3 ○ ○ 10.14

SPPHS1 G289.0 ○ ○ SPPHS2

Spindle phase synchronous control signal (for each spindle) G289.1 ○ ○ 10.14

SPSLA G071.2 ○ ○ SPSLB G075.2 ○ ○ SPSLC

Spindle selection signals (serial spindle)

G205.2 ○ － 10.3

SPSP Spindle command path specification signal

G536.7 ○ ○ 10.12

SPSTPA G028.6 ○ ○ SPSTPB

Spindle stop completion signalG402.1 ○ ○ 10.10

SPSYC Spindle synchronous control signal

G038.2 ○ ○ 10.14

SPSYC1 G288.0 ○ ○ SPSYC2

Spindle synchronous control signal (for each spindle) G288.1 ○ ○ 10.14

SPWRN1~ SPWRN9

Spindle warning detail signals 1 to 9

F264.0~F265.0 ○ ○ 10.3

SRN Program restart signal G006.0 ○ ○ 5.7

SRNMV Program restart under way signal

F002.4 ○ ○ 5.7

SRSP1R 1st serial spindle ready signals F034.6 ○ ○ 10.3

S

SRSP2R 2nd serial spindle ready signals F034.5 ○ ○ 10.3


- 1538 -



SRSRDY All-spindle operation ready signal

F034.7 ○ ○ 10.3

SRVA G070.4 ○ ○ SRVB G074.4 ○ ○ SRVC

CCW command signals (serial spindle)

G204.4 ○ － 10.3

SRVON1~ SRVON5

SV speed control mode signals G521.0~G521.4 ○ ○ 10.19

SSIN G033.6 ○ ○ SSIN2

Spindle motor command polarity selection signals G035.6 ○ ○ 10.7

SSTA F045.1 ○ ○ SSTB F049.1 ○ ○ SSTC

Speed zero signals (serial spindle)

F168.1 ○ － 10.3

ST Cycle start signal G007.2 ○ ○ 5.1 STCHK Start check signal G408.0 ○ ○ 2.12 STL Cycle start lamp signal F000.5 ○ ○ 5.1 STLK Start lock signal G007.1 ○ ○ 2.5 SUCLPA F038.1 ○ ○ SUCLPB

Spindle unclamp signal F400.1 ○ ○ 10.10

SVF1~SVF5 Servo off signals G126.0~G126.4 ○ ○ 1.2.9 SVREV1~SVREV5

SV speed control mode in-progress signals

F521.0~F521.4 ○ ○ 10.19

SVRVS1~SVRVS5

SV reverse signals G523.0~G523.4 ○ ○ 10.19

SVWRN1 F093.4 ○ ○ SVWRN2 F093.5 ○ ○ SVWRN3 F093.6 ○ ○ SVWRN4

Servo warning detail signals

F093.7 ○ ○

18.1

SWS1 G027.0 ○ ○ SWS2

Spindle selection signals G027.1 ○ ○ 10.12

SYCAL Phase error monitor signal F044.4 ○ ○ 10.14,10.17SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○ SYCAL2

Phase error monitor signal (for each spindle) F043.1 ○ ○

10.14 10.17

SYCM1~SYCM5 Synchronous master axis confirmation signals

F341.0~F341.4 ○ ○ 8.5

SYCS1~SYCS5 Synchronous slave axis confirmation signals

F342.0~F342.4 ○ ○ 8.5

SYN1O~SYN5O Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under way signals

F118.0~F118.4 ○ ○ 8.5,8.6

SYNC1~SYNC5 Synchronous control axis selection signals

G138.0~G138.4 ○ ○ 1.6,8.5

SYNCJ1~SYNCJ5 Signals for selecting the manual feed axis for axis synchronous control

G140.0~G140.4 ○ ○ 1.6

SYNER Signal for indicating a positional deviation error alarm for axis synchronous control

F403.0 ○ ○ 1.6

SYNMOD EGB mode signal F065.6 ○ ○ 1.9 SYNMT1~SYNMT5

Machine coordinate match state output signals

F210.0~F210.4 ○ ○ 1.6

SYNO1~SYNO5 Axis synchronous control status signals

F532.0~F532.4 ○ ○ 1.6

S

SYNOF1~SYNOF5

Synchronization compensation enable state output signals

F211.0~F211.4 ○ ○ 1.6


- 1539 -



T00~T31 Tool function code signals F026~F029 ○ ○ 9.1 TAP Tapping signal F001.5 ○ ○ 12.7

TDFTR1~TDFTR8 Trouble forecast signal (For the disturbance level)

F299.0~F299.7 ○ ○ 18.3

TDSML1~TDSML8

Trouble forecast signal (For the thermal simulation data)

F298.0~F298.7 ○ ○ 18.3

TF Tool function strobe signal F007.3 ○ ○ 9.1 TFIN Tool function completion signal G005.3 ○ ○ 9.4 THRD Threading signal F002.3 ○ ○ 6.5 TIALM Path interference alarm signal F064.7 ● － 8.3

TICHK Path interference check in progress signal

F064.6 ● － 8.3

TL01~TL256 Tool group number selection signals

G047.0~G048.0 ○ ○ 11.4

TLAL Remaining tool count notification signal

F154.0 － ○ 11.4

TLCH Tool change signal F064.0 ○ ○ 11.4 TLCHB Tool life arrival notice signal F064.3 ○ ○ 11.4 TLCHI Individual tool change signal F064.2 ○ ○ 11.4 TLMA F045.6 ○ ○ TLMB F049.6 ○ ○ TLMC

Torque limit signals (serial spindle)

F168.6 ○ － TLMHA G070.1 ○ ○ TLMHB G074.1 ○ ○ TLMHC

Torque limit command HIGH signals (serial spindle)

G204.1 ○ － TLMLA G070.0 ○ ○ TLMLB G074.0 ○ ○ TLMLC

Torque limit command LOW signals (serial spindle)

G204.0 ○ －

10.3

TLNW New tool select signal F064.1 ○ ○ 11.4 TLRST Tool change reset signal G048.7 ○ ○ 11.4

TLRSTI Individual tool change reset signal

G048.6 ○ ○ 11.4

TLSKP Tool skip signal G048.5 ○ ○ 11.4

TMRON General-purpose integrating meter start signal

G053.0 ○ ○ 13.1.1

TPPRS Touch panel check signal F006.0 ○ ○ 13.1.6 TRQL1~TRQL5 Torque limit reached signals F114.0~F114.4 ○ ○ 15.3.4

T

TRQM1~TRQM8 Torque control mode signal(PMC axis control)

F190 ○ ○ 16.1

UI000~UI015 Input signals for custom macro G054~G055 ○ ○ 12.6

UINT Interrupt signal for custom macro

G053.3 ○ ○ 12.6.2

UO000~UO031 F054,F055, F276,F277

○ ○ U

UO100~UO131

Output signals for custom macro

F056~F059 ○ ○ 12.6

WATO Waiting signal F063.6 ● － 8.2

WOQSM Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal

G039.6 ○ ○ 15.4.2 W

WOSET Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal

G040.7 ○ － 15.4.2


- 1540 -



WPRST1 to WPRST5

Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals

G358.0~G358.4 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6

W

WPSF1 to WPSF5 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset completion signals

F358.0~F358.4 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6

ZP1~ZP5 Reference position return end signals

F094.0~F094.4 ○ ○ 4.1

ZP21~ZP25 2nd reference position return completion signals

F096.0~F096.4 ○ ○ 4.4

ZP31~ZP35 3rd reference position return completion signals

F098.0~F098.4 ○ ○ 4.4

ZP41~ZP45 4th reference position return completion signals

F100.0~F100.4 ○ ○ 4.4

ZRF1~ZRF5 Reference position establishment signals

F120.0~F120.4 ○ ○ 4.1

ZRN Manual reference position return selection signal

G043.7 ○ ○ 4.1

ZRNO Software operator’s panel signal (ZRN)

F073.4 ○ ○ 13.1.2

Z

ZRNR Mode notification signal F513.7 ○ ○ 16.6


- 1541 -


A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses) ○ : Available ● : Available only with 2-path control － : Unavailable

Address Signal name Symbol T M Reference item

X004.2~X004.6, X004.0,X004.1

Skip signal SKIP2~SKIP6, SKIP7,SKIP8

○ ○ 15.3.3

X004.2~X004.6 Tool offset write signals +MIT1,-MIT1 +MIT2,-MIT2

○ － 15.4.2

X004.6 Skip signal(PMC axis control) ESKIP ○ ○ 16.1 X004.7 Skip signal SKIP ○ ○ 15.3 X008.4 Emergency stop signals *ESP ○ ○ 2.1

X009.0~X009.4 Reference position return deceleration signals

*DEC1~*DEC5 ○ ○ 4.1

G000~G001 Data signals for external data input ED15~ED0 ○ ○ 16.2 G002.6~G002.0 Address signals for external data input EA6~EA0 ○ ○ 16.2 G002.7 Read signal for external data input ESTB ○ ○ 16.2 G004.3 End signal FIN ○ ○ 9.1 G004.4 2nd M function completion signal MFIN2 ○ ○ 9.4 G004.5 3rd M function completion signal MFIN3 ○ ○ 9.4 G005.0 Auxiliary function completion signal MFIN ○ ○ 9.4 G005.2 Spindle function completion signal SFIN ○ ○ 9.4 G005.3 Tool function completion signal TFIN ○ ○ 9.4 G005.6 Auxiliary function lock signal AFL ○ ○ 9.2 G005.7 2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN ○ ○ 9.4 G006.0 Program restart signal SRN ○ ○ 5.7 G006.2 Manual absolute signal *ABSM ○ ○ 5.4 G006.4 Override cancel signal OVC ○ ○ 7.1.7.4 G006.6 Skip signal SKIPP ○ ○ 15.3 G007.0 Reverse execution signal RVS － ○ 5.8 G007.1 Start lock signal STLK ○ ○ 2.5 G007.2 Cycle start signal ST ○ ○ 5.1 G007.4 Stroke limit 3 release signal RLSOT3 ○ ○ 2.3.3 G007.5 Follow-up signal *FLWU ○ ○ 1.2.8 G007.6 Stored stroke limit 1 change signal EXLM ○ ○ 2.3.2 G007.7 Stroke limit 1 release signal RLSOT ○ ○ 2.3.2 G008.0 Interlock signal for all axes *IT ○ ○ 2.5 G008.1 Cutting block start interlock signal *CSL ○ ○ 2.5 G008.3 Block start interlock signal *BSL ○ ○ 2.5 G008.4 Emergency stop signals *ESP ○ ○ 2.1 G008.5 Feed hold signal *SP ○ ○ 5.1 G008.6 Reset & rewind signal RRW ○ ○ 5.2 G008.7 External reset signal ERS ○ ○ 5.2

G009.0~G009.4 External workpiece number search signals

PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,PN16

○ ○ 16.4

G010,G011 Manual feedrate override signals *JV0~*JV15 ○ ○ 3.1 G012 Feedrate override signals *FV0~*FV7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2 G014.0,G014.1 Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1 G016.7 One-digit F code feed signal F1D － ○ 7.1.5 G018.0~G018.3 HS1A~HS1D ○ ○ G018.4~G018.7 HS2A~HS2D ○ ○ G019.0~G019.3

Manual handle feed axis selection signals

HS3A~HS3D － ○ 3.2


- 1542 -



G019.4,G019.5 Manual handle feed amount selection signals (incremental feed signals)

MP1,MP2 ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5

G019.7 Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT ○ ○ 3.1

G023.3 Maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal

HNDLF ○ ○ 3.2

G024.0~G025.5 Extended external workpiece number search signals

EPN0~EPN13 ○ ○ 16.4

G025.7 External workpiece number search start signal

EPNS ○ ○ 16.4

G026.0 PC3SLC ○ ○ G026.1

Position coder selection signals PC4SLC ○ ○ 10.12

G027.0 SWS1 ○ ○ G027.1 SWS2 ○ ○ G027.2

Spindle selection signals SWS3 ○ ○

10.12

G027.3 *SSTP1 ○ ○ G027.4 *SSTP2 ○ ○ G027.5

Individual spindle stop signals *SSTP3 ○ ○

10.12

G027.7 Cs contour control change signal CON ○ ○ 10.11 G028.1,G028.2 Gear selection signals (input) GR1,GR2 ○ ○ 10.6 G028.4 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFA ○ ○ 10.10 G028.5 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFA ○ ○ 10.10 G028.6 Spindle stop completion signal SPSTPA ○ ○ 10.10 G028.7 2nd position coder selection signal PC2SLC ○ ○ 10.12 G029.0 GR21 ○ ○ G029.1

Gear selection signals (input) GR22 ○ ○ 10.12

G029.4 Spindle speed arrival signal SAR ○ ○ 10.6 G029.5 Spindle orientation signal SOR ○ ○ 10.6 G029.6 Spindle stop signal *SSTP ○ ○ 10.6 G030 Spindle speed override signals SOV0~SOV7 ○ ○ 10.6 G031.6 1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○ 10.17 G031.7 2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○ 10.17 G032.0~G033.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I~R12I ○ ○ 10.7

G033.5 Spindle motor command polarity command signals

SGN ○ ○ 10.7

G033.6 Spindle motor command polarity selection signals

SSIN ○ ○ 10.7

G033.7 Spindle motor speed command selection signals

SIND ○ ○ 10.7

G034.0~G035.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I2~R12I2 ○ ○ 10.7


SGN2 ○ ○ 10.7


SSIN2 ○ ○ 10.7


SIND2 ○ ○ 10.7

G036.0~G037.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I3~R12I3 ○ ○ 10.7


SGN3 ○ ○ 10.7


SSIN3 ○ ○ 10.7


SIND3 ○ ○ 10.7

G038.0 Polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST ○ ○ 6.9.2


- 1543 -



G038.1 Spindle synchronous speed ratio control signal

SBRT ○ ○ 10.14

G038.2 Spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC ○ ○ 10.14

G038.3 Spindle phase synchronous control signal

SPPHS ○ ○ 10.14

G038.6 B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP － ○ 13.12

G038.7 B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP － ○ 13.12

G039.0~G039.5 OFN0~OFN5 ○ ○

G040.0~G040.3 Tool offset number selection signals

OFN6~OFN9 ○ ○ 15.4.2

G039.6 Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal

WOQSM ○ ○ 15.4.2

G039.7 Tool offset write mode select signal GOQSM ○ ○ 15.4.2 G040.5 Spindle measurement select signal S2TLS ○ － 15.4.2 G040.6 Position record signal PRC ○ － 15.4.1

G040.7 Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal

WOSET ○ － 15.4.2

G041.0~G041.3 HS1IA~HS1ID ○ ○ G041.4~G041.7 HS2IA~HS2ID ○ ○ G042.0~G042.3

Manual handle interrupt axis selection signals

HS3IA~HS3ID ○ ○ 3.3

G042.7 Direct operation select signal DMMC ○ ○ 5.13 G043.0~G043.2 Mode selection signals MD1,MD2,MD4 ○ ○ 2.6 G043.5 DNC operation select signal DNCI ○ ○ 5.11

G043.7 Manual reference position return selection signal

ZRN ○ ○ 4.1

G044.0 BDT1 ○ ○ G045

Optional block skip signals BDT2~BDT9 ○ ○ 5.5

G044.1 All-axis machine lock signal MLK ○ ○ 5.3.1 G046.0 Memory protection signals KEYP ○ ○ 13.2.2 G046.1 Single block signal SBK ○ ○ 5.3.3 G046.3~G046.6 Memory protection signals KEY1~KEY4 ○ ○ 13.2.1 G046.7 Dry run signal DRN ○ ○ 5.3.2 G047.0~G048.0 Tool group number selection signals TL01~TL256 ○ ○ 11.4 G048.2 Tool life counting disable signal LFCIV ○ ○ 11.4 G048.5 Tool skip signal TLSKP ○ ○ 11.4 G048.6 Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI ○ ○ 11.4 G048.7 Tool change reset signal TLRST ○ ○ 11.4 G049.0~G050.1 Tool life count override signals *TLV0~*TLV9 ○ ○ 11.4

G053.0 General-purpose integrating meter start signal

TMRON ○ ○ 13.1.1

G053.3 Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT ○ ○ 12.6.2

G053.5 Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal

ROVLP ○ ○ 7.2.1.2

G053.6 In-position check signal SMZ ○ ○ 7.2.5 G053.7 Chamfering signal *CDZ ○ － 12.8 G054~G055 Input signals for custom macro UI000~UI015 ○ ○ 12.6 G058.1 External read start signal EXRD ○ ○ 14.2 G058.2 External read/punch stop signal EXSTP ○ ○ 14.2 G058.3 External punch start signal EXWT ○ ○ 14.2

G059.7 Signal for disabling torque difference alarm detection for axis synchronous control

NSYNCA ○ ○ 1.6

G060.7 Tail stock barrier selection signal *TSB ○ － 2.3.6 G061.0 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP ○ ○ 10.13


- 1544 -



G061.4~G061.5 Rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1~RGTSP2 ○ － 10.13 G062.6 Rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT － ○ 5.10

G063.0 Path select signal(Tool post select signal)

HEAD ● － 8.11, 13.3

G063.1 No-wait signal NOWT ● － 8.2 G063.2,G063.3 Path spindle command selection signals SLSPA,SLSPB ● － 8.8

G063.5 Signal for disabling angular axis control for the perpendicular axis

NOZAGC ○ ○ 1.8

G063.6 In-feed control cut start signal INFD － ○ 12.9 G063.7 No-wait signal NMWT ● － 8.2 G064.2,G064.3 Path spindle feedback selection signals SLPCA,SLPCB ● － 8.8

G064.6 Simple spindle synchronous control signal

ESRSYC ○ ○ 10.17

G066.0 All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGNVRY ○ ○ 2.8 G066.1 External key input mode selection signal ENBKY ○ ○ 16.5 G066.4 Retract signal RTRCT ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13 G066.7 Key code read signal EKSET ○ ○ 16.5

G067.0 Manual tool compensation command number

MTLC ○ － 11.1.4

G067.2 Checking mode signal MMOD ○ ○ 3.5

G067.3 Handle available signal in checking mode

MCHK ○ ○ 3.5

G067.6 Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT ○ ○ G067.7 Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ ○ ○

G68,G69 Manual tool compensation tool number signal (4 digits)

MTLN00~MTLN15 ○ － 11.1.4

G070.0 Torque limit command LOW signals (serial spindle)

TLMLA ○ ○ 10.3

G070.1 Torque limit command HIGH signals (serial spindle)

TLMHA ○ ○ 10.3

G070.3,G070.2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1A,CTH2A ○ ○ 10.3 G070.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVA ○ ○ 10.3 G070.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRA ○ ○ 10.3

G070.6 Orientation command signals (serial spindle)

ORCMA ○ ○ 10.3 10.14

G070.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYA ○ ○ 10.3 G071.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTA ○ ○ 10.3 G071.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPA ○ ○ 10.3 G071.2 Spindle selection signals(serial spindle) SPSLA ○ ○ 10.3

G071.3 Power line switch completion signals (serial spindle)

MCFNA ○ ○ 10.3

G071.4 Soft start/stop cancel signals(serial spindle)

SOCNA ○ ○ 10.3

G071.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGA ○ ○ 10.3

G071.6 Output switch request signals (serial spindle)

RSLA ○ ○ 10.3

G071.7 Power line status check signals (serial spindle)

RCHA ○ ○ 10.3

G072.0 Orientation stop position change command signals (serial spindle)

INDXA ○ ○ 10.3


- 1545 -



G072.1 Rotational direction command signals for orientation stop position change(serial spindle)

ROTAA ○ ○ 10.3

G072.2 Shortcut command signals for orientation stop position change(serial spindle)

NRROA ○ ○ 10.3

G072.3 Differential speed mode command signals (serial spindle)

DEFMDA ○ ○ 10.3

G072.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRA ○ ○ 10.3

G072.5 Incremental command externally set orientation signals(serial spindle)

INCMDA ○ ○ 10.3

G072.6 Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status signals(serial spindle)

MFNHGA ○ ○ 10.3

G072.7 Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact status signals (serial spindle)

RCHHGA ○ ○ 10.3

G073.0 Magnetic sensor orientation command signals(serial spindle)

MORCMA ○ ○ 10.3

G073.1 Subordinate operation mode command signals (serial spindle)

SLVA ○ ○ 10.3

G073.2 Motor power cutoff command signals (serial spindle)

MPOFA ○ ○ 10.3


TLMLB ○ ○ 10.3


TLMHB ○ ○ 10.3

G074.3,G074.2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1B,CTH2B ○ ○ 10.3 G074.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVB ○ ○ 10.3 G074.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRB ○ ○ 10.3


ORCMB ○ ○ 10.3 10.14

G074.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYB ○ ○ 10.3 G075.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTB ○ ○ 10.3 G075.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPB ○ ○ 10.3 G075.2 Spindle selection signals(serial spindle) SPSLB ○ ○ 10.3


MCFNB ○ ○ 10.3

G075.4 Soft start/stop cancel signals(serial spindle)

SOCNB ○ ○ 10.3

G075.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGB ○ ○ 10.3


RSLB ○ ○ 10.3


RCHB ○ ○ 10.3


INDXB ○ ○ 10.3

G076.1 Rotational direction command signals for orientation stop position change(serial spindle)

ROTAB ○ ○ 10.3

G076.2 Shortcut command signals for orientation stop position change(serial spindle)

NRROB ○ ○ 10.3


DEFMDB ○ ○ 10.3

G076.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRB ○ ○ 10.3


- 1546 -



G076.5 Incremental command externally set orientation signals(serial spindle)

INCMDB ○ ○ 10.3

G076.6 Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status signals (serial spindle)

MFNHGB ○ ○ 10.3


RCHHGB ○ ○ 10.3

G077.0 Magnetic sensor orientation command signals(serial spindle)

MORCMB ○ ○ 10.3


SLVB ○ ○ 10.3


MPOFB ○ ○ 10.3

G078.0~G079.3 SH00A~SH11A ○ ○ 10.15 G080.0~G081.3

Spindle orientation external stop position command signals SH00B~SH11B ○ ○ 10.15

G082,G083 Input signals for P-code macro EUI00~EUI15 ○ ○ G087.0,G087.1 MP21,MP22 ○ ○ G087.3,G087.4

Manual handle feed amount selection signals MP31,MP32 － ○ 3.2

G096.0~G096.6 1% rapid traverse override signals *HROV0~*HROV6 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9

G096.7 1% step rapid traverse override selection signals

HROV ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9

G098 Key code signals EKC0~EKC7 ○ ○ 16.5 G100.0~G100.4 Feed axis and direction selection signals +J1~+J5 ○ ○ 3.1 G101.0~G101.4 External deceleration signals 2 *+ED21~*+ED25 ○ ○ 7.1.9 G102.0~G102.4 Feed axis and direction selection signals -J1~-J5 ○ ○ 3.1 G103.0~G103.4 External deceleration signals 2 *-ED21~*-ED25 ○ ○ 7.1.9 G104.0~G104.4 +EXL1~+EXL5 ○ ○ 2.3.2 G105.0~G105.4

Stored stroke limit 1 switching signals in axis direction -EXL1~-EXL5 ○ ○ 2.3.2

G106.0~G106.4 Mirror image signals MI1~MI5 ○ ○ 1.2.7 G107.0~G107.4 External deceleration signals 3 *+ED31~*+ED35 ○ ○ 7.1.9 G108.0~G108.4 Each-axis machine lock signal MLK1~MLK5 ○ ○ 5.3.1 G109.0~G109.4 External deceleration signals 3 *-ED31~*-ED35 ○ ○ 7.1.9 G110.0~G110.4 +LM1~+LM5 ○ ○ G112.0~G112.4

Stroke limit external setting signals -LM1~-LM5 ○ ○ 2.3.5

G114.0~G114.4 *+L1~*+L5 ○ ○ G116.0~G116.4

Overtravel signals *-L1~*-L5 ○ ○ 2.3.1

G118.0~G118.4 *+ED1~*+ED5 ○ ○ G120.0~G120.4

External deceleration signals 1 *-ED1~*-ED5 ○ ○ 7.1.9

G122.0~G122.4 Parking signals PK1~PK5 ○ ○ 8.5 G122.6(G031.6) 1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○ 10.17 G122.7(G031.7) 2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○ 10.17 G124.0~G124.4 Controlled axis detach signals DTCH1~DTCH5 ○ ○ 1.2.5

G125.0~G125.4 Unexpected disturbance torque detection ignore signal

IUDD1~IUDD5 ○ ○ 2.9

G126.0~G126.4 Servo off signals SVF1~SVF5 ○ ○ 1.2.9

G128.0~G128.4 Composite control axis change selection signals

MIX1~MIX5 ○ ○ 8.5

G130.0~G130.4 Interlock signal for each axis *IT1~*IT5 ○ ○ 2.5 G132.0~G132.4 G134.0~G134.4

Interlock signal for each axis direction +MIT1~+MIT5 -MIT1~-MIT5

－ ○ 2.5

G132.0,G132.1 Tool offset write signals +MIT1,+MIT2 ○ － 15.4.2 G134.0,G134.1 Tool offset write signals -MIT1,-MIT2 ○ － 15.4.2

G136.0~G136.4 Control axis selection signals(PMC axis control)

EAX1~EAX5 ○ ○ 16.1


- 1547 -



G138.0~G138.4 Synchronous control axis selection signals

SYNC1~SYNC5 ○ ○ 1.6,8.5

G140.0~G140.4 Signals for selecting the manual feed axis for axis synchronous control

SYNCJ1~SYNCJ5 ○ ○ 1.6

G142.0 Auxiliary function completion signal (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EFINA ○ ○ 16.1

G142.1 Accumulated zero check signal (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

ELCKZA ○ ○ 16.1

G142.2 Buffering disable signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EMBUFA ○ ○ 16.1

G142.3 Block stop signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

ESBKA ○ ○ 16.1

G142.4 Servo off signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

ESOFA ○ ○ 16.1

G142.5 Axis control temporary stop signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

ESTPA ○ ○ 16.1

G142.6 Reset signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

ECLRA ○ ○ 16.1

G142.7 Axis control command read signal (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EBUFA ○ ○ 16.1

G143.0~G143.6 Axis control command signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EC0A~EC6A ○ ○ 16.1

G143.7 Block stop disable signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EMSBKA ○ ○ 16.1

G144,G145 Axis control feedrate signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EIF0A~EIF15A ○ ○ 16.1

G146~G149 Axis control data signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EID0A~EID31A ○ ○ 16.1

G150.0,G150.1 Rapid traverse override signals(PMC axis control)

EROV1,EROV2 ○ ○ 16.1

G150.5 Override cancel signal (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

EOVC ○ ○ 16.1

G150.6 Manual rapid traverse selection signal(PMC axis control)

ERT ○ ○ 16.1

G150.7 Dry run signal(PMC axis control) EDRN ○ ○ 16.1

G151 Feedrate override signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control)

*EFOV0~*EFOV7 ○ ○ 16.1


EFINB ○ ○ 16.1


ELCKZB ○ ○ 16.1


EMBUFB ○ ○ 16.1


ESBKB ○ ○ 16.1


ESOFB ○ ○ 16.1


ESTPB ○ ○ 16.1


ECLRB ○ ○ 16.1

G154.7 Axis control command read signals (for group 2) (PMC axis control)

EBUFB ○ ○ 16.1


EC0B~EC6B ○ ○ 16.1


- 1548 -




EMSBKB ○ ○ 16.1


EIF0B~EIF15B ○ ○ 16.1


EID0B~EID31B ○ ○ 16.1


EOVCB ○ ○ 16.1


*EFOV0B~*EFOV7B ○ ○ 16.1


EFINC ○ ○ 16.1


ELCKZC ○ ○ 16.1


EMBUFC ○ ○ 16.1


ESBKC ○ ○ 16.1


ESOFC ○ ○ 16.1


ESTPC ○ ○ 16.1


ECLRC ○ ○ 16.1


EBUFC ○ ○ 16.1


EC0C~EC6C ○ ○ 16.1


EMSBKC ○ ○ 16.1


EIF0C~EIF15C ○ ○ 16.1


EID0C~EID31C ○ ○ 16.1


EOVCC ○ ○ 16.1


*EFOV0C~*EFOV7C ○ ○ 16.1


EFIND ○ ○ 16.1


ELCKZD ○ ○ 16.1


EMBUFD ○ ○ 16.1


ESBKD ○ ○ 16.1


ESOFD ○ ○ 16.1


ESTPD ○ ○ 16.1


ECLRD ○ ○ 16.1


EBUFD ○ ○ 16.1


- 1549 -




EC0D~EC6D ○ ○ 16.1


EMSBKD ○ ○ 16.1


EIF0D~EIF15D ○ ○ 16.1


EID0D~EID31D ○ ○ 16.1


EOVCD ○ ○ 16.1


*EFOV0D~*EFOV7D ○ ○ 16.1

G190.0~G190.4 Superimposed control axis selection signals

OVLS1~OVLS5 ○ ○ 8.6

G192.0~G192.4 Each-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGVRY1~IGVRY5 ○ ○ 2.8

G196.0~G196.4 Reference position return deceleration signals

*DEC1~*DEC5 ○ ○ 4.1

G199.0,G199.1 Manual handle generators selection signal

IOLBH1, IOLBH2 ○ － 3.4

G202 A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal (PMC axis control)

NDCAL1~NDCAL8 ○ － 16.1


TLMLC ○ － 10.3


TLMHC ○ － 10.3

G204.3,G204.2 Clutch/gear signals (serial spindle) CTH1C,CTH2C ○ － 10.3 G204.4 CCW command signals (serial spindle) SRVC ○ － 10.3 G204.5 CW command signals (serial spindle) SFRC ○ － 10.3


ORCMC ○ － 10.3 10.14

G204.7 Machine ready signals (serial spindle) MRDYC ○ － 10.3 G205.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTC ○ － 10.3 G205.1 Emergency stop signals (serial spindle) *ESPC ○ － 10.3 G205.2 Spindle selection signals (serial spindle) SPSLC ○ － 10.3


MCFNC ○ － 10.3

G205.4 Soft start/stop cancel signals (serial spindle)

SOCNC ○ － 10.3

G205.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGC ○ － 10.3


RSLC ○ － 10.3


RCHC ○ － 10.3


INDXC ○ － 10.3

G206.1 Rotational direction command signals for orientation stop position change (serial spindle)

ROTAC ○ － 10.3

G206.2 Shortcut command signals for orientation stop position change (serial spindle)

NRROC ○ － 10.3


DEFMDC ○ － 10.3

G206.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRC ○ － 10.3


- 1550 -



G206.5 Incremental command externally set orientation signals (serial spindle)

INCMDC ○ － 10.3

G206.6 Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status signals (serial spindle)

MFNHGC ○ － 10.3


RCHHGC ○ － 10.3

G207.0 Magnetic sensor orientation command signals (serial spindle)

MORCMC ○ － 10.3


SLVC ○ － 10.3


MPOFC ○ － 10.3

G210~G211 Data signals for external data input ED31~ED16 ○ ○ 16.2

G264.0~G264.1 Simple spindle synchronous control signal (for each spindle)

ESSYC1~ESSYC2 ○ ○ 10.17

G265.0~G265.1 Simple spindle synchronous parking signal (for each spindle)

PKESE1~PKESE2 ○ ○ 10.17

G274.4 Cs axis coordinate establishment request signals (for each spindle)

CSFI1 ○ ○ 10.11.3

G288.0~G288.1 Spindle synchronous control signal (for each spindle)

SPSYC1~SPSYC2 ○ ○ 10.14

G289.0~G289.1 Spindle phase synchronous control signal (for each spindle)

SPPHS1~SPPHS2 ○ ○ 10.14

G295.0 Machine operation menu screen select signal

EXSFT ○ ○ 13.4

G295.6 Dual display forcible end request signal C2SEND ○ ○ 13.1.9 G295.7 Key control selection signal CNCKY ○ ○ 13.1.9 G352.0~G353.1 0.1% rapid traverse override signals *FHRO0~*FHRO9 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1

G353.7 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signals

FHROV ○ ○ 7.1.7.1

G358.0~G358.4 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals

WPRST1~WPRST5 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6

G376 2nd spindle speed override signals SOV20~SOV27 ○ ○ 10.12 G400.1 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFB ○ ○ 10.10 G401.1 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFB ○ ○ 10.10 G402.1 Spindle stop completion signal SPSTPB ○ ○ 10.10 G408.0 Start check signal STCHK ○ ○ 2.12 G512,G513 Macro call start signal MCST1~MCST16 ○ ○ 16.6 G514.0 Mode change completion signal MCFIN ○ ○ 16.6 G521.0~G521.4 SV speed control mode signals SRVON1~SRVON5 ○ ○ 10.19 G523.0~G523.4 SV reverse signals SVRVS1~SVRVS5 ○ ○ 10.19

G525~G528 Manual tool compensation tool number signal (8 digits)

MT8N00~MT8N31 ○ － 11.1.4

G531.0 Forward movement prohibition signal FWSTP ○ ○ 3.5 G531.1 Reverse movement prohibition signal MRVM ○ ○ 3.5

G536.7 Spindle command path specification signal

SPSP ○ ○ 10.12

F000.0 Rewinding signal RWD ○ ○ 5.2 F000.4 Feed hold lamp signal SPL ○ ○ 5.1 F000.5 Cycle start lamp signal STL ○ ○ 5.1 F000.6 Servo ready signal SA ○ ○ 2.2 F000.7 Automatic operation signal OP ○ ○ 5.1 F001.0 Alarm signal AL ○ ○ 2.4 F001.1 Resetting signal RST ○ ○ 5.2


- 1551 -



F001.2 Battery alarm signal BAL ○ ○ 2.4 F001.3 Distribution completion signals DEN ○ ○ 9.1 F001.4 Spindle enable signal ENB ○ ○ 10.6 F001.5 Tapping signal TAP ○ ○ 12.7 F001.7 CNC ready signal MA ○ ○ 2.2 F002.0 Inch input signal INCH ○ ○ 12.5 F002.1 Rapid traversing signal RPDO ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1 F002.2 Constant surface speed signal CSS ○ ○ 10.8 F002.3 Threading signal THRD ○ ○ 6.5 F002.4 Program restart under way signal SRNMV ○ ○ 5.7 F002.6 Cutting feed signal CUT ○ ○ 2.7 F002.7 Dry run check signal MDRN ○ ○ 5.3.2 F003.0 Incremental feed selection check signal MINC ○ ○ 2.6

F003.1 Manual handle feed selection check signal

MH ○ ○ 2.6

F003.2 Jog feed selection check signal MJ ○ ○ 2.6 F003.3 Manual data input selection check signal MMDI ○ ○ 2.6 F003.4 DNC operation selection confirm signal MRMT ○ ○ 5.11

F003.5 Automatic operation selection check signal

MMEM ○ ○ 2.6

F003.6 Memory edit selection check signal MEDT ○ ○ 2.6 F004.0 MBDT1 ○ ○ F005

Optional block skip check signals MBDT2~MBDT9 ○ ○ 5.5

F004.1 All-axis machine lock check signal MMLK ○ ○ 5.3.1 F004.2 Manual absolute check signal MABSM ○ ○ 5.4 F004.3 Single block check signal MSBK ○ ○ 5.3.3 F004.4 Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL ○ ○ 9.2

F004.5 Manual reference position return selection check signal

MREF ○ ○ 4.1

F006.0 Touch panel check signal TPPRS ○ ○ 13.1.6 F006.1 MDI reset confirmation signal MDIRST ○ ○ 5.2 F006.2 Automatic screen erasing signal ERTVA ○ ○ F007.0 Auxiliary function strobe signals MF ○ ○ 9.1 F007.2 Spindle function strobe signal SF ○ ○ 9.1 F007.3 Tool function strobe signal TF ○ ○ 9.1 F007.7 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal BF ○ ○ 9.1 F008.4 2nd M function strobe signal MF2 ○ ○ 9.3 F008.5 3rd M function strobe signal MF3 ○ ○ 9.3 F009.4 DM30 ○ ○ F009.5 DM02 ○ ○ F009.6 DM01 ○ ○ F009.7

Decode M signals

DM00 ○ ○

9.1

F010~F013 Auxiliary function code signals M00~M31 ○ ○ 9.1 F014~F015 2nd M function code signals M200~M215 ○ ○ 9.3 F016~F017 3rd M function code signals M300~M315 ○ ○ 9.3 F022~F025 Spindle function code signals S00~S31 ○ ○ 9.1 F026~F029 Tool function code signals T00~T31 ○ ○ 9.1 F030~F033 2nd auxiliary function code signals B00~B31 ○ ○ 9.1 F034.0~F034.2 Gear selection signals (output) GR1O,GR2O,GR3O － ○ 10.6 F034.3 4th serial spindle ready signals SRSP4R ○ ○ 10.3 F034.4 3rd serial spindle ready signals SRSP3R ○ ○ 10.3 F034.5 2nd serial spindle ready signals SRSP2R ○ ○ 10.3 F034.6 1st serial spindle ready signals SRSP1R ○ ○ 10.3 F034.7 All-spindle operation ready signal SRSRDY ○ ○ 10.3


- 1552 -



F035.0 Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal

SPAL ○ ○ 10.18

F036.0~F037.3 S12-bit code signals R01O~R12O ○ ○ 10.6 F038.0 Spindle clamp signal SCLPA ○ ○ 10.10 F038.1 Spindle unclamp signal SUCLPA ○ ○ 10.10 F038.2 Spindle enable signal ENB2 ○ ○ 10.12 F039.0 Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOSA ○ ○ 10.10 F040,F041 Actual spindle speed signals AR00~AR15 ○ ○ 10.9

F043.0~F043.3 Phase error monitor signal (for each spindle)

SYCAL1~SYCAL4 ○ ○ 10.14,10.17

F044.1 Cs contour control change completion signal

FSCSL ○ ○ 10.11

F044.2 Spindle phase synchronous control signal

FSPSY ○ ○ 10.14

F044.3 Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal

FSPPH ○ ○ 10.14

F044.4 Phase error monitor signal SYCAL ○ ○ 10.14,10.17F045.0 Alarm signals(serial spindle) ALMA ○ ○ 10.3 F045.1 Speed zero signals(serial spindle) SSTA ○ ○ 10.3 F045.2 Speed detection signals(serial spindle) SDTA ○ ○ 10.3

F045.3 Spindle speed arrival signal(serial spindle)

SARA ○ ○ 10.3

F045.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1A ○ ○ 10.3 F045.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2A ○ ○ 10.3 F045.6 Torque limit signals(serial spindle) TLMA ○ ○ 10.3

F045.7 Orientation completion signals(serial spindle)

ORARA ○ ○ 10.3

F046.0 Power line switch signals(serial spindle) CHPA ○ ○ 10.3

F046.1 Spindle switch completion signals (serial spindle)

CFINA ○ ○ 10.3

F046.2 Output switch signals(serial spindle) RCHPA ○ ○ 10.3

F046.3 Output switch completion signals (serial spindle)

RCFNA ○ ○ 10.3

F046.4 Subordinate operation status signals(serial spindle)

SLVSA ○ ○ 10.3

F046.5 Position coder orientation proximity signal(serial spindle)

PORA2A ○ ○ 10.3

F046.6 Magnetic sensor orientation completion signals(serial spindle)

MORA1A ○ ○ 10.3

F046.7 Magnetic sensor orientation proximity signals(serial spindle)

MORA2A ○ ○ 10.3

F047.0 Position coder one-rotation signal detection status signals(serial spindle)

PC1DEA ○ ○ 10.3

F047.1 Incremental orientation mode signals (serial spindle)

INCSTA ○ ○ 10.3

F048.4 Cs axis origin established state signals CSPENA ○ ○ 10.11.3 F049.0 Alarm signals(serial spindle) ALMB ○ ○ 10.3 F049.1 Speed zero signals(serial spindle) SSTB ○ ○ 10.3 F049.2 Speed detection signals(serial spindle) SDTB ○ ○ 10.3


SARB ○ ○ 10.3

F049.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1B ○ ○ 10.3 F049.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2B ○ ○ 10.3 F049.6 Torque limit signals(serial spindle) TLMB ○ ○ 10.3


- 1553 -




ORARB ○ ○ 10.3

F050.0 Power line switch signals(serial spindle) CHPB ○ ○ 10.3


CFINB ○ ○ 10.3

F050.2 Output switch signals(serial spindle) RCHPB ○ ○ 10.3


RCFNB ○ ○ 10.3


SLVSB ○ ○ 10.3


PORA2B ○ ○ 10.3


MORA1B ○ ○ 10.3


MORA2B ○ ○ 10.3


PC1DEB ○ ○ 10.3


INCSTB ○ ○ 10.3

F053.0 Key input disable signal INHKY ○ ○ 16.5 F053.1 Key input disable signal PRGDPL ○ ○ 16.5 F053.2 Read/punch busy signal PRBSY ○ ○ 14.2 F053.3 Read/punch alarm signal PRALM ○ ○ 14.2 F053.7 Key code read completion signal EKENB ○ ○ 16.5 F054,F055 UO000~UO015 ○ ○ F056~F059

Output signals for custom macro UO100~UO131 ○ ○ 12.6

F060.0 Read completion signal for external data input

EREND ○ ○ 16.2

F060.1 Search completion signal for external data input

ESEND ○ ○ 16.2

F060.2 Search cancel signal for external data input

ESCAN ○ ○ 16.2

F061.0 B axis unclamp signal BUCLP － ○ 13.12 F061.1 B axis clamp signal BCLP － ○ 13.12

F061.4 Manual tool compensation uncompleted signal

MTLANG ○ － 11.1.4

F061.5 Manual tool compensation completion signal

MTLA ○ － 11.1.4

F062.0 AI contour control mode signal AICC ○ ○ 7.1.11 F062.7 Target part count reached signal PRTSF ○ ○ 13.1.1 F063.0 Polygon master axis not arrival signal PSE1 ○ ○ 6.9.2

F063.1 Polygon synchronization axis not arrival signal

PSE2 ○ ○ 6.9.2

F063.2 Polygon spindle speed arrival signal PSAR ○ ○ 6.9.2 F063.3 COSP1 ● － F063.4

Path spindle command confirmation signal COSP2 ● － 8.8

F063.6 Waiting signal WATO ● － 8.2

F063.7 Polygon synchronization under way signal

PSYN ○ ○ 6.9

F064.0 Tool change signal TLCH ○ ○ 11.4 F064.1 New tool select signal TLNW ○ ○ 11.4 F064.2 Individual tool change signal TLCHI ○ ○ 11.4 F064.3 Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB ○ ○ 11.4


- 1554 -



F064.5 Path spindle command confirmation signal

COSP ● － 8.8

F064.6 Path interference check in progress signal

TICHK ● － 8.3

F064.7 Path interference alarm signal TIALM ● － 8.3 F065.0 RGSPP ○ ○ F065.1

Spindle rotation direction signals RGSPM ○ ○ 10.13

F065.2 Spindle synchronous speed ratio control clamp signal

RSMAX ○ ○ 10.14

F065.4 Retract completion signal RTRCTF ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13 F065.6 EGB mode signal SYNMOD ○ ○ 1.9

F066.1 Rigid tapping retraction completion signal

RTPT － ○ 5.10

F066.3 Mcahining start point signal RTNMVS ○ ○

F066.5 Small-hole peck drilling cycle in progress signal

PECK2 － ○ 12.7

F070,F071 Position switch signals PSW01~PSW16 ○ ○ 1.2.10

F072 Software operator’s panel general-purpose switch signals

OUT0~OUT7 ○ ○ 13.1.2

F073.0 Software operator’s panel signal (MD1) MD1O ○ ○ 13.1.2 F073.1 Software operator’s panel signal (MD2) MD2O ○ ○ 13.1.2 F073.2 Software operator’s panel signal (MD4) MD4O ○ ○ 13.1.2 F073.4 Software operator’s panel signal (ZRN) ZRNO ○ ○ 13.1.2

F074 Software operator’s panel general-purpose switch signals

OUT8~OUT15 ○ ○ 13.1.2

F075.2 Software operator’s panel signal (BDT) BDTO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F075.3 Software operator’s panel signal (SBK) SBKO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F075.4 Software operator’s panel signal (MLK) MLKO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F075.5 Software operator’s panel signal (DRN) DRNO ○ ○ 13.1.2

F075.6 Software operator’s panel signal (KEY1~KEY4)

KEYO ○ ○ 13.1.2

F075.7 Software operator’s panel signal (*SP) SPO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F076.0 Software operator’s panel signal (MP1) MP1O ○ ○ 13.1.2 F076.1 Software operator’s panel signal (MP2) MP2O ○ ○ 13.1.2 F076.3 Rigid tapping-in-progress signal RTAP ○ ○ 10.13 F076.4 Software operator’s panel signal (ROV1) ROV1O ○ ○ 13.1.2 F076.5 Software operator’s panel signal (ROV2) ROV2O ○ ○ 13.1.2 F077.0 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1A) HS1AO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F077.1 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1B) HS1BO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F077.2 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1C) HS1CO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F077.3 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1D) HS1DO ○ ○ 13.1.2 F077.6 Software operator’s panel signal (RT) RTO ○ ○ 13.1.2

F078 Software operator’s panel signal (*FV0~*FV7)

*FV0O~*FV7O ○ ○ 13.1.2

F079,F080 Software operator’s panel signal (*JV0~*JV15)

*JV0O~*JV15O ○ ○ 13.1.2

F081.0,F081.2, F081.4,F081.6

Software operator’s panel signal (+J1~+J4)

+J1O~+J4O ○ ○ 13.1.2

F081.1,F081.3, F081.5,F081.7

Software operator’s panel signal (-J1~-J4)

-J1O~-J4O ○ ○ 13.1.2

F082.2 Reverse execution in-progress signal RVSL － ○ 5.8 F084,F085 Output signals for P-code macro EUO00~EUO15 ○ ○

F090.0 Servo axis unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABTQSV ○ ○ 2.9


- 1555 -



F090.1 1st spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABTSP1 ○ ○ 2.9

F090.2 2nd spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABTSP2 ○ ○ 2.9

F091.0 Reverse movement signal MRVMD ○ ○ 3.5 F091.1 Direction change prohibition signal MNCHG ○ ○ 3.5 F091.2 Reverse movement prohibition signal MRVSP ○ ○ 3.5 F091.3 Check mode confirmation signal MMMOD ○ ○ 3.5 F093.2 Tool life counting disable signal LFCIF ○ ○ 11.4 F093.4 SVWRN1 ○ ○ F093.5 SVWRN2 ○ ○ F093.6 SVWRN3 ○ ○ F093.7

Servo warning detail signals

SVWRN4 ○ ○

18.1

F094.0~F094.4 Reference position return end signals ZP1~ZP5 ○ ○ 4.1

F096.0~F096.4 2nd reference position return completion signals

ZP21~ZP25 ○ ○ 4.4

F098.0~F098.4 3rd reference position return completion signals

ZP31~ZP35 ○ ○ 4.4

F100.0~F100.4 4th reference position return completion signals

ZP41~ZP45 ○ ○ 4.4

F102.0~F102.4 Axis moving signals MV1~MV5 ○ ○ 1.2.6 F104.0~F104.4 In-position signals INP1~INP5 ○ ○ 7.2.5 F106.0~F106.4 Axis moving direction signals MVD1~MVD5 ○ ○ 1.2.6 F108.0~F108.4 Mirror image check signals MMI1~MMI5 ○ ○ 1.2.7 F110.0~F110.4 Controlled axis detach status signals MDTCH1~MDTCH5 ○ ○ 1.2.5

F112.0~F112.4 Distribution completion signals(PMC axis control)

EADEN1~EADEN5 ○ ○ 16.1

F114.0~F114.4 Torque limit reached signals TRQL1~TRQL5 ○ ○ 15.3.3

F118.0~F118.4 Synchronous/composite/superimposed control under way signals

SYN1O~SYN5O ○ ○ 8.5,8.6

F120.0~F120.4 Reference position establishment signals

ZRF1~ZRF5 ○ ○ 4.1

F122.0~F122.3 High-speed skip status signals HDO0~HDO3 ○ ○ 15.3.2 F124.0~F124.4 +OT1~+OT5 ○ ○ 2.3.2 F126.0~F126.4

Overtravel alarm signals -OT1~-OT5 ○ ○ 2.3.2

F129.5 Override 0% signal(PMC axis control) EOV0 ○ ○ 16.1

F129.7 Controlled axis selection status signals(PMC axis control)

*EAXSL ○ ○ 16.1

F130.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPA ○ ○ 16.1

F130.1 Following zero checking signals(PMC axis control)

ECKZA ○ ○ 16.1

F130.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALA ○ ○ 16.1

F130.3 Auxiliary function executing signals(PMC axis control)

EDENA ○ ○ 16.1

F130.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGENA ○ ○ 16.1

F130.5 Positive-direction overtravel signals(PMC axis control)

EOTPA ○ ○ 16.1

F130.6 Negative-direction overtravel signals(PMC axis control)

EOTNA ○ ○ 16.1

F130.7 Axis control command read completion signals(PMC axis control)

EBSYA ○ ○ 16.1

F131.0 Auxiliary function strobe signals(PMC axis control)

EMFA ○ ○ 16.1

F131.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFA ○ ○ 16.1


- 1556 -



F131.2 Auxiliary function 2nd strobe signals (PMC axis control)

EMF2A ○ ○ 16.1

F131.3 Auxiliary function 3rd strobe signals (PMC axis control)

EMF3A ○ ○ 16.1

F132,F142 Auxiliary function code signals(PMC axis control)

EM11A~EM48A ○ ○ 16.1

F133.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPB ○ ○ 16.1


ECKZB ○ ○ 16.1

F133.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALB ○ ○ 16.1


EDENB ○ ○ 16.1

F133.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGENB ○ ○ 16.1


EOTPB ○ ○ 16.1


EOTNB ○ ○ 16.1


EBSYB ○ ○ 16.1


EMFB ○ ○ 16.1

F134.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFB ○ ○ 16.1


EMF2B ○ ○ 16.1


EMF3B ○ ○ 16.1


EM11B~EM48B ○ ○ 16.1

F136.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPC ○ ○ 16.1


ECKZC ○ ○ 16.1

F136.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALC ○ ○ 16.1


EDENC ○ ○ 16.1

F136.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGENC ○ ○ 16.1


EOTPC ○ ○ 16.1


EOTNC ○ ○ 16.1


EBSYC ○ ○ 16.1


EMFC ○ ○ 16.1

F137.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFC ○ ○ 16.1


EMF2C ○ ○ 16.1


EMF3C ○ ○ 16.1


EM11C~EM48C ○ ○ 16.1

F139.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPD ○ ○ 16.1


ECKZD ○ ○ 16.1

F139.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALD ○ ○ 16.1


- 1557 -




EDEND ○ ○ 16.1

F139.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGEND ○ ○ 16.1


EOTPD ○ ○ 16.1


EOTND ○ ○ 16.1


EBSYD ○ ○ 16.1


EMFD ○ ○ 16.1

F140.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFD ○ ○ 16.1


EMF2D ○ ○ 16.1


EMF3D ○ ○ 16.1


EM11D~EM48D ○ ○ 16.1

F154.0 Remaining tool count notification signal TLAL － ○ 11.4 F160,F161 Multi-spindle address P signals MSP00~MSP15 ○ ○ 10.12 F168.0 Alarm signals(serial spindle) ALMC ○ － 10.3 F168.1 Speed zero signals(serial spindle) SSTC ○ － 10.3 F168.2 Speed detection signals(serial spindle) SDTC ○ － 10.3


SARC ○ － 10.3

F168.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1C ○ － 10.3 F168.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2C ○ － 10.3 F168.6 Torque limit signals(serial spindle) TLMC ○ － 10.3


ORARC ○ － 10.3

F169.0 Power line switch signals(serial spindle) CHPC ○ － 10.3


CFINC ○ － 10.3

F169.2 Output switch signals(serial spindle) RCHPC ○ － 10.3


RCFNC ○ － 10.3


SLVSC ○ － 10.3


PORA2C ○ － 10.3


MORA1C ○ － 10.3


MORA2C ○ － 10.3


PC1DEC ○ － 10.3


INCSTC ○ － 10.3

F172.6 Absolute position detector battery voltage zero alarm signal

PBATZ ○ ○ 1.4.3

F172.7 Absolute position detector battery voltage low alarm signal

PBATL ○ ○ 1.4.3

F180.0~F180.4 Torque limit reach signals for reference position setting with mechanical stopper

CLRCH1~CLRCH5 ○ ○ 4.5


- 1558 -



F182.0~F182.4 Controlling signals(PMC axis control) EACNT1~EACNT5 ○ ○ 16.1

F184.0~F184.4 Unexpected disturbance torque detection signal

ABDT1~ABDT5 ○ ○ 2.9

F190 Torque control mode signal(PMC axis control)

TRQM1~TRQM8 ○ ○ 16.1

F200.0~F201.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O2~R12O2 ○ ○ 10.12 F202,F203 Actual spindle speed signals AR002~AR152 ○ ○ 10.9 F204.0~F205.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O3~R12O3 ○ ○ 10.12

F210.0~F210.4 Machine coordinate match state output signals

SYNMT1~SYNMT5 ○ ○ 1.6

F211.0~F211.4 Synchronization compensation enable state output signals

SYNOF1~SYNOF5 ○ ○ 1.6

F264.0~F265.0 Spindle warning detail signals 1 to 9 SPWRN1~SPWRN9 ○ ○ 10.3 F270.0~F271.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O4~R12O4 ○ ○ 10.12

F274.4 Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm signals (for each spindle)

CSFO1 ○ ○ 10.11.3

F288.0~F288.1 Spindle phase synchronous control signal (for each spindle)

FSPSY1~FSPSY2 ○ ○ 10.14

F289.0~F289.1 Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal (for each spindle)

FSPPH1~FSPPH2 ○ ○ 10.14

F295.6 Dual display forcible end status signal C2SENO ○ ○ 13.1.9 F295.7 Key control selection status signal CNCKYO ○ ○ 13.1.9

F298.0~F298.7 Trouble forecast signal (For the thermal simulation data)

TDSML1~TDSML8 ○ ○ 18.3

F299.0~F299.7 Trouble forecast signal (For the disturbance level)

TDFTR1~TDFTR8 ○ ○ 18.3

F317.0~F317.7 Machine operation menu select number notification signal

ESPM1~ESPM8 ○ ○ 13.4

F318.0~F319.1 Soft key number select state notification signal

ESF01~ESF10 ○ ○ 13.4

F341.0~F341.4 Synchronous master axis confirmation signals

SYCM1~SYCM5 ○ ○ 8.5

F342.0~F342.4 Synchronous slave axis confirmation signals

SYCS1~SYCS5 ○ ○ 8.5

F343.0~F343.4 Composite axis confirmation signals MIXO1~MIXO5 ○ ○ 8.5

F344.0~F344.4 Superimposed control master axis confirmation signals

OVMO1~OVMO5 ○ ○ 8.6

F345.0~F345.4 Superimposed control slave axis confirmation signals

OVSO1~OVSO5 ○ ○ 8.6

F346.0~F346.4 Parking axis confirmation signals SMPK1~SMPK5 ○ ○ 8.5

F358.0~F358.4 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset completion signals

WPSF1~WPSF5 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6

F400.1 Spindle unclamp signal SUCLPB ○ ○ 10.10 F401.1 Spindle clamp signal SCLPB ○ ○ 10.10 F402.1 Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOSB ○ ○ 10.10

F403.0 Signal for indicating a positional deviation error alarm for axis synchronous control

SYNER ○ ○ 1.6

F512.0 Macro call executing signal MCEXE ○ ○ 16.6 F512.1 Mode change request signal MCRQ ○ ○ 16.6 F512.2 Abnormal end signal MCSP ○ ○ 16.6


- 1559 -



F513.0 MD1R ○ ○ F513.1 MD2R ○ ○ F513.2 MD4R ○ ○ F513.5 DNCIR ○ ○ F513.7

Mode notification signal

ZRNR ○ ○

16.6

F514,F515 Call program confirmation signal MCEX1~MCEX16 ○ ○ 16.6 F520.0 Automatic data backup executing signal ATBK ○ ○ F521.0~F521.4 SV speed control mode signals SVREV1~SVREV5 ○ ○ 10.19 F522.0~F522.4 Spindle indexing signal for each axis SPP1~SPP5 ○ ○ 10.19 F531.3 MDI selection confirmation signal MMDISL ○ ○ 13.1.6 F532.0~F532.4 Axis synchronous control status signals SYNO1 to SYNO5 ○ ○ 1.6

B.DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C APPENDIX B-64303EN-1/02

- 1560 -

B DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C Appendix B, "Differences from Series 0i-C", consists of the following sections: B.1 SETTING UNIT..............................................................................................................................1561 B.2 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ..............................................................................1562 B.3 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM......................................................................................1563 B.4 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM................................................................................................1564 B.5 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.............................................................................................1565 B.6 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ...............................................................................1571 B.7 STORED STROKE CHECK ..........................................................................................................1572 B.8 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES)............................................................................1574 B.9 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION...............................................................1574 B.10 MANUAL HANDLE FEED...........................................................................................................1576 B.11 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ...........................................................................1577 B.12 RESET AND REWIND..................................................................................................................1580 B.13 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) ....................................................................1581 B.14 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF.........................................................................................1581 B.15 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION....................................................................................................1583 B.16 THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING CYCLE/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE

CANNED CUTTING CYCLE) (T SERIES)..................................................................................1583 B.17 HELICAL INTERPOLATION.......................................................................................................1584 B.18 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES)............................................................1585 B.19 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES)/AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL

(M SERIES)/AI CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES) .................................................................1587 B.20 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ...........................................................1590 B.21 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))........................................1591 B.22 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH

CONTROL)) ...................................................................................................................................1592 B.23 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) .............................................1596 B.24 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................................1598 B.25 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL....................................................................................1599 B.26 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL................................................................................1600 B.27 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES)..........................................................................................1601 B.28 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL ............................................................................................................1602 B.29 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL.......................................................................................................1603 B.30 TOOL FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................................................1604 B.31 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY...........................................................................................1606 B.32 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES)........................................................................................................1607 B.33 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION..................................1608 B.34 CUSTOM MACRO ........................................................................................................................1614 B.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................1616 B.36 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING .............................................................................................1617 B.37 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) .....1619 B.38 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE .....................................................................................................1620 B.39 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING (T SERIES).............................1621 B.40 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES).....................1625 B.41 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES) .........................................................1626 B.42 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES).........................................1627 B.43 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ............................................................................1627 B.44 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION ......1628 B.45 MEMORY PROTECTION SIGNAL FOR CNC PARAMETER ..................................................1629

B-64303EN-1/02 APPENDIX B.DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C

- 1561 -

B.46 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)......................................................................................................................1630

B.47 SKIP FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................1633 B.48 INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T SERIES) ..............................................1635 B.49 PMC AXIS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................1636 B.50 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT...........................................................................................................1642 B.51 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .................................................................................................1645 B.52 IN-POSITION CHECK ..................................................................................................................1645 B.53 DATA SERVER FUNCTION ........................................................................................................1646 B.54 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ................................................................................................1647 B.55 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10).......................................................................1647 B.56 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)...............................................................................1648

B.1 SETTING UNIT

B.1.1 Differences in Specifications

Function Explanation Diameter/radius specification in the move command for each axis

- Make a selection using bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006. Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 The move command for each axis specifies: 0: Radius. 1: Diameter. With Series 0i-C, in order for an axis whose diameter is specified to travel the specified distance, it is necessary not only to set 1 in bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 but also to make either of the following two changes: - Reduce the command multiplier (CMR) to half. (The detection unit does not need to

be changed.) - Reduce the detection unit to half, and double the flexible feed gear (DMR). With Series 0i-D, by contrast, just setting 1 in bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 causes the CNC to reduce the command pulses to half, eliminating the need to make the changes described above (when the detection unit is not changed). Note that, when the detection unit is reduced to half, both the CMR and DMR need to be doubled.

B.1.2 Differences in Signals None.

B.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display None.


- 1562 -

B.2 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION


Function Explanation Value of parameter No. 3621 for the setting of a rotary axis (type A)

0.0

45.0

90.0

135.0

180.0

225.0

270.0

315.0(68)(60)

(67)

(66)

(65)(64)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(+)

Reference position

Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by ○.

- Amount of movement per rotation: 360° - Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45° - Number of the compensation position of the reference position: 60 In the above case, the values of the parameters are as follows.

Parameter Series 0i-C Series 0i-D No. 3620: Number of the compensation position of the reference position

60 60

No. 3621: Smallest compensation position number 60 61 No. 3622: Largest compensation position number 68 68 No. 3623: Compensation magnification 1 1 No. 3624: Interval between compensation positions 45000 45000 No. 3625: Amount of movement per rotation 360000 360000

The value of parameter No. 3621 is as follows. Series 0i-C = Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620) Series 0i-D = Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620) + 1




- 1563 -

B.3 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Change in absolute position display when the workpiece zero point offset value is changed

- Make a selection using bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201.

Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201 When the workpiece zero point offset value is changed: 0: Changes the absolute position display

when the program executes the block that is buffered next.

1: Changes the absolute position display immediately.

In either case, the changed value does not take effect until the block that is buffered next.

- Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201 is not available. The tool always behaves as when AWK is set to 1.

B.3.2 Differences in Signals

Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals WPRST1 to WPRST5 <Gn358.0 to Gn358.4>

Not available. Available.

Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset completion signals WPSF1 to WPSF5 <Fn358.0 to Fn358.4>




- 1564 -

B.4 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Clearing of the local coordinate system after servo alarm cancellation

- The processing is determined by the settings of bit 5 (SNC) and bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. 1202.

Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. 1202 Upon reset, the local coordinate system is: 0: Not canceled. 1: Canceled. Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No. 1202 After servo alarm cancellation, the local coordinate system is: 0: Cleared. 1: Not cleared. NOTE When the RLC bit of the parameter is set to 1, the local coordinate system is cleared, even if the SNC bit of the parameter is set to 1.

- The processing is determined by the settings of bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201, bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. 1202, bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402, and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407. Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No. 1202 is not available.

Bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201 If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 0, the G code of group number 14 (workpiece coordinate system) is: 0: Placed in the reset state. 1: Not placed in the reset state. NOTE When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, the processing depends on the setting of bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407. Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. 1202 Upon reset, the local coordinate system is: 0: Not canceled. 1: Canceled. NOTE - When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 0

and bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1, the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

- When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1 and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407 is set to 0, the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 The reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop signal places the local coordinate system in: 0: Reset state. 1: Clear state. Bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407 If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, the G code of group number 14 (workpiece coordinate system) is: 0: Placed in the clear state. 1: Not placed in the clear state.


- 1565 -

M Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Operation with the local coordinate system setting (G52)

- Make a selection using bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202.

Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 1) If there are two or more blocks that are

not moved before G52 is specified during cutter compensation, or if G52 is specified after the cutter compensation mode is turned off, with the offset vector maintained, the local coordinate system setting is performed: 0: Without considering the cutter

compensation vector. 1: Considering the cutter

compensation vector. 2) When G52 is specified, the local

coordinate system setting is performed for: 0: All axes. 1: Only those axes whose command

addresses are found in the G52-specified block.

- Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 is not available. The tool always behaves as when G52 is set to 1.



B.5 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Function name - Quick synchronous control - Axis synchronous control


- 1566 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting to perform synchronous operation all the time

- Not available. - Depends on bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 for the slave axis. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 In axis synchronous control: 0: Synchronous operation is performed

when the axis synchronous control selection signal SYNCx or axis synchronous control manual feed selection signal SYNCJx for the slave axis is set to "1".

1: Synchronous operation is performed all the time. Synchronous operation is performed regardless of the setting of the SYNCx or SYNCJx signal.

Setting to move multiple slave axes in synchronism with the master axis

- Not available. - Available. This is possible by setting the same master axis number in parameter No. 8311 for the multiple slave axes.

Setting of the same name for the master and slave axes

- The same name cannot be set for the master and slave axes.

- The same name can be set for the master and slave axes. In that case, however, automatic operation cannot be performed in normal operation; only manual operation is allowed.

Setting of axes for which to perform quick synchronous control (axis synchronous control)

M - The master axis number set in

parameter No. 8311 must be smaller than the slave axis number.

T - The setting method of parameter No.

8311 is different from that used for the M series.

- The master axis number set in parameter No. 8311 may or may not be smaller than the slave axis number.

- The setting method of parameter No. 8311 for the M series of Series 0i-C is always used.

Synchronization error check based on positional difference

M - The servo positional difference

between the master and slave axes is monitored, and alarm PS0213 is issued if the difference exceeds the limit value set in parameter No. 8313 when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or the limit value set in parameter No. 8323 for the master axis when the number of synchronized axis pairs is two.

- The data range of parameter No. 8323

is as follows: [Data range] 0 to 32767

T - Not available.

- The servo positional difference between the master and slave axes is monitored, and alarm DS0001 is issued if the difference exceeds the limit value set in parameter No. 8323 for the slave axis. At the same time, the signal for indicating a positional difference error alarm for axis synchronous control SYNER<F403.0> is output. Parameter No. 8313 is not available. Regardless of the number of pairs, set the limit value in parameter No. 8323.




- 1567 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Synchronization error check based on machine coordinates

M - The machine coordinates of the master

and slave axes are compared and, if the difference is greater than the value set in parameter No. 8314 for the master axis, alarm SV0407 is issued and the motor is stopped immediately.



T - Not available.

- The machine coordinates of the master and slave axes are compared and, if the difference is greater than the value set in parameter No. 8314 for the slave axis, alarm SV0005 is issued and the motor is stopped immediately.


is as follows: [Data range] 0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)

Setting of synchronization establishment

M - Synchronization establishment is

enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8301 when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8303 for the master axis when the number of synchronized axis pairs is two.

T - Synchronization establishment is not

available.

- Synchronization establishment is enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8303 for the slave axis.(Bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8301 is not available. Regardless of the number of pairs, set 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8303.)

Timing of synchronization establishment

M - Synchronization establishment is

performed when: 1. Power is turned on when the absolute

position detector is used. 2. Emergency stop is canceled.


available.

- Synchronization establishment is performed when:

1. Power is turned on when the absolute position detector is used.

2. Manual reference position return operation is performed. 3. The state of servo position control is changed from off to on. (This occurs when emergency stop, servo alarm, servo off, etc. is canceled. Note, however, that synchronization establishment is not performed at the time of axis removal cancellation.)


- 1568 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Maximum compensation for synchronization

M - Set the value in parameter No. 8315

when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or in parameter No. 8325 for the master axis when the number of synchronized axis pairs is two. If the compensation amount exceeds the values set in the relevant parameter, alarm SV0410 occurs.

- The data unit and data range of

parameter Nos. 8315 and 8325 are as follows: [Data unit] Detection unit [Data range] 0 to 32767


available.

- Set the value in parameter No. 8325 for the slave axis. If the compensation amount exceeds the values set in this parameter, alarm SV0001 occurs. (Parameter No. 8315 is not available. Regardless of the number of pairs, set the value in parameter No. 8325.)

- The data unit and data range of

parameter No. 8325 are as follows: [Data unit] Machine unit [Data range] 0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)

Automatic setting for grid position matching

M - Enable automatic setting for grid

position matching by setting 1 in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8302 when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8303 when the number of synchronized axis pairs is two.

- Start automatic setting for grid position

matching by setting 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8302 when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or in bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 when the number of synchronized axis pairs is two.

T - Automatic setting for grid position

matching is not available.

- Set 1 in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8303 for the slave axis to enable automatic setting for grid position matching. (Bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8302 is not available. Regardless of the number of pairs, set the value in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8303.)

- Set 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No.

8303 for the slave axis to start automatic setting for grid position matching. (Bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8302 is not available. Regardless of the number of pairs, set the value in bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303.)

Difference between the master axis reference counter and slave axis reference counter obtained through automatic setting for grid positioning


when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or in parameter No. 8326 for the master axis.

T - Automatic setting for grid position

matching is not available.

- Set the value in parameter No. 8326 for the slave axis. (Parameter No. 8316 is not available. Regardless of the number of pairs, set the value in parameter No. 8326.)

Time from the servo preparation completion signal SA <F000.6> being set to 1 until torque difference alarm detection is started


when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or in parameter No. 8327 for the master axis when the number of synchronized axis pairs is two.

T - Torque difference alarm detection is

not available.

- Set the value in parameter No. 8327 for the slave axis. (Parameter No. 8317 is not available. Regardless of the number of pairs, set the value in parameter No. 8327.)


- 1569 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting to use the external machine coordinate system shift function for the slave axis

M - When 1 is set in bit 3 (SSE) of

parameter No. 8302, setting an external machine coordinate system shift for the master axis causes the slave axis to shift as well. This parameter is used for all the pairs.

T - Not available.

- Bit 3 (SSE) of parameter No. 8302 is not available. By setting 1 in bit 7 (SYE) of parameter No. 8304 for the slave axis, the slave axis is shifted as well when an external machine coordinate system shift is set for the corresponding master axis. This parameter is used individually for each slave axis.

Setting to prevent slave axis movement from being added to the actual feedrate display

M - Setting 1 in bit 7 (SMF) of parameter

No. 3105 prevents slave axis movement from being added to the actual feedrate display. This parameter is used for all the pairs.

T - Not available. Slave axis movement

is always added to the actual feedrate display.

- Bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No. 3105 is not available. Setting 0 in bit 2 (SAF) of parameter No. 8303 prevents slave axis movement from being added to the actual feedrate display. (Note that the meaning of the value is the opposite from bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No. 3105.) This parameter is used individually for each slave axis.

Change of the synchronization state during a program command

- Specify an M code that is not to be buffered. Using this M code, change the input signal - SYNCx<G138> or SYNCJx<G140> - from the PMC side.

- Specify an M code that changes the synchronization state (parameter No. 8337 or 8338). By changing the input signal - SYNCx<G138> or SYNCJx<G140> - from the PMC side using this M code, it is possible to change the synchronization state during a program command.

Parameter No. 8337 Specify an M code that changes synchronous operation to normal operation. Parameter No. 8338 Specify an M code that changes normal operation to synchronous operation.

Automatic slave axis parameter setting

M - This function is enabled by setting 1 in

bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for the master axis.

T - This function is enabled by setting 1 in

bit 4 (TRP) of parameter No. 12762 for the master axis.

- Bit 4 (TRP) of parameter No. 12762 is not available. This function is enabled by setting 1 in bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for the master and slave axes.

T

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of pairs for synchronous operation

- One pair (two pairs for the M series) - Two pairs (also two pairs for the M series)

Synchronous operation during manual operation

- Synchronous operation is not available in jog, handle, or manual incremental feed.

- Setting axis synchronous control manual feed selection signal SYNCJx to 1 enables synchronous operation even in jog, handle, or manual incremental feed.


- 1570 -

M

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Mirror image for the slave axis

- A mirror image cannot be applied to a slave axis during quick synchronous control. It can be applied only to the T series.

- By setting parameter No. 8312 for the slave axis, a mirror image can be applied to a slave axis during quick synchronous control.

Setting to cancel the check of positional difference between the master and slave axes during synchronization establishment

- Depends on bit 5 (SYE) of parameter No. 8301.

Bit 5 (SYE) of parameter No. 8301 During synchronization establishment, the positional difference limit is: 0: Checked. 1: Not checked.

- Not available. Therefore, bit 5 (SYE) of parameter No. 8301 is not available. Since the positional difference is always checked, parameter No. 8318 is not available, either.

Parameter No. 8318 Set the time from the synchronization establishment function outputting a compensation pulse to the slave axis until the check of the positional difference limit between the master and slave axes starts.


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Torque difference alarm detection disable signal

- Not available. - Available (NSYNCA<Gn059.7>). Setting this signal to 1 disables torque difference alarm detection.

Axis synchronous control signal

- Not available. - Available (SYNO1 <Fn532.0 to Fn532.4> to SYNO5 <Fn532.0 to Fn532.4>). This signal is output to the slave axis subject to axis synchronous control.

B.5.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display

Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Positional difference between the master and slave axes

- This item is displayed in diagnosis No. 540 for the master axis when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or in diagnosis No. 541 for the master axis when the number of synchronized axis pairs is two.

- This item is displayed in diagnosis No. 3500 for the slave axis. (Regardless of the number of pairs, the item is displayed in diagnosis No. 3500.)


- 1571 -

B.6 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Angular and perpendicular axes when an invalid value is set in parameter No. 8211 or 8212

Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Angular axis

Perpendicular axis Angular axis Perpendicular axis

M series

Y axis (2nd axis)

Z axis (3rd axis)

Y-axis of the basic three axes (axis with 2 set in parameter No. 1022)

Z-axis of the basic three axes (axis with 3 set in parameter No. 1022)

T series

X axis (1st axis)

Z axis (2nd axis)

X-axis of the basic three axes (axis with 1 set in parameter No. 1022)

Z-axis of the basic three axes (axis with 3 set in parameter No. 1022)

Reference position return completion signal ZP for the perpendicular axis moved with the angular axis <Fn094, Fn096, Fn098, Fn100>

- Select the signal using bit 3 (AZP) of parameter No. 8200. When the bit is set to 0, ZP is not set to "0". (The signal is not cleared.) When the bit is set to 1, ZP is set to "0". (The signal is cleared.)

- Bit 3 (AZP) of parameter No. 8200 is not available. ZP is always set to "0". (The signal is cleared.)

When an angular axis is specified individually in machine coordinate system selection (G53) during arbitrary angular axis control

- Select the perpendicular axis operation using bit 6 (A53) of parameter No. 8201. When the bit is set to 0, the perpendicular axis is also moved. When the bit is set to 1, only the angular axis is moved.

- Bit 6 (A53) of parameter No. 8201 is not available. Only the angular axis is always moved.

G30 command during arbitrary angular axis control

- Select the operation using bit 0 (A30) of parameter No. 8202. When the bit is set to 0, the operation is for the perpendicular coordinate system. When the bit is set to 1, the operation is for the angular coordinate system.

- Bit 0 (A30) of parameter No. 8202 is not available. The operation is always for the angular coordinate system.


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Reference position return completion signal ZP <Fn094, Fn096, Fn098, Fn100>

See the "Differences in Specifications" section.



- 1572 -

B.7 STORED STROKE CHECK


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - This function is always enabled for all

axes. - It is possible to select whether to

enable or disable the function on an axis-by-axis basis using bit 0 (DOT) of parameter No. 1311.

Bit 0 (DOT) of parameter No. 1311 The stored stroke limit check immediately following powering on is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. NOTE This function stores machine coordinates using software and therefore imposes a burden on the system. Disable the function for those axes that do not require it. Movements made while the power is off are not reflected on the machine coordinate system immediately after powering on.

Stored stroke check immediately following powering on

- Machine coordinates are set upon powering on.

Absolute and relative coordinates are not set. (They are set when the absolute position detector is provided.)

- Machine coordinates are set upon powering on. Absolute and relative coordinates are set based on these machine coordinates.

Y and J address specification using G22

T Not available.

M Not available.

- Available for both the T series and M series.

Overtravel alarm - Stored stoke check 2 does not support bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300. Therefore, if an interference alarm occurs, the tool stops after entering the prohibited area. This makes it necessary to make the prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.

- Stored stoke check 2 also supports bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300. Setting 1 in BFA allows the tool to stop before entering the prohibited area, thus eliminating the need to make the prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.

Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm occurs, if an interference alarm occurs with the inter-path interference check function (T series), or if an alarm occurs with chuck/tail stock barrier (T series), the tool stops: 0: After entering the prohibited area. 1: Before entering the prohibited area.


- 1573 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Operation continuation after automatic alarm cancellation when a soft OT1 alarm is issued during the execution of an absolute command in automatic operation

- When the operation is resumed, the tool moves the remaining travel distance of the block that caused the soft OT. Therefore, the program can be continued if the tool is moved through manual intervention beyond the remaining travel distance.

- When the operation is resumed, the tool moves toward the end point of the block that caused the soft OT, causing another soft OT and making it impossible to continue the program. For details, refer to "STORED STROKE CHECK 1" in "CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN).

M

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Block that judges the distance to the stored stroke limit in AI advanced preview control or AI contour control mode

- A selection can be made using bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055.

Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055 The distance to the stored stroke limit in AI advanced preview control or AI contour control mode is judged with respect to: 0: Axes specified in the current and next

blocks. 1: Axes specified in the current block.

- Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055 is not available.

The distance is always judged with respect to the axes specified in the current block.


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Stroke check 1 release signal RLSOT<Gn007.7>

T Not available.

M Available.

Available for both the T series and M series.

Overtravel alarm signal +OT1 to +OT5 <Fn124.0 to Fn124.4> -OT1 to -OT5 <Fn126.0 to Fn126.4>

T Not available.

M Available.

Available for both the T series and M series.



- 1574 -

B.8 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Overtravel alarm - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is

not supported. Therefore, if an interference alarm occurs, the tool stops after entering the prohibited area. This makes it necessary to make the prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.

- Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is supported. Setting 1 in BFA allows the tool to stop before entering the prohibited area, thus eliminating the need to make the prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.

Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 occurs, if an interference alarm occurs with the inter-path interference check function (T series), or if an alarm occurs with chuck/tail stock barrier (T series), the tool stops: 0: After entering the prohibited area. 1: Before entering the prohibited area.



B.9 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION


Differences common to advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, and AI contour control

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Parameters set by "acceleration/deceleration before interpolation" (machining parameter adjustment screen)

- The following parameters are set according to the precision level: [Parameter No. 1770] Maximum cutting feedrate in linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Parameter No. 1771] Time before the maximum cutting feedrate in linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1770) is reached

- The following parameters are set according to the precision level: [Parameter No. 1660] Maximum permissible cutting feedrate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation on each axis (Series 0i-D does not have parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771.)


- 1575 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Parameter 1 set by "permissible acceleration"(machining parameter adjustment screen)

- The following parameters are set according to the precision level: [Parameter No. 1730] Upper limit of the feedrate by arc radius-based feedrate clamp [Parameter No. 1731] Arc radius corresponding to the upper limit of the feedrate by arc radius-based feedrate clamp (parameter No. 1730)

- The following parameters are set according to the precision level: [Parameter No. 1735] Permissible acceleration in speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation (Series 0i-D does not have parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731. Also, "arc radius-based feedrate clamp" has been renamed "speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation".)

M

Differences regarding AI advanced preview control and AI contour control Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Parameter 2 set by "permissible acceleration" (machining parameter adjustment screen)

- The following parameters are set according to the precision level: [Parameter No. 1432] Maximum cutting feedrate [Parameter No. 1785] Time before the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1432) is reached (Set this to determine the permissible acceleration for acceleration-based feedrate clamp.)

- The following parameters are set according to the precision level: [Parameter No. 1737] Permissible acceleration for speed control with the acceleration on each axis (Series 0i-D does not have parameter No. 1785. Also, "acceleration-based feedrate clamp" has been renamed "speed control with the acceleration on each axis".)




- 1576 -

B.10 MANUAL HANDLE FEED


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D If manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified, whether to ignore or accumulate handle pulses exceeding the rapid traverse feedrate can be set as follows.

Handle pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate - Depends on bit 4 (HPF) of parameter

No. 7100. The amount of pulses to be accumulated is set in parameter No. 7117.

- Bit 4 (HPF) of parameter No. 7100 is not available. Whether to ignore or accumulate excess handle pulses is determined by the amount to be accumulated that is set in parameter No. 7117. [When parameter No. 7117 = 0] Ignored. [When parameter No. 7117 > 0] Accumulated in the CNC without being ignored.

Permissible amount of pulses for manual handle feed

- The value range of parameter No. 7117 is 0 to 99999999 (8 digits).

- The value range of parameter No. 7117 is 0 to 999999999 (9 digits).

- For parameter Nos. 7113, 7131, 7133, and 12350, magnification ranges from 1 to 127. For parameter Nos. 7114, 7132, 7134, and 12351, magnification ranges from 1 to 1000.

- For parameter No. 7113, 7114, 7131, 7132, 7133, 7134, 12350, and 12351, magnification ranges from 1 to 2000.

Parameter No. 7113 Magnification when manual handle feed amount selection signals MP1 = 0 and MP2 = 1


[When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 = 0] Magnification common to all the generators in the path

[When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 = 1] Magnification used by the first generator in the path



When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, the magnification used by the second generator in the path applies. Parameter No. 7133 Magnification when manual handle feed amount selection signals MP31 = 0 and MP32 = 1


When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, the magnification used by the third generator in the path applies.

Value range of the magnification parameter for manual handle feed

Parameter No. 12350 Magnification when per-axis manual handle feed amount selection signals MP1 = 0 and MP2 = 1

Parameter No. 12351 Magnification when per-axis manual handle feed amount selection signals MP1 = 1 and MP2 = 1


- 1577 -

T Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Number of manual pulse generators used

- Set the value in parameter No. 7110. - Parameter No. 7110 is not available. Up to two generators or three generators (an optional function for 0i-TD) can be used without setting the parameter.

M

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of manual pulse generators used

- Set the value in parameter No. 7110. - Parameter No. 7110 is not available. Up to two generators can be used without setting the parameter.



B.11 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Manual reference position return is performed when automatic operation is halted (feed hold) and when any of the following conditions is met: <Conditions> (1) Travel distance is remaining. (2) An auxiliary function (M, S, T, or B function) is being executed. (3) A dwell, canned cycle, or other cycle is in progress.

Conditions for performing manual reference position return during feed hold

- Depends on bit 2 (OZR) of parameter No. 1800. [When OZR = 0] Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual reference position return is not performed. [When OZR = 1] Manual reference position return is performed without issuing an alarm.

- Bit 2 (OZR) of parameter No. 1800 is not available. Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual reference position return is not performed.

When inch/metric switch is done

- The reference position is lost. (The reference position is not established.)

- The reference position is not lost. (The reference position remains established.)

Reference position setting without dogs for all axes

- Set 1 in bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1002.

- Bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1002 is not available. Reference position setting without dogs (bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005) is set for all axes.


- 1578 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Function that performs reference position setting without dogs two or more times when the reference position is not established in absolute position detection

- Not available. - Depends on bit 4 (GRD) of parameter No. 1007.

Bit 4 (GRD) of parameter No. 1007 For the axis on which absolute values are detected, when correspondence between the machine position and the position by the absolute position detector is not completed, the reference position setting without dogs is: 0: Not performed two or more times. 1: Performed two or more times.

Behavior when manual reference position return is started on a rotation axis with the deceleration dog pressed before a reference position is established

T - [When bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No.

1007 = 0] Movement is made at the rapid traverse feedrate until the grid is established. If the deceleration dog is released before the grid is established, one revolution is made at the rapid traverse feedrate, thus establishing the grid. Pressing the deceleration dog again establishes the reference position. [When bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 = 1] Movement is made at the reference position return feedrate FL even if the grid is not established. Releasing the deceleration dog before the grid is established causes alarm PS0090.

M - Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of

parameter No. 1007. Movement is made at the reference position return feedrate FL even if the grid is not established. Releasing the deceleration dog before the grid is established causes alarm PS0090.

- [Rotation axis type = A and bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 = 0] Movement is made at the reference position return feedrate FL even if the grid is not established. Releasing the deceleration dog before the grid is established causes alarm PS0090. [Rotation axis type = A and bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 = 1] Movement is made at the rapid traverse feedrate until the grid is established. If the deceleration dog is released before the grid is established, one revolution is made at the rapid traverse feedrate, thus establishing the grid. Pressing the deceleration dog again establishes the reference position. [Rotation axis type = B] Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007. Movement is made at the reference position return feedrate FL even if the grid is not established. Releasing the deceleration dog before the grid is established causes alarm PS0090.

Reference position shift function

- Available only for the M series in Series 0i-C and earlier.

- Available for all series in Series 0i-D.

Reference position shift function setting

- The function is enabled for all axes by setting 1 in bit 2 (SFD) of parameter No. 1002.

- Bit 2 (SFD) of parameter No. 1002 is not available. Set bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 for each axis.

Setting of whether to preset the coordinate system upon high-speed manual reference position return

- Not available. The coordinate system is not preset.

- Depends on bit 1 (HZP) of parameter No. 1206.

Bit 1 (HZP) of parameter No.1206 Upon high-speed manual reference position return, the coordinate system is: 0: Preset. 1: Not preset (FS0i-C compatible

specification).


- 1579 -

M

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D G28/G30 command in the coordinate system rotation, scaling, or programmable mirror image mode

- Not available. Cancel the mode before executing the command.

- The command can be executed only when all of the conditions described below are met. Otherwise, alarm PS0412 occurs.

<Conditions> [Conditions required before specifying the command] (1) An absolute command is specified for

the target axis of coordinate system rotation, scaling, or programmable mirror image.

(2) Tool length compensation has not been performed for the target axis of coordinate system rotation, scaling, or programmable mirror image when it is moved by reference position return.

(3) Tool length compensation has been canceled.

[Conditions required when specifying the command]

(4) In an incremental command, the travel distance of the middle point is 0.

[Conditions required after specifying the command]

(5) The first move command specified for the target axis of coordinate system rotation, scaling, or programmable mirror image is an absolute command.




- 1580 -

B.12 RESET AND REWIND


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - If reset occurs during the execution of a block, the states of the modal G codes and

modal addresses (N, F, S, T, M, etc.) specified in that block are handled as follows. Modal data when reset during the execution of a block Maintained. Not maintained. The states return to

those of the modal data specified in the preceding blocks. (The modal data is updated after the specified block is fully executed.) Example) If reset occurs before positioning is completed in the N2 block in the program shown below, the T code and offset return to the data of the preceding tool (T0101) data. N1 G00 X120. Z0. T0101 ; ; N2 G00 X180. Z20. T0202 ; ;

Information in a block that is pre-read when a reset is made during an automatic operation (contents of the buffer)

- The information in the block may or may not be held depending on whether MDI mode is in progress. In MDI mode

The information in the block is held.

In modes other than MDI mode The information in the block is not held.

- The information in the block is not held regardless whether MDI mode is in progress.




- 1581 -

B.13 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES)

M


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D If positioning of linear interpolation type is used (1 is set in bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401), and if the state of mirror image when a single direction positioning block is looked ahead differs from the state of mirror image when the execution of the block is started, the following alarms are issued, respectively.

Behavior when linear interpolation type positioning is used with mirror image

- Alarm PS5254 - Alarm DS0025



B.14 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - If tool compensation is automatically changed when the manual absolute signal

*ABSM(Gn006.2) is set to 1, absolute coordinates are handled as follows. Absolute coordinates during automatic tool compensation change Absolute coordinates are not changed. Absolute coordinates are changed

according to the amount of tool compensation resulting from the coordinate shift.

Operation at manual absolute on

- When the block intervened manually ends, the tool is at the position which shifts by manual intervention. (Fig.1) (Even incremental command and absolute command, the result is the same)

- In case of incremental command and bit 1 (ABS) of parameter No. 7001 is set to 0, when the block intervened manually ends, the tool is at the position which shifts by manual intervention. (Fig.1)

- In case of absolute command or bit 1 (ABS) of parameter No. 7001 is set to 1, when the block intervened manually ends, the tool is at the programmed position. (Fig.2)


- 1582 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D



next block

programmed path

block intervened manually

feed hold

manual intervention

restart

manual intervention amount

After restarting operation, the tool moves the block of the remainder in parallel to programmed path.

The tool returns to the end point of next block by operating the next block.

Fig. 1

next block

programmed path

block intervened manually

feed hold

manual intervention restart

After restarting operation, the tool moves to the end point of the block intervened manually.

The tool moves the programmed path.

Fig. 2


- 1583 -

B.15 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D If the difference between the radius values of the start point and end point of an arc is greater than the value set in parameter No. 3410, alarm PS0020 is issued. If the difference is smaller (the end point is not on the arc), circular interpolation is performed as follows.

Interpolation method when the arc end point is not on the arc

- Circular interpolation is performed using the radius value of the start point and, when an axis reaches the end point, it is moved linearly.

Parameter No. 3410 In a circular interpolation command, set the limit allowed for the difference between the radius values of the start point and end point.

- Helical interpolation is performed as shown in the figure below.

γe γ(t)

γs

Start

point中心

End point

θ(t)θ

Start point

End point

Center θ θ

γs

γe

Radius

θts)e(s(t) )(θγγ

γγ−

+=

In other words, the radius of the arc moves linearly according to the center angle θ(t). Specifying an arc where the arc radius of the start point differs from that of the end point enables helical interpolation. When performing helical interpolation, set a large value in parameter No. 3410 that specifies the limit for the arc radius difference.



B.16 THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING CYCLE/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CUTTING CYCLE) (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Return position after chamfering in multiple repetitive threading cycle (G76)

- The tool returns to the start point of the current cycle. For example, if it is the nth cycle, the tool returns to the position where the nth cut has been made.

- The tool returns to the start point of the threading cycle. This means that the tool returns to the position where it was before cutting, no matter how many cycles it has undergone.


- 1584 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Retraction after chamfering

- The specifications are as follows. [Acceleration/deceleration type] Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for threading is used. [Time constant] The time constant for threading (parameter No. 1626) is used. [Feedrate] The feedrate set in parameter No. 1466 is used.

- Depends on bit 0 (CFR) of parameter No. 1611. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 0 (CFR) of parameter No. 1611 In threading cycle G92 or G76, retraction after threading uses: 0: Type of acceleration/deceleration after

interpolation for threading, together with the threading time constant (parameter No.1626) and the feedrate set in parameter No.1466.

1: Type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for rapid traverse, together with the rapid traverse time constant and the rapid traverse rate.



B.17 HELICAL INTERPOLATION


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of the feedrate

- Specify the feedrate along a circular arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the linear axis is as follows:

Length of linear axis F × Length of circular arc

- Make a selection using bit 5 (HTG) of parameter No. 1403. 0: Same as left. 1: Specify a feedrate along the tool path including the linear axis. Therefore, the tangential velocity of the arc is expressed as follows:

Length of arc

F× (Length of arc)2＋(Length of linear axis)2 The velocity along the linear axis is expressed as follows:

Length of linear axis F× (Length of arc)2＋(Length of linear axis)2 For details, refer to "HELICAL INTERPOLATION" in "CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN).


- 1585 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Helical cutting feedrate clamp

- Make a selection using bit 0 (HFC) of parameter No. 1404. 0: The feedrate of the arc and

linear axes is clamped by parameter No. 1422 or No.1430.

1: The combined feedrate along the tool path including the linear axis is clamped by parameter No. 1422.

- Bit 0 (HFC) of parameter No. 1404 is not available. The feedrate of the arc and linear axes is clamped by parameter No. 1430.



B.18 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Coordinate system shift during polar coordinate interpolation (polar coordinate interpolation shift function)

- Not available. - Enable or disable the function using bit 2 (PLS) of parameter No. 5450.

Bit 2 (PLS) of parameter No. 5450 The polar coordinate interpolation shift function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. This enables machining using the workpiece coordinate system with a desired point which is not the center of the rotation axis set as the origin of the coordinate system in polar coordinate interpolation. For details, refer to "POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION" in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL (LATHE SYSTEM)" (B-64304EN-1).


- 1586 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - If the first axis of the plane is in a hypothetical axis direction relative to the center of

the rotation axis, i.e. the center of the rotation axis is not on the X axis, the hypothetical axis direction compensation function in polar coordinate interpolation mode performs polar coordinate interpolation while taking the error into consideration. Set the error value in parameter No. 5464.

(X,C)

Hypothetical axis (C axis)

Hypothetical axis direction error (P)

Center of the rotation axis

X axis

Rotation axis

(X,C) X-C plane point (The center of the rotation axis is the origin ofthe X-C plane.)

X X axis coordinate value in the X-C plane C Hypothetical axis coordinate value in the X-C plane P Hypothetical axis direction error

(Set the value in parameter No. 5464.)

Hypothetical axis direction compensation during polar coordinate interpolation

- This function is not available. - This function is available.

Maximum cutting feedrate and feedrate clamp during polar coordinate interpolation

- Set the value in parameter No. 5462. When the value is 0, the feedrate is

clamped by parameter No. 1422.

- Parameter No. 5462 is not available. Set the value in parameter No. 1430.

Automatic override and automatic feedrate clamp during polar coordinate interpolation

- Enable or disable the function using bit 1 (AFC) of parameter No. 5450.

Bit 1 (AFC) of parameter No. 5450 In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, automatic override and automatic feedrate clamp are: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed.

- Bit 1 (AFC) of parameter No. 5450 is not available. Automatic override and automatic feedrate clamp are always performed.




- 1587 -

B.19 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES)/AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES)/AI CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES)


Differences common to advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, and AI contour control

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Some function names have been changed as follows. - Automatic corner deceleration - Speed control based on the feedrate

difference on each axis

Function name

- Arc radius-based feedrate clamp - Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation

Setting to enable bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse

- Setting 1 in bit 6 (RBL) of parameter No. 1603 enables bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.

- Bit 6 (RBL) of parameter No. 1603 is not available. Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse is enabled by setting the time constant of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in rapid traverse in parameter No. 1621 or the acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in rapid traverse in parameter No. 1672.

Selection of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in rapid traverse or acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in rapid traverse

- The combination of bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 7054 and bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 determines acceleration/deceleration before interpolation or acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.

- Bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 7054 is not available. The combination of bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No. 19501 and bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 determines acceleration/deceleration before interpolation or acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. For details, refer to "PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-64310EN).

Setting of acceleration for look-ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

- Set acceleration by specifying the maximum cutting feedrate for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in parameter No. 1770 and the time to elapse before reaching the maximum cutting feedrate for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in parameter No. 1771.

- Parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771 are not available. In parameter No. 1660, set the maximum permissible cutting feedrate for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis.


- 1588 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Time constant setting of linear/bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed common to all axes

- Set the value in parameter No. 1768. - Parameter No. 1768 is not available. Set the time constant for each axis in parameter No. 1769.

Time constant setting of exponential acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis

- Set the value in parameter No. 1762. (To set the value for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, use parameter No. 1769.)

- Parameter No. 1762 is not available. Set the value in parameter No. 1769.(Use parameter No. 1769 for any acceleration/deceleration type - linear, bell-shaped, or exponential.)

Automatic corner deceleration based on angle difference

- Setting 0 in bit 4 (CSD) of parameter No. 1602 enables the function. Set the lower limit speed in parameter No. 1777 and the critical angle between the two blocks in parameter No. 1779.

- Automatic corner deceleration based on angle difference is not available. Therefore, bit 4 (CSD) of parameter No. 1602 and parameter Nos. 1777 and 1779 are not available.

Permissible speed difference common to all axes for automatic corner deceleration based on angle difference (speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis)

- Set the value in parameter No. 1780. - Parameter No. 1780 is not available. Set the permissible speed difference for each axis in parameter No. 1783.

Setting of arc radius-based feedrate clamp (speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation)

- Set the upper limit of the feedrate and the corresponding arc radius value in parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731, respectively.

- Parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731 are not available. Set the permissible acceleration for each axis in parameter No. 1735.

Setting of the maximum cutting feedrate common to all axes

- Set the value in parameter No. 1431. - Parameter No. 1431 is not available. Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in parameter No. 1432.

Rapid traverse block overlap

- Disabled in the advanced preview control (T series), AI advanced preview control (M series), or AI contour control (M series) mode.

- Enabled only when acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used in the advanced preview control (T series), AI advanced preview control (M series), or AI contour control (M series) mode.

M

Differences regarding AI advanced preview control and AI contour control Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Some function names have been changed as follows. Function name - Acceleration-based feedrate clamp - Speed control with the acceleration on

each axis Setting of acceleration-based feedrate clamp (speed control with the acceleration on each axis)

- Set the permissible acceleration by specifying the time to elapse before reaching the maximum cutting feedrate in parameter No. 1785. The maximum cutting feedrate set in parameter No. 1432 is used.

- Parameter No. 1785 is not available. Set the permissible acceleration for each axis in parameter No. 1737.


- 1589 -

Differences regarding AI contour control Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse in the AI contour control mode

- Set parameter Nos. 1773 and 1774. If these parameters are not set, parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621 are used.

- Parameter Nos. 1773 and 1774 are not available. In the case of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in rapid traverse, set parameter Nos. 1660 and 1672. In the case of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in rapid traverse, set parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621.

Setting to enable look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

- Setting 1 in bit 7 (BEL) of parameter No. 1603 enables bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.

- Bit 7 (BEL) of parameter No. 1603 is not available. Setting the acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in parameter No. 1772 enables bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.




- 1590 -

B.20 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))

T

B.20.1 Differences in Specifications None.


Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D No-wait signal

Waiting signal

The signals are common to all paths. No-wait signal NOWT<G063.1> Waiting signal WATO<F063.6>

- By using bit 0 (MWT) of parameter No. 8103, it is possible to select the path individual signal interface or path common signal interface.

Bit 0 (MWT) of parameter No. 8103 As the waiting M code interface: 0: The path individual signal interface is

used. In this case, the signals are set as follows. No-wait signal NMWT<Gn063.7> Waiting signal WATO<F063.6>

1: The path common signal interface is used. In this case, the signals are set as follows. No-wait signal NMWT<Gn063.1> Waiting signal WATO<F063.6>

When 1 is set in bit 0 (MWT) of parameter No. 8103, the same specifications as Series 0i-TTC apply. For details, refer to Chapter 8, "WAITING M CODES", in "CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN-1).



- 1591 -

B.21 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Interference alarm - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is

not supported. Therefore, if an interference alarm occurs, the tool stops after entering the prohibited area. This makes it necessary to make the prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.

- Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is supported. Setting 1 in BFA allows the tool to stop before entering the prohibited area, thus eliminating the need to make the prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.

Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm occurs, if an interference alarm occurs with the inter-path interference check function (T series), or if an alarm occurs with chuck/tail stock barrier (T series), the tool stops: 0: After entering the prohibited area. 1: Before entering the prohibited area.




- 1592 -

B.22 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))

T


Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Axis synchronous control (Series 0i-C: Quick synchronous control)

- Adding synchronous or composite control disables quick synchronous control.

- Adding synchronous or composite control does not disable quick synchronous control.

- The master and slave axes used for axis synchronous control cannot be used for synchronous control.

- Composite control is available for the master axis used for axis synchronous control, while it is not available for the slave axis.

Feed forward function and cutting/rapid traverse change function for synchronous and composite axes of another path

- Make a selection using bit 1 (SVF) of parameter No. 8165.

Bit 1 (SVF) of parameter No. 8165 In synchronous or composite control, the feed forward function and cutting/rapid traverse change function for synchronous and composite axes of another path are:


- Bit 1 (SVF) of parameter No. 8165 is not available. The tool always behaves as when SVF is set to 1.

(The feed forward function and cutting/rapid traverse change function are enabled for synchronous and composite axes of another path.)

Move command when neither synchronous nor composite control is in effect

- Not prohibited. - Make a selection using bit 7 (NUMx) of parameter No. 8163.

Bit 7 (NUMx) of parameter No. 8163 When neither synchronous nor composite control is in effect, specifying the move command for an axis that is set with this parameter is: 0: Not prohibited. 1: Prohibited. (Alarm PS0353 is issued.)


- 1593 -

Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Behavior when an alarm is issued in relation to synchronous or composite control

- Both paths are placed in the feed hold state.

- Make a selection using bit 0 (MPA) of parameter No. 8168.

Bit 0 (MPA) of parameter No. 8168 If an alarm is issued in relation to synchronous, composite, or superposition control: 0: Both paths are placed in the feed hold

state. 1: Only the path including axes related to

synchronous, composite, or superposition control is placed in the feed hold state. For example, when synchronous control is exerted in one path, only the path that caused the alarm is placed in the feed hold state. The handling of the other path depends on the setting of bit 1 (IAL) of parameter No. 8100.

Behavior when overtravel occurs for an axis under synchronous or composite control

- The synchronous or composite control mode is canceled.

- Make a selection using bit 5 (NCS) of parameter No. 8160.

Bit 5 (NCSx) of parameter No. 8160 If overtravel occurs for an axis under synchronous, composite, or superposition control, the synchronous, composite, or superposition control mode is: 0: Canceled. 1: Not canceled.

Switch between synchronous control axis selection signal and composite control axis selection signal during automatic operation

- The signals can be switched at any time.

- Use an M code command. Specify a waiting M code (M code without buffering) before and after the M code. When synchronous or composite control is exerted in one path, specify an M or other code without buffering before and after the M code that starts or cancels the control so as to prohibit the look-ahead operation.

Synchronous control

Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D G28 when the master axis is parking

- When the reference position of the slave axis is not established, the machine coordinates are moved to the coordinates set in parameter No. 1240, completing the reference position return.

- When the reference position of the slave axis is not established, alarm PS0354 occurs.

Update of the workpiece coordinates and relative coordinates of the slave axis under synchronous control

- Make a selection using bit 4 (SPN) of parameter No. 8164.

Bit 4 (SPN) of parameter No. 8164 The workpiece coordinates and relative coordinates of the slave axis under synchronous control are: 0: Updated. 1: Not updated.

- Bit 4 (SPN) of parameter No. 8164 is not available. The tool always behaves as when SPNx is set to 0 (coordinates are updated).


- 1594 -

Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Out-of-synchronization detection when synchronous control is exerted in one path (1 is set in bit 1 (SER) of parameter No. 8162)

- Out-of-synchronization detection is not performed.

- Out-of-synchronization detection is performed.

Manual handle interruption amount or mirror image mode for the master axis

- Always reflected on the slave axis. - Select whether to reflect the amount or mode on the slave axis, using bit 5 (SMIx) of parameter No. 8163.

Bit 5 (SMIx) of parameter No. 8163 During synchronous control, the manual handle interruption amount or mirror image mode for the master axis is: 0: Reflected on the slave axis. 1: Not reflected on the slave axis.

Automatic setting of a workpiece coordinate system for the slave axis at the end of synchronous control

- A workpiece coordinate system is not automatically set for the slave axis.

- Make a selection using bit 6 (SPVx) of parameter No. 8167.

Bit 6 (SPVx) of parameter No. 8167 At the end of synchronous control, a workpiece coordinate system for the slave axis is: 0: Not automatically set. 1: Automatically set.

The workpiece coordinate system to be set is determined by the machine coordinate values and the workpiece coordinate values of the reference points of the individual axes defined by parameter No. 1250.

Composite control

Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D G28 during composite control

- When the reference position of the composite axis of the other path is not established, the machine coordinates are moved to the coordinates set in parameter No. 1240, completing the reference position return.

- When the reference position of the composite axis of the other path is not established, alarm PS0359 occurs.

Composite control for the Cs contour axis reference position return command when composite control is exerted for Cs contour axes

- Select whether to use the composite function of the Cs contour axis reference position return command, by using bit 1 (CZMx) of parameter No. 8161.

Bit 1 (CZMx) of parameter No. 8161 When composite control is exerted for Cs contour axes, the composite control function for the Cs contour axis reference position return command is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.

- Bit 1 (CZMx) of parameter No. 8161 is not available.

The tool always behaves as when CZMx is set to 1 (composite control is used).


- 1595 -

Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Manual handle interruption for composite axes

- Disabled. - Enable or disable the interruption using bit 6 (MMIx) of parameter No. 8163.

Bit 6 (MMIx) of parameter No. 8163 During composite control, manual handle interruption for composite axes is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.

Current position display during composite control (absolute/relative coordinates)

- Make a selection using bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163.

Bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163. During composite control, the current position display (absolute/relative coordinates) shows: 0: Coordinate values of the local path. 1: Coordinate values of the mate path.

- Bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163 is not available. The coordinate values of the local path are always displayed.

G53 during composite control

- Make a selection using bit 2 (CPMx) of parameter No. 8165.

Bit 2 (CPMx) of parameter No. 8165. During composite control, machine coordinate system selection (G53) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

(The travel distance is calculated so that the machine moves according to the machine coordinate system selection signal of the mate path.)

- Bit 2 (CPMx) of parameter No. 8165 is not available. The tool always behaves as when CPMx is set to 1. (G53 is enabled.)

Constant acceleration/deceleration of acceleration time for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for an axis subject to composite control (bit 4 (RPT) of parameter No. 1603)

- Make a selection using bit 0 (NLSx) of parameter No. 8167.

Bit 0 (NLSx) of parameter No. 8167 Constant acceleration/deceleration of acceleration time for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for an axis subject to composite control (bit 4 (RPT) of parameter No. 1603) is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled.

- Bit 0 (NLSx) of parameter No. 8167 is not available. The tool always behaves as when NLSx is set to 1. (Constant acceleration/deceleration of acceleration time is enabled.)

Machine coordinates during composite control

- The coordinate values of the local path are displayed.

- Make a selection using bit 0 (MDMx) of parameter No. 8169.

Bit 0 (MDMx) of parameter No. 8169 The machine coordinates displayed during composite control are: 0: Coordinate values of the local path. 1: Machine coordinate values of the mate

path. Reading of machine coordinates (#5021 and later) during composite control

- The coordinate values of the local path are read.

- Make a selection using bit 1 (MVMx) of parameter No. 8169.

Bit 1 (MVMx) of parameter No. 8169 The machine coordinates (#5021 and later) that are read during composite control are: 0: Machine coordinate values of the local

path. 1: Machine coordinate values of the mate

path.


- 1596 -

Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Rapid traverse feedrate during composite control

- The rapid traverse feedrate of the specified axis is used.

- Make a selection using bit 2 (MRFx) of parameter No. 8169.

Bit 2 (MRFx) of parameter No. 8169 The rapid traverse feedrate used during composite control is: 0: Rapid traverse feedrate of the

specified axis. 1: Rapid traverse feedrate of the moving

axis.


Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Synchronous or composite control initiated by the DI signal for an axis under synchronous or composite control based on a program command

P/S alarm No. 225 is issued. No alarm is issued. DI signal-based control is also possible.


Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Synchronization error value display for each axis

- Displayed in parameter No. 8182. - Displayed in diagnosis No. 3502.

B.23 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))

T


Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Axis synchronous control (Series 0i: Quick synchronous control)

- Adding superimposed control disables quick synchronous control.

- Adding superimposed control does not disable quick synchronous control.

- The same axis can be used as the master axis for axis synchronous control and the master axis for superimposed control.


- 1597 -

Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Feed hold when an alarm occurs with respect to superimposed control

- Both paths are placed in the feed hold state.

- Make a selection using bit 0 (MPA) of parameter No. 8168.

Bit 0 (MPA) of parameter No. 8168 The axis movement in-progress signal <Fn102> or axis movement direction signal <Fn106> for the slave axis during superimposed control: 0: Places both paths in the feed hold

state. 1: Places only the path including axes

related to superposition control in the feed hold state. (For example, when superposition control is exerted in one path, only the path that caused the alarm is placed in the feed hold state.)

Reference position return of the slave axis during superimposed control

- Not available. - Not available. Alarm PS0363 occurs.

Multiple slave axes - Superimposed control cannot be exerted when there are multiple slave axes and one master axis.

- Superimposed control can be exerted when there are multiple slave axes and one master axis.

Axis movement in-progress signal and axis movement direction signal for the slave axis during superimposed control

- State output is performed according to the result of adding superimposed move pulses.

- Make a selection using bit 4 (AXS) of parameter No. 8160.

Bit 4 (AXS) of parameter No. 8160 The axis movement in-progress signal <Fn102> or axis movement direction signal <Fn106> for the slave axis during superimposed control: 0: Performs state output according to the

result of adding superimposed move pulses.

1: Performs state output according to the result of moving the individual axes, regardless of superimposed move pulses.

Axis overtravel during superimposed control

- The superimposed control mode is canceled.

- Make a selection using bit 5 (NCS) of parameter No. 8160.

Bit 5 (NCS) of parameter No. 8160 If overtravel occurs for an axis under synchronous, composite, or superposition control, the synchronous, composite, or superposition control mode is: 0: Canceled. 1: Not canceled.

Switch between superimposed control axis selection signals during automatic operation

- The signals can be switched at any time. Note that both the master and slave axes must be stopped.

- Use an M code command. Specify a waiting M code (M code without buffering) before and after the M code. When superimposed control is exerted in one path, specify an M or other code without buffering before and after the M code that starts or cancels the control so as to prohibit the look-ahead operation.


- 1598 -


Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Superimposed control initiated by the DI signal for an axis under superimposed control based on a program command

P/S alarm No. 225 is issued. No alarm is issued. DI signal-based control is also possible.


B.24 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION



Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D 2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN

- The signal address for T series is different from that for M series.

T BFIN<Gn005.4>

M BFIN<Gn005.7>

- The following signal address is used for both T series and M series:

BFIN<Gn005.7>

2nd auxiliary function strobe signal BF

- The signal address for T series is different from that for M series.

T BF<Fn007.4>

M BF<Fn007.7>

- The following signal address is used for both T series and M series:

BF<Fn007.7>



- 1599 -

B.25 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - When one serial spindle and one analog spindle are simultaneously controlled in one

path (serial/analog spindle control), the spindle number of the analog spindle is as follows.

Spindle number of the analog spindle

Third spindle Second spindle For details about the parameters and other settings, refer to "SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CNOTROL" in "CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN-1).




- 1600 -

B.26 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - This is an optional function for the T

series. It is not available with the M series.

- This is a basic function for both M series and T series. It can be used by enabling constant surface speed control (setting 1 in bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133) and setting 1 in bit 2 (PCL) of parameter No. 1405.

Constant surface speed control with no position coder

- Using bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. 1407, select whether to enable or disable the axis feedrate clamp in feed per revolution when the spindle speed is clamped by the maximum spindle speed set in parameter No. 3772.

Bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. 1407 In constant surface speed control with no position coder, when the spindle speed is clamped by the maximum spindle speed parameter, the axis feedrate in feed per revolution is: 0: Not clamped. 1: Clamped. When 1 is set in this parameter, select the spindle to be used for feed per revolution by using the position coder selection signal. (To use the position coder selection signal requires enabling multi-spindle control.)

- Bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. 1407 is not available. The axis feedrate is always clamped. Using the position coder selection signal, select the spindle to be used for feed per revolution. (To use the position coder selection signal requires enabling multi-spindle control.)

M The M series does not support the multi-spindle control function. Therefore, the second spindle cannot be used for feed per revolution.




- 1601 -

B.27 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Display unit of machine coordinates on the spindle positioning axis

- Pulses - Make a selection using bit 0 (DMD) of parameter No. 4959.

Bit 0 (DMD) of parameter No. 4959 A machine coordinate on the spindle positioning axis is displayed in: 0: Degrees. 1: Pulses.

Spindle positioning using the second spindle

- Not available. - Spindle positioning using the second spindle is possible when multi-spindle control is enabled.

Number of M codes for specifying the spindle positioning angle

- Make a selection using bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950.

Bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950 Select the specification of spindle positioning. (Bit) 0: Standard specification. 1: Extended specification. When the extended specification is selected, the number of M codes for specifying the spindle positioning angle can be changed from 6 to any number in the range of 1 to 255, depending on the setting of parameter No. 4964.

- Regardless of the setting of bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950, the setting of parameter No. 4964 takes effect.

Rapid traverse rate unit for spindle positioning

- Selecting the extended specification by setting 1 in bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950 extends the upper limit of the rapid traverse rate for spindle positioning from 240000 to 269000 (unit: 10 degrees/min).

- Make a selection using bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950.

Bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950 Select the rapid traverse rate unit for spindle positioning (bit spindle). 0: Not increased by a factor of 10. (Unit:

degrees/min) 1: Increased by a factor of 10. (Unit:

10 degrees/min) Rapid traverse rate for spindle orientation in the case of an analog spindle

- The feedrate set in parameter No. 1420 takes effect.

- The feedrate set in parameter No. 1428 takes effect. When 0 is set in parameter No. 1428, the value set in parameter No. 1420 takes effect.



- 1602 -


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Diagnosis data indicating the spindle positioning sequence status (spindle)

- None. - Diagnosis No.1544

Diagnosis data indicating the clamp/unclamp sequence status (servo)

- None. - Diagnosis No.5207

B.28 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D In-position check when the Cs contour control mode is off

- The in-position check is not made. - Make a selection using bit 2 (CSNs) of parameter No. 3729.

Bit 2 (CSNs) of parameter No. 3729 When the Cs contour control mode is off, the in-position check is: 0: Made. 1: Not made. When 1 is set in this parameter, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.



Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Position error display for Cs contour control

For the first spindle, diagnosis display No. 418 is used. For the second spindle, diagnosis display No. 420 is used.

For both the first and second spindles, diagnosis display No. 418 (spindle) is used.


- 1603 -

B.29 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of gear stages for each spindle

- The first spindle has four stages. Set the maximum spindle speeds for the individual gears in parameter Nos. 3741 to 3744, respectively.

- The second spindle has two stages. Set the maximum spindle speeds for the individual gears in parameter No. 3811 and 3812.

- Both the first and second spindles each have four stages. Set the maximum spindle speeds for the individual gears in parameter Nos. 3741 to 3744, respectively. (The data type of parameter Nos. 3741 to 3744 is spindle.)

When the override function is used for each axis in multi-spindle control type C, the following spindle override specifications apply during the tapping cycle mode (G84 or G88) or threading mode (G32, G92, or G76).

Spindle override when the override function is used for each axis in multi-spindle control type C

- No function is available to clamp spindle override to 100%. (It does not depend on bit 6 (TSO) of parameter No. 3708.) Modify the ladder code as necessary.

- Depends on bit 6 (TSO) of parameter No. 3708.

Bit 6 (TSO) of parameter No. 3708 During the threading or tapping cycle, spindle override is: 0: Disabled (clamped to 100%). 1: Enabled.


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Spindle command path specification signal

- The spindle command path specification signal SPSP<G536.7> is not available. When selecting a spindle using address P, it is possible to specify the spindle from either path.

- [When SPSP<G536.7> = 0] When selecting a spindle using address P, it is possible to specify the spindle from either path. [When SPSP<G536.7> = 1] When selecting a spindle using address P, it is possible to set the path that can be specified for each spindle.



- 1604 -

B.30 TOOL FUNCTIONS


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of a G code of the 00 group other than G50 (T series) and a T code in the same block

- Not allowed. - Not allowed. Specifying a G code in this way causes alarm PS0245.

T

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of digits of an offset number in a T code command

- Set the value in bit 0 (LD1) of parameter No. 5002.

- Bit 0 (LD1) of parameter No. 5002 is not available. Use parameter No. 5028.

- When 1 is set in bit 2 (LWT) and bit 4 (LGT) of parameter No. 5002, the method of wear compensation is as follows.

Method of wear compensation

Compensation with tool movement Compensation with coordinate shift Offset cancellation by reset

- Select the cancellation operation using bit 3 (LVC) of parameter No. 5006 and bit 7 (TGC) of parameter No. 5003.

Parameter Compensation method LVC="0"

TGC="0" LVC="1" TGC="0"

LVC="0" TGC="1"

LVC="1" TGC="1"

Wear compensationTool

movement Geometry compensation

× ○ (When axis is moved)

× ○ (When axis is moved)

Wear compensation

× ○ × ○ Coordinate shift Geometry

compensation× × * ○

○: Canceled ×: Not canceled The operation marked by “*” differs between Series 0i-C and Series 0i-D. Series 0i-C: × (Not canceled) Series 0i-D: ○ (Canceled)

M

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Behavior when G49 and G40 are specified in the same block

- Make a selection using bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008.

Bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008 When G49 (tool length compensation cancellation) and G40 (cutter compensation cancellation) are specified in the same block: 0: Tool length compensation is canceled

in the next block. 1: Tool length compensation is canceled

in the block in which the command is specified.

- Bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008 is not available. The tool always behaves as when 1 is set in bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008.


- 1605 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of the tool length compensation amount

- Depends on whether the order of compensation amount numbers specified by the H code is that of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, whether the cutter compensation mode is on or off, and the setting of bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001. For details, refer to Section 14.1, "TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION", in "OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64124EN).

- Not dependent on the conditions described at left.

In Series 0i-D, the H code is used to specify the compensation amount number (select the compensation amount), and G43, G44, and G49 are used to select whether to enable or disable tool length compensation. For details, refer to Section 6.1, "TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION", in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL (MACHINING CENTER)" (B-64304EN-2).

Restoration of the tool length compensation vector canceled by specifying G53, G28, or G30 during tool length compensation

- The restoration conditions differ depending on the setting of bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001, as well as on whether the cutter compensation mode is on or off. For details, refer to Section 14.1, "TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION", in "OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64124EN).

- Not dependent on the setting of bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 or the cutter compensation mode. Depends only on the setting of bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001.

Bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 For tool length compensation type A or B, if the tool compensation amount is changed during the offset mode (G43 or G44), the vector is restored in: 0: Subsequent block containing a G43 or

G44 command or a H code. 1: Block buffered next.




- 1606 -

B.31 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Unit and range of tool compensation values

- The unit and range of tool compensation values are determined by the setting unit.

- Set the unit and range using bit 0 (OFA) and bit 1 (OFC) of parameter No. 5042.

Bit 0 (OFA) and bit 1 (OFC) of parameter No. 5042 Select the setting unit and range of tool offset values. Metric input

OFC OFA Unit Range 0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm

Inch input

OFC OFA Unit Range 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch

Automatic conversion of tool compensation values upon inch/metric switch

- Make a selection using bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006.

Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006 Upon inch/metric switch, automatic conversion of tool compensation values is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. If the setting of this parameter is changed, set the tool compensation data again.

- Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006 is not available. Tool compensation values are always converted automatically.

T

Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Number of tool compensation values for each axis during 2-path control

- Up to 64 tool compensation values can be used per path.

- Up to 128 tool compensation values can be used per system. Using parameter No. 5024 whose data type is path, set the number of tool compensation values to be assigned to each path.

NOTE It is possible to increase to 200 tool compensation values by the option.


- 1607 -

Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Tool compensation memory sharing during 2-path control

- Set this item using bit 5 (COF) of parameter No. 8100. All tool compensation memories can be shared by the paths. Note that it is not allowed to share only part of the memories.

Bit 5 (COF) of parameter No. 8100 Paths 1 and 2: 0: Do not share tool compensation

memories. 1: Share tool compensation memories.

- Set this item using parameter No. 5029. The number of tool compensation memories to be shared can be set arbitrarily.



B.32 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of the axis for which the Y axis offset is used

- Make a selection using bit 7 (Y03) of parameter No. 5004.

Bit 7 (Y03) of parameter No. 5004 The Y axis offset is used for: 0: 4th axis. 1: 3rd axis.

- Make a selection using parameter No. 5043.

When 0 or a value outside the data range is set, the Y axis offset is used for the Y axes of the basic three axes (X, Y, and Z).




- 1608 -

B.33 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation

- In Series 0i-D, the cutter compensation C (M series) and tool-nose radius compensation (T series) functions of Series 0i-C are collectively referred to as cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation.

Corner circular interpolation (G39)

M - Enabled by setting 1 in bit 2 (G39) of

parameter No. 5008. T

- Not available.

- Available. It is included in cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation. Since corner circular interpolation (G39) is always enabled, bit 2 (G39) of parameter No. 5008 is not available.

Cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation in MDI operation

- Neither cutter compensation C nor tool nose radius compensation is available in MDI operation.

- Cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation is also available in MDI operation.

Single block stop position during the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

- The single block stop position differs as shown below.

Function to change the compensation direction intentionally (IJ type vector, KI type vector, and JK type vector)

- Not available. - At the start of or during the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, specify I, J, or K in a G00 or G01 block. This makes the compensation vector at the end point of the block perpendicular to the direction specified by I, J, or K. This way, you can change the compensation direction intentionally.

α

Programmed path

L

L L

L

r

r

Cutter/tool nose radius center path L

Workpiece

Series 0i-D single block stop

Series 0i-C single block stop


- 1609 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - If the specified radius value for circular interpolation is smaller than that for cutter

compensation/tool nose radius compensation, as in the example below, performing compensation inwardly through cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation causes overcutting, generating an alarm and stopping the tool. The stop position differs.

Stop position upon an overcutting alarm

[When single block stop occurs in the preceding block in Series 0i-C] Since the tool moves until it reaches the end point of the block (P3 in the figure),

overcutting may result. [When single block stop does not occur in the preceding block in Series 0i-C] The tool stops immediately after executing the block (P2 in the figure). [In the case of Series 0i-D] Since the tool stops at the start point of the block (P1 in the figure), regardless of the

single block state, overcutting can be prevented. Single block stop in a block created internally for cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation

- Not available. - Depends on bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000.

Bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000 In a block created internally for cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation, single block stop is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. This parameter is used to check a program including cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation.

Cutting as programmed causes

Programmed path

Cutter/tool nose radius center path

Workpiece

P1P2

P3

N1

N2

N3


- 1610 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - Set 1 in bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No.

5008. In the example below, an interference check is made on the vectors inside V1 and V4, and the interfering vectors are deleted. As a result, the tool center path is from V1 to V4.

- Not available. (Bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No. 5008 is not available.) To prevent overcutting, the interference check avoidance function (bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No. 19607) is used. In the example below, interference occurs between V1 and V4 and between V2 and V3. Therefore, vectors VA and VB are created. The tool center path is fromVA to VB.

Setting to disable interference checking and to delete interfering vectors

[In the case of Series 0i-C] [In the case of Series 0i-D]

Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

- Always 3 blocks - The number can be set in parameter No. 19625. The specifiable range is 3 to 8 blocks. If the parameter is not set (0 is set), the same number as Series 0i-C (3 blocks) is assumed.

Tool center path

Programmed path

V2V3

V1V4

Tool center path

Programmed pathVA

V2V3

V1

VB

V4


- 1611 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D When circular interpolation is specified that causes the center to coincide with the start or end point during the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

- Alarm PS0038 is issued, and the tool stops at the end point of the block preceding the circular interpolation block.

- Alarm PS0041 is issued, and the tool stops at the start point of the block preceding the circular interpolation block.

- Depends on bit 2 (CCN) of parameter No. 5003.

- Bit 2 (CCN) of parameter No. 5003 is not available. The tool always behaves as when CCN is set to 1.

Behavior when automatic reference position return is specified during the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

[When CCN = 0] The offset vector is canceled when the tool moves to the middle point. Also, the start-up operation is performed from the reference position.

[When CCN = 1 or for Series 0i-D]

The offset vector is not canceled when the tool moves to the middle point; it is canceled when the tool moves to the reference position. Also, the tool moves from the reference position to the next intersection point.

S S

S

S

r

(G42 G01)

Intermediate point

G28

G00

G01

Reference position

S S

S

S

r

(G42 G01)

Intermediate point

G28

G00

G01

Reference position


- 1612 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - Depends on bit 5 (QCR) of parameter

No. 5008. - Bit 5 (QCR) of parameter No. 5008 is

not available. The tool always behaves as when QCR is set to 1.

[When QCR = 0]

[When QCR = 1 or for Series 0i-D]

Travel distance judgment method for circular interpolation in cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation

If the end point is on side A when viewed from the start point, the travel distance is small. If it is on side B, C, or D, the tool has traveled almost one round.

If the end point is on side A of line L connecting the start point and center, the travel distance is small. If it is on side B, the tool has traveled almost one round.

- Connected by linear interpolation. - Depends on bit 2 (CCC) of parameter No. 19607.

Compensation vector connection method when the tool travels around an external corner during the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

[When CCC = 0 or for Series 0i-C] Connect vectors by linear interpolation

[When CCC = 1] Connect vectors by circular interpolation


Virtual tool tip direction and plane selection

- Virtual tool tip directions 1 to 8 can be used only for the G18 (Z-X) plane. When the virtual tool tip direction is 0 or 9, compensation can be performed for the G17 and G19 planes as well.

- All virtual tool tip directions can be used for the G17, G18, and G19 planes.

C

A

B Start point

End point

Center

D

A

B L

Start point

End point

Center


- 1613 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - [Outer surface turning/boring cycle

(G90)] - [Edge cutting cycle (G94)]

- [Outer surface turning/boring cycle (G90)]

- [Edge cutting cycle (G94)]

Tool nose radius center path for tool nose radius compensation in a canned cycle (G90 or G94)

* Numbers 0 to 8 in the figure are virtual tool tip numbers. Start-up/cancellation type of tool nose radius compensation

- The start-up/cancellation type cannot be set.

- Depends on bit 0 (SUP) and bit 1 (SUV) of parameter No. 5003. When SUV and SUP are respectively set to 0 and 1 (type B), the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.



Tool nose radius center path

4,8,3 5,0,7

1,6,2

4,5,1 8,0,6

3,7,2

All tool noses


Programmed path

08

4

5 7

3

1 6 2


08

4

5 7

3

1 6 2

4,5,1 8,0,6

3,7,2

All tool noses

4,8,3 5,0,7

1,6,2

Programmed path



All tool noses


Programmed path

08

4

5 7

3

1 6 2

All tool noses

All tool noses

All tool noses


Programmed path

08

4

5 7

3

1 6 2All tool noses

All tool noses



- 1614 -

B.34 CUSTOM MACRO


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - The default value is <null>. - The default value is 0. Keep-type common

variable (#500 to #999) - The Series 0i-D function (described at

right) is not available. - The range specified by parameter Nos.

6031 and 6032 can be made write-protected (read-only).

System variable to read machine coordinates #5021 to #5025

- Machine coordinates are always read in machine units (output units).

- Machine coordinates are always read in input units. Example) When the setting unit is IS-B, the input unit is the inch, the machine unit is the millimeter, and the coordinate value of the X axis (first axis) is as follows: Machine coordinate = 30.000 (mm) Since the value of #5021 is read in input units (inches), #5021 is 1.1811.

Logical operations in an if statement

- Logical operations can be used by setting 1 in bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006.

Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006 In an if statement in a custom macro, logical operations: 0: Cannot be used. (P/S alarm No. 114

is issued.) 1: Can be used.

- Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006 is not available. Logical operations can always be used.

- The command after the sequence number of the block (to the right of the sequence number) is executed.

- If a move command is specified before the sequence number (left side), alarm PS0128 is issued. If no move command is specified before the sequence number (left side), a block containing a sequence number is executed from the beginning.

Behavior of the GOTO statement when a sequence number is not found at the start of the block

* Use a sequence number at the start of a block. - The program jumps to the block

containing the sequence number. - No jump occurs.

Alarm PS1128 is issued. Behavior of "GOTO 0" when there is a sequence number * Do not use a sequence number. When another NC command is found in a G65 block or in an M code block where a macro is called by an M code Example) G01 X100. G65 P9001 ;

- In a program like the one shown in the example, G01 changes the G code group to 01, while the move command X100. is not executed. X100. is regarded as an argument of G65.

- A program like the one shown in the example cannot be executed. Alarm PS0127 is issued.

A G65 code or an M code that calls a macro must be specified at the beginning of a block (before all other arguments).


- 1615 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - When the machine is run under the conditions and program described below:

[Conditions] ・ Subprogram call by T code is enabled (bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 is set

to 1). ・ The M code that calls subprogram No. 9001 is M06 (parameter No. 6071 is set

to 6). [Program] O0001; T100; (1) M06 T200; (2) T300 M06; (3) M30; %

Behavior when subprogram call using an M code and subprogram call using an T code are done

In FS0i-C, blocks (1) to (3) of the program causes the machine to behave as follows: 1) Calls and executes O9000. 2) Outputs T200 and waits for FIN.

Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the machine calls and executes O9001.

3) Outputs T300 and waits for FIN. Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the machine calls and executes O9001.

In FS0i-D, blocks (1) to (3) of the program causes the machine to behave as follows: 1) Calls and executes O9000. 2) Issues alarm PS1091. 3) Issues alarm PS1091 (when the

program is run with block (2) deleted).

T - Using bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No.

3450, it is possible to select whether the block is treated as an NC statement or a macro statement. Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450

0: Treated as a single-block NC statement without movement. (Single block stop is performed.)

1: Treated as a macro statement. (Single block stop is not performed.)

M

- Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is not available. The block is always treated as a macro statement. (Single block stop is not performed.)

- Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is not available. The block is always treated as a macro statement. (Single block stop is not performed.)

Block containing "M98 Pxxxx" or "M99" without any addresses other than O, N, P, and L

* For details about macro and NC statements, refer to Section 16.4, "MACRO AND NC STATEMENTS", in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64304EN).

Subprogram and macro calls

- The call nesting level differs as follows.

Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Model Call method

Independent nesting level

Total Independent nesting level

Total

Macro call (G65/G66)

4 in all 5 in all

Subprogram call (M98)

4

(G65/G66/M98) 8 in all

10

(G65/G66/M98)15 in all


- 1616 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Local variable clear operation by reset

- Make a selection using bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001.

Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001 When reset, the local variables in the custom macro are: 0: Cleared to <null>. 1: Not cleared.

- Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001 is not available. Local variables are always cleared to <null> when reset.



B.34.4 Miscellaneous Series 0i-D allows you to customize the specifications related to the maximum and minimum variable values and accuracy by using bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008. When 1 is set in bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008, the specifications are the same as Series 0i-C. For details, refer to Section 16, "CUSTOM MACRO", in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64304EN).

B.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Interruption type custom macro in DNC operation

- Not available. - Available.

- When an interruption type custom macro is executed during return operation in dry run after search operation invoked by program restart:

Program restart

The interruption type custom macro is executed after all axes have restarted.

Alarm DS0024 is issued.




- 1617 -

B.36 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D M05 output in a tapping cycle

- Make a selection using bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101.

Bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101 When the rotation direction of the spindle is changed from forward rotation to reverse rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G74 with the M series, or G84/G88 with the T series):

T 0: M05 is not output before output of M04

or M03. 1: M05 is output before output of M04 or

M03. M

0: M05 is output before output of M04 or M03.

1: M05 is not output before output of M04 or M03.

- Make a selection using bit 3 (M5T) of parameter No. 5105.

Bit 3 (M5T) of parameter No. 5105 When the rotation direction of the spindle is changed from forward rotation to reverse rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G74 with the M series, or G84/G88 with the T series): 0: M05 is output before output of M04 or

M03. 1: M05 is not output before output of M04

or M03. NOTE This parameter corresponds to bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101 of Series 0i-C. With the T series, the logic of the values 0 and 1 is opposite from that of Series 0i-C.

Behavior when K0 is specified for the number of repetitions K

T - Make a selection using bit 5 (K0E) of

parameter No. 5102. Bit 5 (K0E) of parameter No. 5102 When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to G89): 0: One drilling operation is performed. 1: Drilling operation is not performed, and

only drilling data is stored.

M - Drilling operation is not performed, and

only drilling data is stored.

- Make a selection using bit 4 (K0D) of parameter No. 5105 for both T series and M series.

Bit 4 (K0D) of parameter No. 5105 When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to G89): 0: Drilling operation is not performed, and

only drilling data is stored. 1: One drilling operation is performed. NOTE With the T series, the logic of the values 0 and 1 is opposite from that of bit 5 (K0E) of parameter No. 5102 of Series 0i-C.

Behavior of the first positioning command (G00) for a Cs contour control axis in a canned cycle

- The behavior can be selected using bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700.

Bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700 After a serial spindle is changed to a Cs contour control axis, the first move command: 0: Performs the normal positioning

operation after executing the reference position return operation.

1: Performs the normal positioning operation.

- While bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700 exists, the normal positioning operation is performed in a canned cycle, regardless of the setting of this parameter bit.


- 1618 -


Retraction in a boring cycle (G85, G89)

- Select the retraction operation using bit 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104.

Bit 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104 The retraction operation in a boring cycle is performed: at 0: Cutting feedrate

In this case, the cutting feedrate of the retraction operation can be multiplied by the override value set in parameter No. 5121. The override value range is 100% to 2000%.

1: Rapid traverse rate In this case, rapid traverse override is also enabled.

- Bit 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104 is not available. The retraction operation is always performed at the cutting feedrate. In this case, the cutting feedrate of the retraction operation can be multiplied by the override value set in parameter No. 5149. The override value range is 1% to 2000%.

Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle

- Set the value in parameter No. 5114. - Set the value in parameter No. 5115.

Drilling axis in the Series 10/11 format

- Y axis cannot be used as a drilling axis.P/S alarm No. 028 is issued.

- Y axis can be used as a drilling axis.

M

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - When the I command (forward/retraction feedrate) is omitted and 0 is set in

parameter Nos. 5172 and 5173, the forward/retraction feedrate is as follows. Forward/retraction feedrate for the small-hole peck drilling cycle (G83)

0 Same feedrate as that specified by the F command

Tool retraction direction in a fine boring cycle (G76) or back boring cycle (G87)

- Set the direction using bit 5 (RD2) and bit 4 (RD1) of parameter No. 5101 in combination.

- Bit 5 (RD2) and bit 4 (RD1) of parameter No. 5101 is not available. Set the direction in axis-type parameter No. 5148.

- In a high-speed peck drilling cycle (G73), peck drilling cycle (G83), and small-hole peck drilling cycle (G83), when the address Q (amount of each-time cutting) command is not specified or Q0 is specified:

Address Q command in a high-speed peck drilling cycle (G73), peck drilling cycle (G83), or small-hole peck drilling cycle (G83)

Select the operation using bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103. Bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103 0: The tool repeats the upward and

downward movement at the same position without cutting.

1: P/S alarm No. 045 is issued.

Bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103 is not available. The tool always behaves as when 1 is set in bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103. (Alarm PS0045 is issued.)

Tool length compensation (G43 or G44) in a canned cycle when tool length compensation type C is selected (1 is set in bit 0 (TLC) of parameter No. 5001)

- Select the axis for which to enable tool length compensation, by using bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006.

Bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006 When tool length compensation (G43 or G44) is specified in a canned cycle, tool length compensation is enabled for: 0: Axis selected according to tool length

compensation type C. 1: Drilling axis.

- Bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006 is not available. The tool always behaves as when 1 is set in bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006.


- 1619 -



B.37 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Machining plane - The plane on which the canned cycle is

performed is always the ZX plane. - The plane on which the canned cycle

ca be selected arbitrarily (including a parallel axis). Note that, with G code system A, an axis whose name is U, V, or W cannot be set as a parallel axis.

Address R setting unit (Address I, J, or K for the Series 10/11 format)

- The setting unit common to all axes is used.

- The setting unit applies to a different axis depending on the machining plane and the command. Second axis of the axes comprising the machining plane for G90 and G92 First axis of the axes comprising the machining plane for G94

Application of tool nose radius compensation

- Refer to Section 4.1.5, "CANNED CYCLE AND TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION" in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T SERIES)" (B-64304EN-1). The differences in specifications are detailed.

Inch threading by address E (Series 10/11 format)

- Threading is performed as the lead threading command of address F.

- Inch threading is performed.








- 1620 -


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D CDZ *CDZ Chamfering signal

name While the name has been changed, the meaning is the same. In either case, setting 0 executes chamfering.


B.38 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Grinding axis specification

T - The grinding axis is always the Z axis.

M - The grinding axis is the X or Z axis.

- Set the grinding axes for the individual canned grinding cycles in parameter Nos. 5176 to 5179. If the same axis number as the cutting axis is specified in any of these parameters, or if a canned grinding cycle is executed when 0 is set, alarm PS0456 is issued.







T

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Exclusive control against the multiple respective canned cycle (standard function)

- When the grinding canned cycle option is specified, the multiple respective canned cycle (standard function) cannot be used.

- When the grinding canned cycle option is specified, select whether to use the multiple respective canned cycle (standard function) or grinding canned cycle, by using bit 0 (GFX) of parameter No. 5106.

Bit 0 (GFX) of parameter No. 5106 When the grinding canned cycle option is specified, the G71, G72, G73, and G74 commands are intended for: 0: Multiple respective canned cycle. 1: Grinding canned cycle.


- 1621 -

M Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Dressing axis specification

- The dressing axis is always the fourth axis.

- Set the dressing axes for the individual canned grinding cycles in parameter Nos. 5180 to 5183. If the same axis number as the cutting axis or grinding axis is specified in any of these parameters, or if a canned grinding cycle is executed when 0 is set, alarm PS0456 is issued.



B.39 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING (T SERIES)

T


Differences common to the Series 0 standard format and Series 10/11 format Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Specifiable plane - The cycle can be specified for a Z-X plane, with the X axis set as the first axis and the Z axis set as the second axis.

- The cycle can be specified for an arbitrary plane selected with the basic three axes and their parallel axes.

Specification for a plane including a parallel axis

- Not allowed. - For G code system A, the cycle can be specified when the name of the parallel axis is other than U, V, or W. (To use U, V, or W as an axis name is not allowed for G code system A.)








- 1622 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Cycle start point return path when the finishing allowance is specified in G71 or G72

- The tool returns directly to the cycle start point.

Finishing allowance

Return to the start point

Cycle start point

- The tool returns to the cycle start point via a point offset by the finishing allowance.

Finishing allowance

Cycle start point

The tool returns to the cycle start point via a point offset by the finishing allowance.

Monotonous increase/decrease check in G71/G72 type I (multiple respective canned cycle for turning)

- Depends on bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102.

Bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102 When any target figure other than monotonous increase or decrease is specified in a multiple respective canned cycle for turning (G71 or G72): 0: An alarm is not issued. 1: Alarm PS0064 is issued.

- Bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102 is not available. If monotonous increase or decrease is not specified for the first axis direction of the plane, alarm PS0064 is issued. If monotonous increase or decrease is not specified for the second axis direction of the plane, alarm PS0329 is issued. Note that, by setting a permissible amount in parameter Nos. 5145 and 5146, it is possible to prevent the alarm from occurring, even if the monotonous increase/decrease condition is not met, as long as the permissible amount is not exceeded.

Monotonous increase/decrease check in G71/G72 type II (multiple respective canned cycle for turning II)

- Not checked. Bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102 does not take effect for multiple respective canned cycle for turning II (type II).

- Always checked. If monotonous increase or decrease is not specified for the first axis direction of the plane, alarm PS0064 is issued. Note that, by setting a permissible amount in parameter No. 5145, it is possible to prevent the alarm from occurring, even if the monotonous increase/decrease condition is not met, as long as the permissible amount is not exceeded.

- Not performed. - [Multiple respective canned cycle for turning I (type I)] Depends on bit 1 (RF1) of parameter No. 5105.

[Multiple respective canned cycle for turning II (type II)] Depends on bit 2 (RF2) of parameter No. 5105.

Roughing after start point return by G71 or G72

Bit 1 (RF1) of parameter No. 5105 In the multiple repetitive canned cycle (T series) (G71/G72) of type I, roughing is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

Bit 2 (RF2) of parameter No. 5105 In the multiple repetitive canned cycle (T series) (G71/G72) of type II, roughing is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.


- 1623 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Retraction operation at the bottom of a hole in G71/G72 type II (multiple respective canned cycle for turning II)

- The tool retracts in the X axis direction after chamfering.

X axis direction

- After chamfering, the tool first retracts in the 45-degree direction and then in the second axis direction of the plane.

45-degree direction

G70 to G76 commands during the tool nose radius compensation mode

- [G70 command] Tool nose radius compensation is performed. [G71 to G73 commands] While tool nose radius compensation is not performed, it is possible to apply tool nose radius compensation partially by setting bit 4 (RFC) of parameter No. 5102.

Bit 4 (RFC) of parameter No. 5102 For a G71 or G72 semi-finished shape or a G73 cutting pattern, tool nose radius compensation is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. [G74 to G76 commands] Tool nose radius compensation is not performed.

- Bit 4 (RFC) of parameter No. 5102 is not available. [G70 to G73 commands] Tool nose radius compensation is performed. [G74 to G76 commands] Tool nose radius compensation is not performed.

Positioning in G70 to G76 cycle operations

- Non-linear type positioning is always used, regardless of the setting of bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401.

- [Start point return by G70] Non-linear type positioning is always used. [Other positioning operations] Depends on bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401.

T code specified in the same block as G74 or G75

- Invalid - Valid

Chamfering and corner R commands and direct drawing dimension programming command for a target figure program

- Cannot be specified. - Can be specified. Note that the last block of the target figure program must not be in the middle of the chamfering, corner R, or direct drawing dimension programming command.

Approach to the threading start point in G76

- Approach by two cycles

Approach by two cycles

Threading

- Approach by one cycle

Approach by one cycle

Threading


- 1624 -

Differences regarding the Series 0 standard format Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Pocketing path in G71/G72 type II (multiple respective canned cycle for turning II)

- The tool moves from one pocket to another for each cut. (The numbers in the figure represent the tool path sequence.)

- The tool completes one pocketing process before proceeding to cut the next pocket. (The numbers in the figure represent the tool path sequence.)

Limitation on the number of pockets in G71/G72 type II (multiple respective canned cycle for turning II)

- Up to 10 pockets can be specified. Specifying 11 or more pockets causes alarm PS0068.

- Not limited.

Number of divisions in G73

- The number of divisions is also 2 for the R1 command. For R2 and subsequent commands, the number of divisions specified by R applies.

- The number of divisions specified by R applies.

Differences regarding the Series 10/11 format

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Pocketing path in G71/G72 type II (multiple respective canned cycle for turning II)

- Depends on bit 2 (P15) of parameter No. 5103. [When P15 = 0] The tool moves from one pocket to another for each cut. (The numbers in the figure represent the tool path sequence.)

[When P15 = 1]

The tool completes one pocketing process before proceeding to cut the next pocket. (See the figure at right.)

- Bit 2 (P15) of parameter No. 5103 is not available. The tool completes one pocketing process before proceeding to cut the next pocket. (The numbers in the figure represent the tool path sequence.)

Limitation on the number of pockets in G71/G72 type II (multiple respective canned cycle for turning II)

- Depends on bit 2 (P15) of parameter No. 5103. [When P15 = 0] Up to 10 pockets can be specified. Specifying 11 or more pockets causes alarm PS0068. [When P15 = 1] Not limited.

- Bit 2 (P15) of parameter No. 5103 is not available. Not limited.

Specification of finishing allowance in G71/G72

- Not allowed. The finishing allowance is ignored if specified.

- Allowed.


- 1625 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of divisions in G73

- The number of divisions is also 2 for the D1 command. For D2 and subsequent commands, the number of divisions specified by D applies.

- The number of divisions specified by D applies.

Address E command in G76

- Threading is performed as the lead threading command of address F.

- Inch threading is performed.


Differences common to the Series 0 standard format and Series 10/11 format

Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - CDZ - *CDZ Chamfering signal

name While the name has been changed, the meaning is the same. In either case, setting 0 executes chamfering.


B.40 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES)

M


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Optional angle chamfering and corner rounding commands for a plane including a parallel axis

- Not available. Alarm PS0212 is issued.

- Available.

Single block operation - Single block stop is not performed at the start point of an inserted optional angle chamfering or corner rounding block.

- Whether to perform single block stop at the start point of an inserted block depends on bit 0 (SBC) of parameter No. 5105.

Bit 0 (SBC) of parameter No. 5105 In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle/corner rounding (T series) or optional angle chamfering/corner rounding cycle (M series): 0: Single block stop is not performed. 1: Single block stop is performed.

Negative value specified in a ,C_ or ,R_ command

- The value is regarded as positive. - Alarm PS0006 is issued.


- 1626 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of dwells to be inserted between two blocks for which to perform optional angle chamfering or corner rounding

- Not limited. - Only one block can be inserted. Inserting more than one block causes alarm PS0051.

DNC operation - Optional angle chamfering and corner rounding are not available in DNC operation.

- Optional angle chamfering and corner rounding are also available in DNC operation.



B.41 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Chamfering and corner rounding commands for a plane other than the Z-X plane

- Not available. Alarm PS0212 is issued.

- Available. The commands can be specified for any plane, even one that includes a parallel axis.

Single block operation - [Chamfering] Single block stop is not performed at the start point of an inserted chamfering block. [Corner rounding] Single block stop is performed at the start point of an inserted corner rounding block.

- [Common to chamfering and corner rounding] Whether to perform single block stop at the start point of an inserted block depends on bit 0 (SBC) of parameter No. 5105.

Bit 0 (SBC) of parameter No. 5105 In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle/corner rounding (T series) or optional angle chamfering/corner rounding cycle (M series): 0: Single block stop is not performed. 1: Single block stop is performed.




- 1627 -

B.42 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of the direct drawing dimension programming command for a plane other than the Z-X plane

- P/S alarm No. 212 is issued. - No alarm is issued. The command can be specified for a plane other than the Z-X plane.

When two or more blocks not to be moved exist between consecutive commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions

- No alarm is issued. - Alarm PS0312 is issued.



B.43 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Parameter No. 6710 The data range of the M code that counts the number of machined parts is as follows.

Data range of the M code that counts the number of machined parts - 0 to 255 - 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)

Parameter No. 6713 The data range of the number of parts required is as follows.

Data range of the number of parts required

- 0 to 9999 - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits) Parameter No. 6711 Number of parts machined

Parameter No. 6712 Total number of parts machined

The data range is as follows.

Data range of the number and total number of parts machined

- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits) - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)


- 1628 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Parameter No. 6750 Integrated value of power-on period

Parameter No. 6752 Integrated value of time during automatic operation

Parameter No. 6754 Integrated value of cutting time

Parameter No. 6756 Integrated value of time when input signal TMRON (G053.0) is on

Parameter No. 6758 Integrated value of one automatic operation time

The data range is as follows.

Data range of the power-on period, time during automatic operation, cutting time, input signal TMRON on time, and one automatic operation time

- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits) - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)



B.44 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Behavior of the manual screen erasure function ("<CAN> + function key") when an alarm is issued

- When an alarm is issued (including one associated with the other path), the manual screen erasure function is enabled. ("<CAN> + function key" erases the screen.)

- When an alarm is issued (including one associated with the other path), the manual screen erasure function is disabled. ("<CAN> + function key" does not erase the screen.)

- When the operation mode is switched while the screen is erased: Redisplay of the screen upon mode switching The screen is not redisplayed.

(The screen remains erased.) Please set "1" to screen clear invalidation signal *CRTOF<G0062.1> to redisplay the screen when operation mode is switched.

The screen is redisplayed.

Function key input when the screen is erased or displayed

- Select the behavior using bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209.

Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209 When a function key is pressed to erase or display the screen for the screen erasure or automatic screen erasure function, the screen change using a function key is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

- Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209 is not available. The tool always behaves as when 1 is set in bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209.

- Set the value in parameter No.3123. Time before the automatic screen erasure function starts The value range is 1 to 255 (minutes). The value range is 1 to 127 (minutes).


- 1629 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - When the external message is input while the screen is erased: Redisplay of the

screen upon external message

The screen is redisplayed. The screen is not redisplayed. (The screen remains erased.) Please set "1" to screen clear invalidation signal *CRTOF<G0062.1> to redisplay the screen when external message is input.



B.45 MEMORY PROTECTION SIGNAL FOR CNC PARAMETER

T


Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Memory protection signal for CNC parameter KEYP, KEY1 to KEY4 <G046.0, G046.3 to G046.6>

- The signal is different for each path. - The signal is common to all paths.

Parameter to enable the KEYP signal

- Enable or disable the signal using bit 7 (PK5) of parameter No. 3292. This is a bit path parameter.

- Enable or disable the signal using bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299. This is a bit system common parameter.


Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Memory protection signal for CNC parameter KEYP, KEY1 to KEY4 <G046.0, G046.3 to G046.6>

See B.45.1, "Differences in Specifications".



- 1630 -

B.46 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)

M

B.46.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series)

B.46.1.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Operation of the current offset for the measurement result

- Added to the current offset. - Select whether to add or subtract, by using bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210.

Bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210 The measurement result of automatic tool length measurement (system M) or automatic tool compensation (system T) is:0: Added to the current offset. 1: Subtracted from the current offset.

Setting of the feedrate for measurement

- Set the value in parameter No. 6241. This is a parameter common to the measuring position reached signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE).

- Parameter No. 6241 This is a parameter for the measuring position reached signals (XAE1 and GAE1).



NOTE When 0 is set in parameter Nos. 6242 and 6243, the value in parameter No. 6241 becomes valid.

Setting of the γ value - Set the value in parameter No. 6251. This is a parameter common to the measuring position reached signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE).






- 1631 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting of the ε value - Set the value in parameter No. 6254.

This is a parameter common to the measuring position reached signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE).





B.46.1.2 Differences in Signals

Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Measuring position reached signal name

XAE, YAE, ZAE XAE1, XAE2, XAE3

G address measuring position reached signals GAE1<Gn517.0, Gn517.1, Gn517.2> to GAE3<Gn517.0, Gn517.1, Gn517.2>


B.46.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display

None.

T

B.46.2 Automatic Tool Offset (T Series)

B.46.2.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Operation of the current offset for the measurement result

- Added to the current offset. - Select whether to add or subtract, by using bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210.

Bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210 The measurement result of automatic tool length measurement (system M) or automatic tool compensation (system T) is:0: Added to the current offset. 1: Subtracted from the current offset.


- 1632 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting of the feedrate for measurement

- Set the value in parameter No. 6241. This is a parameter common to the measuring position reached signals (XAE and ZAE).



NOTE When 0 is set in parameter No. 6242, the value in parameter No. 6241 becomes valid.

Setting of the γ value for the X axis





Setting of the ε value for the X axis





B.46.2.2 Differences in Signals

Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Measuring position reached signal name

XAE, ZAE XAE1, XAE2

G address measuring position reached signals GAE1 and GAE2 <Gn517.0, 1>


B.46.2.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display

None.


- 1633 -

B.47 SKIP FUNCTION


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - Set 1 in bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No.

6200. - Set 1 in bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No.

6200. Setting to enable the high-speed skip signal for normal skip (G31) when the multi-stage skip function is enabled

Parameter to decide on use of the high-speed skip signal

Multi-stage skip

function Command

FS0i-C FS0i-D Disabled G31 (normal skip) HSS HSS

G31 (normal skip) SLS HSS Enabled G31P1 to G31P4 (multi-stage skip) SLS SLS

Target of acceleration/deceleration and servo system delay compensation

- Compensation is performed for the skip coordinates obtained when the high-speed skip signal is set to "1".

- Compensation is performed for the skip coordinates obtained when the skip or high-speed skip signal is set to "1".

Method of acceleration/deceleration and servo system delay compensation

- There are two ways to perform compensation, as follows. [Compensating the value calculated from the cutting constant and servo constant] Set 1 in bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No. 6201. [Compensating the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration] Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No. 6201.

- Bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No. 6201 is not available. There is only one way to perform compensation, as follows. [Compensating the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration] Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No. 6201.

Skip cutting feedrate (normal skip)

- Feedrate specified by the F code in the program

- Depends on bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 The feedrate during the skip function (G31) is: 0: Feedrate specified by the F code in

the program. 1: Feedrate specified in parameter No.

6281.


- 1634 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Skip cutting feedrate (skip using the high-speed skip signal or multi-step skip)

- Feedrate specified by the F code in the program

- Depends on bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 2 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 When the skip function using the high-speed skip signal (1 is set in bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200) or the multi-step skip function is executed, the feedrate is: 0: Feedrate specified by the F code in

the program. 1: Feedrate specified in parameter Nos.

6282 to 6285. Axis to monitor to check whether the torque limit has been reached (torque limit skip)

- Depends on bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201.

Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201 To check whether the torque limit has been reached, the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) monitors: 0: All axes. 1: Only the axis specified in the same

block as G31 P99/98.

- Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201 is not available. Only the axis specified in the same block as G31 P99/98 is monitored.

As the skip signal for the G31 P99 command, the high-speed skip signal: High-speed skip signal input for the G31 P99 command (torque limit skip)

- Cannot be input. - Can be input.

Setting of a positional deviation limit in the torque limit skip command (torque limit skip)

- No parameter is available dedicated to setting a positional deviation limit for the torque limit skip function.

- The value can be set in parameter No. 6287.

Parameter No. 6287 Set a positional deviation limit in the torque limit skip command for each axis.

When G31 P99/98 is specified without a torque limit being specified in advance (torque limit skip)

- The G31 P99/98 command is executed as is. (No alarm is issued.)

- Alarm PS0035 is issued.


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Signal address of skip signal SKIP

- [First path] Fixed to <X004.7>.

T [Second path] Fixed to <X013.7>.

- Depends on bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 The signal assigned to the X address: 0: Has a fixed address. 1: Can be changed to an arbitrary X

address. Set the address assigned by parameter No. 3012.


- 1635 -

T Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

When using tool offset value write signals ±MIT1 and ±MIT2 as skip signals (normal skip)

- Set 1 in bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200.

- Bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200 is not available. The tool offset value write signals cannot be used as skip signals.


B.48 INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T SERIES)

T


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting of the X and Z axes

- It is necessary to set the X axis as the first axis and the Z axis as the second axis.

- It is necessary to set the X axis as the X axis of the basic three axes (set 1 in parameter No. 1022) and the Z axis as the Z axis of the basic three axes (set 3 in parameter No. 1022).

Relationship with arbitrary angular axis control

- By setting 1 in bit 3 (QSA) of parameter No. 5009, the function can be used together with arbitrary angular axis control.

- Cannot be used together with arbitrary angular axis control. The correct value cannot be set for an angular axis under arbitrary angular axis control.

Relationship with composite control

- By setting bit 0 (MXC), bit 1 (XSI), and bit 2 (ZSI) of parameter No. 8160 as appropriate for the machine configuration, the function can be used together with composite control.

- Cannot be used together with composite control. The correct value cannot be set for a composite axis under composite control.


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Tool offset number select signal range

- [1-path system] G39.0 to G39.5 are used. (The maximum tool compensation number that can be selected is 64.) [2-path system] G39.0 to G39.5 (first path) and G1039.0 to G1039.5 (second path) are used. (The maximum tool compensation number that can be selected for each path is 64.)

- [1-path system] G39.0 to G39.5 and G40.0 are used. (The maximum tool compensation number that can be selected is 99.) [2-path system] G39.0 to G39.5 and G40.0 to G40.1 are used. (The maximum tool compensation number that can be selected is 200.)


- 1636 -

Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Signal address of tool offset value write signals ±MIT1 and ±MIT2

- [First path] Fixed to <X004.2 to X004.5>. [Second path] Fixed to <X013.2 to X013.5>.

- Depends on bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 The signal assigned to the X address: 0: Has a fixed address. 1: Can be changed to an arbitrary X

address. Set the address assigned by parameter No. 3019.

When using tool offset value write signals ±MIT1 and ±MIT2 as skip signals

- Set 1 in bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200.

- Bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200 is not available. The tool offset value write signals cannot be used as skip signals.


B.49 PMC AXIS CONTROL


Differences common to 1-path control and 2-path control Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Names of groups that use the signal addresses of the first path (G0xxx and F0xxx)

- Groups A to D Group names A to D are used respectively for each path.

- Groups 1 to 4

Relationship with synchronous control (synchronous control of synchronous/composite control)

- PMC axis control can be applied for any axis other than a synchronous slave axis.

- PMC axis control cannot be applied for any axis under synchronous control.

Relationship with the feed-forward and advanced preview feed-forward functions

- Enable or disable the functions by using bit 7 (NAH) of parameter No. 1819, bit 3 (G8C) of parameter No. 8004, and bit 4 (G8R) of parameter No. 8004 in combination.

- Neither the feed-forward nor advanced preview feed-forward function is available for an axis under PMC axis control. Bit 3 (G8C) and bit 4 (G8R) of parameter No. 8004 are not available.

Data range of rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse (00h), 1st to 4th reference position return (07h to 0Ah), and machine coordinate system selection (20h)

- The data range is as follows. Valid data range IS-A, IS-B IS-C

Unit of data

Millimeter machine 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 mm/minLinear axis

Inch machine 3 to 6000 30 to 4800 inch/minRotation axis 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 deg/min

- 1 to 65535 The data unit is as follows.

Data unit IS-A to IS-C

Unit

Metric machine 1 mm/min Linear axis Inch machine 0.1 inch/min

Rotation axis 1 deg/min


- 1637 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Data range of total moving distance for rapid traverse (00h), cutting feed - feed per minute (01h), cutting feed - feed per revolution (02h), and skip - feed per minute (03h)

- The data range is as follows. Input increment IS-B IS-C Unit

mm unit input deg unit input ±99999.999 ±9999.9999 mm

deginch unit input ±9999.9999 ±999.99999 inch

- The data range is as follows. IS-A IS-B,IS-C

-99999999 to 99999999 (8 digits) -999999999 to 999999999 (9 digits)

The data unit is the minimum setting unit for the corresponding axis. (See the table below.)

S e tt in g u n it

M in im u m d a ta u n it

IS -A 0 .0 1 IS -B 0 .0 0 1 IS -C 0 .0 0 0 1

Data range of cutting feedrate for rapid traverse (01h) and skip - feed per minute (03h)

- 1 to 65535 The specified feedrate must be within the range shown in the table below.

Valid data range IS-B IS-C Unit of

data Millimeter machine 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 mm/min Linear axis

Inch machine 0.01 to 4000.00 0.01 to 480.000 inch/min Rotation axis 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 deg/min

- 1 to 65535

Function to increase the specification unit by a factor of 200 for continuous feed (06h)

- Not available. - By setting 1 in bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004, it is possible to increase the specification unit by a factor of 200.

Bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004 Set the specification unit of feedrate data for specifying the continuous feed command for PMC axis control.

Increment system

Bit 2 (JFM) of No. 8004

Millimeter input

(mm/min) Inch input(inch/min)

Rotation axis

(min-1) 0 1 0.01 0.00023IS-B 1 200 2.00 0.0460 0.1 0.001 0.000023IS-C 1 20 0.200 0.0046

Maximum feedrate for continuous feed (06h)

- When an override of 254% is applied IS-B IS-C Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input

1 time 166458 mm/min

1664.58 inch/min

16645 mm/min

166.45 inch/min

10 times 1664589 mm/min

16645.89 inch/min

166458 0mm/min

1664.58 inch/min

- When override is canceled IS-B IS-C Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input

1 time 65535 mm/min

655.35 inch/min

6553 mm/min

65.53 inch/min

10 times 655350 mm/min

6553.50 inch/min

65535 mm/min

655.35 inch/min

- When an override of 254% is applied IS-B IS-C

Metric input

(mm/min)

Inch input

(inch/min)

Metric input

(mm/min)

Inch input

(inch/min)

1 time 166458 1664.58 16645 166.46

10 times 999000 16645.89 99900 1664.58

200 times 999000 39330.0 99900 3933.0

- When override is canceled IS-B IS-C

Metric input

(mm/min)

Inch input

(inch/min)

Metric input

(mm/min)

Inch input

(inch/min)

1 time 65535 655.35 6553 65.53

10 times 655350 6553.5 65535 655.35

200 times 999000 39330.0 999000 3933.0

The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expressions shown below. The value must be specified as an integer. No finer value may be specified. A calculation is made according to IS-B. Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback

Minimum unit of feedrate for the speed command (10h)

- Fmin = P ÷ 7500 (mm/min) - Fmin = P ÷ 1000 (mm/min) A speed is specified according to the expressions shown below. A calculation is made according to IS-B. F: Speed command (integer) N: Servo motor speed (min-1) P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback

Speed specification in the speed command (10h)

- F = N × P ÷ 7500 (mm/min) - F = N × P ÷ 1000 (mm/min) Setting range of torque data for torque control (11h)

- The setting range is as follows. Valid data range Unit

-99999999 to +99999999 0.0000 1 Nm

- The setting range is as follows. Valid data range Unit

-999999999 to +999999999 (9 digits) 0.0000 1 Nm


- 1638 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Note on executing an absolute command from the program for an axis subject to PMC axis control during automatic operation

- [For Series 0i-D] When you switch to PMC axis control to execute a move command during automatic operation and then switch back to NC axis control to execute an absolute command from the program for the moved axis, that PMC command needs to be executed using a non-buffering M code. For example, when an absolute command is executed in a N40 block after PMC control is applied to Y axis, as in the example below, PMC axis control needs to be executed in a non-buffering M code (N20 block). O0001 ; N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ; N20 M55 ; → Executes PMC axis control for the Y axis. N30 X70. ; N40 Y50. ; N50 M30 ; Execute PMC axis control as follows. 1. After the output of the auxiliary function strobe signal MF for M55, start PMC

axis control. 2. Upon completion of PMC axis control, input the completion signal FIN for M55.

- [For Series 0i-C] Control does not need to be executed using a non-buffering M code.

Acceleration/deceleration control for an axis synchronized with external pulses using external pulse synchronization (0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh)

- Depends on bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002.

Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002 With the external pulse synchronization command for PMC axis control, the acceleration/deceleration of the axis synchronized with external pulses is: 0: Controlled (exponential

acceleration/deceleration). 1: Not controlled.

- Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002 is not available. The acceleration/deceleration of the axis synchronized with external pulses is controlled (exponential acceleration/deceleration).

Inch/metric conversion for a linear axis controlled only by PMC axis control

- Depends on bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003.

Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003 When the axis controlled only by PMC axis control (see parameter No. 1010) is a linear axis, inch/metric input: 0: Influences the axis. 1: Does not influence the axis.

- Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003 is not available. Parameter No. 1010 is not available, either. For a linear axis controlled only by PMC axis control, set rotation axis type B (set 1 in both bit 1 and bit 0 of parameter No. 1006) to avoid the influence of inch/metric input.

Setting to change all axes to CNC axes or PMC axes

- Depends on bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003.

Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003 When 0 is set as the number of CNC control axes (parameter No. 1010), all axes are changed to: 0: CNC axes. 1: PMC axes.

- Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003 is not available. Parameter No. 1010 is not available, either. There is no parameter to change all axes to PMC axes.


- 1639 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D If the PMC issues an axis control command for an axis when the tool is waiting for the auxiliary function completion signal after moving that axis according to a move command and an auxiliary function specified from the CNC side

- Depends on bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004.

Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004 If the PMC issues an axis control command for an axis when the tool is waiting for the auxiliary function completion signal after moving that axis according to a move command and an auxiliary function specified from the CNC side: 0: Alarm PS0130 is issued. 1: The axis control command from the PMC

side is executed.

- Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004 is not available. The axis control command from the PMC side is executed.

If the CNC issues a command for an axis when that axis is being moved by the axis control command from the PMC side

- Depends on bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004.

Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004 If the CNC issues a command for an axis when that axis is being moved by the axis control command from the PMC side: 0: Alarm PS0130 is issued. 1: A command that does not involve

moving the axis is executed without an alarm.

- Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004 is not available. A command that does not involve moving the axis is executed without an alarm. (If the command involves moving the axis, alarm PS0130 is issued.)

Setting of diameter/radius specification for the amount of travel and feedrate when diameter programming is specified for a PMC-controlled axis

- This item is determined by using bit 7 (NDI) of parameter No. 8004 and bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 in combination.

- Bit 7 (NDI) of parameter No. 8004 is not available. The item is determined by bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005.

Bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 In PMC axis control, when diameter programming is specified for a PMC-controlled axis: 0: The amount of travel and feedrate

are each specified with a radius. 1: The amount of travel is specified

with a diameter while the feedrate is specified with a radius.

Individual output of the auxiliary function

- Depends on bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005.

Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005 The individual output of the auxiliary function for PMC axis control function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

- Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005 is not available. The individual output of the auxiliary function for PMC axis control function is enabled.


- 1640 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Function to exert position control for the speed command (10h)

- Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005.

Bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 The speed of PMC axis control is specified by: 0: Speed command. 1: Position command.

- Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005. Note that, for the EVP=1 setting to take effect, 1 must be set in bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007.

Bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 The speed command in PMC axis control is: 0: FS10/11 type. 1: FS0 type.

In-position check for an axis controlled only by PMC axis control

- Depends on bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006.

Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006 In the case of an axis controlled only by PMC axis control (see parameter No. 1010), in-position check is: 0: Performed when no move command is

specified for the PMC axis. 1: Always not performed.

- Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006 is not available. Parameter No. 1010 is not available, either. The check is performed when no move command is specified for the PMC axis. Otherwise, the processing is determined by bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004.

Bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 When the PMC-controlled axis is decelerated, in-position check is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

No in-position check signal for a PMC-controlled axis and no in-position check signals for individual axes

- Depends on bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007.

Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007 For in-position check for a PMC axis, the no in-position check signal NOINPS<G023.5> and no in-position check signals for individual axes NOINP1<G359> to NOINP5<G359> are: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled.

- Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007 is not available. The no in-position check signal NOINPS<G023.5> and no in-position check signals for individual axes NOINP1<G359> to NOINP5<G359> are disabled for in-position check for a PMC axis.

Minimum speed for rapid traverse override in PMC axis control

- Set the value in parameter No. 8021. - Parameter No. 8021 is not available. The minimum speed for rapid traverse override cannot be set.

Operation when instructing in machine coordinate system selection (20h) to the axis to which roll-over is effective

- Depends on bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008.

Bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008 In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction: 0: In which the distance to the target is

shorter. (Specified by the shortest path)

1: Specified by the sign of command value.

- Depends on bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008 and bit 4 (R20) of parameter No.8013.

Bit 4 (R20) of parameter No.8013

0 1

0 Direction of

the shortest path

Direction of

the shortest path Bit 1 (RAB) of

parameter No.10081

Direction of sign of

the amount of the

movement to be made

Direction of sign of the

command value


- 1641 -

T Differences regarding 2-path control

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Relationship with composite control

- PMC axis control can also be applied to axes subject to composite control.

- PMC axis control cannot be applied to axes subject to composite control.

Setting when groups A to D in the path 2 is used

- 1 (group A) to 4 (group D) are set in parameter No. 8010 for the path 2.

- 5 (group A for the path 2) to 8 (group D for the path 2) are set in the axis parameter No. 8010 controlled in the path 2.

Parameter No. 8010 Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - *FV0E to *FV5E - *EFOV0 to *EFOV5 Feedrate override

signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same. - OVCE - EOVC Override cancellation

signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same. - ROV1E, ROV2E - EROV1, EROV2 Rapid traverse

override signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same. - DRNE - EDRN Dry run signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same. - RTE - ERT Manual rapid traverse

selection signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same.



- 1642 -

B.50 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of external alarm messages and message length

- [Number of messages that can be set at a time] Up to 4 messages [Length of a message] Up to 32 characters

- [Number of messages that can be set at a time] Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931 The maximum number of external alarm messages or external operator messages that can be displayed in connection with external data input or external messages is: 0: 4. 1: 16. [Length of a message] Up to 32 characters

Display format of external alarm messages

- [Alarm numbers that can be sent] 0 to 999 [How to distinguish these numbers from general alarm numbers] Add 1000 to the number sent

- Depends on bit 0 (EXA) of parameter No. 6301.

Bit 0 (EXA) of parameter No. 6301 Select the external alarm message specification. 0: The alarm numbers that can be sent

range from 0 to 999. The CNC displays an alarm number, with 1000 added to the number following the character string "EX".

1: The alarm numbers that can be sent range from 0 to 4095. The CNC displays an alarm number, with the character string "EX" added in front of it.

Number of external operator messages and message length

- Depends on bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207.

Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 The external operator message screen can display: 0: Up to 256 characters in up to 1

message. 1: Up to 64 characters in up to 4

messages.

- Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 is not available. [Number of messages that can be set at a time] Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931. Select either up to 4 or 16 messages. [Length of a message] 256 characters or less


- 1643 -

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Display format of external operator messages

- [Message numbers that can be sent] 0 to 999 [How to distinguish these numbers from alarm and other numbers] Messages from 0 to 99 The message is displayed on the screen along with the number. The CNC adds 2000 to this number for distinction. Messages from 100 to 999 Only the message is displayed on the screen without the number.

- Depends on bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301 Select the external operator message specification. 0: The message numbers that can be

sent range from 0 to 999. A message from 0 to 99 is displayed on the screen along with the number. The CNC adds 2000 to this number for distinction. As for the messages from 100 to 999, only the message is displayed on the screen without the number.

1: The message numbers that can be sent range from 0 to 4095. A message from 0 to 99 is displayed on the screen along with the number. The CNC adds the character string "EX" in front of the number. As for the messages from 100 to 4095, only the message is displayed on the screen without the number.

Parameter No. 6310 The data range of external operator message numbers is as follows.

Data range of external operator message numbers

- 0 to 1000 - 0 to 4096 When an external program number search is done with 0 set as the program number

- An alarm is not issued; the search is not done, either.

- Alarm DS0059 is issued.

Input of an external tool offset for an invalid function compensation value

- The input is ignored without issuing an alarm.

- Alarm DS1121 is issued.


- 1644 -


Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Data signals for external data input for external tool offset and external workpiece coordinate system shift

- [Signal address] ED15 to ED0<G001,G000> [Data range] 0 to ±7999

- Depends on bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

Bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 The data for external tool offset and external workpiece coordinate system shift is set using: 0: Signals ED15 to ED0<G001,G000>.

(The specifiable range of tool offset and workpiece coordinate system shift values is 0 to ±7999.)

1: Signals ED31 to ED0<G211,G210,G001,G000>. (The specifiable range of tool offset and workpiece coordinate system shift values is 0 to ±79999999.)

M

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Target compensation value for external tool offset

- Only the wear compensation value for external tool offset can be modified.

- Using the external data input address signal EA2<G002.2,G002.0>, EA0<G002.2,G002.0>, the following compensation values can be modified:[Tool length compensation] Wear compensation value and geometric compensation value [Cutter compensation] Wear compensation value and geometric compensation value



- 1645 -

B.51 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - The calling program is searched from

the beginning, and control is returned to the first block found to have sequence number Nxxxxx.

- The calling program is searched in a forward direction from the block that called the subprogram, and control is returned to the first block found to have sequence number Nxxxxx. If the specified sequence number is not found, the calling program is searched from the beginning, and control is returned to the first block found to have sequence number Nxxxxx.

Example) Main program O0001 ; N100 ; (1) N100 ; (2) M98 P9001 ; N100 ; (3) N100 ; (4) M30 ;

Sub program O9001 ; M99 P100 ;

- [For Series 0i-C] Control is returned to block (1).

- [For Series 0i-D] Control is returned to block (3).

Return from a subprogram to the calling program's block that has a specified sequence number Sequence number search when (M99 Pxxxxx) is executed

WARNING Be sure to avoid writing two or more identical sequence numbers in a program.

Doing so may cause the search to find unintended blocks.



B.52 IN-POSITION CHECK



- 1646 -


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D In-position signals INP1 to INP5 Condition for setting <Fn104.0> to <Fn104.4> to 1

- The signal is set to 1 if the servo error of the corresponding control axis is within the specified limit (in-position range) even when the axis is moving.

- Even if the servo error of the corresponding control axis is within the specified limit (in-position range), the signal is not set to 1 when the axis is moving or there is acceleration/deceleration delay.


B.53 DATA SERVER FUNCTION


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Memory operation mode

- The memory operation mode is not supported.

- In the memory operation mode, the following operations can be performed for a program registered with the data server:

1. Select the program on the data

server as the main program and run it in the memory mode.

2. Call a subprogram or custom macro in the same directory as the main program on the data server.

3. Edit the program, including inserting, deleting, and replacing words.

T

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D In a 2-path system, a simultaneous external subprogram call (M198) of a data server program from both paths is:

Simultaneous call from two paths

- Allowed under the following conditions.[Storage mode] Both paths must use the same work directory. [FTP mode] Both paths must use the same connection host.

- Not allowed. Use the subprogram/custom macro call for the memory operation mode instead.




- 1647 -

B.54 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D 4-slave display function

- By setting 1 in bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960, it is possible to split the screen into four windows, enabling up to four slaves to be displayed.

Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960 When Power Mate CNC Manager is selected, the screen: 0: Displays one slave. 1: Is split into four windows, enabling up

to four slaves to be displayed.

- Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960 is not available. One slave is always displayed. When there is more than one slave, you switch the active slave by using the relevant soft key.



B.55 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Parameter input mode setting

- Specify G10 L50. - Specify G10 L52.




- 1648 -

B.56 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)


Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Address P format when calling a subprogram on the memory card (file number specification/program number specification)

- Depends on bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404.

Bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404 In the external device subprogram call M198, address P is specified using: 0: File number. 1: Program number.

- To call a subprogram, the program number must always be specified in address P. When calling a subprogram on the memory card, the processing is not dependent on the setting of bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404.

If a subprogram called by an external subprogram call specifies a further external subprogram call, the following alarms are issued, respectively:

Multiple call alarm

- Alarm PS0210 - Alarm PS1080 External subprogram call in MDI mode

- Enabled. - Depends on bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630.

Bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630 In MDI mode, an external device subprogram call (M198 command) is: 0: Disabled. (Alarm PS1081 is issued.) 1: Enabled.



B-64303EN-1/02 INDEX NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1008 / Volume 2 : P. 1009 to 1648

i-1

INDEX

<Number> 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ...........................332 2-PATH CONTROL ....................................................578 2-path Functions...........................................................583 8-Level Data Protection Function ..............................1178

<A> Absolute Position Detection...........................................54 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ..............849 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL ....555 Acceleration-Based Speed Control in Circular Interpolation .................................................................521 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) ..763 Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54) (M series) .............................................................................98 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES) / AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES) / AI CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES) .......................1587 ALARM SIGNALS......................................................209 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL....144,1571 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..........................555 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function) ....................................................................1017 Automatic coordinate system setting .............................99 Automatic Corner Override (M Series) ........................511 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ......................................381 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND RETURN FROM THE REFERENCE POSITION ......327 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching.............118 Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .....................121 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series)......1630 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)...................................................................................1260 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)...................................................................................1630 Automatic Tool Offset (T Series)...............................1631 AUXILIARY FUNCTION...........................................682 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK...............................694 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................................682,1598 Available diagnosis number .......................................1448 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control ......113 AXIS CONTROL.............................................................1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .................113,1565 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..120

<B> Backlash Compensation .................................................28 BALANCE CUTTING ................................................602

Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation (M Series) ...............................................565 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation .......................40

<C> CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)..........1111 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)..........1619 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING................1096,1617 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.................................1620 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)................................................................1121 Cautions on 2-path Control ..........................................585 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES) ............................................................1148,1626 Checking input data....................................................1456 Checking the Stored Stroke Limit during the Time from Power–on to the Reference Position Establishment .....194 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ......................197 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES) .......1574 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION ........................432,1583 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output ...............583 CNC READY SIGNALS .............................................179 CNC Screen Dual Display..........................................1203 Command Format.........................................................870 Commands for Feed Per Minute and Feed Per Revolution.....................................................................................849 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...................1220 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT..........................1292 Composite Control .......................................................613 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder............................................................................844 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ....755,1600 Continuous Threading (T Series) .................................447 Controlled Axes Detach .................................................10 CONTROLLED AXIS .....................................................1 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ....................1145 Corner Control .............................................................567 CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE WITHOUT ROTARY DATA .........................................................368 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL.................................797,1602 Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment....818 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip........................815 CUSTOM MACRO...........................................1075,1614 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series) ............................................1027 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION.....................................................1608 Cutting Feedrate Clamp ...............................................499 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD ....................................381 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ..........................452

INDEX B-64303EN-1/02 NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1008 / Volume 2 : P. 1009 to 1648

i-2

<D> DATA SERVER FUNCTION ...................................1646 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING .....................................................1059 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE......................................................................................s-1 DESIGNATION OF SPINDLE AXES ........................701 Diagnosis Display ........................................................867 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .........................................1429 Differences between Pitch Error Compensation, Simple Straightness Compensation, and Gradient Compensation (Reference).....................................................................47 DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C ..........................1560 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) .......................................................1150,1627 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR.....................................................................................425 DISPLAY/SET...........................................................1166 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT.................................................1166 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE339 DNC OPERATION......................................................419 Dry Run........................................................................389

<E> Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals.104 EDIT ..........................................................................1217 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ..................156 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................1407 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ...................................................1407 EMERGENCY STOP ..................................................177 Environment for making trouble diagnosis message..1449 ERROR COMPENSATION ..........................................22 EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING MODE / CUTTING MODE.........................................413 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function ...1411 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function ......1416 Explanation .......................................................1228,1235 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT ........................................................................1390 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE...................................361 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT .............................1377,1642 External Deceleration...................................................516 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL .....................1254 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT.........................................1395 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) ..........1648 External Touch Panel Interface ..................................1188 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH ....1393

<F> Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ..................................572 Feed Per Minute ...........................................................499 Feed per Revolution ...................................................1007 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution ......501

FEEDRATE CONTROL..............................................496 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL....................................496 Feedrate override..........................................................509 Follow-up .......................................................................16 FS10/11 Format Command ..........................................854 FSSB Setting ..................................................................60

<G> G Code List in the Lathe System................................1061 G Code List in the Machining Center System............1063 G CODE SYSTEM ....................................................1061 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT..............................491 Gradient Compensation..................................................37 Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis..............1450

<H> HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...........................448,1584 High Precision and High Speed Functions (Advanced Preview Control (T Series)/AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series)/AI Contour Control (M Series)/AI Contour Control II (M Series))...................................................522 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE.........................697 High-speed Skip Signal ..............................................1274 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ......................................646

<I> I/O Link β MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE ..........276 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...........................377 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is over One Rotation.....................................................375 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is under One Rotation...................................................369 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ...............................1070 Increment System.............................................................4 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES) ................1128 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES) .....................................................................1120 Inner corner automatic override (G62).........................512 In-position check.................................................568,1645 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse570 In-position check signal ...............................................567 Input of tool offset value measured (T Series) ...........1292 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series) ..........................................................................1293,1635 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA .....................................1243 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages ..........1461 Inputting guidance data ..............................................1454 Install..........................................................................1450 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC..............1465 Internal circular cutting feedrate change ......................514 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .................................426 Interruption Type Custom Macro......................1093,1616 Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ......................................505


i-3

<J> JERK CONTROL (M Series).......................................572 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED ...........................256 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table...................................................................................1458

<K> Kind of additional alarm and operator message .........1448

<L> Limitation...................................................................1234 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation .................................................................562 LINEAR INTERPOLATION.......................................430 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53)...........483 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL) ..............................351 LIST OF ADDRESSES .............................................1465 LIST OF SIGNALS ...................................................1502 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)......................1541 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ......................1502 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ........................1523 Local Coordinate System ....................................109,1564 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...............................................................1426 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation ...........576

<M> M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block......887 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block......897 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS............................1448 Machine Coordinate System ..........................................92 Machine Lock ..............................................................388 MACHINE OPERATION MENU .............................1228 MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL..................1235 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION............................................................................235,1574 MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M Series) ..........................................................................241 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER...........1146 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ..........................................1422 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages.....1451 Making a memory card format file.............................1457 Making messages for multi-languages .......................1459 Making sheets for multi-languages ............................1459 Making trouble diagnosis messages ...........................1453 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS...............243 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF ....................1581 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF................................393 MANUAL HANDLE FEED ...............................262,1576 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT ............................271 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE................................279 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN............422 MANUAL OPERATION.............................................256

MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 299,1577 MDI Key Setting ........................................................1219 MEASUREMENT .....................................................1259 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS.............................675 Memory Protection Keys ...........................................1217 Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter 1218,1629 Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223, 723 and 220.........................................................................378 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronization Error Check ...........................................................................119 Mirror Image ..................................................................14 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES)...................................................................................1126 Miscellaneous.............................................................1616 MODE SELECTION ...................................................216 Multi Spindle Control...................................................856 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK695 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING (T SERIES)..............................................1621 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL...........................826,1603 Multi-step Skip...........................................................1279

<N> Name of Axes...................................................................2 NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES) ............................484 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) .....480 Notes .....................................................................866,923 Notes on interface with the PMC .................................880 Notice .........................................................................1461

<O> Offset..........................................................................1011 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ..................................1400 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) ...............................502 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....1408 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......1412 OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS.........246 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping860 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES) ................................1147,1625 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP...............................................................395 Outline...............................................................1433,1448 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis ....................13 Override ................................................................505,851 Override cancel ............................................................511 OVERTRAVEL CHECK.............................................180 Overtravel Signals ........................................................180 Overview...........................................................1228,1235

<P> Parameter ...................................................902,1233,1446 Parameter Check Sum Function .................................1191 Parameters Related to Servo...........................................48 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS................................1069

INDEX B-64303EN-1/02 NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1008 / Volume 2 : P. 1009 to 1648

i-4

PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK...............................593 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ..............................................................1591 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES........................................................................679 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ..........678 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL ......................................665 PATTERN DATA INPUT .........................................1152 PMC AXIS CONTROL ....................................1309,1636 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION...................................1309 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES)............................................................................449,1585 Polygon Turning ..........................................................455 POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES)............................454 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles............................462 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching .......874 Position Switch ..............................................................19 POSITIONING ............................................................426 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ...........................1647 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ........................177 PROGRAM COMMAND..........................................1059 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION...............................1067 PROGRAM RESTART ...............................................397 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ..1647

<R> Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration560 Rapid traverse block overlap........................................559 Rapid traverse override ................................................505 Rapid Traverse Rate.....................................................497 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE .........................1243 Reference Position Established by the G00 Command 361 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..........299 Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed............365 Reference Position Return............................................853 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER .........................................334 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG .....................................................................................320 Related NC parameters .....................................1414,1420 RESET AND REWIND ......................................384,1580 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET.......1421 Restrictions.................................................................1447 RETRACE (M SERIES) ..............................................403 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ......................414 RIGID TAPPING.........................................................843 Rigid Tapping Specification.........................................848 Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor ...............................1002 Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path (T Series (2-ptah Control)) ..........................................................856 Rotary Axis Roll Over .................................................111 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ...................1166,1627

<S> SCALING (M SERIES) .............................................1138

Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure function .............................................................1212,1628 Screen Hard Copy Function .......................................1214 Screen Switching at Path Switching...........................1211 Screen Switching by Mode ........................................1208 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP 397 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ............................1645 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ........719,1599 Series 0i-C-compatible setting .......................................76 Series 0i-D-dedicated setting..........................................60 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed ................................17 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................1429 SETTING EACH AXIS ...................................................2 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable Range.....................................................................................368 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.................1408 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..................1411 SETTING UNIT.........................................................1561 Setting up DHCP........................................................1417 Setting up DNS ..........................................................1416 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function .........................1416 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION................................................................1408 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED AXES .............................................................................48 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS......................................................................92 Signal .........................................................875,1234,1447 Signals for the rigid tapping function...........................875 Signals related to gear switching..................................876 Signals related to S code output ...................................875 Signals related to the addition of multi spindle control 877 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (M SERIES) .......................................................................949 Simple Straightness Compensation (M Series) ..............33 Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing ..................1224 Single Block.................................................................391 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) ............................................................................427,1581 SKIP FUNCTION .............................................1267,1633 Smooth Backlash............................................................30 Software Operator's Panel ..........................................1170 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters ..891 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters ..899 Specifying the Rotation Axis ...........................................7 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increment C.....................................................................................552 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis.....................................................................................572 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor..........................................................................1205 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT ...................................715 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ..970,972 Spindle Indexing Function ...........................................996 SPINDLE ORIENTATION..........................................945 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC.........749


i-5

Spindle Output Control with PMC.............................1008 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING..............................948 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ..............764,1601 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT......................................705 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.....................................722 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) .......................................................................960 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION ...................................700 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) .700 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ...................927 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE ........................1431 START LOCK / INTERLOCK....................................210 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL.......................................222 Stored Pitch Error Compensation..........................22,1562 STORED STROKE CHECK .....................................1572 Stored Stroke Check 1..................................................182 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3..............................................187 Stroke Limit Check Before Move ................................206 Stroke Limit External Setting (M Series) .....................196 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages ...................................................................................1452 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ....................................650 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ..............................................................1596 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES .............................................1421 Synchronization Error Check .......................................118 Synchronization Establishment ....................................116 Synchronous Control....................................................607 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL...................................................................605 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))........1592 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM COMMAND ................................................................663

<T> TANDEM CONTROL.................................................136 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting........................89 TESTING A PROGRAM.............................................388 THREADING ..............................................................435 THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING CYCLE/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CUTTING CYCLE) (T SERIES) .................................................1583 Threading Cycle Retract (Canned Cycle) (T Series)....440 Threading Cycle Retract (Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle) (T Series) ..........................................................443 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification ...........882 Timing of the M code for unclamping (T series) .........901 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode ...........................901 TOOL COMPENSATION .........................................1027 Tool Compensation Memory ............................1022,1606 TOOL FUNCTIONS.........................................1009,1604 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES .........................1021 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES ..........................1009

Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.............1010 Tool Length Compensation ........................................1035 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types.....................1038 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)....1259 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ..................................1042 Tool Offset .................................................................1010 Torque Limit Skip Function .......................................1286 Touch Panel Check Signal .........................................1201 Touch Panel Control...................................................1183 Translating data used with the former series(Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ..............................1461 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ...........................................1433 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen ...............................1443 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen.............................1435 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ..............................1437 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen ...........................1441 Trouble forecast level setting screen (only for servo axis)...................................................................................1444 Two Path Display .......................................................1222 TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ..........................1222

<U> UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION ..........................................225 Uninstall .....................................................................1450

<V> Variable Lead Threading (T Series) .............................447 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL....................223

<W> WAITING M CODES..................................................591 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))...................................................................................1590 When M29 is specified before G84/G74......................883 When M29 is specified before G84/G88......................895 Workpiece coordinate system ...............................94,1563 Workpiece coordinate system preset ..............................97 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series) ..............100 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair ..................................................94 Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input...................................................................................1306

<Y> Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES) ...................................1607

Rev

isio

n R

ecor

d

FAN

UC

Ser

ies

0i-M

OD

EL

D/S

erie

s 0i

Mat

e-M

OD

EL

D C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

MA

NU

AL

(FU

NC

TIO

N) (

B-6

4303

EN

-1)

02

A

ug.,

2010

Tota

l rev

isio

n

01

M

ay, 2

008

Edi

tion

Dat

e C

onte

nts

Edi

tion

Dat

e C

onte

nts

0iD Conn Function 02vol2

Documents

Transcript of 0iD Conn Function 02vol2